The full text on this page is automatically extracted from the file linked above and may contain errors and inconsistencies.
Annual Report ofthe Secretary of the Treasury on the State of the Finances For the Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 1958 -^ TREASURY DEPARTMENT DOCUMENT NO. 3210 Secretary UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT PRINTING O F F I C E , W A S H I N G T O N : 1959 For sale by the Superintendent of Documents. U. S. Government Printing Office Washington 25, D. C. - Price 32.25 (paper cover) CONTENTS Page 1 Transniittal and s t a t e m e n t by t h e Secretary of t h e Treasury R E V I E W O F FISCAL O P E R A T I O N S S u m m a r y of fiscal operations „ Budget receipts a n d expenditures ' Budget receipts in 1958 Estimates of receipts in 1959 and 1960 Budget expenditures in. 1958 Estimates of expenditures in 1959 and 1960 T r u s t account and other transactions Account of t h e Treasurer of t h e United States Public debt operations and ownership of Federal securities Public debt operations Ownership of Federal securities Corporations and certain other business-type activities of t h e United States Government " ., Securities owned by t h e United States Government Taxation developments International financial a n d m o n e t a r y developments 5 7 7 11 17 18 19 21 22 26 33 37 40 41 52 ADMINISTRATIVE R E P O R T S M a n a g e m e n t improvement program Comptroller of t h e Currency, Bureau of t h e Customs, Bureau of Defense Lending, Office of • Engraving and Printing, Bureau of Fiscal Service • Internal Revenue Service International Finance, Officeof Mint, Bureau o f t h e Narcotics, Bureau ofUnited State.s Coast Guard United States Savings Bonds Division United States Secret Service . .: : -_^ ^_-._ 71 76 78 92 94 100 129 138 139 143 147 165 168 EXHIBITS PUBLIC DEBT OPERATIONS AND CALLS OF GUARANTEED OBLIGATIONS Treasury Certificates of I n d e b t e d n e s s , Treasury Notes, and Treasury Bonds Offered and Allotted, and Treasury Bonds Called for Redemption Page 1. Treasury certificates of indebtedness ...... 175 • 2. Treasury n o t e s . • _'_.. 183 3. Treasury bonds - _ - — ___ _-_ 190 4. Call, F e b r u a r y 14, 1958, for redemption on J u n e 15, 1958, of 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1958-63, dated J u n e 15, 1938 (press release of F e b r u a r y 14, 1958) J 200 5. Call, M a y 14, 1958, for redemption on September 15, 1958, of 2K percent Treasury bonds of 1956-59, dated February 1, 1944, and 2 ^ percent Treasury bonds of 1957-59, dated March 1, 1952' (press release of M a y 14, 1958) _-_-i _---'_ : 200 Treasury Bills Offered and Accepted 6. Treasury bills___. III 201 IV CONTENTS United States Savings Bonds Regulations Page 7. Third amendment, July 1, 1957, to Department Circular No. 677, Second Revision, am.ending various provisions affecting the interest rate, investment yield, and the payroll savings plan of United States savings bonds 8. First amendment, December 23, 1957, to Department Circular No. 905, Revised, enlarging the group of investors permitted to buy Series H savings bonds :9. First amendment, December 23, 1957, to Department Circular No. 653, Fourth Revision, enlarging the group of investors permitted to buy Series E savings bonds 10. Eighth Revision, December 26, 1957, of Department Circular No! 530, regulations governing United States savings bonds 209 209 210 212 United States Savings Stamps Regulations 11. Department Circular No. 1008, April 25, 1958, regulations governing Treasury savings stamp agents in selling United States savings stamps at schools 237 Guaranteed Obligations Called 12. Calls for partial redemption, before maturity, of insurance fund debentures 239 Legislation 13. An act temporarily increasing the public debt limit 14. An act to increase the public debt limit ^ 244 244 PUBLIC DEBT MANAGEMENT 15. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, January 17, 1958, before the House Ways and Means Committee in support of H. R. 9955 and H. R. 9956, bills to amend the statutory debt limitation._ 16. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, August 15, 1958, before the Senate Finance Committee in support of H. R. 13580, a bill to amend the statutory debt limitation 17. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, January II, 1958, at the Budget Press Conference, Treasury Department 18. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, February 7, 1958, before the Joint Economic Committee on the January 1958 Economic Report of the President 19. Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, April 7, 1958, at the opening of the "Share in America" savings bonds campaign. New York City, N. Y __20. Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, April 18, 1958, before the American Society of Newspaper Editors, Washington, D. C 1--1 21. Statement by Under Secretary, of the Treasury Baird, February 7, 1958, before the Joint Economic Committee on debt management problems 22. Remarks by Under Secretary of the Treasury Baird, May 9, 1958, at the 38th Annual Conference of the National Association of Mutual Savings Banks, Boston, Mass__ 244 253 257 258 262 265 270 274 TAXATION DEVELOPMENTS 23. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, January 16, 1958, before the House Ways and Means Committee on general revenue matters. 24. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, February 18, 1958, before the Subcommittee on Intergovei-nmental Relations of the House Government Operations Committee 25. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, March 12, 1958, concerning the economic situation 280 282 285 10' CONTENTS ^^ V Page 26. Letter of Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, April 10, 1958, to the Chairmen of the Senate Finance and House Ways and Means Committees concerning permanent legislation for taxation of life insurance companies 27. Letter of the President, May 26, 1958, to the Vice President and the Speaker of the House recommending continuation of corporation and excise tax rates 28. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, May ^28, 1958, before the House Ways and Means Committee concerning extension of corporation-and excise tax rates. _•___ 29. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, June 12, 1958, before the Senate Finance Committee in executive session on continuation of corporation and excise tax rates 30. Miscellaneous revenue legislation enacted by the Eighty-fifth Congress, Second Session ^ :. 285 288 288 289 290 INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL AND MONETARY DEVELOPMENTS 31. Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, January 28, 1958, before the Mississippi Valley World Trade Conference, New Orleans, La . _32. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, March 18, 1958, before the Subcommittee on International Finance of the Senate Banking and Currency Committee on the proposed establishment of an International Development Association. 33. Letter from Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, August 18, 1958, to the President on the adequacy of the resources of the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development __. 34. Letter from the President, August 26, 1958, to Secretary of the Treasury Anderson outlining a three-point program for consideration at the annual meetings in New Delhi of the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development . ... 35. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson as Governor for the United States, October 6, 1958, at the opening joint session of the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development and the International Monetary Fund, New Delhi, India 36. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson as Governor for the United States, October 7, 1958, at the discussion of the Annual Report of the International Monetary Fund, New Delhi, India 37. Statement by Assistant Secretary of the Treasury Coughrah as Temporary Alternate Governor of the International Finance Corporation, October 8, 1958, New Delhi, India 38. Joint announcement by the Treasury Department-, the Department of State, and the Export-Import Bank, January 30, 1958, relating to financial discussions between the United States and France 39;. Statement by Under Secretary of the Treasury Baird, February 18, 1958, before the House Ways and Means Committee in support of the trade agreements program 40. Remarks by Assistant Secretary of the Treasury Coughran, April 3, 1958, at a meeting of the League of Women Voters on financing economic development overseas, San Francisco, Calif 41. Statement by Assistant Secretary of the Treasury Coughran, May 19, 1958, before the Bankers Association for Foreign Trade on financing economic development overseas, Virginia Beach, Va 42. Statement by Assistant Secretary Robbins, June 19, 1958, before the Subcommittee on Economic and Social Affairs of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee in support of a proposed amendment to the International Claims Settlement Act of 1949 43. Press release, August 10, 1957, on the signing of an exchange agreement between the United States and Paraguay ^__ 44. Press release, October 18, 1957, on the signing of an exchange agreement between the United States and Nicaragua. 45. Press releases on extending the exchange agreement between the United States and Bolivia (November 25, 1957, January 2, 1958)._ 292 295 299 300 302 '303 304 305 306 308 312 316 318 318 318 VI CONTENTS Page 46. Press release, December 30, 1957, on the signing of an extension of the stabilization agreement between the United States and Mexico 47. Press release, February 7, 1958, on the signing of a replacement of the exchange agreement between the United States and Peru 48. Press release, April 1, 1958, on an extension of the exchange agreement between the United States and Chile ^ . 49. Press release, April 30, 1958, announcing the revocation of the Egyptian Assets Control Regulations ' 319 319 320 320 ADDRESSES AND STATEMENTS ON OTHER TREASURY POLICIES AND OPERATIONS 50. Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, Chairman of the Federal Representatives, August 9, 1957, at the opening session of the joint Federal-State Action Committee, Hershey, Pa 51. Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, December 2, 1957, before the Advertising Council, New York, N . Y 52. Letter from the Acting Secretary of the Treasury, February 28, 1958, reporting to Congress on the financial condition and fiscal operations of the highway trust fund 53. Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, April 25, 1958, on Law Day, University of Texas, Austin, Tex 54. Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson,, May 21, 1958, at the Governors' Conference, Bal Harbour, Fla 55. Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, September 23, 1958, at the American Ba^nkers Association Convention, Chicago, 111 56. Extracts from remarks by Under Secretary of the Treasury Scribner, February 17, 1958, before the Tax Executive Institute, Washington, D. C :__ 57. Remarks by Under Secretary of the Treasury Scribner, March 28, 1958, at the opening of the Rochester Area Savings Bonds Campaign, Rochester, N. Y..__ . 58. Remarks by Assistant Secretary of the Treasury Kendall, November 14, 1957, before the National Council of Importers, New York, N.Y 59. Statement by Assistant Secretary of the Treasury Flues, March 26, 1958, before the Senate Finance Committee in support of a bill, H . R . 6006, to amend certain provisions of the Antidumping Act 60. Remarks by Assistant Secretary of the Treasury Flues, June 19, 1958, at the National Conference on Keeping America Strong, Washington, D. C 61. Press release, January 28, 1958, announcing the effective date of the Customs Simplification Act of 1956 1 __. 62. Principal provisions of law enacted in 1958 (85th Cong., 2d sess.) relating to acquisition and use of foreign currencies by the United States Government 320 321 324 330 334 338 344 346 350 352 354 356 357 ORGANIZATION AND PROCEDURE 63. Treasury Department orders relating to organization and procedure. _ 359 REPORTING AND ACCOUNTING . 64. Revised regulations and fiscal requirements governing the utilization of imprest funds for small purchases (General Accounting Office Joint Regulation, Supplement 1, July 15, 1957; Department Circular No. 908 (Revised) February 10, 1958) 65. Regulations governing reporting bn contract authorizations (Department Circular No. 993, September 4, 1957) 66. Regulations governing the handling of certificates of deposit for credit in the general account of the Treasurer of the United States (Department Circular No. 945, Supplement 1, Amendment 3, September 11, 1957) . 67. Regulations governing the issuance of substitutes for checks drawn on the Treasurer of the United States (Department Circular No. 1001, December 18, 1957) . 367 371 372 . 374 . CONTENTS VII Page 68. Regulations governing the implementation of the act to improve governmental budgeting and accounting methods and procedures (Department Circular No. 987 (Revised), March 19, 1958) 376 69. Regulations governing the deposit with Federal Reserve Banks and depositary banks of certain taxes (Department Circular No. 848 (Second Revision) May 2, 1958) ____. „ 377. 70. Instructions for reporting Federal grants-in-aid to States and payments to individuals (Department Circular No. 1014, August 8, 1958) 381 TABLES Bases of tables Description of accounts relating to cash operations 385 388 SUMMARY OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 1. Summary of fiscal operations, fiscal years 1932-58 and monthly 1958_. 390 RECEIPTS AND EXPENDITURES 2. Receipts and expenditures, fiscal years 1789-1958 3. Budget receipts and expenditures, monthly for fiscal year 1958 and totals for 1957 and 1958 4. Public enterprise revolving funds, receipts and expenditures for fiscal year 1958, and net 1957 and 1958 5. Trust and other receipts and expenditures, monthly for fiscal year 1958 and totals for 1957 and 1958 . 6. Investments of Government agencies in public debt securities, (net), monthly for fiscal year 1958 and totals for 1957 and 1958--7. Sales and redemptions of obligations of Government agencies in market (net), monthly for fiscal year 1958 and totals for 1957 and 1958 8. Budget receipts by sources and expenditures by major functions, fiscal years 1951-58 9. Trust account and other transactions by major classifications, fiscal years 1951-58 __, . 10. Budget receipts and expenditures, based on existing and proposed legislation, actual for the fiscal year 1958 and estimated for 1959 and I960 11. Trust account and other transactions, actual for the fiscal year 1958 and estimated for 1959 and I960.-12. Effect of financial operations on the public debt, actual for the fiscal year 1958 and estimated for 1959 and 1960 _--_ 13. Internal revenue collections by tax sources, fiscal years 1929-58 14. Customs collections and refunds, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 15. Deposits by the Federal Reserve Banks representing interest charges on Federal Reserve notes, fiscal years 1947-58 16. Postal receipts and expenditures, fiscal years 1916-58 l 17. Cash income and outgo, fiscal years 1950-58 -r-- 392 398 426 428 438 440 442 445 447 451 453 454 460 460 461 462 PUBLIC DEBT, GUARANTEED OBLIGATIONS. ETC. I.—Outstanding 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Principal of the public debt, 1790-1958 -_. 469 Public debt and guaranteed obligations outstanding June 30, 1934-58471 Public debt outstanding by security classes, June 30, 1946-58 472 Guaranteed obligations held outside the Treasury classified by issuing Government corporations and other business-type activities, June . 30, 1946-58 • . 474 Maturity distribution of marketable, interest-bearing public debt and guaranteed obligations, June 30, 1946-58 '. 475 Summary of public debt and guaranteed obligations by security classes, June 30, 1958 -___ 476 Description of public debt issues outstanding June 30, 1958 477 Description of guaranteed obligations held outside the Treasury, * June 30, 1958 492 VIII CONTENTS Page 26. Postal'Savings Systems' deposits and Federal Reserve notes outstanding J u n e 30, 1 9 4 7 - 5 8 - . -__ 27. S t a t u t o r y limitation on the p u b l i c ' d e b t and guaranteed obligations. J u n e 30, 1958 1 .. 28. Changes in the s t a t u t o r y debt limitation, 1941-58 -_.. 493 494 495 II.—^Operations 29. Public debt receipts and expenditures by securit}^ classes, monthly for fiscal year 1958 and totals fof 1957 and 1958 496 30. Changes in public debt issues, fiscal year 1958 504 31. Issues,' maturities, a n d redemptions of interest-bearing public d e b t securities, excluding special issues, July 1957-June 1958 522 32. Allotments by investor classes on subscriptions for marketable issues of Treasury bonds, notes, and certificates of indebtedness, fiscal .years 1954-58, -_-_ -__- . . . 542 33. Certificates of indebtedness, special series, issues and redemptions, fiscal year 1958 544 34. Public debt increases and decreases, and balances in t h e account of the. Treasurer of t h e United States, fiscal years 1916-58 545 35. S t a t u t o r y debt retirements, fiscal years 1918-58-.546 36. Cumulative sinking fund, fiscal years 1921-58 . 547 37. Transactions of t h e cumulative sinking fund, fiscal year 1958 • 548 III.—United States savings bonds 38. S u m m a r y of sales a n d redemptions of savings bonds by series, fiscal years 1935-58 and monthly 1958 549 39. Sales and redemptions of Series E through K savings bonds by series, fiscal years 1941-58 and monthly 1958 550 40. Sales and redemptions of Series E and H savings bonds by denominations, fiscal years 1941-58 and monthly 1958 " 554 41. Sales of Series E and H savings bonds by States, fiscal years 1957, 1958, and curnulative 555 42. Percent of savings bonds sold in each year redeemed through each yearly period thereafter, by denominations 556 IV.—Interest 43. A m o u n t of interest-bearing public debt outstanding, t h e computed annual interest charge, and t h e computed r a t e of interest, June 30, 1916-58, and a t end of each m o n t h during 1958 . 563 44. C o m p u t e d annual interest r a t e and computed annual interest charge on t h e public debt by security classes, June 30, 1939-58 _. 564 45. Interest on t h e public debt by security classes, fiscal years 1955-58-_ 566 46. Interest on t h e public debt and guaranteed obligations, fiscal years 1940-58 classified by tax status . 567 V.—Prices and yields of securities 47. Average yields of taxable long-term Treasury bonds by months, October 1941-June 1958 _--._ — . . 568 48. Prices and yields of marketable public debt issues, June 30, 1957, and J u n e 30, 1958, and price range since first traded 569 VI.—^Ownership pf governmental securities 49. E s t i m a t e d ownership of interest-bearing governmental securities outstanding June 30, 1941-58, by tj^pe of issuer 50. E s t i m a t e d distribution of interest-bearing governmental securities outstanding June 30, 1941-58, by tax status and t y p e of issuer 51. Summary of Treasury survey of ownership of interest-bearing public ; debt and guaranteed obligations, J u n e 30, 1957 and 1958 572 574 576 •CONTENTS IX- ACCOUNT OF THE TREASURER OF THE UNITED STATES Page 52; Assets and liabilities in the account of the Treasurer of the United States, June 30, 1957 and 1958 53. Analysis of changes in tax and loan account balances. _::.: 578 579 STOCK AND CIRCULATION OF MONEY IN THE UNITED STATES 54. Stock of money, money in the Treasury, in the Federal Reserve Banks,'and in circulation, by kinds, June 30, 1958 ._ '55. Stock of money, money iii the Treasury, in the Federal Reserve Banks, andin circulation,'June 30, 1913-58 56. Stock of money, by kinds, June 30, 1913-58 _-__..:_.. 57. Money in circulation, by kinds, June 30, 1913-58 58. Location of gold, silver bullion at monetarv value, and coin held by the Treasury on June 30, 1958 59. Paper currency issued and redeemed during the fiscal year 1958, and outstanding June 30, 1958, by classes and denominations ,. 580 '582 583 584 585 585 TRUST FUNDS AND CERTAIN OTHER ACCOUNTS OF THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT I.—Trust funds Page 60. Holdings of Federal securities by Government agencies and accounts, at par value, June 30, 1947-58... > _ _ 61. Ainsworth Library fund, Walter .Reed General Hospital, June 30, 1958 . 62. Civil service retirement and disability fund, June 30, 1958 63. District of Columbia teachers' retirement and annuity fund, June 30, 1958 64. District of Columbia, Workmen's Compensation Act, relief and rehabilitation, June 30, 1958 __65. District of Columbia other funds—Investments as of June 30, 1957 and 1958-.-. -l: -.____ 66. Employees' life insurance fund. Civil Service Commission, June 30, 1958 __-_: -._-•-_ 67. Federal disability insurance trust fund, June 30, 1958 68. Federal old-age and survivors insurance trust fund, June 30, 1958-_ 69. Foreign service retirement and disability fund, June 30, 1958 70. Highway trust fund, June 30, 1958 i. 71. Judicial, survivors annuity fund, June 30, 1958 72. Library of Congress trust funds, June 30, 1958 -_ 73. Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act, relief and rehabilitation, June 30, 1958 74. National Archives, trust.fund, June 30, 1958 .75. National park trust fund, June 30, 1958 :____• 76. National service life insurance fund, June 30, 1958. _ 77. Pershing Hall Memorial fund, June 30, 1958.... 78. Philippine pre-1934 bonds, payment as of June 30, 1958 79. Public Health Service gift funds, June 30, 1958 80. Railroad retirement account, June 30, 1958. 81. Unemployment trust fund, June 30, 1958 -_ 82. U. S. Government life insurance, fund, June 30, 1958 83. U. S. Naval Academy general gift fund, June 30, 1958 586 590 590 592 593 594 596 597 598 600 601 602 603 604 605 : 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 616 617 II.—Certain other accounts 84. Colorado River Dam fund, Boulder Canyon project, status by operating years ending May 31, 1933 through 1958. _. . 85. Refugee Relief Act of 1953, loan program through June 30, 1958.-- 618 619 FEDERAL AID TO STATES 86. Expenditures for Federal aid to States, individuals, etc.,. fiscal years 1930, 1940, 1950, and 1958 87. Expenditures made by the Government as direct payments to States under cooperative arrangements and expenditures within States which provided relief and other aid, fiscal year 1958 620 628 X:: CONTENTS CUSTOMS STATISTICS , 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. • Page Summary of Customs collections and expenditures, fiscal year 1958.Customs collections and payments by districts, fiscal year 1958 Merchandise entries by number, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 Vehicles and persons entering the United States by number, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 Aircraft and aircraft passengers entering the United States by number, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 ----' Drawback transactions, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 ^ Principal commodities on which drawback was paid, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 -. _--_ Seizures for violations of customs laws, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 Investigative activities, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 - 645 646 648 648 649 650. 650 651 652 ENGRAVING AND PRINTING PRODUCTION 97. Postage stamps dies engraved by the Bureau of Engraving and Printing, fiscal year 1958 -98. Deliveries of finished work by the Bureau of Engraving and Printing, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 653 654 INTERNATIONAL CLAIMS 99. Awards of the Mixed Claims Commission, United States and Germany, certified to the Secretary of the Treasury by the Secretarv of State, through June 30, 1958 I 100. Mexican claims fund as of June 30, 1958 ---_ 101. Yugoslav claims fund as of June 30, 1958. " 656 658 658 GOLD AND CURRENCY TRANSACTIONS AND FOREIGN GOLD AND DOLLAR HOLDINGS 102. United States net gold transactions with foreign countries and international institutions, fiscal years 1952-58 . 103. Estimated gold reserves and dollar holdings of foreign countries as of June 30, 1957 and 1958104. Assets and liabilities of the exchange stabilization fund as of June 30, 1957 and 1958.. ., 105. Summary of receipts, withdrawals, and balances of foreign currencies. acquired by the United States without purchase with dollars, July 1, 1957, to June 30, 1958 -106. Foreign currency balances held by the United States, June 30, 1958. 659 660 662 664 666 INDEBTEDNESS OF FOREIGN GOVERNMENTS 107. Indebtedness of foreign governments to the United States arising from World War I, and payments thereon as of June 30, 1958 108. World War I indebtedness, payments and balances due under agreements between the United States and Germany as of June 30, 1958109. Outstanding indebtedness of foreign countries on United States Government credits (exclusive of indebtedness arising from World War I) as of June 30, 1958, by area, country, and major program. _ 110. Status of accounts under lend-lease and surplus property agreements (World War II) as of June 30, 1958 667 668 669 671 CORPORATIONS AND CERTAIN OTHER BUSINESS-TYPE ACTIVITIES OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT 111. Capital stock, notes, and bonds, of Government agencies held by the Treasury or other Government agencies, June 30, 1957 and 1958, . and changes during 1958^ 674 112. Borrowing authority and outstanding issues of Government corporations and certain other business-type activities whose obligations are issued to the Secretary of the Treasury, June 30, 1958 676 113. Comparative statement of obligations of (government corporations and certain other business-type activities held by the Treasury, June 30, 1948-58 677 114. Description of obligations of Government corporations and certain other business-type activities held by the Treasury, June 30, 1958-. 678 CONTENTS XI Page 115. Comparative statement of the assets, liabilities, and net investment of Government corporations and certain other business-type activities, June 30, 1949-58.__ ., 116. Statement of financial condition of Government corporations and certain other business-type activities, June 30, 1958 ' 117. Income and expense of Government corporations and certain other business-type activities, fiscal year 1958 118. Source and application of funds of Government corporations and certain other business-type activities, fiscal year 1958 119. Restoration of amounts of capital impairment of the Commodity Credit Corporation, pursuant to the act of March 8, 1938, as amended 120. Dividends, interest, and similar earnings received by the Treasury from Government corporations and certain other business-type activities, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 1 682 684 690 692 694 695 GOVERNMENT LOSSES IN SHIPMENT 121. Government losses in shipment revolving fund 696 FEDERAL PERSONAL AND REAL PROPERTY 122. Personal and real property inventory of the United States Government as of June 30, 1956, 1957, and 1958 123. Federa.1 personal and real property inventory by departments and agencies, as of June 30, 1958 697 698 PERSONNEL 124. Number of employees in the departmental and field services of the Treasury Department, quarterly from June 30, 1957, to June 30, 1958 125. Cash awards paid to employees and estimated savings under the incentive awards program, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 700 INDEX 701 - - --- 700 SECRETARIES, UNDER SECRETARIES, AND ASSISTANT SECRETARIES OF THE TREASURY DEPARTMENT FROM JANUARY 21, 1953, TO JANUARY 16, 1959 i Term of service From— Official To- Secretaries of the \Treasury J a n . 21, 1953 July 29, 1957 July 28, 1957 George M. H u m p h r e y , Ohio. Robert B. Anderson, Connecticut. Under Secretaries 2 J a n . 28, 1953 Aug. 3, 1954 Aug. 3, 1955 Aug. 9,.1957 Sept. 30, 1957 July 31, 1955 Sept. 25, 1957 J a n . 31, 1956 Marion B. Folsom, New York. W. Randolph Burgess, Maryland. H . C h a p m a n Rose, Ohio. Fred C. Scribner, Jr., Maine. Julian B. Baird, Minnesota. Assistant Secretaries Jan. Jan. Sept. Aug. Apr. Dec. Dec. Dec. 24, 28, 20, 3, 18, 4, 16, 17, 1952 1953 1954 1955 1957 1957 1957 1958 Feb. 28, 1957 Aug. 2, 1955 Dec. 15, 1957 Aug. 8, 1957 Dec. 15, 1958 Andrew N . Overby, District of Columbia. H . Chapm.an Rose, Ohio. Laurence B. Robbins, Illinois. D a v i d W. Kendall, Michigan. Fred C. Scribner, Jr., Maine. T o m B. Coughran, California. A. Gilmore Flues, Ohio. T. Graydon Upton, Pennsylvania. Deputies to the Secretary Jan.. 21, 1953 Jan. 9, 1957 Aug. 2, 1954 J a n . 15, 1959 W. Randolph Burgess, New York. D a n Throop Smith, Massachusetts. Fiscal Assistant Secretaries Mar. 16, 1945 J u n e 19, 1955 J u n e 17, 1955 E d w a r d F . Bartelt, Illinois. William T. Heffelfinger, District of Columbia. • Administrative Assistant Secretary Aug. 2, 1950 William W. Parsons, California. 1 For officials from September 11, 1789, through Januarj^ 20,1953, see exhibit 55, p. 314, in the 1953 annual report. 2 The positions of an additional Under Secretary and an additional Assistant Secretary were established under the provisions of an act approved July 22,1954 (5 U.S.C. 244, 246). XIII PRINCIPAL ADMINISTRATIVE AND STAFF OFFICERS OF THE TREASURY DEPARTMENT AS OF JANUARY 16, 1959 SECRETARY ROBERT B. ANDERSON Fred C. Scribner, Jr Eugene T. Rossides William W. Parsons James H. Stover Paul McDonald John D. Larson Willard L. Johnson Howard M. Nelson S. T. Adams Nils A. Lennartson Stephen C. Manning, Jr Henry C. Wallich Douglas H. Eldridge Nathan N. Gordon-Francis J. Gafford... Julian B. Baird Charles J. Gable, Jr William T. Heffelfinger Martin L. Moore George F. Stickney ' Under Secretary. Assistant to the Under Secretary. Administrative Assistant Secretary. Head, Management Analysis Staff. Director of Administrative Services. Assistant Director of Administrative Services. Budget Officer. Assistant Budget Ofiicer. Director of Personnel. Assistant to the Secretary (for public affairs). Deputy to Assistant to the Secretary (for public affairs). Assistant to the Secretary. Chief, Tax Analysis Staff. Chief, International Tax Staff. Assistant to the Secretary and Personnel Security Officer. i- Under Secretary for Monetary Affairs. Assistant to the Secretary. Fiscal Assistant Secretary. Assistant to the Fiscal Assistant Secretary. : •-. Technical Assistant to the Fiscal Assistant Secretary (Systems and Methods Staff). Hampton A. Rabon, Jr Technical Assistant to the Fiscal Assistant Secretary. Boyd A. Evans-Technical Assistant to the Fiscal Assistant Secretary. Frank F. Dietrich Technical Assistant to the Fiscal Assistant Secretary. Sidney S. Sokol Technical Assistant to the Fiscal Assistant Secretary. Frank A. Southard, Jr Special Assistant to the Secretary. Robert P. Mayo -_-Chief, Debt Analysis Staff. Laurance B. Robbins Assistant Secretary. Robert W. Benner Assistant to the Assistant Secretary. A. Gilmore Flues Assistant Secretary. James P. Hendrick . Assistant to the Secretary. Myles J. Ambrose Assistant to the Secretary for Law Enforcement. Captain Q. R. Walsh, U.S.C.G.- Aide to the Assistant Secretary. T. Graydon Upton Assistant Secretary. Nelson P. Rose General Counsel. David A. Lindsay-' Assistant to the Secretary and Head, Legal Advisory Staff. XIV PRINCIPAL ADMINISTRATIVE AND STAFF OFFICERS XV OFFICE OF T H E GENERAL COUNSEL Nelson P. Rose Elting Arnold Arch M. Can trail John K. Carlock Jay W. Glasmann John P. Weitzel David A. Lindsay ---_ -- General Counsel. Assistant General -Counsel. Assistant General Counsel. Assistant General Counsel. Assistant General Counsel. Assistant General Counsel. Head, Legal Advisory Staff (Assistant to the Secretary). Associate Head, Legal Advisory Staff. Assistant Head, Legal Advisory Staff." Assistant Head, Legal Advisory Staff. Assistant to the General Counsel. Special Assistant to the General Counsel. Chief Counsel, U.S. Coast Guard. Chief Counsel, Office of the Comptroller of the Currency. Chief Counsel, Bureau of Customs. Chief Counsel, Office of Fiscal Assistant Secretary. ._ Chief Counsel, Foreign Assets Control, ._ Chief Counsel, Internal Revenue Service. . Chief Counsel, Office of International Finance. Chief Counsel, Bureau of Narcotics. Chief Counsel, Bureau of the Public Debt. . .. Raphael Sherfy. 1 Edward C. Rustigan Frederick C. Lusk Hugo A. Ranta Lawrence Lin ville. Kenneth S. Harrison.. Roy T. Englert Robert Chambers George F. Reeves . Edwin F. Rains Arch M. Can trail Elting Arnold Alfred L. Tennyson Thomas J. Winston, Jr OFFICE OF INTERNATIONAL FINANCE George H. Willis Elting Arnold Director. Acting Director, Foreign Assets Control. OFFICE OF THE COMPTROLLER OF THE CURRENOY Ray M. Gidney L. A. Jennings^ W. M. Taylor - G. W. Garwood H. S. Haggard Comptroller of the Currency. First Deputy Comptroller ofthe Currency. Second Deputy Comptroller of the Currency. Third Deputy Comptroller of the Currency. Chief National Bank Examiner. BUREAU OF CUSTOMS Ralph Kelly David B. Strubinger Walter G. Roy C. A. Emerick Lawton M. King Commissioner of Customs. Assistant Commissioner of Customs. Deputy Commissioner of Appraisement Administration. Deputy Commissioner of Investigations. Deputy Commissioner of Management and Controls. Chief, Division of Entry, Value; ;-and Penalties. ' .',;j.\ Chief, Division of Classification and Drawbacks. Chief, Division of Marine Administration. Chief, Division of Technical Services; ^ B. H. Flinn W. E. Higman J. W. Gulick George Vlases, Jr BUREAU OF ENGRAVING AND P R I N T I N G Henry J. Holtzclaw Frank G. Uhler • ..- Director, Bureau of Engraving Printing. Assistant to the Director. and XVI PRINCIPAL ADMINISTRATIVE AND.. STAFF OFFICERS BUREAU OF ACCOUNTS (IN T H E FISCAL SERVICE) Robert W. MaxwelL Harold R. Gearhart--.1 Howard A. Turner Ray T. Bath Commissioner of Accounts. Assistant Commissioner. Deputy Commissioner—Central Accounts. . Deputy Commissioner—Accounting Systems. Deputy Commissioner—Central Reports. Deputy Commissioner—Deposits and Investments. Assistant Commissioner for Administration (Acting). Chief Auditor. Chief Disbursing Officer. Assistant Chief Disbursing Officer. Assistant Chief Disbursing Officer. Technical Assistant.to .the Commissioner. Executive Assistant to the Commissioner. Samuel J. Elson Edmund C. Nussear Roger E. Smith Harold A. Ball Julian F. Cannon-:. Charles 0. Bryant Maurace E. Roebuck George Friedman Louis L. Collie . BUREAU OF T H E PUBLIC DEBT (IN THE FISCAL SERVICE) Edwin L. Kilby Donald M. Merritt Ross A. Heffelfinger, Jr • Charles D. Peyton Commissioner of the Public Debt. Assistant Commissioner. Deputy Commissioner in Charge, Washington Office. Deputy Commissioner in Charge, Chicago Office. OFFICE OF T H E TREASURER OF T H E UNITED STATES (IN T H E FISCAL SERVICE) Ivy Baker Priest William T. HoAvell AVillard E. Scott Treasurer of the United States. Deputy Treasurer. Assistant Deputy Treasurer. . . - I N T E R N A L REVENUE SERVICE Dana Latham 0. Gordon Delk Harry J. Trainor William H. Loeb Harold T. Swartz Bertrand M. Harding Commissioner of Internal Revenue. Deputy Commissioner. Assistant Commissioner (Inspection). Assistant Commissioner (Operations). Assistant Commissioner (Technical). Assistant Commissioner (Planning and Research) (Acting). Adro.inistrative Assistant to the Commissioner. Fiscal Management Officer. Chief Counsel. Director of Practice. Technical Advisor to the Commissioner. Wilber A. Gallahan Gray W. Hume Arch M. Cantrall George C. Lea Leo Speer BUREAU OF T H E M I N T William H. Brett Leland Howard .._ Director of the Mint. Assistant Director. BUREAU OF NARCOTICS Harry J. Anslinger Henry L. Giordano AVayland L. Speer ,-'- Commissioner of Narcotics. Deputy Commissioner. Assistant to the Commissioner. OFFICE OF D E F E N S E L E N D I N G Edward T. Stein Director. PRINCIPAL ADMINISTRATIVE AND STAFF OFFICERS XVII U N I T E D STATES COAST GUARD Vice Admiral Alfred C. Richmond Rear Admiral James A. Hirshfield Captain Walter C. Capron Rear Admiral.Edward H. Thiele Rear Admiral Henry T. Jewell •Rear Admiral' Ira E. Eskridge Rear Admiral Richard M. Ross Captain Paul E. Trimble Commandant, U. S. Coast Guard. Assistant Commandant and Chief of Staff. Deputy Chief of Staff. .: Engineer in Chief. Chief, Office of Merchant Marine Safety. Chief, Office bf Operations. Chief, Office of Personnel. Comptroller. U N I T E D STATES SAVINGS BONDS DIVISION James F. Stiles, Jr Bill McDonald L National Director. Assistant Naitional Director. UNITED STATES SECRET SERVICE U. E. Baughman Russell Daniel E. A. Wildy Michael W. Torina George W. Taylor Chief, U.S. Secret Service. Deputy Chief. Assistant Chief—Security. Chief Inspector. Administrative Officer. TREASURY M A N A G E M E N T C O M M I T T E E William W. Parsons Chairman. Captain Walter C. Capron, U.S.C.G- Member. John K. Carlock Member. Henry L. Giordano Member. Russell Daniel ._ Member. 0. Gordon Delk Member. Harold R. Gearhart Member. Ross A. Heffelfinger, Jr Mem.ber. William T. Heffelfinger Member. Leland Howard Mem.ber. WilHam T. Howell Member. L.A.Jennings Member. Bill McDonald Member. David B. Strubinger Member. Frank G. Uhler Member. TREASURY AWARDS C O M M I T T E E James H. Stover Chairman. S. T. Adams Vice Chairman. Captain Walter C. Capron, U.S.C.G_ Member. John K. Carlock Member. 0. Gordon Delk Member. Leland Howard . Member. Lawton M. King . Member. Martin L. Moore _' Member. Franklin W. Chapin Member. WAGE BOARD S. T. Adams Wilham T. Heffelfinger Willard L. Johnson- .Chairman. Member. Member. I N T E R D E P A R T M E N T A L SAVINGS BOND C O M M I T T E E Ivy Baker Priest Chairman. E M P L O Y M E N T POLICY OFFICER Willard E. Scott. 479641—59 2 •ORGANIZATION OF THE DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY- January 16,1959 UNDER SECRETARY Office \ ofthe ) Secretary/ t i a i to the Secretory for Lo» Enforcement!/ ASSISTANT TO THE SECRETARY ASSISTANT TO THE SECRETARY ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT SECRETARY ASSISTANT TO THE SECRETARY ASSISTANT TO THE SECRETARY dZI Bureau of Engraving and Printing CHART llnternal Revenue | Service Bureau of the Mint Office of the Comptroller of the Currency 1. 1 The General Counsel serves as legal advisor to the Secretary, his associates, and heads of bureaus Revenue^Service^^ ^^^ "^^^^ Enforcement coordinates enforcement activities of the U.S. Secret Service, U.S. Coast.Guard, Bureau of Customs, Bureau of Narcotics, and Internal ANNUAL REPORT ON THE FINANCES TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington J D. C.j January 30, 1959. Sirs: I have the honor to report to you on the finances of the Federal Government for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1958. The decline in economic activity which characterized the greater part of the fiscal year had a strong impact on revenues, which were lower than had been anticipated. As a result, the Federal Government had to close the gap between revenues and expenditures by additional new money borrowing, and this has been necessary also during the current year. With the strong recovery now in process, the Government's, fiscal position should show considerable improvement in the period ahead. ROBERT B . ANDERSON, Secretary oj the Treasury. T o THE P R E S I D E N T OP T H E S E N A T E . T o THE S P E A K E R OF T H E H O U S E OF R E P R E S E N T A T I V E S . - 1 REVIEW OF F I S C A L OPERATIONS Summary of Fiscal Operations Net budget receipts were $69.1 billion and budget expenditures were $71.9 billion in the fiscal year 1958. To finance the deficit of $2.8 billion and to increase the cash balance in the account of the Treasurer of the United States, Treasury borrowing during the year resulted in an increase of $5.8 billion in the public debt. As of June 30, 1958, the public debt outstanding amounted to $276.3 billion as compared with $270.5 billion a year earlier. The following summary outlines the Government's fiscal operations and their effect on the public debt in the fiscal years 1957 and 1958. Budget results: Netreceipts Net expenditures.. Budget deficit, or surplus (•^)Plus: Trust account and other transactions, excess of expenditures, or receipts (—) Change in Treasurer's balance: Increase, or decrease (—) Equals: Public debt increase, or decrease (—) _ 1 Includes net trust account transactions, etc.; net investments by Government agencies in public debt securities; net sales or redemptions of obligations of Government agencies in the market; changes in clearing and other accounts necessary to reconcile to Treasury cash; and changes in amount of cash held outside the Treasury. The President's 1960 Budget Message estimates a balanced budget for the fiscal year 1960. Net budget receipts are estimated at $77.1 billion and expenditures are estimated at $77.0 billion. For the fiscal year 1959 net budget receipts are estimated at $68.0 billion and expenditures at $80.9 billion. Budget receipts in 1958 declined because of the recession in business activity. The business downturn began and ended in the fiscal year 1958. However, because tax collections lag behind the accrual of tax liabilities, especially in the corporate tax area, the impact of the recession was only partially reflected in 1958 revenues. Receipts from all principal tax sources, individual and corporate income taxes and excise taxes, declined in 1958, but the extent of the decline was lessened by the lag in collectioins. The balance of the revenue impact of the recession will be reflected in receipts fof fiscal 3^ear 1959, 5 6 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY C H A R T 2. THE BUDGET $Btl. 80 2.8--^Defictt '55 -Fiscal Years- which will fall below fiscal year 1958 receipts, principally because of the large drop in corporation income taxes. The fiscal year 1960 will be the first year in which receipts will be relatively unaffected by the declines in incomes which occurred during the 1957-58 recession. Expenditures were somewhat higher in 1958 because of antirecession ineasures; procurement was speeded up and programs to aid economic recovery were initiated. Partly because of these programs and partly because of certain large nonrecurring expenditures, budget expenditures are estimated to rise substantially in 1959. However, a decline is anticipated for 1960. '< Since receipts in 1959 are estimated to be lower than in 1958 and expenditures to be higher, the budget deficit in 1959 is estimated to be $12.9 billion as compared with the deficit of $2.8 billion in 1958. The Treasury's cash balance is expected to decline in 1959 from the unusuall}^ high 1958 3^ear-end level. Thus the increase in public debt in 1959 is estimated at $8.7 billion, substantially less than the budget deficit. In 1960 receipjt^ and. expenditures are estimated to be in approximate balance and no change is anticipated in the public debt In that year. One of the important factors in Treasury financing operations is the uneven flow of receipts into the Treasury in the course of a fiscal year, as compared with the relatively stable outflow of expenditures. ' REVIEV^ OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 7 During fiscal 1958 expenditures were almost equally divided between the two halves of the year; receipts, however, were more than $10^ billion greater in the second half. Receipts from the individual income tax, representing tax liability not collected through withholding at the source, and receipts from the corporation income tax are concentrated in the second half of the fiscal year. This is a necessary consequence of the tax payment calendars prescribed by the revenue laws. In the case of un withheld indi^^idual income taxes, this situation is permanent. In the case of the corpora-^ tion income' tax, the situation is partly transitory. I t results from the gradual acceleration of corporation income tax payments in process, which began in fiscal 1956, to provide a transition to a system of quarterly tax payments. The transition will be completed substantially in fiscal 1960. Thereafter, corporation tax receipts will be more evenly divided between the two halves of the year. As already noted, individual income taxes not withheld at the source will also continue to cause some unevenness in the flow of tax receipts. The disparity between the flows into and the flows out of the Treasury due to these two factors will remain an important aspect of the Government'^ financing operations. The effect of these factors on budget operations by quarters is shown below. Period Net budget receipts 1956-1957 1957-1958 Net Budget Surplus, or expend- deficit.(-) budget receipts itures Budget Surplus, or expend- deficit ( - ) itures In billions of dollars July-September October-December • Total first half.'. January-March April—June --'- Total second half , Total fiscal year . _ _ _ 14.7 13.4 16.4 17.4 -1.7 -4.0 28.1 33:8 21.7 21.2 17.4 •18.2 r 43. 0 71.0 . 15.4 13.9 17.9 18.1 -2.5 -4.2 -5.7 29.3 36.0 -6.7 4.3 3.0 -20.6 19.2 17.3 18.6 3.3 6 35.6 7.3 39.8 35.9 3 9 69.4 1.6 69.1 71.9 - 2 8- ' Revised. BUDGET RECEIPTS AND EXPENDITURES BUDGET RECEIPTS IN 1958 Net budget receipts amounted to $69.1 billion in the fiscal year 1958, a decrease of $1.9 billion from the record receipts of $71.0 billion in 1957. The decrease reflected lower corporate profits in the calendar year 1957 than in 1956, and a leveling off in personal income. The further 8 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY sharp fall in corporate profits during the first half of calendar 1958 will be refiected in fiscal year 1959 tax receipts. A comparison of receipts, by major sources, in the fiscal years 1957 and 1958 is shown in the following table. Increase, or decrease (—) 1957 Source 1958 Amount Percent In millions of dollars Internal revenue: Individual income taxes Corporation income taxes Excise taxes Employment taxes Estate and gift taxes - _ ._ Internal revenue not otherwise classified Total internal revenue Customs ___ Miscellaneousreccipts -- - ___ .- , 39,030 21, 531 10, 638 7,581 1,378 15 . 38,569 20, 533 10, 814 8,644 1,411 7 -461 -997 177 1,064 33 -8 -1.2 —4.6 1.7 14.0 2.4 -54. 6 80,172 754 2,749 79, 978 800 3,196 -193 45 447- —.2 6.0 16.2 83, 675 83, 974 298 .4 Deduct: Transfers to: Federal old-age and survivors insurance trust fund _Federal disability insurance trust fund Highway trust fund Railroad retirement account 6,301 333 1,479 616 6,870 863 2,116 575 569 530 637 -41 9.0 158.9 43.1 -6.7 Refunds of receipts: Internal revenue: Individual income taxes . _ Corporation income taxes Excise taxes Employment taxes . Estate and gift taxes Internal revenue not otherwise classified-_ 3,410 364 103 3 13 1 3,845 459 86 4 18 1 435 96 -17 1 5 12.7 26.3 -16.4 40.2 35.9 3,894 20 3 4,413 18 2 Gross budget receipts . Total internal revenue-. Customs Miscellaneous receipts ._ ___ _ Total refunds of receipts, Net budget receipts -._ _ 618 -2 -^1 . 13.3 —10.4 -33.9 3,917 4,433 515 13.2 71,029 69,117 -1,912 -2.7 The income taxes, individual and corporation, declined on both a gross and net basis, that is, before and after deduction of refunds. The corporation income tax drop was the more abrupt. Excise taxes, on the other hand, increased slightly on a gross basis, but were lower in fiscal 1958 than in 1957 after deduction of refunds and the transfer REVIEW OF FISCAL 9 OPERATIONS to the highway trust fund. Customs duties and estate and gift taxes were up by small amounts, and miscellaneous receipts registered a substantial rise. The following discussion is in terms of net changes, after the deduction of refunds and transfers. Individual incorne taxes.—Receipts from individual income taxes amounted to $34,724 mfllion in the fiscal year 1958, a decline of $896 million as compared with receipts of $35,620 mfllion in 1957. Taxes withheld from salaries and wages were actually larger in fiscal 1958, but this gain was converted to a net decline of almost $500 mfllion by a substantial fall in the amount of taxes collected through declarations and final payments, and an increase of over $400 mfllion in refunds of individual income taxes. Corporation income taxes.—Corporation income tax receipts amounted to $20,074 mfllion in fiscal 1958 as compared with receipts of $21,167 mfllion in 1957. The $1,093 mfllion decrease reflected smaller profits in the tax liabflity year 1957 than in 1956, the liabilities which primarily determined receipts in the fiscal years 1957 and 1958. Excise taxes.—Receipts from this source are listed in the following table. Increase, or decrease (—) 1957 1958 Source Amount Percent I n millions of dollars Alcohol taxes _ Tobacco taxes. __ _ _ _ ' _ T a x e s o n d o c u m e n t s , other i n s t r u m e n t s , a n d p l a y i n g cards _ _ __ _ M a n u f a c t u r e r s ' excise taxes R e t a i l e r s ' excise taxes.__ Miscellaneous excise taxes U n d i s t r i b u t e d d e p o s i t a r y receipts a n d u n a p p l i e d collections -Gross excise taxes ___ _' Deduct: R e f u n d s of receipts.._ . _ - _ . Transfer t o h i g h w a y t r u s t fund N e t excise taxes 1 Percentage comparison inappropriate. . 2,973 1,674 2,946 1,734 -27 60 -.9 3.6 108 3,762 336 1,719 109 3,974 342 1,741 2 212 6 23 1.8 5.6 1.6 1.3 66 -33 -99 10, 638 10, 814 177 1.7 103 1,479 86 2,116 -17 637 -16.4 43.1 9, 055 8, 612 -443 -4.9 (1) 10 19 5S REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Gross excise taxes of $10,814 million in 1958 represented an increase of $177 million over 1957. All excise tax sources, with the exception of the alcohol taxes, contributed to the rise with the principal gains coming from the manufacturers' excise taxes and the tobacco taxes. Within these groups, the important gains occurred in the receipts from taxes on gasoline and cigarettes. This gross expansion of excise tax receipts was not reflected in net budget, receipts, however, because of the transfer of certain tax cate. gories to the highway trust fund. Transfers to the highway trust fund increased $637 million in the fiscal year 1958; this increase is exaggerated, however, because the transfers were fully effective in fiscal 1958 but had not been in 1957. Employment taxes.—Receipts from the various emplojonent taxes are shown in the following table. Increase, or decrease (—) 1957 1958 Amount Percent In millions of dollars Federal Insurance Contributions Act and Self-Employment Contributions Act Railroad Retirement Tax Act Federal Unemployment Tax Act Gross employment taxes _. Deduct: Refunds of receipts Transfers to: Federal old-age and survivors insurance trust fund Federal disabiUty insurance trust fund Railroad retirement account Net employment taxes 6,634 616 330 7,733 575 336 7,581 8,644 1,064 14.0 3 4 1 40.2 6,301 333 616 6,870 863 575 569 530 -41 9.0 158.9 -6.7 328 333 16.6 -0.6 1.8 Higher levels of taxable wages and the first full year collection for the Federal disability insurance trust fund account for the increases in the employment taxes. Raflroad Retii'ement Tax Act collections declined because of lower railroad wage payments. Estate and gift taxes.—Receipts from estate and gift taxes amounted to $1,393 million in fiscal 1958, $28 million above receipts of $1,365 million in 1957. Customs.—Customs receipts increased $47 million, reaching $782 mUlion in fiscal 1958: REVIEW OP. FISCAL OPERATIONS . 11 Miscellaneous receipts.—Miscellaneous receipts increased to $3,193 mfllion in fiscal 1958. The growth of $448 million came primarfly from larger interest payments by Government enterprises, increased deposits by the Federal Reserve Board, and higher amounts of recoveries and refunds. ESTIMATES OF RECEIPTS IN 1959 AND 1960 The Secretary of the Treasury is required each 3^ear to prepare and submit in his annual report to Congress estimates of the public revenue for the current fiscal year and for the fiscal year next ensuing (act of February 26, 1907 (5 U. S. C. 265)). The estimates of receipts from taxes and customs for the current and ensuing fiscal years are prepared in December of each year by the Treasury Department. In general, the estimates of miscellaneous receipts are prepared by the agencies depositing the receipts in the Treasury. The estimates are based on the assumption that the expansion in economic activity which resumed in the second quarter of calendar year 1958. and was strongly evident in the third and fourth quarters will continue through the period underlying fiscal year 1960 receipts. I t is also assumed for fiscal year 1960 that legislation wiU be enacted extending corporation income and certain excise tax rates at theh present levels for a year beyond June 30, 1959, as recommended by the President. Budget receipts in the fiscal year 1960 are estimated to be $77.1 bUlion, an increase of $9.1 billion over the amount estimated for the fiscal year 1959 and $8.0 billion over actual receipts of the fiscal year 1958. Receipts in 1960 are thus estimated to attain a record level, exceeding the previous peak of $71.0 bfllion achieved in the fiscal year 1957. Detailed estimates of .budget receipt§ under both existing and proposed legislation are contained in table 10. • •Receipts by major sources Actual receipts for 1958 and estimated receipts for 1959 and 1960 are compared by major sources in the following table. The amount shown for each receipt source is the net amount after deduction of refunds and transfers to trust funds. 12 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY 1958 actual Source 1959 estimate 1960 estimate Increase 1960 over 1959 In millions of dollars Individual income taxes Corporation income taxes Excise taxes ___•. Employment taxes.. Estate and gift taxes.. Taxes not otherwise classified. Customs ._. Miscellaneous receipts Net budget receipts 34, 724 20, 074 8,612 36. 900 17; 000 8,'467 = 40, 700 21,448 . 8,945 333 328 340 1,393 . 6 1, 365 1,415 782 9 840 9 900 3,800 4,448 478 12 50 3,193 3,091 3,343 60 252 69,117 68,000 77,100 •9,100 In the estimates for 1959 and 1960, the individual income tax continues to be, by far, the most important tax source. Revenues from individual income taxes are about double the corporation income tax; together, the two income taxes are estimated to account for more than 80 percent of receipts in 1960. The corporation income tax, although producing substantially less revenue than the individual income tax, provides a larger share of the increase in receipts estimated for fiscal 1960. Receipts from the corporation income tax are estimated to be $4,448 million gTeater in 1960 than in 1959 and thus exceed the substantial rise of $3,800 million estimated for individual income tax receipts. Significant increases in receipts are also estimated for excise taxes and miscellaneous receipts^ prunarily a nontax source. Some increase is expected from all the major revenue sources in 1960. The contribution of each tax source to the increase in net budget receipts in 1960 is substantially different when the comparison is made with the last actual year, 1958, instead of with the estimates for 1959. The individual uicome tax provides almost $6.0 billion of the total increase of $8.0 billion estimated for 1960 over actual receipts in 1958, the corporation income tax accounts for $1.4 bfllion, excise taxes for $0.3 billion, and miscellaneous receipts for $0.2 billion. Estimated budget receipts for 1960 are $6.1 billion greater than the peak level of actual receipts reached in the fiscal year 1957. The estimated rise in receipts from the individual income tax accounts for $5.1 bfllion or 84 percent of the total iacrease. The increase in miscellaneous receipts, of $0.6 billion is next most important. The rise in corporation income tax receipts is less than $300 million. Individual income taxes.—The yield from this source on a gross and net basis is shown in the following table. 13 KEVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 1958 actual Source 1959 estimate 1960 estimate Increase 1960 over 1959 In millions of dollars Individual income taxes: Withheld Other _ Gross individual income taxes T^ess refunds of receipts . , . Net individual income taxes ._ . _ 27,041 11, 528 28,700 12.100 31.900 13,100 3,200 1,000 38, 569 • 3,845 40, 800 3,900 45,000 4,300 4,200 400 34, 724 36,900 40,700 3,800 Individual income tax receipts in 1958 fell $896 million from the level of the preceding year. Reflecting the rise in personal incomes which commenced in the second quarter of the calendar 3^ear 1958, receipts in the fiscal year 1959 are estimated to rise $2,176 mfllion over the depressed 1958 level and to rise further by $3,800 mfllion in fiscal 1960 to a total of $40,700 million. The 1-year increase of $3,800 million estimated for. 1960 exceeds any year-to-3'^ear gain since 1952. But the 2-year rise of $5,976 mfllion for 1959 and 1960 falls short of the $6,873 mfllion reached in 1956 and 1957. Corporation income taxes.—Corporation receipts on a gross and net basis are shown in the following table. 1958 actual Source 1959 estimate 1960 estimate Increase, or decrease ( - ) , 1960 over 1959 In millions of dollars Corporation income taxes Less refunds _ Net corporation income taxes 20, 533 459 17, 650 650 22,048 600 4,398 —50 20,074 17,000 21, 448 4,448 Receipts of corporation income taxes in each fiscal year are determined primarily by corporate profits of the calendar year ending in the fiscal year. Thus receipts in the fiscal year 1959 largely reflect calendar year 1958 profits, and receipts in the fiscal year 1960, calendar year 1959 profits. Corporate profits declined sharply in the fourth quarter of the calendar year 1957 and the first half of the calendar year 1958. Substantial gains have been reported in profits for the third quarter of 1958 and are indicated for the fourth quarter also, but it is expected that the average for the calendar year 1958 wfll be substantially below the calendar year 1957 average. As a result. 14 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY -corporation income tax receipts are estimated to decrease from $20,074 miflion in flscal 1958 to $17,000 million in fiscal 1959. I t is estimated that profits in the calendar year 1959 wfll increase over second half 1958 profits and that the av^erage for 1959 will be substantially greater than the calendar year 1958 average. Receipts in fiscal year 1960 are expected to recoup all of the decrease estimated for fiscal 1959 and to rise to $21,448 million, thus exceeding the 1959 estimate b}^ $4,448 million and actual receipts in 1958 by $1,374 inillion. The 1-year gain estimated for fiscal 1960 exceeds the increase for ^ny actual year not affected by legislation. However, comparisons of fiscal years are obscured by variations in the collections data caused by such factors as the acceleration of payments in the 1951-55 period. I n terms of the profits on which the taxes are levied, the rebound -estimated to occur in calendar year 1959 as compared with 1958 wfll have been exceeded by the proflt recoveries of both calendar years 1950 and 1955. Excise taxes.—The yield of the excise taxes is shown in the following table. 1958 actual Source 1959 estimate 1960 estimate Increase, or decrease ( - ) , 1960 over 1959 I n million s of .dollars Alcohol taxes _ __._ T o b a c c o taxes ._ T a x e s on d o c u m e n t s , other i n s t r u m e n t s , a n d playing cards . _ M a n u f a c t u r e r s ' e x c i s e taxes Retailers' excise taxes ._ Miscellaneous excise taxes U n d i s t r i b u t e d depositary receipts a n d u n a p p l i e d collections -Gross excise taxes _ D e d u c t : '.' R e f u n d s of receipts " " ' . Transfer to h i g h w a y t r u s t f u n d . N e t excise taxes _. • • , .. 2,946 1,734 3,046 1,802 3,119 1,848 73 46 109 3,974 342 1,741 117 3,907 343 1,421 117 5,079 358 1,353 1,172 • 15 -68 -33 51 67 16 10,814 10, 687 11. 941 1, 254 86 2,116 89 2,130 90 2,906 1 776 8,612 8,467 8,945 478 Gross excise taxes, before transfers to the highway trust fund and before refunds, are estimated to amount to $10,687 million in fiscal year 1959, a decline of $127 mfllion from actual receipts in 1958. The loss in receipts from the repeal of the taxes on transportation of property and oU by pipeline, $338 mUlion, and from other legislation of less revenue importance is greater than the overall decline estimated for 1959. In fiscal year 1960 gross excise taxes are estimated to increase by $1,254 million over fiscal year 1959, to a total of $11,941 million. A major part of this increase is due to the proposed increase in the 15 REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS taxes on gasoline and diesel fuel from 3 cents to 4K cents per gallon effective July 1, 1959, almost all of which accrues to the highway trust fund and which therefore will not affect net budget receipts. Increased net budget receipts will result from the proposed new tax on jet fuel of 4K cents per gallon effective July 1, 1959; and from the proposal to retain all revenues from the tax on aviation gasoline in the general fund. • A substantial increase in receipts in 1960 is attributable to the assumption that the increase in business activity which started in 1958 will continue throughout the period affecting 1960 receipts. Receipts from the tax on passenger automobUes are estimated to increase substantially in the fiscal year 1960 as automobUe sales in the calendar years 1959 and 1960 are expected to surpass very appreciably the greatly reduced level of calendar year 1958. Moderate gains are expected in the revenue from the alcohol and tobacco tax groups and from telephone taxes. Increases, some of which are substantial on a relative basis, are estimated for virtually all taxes where . revenues are not adversely affected by legislation. The full year effect of the repeal of the taxes on transportation of property and oil by pipeline, effective'August 1, 1958, causes, in addition to the $338 million decline, from 1958 to 1959, a further decline o i $ 160 million in fiscal 1960. Other legislation is responsible for less important declines in revenue. On a_net basis after deductions for transfers to the highway trust fund and for refunds, net excise taxes are estimated to show a relatively small decline of $145 million in fiscal 1959, but then rise by $478 million to $8,945 million in fiscal year 1960. Employment taxes.—The yield of the employment taxes is shown in the following table. 1959 estimate 1958 actual 1960 estimate Increase 1960 over 1959 Source I n m i l h o n s of dollars F e d e r a l I n s u r a n c e C o n t r i b u t i o n s A c t a n d Self-Employm e n t Contributions Act Railroad R e t i r e m e n t T a x A c t _ -. F e d e r a l U n e m p l o y m e n t T a x Act— Gross e m p l o y m e n t taxes Deduct: • Refunds of receipts Transfers to F e d e r a l old-age a n d sm-vivors insurance t r u s t fund _. __ Transfer to Federal disability i n s u r a n c e t r u s t f u n d . Transfer to railroad r e t i r e m e n t account .. N e t e m p l o y m e n t taxes 479641—59- • 7,733 575 336 8,224 560 332 10,216 575 344 1,992 1512 8,644 9,116 11,135 2,019 4 4 4 6, 870 863 575 7,354 870 560 9,276 940 575 1,922 70 15 333 328 340 12 m 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Receipts from the Federal Insurance Contributions Act and the Self-Employment Contributions Act are estimated to increase by $491 mUlion to $8,224 million in fiscal year 1959 partly because of an estimated increase in the level of taxable wages but principally because ^ of the increase in the tax rate of }i percent each on employers and employees and the increase in the maximum amount taxable from $4,200 to $4,800 effective January 1, 1959. In fiscal 1960 an increase of $1,992 million is estimated as a result of higher income levels, the full-year effect of the January 1, 1959, changes in law, and the part-year effect of a further increase in the tax rate of % percent each on employeis and employees effective January 1, 1960. Small declines and recoveries in 1959 and 1960, respectively, are estimated for receipts from the Railroad Retirement Tax Act and the Federal Unemployment Tax Act. Estate and gift taxes.—The ^deld from estate and gift taxes on a gross and net basis is shown in the following table. 1958 actual Source 1959 estimate 1960 estimate Increase 1960 over 1959 In millions of dollars Estate and gift taxes Less refunds . Net estate and gift taxes _.. 1,411 18 1,380 15 1,430 15 50 1,393 1,365 1,415 50 Receipts are expected to decline somewhat in 1959 and then to increase in 1960. Because of the length of time after date of death permitted in the filing of estate tax returns, receipts do not immediately reflect changes in security and other asset values. Customs.—The yield of receipts from this source on a gross and net basis is shown in the table which follows. Source 1958 actual 1959 estimate 1960 estimate Increase 1960 over 1959 In millions of dollars Customs Less refunds Net customs _ _- 800 18 858 18 918 18 60 782 840 900 60 Customs receipts are estimated to increase in both 1959 and 1960 as taxable imports increase as a result of expanded business activity. Miscellaneous receipts.—Receipts from this source on a gross and net basis are shown in the following table. 17 REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 1958 actual Source 1959 estimate 1960 estimate Increase, or decrease ( - ) , 1960 over 1959 In millions of dollars Miscellaneous receipts Less refunds Net miscellaneous receipts 3,196 2 3,094 3 3,345 2 251 ~1 3,193 3,091 3,343 252 The increase of $252 mfllion in misceUaneous receipts estimated for 1960 is attributable for the most part to larger collections of interest on loans and of dividends and other earnings. I t includes amouuts under proposed legislation to increase charges for Government services which provide special benefits to the recipients. BUDGET EXPENDITURES IN 1958 The net budget expenditures of $71.9 billion during the fiscal 3^ear represented a rise of $2.5 billion above those in 1957. Of the increase, $1.7 biUion was divided about equally between major national security and the three allied expenditures arising mainly from wars and defense against threats of wars: Interest on debt and taxes, veterans' services and benefits, and international affairs and finance. The remainder of the rise was somewhat widety distributed among ^^other" functions^ with the more substantial increases going for aid to housing, public assistance, conservation and development of land and water resources,, postal service, and the promotion of aviation and space flight. Fiscal year Major national security ' International affairs and finance 2 Interest* Veterans' services and benefits Other Total In billions of dollars 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957. 1958 '50.4 ' 46.9 ' 40.6 MO. 6 '43.3 44.1 '2.2 '1.7 '2.2 '1.8 '2.0 2.2 6.6 6.5 6.4 6.8 7.3 7.7 4.3 4.3 4.5 4.8 4.8 5.0 10.8 8.4 10.9 '12.5 12.1 12.8 74.3 67.8 64.6 66.5 69.4 71.9 SovRCJi.—Budget ofthe United States G over nment for the Fiscal Year Ending June SO, 1960. ' Revised to conform to classification in the 1960 Budget document. 1 Includes military defense; development and control of atomic energy; stockpiling and defense production expansion; and military assistance. The last was revised through 1957 to exclude amounts formerly shown as "Defense support." 2 Revised through 1957 to include "Defense support" formerly shown under "Major national security."' Major national security expenditures from the beginning of the administration, since the end of the Korean conflict and especially since 1955, reflect the adjustment of the military machine to the extraordinary, attainments in science and technology which are providing the advanced new weapons. Principal increases in 1958 were 18 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY $623 million for military defense (the mUitary functions of the Department of Defense), and $278 million for the development and control of atomic energy. The 1958 totals for these were respectively, $39,062 million and $2,268 mUlion. As anticipated, veterans' benefits in 1958 continued their gradual net rise which began in 1955. They have tended increasingly, also as expected, to concentrate in payments for compensation and pensions and for hospital and medical care while education and readjustment benefits decline. DetaUs of expenditures for national security and for all other purposes are shown in table 8 for the fiscal years 1951 through 1958. A summary of ''Other" expenditures, which had a net rise of $758 million in 1958, is shown in the following table. Agriculture Labor and and welfare agricultural resources Fiscal year Natural resources General Commerce and government housing Total In billions of dollars 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 ---- -- 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.4 2.9 2.6 4.4 4.9 r4.5 4.4 1.5 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.3 1.5 2.5 .8 1.5 2.0 1.5 2.1 1.5 1.2 1.2 1.6 1.8 1.4 10.8 8.4 10.9 ••12.5 ]2.1 12.8 f Revised. The increase of $654 mUlion for commerce and housing included $279 mUlion for aid to housing, $156 mUlion for the postal service, and $109 million for the promotion of aviation and space flight. Total expenditures for the last amounted to $404 mUlion, which included those attributed to the new Federal Aviation Agency ($277 mUlion) and the new National Aeronautics and Space Administration ($89 mUlion) both established after the close of the fiscal year 1958. Their 1958 expenditures were made for previously existing functions transferred to their jurisdictions. The decline in the outlays for general government is due to the change in the method of making the Government's contribution to the civU service retirement fund, which prior to 1958 was included in this category. - Starting in 1958, this payment is allocated among all employing agencies. ESTIMATES OF EXPENDITURES IN 1959 AND 1960 Actual expenditures for the fiscal year 1958 and estimates for the fiscal years 1959 and 1960 are summarized by agencies in the following table. Further detaUs wUl be found in table 10. The estimates are based on those submitted to the Congress in the Budget oj the United States Government jor the Fiscal Year Ending June SO, 1960. 19 REVIEW OP FISCAL OPERATIONS Actual budget expendiiures for the fiscal year 1958 and estimated expenditures for 1969 and 1960 ]In millions of dollars. On basis of 1960 Budget document] 1958 actual Legislative branch The Judiciary -.. Agriculture Department (including Commodity Credit Corporation). Atomic Energy Commission :. Civil Service Commission Commerce Department... Defense Department: Military functions Civil functions Expansion of defense production. Export-Import Bank of Washington Federal Aviation Agency General Services Administration . Health, Education, and Welfare Department Housing and Home Finance Agency.. Interior Department..., Justice Department Labor Department Mutual security: Military assistance Other mutual security programs... National Aeronautics and Space Administration Post Office Department Small Business Administration. ^ State Departraent --. Treasury Department: Interest on the public debt Other Veterans' Administration _ _ Allowance for contingencies All other _. Net budget expenditui"es.. 1959 1960 estimate estimate 44 4,875 2,268 22 327 119 49 - 7,341 2,630 24 418 152 51 6,450 2,745 23 476 39,062 733 441 340 277 425 2,645 199 666 229 567 40,800 769 288 243 466 428 3,051 1,064 809 252 1,007 40, 945 853 215 a? 560 411 3,140 318 757 259 562 2,187 1,424 89 674 79 206 2,312 1,569 153 752 165 277 1,850 1,648 280 109 168 243 7,607 839 5,098 ""514' 7,500 2,278 5,286 200 621 8,000 900 5,168 100 654 71,936 80,871 77,030 » Excess of credits (deduct). TRUST ACCOUNT AND OTHER TRANSACTIONS Certain financial activities of Government agencies that result in an increase or decrease in the cash balance of the Treasurer of the United States or the cash held outside the Treasurer's account are nonbudgetary in character, i. e., they do not affect the budget surplus or deficit of the Government. These transactions are shown ia Treasury reports under the following classifications: Trust and deposit fund transactions; net investments of Government agencies in public debt securities; and net sales or redemptions of obligations of Government agencies in the market. DetaUs of the transactions in these categories are given in the tables section in tables 5, 6, 7, and 9. The aggregate of these transactions for the fiscal year 1958 was an excess of receipts of $633 million, as compared with $195 million in 1957. Trust and deposit fund accounts As defined under ^'Bases of Tables—Description of Accounts Relating to Cash Operations—Nonbudget Accounts," trust funds are maintained to accoiint for moneys held by the Government for use in carrying out programs in accordance with trust agreements or statutes, 20 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY whUe deposit funds are used to account for moneys held by the Government as banker or agent for others, or to account for funds held in suspense temporarily and later refunded or paid into some other account of the Government. Transactions relating to the majority of trust accounts are reported on a gross basis, while some trust accounts operating as revolving or working funds and deposit fund accounts are reported net. The principal Government trust accounts include: The Federal old-age and survivors insurance trust fund; Federal disability insurance trust fund; the employees' life insurance fund, Civil Service Commission; the veterans' life insurance funds; the civil service retirement and disability funds; the railroad retirement account; the unemployment trust fund; and the highway trust fund. The aggregate of net transactions in trust and deposit accounts for the fiscal year 1958 is an excess of receipts in the amount of $262 miflion, as coinpared with $1,409 million in 1957. Investments of Government agencies in public debt securities (net) Transactions in this classification may involve budgetary and nonbudgetary accounts, but are not included in the classification of the parent account since they have no effect on the operating programs of the fund involved and represent an exchange of assets. The investments in Uiiited States securities, including securities guaranteed by the United States, proyide interest earnings for these accounts and are primarUy made in accordance with statutory provisions which require investment of moneys not needed to meet current expenditures. The aggregate of net investment transactions for the fiscal year 1958 is an excess of purchases in the amount of $197 mUlion, as compared with $2,300 mUlion in 1957. In addition, there were net purchases of securities for the accounts of Government-sponsored enterprises in the amouiit of $460 mUlion during the fiscal year 1958, as compared with $39 mUlion in 1957. Sales and redemptions of obligations of Government agencies in market (net) In this classification also, the transactions may involve budgetary and nonbudgetary accounts but are reported separately from the classification of the parent account. The transactions represent financing operations between the Government agencies and the public and are reported at the par value of the securities. Such financing activity by Government agencies is now confined to nonguaranteed secu- REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 21 rities, except for the debentures issued by the Federal Housing Administration in exchange for foreclosed mortgages, and the redemption of matured guaranteed obligations still outstanding in nominal amounts for which funds are on deposit with the Treasurer of the United States. The aggregate of net transactions for the fiscal, year 1958 is an excess of sales of securities in the amount of $567 mUlion, as compared with $1,085 mUlion in 1957. In addition financing operations of Government-sponsored enterprises during the fiscal j e a r 1958 resulted in excess of redemptions in the amount of $167 million, as compared with $86 million excess of sales in 1957. ACCOUNT OF THE TREASURER OF THE UNITED STATES In the account of the Treasurer of the United States are reported the items of cash or their equivalent and the statutory, liabilities against such items. The assets consist of gold, silver, paper currency, cG^ih,' unclassified collections, and funds of the Government with the Federal Reserve Banks and other depositary banks. Liabilities consist of gold and silver certificates. Treasurer's checks outstanding, funds to the credit of the Board of Trustees of the Postal Savings System, and uncollected items, exchanges, etc. The difference between the assets and liabilities constitutes the balance in the account of the Treasurer. This balance may be classified in two categories: (1) AvaUable operating funds, consisting of the gold balance, available funds on .deposit in Federal Reserve Banks, and the balances in Treasury tax and loan accounts in commercial banks; and (2) funds not immediately available for operating purposes, consisting of the silver balance, other silver bullion, coin and currency, checks in process of collection, and deposits in general or other depositaries. Figures relating to the assets, liabilities, and balance in the Treasurer's account are published in the Daily Statement oj the United States Treasury. A comparative analysis of the assets and liabilities in the account of the Treasurer of the United States, as of June 30, 1957, and June 30, 1958, is shown in table 52. The balance in the account as of June 30, 1958, was $9,749 million, an increase of $4,159 million during the fiscal year. The daUy balances in the. Treasurer's account ranged from a low of $2,581 mUlion on August 15, 1957, to a high of $10,747 mUlion on June 25, 1958. Net change in the balance in the ^'Account of the Treasurer of the 22 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY United States," on basis of the Baily Statement oj the United States Treasury, is accounted for as follows: (/TO millions of dollars) Balance June 30, 1957 ,___Add: Net deposits 82,094 Net increase in gross public debt 5, 816 Certain public debt redemptions included as cash withdrawals below ^ 2, G90 5, 590 90,000 " Total Deduct: Cash withdrawals 83,188 Investments of Government agencies in public debt securities, net 714 Sales of obligations of Government agencies in market, net 48 Accrual of discount on savings bonds and Treasury bills 1,890 * 95,590 85,841 Balance June 30, 1958 9, 749 1 Represents principally discount included in savings bond and Treasury bill redemptions. PUBLIC DEBT OPERATIONS AND OWNERSHIP OF FEDERAL SECURITIES A net increase of $5.8 bUlion in the public debt and guaranteed obligations during the fiscal year brought the total Federal debt outstanding to $276.4 bUlion on June 30, 1958. This increase followed net declines during the two preceding years aggregating $3.8 bUlion which were made possible largely by budget surpluses totaling $3.2 bUlion. During 1958 in contrast, there was a budget deficit of $2.8 bUlion. Of the $5.8 bUlion increase in debt, $2.8 billion can be attributed to the deficit and the remaining $3.0 bUlion increase in debt was reflected in the increase in the Treasury cash balance, which was higher than usual on June 30, 1958. Interest-bearing public issues outstanding increased by $6.8 billion during the fiscal year. In the same period there were decreases of $0.6 billion in special issues to Government investment accounts and $0.4 billion in noninterest-bearing debt. The increase in public issues was accounted for by an increase of $11.0 billion in marketable securities, offset in part.by a decline of $4.2 billion in public nonmarketable issues. The decline in public nonmarketable issues was largely attributable to the turning in for cash of a large volum.e of both matured and unmatured Series F and G savings bonds (which are no longer on sale). The decline in special issue holdings by Government investment accounts reflected the unusually high benefits 23 REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS C H A R T 3. THE PUBLrC DEBT' 1 Including public debt and guaranteed obligations. 2 Excluding. Victory Loan proceeds used to repay debt in 1946. and other payments made from these accounts during the fiscal year, a result, in .part, of increased unemployment claims and, in part, of amendments to the Social Security Act liberalizing benefits of the old-age and survivors insurance. A summary of changes in the debt during the year is shown in the accompanying table. Changes in the level of the debt since 1916 are illustrated in chart 3. Increase, or June 30,1957 June 30,1958 decrease (—) Class of debt Public debt: Interest-bearing: Public issues: Marketable Nonmarketable In billions of dollars 155.7 66.0 166.7 61.8 11.0 -4.2 221.7 46.8 228.5 46.2 6.8 -.6 268. 5 .5 1.5 274.7 .6 1.0 6.2 .1 -.5 Total public debt Guaranteed obligations not owned by the Treasury 270.5 .1 276.3 .1 Total public debt and guaranteed obligations 270.6 276.4 Total public issues -.. Special issues to Government investment accounts Total interest-bearing public debt Matured debt on whicli interest has ceased Debt bearing no interest- *Less than $50 million. - (*) 58 5.8 24 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Progress toward debt management objectives In addition to Treasury new money borrowing required to cover the deficit and to augment Treasury cash balances, a total of $60 billion of marketable Treasury issues (exclusive of regular Treasury bills and tax anticipation issues) reached maturity during the year and required refinancing. Treasury financing in connection with both new money and refunding operations had two broad objectives: To contribute to the growth and stability of the economy and to improve the structure of the debt. During most of the year these objectives were carried forward in an environment of declining economic activity. In the fall of 1957 when economic activity was declining and credit demands were slackening, the Federal Reserve moved from a policy of credit restraint to one of credit ease. This policy of credit ease was continued throughout the remainder of the fiscal year; discount rates at the Federal Reserve Banks were lowered in four steps from 3K percent prevaUing in late August 1957 to 1% percent in effect at the end of the fiscal year. During the preceding fiscal year credit tightness had made the market situation unfavorable for the issuance of long-term bonds. During the fiscal year 1958, however, the Treasury made important progress in lengthening and improving the maturity structure of the debt. .Two issues of bonds of more than 20 years maturity were issued during the year, an exchange offering of a 3K percent 32-year bond issued in the amount of $1.7 bUlion in February 1958, and a 3M percent 26-year 11-month bond issued for cash in the amount of $1.1 billion in June 1958. This addition of $2.9 bUlion to the amount of 20-year and over debt xepresented an increase of about 65 percent in the volume of such debt outstanding during the year. An innovation in the case of the June long-term SYi percent bond was its issuance at a price of lOOK, to yield 3.22 percent. For many years the Treasury has characteristically issued new securities at par rather than at a premium or a discount. Since the coupon rates on new securities are typically stated in terms of an even % of 1 percent, par issuance has sometimes impeded more exact pricing of a new issue in a market where the next lower }^ of 1 percent would make the new issue unattractive and the next higher % would be higher than needed. In addition to the two issues of long bonds, over $23.K bUlion of other bonds and notes having maturities of 4 years or more were issued for cash or in exchange for maturing obligations during the course of the year. At the end of the year the amount of marketable debt within one year of maturity amounted to $67.9 bUlion, as compared with $72.1 bUlion on June 30, 1957, a reduction which was achieved despite an overall increase of almost $6 billion in the public debt during the year. Similarly, the average length of the marketable REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 25 debt to final maturity (partially tax-exempt bonds to first call date) increased from 4 years and 9 months in June 1957 to 5 years and 3 months in June 1958. Thus the Treasury was successful during the year in not only offsetting the effect of the passage of time, which is always operating to shorten the average length of the marketable debt, but in actually lengthening the debt. The structure of the debt at the end of the 1958 fiscal year is shown in chart 4. C H A R T 4. STRUCTURE OF THE PUBLIC DEBT JUNE 30,1958 1 Callable bonds to earliest call date; The composition of the short-term debt influences to a marked extent the amount of market disturbance occasioned by refinancing. Consequently, the Treasury took steps during the year to improve the debt structure in the under-one-year category, as well as working toward debt extension. The most important of these steps was the further scheduling of •debt maturities (other than regular bUls and tax anticipation issues) to fall as largely as possible in the months of February, May, August, and November. This program works in the direction of reducing the number of times each year that Treasury financing interferes with other borrowers such as corporations. States, and municipalities. It\wUl also permit the Treasury to avoid the ^'churning'^ in the money markets on the major quarterly corporate income tax dates and it 26 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY facUitates the effective execution of Federal Reserve monetary policy. At the close of the fiscal year about 69 percent of outstanding marketable Treasury securities maturing within the next 10 years (excluding regular Treasury bUls and tax anticipation securities) had maturity dates falling in these months, as compared with about 56 percent at the end of the previous year and about 10 percent at the end of June 1953. The most significant feature of debt ownership change during the year was caused by the increased tempo of commercial bank purchases of Federal securities. The demand from the banks helped strengthen the price structure of the Government securities market and resulted in the addition of $9 bUlion of Federal securities to commercial banks* portfolios. Another $2}2 bUlion was added to Federal Reserve holdings. Government securities held by private nonbank investors decluied by $6 bUlion: $2 bUlion by nonfinancial corporations, $2 bUlion by individuals, and $2 bUlion by other investors. Individuals stUl remained the largest single group of holders of Federal securities, however. An account of the operations in the public debt and changes in the ownership of Federal securities during the year is given in the pages immediately following. Further detaU on the debt and its ownership is given in the exhibits and tables sections of the Report. PUBUC DEBT OPERATIONS As indicated previously, the Treasury made notable progress during the year in its efforts to lengthen and improve the structure of the debt. In the first major financing of the year, which took place in August 1957, holders of maturing issues were offered a 4 percent 4-year note, redeemable at the option of the holder in 2 years, in addition to a 4 percent 1-year certificate and a 3% percent 4-month certificate. In the next major financing, announced in September 1957, three types of issues were offered for cash: A 4 percent 12-year bond, a 4 percent note maturing in 4 years and 11 months but redeemable at the option of the holder in 2 years and 5 months, and the reopening of the 4 percent 1-year certificate originally issued in August 1957. In November a 3% percent 16-year llK-month bond and a Sji percent 4-year l l ^ - m o n t h note were offered for cash in addition to an exchange offering of a 1-year certificate. The February 1958 exchange offering included, along with a 2 ^ percent 1-year certificate, a 3K percent 32year bond and a 3 percent 6-year bond. Later in February a 3 percent 8-year 5K-nionth bond was issued for cash. In AprU a 2% percent 4-year 10-month note was offered for cash and this was followed by the cash offering of a 3M percent 26-year 11-month bond in June. The June financing also included a 2% percent 6-year 8-month bond REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 27 and a 1)^ percent 11-month certificate, both offered in exchange for maturing obligations. In all, $15.5 bUlion of bonds and notes with maturities in excess of 4 years were issued in exchange for maturing obligations and $11.1 billion of securities in this category were issued for cash. Part of the seasonal needs in the July-December deficit period were met through the issuance of a 264-day tax anticipation bill issued in July (maturing on March 24, 1958) and a 237-day special bill issued in August (maturing on AprU 15, 1958). The tax anticipation issue was repaid out of.the seasonally heavy tax receipts in the spring of 1958, and the special bUl was included in the February refunding. During the first half of the fiscal year seasonal and other cash borrowing brought the public debt very close to the statutory ceiling of $275 bUlion. The amount of debt subject to the statutory limit for the July-December period reached a peak of $274.8 bUlion on December 30. . In an act approved February 26, 1958, a temporary increase of $5 billion was authorized in t h e debt limit then in effect, -bringing the temporary ceiling up to $280 bUlion. The increase was made effective for the period February 26, 1958, through June 30, 1959. A comparison of the statutory debt limit with the public debt outstanding subject to the limit since June 30, 1953, is shown in chart 5. C H A R T 5. PUBLIC DEBT SUBJECT TO LIMIT 28 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY For further detaU on the statutory limit on the public debt and guaranteed obligations as of June 30, 1958, see table 27, and for summary data for earlier years see table 28. The following tables summarize the financing operations during the fiscal year and show the results of the public offerings of marketable notes, certificates of indebtedness, and bills. In the June exchange offering, holders of the securities maturing on June 15, 1958, elected to take $7, 388 million of the 2% percent Treasm y bonds maturing February 15, 1965, an amount in excess of the anticipated exchanges at the time of the offering. The weight of an issue of this size, with large acquisitions b}^ temporary holders, exerted Public offerings of marketable Treasury securities excluding refinancing, of regular weekly bills, fiscal year 1958 [In millions of dollars] Date of issue 1957 Apr. 1 Aug. 1 Aug. 1 Aug. 1 Aug. 1« Sept. 26 Oct. 1 Oct. 1 Nov. 29 Dec. 1 Dec. 2 Description of security and maturity date Issued for cash Issued in exchange for other securities Total issued BONDS, NOTES, AND CERTIFICATES OF INDEBTEDNESS 1H% exchange note—April 1,1962 i. SH% certificate—Dec. 1,1957 4% certificate—Aug. 1, 1958 4% note—Aug. 1,1961 K.. 4% certificate—Aug. 1,1958 4% riote—Aug. 15, 1962 6 -4% bond—Oct. 1,19691}6% exchange note—Oct. 1,1962 i. 3 ^ % note—Nov. 15,1962 3M% certificate—Dec. 1,1958 d7/i% bond—Nov. 15, 1974 3 100 3 100 3 100 933 2,000 657 1,143 ""654" 2 471 9,871 10,487 2,509 590 471 9,97] 10,587 2,60C 93c 2, OOC 65' 59( 1,14J "9," 833 9,83; 65' 9,770 3,854 1,727 9,771 3,851,72' 1,48' lOi 3,97 1,13 1,81 7,38 1958 Feb. 14 Feb. 14 Feb. 14 Feb. 28 Apr. 1 , Apr. 15 June 3 June 15 June 15 2M% certificate—Feb. 14,1959 3% bond—Feb. 15,1964 33^% bond—Feb. 15,1990 3% bond—Aug. 15,1966 114% exchange note—April 1,1963 L 2^i% note—Feb. 15,1963 S}i% bond—May 15,-1985 1 ^ % certificate—May 15,1959. 2H% bond—Feb. 15, 1965 1,484 3,971 1,135 106 1,817 ? 7, 388 58, 422 Total bonds, notes, and certificates of indebtedness. _ 70,69 BILLS » (MATURITY VALUE) July 3 3.485% 264-day tax anticipation bills—Mar. 24,1958. Aug. 21 4.173% 237-day special bills—Apr. 15,1958 Increase in ofiferings of regular weekly bills during period Dec. 19, 1957 to Jan. 23, 1958 3,002 1,751 3,00 1,75 600 60 Total bills Total public offerings. 5,35 17,630 58,422 76,05 1 Issued only on demand of owners in exchange for 2%% Treasury Bonds, Investment Series B-1975-80. 2 Amount issued subsequent to June 30,1957. 3 Issued in special allotment to Government investment accounts. 4 Redeemable at the option of the holder in 2 years (August 1,1959) on three months' advance notice. 5 Issued September 26, 1957 (additional amount of the security dated August 1, 1957). 6 Redeemable at the option of the holder in approximately 23^ years (February 15,1960) on three month: advance notice. 7 During June and July 1958, $491 million of the 2 ^ % bonds of 1965 were purchased by the Treasury i the market and retired ($104 million during June and $387 million during July). 8 Amounts are maturity value. Treasury bills are sold on a discount basis with competitive bids fo each issue. The average sale price gives an approximate yield on a bank discount basis as indicated fc fiach series. 29 REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS Disposition of matured marketable Treasury securities excluding refinancing of regular weekly bills, fiscal year 1958 [In millions of dollars] D a t e of refunding or retirement Called or m a t u r i n g s e c u r i t y Description and m a t u r i t y date Issue d a t e Redeemed for cash or carried t o matured debtl E.xchanged for n e w security Total Percent exchanged BONDS, N O T E S , AND CERTIFICATES OF I N D E B T E D N E S S 1957 Aug. 1 Aug. 1 Aug. 1 Aug. 1 Dec. 2 254% n o t e — A u e . 1.1957 2 % note-^Aii'g.' 15, 1957 3M%icbrtificate—Oct. 1,1957 13^% exchange note—Oct. 1,1957.. 3 ^ ^ % certificate—Dec. i , 1957 J u l y 16,1956 F e b . 15,1955 D e c . 1,1956 Oct. 1,1952 A u g . 1,1957 $342 369 318 49 138 $11,714 3,423 6,953 775 9,833 $12,056 3,792 7,271 824 9,971 97 2 90 3 95.6 94.1 98.6 14 3 H % certificate--Feb. 14,1958 14 23^% b o n d — M a r . 15, 1956-58 14 13^% exchange n o t e - A p r . 1,1958.. 14 33^% certificate—Apr. 15, 1958 15 • 2^^% riote—June 15,1958 15 2 ^ % b o n d — J u n e 15, 1958-63, called J u n e 15, 1958. . J u n e 15 2^^% b o n d — J u n e 15, 1958 J u n e 15 2^i% b o n d — F e b . 15, 1 9 6 5 - . . F e b . 15,1957 J u n e 2,1941 A p r . 1,1953 M a y 1,1957 D e c . 1,1955 J u n e 15,1938 257 164 49 357 181 28 10,594 1,285 334 1,995 4,211 891 10,851 1,449 383 2,351 4,392 919 97.6 88.7 87.3 84.8 95 9 97.0 July 1,1952 J u n e 15,1958 143 2 104 4,102 4,245 104 96 6 2,499 56,109 1958 Feb. Feb. Feb. Feb. June June T o t a l b o n d s , n o t e s , a n d certificates of I n d e b t e d n e s s . . 1957 BILLS Sept. 23 T a x a n t i c i p a t i o n bills—Sept. 23, 1957. M a y 27,1957 1,501 Special bills—Apr. 15, 1958. T a x a n t i c i p a t i o n bills—Mar. 24, 1958. Decrease in offering of regular w e e k l y bills o f M a r . 13,1958. A u g . 21,1957 July .3,1957 607 3,002 -. 58, 608 1,501 1958 F e b , 14 M a r . 14 T o t a l biUs-...• T o t a l T r e a s u r y securities.. 1,144 1,751 3,002 5,210 1,144 6,354 7,709 57, 253 64,962 100 65.4 100 . . . 1 Including amounts redeemed for taxes in the case of tax anticipation issues. '^ » During June and July 1958, $491 million of the 2^^% bonds of 1965 were purchased in the market by the Treasury for retirement under Se„ction 19 of the Second Liberty Bond'Act, as amended (31 U. S. C. 754a), $104 million, during June 1958 and $387 million during July 1958. a disturbing effect on the price structure in the Government securities market. Uader these circumstances, and inasmuch as cash balances in thfe general fund of the Treasury resulting from the collection of the June 15 income tax installment aggregated nearly $10 bUlion, purchases of this issue for retirement were authorized so as to enable the market to absorb the new issue more readily. During the period from Juhe 19 through June 30, 1958, and continuing in July, the Treasury purchased in the market $625 million, face amount, of 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1965. Purchases for retirement under Section 19 of the Second Libert}^ Bond. Act, as amended, amounted to $491 million: $104 million during June and $387 million during July. In 30 1958 REPORT .OF. THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY addition, purchases of $134 million of the 2% percent bonds of 1965 were made in June for the account of Treasury investment funds. In. handling its regular weekly offering of 13-week. Treasury bills during the year, the Treasury raised a net amount of $0.5 billion of new cash. The: level' of weekly offerings was increased by approximately $100 mUlion a week for six consecutive weeks beginning with the issue of December 19, 1957. For the issue dated March 13, however, the level of the offering was decreased by $100 million. The 13 issues of regular weekly bUls outstanding at the close of the fiscal year 1958 totaled $22.4 billion, as compared with $21.9 biUion at the close of the previous fiscal year. To raise additional cash for current requirements, the Treasury, as already noted, issued $3.0 billion of 264-day tax anticipation bills in July and $1.8 bUlion of 237-day special- biUs in August. The tax anticipation bills which matured on March 24, 1958, were acceptable at par in payment of taxes due-on the fifteenth of that month. The special bills were included in the February refunding. (For- additional information on all bill issues see exhibit 6.) The easing of credit beginning in the late fall of 1957 was reflected in a decline in borrowing costs for the Treasury. The average rate on new issues of 13-week Treasury bills, for example, dropped from a high of 3.660 percent in October to a low of 0.635 percent in May, with only slightly higher rates in. June. Longer term Tates also dropped, but less sharply. The weekly average rates on new bill offerings throughout the year are shown in exhibit 6, and the trend of long-terms is reflected in table 47. The average annual interest rate as computed on the total interest-bearing public debt was 2.638 percent on June 30, 1958, as compared with 2.730 percent a year earlier. (For further detail on the computed annual interest rate by security classes see table 44.) Changes contributing to the net decline of $4.2 billion in the public nonmarketable debt are shown in the following table. • Class of security June 30,1957 June 30,1958 Increase, or decrease ( - ) In billions of dollars United States savings bonds: SeriesE Series H Subtotal E and H Series F and G Series J and K .: __ -._. Subtotal savings bonds Treasury bonds, investment series Depositary bonds Total interest-bearing public nonmarketable issues *Less than $60 million. .- 38.0 3.5 38.1 4.1 0.1 .5 41.5 10.1 3.0 42.1 7.2 2.7 .6 -2.9 -.3 54.6 11.1 .2 52.0 9.6 .2 —2.6 -1.5 66.0 61. 8 . (*) -4.2 REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 31 The decline of $1.5 billiori in investment series bonds outstandings was due principally to the exchange of $1,167 million of the 2% percent convertible Series B 1975-80 bonds for marketable 5-year 1}^ percent notes, and the redemption at par of $213 million of these bonds held by the Postal Savings System in order to provide funds to meet withdrawals of postal savings deposits. The largest portion of the nonmarketable debt is in United States savings bonds. The total of all series of interest-bearing savings bonds outstanding at the close of the fiscal year was $52.0 billion as compared with $54.6 billion at the close of the previous fiscal year. The decline of a little over $2}^ billion in outstanding savings bonds was due entirely to the large redemption of Series F, G, J, and K savings bonds, both matured and unmatured. C H A R T 6. ' E AND H BONDS, FISCAL YEARS l95l-'58 The amount of E and H bonds outstanding (including accrued interest) reached an alltime peak of $42.1 billion on June 30, 1958, as compared with $41.5 billion on June 30, 1957. An excess of redemptions of E and H bonds over sales during the fiscal year was more than offset by the automatic accrual of interest on E bonds. Throughout the period sales of the smaller denomination E bonds ($200 or under) continued at the high level of last year and larger denomination bonds showed a small increase over fiscal 1957. 479641—59 4 32 1958 REPORT OF T H E SECRETARY OF T H E TREASURY- Percent of Series E, F , G, H , J , and K savings bonds sold i n each year redeemed through each yearly period thereafter ^ [On basis of P u b l i c D e b t accounts, see " B a s e s of T a b l e s " ] R e d e e m e d b y e n d of— Series 1 >> >>> cn 1 1 03 >> tri CO 1 >i 1 0 00 CO 2 03 2 52 >> CO CO CO Series E 2 E-1941.... E-1942.... E-1943 E-1944 . , E-1945 E-1946 . E-1947 E-1948 E-1949 E-1950 E-1951 E-i952 E-1953 E-1954 E-1955 E-1956.-.. E-1957 3 8 15 19 28 23 21 20 22 26 29 29 28 29 29 32 33 6 15 24 33 38 34 30 30 34 36 38 39 38 38 39 43 10 21 34 41 45 40 37 39 40 41 44 45 44 45 46 14 29 41 47 50 45 43 44 44 45 48 49 49 50 18 35 47 52 54 51 47 47 47 48 52 53 53 23 40 51 56 58 54 50 49 50 51 .55 56 27 44 55 60 61 56 52 52 53 54 •57 30 48 58 62 63 58 55 54 55 57 34 52 61 64 65 60 57 56 57 40 58 65 68 68 64 61 61 62 68 ll 73 69 67 67 71 75 76 76 73 70 74 78 79 79 72 77 80 81 75 79 82 77 81 80 68 60 68 72 72 74 97 95 95 96 97 98 97 97 98 99 98 98 99 99 100 Series F a n d G F and G 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 . . 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 4 6 3 4 6 6 7 7 8 5 9 9 9 12 5 7 10 10 n 12 12 9 13 11 14 16 7 11 14 14 14 15 17 11 17 15 17 20 10 14 19 18 18 20 21 13 20 16 20 24 13 18 22 21 21 23 24 16 23 18 26 31 15 21 26 25 24 27 28 18 26 28 33 18 24 29 28 27 30 31 21 34 39 20 28 33 31 30 33 34 31 42 24 31 36 34 32 36 40 43 27 34 39 36 34 39 46 Series H H-1952.-. H-l 953... H-1954-.. H-19551 - . H-1956--. H-1957..- 3 3 3 4 4 3 8 8 7 11 11 13 12 13 16 17 17 19 21 21 26 Series J J-1952 . J-1953 J-1954.._ J-1955 .T-1956. J-1957 2 2 3 4 6 6 8 14 17 13 14 14 28 27 18 20 40 28 28 37 •7 Series K K-1952... K-1953.._ K:-1954 .. K-1955..K-1956... K-1957._- 2 3 1 2 4 4 6 6 6 12 12 9 10 19 22 12 15 31 19 22 28 NOTE.—The percentages shown in this table are proportions of the value of the bonds sold in any calendar year which are redeemed before July 1 of the next calendar year, and before July 1 of succeeding calendar years. Both sales and redemptions are taken at maturity value. ' Percentages by denominations may be found in table 42. 2 Similar detail for Series A through E savings bonds may be found in the 1952 annual report, p. 77. 33 REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS (For further detail on savings bonds sales by denominations see table 40.) The redemptions of savings bonds as a percentage of the total sold b y yearly series are summarized in the accompanying table. Detailed information on savings bonds from March 1, 1935, when this type of security was fii'st offered, through June 30, 1958, is given in tables 38 through 42. OWNERSHIP OF FEDERAL SECURITIES Private nonbank investors held an estimated $130.2 billion of Federal securities at the end of the fiscal year 1958^—nearly one-half of the $276.4 billion total debt outstanding. Private nonbank investors include individuals, insurance companies, mutual savings banks, nonfinancial corporations, pension funds, foreign accounts. State and local governments, and nonprofit associations. Commercial banks and Federal Eeserve Banks together held $90.3 billion, representing about one-third of the debt. The remaining $55.9 billion of debt was held by Government investment accounts, primarUy in social security and unemployment trust funds, veterans' insurance funds, and Government retirement funds. The major ownership change taking place in fiscal 1958 was an increase of $11.5 billion by the banking system, an amount equivalent to nearly aU of the $6.0 billion decrease in holdings by the privateC H A R T 7. .OWNERSHIP OF THE PUBLIC DEBT JUNE 30,1958. TOTAL Gov't. Invest. Accounts Bonks Nonbank Investors $Bil. «^56\j r » n rt n l — U Individuals 200 Sayings Inslitufions 100 1072 Corporalions^ K ^ O Q I / ^A V/yyy}y>\ ^ Another ^ ComI ::65'/. / h'^%V\ Federal Reserve 34 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY nonbank investors as well as the $5.8 billion increase in total debt. The Government investment accounts absorbed the remainder, m t h a $0.3 billion increase in their holdings of Federal securities. The banking system increase was comprised of a $9.0 billion increase by the commercial banks and a $2.4 billion increase by the FederaL Reserve System. The following table presents figures on bank and nonbank ownership together with details on the holdings of FederaL securities by the various other investor classes. Chart 7 also presents ownership by class of investor as of June 30, 1958. Ownership of Federal securities by investor classes on selected dates, 1941-58 [Dollars in billions] J u n e 30, 1941 Estimated ownership by: .; Private nonbank investors: Individuals 3 . Insurance comoanies Mutual savings banks _ Corporations *.. State and local governments Miscellaneous investors 5 Total private nonbank investors. Federal Government investment accounts Banks: Commercial banks Federal Reserve Banks. Total banks. Total gross debt outstanding . $11.2 7 1 3.4 2.0 .6 . .7 F e b . 28, 1946 2 • J u n e 30, 1957 J u n e 30, .1958 . r $67. 8 ••$64.1 24. 4. --• .12.3 11.1 7.9 19. 9 r 15. 4 6. 7 16. 9 . .8.9 : rie.o : 130.2 ' -$2.1 — 6-.5-2.1 -.8- 25. 0 135, 1: 8.5 28.0 55. 6 55.9 .3: 19.7 2. 2 93.8 22.9 55.8 23.0 64.9 25.4 9.0^ 2.4- 21.8 116.7 78.9 90.3 11. 5- 55.3 ' 279. 8 270.6' 276.4 5.S- ^ 136.2 $65.7 il. 7 7.4 13. 3 16.9 15.2 Change during fiscal year 1958 - 6 . 0' P e r c e n t of total Percent owned by: Private nonbank investors: Individuals other Total Federal G o v e r n m e n t i n v e s t m e n t accounts Commercial b a n k s . . Federal Reserve B a n k s T o t a l gross d e b t o u t s t a n d i n g 25 25 24 23 48 50 47 10 34 8 21 21 8 20 24 9 100 100 • 100 20 25 23 25 45 15 36 4 100 . f Revised. . •^ 1 Gross public debt, and guaranteed obligations of the Federal Government held outside the Treasury. 2 Immediate postwar peak of debt. 3 Includes partnerships and personal trust accounts. Nonprofit institutions and corporate pension trust funds are included under "Miscellaneous investors." < Exclusive of banks and insurance companies. 5 Includes savings and loan associations, nonprofit institutions, corporate pension trust funds, dealers and brokers, and investments of foreign balances and international accounts in this country. REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 35 Although holdings by individuals declined by $2.1 billion from $67.8 bUlion in June 1957 to $65.7 bilhon in June 1958, individuals remained the largest single investor group in the Federal debt ownership structure. Savings bonds comprised nearly three-fourths of these holdings by individuals, with the E and H Series representing the major share. The E and H Series are the only series now being sold. Individuals increased their holdings of E and H bonds by $0.6 billion in 1958, slightly more than in 1957, but their redemptions of Series F, G, J, and K bonds amounted $1.7 billion resulting in a net decline of $1.1 billion in their holdings of all savings bonds. Individuals' holdings of other securities, principally marketables, declined $1.0 bUlion in the year. Federal securities held by insurance companies at the end of the fiscal year amounted to $11.7 billion, a decrease of $0.6 billion during the year. Life insurance companies accounted for $6.9 billion, or almost 60 percent of total insurance holdings at the end of the year. During 1958 these companies reduced their holdings by $0.3 billion in order to provide additional'funds for investment in mortgages and corporate securities, or less than half the liquidation in fiscal 1957. Fire, casualty, and marine insurance companies held $4.7 billion of Federal securities on June 30, $0.3 billion less than a year earlier. The decline in 1958 was about the same as the decline in 1957. Mutual savings banks' holdings of Federal securities at the end of the fiscal year were $7.4 billion, $0.5 billion lower than on June 30, 1957. Like the life insurance companies, mutual savings banks have . continued to increase their mortgage and corporate securities portfolios and have liquidated some of their holdings of Federal securities to aid in financing these acquisitions. Although their total holdings of Federal securities declined during the year, by the end of fiscal year 1958 life insurance companies and mutual savings banks had acquired $0.8 billion of the $4.2 billion of over 10-year bonds issued during the year; and the average maturity of their portfolios of Federal securities had increased. The maturities of life insurance companies' holdings of marketable issues increased about 12 months to an average length of 9}^ years, and those of mutual savings banks increased about 6 months to an average of over 8 years. These levels are slightly below the prewar averages for both groups. 36 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Federal securities held by nonfinancial corporations declined by $2.1 bUlion to a level of $13.3 biUion on June 30, 1958. This was the lowest at any postwar fiscal year end. This decline is partly attributed to lower corporate profits associated with the recession and the resulting lower level of corporate tax liabilities against which many corporations hold Federal securities as a reserve, and partly to a widespread decline in corporate liquidity. Holdings of Federal securities by State and local governments amounted to $16.9 billion at the close of the fiscal year, a level unchanged from that of 1957. Almost one-third of the Federal security holdings of these governmental units are in State and local government employee retirement funds. The holdings of all other private nonbank investors amounted to $15.2 billion on June 30, 1958, a decrease of $0.8 billion. Savings and loan associations increased their holdings by $0.2 bUlion to a level of $3.3 bUlion as they built up their reserves against larger share balances. Corporate pension trusts decreased their holdings of Federal securities by $0.2 bUlion, bringing them down to $2.4 billion at the close of the year. Ownership of Federal securities by foreign and international accounts declined by $1.2 billion, bringing the totaldown to $6.4 bUlion on June 30, 1958. Holdings of the remaining classes in this group (nonprofit associations, dealers and brokers, and certain smaller institutional groups), increased $0.4 billion during the fiscal year. Government investment accounts increased their holdings of Federal securities by $0.3 bUlion. This was in contrast to the $2.1 bUlion increase of the previous fiscal year and primarUy reflected the heavier than normal payouts from the unemployment trust fund and the increased payments out of the Federal old-age and survivors insurance trust fund. Of the $55.9 billion held by all Government investment accounts, $46.2 billion, or more than 80 percent, was in the form of special issues held only by these accounts. Details on the ownership of securities by Government investment accounts are shown in table 60. As already noted, holdings of Federal securities by banks increased and holdings by private nonbank investors decreased during the year. An analysis of the estimated changes in bank versus nonbank ownership of Federal securities during the fiscal year 1958 is shown by type of issue in the following table. 37 REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS Estimated cha7iges in ownership of Federal securities ^ by type of issue, fiscal year 1958 [In billions of dollars] Change accounted for by Total changes Marketable securities: 13-week Treasury bills Tax anticipation bills ..Treasury certificates of indebtedness and notes Treasury bonds, etc Total marketable Nonmarketable securities, etc.: United States savings bonds Special issues to Government investment accounts Treasury bonds, investment series Other Total nonmarketable, etc -. Total change . . Private Governnonbank ment ininvestors vestment accounts .5 -1.5 -3.4 -1.1 1.9 10.1 -1.3 3.9 11.0 -1.9 -2.6 -2.5 -.6 -1.5 -.4 -5.2 -1.2 -.4 -4.1 5.8 -6.0 (*) Banks Total Commer- Federal cial Reserve .1 1.0 3.8 -.4 3.0 5.2 1.4 -.4 3.0 5.2 1.2 11.7 9.3 -.2 -.2 -.6 -.2 (*) (*) (*) (*) 2.4 (*) 2.4 (*) ' (*) -.8 -.3 -.3 .3 11.5 9.0 2.4 *Less than $50 million. 1 Gross public debt, and guaranteed obligations of the Federal Government held outside the Treasury. CORPORATIONS AND CERTAIN OTHER BUSINESS-TYPE ACTIVITIES OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT The activities 'of Government corporations and certain other business-type activities are financed according to law from their own receipts, from capital stock subscriptions or by appropriations, from sale of their obligations to the public, or from borrowing from the United States Treasury. The Secretary of the Treasury is authorized not only to purchase obligations of many of the agencies, but he is also, under certain circumstances, authorized to approve the terms and conditions of such obligations. Under provisions of the Government Corporation Control Act (31 U. S. C. 868), the obligations of most agencies issued to the public must be approved by the Secretary of the Treasury; the few agencies which are exempt from this requirement must consult with the Secretary of the Treasury before issuing obligations to the public. Most Government corporations and all other business-type activities are required to maintain their checking accounts with the Treasurer of the United States, although, with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury, such accounts may be kept with the Federal Reserve Banks or with private banks designated as depositaries or fiscal agents of the United States. 38 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Financial statements submitted to the Treasury Under provisions of Circular No. 966, corporations and agencies operating business-type activities submit balance sheets, income and expense statements, source and application of funds statements, and supplemental data to the Treasury pepartment. These reports are submitted periodically and serve as a basis for consolidation of data designed to provide full disclosure regarding the financial operations as well as the assets, liabilities, and net investment of the United States in these enterprises. As pf June 30, 1958, the combined assets of Government corporations and agencies amounted to $101,563 mUlion, consisting primarily of inventories, fixed assets, and loans receivable. The combined liabUities amounted to $6,680 million, consisting primaril}^ of accounts payable and borrowings from the ^ public. Borrowings from the United States Treasury are reported as part of the Government's investment. The combined total of the Government's investment in these agencies amounted, to $.94,883 million, exclusive of the United States interest in mixed ownership Government-sponsored corporations.. . Individual and combined statements of the financial condition of the reporting agencies are published quarterly and the operating statements are published semiannually in the Treasury Bulletin. The combined financial statements as of June 30, 1958, are shown in this report in tables 116, 117, and 118. These tables include certain supplementary financial data. Borrowing authority and outstanding obligations . The borrowing authority of Government corporations and activities is established by law, and the Secretary of the Treasury is authorized^ to purchase the obligations of many of the agencies. During 1958 new borrowing authorizations. were made-available .to Government agencies in the amount of $5,638 million and there were reductions in authorizations amounting to. $1,209 million, resulting, in a net increase in borrowing authority of $4,429 million. As of June 30, 1958, the unused borrowing authority of these agencies amounted to $22,592 million. Table 112 shows the status of the borrowing authority and the outstanding obligations of these corporations and agencies issued to the Secretary of the Treasury. Advances by the Treasury The Secretary of the Treasury is authorized by legislation to advance funds to certain Government corporations and agencies, by the purchase of obligations or by acceptance ofnotes of these agencies. Such loans or advances are generally applicable to the borrowing authority of the corporation or agency, but for balance sheet purposes these f REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 39 advances and repayments are reported under the net investment of the United States in the enterprise. During the fiscal year 1958 advances made by the Treasury amounted to $7,302 million and repayments amounted to $8,170 million, resulting in net repayments of $868 mUlion. The total of loans and advances outstanding as of June 30, 1958, was $21,859 million. Figures on advances and repayments for 1958 exclude refunding operations. Detailed information in connection with the loans and advances is shown in table 111. Interest and other payments made to the Treasury The rates of interest on borrowings from the Treasury, except where fixed by statute, are determined by the Treasury from month to month, taking into account the cost which the Treasury would have to pay to borrow money in the current market, as reflected by prevailing market yields on Government obligations with maturities corresponding to the approximate duration of the advances to be used by the agencies for their programs. Information on amounts of borrowing from the Treasury outstanding as of June 30, 1958, a description of the securities held, and the applicable rates of interest are given in table 114. On the basis of operating results of an enterprise, or as may be required by statute. Government corporations and agencies make payments into the Treasury representing interest, dividends, and other earnings. During the flscal year 1958 the interest paid to the Treasury by Government agencies amounted to $641 million, and payments other than interest on borrowings amounted to $56 million. DetaUs concerning these payments, including interest on borrowings from the Treasury, are given in table 120. Guaranteed obligations of Government agencies The only obligations of Government agencies guaranteed as to principal and interest by the United States which are currently being issued are those of the Federal Housing Administration. These are debentures issued in behalf of its various mortgage insurance funds in exchange for foreclosed mortgages. During the flscal year 1958 these debenture issues amounted to $53 million and redemptions amounted to $59 million, resulting in a net decrease of $6 million. The amount outstanding on June 30, 1958, was $101 million. In addition, matured guaranteed securities representing obligations issued by the Federal Farm Mortgage Corporation and the Home Owners' Loan Corporation in the nominal amount of $0.7 million were outstanding as of June 30, 1958. Funds for payment of these obligations and accrued interest thereon are on deposit with the .40 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Treasurer of the United States. Detailed information relating to the outstanding securities is given in table 25. Nonguaranteed obligations of Government agencies Nonguaranteed obligations are issued to the public by Governmentowned trust and sponsored corporations. Among the corporations issuing such obligations in the market are the Federal National Mortgage Association, Federal intermediate credit banks. Federal home loan banks, Federal land banks, and banks for cooperatives. During the flscal year 1958 the issues of nonguaranteed securities amounted to $7,021 million, while redemptions amounted to $6,615 mUlion, resulting in a net increase of $406 million. The total outstanding as of June 30, 1958, was $5,453 million. Subscriptions to and r.epayments of capital stock of Government corporations A net reduction in the capital stock holdings of Government corporations in the amount of $61.1 million occurred during the year. This reduction resulted from repayments and other reductions by the following corporations: Federal Savings and Loan Insurance Corporation, $16.2 million; Reconstruction Finance Corporation, $35 million; banks for cooperatives, $5.7 million; and Federal intermediate credit banks, a net of $4.2 million. During the year the Federal Farm Mortgage Corporation made flnal repayment of its capital stock to the Treasury amounting.to $10,000. Details relating to the capital stock outstanding and the changes during the flscal year are given in table 111. SECURITIES OWNED BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT In connection with the Government's flnancing of or participation in certain enterprises, activities, and programs authorized by Congress, various types of secuiitiies are acquired and held by the Treasury or other Government agencies. Among such securities are: Capital stock, bonds, and notes of Government corporations and agencies; notes covering loans to home owners, farmers, railroads, foreign governments, etc.; mortgages acquired from the sale of Government REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 41 property; and securities evidencing United States participation in the International Monetary Fund, International Finance Corporation, and other international organizations. Summaries of the holdings of such securities are shown in tables 111 and as parts C and D of table 116. These securities are exclusive of Federal securities held by Government trust funds and certain other accounts. TAXATION DEVELOPMENTS The considerations guiding Treasury tax policy during the past year were the budgetary impact of rising defense expenditures and the temporary interruption in national economic growth, together with the President's determination to adhere to sOund principles of government and flnance. In his message to the Congress transmitting the budget for the flscal year 1959, th% President identifled these principles as economy in expenditures, efficiency in operations, promotion of economic growth and stability, a vigorous Federal-State system, concern for human well-being, priority of national security, revenues adequate to cover expenditures and permit debt reduction during periods of high business activity, and revision and reduction of taxes when possible. On the basis of these considerations the President recommended the continuation of corporation income and excise tax rates which, in the absence of legislation, would have been reduced on July 1, 1958. (See exhibits 27, 28, and'29.) The 52 percent corporate income tax would have reverted to 47 percent through a scheduled reduction of the normal tax rate from 30 to 25 percent. Excise tax rates would have been reduced by $1.50 per gallon for distilled spirits, $1 per barrel for beer, 50 cents per thousand of cigarettes, and 3 percent of manufacturers' sales price for passenger automobiles and automotive accessories. The Tax Rate Extension Act of 1958 (Pubhc Law 85-475) was approved on June 30, 1958. I t extended the corporation income and excise tax rates until July 1, 1959, and prevented a revenue loss of about $2.6 billion on a full year basis, of which an estimated $1.9 billion represents collections in the flscal year 1959 and virtually all 42 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY the rest in flscal 1960. The estimated revenue effect of the tax rate extensions are shown in detail in the following table. Revenue effect of Public Law 85-4-75, extending certain tax rates from June 30, 1958, to June 30, 1959, and repealing certain excise taxes effective August 1, 1958 [In millions of dollars] Full year Increase, or decrease ( - ) in receipts effect, increase, or Fiscal Fiscal decrease year 1959 year 1960 (-) Changes in rates Rate extensions: Corporation income tax. Excise taxes: Alcohol taxes: Distilledspirits Beer . Wines Total alcohol taxes Tobacco taxes:. Cigarettes (small) Manufacturers' excise taxes: Passenger automobiles. Parts and accessories for automobiles . Total manufacturers' excise taxes.. _1 Total excise taxes . . Postponed, fioor stocks refunds 47 percent to 52 percent $9 to $10.50 per gallon. $8 to $9 per barrel - ' . Various $3.50 to $4 per thousand.. 7 percent to 10 percent ._ 5 percent to 8 percent. Under rate changes above Total effect of rate extensions other provisions: Repeal 3 percent tax Transportation of property Transportation of coal Repeal 4 cent per ton tax Transportation of oil by pipe Ime.. Repeal 4\i percent tax..,^ Net effect of Public Law 85-475.. } 1,760 875 150 73 8 150 73 8 231 231 198 198 350 300 50 65 55 10 415 844 355 784 207 60 60 -207 2,594 1,866 728 -487 -40 -360 -30 -487 -40 2,067 1,476 201 1 875 €>- 1 Includes some receipts (approximately $125 million) actually attributable to 1961 and subsequent years. Contrary to the President's recommendation, the legislation extending these tax rates also repealed the 3 percent tax on amounts paid for the transportation of property, the 4 cent per ton tax on the transportation of coal, and the 4% percent tax on the transportation of oil by pipeline, effective August 1, 1958. This resulted in an estimated revenue loss of $390 million in the flscal year 1959 and $527 million on a full year basis, reducing the net full year yield of Public Law 85-475 from $2.6 billion to $2.1 billion. During the year many proposals were advanced for substantial reductions in various taxes. (See exhibits 28 and 29.) After consultation with the leadership of both political parties in the Congress the Treasury successfully opposed these proposals as undesirable in view of the impending large deflcit. The Departnaent's position on tax reduction was explained by Secretary Anderson to the House Committee on Ways and Means on May 28, 1958, as follows: ^We do not believe that at this time * * * a general reduction in individual income taxes is in the Nation's best interests. Such re- REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 43 ductions would widen the gap between revenues and expenditures and thereby substantially increase the deficits. Nor can the serious disadvantages of so increasing the deficit be offset by a reasonable certaint}^ that any particular individual income tax adjustment would predictably assure resumption of growth either in specific areas of the economy or the economy as a whole. From both the long-term and short-term point of view, our competitive, private-enterprise economy is putting on an impressive performance of resistance to further decline without so-called ^^massive" intervention by the Government. ^^The Treasury is of the opinion that a reduction of corporate rates is not justified at a time when the reduction in the rate on individuals cannot properly be made. '^We also do not believe that it is appropriate or logical to select certain excise tax rates for reduction and decline to make reductions in others. Should any excise taxes be recommended for reduction, contentions would undoubtedly be made that others were entitled to like treatment. We believe that in fairness and in the best interest of the country, the excise rates that currently exist should be extended without change for another year. ''We recognize that the burdens of taxation and the burdens of debt are exceedingly heavy at all levels of government. We must continue to be concerned with restraints which weigh on our economic growth and our system of incentives. The very fact that taxes are high emphasizes the requirement that we utilize our best efforts to achieve economical operations at all levels of our Government and to work diligently to make the tax system as fair and as simple as possible with minimum repressive effects on individual and business activities. "We all look forward to a period when the Government can again operate with a reasonable balance between its expenditures and its revenues. We must be equally careful not to widen unduly the gap between revenue and expenditures. To do so would add to the burden of an already heavy debt which encumbers our economy not onl}^ h j the cost of interest but by substantial interference in the financial markets where private business. States, municipalities, and other political subdivisions compete for our national savings. Increases in the debt also make it more difficult for the Federal Reserve System to discharge its monetary and credit responsibilities. '^1 think we must bear in mind that we are looking forward not to a peak of expenditures which we now see sure ways of reducing in subsequent years but rather to a level of expenditures which in the absence of changing conditions offer little prospect of declining. Even with a resumption of a rate of sustainable growth and the con- 44 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY ^ sequent recovery of tax receipts which would result therefrom, the deficits wUl run into the recovery period." Relief for small business Despite the budgetary situation, it was possible to provide in the budget for tax relief measures for small business in recognition of the great importance of new and small companies in the American economy. These measures had been developed by the Cabinet Committee on Small Business and recommended by the President to broaden the opportunities of small business with a minimum revenue loss. Important parts of :these measures were enacted into law. By a floor amendment in the Senate, the Small Business Tax Revision Act of 1958, which had passed the House as H. R. 13382, was incorporated in the Technical Amendments Act of 1958 (discussed below) as Title I I of Public Law 85-866. I t consists of several sections. One provides an ordinary loss rather than a capital loss deduction on original investors' losses in certain small business stock up to $25,000 a year ($50,000 in the case of husband and wife filing a joint return). Another extends the present 2-year net operating loss carryback to three years. A third provides an additional 20' percent first-year depreciation allowance on costs up to $10,000 a, year ($20,000 on joint returns) of both new and used tangible personal property. In addition, the minimum accumulated earnings credit for purposes of the tax on improper accumulation of surplus is raised from $60,000 to $100,000, in order to increase the earnings a small business may accumulate in liquid form with assurance that no penalty tax wUl appl}^. Finally, provision is made for installment payment of estate taxes attributable to investment in closely held business enterprises. These small business tax provisions are expected to result in a budgetary loss of about $260 mUlion in the first full year. However, these effects on the revenue are largely a matter of timing and represent tax postponement rather than actual tax reduction. In addition to these siiiMl business tax provisions in Title 11^ another provision designed to help small business was included in Title I of the act. I t permits small corporations (corporations having 10 or fewer shareholders) to elect not to be taxed as a corporation. When such an election is made the corporate tax wUl not apply b u t the shareholders must pay the individual income tax on their pro rata share of the corporation's earnings whether or not the earnings are distributed. Elimination of tax inequities Another important tax development was the enactment of legislation to eliminate substantive unintended benefits in income, estate^ REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 45 and gift taxes, most of which arose under provisions of the 1939 Code which had been carried over substantially intact into the 1954 Code, and to remove technical errors and. ambiguities in the tax laws (Title I of the Tecihnical Amendments Act of 1958, approved September 2, 1958). The importance of this legislation, introduced during the first session of the 85th Congress, was stressed by the President in his message accompanying the budget for the fiscal year 1959: '^We shall continue our efforts to assure that no one can avoid paying his fair share of the country's total high tax burden. Pending legislation (H. R. 8381), which was developed, jointly by the Treasury Department and the House Committee on Ways and Means to remove unintended tax benefits and hardships, should be enacted with a few modifications." Enactment of this legislation was urged also by Secretary Anderson on the occasion of his first appearance before the House Committee on Ways and Means on January 16, 1958: ^'Loopholes or unintended benefits are always a matter of concern. They are particularly serious when tax rates have to be maintained at high levels. I t is particularly important that we maintain respect for our voluhtary tax system, which should continue, to.be a source of national pride. This gives added emphasis to the necessity of maintaining fairness and equality in the application of our country's tax burden." (See exhibit 23.) The Technical Amendments Act is a tax revision measure consisting of more than 100 sections, too numerous to be detailed here. About half represent technical adjustments; the other half represent substantive provisions, the majority of which close loopholes or foreclose unintended benefits in the present law. The remainder of the substantive provisions relate generally to the removal of hardships. While this is not a revenue raising measure, as such, it wUl have the general effect of strengthening; the revenue system. I t wUl perf oim a preventive function in blocking the growth and spread of known avoidance devices which, even where they do not result in substantial revenue losses at present, threaten more widespread abuse and loss ot tax receipts in the future. The immediate net revenue effect of the legislation is not believed to be sigaificant since the cost of relief provisions is .generally balanced by those which close loopholes. Excise tax revision Approval of the Excise Tax Technical Changes Act of 1958 on September 2, 1958 (Public Law 85-859), brought to fruition the revision of the excise tax provisions of the Revenue Code initiated during the 84th Congress. This area of taxation was left largely 46 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY 1 unchanged because of time limitations during the comprehensive revision of the Revenue Code in 1954. The 1958 legislation revises many technical aspects of the excise taxes. While some changes were made in practically all taxes, major revisions were made in the terminology of the taxes on communications, the method of computing the stamp taxes on stocks, the statutes relating to distilled spirits, and those pertaining to the general credit and refund provisions. A few examples will illustrate the more important of these changes. To bring the taxes on communications in line with technical developments in the industry, the categories of 'local telephone service" and ''long distance telephone service" were redefined and redesignated as "general telephone service" and "toll telephone service." Both substantive and clerical changes were made in documentary stamp taxes, including changing the base of the taxes on issuancie and transfer of stocks from par value to actual value. In the tax-free sales area, exemption was provided from retailers', manufacturers', and from transportation and communication taxes for sales to nonprofit educational institutions, provided the purchases are made for their exclusive use. The period during which distilled spirits may be maintained in bond was extended from 8 to 20 years. Another change grants credit or refund of certain manufacturers' excise taxes where taxpaid articles have been exported prior to any other use, even though not originally sold for export by the manufacturer. While this legislation is essentially technical in character, it makes a number of changes in tax bases and in exemptions with an aggregate annual revenue loss of nearly $50 million. A major portion of this loss, $25 million, results from making the general admissions tax of 1 cent per 10 cents of the admissions charge applicable only to the charge in excess of $1. Under prior law, admissions of 90 cents or less were exempt but the full amount was taxable if the admissions charge exceeded 90 cents. A nearly $10 million revenue loss results from the exemption of assessments for the construction or reconstruction of capital facilities of social clubs from the 20 percent tax on club dues and initiation fees. Tax simplification Further progress can be reported toward tax simplification. A tax table for the ready determination of the fractional rate self-emplo^^^ment tax for social security was adopted. The card return Form 1040A was revised to cover employees with less thari $10,000 of income. Formerly, this simple card form could be used only for incomes under $5,000. I t ma}'- now be used by any individual (or husband and wife filing jointly) with total income of REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 47 less than $10,000 consisting of wages reported on Form W-2 and not more than $200 in dividends, interest, and wages not subject to withholding. Taxpayers using Form 1040A automatically claim the standard 10 percent deduction allowed for personal expenses such as contributions, interest payments, medical expenses, and the like. I t is estimated that as many as 31 million individuals can qualify to use the new form, as compared with 14 million who filed it for 1957. I n cooperation with the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, a single annual employer report form has been developed to replace the separate quarterly social security and annual income tax reports. The bill authorizing use of the simplified form, however, has not yet been enacted. To simplify taxpayers' problems in complying with reporting requirements, a new regulation on travel expenses has been developed which relieves employees who account to their employer for their business travel expenses from reporting such expenses in their individual tax returns. A program has been initiated to simplify tax return forms to reduce the tax compliance burdens of taxpayers. These efforts, however, are meeting with difficulty because the complexities of the present tax return forms originate so largely from the variety of special Code provisions which have to be accommodated as long as they remain part of the law. Administrative clarification of tax laws A concerted effort was made during the year to expedite the completion of regulations to simplify and increase understanding of the tax laws. During the past year 58 Treasury Decisions were published. M a n y of these relate to major sections of the 1954 Internal Revenue Code, including the definition of gross income, adjusted gross income, and taxable income, major deductions such as medical expense and charitable contributions; trade and business deductions; specJial rules for determining capital gains and losses; income in respect of decedents; employees' stock options; income from international trade and investment and taxation of nonresident citizens and aliens; the estate tax; procedural and administrative provisions; withholding of income taxes on wages; and methods of accounting. A new regulation has liberalized the provisions relating to deductibility of educational expenses—of special interest to teachers. Teachers may now deduct such expenditures as a business expense even if incurred voluntarily and not required to retain a teaching job. Educational expenses can be deducted if their purpose is to update and ex:pand knowledge of the subject taught, to learn improved teaching methods, or otherwise improve teaching effectiveness, 479641—59^ 5 48 1958 REPORT OF THE; SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Revised regulations were issued on the traffic in firearms and ammunition under the Federal Firearms Act (15 U. S. C,. 901-909). The final regulations were much less stringent than the preliminary draft issued as a Notice of Proposed Rule Making. For instance, serial numbers were not required to be stamped by the manufacturer on shotguns and .22 caliber rifles, and dealers were not required to keep records (including the name of the purchaser) of the sale of pistol and revolver ammunition. Other taxation developments Legislation developed by the Treasury was enacted (Public Law 85-321, approved February 11, 1958) to secure greater compliance with provisions concerning the collection and payment by employers and others of moneys representing withheld income and,social security taxes and excise taxes on facilities and services. As of December 31, 1956, the delinquent withheld income and social security taxes alone amounted to $279 million, roughly one-flfth of one percent of the total of these taxes collected over the past six years. Under the new legislation employers and others who have failed to collect and pay over the appropriate taxes, and who have been notifled of such failure must thereafter collect the taxes and deposit them in a special trust account for the United States Government. Persons who subsequently faU to deposit the funds as required can be convicted of a misdemeanor unless the failure was due to reasonable doubt as to the requirement under law or due to factors beyond theperson's control. The new provisions will have no application to the vast majority of taxpayers but will reduce compliance difficulties in certain areas. Regulations have already been issued to clarify the administration of the new law. The taxation of life insurance companies has been unsettled and handled on a year-to-year stopgap basis for several years pending the development of a plan suitable on a long-range basis for taxing the life insurance industry. Two approaches to the long-range solution of the problem were submitted to the congressional tax committees on AprU 10, 1958 (see exhibit 26), which are currently under examination by members of the industry and the staff of the Joint Comiiiittee on Internal Revenue Taxation. Pending the enactment of permanent legislation. Public Law 85-345, approved March'17, 1958, extended the 1955 stopgap formula to taxable years beginning before January 1, 1958. , During the second session of the 85th Congress, several 'hundred tax bUls were introduced providing tax relief for restricted groups. In accordance with established practice the Treasury prepared analyses and stated its position on many of these legislative items to REVIEW OF FISCAL. OPERATIONS 49 the appropriate committees of Congress. In conformity with the policy of the President to conserve the Government's revenues, the Department consistently advised against enactment of legisla.tion which afforded special relief to limited groups of taxpayers thereby adding to the deflcit, impairing tax equity, and postponing general tax reduction for all taxpayers. During the congressional session several bills were enacted to amend the revenue laws in addition to those described above. Public Law 85-367, approved April 7, 1958, excluded from the deflnition of unrcr lated business taxable income, under certain specifled conditions, a charitable trust's share in a limited partnership. Public Law 85-380, approved April 16, 1958, exempted from the admissions tax concerts and athletic games conducted for the beneflt of certain nonproflt activities. Public Law 85-517, approved July 11, 1958, extended for two years the authority of the Secretary of the Treasury to permit emergency transfers of distUled spirits for national defense purposes. Public Law 85-930, approved September 6, 1958, extended the Renegotiation Act of 1951 for six months to June 30, 1959. An inventory of the miscellaneous amendments to the Revenue Code enacted during the second session of the 85th Congress is con^ tained in exhibit 30. Federal-State relations To strcDgthen the flnances of State and local governments, to reduce their reliance on Federal flnancial assistance, and to enable them to accept more governmental responsibility, the President proposed to the State governors on the occasion of their 1957 annual conference held in Williamsburg, Va., the establishment of a Joint Federal-Stat6 Action Committee. The governors concurred in the President's proposal and during the past year the Joint Action Committee com^ posed of governors and Federal representatives has been at work ori. implementing three objectives: "(1) To designate functions which the States are ready and willing^ to assume and finance that are now performed or financed wholly or in part by the Federal Government; "(2) To recommend the Federal and State revenue adjustments required to enable the States to assume such functions; and ' "(3) To identify functions and responsibilities likely to require State or Federal attention in the future and to recommend the level of State effort, or Federal effort, or both, that will be needed to assure effective action." The Secretary, as the cochairman and one of the Federal members of the Joint Action Committee, participated in developing the program submitted in its Progress Report No. 1, dated December 5, 1957. 50 19 58 REPORT OF THE' SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY The committee recommended that the Federal Government: Discontinue its grants for vocational education and for the construction of waste treatment facilities; reduce its 10 percent tax on local telephone service to 6 percent to assist the States in assuming financial responsibility for these programs; and that the tax credit device be used for the first five years to facilitate the transition from Federal to State imposition of this portion of the local telephone tax. Legislation (H. R. 12524) incorporating the committee's recommendations was introduced during the last session of Congress. After the governors, at their 1958 annual conference, recommended that the proposal be modified "to insure that the revenue source made available to each State is substantially equivalent to the cost of the functions to be assumed," the Treasury developed and the joint committee approved a modification of its original proposal to bring it into accord with the views of the Governors' Conference. I n its continuing work the Joint Action Committee is moving toward the very important objective of decentralizing governmental authority and responsibility. I t is examining both present and proposed programs with the objective of providing proper distribution of responsibilities among the Federal Government, the States, the municipalities, and other political subdivisions—to insure that the functions of Goverriment are properly and more effectively performed within the traditional and constitutional structure. (See exhibit 24.) Social security developments Public Law 85-840, approved August 28, 1958, amended the oldage, survivors, and disability insurance program in several significant respects. I t increased benefits for those now on the rolls and for future beneficiaries on the average by about 7 percent, effective January 1959. I t increased the rates of the employment tax on both employers and employees h j % oi 1 percent above present law rates, effective January 1, 1959, and the tax on self-employment income by % of 1 percent. Moreover, future increases in rates scheduled under present law were accelerated to take place at 3-year instead of 5-3^ear intervals. These changes result in a 2 ^ percent employer and employee tax rate for 1959, increasing thereafter by }^ percent at 3-year intervals beginning in 1960 to reach a 4 ^ percent permanent level in 1969. The tax on self-employment income is scheduled to increase correspondingly. The maximum amount of annual earnings subject to these tax rates was increased from $4,200 to $4,800. The excess of income over outgo resulting from this legislation is estimated to be 0.32 percent of payrolls on a level premium basis and in.the words of.the President "will further strengthen the financial condition of this system in the years immediately ahead and over the long-term future. I t is, of course, essential that the old-age, sur REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 51 vivors, and disability insurance program which is so vital to the economic security of the American people, remains financially sound and self-supporting." Changes were made also in the provisions of the Social Security Act relating to old-age assistance, aid to dependent children, aid to the blind, and aid to the permanently and totally disabled, to revise the formula for determining the Federal share of public assistance payments within the area where formerly 50 percent-50 percent matching applied. Within this area of matching, the 1958 legislation introduced the concept of variable grants, ranging from 50 percent to 65 percent, for States with per capita incomes below the national average. The revisions in the formula for detei mining the Federal share of assistance payments will increase Federal contributions to the States, on an annual basis, by an estimated $187 million, assuming that expenditures of State and local funds continue at present rates. International tax matters Several of the Internal Revenue Code provisions applicable to income from foreign sources were amended during the year (Public Law 85-866, approved September 2, 1958). The credit for foreign income taxes was revised to provide a carryback and carryover in cases where the credit cannot be fully utilized in a given year. Contrary to the recommendation of the Treasury, a ^specific credit provision for United Kingdom taxes on patent and copyright royalties received by an American licensor was enacted retroactive to taxable years beginning after 1949. The tax return filing requirements were revised with respect to earned income derived abroad so that such income must be taken into account in determining whether a tax return is to be filed by the recipient. However, this amendment does not disturb the long existing exemption from tax allowed for such income under certain circumstances, and is intended only to secure information about foreign income to insure that the taxpayer has properly treated it for tax purposes. To provide greater flexibility, additional discretional authority was granted to the Treasury concerning requirements for the filing of returns by aliens leaving the country. The 30-percent withholding tax on income received by nonresident aliens and corporations was made applicable to distributions from certain pension plans to which the tax formerly did not apply. Modifications were made in the estate tax provisions of the Code so that estates of citizens who became residents of United States possessions would nevertheless be subject to the Federal estate tax. The program to negotiate international tax agreements to remove tax obstacles here and abroad was continued in the interest of facUitate ing international trade and investment. A supplementary income tax convention with the United Kingdom to eliminate an area of double 52 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY taxation with respect to royalties was approved during the 1958 congressional session and the British treaty as modified was extended to twenty British overseas territories. The income tax convention with Belgium was also modified to facilitate its extension to overseas territories and it was extended to the Belgian Congo and Ruanda-Urundi. The income tax convention with Pakistan, which had been held over from the preceding session, was approved with a reservation and awaits exchange of ratifications. The reservation related to the credit that would have been granted for the first time under a tax convention for the tax exemption allowed by Pakistan to new investment. The reservation was based upon the fact that the Pakistan tax exemption law expired earlier in the year, making the credit provision ineffectual. A supplement to the income tax convention with Norway modifying the taxes on dividends flowing between the two countries was signed and transmitted to the Senate for consent to ratification. Negotiations on a treaty were conducted with Cuba, Mexico, Peru, and Chile and the start of negotiations with India was announced. Discussions were held with Canada looking toward a revision of the estatetax convention. International Financial and Monetary Developments There was some diminution in world economic activity during the fiscal year. Among the industrialized countries, rates of growth, which had been declining in the previous year, in some cases became stabilized and in others showed evidence of actual contraction. In the less-developed countries, the combined impact of domestic inflationary pressures and falling demand and prices for basic commodities produced in some instances severe exchange stringency and the need for reexamination of programs for economic development. The continuing flow of exports from the industrial countries of Western Europe to the nonindustrialized countries required the latter to draw heavUy on their exchange reserves in payment. Although United States exports were reduced during the year to a greater degree than those of other industrial countries, total United States imports were weU maintained and served to cushion the contracting forces acting on world trade. The effects of the Suez crisis, which had disturbed the world payments picture in the previous flscal year, had largely run their course by the middle of, the year under review. The postwar trend toward reserve accumulation by a number of foreign countries, which was interrupted during 1957, was resumed by the flrst quarter of 1958. Several Western European countries were able to add to their gold holdings during the latter half of the flscal year; the proportion of REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 53 gold to total reserves in some instances reached levels which had been maintained in earlier postwar years. The United States Governmentj through its bUateral programs, and the major international institutions, supplied a substantial volume of hard currency resources to the rest of the world for both temporary StabUization purposes and for basic long-term development. The International Monetary Fund provided resources at a rate much below its peak rate of the year preceding but stUl well above the rate of earlier years, whUe the International Bank exceeded past records in both its disbursements on existing loans and in commitments on new loans. The United States continued its regular programs of lenduig through the Export-Import Bank and the Development Loan Fund, of stabUization of currencies through exchange agreements, and of lending and other assistance under mutual security legislation. The tJriited States also took part in multUaterah arrangements for special assistance for certain countries, including France. The United Kingdom exercised its option under the Anglo-American Financial Agreement, as amended, to defer payment of the 1957 installments of principal and interest (totaling $137 mUlion) on the 1945 -loari of $3.75 bUlion and the lend-lease and surplus property settlements of the same year. The return of sUver which had been transferred abroad during World War I I under the Lend-Lease Act continued during the flscal year 1958. World economic conditions did not permit much progress toward liberalizing trade and payments arrangements. A number of countries, however, were able to avoid reimposition of earlier controls in the face of adverse developments. BUateralism in payments declined rriarkedly. The European Common Market Treaty came into effect, and broader proposals for trade integration in Europe were under consideration at the end of the flscal year. At the close of the flscal year there was considerable discussion of the advisability of measures to increase the long-term effectiveness of the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank. Subsequently, the United States took the lead in both institutions in suggesting a study of possible measures to increase their resources. The United States also considered the feasibUity of an International Development Association which would be affiliated with the International Bank. The United States balance of payments and gold and dollar movements ^ Total United States payments to foreigners during the flscal year 1958 amounted to $26.3 billion, representiag a declhae of about $1.2 1 Figures for 1958 are preliminary. Differences between 1957 figures published in the 1957 Annual Report and those for 1957 cited in this section ariB due to revisions made during the year. 54 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY bUlion from 1957.^ The decline was mainly a result of the decrease in the net outflow of United States private capital from the record level of $4.1 bUlion in 1957 to $2.8 bUlion in 1958. Payments for the other major items remained at or near the levels of 1957. Merchandise imports were valued at $13.0 bUlion; payments for nonmUitary services amounted to $4.3 bUlion; United States mUitary expenditures abroad were $3.1 bUlion; net United States Government nonmUitary grants, loans, and other capital outflow totaled $2.5 bUlion; and net remittances and pensions totaled about $700 mUlion. Foreign payments in the United States for goods and services amounted to $24.3 bUlion in the flscal year 1958, a decline of about $1.6 bUlion from the previous year.^ United States nonmUitary merchandise exports declined by $1.9 bUlion, amounting to $17.3 bUlion as compared with the previous year's record $19.2 bUlion. United States receipts for nonmUitary services remained constant and military cash transactions increased by about $300'mUlion. These United States international payments and receipts resulted in an increase in net United States payments to foreigners of about $430 million in the flscal year 1958 as compared with 1957. All of the flnancial transactions between the United States and the rest of the world (including international institutions) during flscal 1958 resulted in a recorded gain of $1.4 billion by foreigners in gold and liquid dollar assets, in contrast to a loss by foreigners during 1957 of about $150 million. This substantial improvement in the recorded gold and liquid dollar position of foreigners arose only partly from the increase in the net United States payments cited above. To a larger extent the improvement was due to the sharp reduction in. the rate of foreign long-term investment in the United States and to an apparent cessation in the net inflow of unrecorded foreign capital. Net foreign long-term investment in the United States amounted to "about $100 million in 1958, as compared with $550 million during 1957. Transactions unaccounted for in the balance of payments declined substantially, from $1.2 billion in flscal 1957 to $450 million in 1958. This decline may indicate that the relatively large net inflow of unrecorded foreign capital during the previous year had stopped during 1958 and may even have been reversed during the latter part of the year. The gold and short-term dollar assets^ of foreign countries (excluding gold holdings of the U.S.S.R. and other Eastern European countries) amounted to an estimated $30.5 billion on June 30, 1958, an increase of about $2.4 billion over the $28.1 billion held on June 30, 2 These figures exclude net transfers of military supplies and services financed by U. S. Government military grant aid, amounting to $2.5 billion in the fiscal year 1958 and $2.3 billion in the fiscal year 1957. 3 Includes official gold reserves and official and private holdings of short-term dollar assets as reported by United States banking institutions. Excludes, for the first time, estimated gold holdings of all ESstern European countries. REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 55 1957. The United Kingdom made the largest gain of over $900 million. Continental Western European countries and their dependencies increased their gold and short-term dollar holdings by $1.4 billion, as Belgium, the Federal Republic of Germany, Italy, the Netherlands, and Switzerland each registered gains of roughly $250-$350 million. Canadian holdings rose by $375 million, and Japanese holdings by about $175 million. Latin American gold and short-term dollar holdings declined by approximately $215 million, with Argentine and Colombian holdings being reduced by roughly $75 million each. Egyptian holdings declined by about $55 million. At the end of flscal 1958 foreign countries held $1.0 billion in United States Government bonds and notes, a net decline of $265 million from the end of 1957. Canadian holdings of bonds and notes were lower by about $115 million. The holdings of Cuba decreased by $70 million, of Switzerland by $50 million, and of the United Kingdom by $40 million. The holdings of gold and liquid dollar assets by international institutions rose by about $50 million during 1958. Their holdings of gold-and short-term dollars declined by about $30 million and their holdings of United States Government bonds and notes increased by $80 miUion. Total estimated world official gold holdings on June 30, 1958 (exclusive of the U.S.S.R. and other Eastern European countries) were $39.4 billion, of which the United States held $21.4 billion and international institutions held $1.2 billion. Thus, the United States held 54 percent of world gold reserves and 56 percent of gold reserves held by individual countries. Postponement of 1957 Anglo-American Financial Agreement payments I n December 1957 the Government of the United Kingdom advised the Treasury Department of its intention to defer payment of the annual installment of principal and interest due in 1957 on its obligations under the Anglo-American Financial Agreement of 1945 and under the 1945 agreement covering settlement of Britain's lend-lease and surplus property obligations to the United States. The British action was in conformance with an amendment to the Anglo-American Financial Agreement, which was approved by the Congress on April 20, 1957. (See page 48 and exhibits 18-21 of the 1957 Report of the Secretary of the Treasury.) The amount deferred was approximately $136.7 million, of which $80.5 million was interest and $56.3 million was principal repayment. I t is payable in full the flrst year after the end of the payment schedule in the original agreement. There is an interest charge of 2 percent per annum on each deferred amount. On December 31, 1957, the Government of the United 56 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Kingdom paid $1.6 million to the United States Treasury Department, representing interest due on the interest portion ($81.6 million) of the 1956 installment. This interest portion had been deferred under the amendment agreement until the year after all other payments under the Agreement have been completed. I n connection with this deferment, the Government of the United Kingdom also notifled the Canadian Government of its intention to defer the installment due in 1957 under the flnancial agreement of March 6, 1946, between the Government of Canada and the Govern^ ment of the United Kingdom. _ Lend-lease silver During World War I I the United States transferred a total of 410.8 million ounces of Treasury silver to certain foreign countries under authority of the Lend-Lease Act of March 11, 1941. Although the agreements differed somewhat in detail, they provided that the debtor countries were to return a like kind and quantity of silver withiri 5 years after termination of the National Emergency as determined by the President. Accordingly, the lend-lease silver was due to be returned by April 27, 1957, although the agreements with several of the countries permitted a postponement of partof the repayment for an additional 2 years. Prior to June 30, 1957, the entire amount of silver due from the Governments of Australia, Belgium, and. the United Kingdom (also acting for the Government of the Fiji Islands) and all but a small amount of the silver due from the Netherlands had been returned and taken into the account of the Treasurer of ^ the United States. I n addition, agreements had been concluded with the Governments of India and Pakistan relative to the return of 225,999,904 ounces of silver furnished during the war'^under lend-lease for use in undivided India. (See Annual Report for 1957, pp. 49-750.) As provided in these agreements, title to 122,219,999 flne troy ounces of silver had been delivered by the Government of India to the, American Embassy in New Delhi, and title to approximately 15.5 million flne troy ounces of silver had been delivered by the Government of Pakistan to the American Embassy in Karachi, with shipment to the United States to be arranged as soon as possible. In addition, the Government of India had begun shipment to the United States of 50,322,101 ounces of flne sUver. In the course of flscal 1958 a total of 111 million flne troy ounces of silver, consisting of 96 million flne troy ounces of the silver due from; India, and 15 million flne troy ounces of that due from Pakistan, were returned and taken into the account of the Treasurer of the United States. • REVIEW OF FISCAL 57 OPERATIONS Lend-lease silver transactions as of J u n e 80, 1958 [In millions of fine ounces] Silver trans- • Silver referred from turned and the Treasury taken into Silver being to lend-lease the accbunt returned for account of Treasurer of foreign of the United States governments Country Australia Belgiura Ethiopia . . . Fiji India Netherlands Pakistan Saudi Arabia United Kingdom ._ . . . .2 99.3 52.4 15.0 1 410. 8 267.0 ... ._ . Total 11.8 .3 11.-8 .3 5.4 .2 172.5 56.7 53.5 122.3 88.1 _ . . __ Silver to b e ' returned '5.4 73.3 4.3 38.5 88.1 116.1 22.3 27.8 1 Includes 1,031,250 ounces lost at sea while in transit. Internationa! Monetary Fund The International Monetary Fund continued during the year to provide substantial assistance to countries experiencing temporary exchange difiiculties. Although drawings on the Fund by members did not approach the high level of the preceding year, they nevertheless amounted to $598 mUlion, which was more than double the annual average of drawings in the Fund's entire history. Member countries also had unused drawing rights of $806 mUlion under standby agreements outstanding as of June 30, 1958. The standby agreement assures a country of access to a specifled amount of the Fund's resources, during an agreed period and under agreed circumstances. Total drawings from 1947 through June 30, 1958, were $3,131 mUlion. A total of $1,250 mUlion has been repaid to the Fund, leaving net drawings of $1,881 mUlion outstanding on June 30. Two members made large drawings on the Fund in the flscal year, whUe numerous other members made drawings of smaller amounts. In July and August 1957, Japan drew a total of $125 mUlion. Between February and June 1958, France drew the whole of a $131 mUlion standby agreement arranged with the Fund in January in conjunction with other external assistance to alleviate a critical payraents situation. Among the other countries making substantial drawings were: BrazU ($75 mUlion), ChUe ($37 million), Denmark ($34 mUlion)^ Netherlands ($69 mUlion), Union of South Africa ($36 mUlion), and Yugoslavia ($23 mUlion). Some of these drawings have already been reduced by voluntary repurchases. The unusually heavy drawings on the Fund during the past 2 years resulted in a heavy reduction in the Fund's holdings of gold and major convertible currencies. The Fund had $3,837 mUlion in gold and major conveftible currencies on hand on June 30, 1956. Holdings 58 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY of gold and major convertible currencies amounted to $2,318 million on June 30, 1958. With the acceptance of seven new members during the year, the membership of the Fund reached 67 by June 30, 1958;* The new members were (in the order iof joining) Ireland, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Ghana, Malaya, Tunisia, and Morocco. As a result of the new members' quotas and minor upward revisions of existing ones, total quotas increased by $151 million during the flscal year to $9,088 mUlion. , Only one country, Ireland, established an initial par value during the year ended June 30, 1958. The par value of the Irish pound was fixed at the rate of Irish £ l equals U.S. $2.80, which had been the effective rate since 1949. Duririg tKe year, Finland proposed, and the Fund did not object to, a change in the par value of the markka from 230 to the United States dollar to 320 to the United States dollar. In October 1958 Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, in his capacity as Governor of the three institutions, headed the United States delegation to the Thirteenth Annual Meeting of the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank, and the concurrent Sedorid Annual Meeting of the International Finance Corporation, at New Delhi, India. The delegation included Under Secretary of State C. Douglas Dillon, who served as United States Alternate Governor, Senators J. W. Fulbright and A. Willis Robertson of the Senate Banking and Currency Committee, members of the National Advisory CouncU on Internatioriai Monetary and Financial Problems, United States Ambassador to India Ellsworth Bunker, Assistant Secretary of the Treasury Tom B. Coughran (United States Executive Director of the International Bank), Special Assistant to the Secretary of the Treasury Frank A. Southard, Jr. (United States Executive Director of the International Monetary Fund), and the President'of the Federal Reserve.Bank of New York, Alfred Hayes. !•• Secretary Anderson, in his address to the opening joint session, announced the intention of the United States to put before the Board of Governors resolutions calling for a study by the Executive Directors of the advisabUity and feasibUity of a general increase in quotas in the International Monetary Fund and a general increase in capital of the International Bank. The Secretary read in the course of his speech a message from the President of the United States expressing the President's concern that the Fund and the Bank have the resources to continue their work Over the following decade. \ Secretary Anderson also referred to the exchange of letters between himself and the President (see exhibit 35), in which the reasons for the United • * Since July 1958, Egypt and Syria have been regarded as a single member, the United Arab Republic, by both' the Fund and' the Bank. Spain and Libya joined both institutions in September-1958. The feffect of these chahges was to raise total membership iu the Fund and the Bank to 68 as of September 30, 1958. REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 59 States resolutions were set forth. The United States resolutions were subsequently adopted unanimously by the Boards of Governors, and the question of increased resources for the Fund and Bank was thereby referred to the Executive Directors for study and proposal of appropriate action. I n discussion of the Annual Report of the Fund, the Secretary commended the role played by the Fund, and spoke of the promising outlook for a strengthening of the world trade and payments situation. Assistant Secretary Coughran, addressing the Governors of the International Finance Corporation, expressed the hope that the following year would bring an expansion in the activities and usefulness of the Corporation. Secretary Anderson also made reference in his address to the opening joint session to the proposal for an International Development Association, to be affiliated with the International Bank. He indicated that the United States was not offering at this time a blueprint for such an association, but would welcome the informal viewS; of member governments. These views, together with the results of preliminary studies within the United States Government, would guide the United States in its decision on the appropriateness of further study and negotiation. Treasury exchange agreements During the fiscal year the Treasury Department renewed four existing exchange agreements and concluded two new agreements, all with countries in Latin America. Such agreements are intended to assist countries in the maintenance of monetary stability, and of a trade and payments system free from restrictions. Exchange agreements are often associated with a program of financial and economic reform. > The exchange agreement with Mexico (the oldest agreement in continuous effect, having been originally negotiated in 1941) was renewed in the amount of $75 million in January 1958 for a period of 2 years. The exchange agreement with Bolivia in the amount of $7.5 million was renewed on November 30, 1957, for a period of 1 month, and then was extended for a period of a year from December 31, 1957. The Treasury Department negotiated a 1-year exchange agreement with Peru for $17.5 million in February. This agreement replaces a similar one for $12.5 million, which had been periodically renewed since 1954. The exchange agreement with Chile was renewed in the amount of $10 million in April 1958 for a period of 1 year. Paraguay entered into a new 1-year exchange agreement for $5.5 million with the Treasury in August 1957. A short-term exchange agreement in; the amount of $5 million was in effect with Nicaragua from October 1, 1957, through March 31, 1958. In aU of these 60 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY instances except the Mexican one, a standby arrangement was concurrently entered into between the country concerned and the International Monetary Fund. No drawings were made under any of the Treasury exchange agreements. Foreign investment, the Export-Import Bank, the International Bank, and the International Finance Corporation : i n calendar 1957 American private investment abroad again increased by over $3 billion (including reinvested earnings), bringing such investment to an estimated total of approximately $37 billion as of December 31, 1957. The book value of direct investments in subsidiaries and branches of United States corporations constituted more than $25 billion, an increase of slightly Over $2 billion during the year. Other long-term investments (principally portfolio holdings) amounted to an estimated $8.3 billion, and short-term investments to $3.2 billion. During the first half of 1958 United States private investment abroad (excluding reinvested earnings of subsidiaries) continued at the high rate of about $1% billion for the 6 months. More than 40 percent of the increase in direct investment in 1957 was in Latin America (about $1.35 billion), while $870 million was added to the United States investment in Canada and about $475 million to United States direct investment in Western Europe. Investment in the petroleum industry again predominated, accounting for about-55 percent of the total increase in direct investment, with investment in manufacturing increasing by somewhat less than half as much. Investments in a number of other industries also showed increases. I n contrast to the rise in United States investment abroad, foreign assets and investments in the United States declined somewhat in 1957. A reduction in long-term investments, reflecting a decline in thcfmarket value of United States corporate stocks held by foreigners, WAS only partially offset by a relatively small increase in foreign holdings,of short-term assets and United States Government'obligations. The indebtedness of foreign countries to the United States Government under various loan and credit agreements, concluded principally since the end of World War II, amounted to $12.2 billion as of June 30, •1958. (See table 110.) These agreements included settlement of lend-lease, surplus property, and similar obligations, the loan under the Anglo-American Financial Agreeinent, loans by the ExportIiiiiport Bank, and obligations arising under the mutual security and foreign aid program. The Export-Import Bank.—During the fiscal year 1958, the ExportImport Bank authorized 191 new credits, totaling $856 milUon, in 30 REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 61 countries. The Bank during the same period approved 111 allocations and transactions totaling $46 million under credits authorized prior to July 1, 1957. Participation by private financial institutions in Export-Import Bank credits was larger than in any earlier 12month period. These participations, amounting to $223 million, were made in 21 of the Bank's credits in 11 countries, and were all for the account and risk of the private institutions. The largest single credit during the period was to India for $150 million to assist in carrying out the second 5-year plan. Japan received two credits, totaling $175 million, for the purchase of cotton and other agriciUtural commodities in the United States, as well as several project loans for steel mills and the electric power industry. Colombia received two credits, totaling $138 mUlion. The remaining credits were of smaller amounts, and were widely dispersed geographically. The Bank also made its first loans in a foreign currency during the year, under Public Law 480, the Agricultural Trade Development and Assistance Act of 1954, as amended (7 U.S.C. 1704(e)). Under Section 104(e) of this act, the Bank may receive up to 25 percent of the proceeds in foreign currencies of sales of agricultural commodities under Public Law 480. Commodity sales agreements negotiated by the Department of Agriculture included provisions making the currencies of 18 countries available for loans by the Export-Import Bank, and in June 1958, credits totaling 41 mUlion Mexican pesos ($3.3 mUlion) were authorized to borrowers in Mexico. In October 1957 the British Government drew $250 million of the $500 million line of credit which the Export-Import Bank had established in December 1956. This line of credit, which had been authorized to make dollars available for the importation of United States goods and services, and for dollar costs of petroleum and petroleum products, was designed to assist in relieving some of the pressure on the British pound which accompanied the Suez Canal difficulties. Principial repayments begin 3 years after disbursements and are to be made in semiannual installments over 4)^ years thereafter. Interest is chargeable at 4% percent, payable semiannually. The original deadline for drawing the balance of $250 million under the line of credit was February 28, 1958. However, the credit availability was subsequently extended for an additional year. In accordance with the recommendation contained in the President's budget message, legislation was enacted by the Congress to increase the lending authority of the Bank by $2 billion, and was signed by the President on May 22. Including this increase the uncommitted lending authority of the Bank on June 30, 1958, was slightly less than $2.5 billion. 62 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Net income for the year amounted to $66.5 million, from which dividends of $22.5 million were paid on the capital stock of the Bank held by the Secretary of the Treasury. The net reserves of the Bank, representing undistributed earnings, stood at $487 mUlion on June 30, 1958. The International Bank.—During the fiscal year 1958 the International Bank made 34 loans in 18 countries and territories, equivalent to $711 million. This total was more than three-quarters larger than the annual average of the preceding 3 years, and disbursements, at nearly $500 mUlion, were more than 50 percent greater. Asia was the chief recipient, with India ($165.5 mUlion), Japan ($77 mUlion), ThaUand ($66 mUlion), Pakistan ($49.2 million), and the Philippines ($21 mUlion) each obtaining one or more loans. Latin Amjerica received the next largest total, $121 million; the largest single loan, of $75 mUlion, was to Italy; and a number of loans were made to other European countries and to Africa. Nearly half the Bank's lending during the year was for improvements in transportation, with electric power (long in first place), industry, and agriculture accounting for the balance. In three instances, involving Belgium, South Africa, and the Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasaland, respectively, the Bank's loans were part of joint operations in which the borrowers simultaneously obtained funds in the private capital market. There was also participation by private capital in 22 of the year's 34 loans, and sales of parts of the Bank's loans, including these participations, totaled $87 mUlion, all without the Bank's guarantee. As of June 30, 1958, the Bank had made .204 loans in 47 member countries and territories equivalent to $3.7 billion, and had disbursed $2.8 billion. The funded debt of the Bank increased by $625 million during the year, and amounted on June 30, 1958, to the equivalent of $1,658 million. Membership in the Bank corresponds to the membership of the Fund (see supra). The International Finance Corporation.—The International Finance Corporation's first complete fiscal year of operation coincided with the period of this report. On June 30, 1958, the membership of the Corporation numbered 55 countries, with applications pending from Ireland and Libya. Members' subscriptions to capital amounted to $93.3 million of which the United States had subscribed $35.2 million, or 37.7 percent. The Corporation had by June 30 made nine investment commitments to companies located in Australia, Brazil (four), Chile, Mexico (two), and Pakistan. These commitments amounted to $9.5 million, net of cancellations. The largest single commitment was for $2.45 million for expansion of motor vehicle production facilities in Brazil, and the smallest ($450,000) was in the same country to enlarge a REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 63 plant producing automotive parts. Disbursements on the Corporation's investments amounted to $3.3 million at the end of the fiscal year. Negotiations were well advanced for investments by the Corporation in several additional projects. Coordination of loan policies In accordance with its statutory authority, the National Advisory Council on International Monetary and Financial Problems, of which the Secretary of the Treasury is chairman, continued to coordinate the policies and operations of the representatives of the United States on the International Monetary Fund, the International Bank, the International Finance Corporation, and of all agencies of the Government (such as the Export-Import Bank, the Development Loan Fund, etc.) which make or participate in making foreign loans or which engage in foreign financial, exchange, or monetary transactions. International trade and payments There was only limited progress toward a freer world trade and payments system during fiscal 1958. A relatively unfavorable atmosphere in world payments made it necessary for most countries to concentrate on maintaining measures of liberalization instead of breaking new ground. To the extent that past gains were maintained, the year's developments may be considered satisfactory. Several currencies of Western Europe were made more freely transr ferable during the period under review. Italy added significantly to the list of countries among which ^^multilateral lira" arrangements are effective. France and Sweden took steps in a similar direction. The so-called ^Taris Club" scheme, by which payments were multilateralized between Argentina aiid 11 Western European countries, was formalized and extended in November 1957 to include West Germany. A roughly parallel arrangement between Brazil and eight Western European countries continued in force during the year. Finland negotiated arrangements with its Western European trading partners, enabling it to use its export earnings on a multilateral basis. There was little net reduction in the use of quantitative restrictions through the year. However, discrimination against the dollar area, through quantitative restrictions or otherwise, was further reduced in many sectors of trade, although it remained an important factor in trade in manufactured consumer goods. The International Monetary Fund's drive to simplify or eliminate complex multiple rate systems in member countries continued, to yield results. Brazil, China, Ecuador, Nicaragua, Paraguay, 'and Yugoslavia were amorig those reducing the complexity of their exchange systems.. Finland moved to a unitary rate system at the time of its devaluation in September 1957. 479641--59 6 64 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY The European Payments Union was renewed in June 1958 for another year (to June 30, 1959) without change in the settlement basis of 75 percent in gold and 25 percent in credit, which has been in effect since August 1, 1955, and also without change in the provision for replacing the Payments Union with a European Monetary Agreement if the Union should be terminated. The Rome Treaty establishing the European Economic Community, better known as the Common Market, came into force on January 1, 1958. Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Luxembourg, and the Netherlands are member states. The Common Market provides for the gradual elimination of customs duties and other obstacles to trade and the free movement of persons, services, and capital within the Community. Among the institutions established by the Community are the European Investment Bank, which will finance projects within the Community, and the Development Fund which will make grants to the associated overseas territories of the member states. Parallel with the establishment of the European Economic Community was the setting up by the same countries of the European Atomic Energy Community (Euratom) for the purpose of developing nuclear industries. I t shares the same Court of Justice and Assembly as the European Economic Community and the European Coal and Steel Community. The United States is cooperating with the work of Euratom through the Euratom Cooperation Act of 1958 (Public Law 85-846). . A French financial mission headed by M. Jean Monnet held discussions in Washington in January 1958 on the French financial situation with representatives of the United States Government. The United States was represented in these talks by the Secretary of the Treasury, by C. Douglas Dillon, then Deputy Under Secretary of State for Economic Affairs, and by the President of the ExportImport Bank, Samuel C. Waugh. The French Government simultaneously conducted similar discussions with the International Monetary Fund and the European Payments Union. During the discussions the French representatives described the financial program which was being adopted by the French Government and Parliament for the purpose of eliminating infiation, achieving equilibrium in the French balance of payments, and restoring financial stability. In view of this French financial program, the European Payments Union agreed to extend to France credits equivalent to $250,000,000; the International Monetary Fund agreed to make available to France the equivalent of $131,250,000; and the United States agreed to extend to France certain financial facilities amounting to $274,000,000 (see exhibit 38). ' . ' REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 65 "Secretary Anderson headed the United States, delegation, to the Economic Conference of the Organization of American States held in Buenos Aires in August 1957. I n his statement to the Conference the Secretary stressed the importance of cooperation among the American republics, the interest which the United States had in the expansion of their trade and economic development, and the significance of private capital investment in Latin America. The text of the Secretary's statement was reprinted as exhibit 17 in the 1957 Annual Report. . Secretary Anderson and the Chancellor of the Exchequer of the United Kingdom, the Rt. Hon. Peter Thorneycroft, held a discussion in September. 1957 on various economic problems of mutual interest. Informal meetings were also held with British representatives in Washington in February 1958 and again in May. The Secretary of the Treasury, together with Secretary of State Dulles, Secretary of Agriculture Benson, and Secretary of Commerce Weeks, represented the United States at the third meeting of the Joint United States-Canadian Committee on Trade and Economic Affairs held in Washington in October 1957. The Committee examined a wide range of subjects, including domestic economic developments in the United States and Canada, the trade policies of the two Governments, agricultural policies and surplus disposal activities (especially those relating to wheat), the trade in,agricultural products between the two countries. United States investment in Canada, United States policies affecting Canadian mineral products, and a number of other specific questions of special interest to both sides. At the Heads of Government Meeting of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization in December, decisions were taken on such matters as the establishment of nuclear stockpUes in the NATO area and the provision of American intermediate-range ballistic missUes to NATO forces. The Secretary of the Treasury participated in the meeting as a member of the United States delegation. In: March meetings were held with the Miriister of Economics of the Federal Republic of Germany, Dr. Ludwig Erhard, who met with Secretary Anderson and with the President and the Secretary of State. These discussions covered the economic situation in the United States and iri Germany, international trade and payments questions, and economic development of the lessrdeveloped countries. The Treasury participated in the twelfth regular meeting of the Contracting Parties to the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade in October 1957, as well as in the April 1958 meeting of the Intersessional Committee consisting of all the Contracting Parties. This interse^sional meeting was concerned, primarily with problems expected to arise from the creation oi the European Economic Com- 66 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY munity. Extensive discussions were held in which members of the European Economic Community participated fully and as a result of which understandings were reached regarding procedures for consultation between members and nonmembers designed to mitigate the untoward effects which some nonmember countries anticipate from the operation of the European Common Market. As indicated in the last Annual Report, the Contracting Parties at their twelfth session also considered certain proposals of the International Chamber of Commerce designed to abolish or ameliorate the incidence of certain onerous customs formalities. These proposals pertain to the certification of consular invoices, the nationality of imported goods, and marks of origin. Discussion revealed that further work would be required in each of these areas, and therefore additional consideration will be given to these proposals at the thirteenth meeting of the Contracting Parties. The Treasury was also represented during the year on United States delegations to the Organization for European Economic Cooperation, various United Nations bodies, the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization, and the Colombo Plan Organization. Foreign assets control For the purpose of preventing Communist China from obtaining foreign exchange through the exportation of merchandise to the United States, the Foreign Assets Control Regulations prohibit the unlicensed purchase and importation into the United States of Communist Chinese or North Korean merchandise, as well as numerous other commodities therein specified which are of types that have historically come from China in the past. The Control does not issue licenses authorizing importation of Chinese-type merchandise unless satisfactory evidence of their non-Communist Chinese origin is presented Importation under general licenses is authorized with respect to specific shipments of Chinese-type merchandise certified to be of non-Communist Chinese origin by the government of a foreign country from which they were directly exported, provided that the country in question has set up procedures for certification pursuant to standards agreed to by the Treasury Department. The following Go^^ernments now have such certification procedures: Australia, Formosa, France, Hong Kong, India, Italy, Japan, the Netherlands, Switzerland, Viet-Nam, and the Republic of Korea. Notices of the availability of certificates of origin for particular commodities and of the governments prepared to issue them are published from time to time in the Federal Register. During the year, the Government of India entered into a certification agreement, and a number of addi- REVIEW OF FISCAL OPERATIONS 67 tional individual items became available for certification under existing agreements with other governments. The enforcement measures of the Control resulted in a number of siiCGessful criminal prosecutions. Substantial amounts representing crimiria! penalties and fines imposed by the courts and sums paid in mitigation of civU penalties were paid to the Treasury Department. The largest of these involved sales and shipments of leaf tobacco to Communist Chinese-controlled firms in Hong Kong, and in cases involving illegal importations of Chinese bristles, gallnuts, and tussah silk waste. Effective May 1, 1958, the Egyptian Assets Control Regulations were revoked, under advice of the Department of State, thereby unblocking assets in the United States of the Suez Canal Company and the Egyptian Government that were blocked pursuant to these Regulations. In addition, the Control exercised responsibilities with respect to blocked accounts of approximately $9 million received from the sale of a Czechoslovak-owned steel mill, sold pursuant to an order issued by the Secretary on March 25, 1954. At the end of the fiscal year, a bill was pending in Congress to devote these funds to the satisfaction of the claims of American citizens whose property had been nationalized by Czechoslovakia. The Treasury Department testified in favor of this bill, which was passed and became Public Law 85-604 on August 8, 1958. Pursuant to this statute, the funds were centralized in an account in the Treasury and will be available for the payment of awards to Americans whose claims are appro^'ed by the Foreign Claims Settlement Commission. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS Management Improvement Program Achievements of the management improvement program in the fiscal year 1958 clearly demonstrate the interest and support of the Bureau heads. Significant actions taken resulted in estimated annual savings of over $6% million, including more than $1 million from the incentive awards program. These savings, which are summarized under various headings in this report and in the Bureau reports which follow, have been accomplished without adversely affecting the collection of revenue or reducing essential services to the public, despite major increases in workload throughout the Treasury Department. Other savings and economies were made also. The Bureau of the Mint acquired surplus copper from the Navy at $90,000 less than the commercial market price. Likewise, the Department acquired surplus equipment, mostly laboratory items, valued at $100,000, from surplus inventories of other Governmerit agencies. The Department declared excess to its needs real properties with a total acquisition cost of $640,000 and reported them to the General Services Admuiistration for disposal; and the Bureau of the Mint made available to other Federal agencies space in the Mint Building in San Francisco amounting to 92,000 square feet with an annual rental value of $230,000. The management improvement program has placed great emphasis on analysis and review of manpower utilization within the Treasury. Various evaluations have resulted in more efficient use of available personnel and limitations on increasing personnel. The number of civilian employees on the rolls decreased from 78,376 as of June 30, 1957, to 77,467 on June 30, 1958 (see table 124). In December 1957 Secretary Anderson sent a memorandum to all Treasury supervisors asking for their cooperation in keeping up with rising workloads without increasing personnel. The Secretary asked that each supervisor submit his own economy suggestions and invite each of his employees to submit suggestions. As a result, 4,749 suggestions were submitted in the first half of calendar 1958 compared with 3,002 in the last half of 1957. In one bureau alone suggestions increased from 25 to 802. The incentive awards program has contributed approximately onesixth of all tangible savings from management improvements. This program brings employees into active participation in management. Employee participation in the suggestion program increased 20 percent. The number of awards granted for superior work performance and special acts or service increased 6 percent each. The Coast Guard initiated a military awards program designed to reward military personnel for contributions to improving the efficiency and economy of its operations. A comparison of overall results for fiscal 1957 and 1958 appears in table 125. Training, executive, and supervisory development The Department continued to develop and expand its own training facilities and took advantage, where possible, of training programs offered by outside sources. Upon nomination by the Department, one employee received a fellowship offered through the American Management Association's Management Course Scholarships, and 71 72 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY three employees attended the Brookings Institution's Executive Management Conference. Six employees were awarded scholarships: Two by the Department of Agriculture Graduate School, three by Southeastern University, and one by George Washington University. More than 60 newly appointed management interns attended nine orientation sessions given by the Ofl&ce of the Secretary. The Internal Revenue Service conducted summer management development institutes for 836 management oflficials, and 60 officials from several other Treasury bureaus attended. Accounting improvements A number of significant improvements were made in accounting. As a result of action during the year, accrual accounting, including monetary property accounting, is now employed with respect to appropriation and fund accounting throughout the Treasury Department. A study of the Public Debt accounting system has resulted in discontinuance of posting certain detailed redemption ledgers and simplification of balance .sheets refiecting audit activity. The Treasurer's Oflfice no longer maintains detaUed cash accounts of public debt principal transactions, but records information relating to such transactions in summary form. This procedure resulted in annual savings of 8 man-years estimated at $33,600. A comprehensive statement of accounting developments is contained in the Report on Accounting Developments in the Treasury Department jor the jiscal year 1958, prepared by the Bureau of Accounts. Safety program In May the Treasury Safety Council marked its tenth anniversary. Since the CouncU's inception there has been a 29 percent improvement in the accident safety rate. The accident frequency ratio ^ o f t h e Treasury Department in the calendar year 1957 was 4.7 as compared with 4.8 in 1956. At the annual M a y meeting of all bureau heads, the Secretary presented two National Safety Council awards to the U. S. Coast Guard for exceptional service in the promotion of safety through its publications: Proceedings oj the Merchant Marine Council, and Sajety N^ws. The Secretary also presented the Treasury Safety Award to nine units of the Bureau of Accounts; the U. S. Secret Service; the Oflfice of the Comptroller of the Currency; and to the Internal Revenue Service in recognition of the performance of functions for an extended period without a lost-time injury. The Treasury was one of five Departments with 50,000 or more employees riominated for the President's Safety Award for its 1957 program. Equipment modernization . During the fiscal year 1958, modernization of equipment resulted in substantial reductions in processing costs. The Bureau of Engraving and Printing now has in use eight new sheet-fed rotary intaglio presses. The production attained during the changeover and the 29 percent increase achieved in the first full month of operation indicate annual savings of 270 man-years estimated at $1,000,000. The Bureau has installed five high-speed presses for the production of postage stamps * The number of disabling injuries per man-hours worked. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 73 t o replace 29 presses which had been in operation for over 40 years. Annual savings of 47 man-years are estimated at-$180,000. • Internal Revenue payroll operations for the Atlanta, Boston, Cincinnati, New York, and PhUadelphia regions and the national oflice (approximately .32,000 pay accounts) were centralized in the Northeast" Service Center at Lawrence, Mass., on tabulating equipment. Personnel analysis reporting, year-end reports, and reports of 1959 financial plans were furnished from this centralized payroll record. The Bureau of the Public Debt is installing at its new offices in Parkersburg, W. Va., a new large-scale computer to handle the accounting of all Series E savings bonds in punch card form. Installation of equipment, including the central processor unit, was begun in Marcli 1958 by the DATAmatic Company. The Coast Guard has installed cardatype equipment to handle its Reserve personnel accounting, payroll activities, and property accounting. I B M 305 Ramac computer installations were made in New York for merchant vessel reporting and at the Coast Guard Yard, Curtis Bay, for all fiscal functions including payroll operations, •cost accounting, and materiel control. . Paperwork management and records disposal Control of paperwork was a major management objective of the bureaus during the year. The Internal Revenue Service is using copying machines to reproduce copies of examiners' reports; has adopted a simplified method of requisitioning stock room supplies by a supply issue book; and has adopted a simplified audit operations production report which reduces the amount of information to be recorded on examination record cards by technical audit personnel in field offices. The Office of the Treasurer has installed a new tape ffiing system to account for outstanding checks. This is a tape file consisting of descriptions of checks that remain outstanding and is updated periodically as these checks are paid or additional outstanding checks are added. Used with the electronic data processing equipment this tape file reduced machine time by over 40 percent. The Coast Guard, pursuant to the act of May 10, 1956 (46 U. S. C. a-g), effective June 1, 1958, must inspect all vessels which carry more than six passengers. The resulting increase in paperwork has been eased by a new consolidated form which eliminated 5 report card forms and replaced 3 others. Total records disposed of amounted to 110,133 cubic feet and the total transferred to the Federal Record Centers and the Archives amounted to 183,102 cubic feet. Organizational analysis To achieve greater efficiency in operations. Treasury bureaus give constant scrutiny to their organizational structures. The following changes have been made during the year. The Bureau of Accounts has obtained additional improvements in operations by merging the Examining Unit and Processing Unit of 74 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY the Miscellaneous Payments Branch, abolishing the Check Assignment and Custody Section, and reorganizing the Claims and Correspondence Branch and Payments Service Branch. These improvements resulted in estimated annual savings of $61,000. The Coast Guard eliriiinated seven manned lights by converting some to automatic unattended stations and by discontinuing others. One radarbeacon station was discontinued. As a direct result, 29 billets were released and reassigned to other stations. Refinery operations at the San Francisco Mint were discontinued at the end of fiscal 1957, and the mint is now being operated as an assayoffice and depository only. This is resulting in an annual saving estimated at $151,000. After the adoption of the new punch card savings bonds, the Chicago and New York savings bonds audit branches of the Bureau of the Public Debt were closed and operations transferred to the Cincinnati savings bonds audit branch, which will process all transactions of old bonds. The punch card savings bonds wUl be processed electronically at the new Piairkersburg, W. Va., office. Procedural changes Evaluation of operating procedures during the past fiscal year resulted in the adoption of new and more efficient methods for handling workloads of large volume. Some of these procedural changes are described in the following paragraphs. The Bureau of Accounts has adopted a simplified procedure for verifying income tax refund checks, improved procedures relating to claims for substitute checks, and combined microfilming and check signing functions into a single operation. The Internal Revenue Service reported that although the number of taxpayers (11 million) assisted was about the same as in 1957, there was a decrease of 12 percent in the number of man-days required in 1958. Through encouragement of self-help and use of the telephone question-answering service the number of taxpayers assisted per manday increased from 82 in 1957 to 91 in 1958. Internal Revenue supervisors-in-charge now determine the frequency and scope of special inspections to be made at producing and bottling plants on an individual plant basis rather than an arbitrarUy required number of special inspections each year. Manpower utilization surveys The Treasury's rising workload has made it increasingly necessary to apply its existing work force in the most effective manner. Examples of attainments in fiscal 1958 in improving utUization of manpower foUow. Bureau of Customs management teams, in the course of inspecting 50 of the 104 customs districts, reevaluated manpower requirements in terms of existing and anticipated workloads. Simplified procedures and other improvements resulted in a net reduction of seven positions. Following studies of manpower utUization in the United States Savings Bonds Division, 25 positions were eliminated. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 75 The Bureau of Engraving and Printing. coii4,ncted a review of its Guard Services Section, including a physical inspection of all guard posts. With the overall consideration for manpower requirements but without relaxing or sacrificing the security protective service, nine positions were eliminated. A survey of clerical and operating procedures in the Surface Printing Division resulted in a reduction of 16 positions. Examples of projects under study The search for ways to improve management is a continual process. Each Treasury bureau has identified and selected new projects to be studied and analyzed during the coming year. A few of these major projects are listed below. 1. The Bureau of Accounts is making a study of the feasibility of applying automatic data processing systems to the accounting operations in the Division of Central Accounts.' 2. The Division of Disbursement, in cooperation with the Veterans Administration, is developing coordinated procedures for the mechanization of due-date insurance. Also, both agencies are considering plans for a centralized computer installation to speed up monthly benefit checks to veterans. 3. The Comptroller of the Currency conducted an extensive survey of its Statistical Division to determine the practicability of mechanizing its work. As a result, additional surveys are being made by the IBM, Remington Rand, and Burroughs companies. 4. On the basis of a proposal by the Post Oflfice Department, the Bureau of Customs and the Post Office Department worked out a new system for controlling collections of duties and taxes assessed on merchandise not exceeding $250 imported by mail. By remitting collections through the 15 regional comptroller offices of the Post Office Department to one central customs office the system will eliminate an estimated 500,000 remittances from hundreds of postmasters. 5. The Bureau of Engraving and Printing is studying the potential use of electronic equipment for processing requisitions from postmasters. This would enable the Bureau to furnish punch card data to be used in conjunction with the Post Office IBM equipment. 6. The Internal Revenue Service has under study a long-range project for application of improved mechanical and electronic techniques to fiscal accounting, budget, and related operations. The program for fiscal 1959 includes the conversion of payroll operations for the Chicago, Dallas, Omaha, and San Francisco regions to mechanized operation in the Western Service Center. 7. The Bureau of the Mint is modernizing the melting and rolling equipment at its PhUadelphia Mint. This equipment is expected to reduce production cost of coinage at that plant. 8. The Bureau of the Public Debt is undertaking a study of its accounting procedures involved in maintaining the Bureau's administrative accounts. 9. The United States Coast Guard is in process of converting the Atlantic Coast Light List to the Foto-List system of reproduction. 76 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY 10. The United States Secret Service is analyzing the redemption procedures of fraudulently altered United States paper money and coins. Possible elimination of procedures in the Counterfeit Forgery Section will reduce paperwork throughout the Service. 11. The Office of the Treasurer of the United States is programming for higher speed electronic equipment. They plan to install IBM 705 Model 3 in the Check Payment and ReconcUiation Division during the second quarter of fiscal 1960 to replace the present system. Bureau of the Comptroller of the Currency ^ The Bureau of the Comptroller of the Currency is responsible for the execution of laws relating to the supervision of national banking associations. Duties of the office include those incident to the formation and chartering of new national banking associations, the examination of all national banks, the establishment of branch banks, the consolidation of banks, the conversion of State banks into national banks, recapitalization programs, and the issuance of Federal Reserve notes. Changes in the condition of active national banks The total assets of the 4,606 active national banks in the United States and possessions on June 23, 1958, amounted to $122,469 milrlion, as compared with the total assets of 4,654 banks amounting to $112,792 million on June 6, 1957, an increase of $9,677 million during the year. The deposits of the banks in 1958 totaled $110,407 mUlion, which was $9,112 million more than in 1957. The loans in 1958 were $50,902 mUlion, exceeding the 1957 figure by $2,342 million. Securities held totaled $45,286 mUlion, an increase of $5,676 mUlion during the year. Capital funds of $9,476 mUlion were $732 mUlion more than in the preceding year. 1 More.detailed information concerning the Bureau of the Comptroller of the Currency is contained in the separate annual report of the Comptroller of the Currency. ADMINISTRATIVE 77 REPORTS Abstract of reports of condition of active national banks on the date of each report from J u n e 6, 1957, to J u n e 23, 1958 [In t h o u s a n d s of dollars] J u n e 6, 1957 (4,654 banks) : Oct. 11, 1957 (4,641 banks) , Dec. 31, 1957 (4,627 banks) M a r . 4, 1958 (4,622 banks) • J u n e 23, • 1958 (4,606' banks) ASSETS L o a n s a n d discounts, including overdrafts. U . S. G o v e r n m e n t securities, direct obligations... -.Obligations g u a r a n t e e d b y U . S. Government Obligations of States a n d political s u b d i visions _ O t h e r b o n d s , notes, a n d d e b e n t u r e s C o r p o r a t e stocks, i n c l u d i n g stocks of F e d eral Reserve B a n k s . T o t a l loans a n d securities.. _.. C a s h , balances w i t h other b a n k s , including reserve balances, a n d cash items in process of collection B a n k premises o w n e d , f u r n i t u r e a n d fixtures R e a l estate o w n e d other t h a n b a n k p r e m ises I n v e s t m e n t s a n d o t h e r assets indirectly representing b a n k premises or other real estate C u s t o m e r s ' liability on acceptances I n c o m e accrued b u t n o t y e t collected O t h e r assets T o t a l assets 48', 560,163 49,895, 576 50, 502, 277 49, 688,857 60, 902, 433 30,432,845 30,904,269 31,335, 767 31, 795, 874 34, 599,192 3,620 2,531 2,309 2,393 2,813 7, 259, 756 1,675,150 7,452, 643 1, 631, 550 7, 495,878 1,880, 706 7, 626, 441 1,927,818 8,364,896 2,045, 247 239,074 251,494 271, 708 274,438 88,170, 608 90,138,063 91,483,986 91,313,091 96,189,019 22, 588, 753 24, 208, 398 26,865,134 23, 633,476 24,032,436 1,141,472 1,177,168 1,187,155 1, 212, 207 1, 252, 651 37, 888 38,091 36,487 38,386 40.858 93,484 286.367 275,118 198, 280 104,147 343,075 252, 266 226, 654 116,139 374, 518 272,846 186, 375 118, 621 437, 646 276, 359 212.350 112, 791,970 116, 487,862 120, 522, 640 117, 242,136 121, 334, 263, 233, 766 949 311 825 122, 468,815 LIABILITIES D e m a n d deposits of i n d i v i d u a l s , p a r t n e r ships, a n d corporations T i m e deposits of i n d i v i d u a l s , p a r t n e r s h i p s , a n d corporations.__ D e p o s i t s of U . S. G o v e r n m e n t a n d postal savings D e p o s i t s of States a n d political s u b d i v i sions _ Deposits ofbanks _. O t h e r deposits (certified a n d cashiers* checks, etc.) Total deposits... D e m a n d deposits T i m e deposits Bills p a y a b l e , rediscounts, a n d other liabilities for borrowed m o n e y .'--. Mortgages or other liens on b a n k premises a n d o t h e r r e a l estate Acceptances o u t s t a n d i n g I n c o m e collected b u t n o t y e t earned Expenses accrued a n d u n p a i d . OtherliabilitiesTotal liabilities..-. 54, 380, 721 56,410,493 58, 715, 522 55,043,742 55,115,495 27, 761, 505 28, 737,084 29,138,727 29,882,234 31,329,692 2,061,630 2,405,939 2,424,137 2,174,693 4,994,800 7, 677, 687 7,967,347 7,176,372 8,403, 799 7,878,315 9,483,436 8,018, 405 8, 688,328 8, 611,982 8, 685,161 1,446,341 1, 274,991 1, 796,174 1,418, 851 1, 669, 619 101, 295,131 104,408, 678 109,436,311 105, 226, 253 110,406, 749 71,102,007 30,193,124 814,874 1,110 294, 708 538,493 613, 800 489, 687 104,047,8 73,320,107 77,880,965 72,437, 659 31,088, 571 31, 555,346 32, 788, 594 1,020,221 1,251 358, 738 588, 700 612, 260 436,827 75, 681,195 34, 725, 654 38,324 610,019 491,502 1,522 388, 616 576, 713 557,082 430,966 1,034 449,038 666.634 722. 667 423, 669 1,062 345, 382 693,004 621, 317 534,145 107,425,676 111, 429,423 107,999,314 112,993,161 CAPITAL ACCOUNTS Capitalstock Surplus U n d i v i d e d profits _. Reserves a n d r e t i r e m e n t account for pre; ferred stock T o t a l capital accounts 2, 706,473 4, 201, 661 1,602,630 2, 772, 530 4,320,927 1, 730,206 2,806, 213 4,416.426 1, 618,857 2,842,903 4, 448,129 1, 694, 533 233, 503 238, 624 . 251,721 267, 267 8, 744,167 9,062,187 9,093,217 9, 242,822 T o t a l liabilities a n d capital accounts. 112, 791,970 116,487; 862 120, 522,640 117, 242,136 2,867,859 4, 514, 485 1,839,600 253,710 9, 475, 664 122,468, 815 78 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Summary of changes in number and capital stock of national banks The authorized capital stock of the 4,602 national banks in existence on June 30, 1958, consisted of common stock aggregating $2,870 million, and preferred stock aggregating $3.5 million. The common stock of the 4,647 national banks in existence a year earlier amounted to $2,709 million and preferred stock to $3.8 million. During the year charters were issued to 20 national banks having an aggregate of $6.5 million of common stock. There was a net decrease of 45 in the number of national banks in the system by reason of voluntary liquidations, statutory consolidations and mergers, conversions to and mergers or consolidations with State banks under the provisions of the act of August 17, 1950 (12 U. S. C. 214), and one receivership. More detailed information regarding the changes in the number and capital stock of national banks in the fiscal year 1958 is shown in the following table. Organizations, capital stock changes, and liquidations of national banks, fiscal year 1958 Number of banks Capital stock Common Charters in force June 30, 1957, and authorized capital stock.. Increases: Charters issued — Capital stock: 198 cases by statutory sale 354 cases by statutory stock dividends. ...... 1 case by s'todk dividerid under.articles of association.. 31 cases, by statutory consolidation 17 cases by statutory merger 1 bank by new issue Restored to solvency 4,647 20 $3.791.170 6, 615,000 76,477,673 70,600,512 35,000 18,900,250 6,209,000 $800,000 250,000 178,987,435 Total increases.. Decreases: Voluntary liquidations Statutory consolidations.: ..Statutory mergers Conversions into State banks Merged or consolidated with State banks. Receivership Capital stock: 2 cases by statutory reduction 2 cases by statutory consolidation 3 cases by statutory merger... 4 cases by retirement. 1,000 4,317, 600 300,000 12,979,000 26,000 16,000 225,010 112,000 136,000' 1,068/000 66 Total decreases. Net change $2, 70S, 640,105 Preferred . Charters in force June 30, 1968, and authorized capital stock.. 4,602 18,094, 610 1,083,000 160,892,926 -283,000 2,869, 533,030 3,508,170 Bureau of Customs The Bureau of Customs is responsible for the assessment and collection of duties and taxes on imported merchandise and baggage; prevention of smuggling, undervaluations, and frauds on the customs revenue; apprehension of violators of the customs and navigation laws; entry and clearance of vessels and aircraft;dssuance of documents and signal letters to vessels of the United States; admeasurement of vessels; ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 79 collection of tonnage taxes on vessels engaged in foreign commerce; supervision of the discharge of imported cargoes; inspection of international traffic; control of the customs warehousing of imports; determination and certification for payment of the amount of drawback due upon the exportation of articles produced from duty-paid or taxpaid imports; enforcement of the antidumping and export control acts; regulation of the movement of merchandise into and out of foreign trade zones; and enforcement of the laws and regulations of other Government agencies affecting imports and exports. Collections • Revenue collected by the Customs Service during the fiscal ^^^ear 1958 totaled nearly $1,122 million, the largest in history. Compared with $1,059 million collected in 1957, there was an increase of nearly 6 percent. In addition to customs collections the total included certain internal revenue taxes for the Internal Revenue Service and some collections for other Government agencies. Customs collections alone amounted to almost $806 million, an increase of 5.9 percent over the $761 million coUected in 1957. They consisted of duties, tonnage taxes, fees, and fines and penalties for the violation of customs and navigation laws, etc. There was again a substantial increase in collections by Customs of internal revenue taxes on imported liquors, wines, perfumes, etc., which amounted to $316 million, 6 percent more than the $298 million collected in 1957. Of the customs collections more than $799 million were derived from duties (including import taxes) levied on imported merchandise! The source of duty collections by type of entiy is shown in table 88. The tables showing collections by tariff schedules and countries and values of dutiable imports which are usually included in this report (tables 86 through 90 in the 1957 report) are omitted this year because of technical difficiUties. I t is expected that they wUl be published in the next Annual Report. In 1958 considerably less than one-half of all imports into the United States were duty free and included some commodities imported free for Government stockpile purposes or authorized by special acts of Congress for free entry although dutiable under the Tariff Act of 1930, or taxable under the Internal Revenue Code such as copper and iron and steel scrap. The 55 percent which was dutiable constituted the basis of customs duties on imports. Collections of customs duties were at a higher level during each month of this fiscal year than at an}^ time in customs history. By customs districts.—Of the 45 customs districts in which collections are covered into the Treasury of the United States, all but 11 reported larger customs collections than in 1957. The collections for each customs district are shown in table 89. Extent of operations Vehicles and persons entering.—More than 39 mUlion vessels, aircraft, automobiles, buses, trains, and other vehicles entered our harbors or crossed our borders during the fiscal year 1958, bringing over 137K million persons, and more than 26 million persons walked across our borders.. All were subject to customs inspection. The number of various types oi vehicles and the number of persons entering the United States during 1957 and 1958 is shown in table 91, 479641—59 7 80 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY and the number of aircraft and passengers arriving in districts where this mode of travel is most prevalent is shown in table 92. Entries oj merchandise.—Imports into the United States reached a record peak in fiscal 1958. Formal entries of merchandise (consumption and warehouse and rewarehouse entries) exceeded 1 million for the third consecutive year; the 1,175,271 entries filed were 5.3 percent more than in 1957. Informal entries and baggage declarations covering both mail importations and other shipments valued at less than $250 rose 3.2 percent over 1957 to an alltime record of 3,776,940. All other types of entries showed similar increases. The number of each type of entry filed during the past 2 fiscal years is shown in table 90. Drawback transactions.—Drawback, which is allowed on the exportation of merchandise manufactured from imported materials and for certain other export transactions, usually amounts to 99 percent of the customs duties paid at the time the goods are entered. More than 95 percent of the drawback allowed in 1957 was due to the export of products manufactured from imported raw materials. The principal imported materials used in manufactured exports in 1958 were iron anci steel semimanufactures; tobacco, unmanufactured; watch movements; petroleum and products; aluminum; sugar; paper and manufactures; cotton cloth; lead ore, waste, pigs and bars; and tungsten ore. Tables 93 and 94 show the drawback transactions for the fiscal years 1957 and 1958. Appraisement oj merchandise {including Customs Injormation Exchange) .—The number of invoices and packages examined by appraisers' personnel continued to increase in fiscal 1958. There were 1,822,000 invoices filed in 1958, compared with 1,774,000 "^ during 1957, an increase of 2.7 percent. Packages examined in 1958 totaled 1,375,000, a slight increase over those in 1957. Appraising officers from Washington headquarters, with the assistance of personnel selected from various field offices, aided ports throughout the country to reduce the backlog of unappraised invoices. During 1958, this backlog decreased from 190,000 to 176,000, or by 7 percent. The valuation provision of the Customs Simplification Act of 1956 (19 U. S. C. 1402) became effective February 27, 1958. The effect of this provision on appraisement operations cannot yet be evaluated fully because of the short time it has been in existence. The Bureau of Customs worked closely with the Office of the Secretary in preparing necessary background and statistical material for presentation to Congress in connection with the proposed amendment to the Antidumping Act of 1921. The bill amending the act, passed by the House of Representatives during the first session of the 85th Congress, was considered by the Senate during the second session and was enacted August 14, 1958, as Public Law 85-630. Thirteen complaints of dumping under the Antidumping Act were received during the fiscal year 1958 as compared with 41 received in 1957. The probable cause for the decrease in the number of complaints was the pending legislation amending the act. Twenty-five dumping cases were disposed of during the year, leaving 26 cases 'Revised. ADMINISTRATIVE, REPORTS 81 under investigation at the end of 1958 as compared with 38 ^ at the end of 1957. The volume of countervailing duty cases was lower again in the fiscal year under review than in the previous year. Seven complaints were received, as compared with 12 in 1957. Eighteen countervaUing duty cases were disposed of during the year and 4 remained on hand at the end of the year. The activities of the Customs Information Exchange, New York City, continued on the upward trend as shown by the number of reports received from and disseminated to appraising officers. Appraisers' reports of classification and value covering a cross section of importations of merchandise received at each port totaled 63,000 in fiscal 1958, compared with 54,000 in the previous year. These reports indicate the relative number of commodity items received at any given port for the first time, as well as regular items received at new prices or subject to different terms of sale from previous shipments. Differences in classification and value indicate the number of instances where information varied at different ports and in which additional study and analysis were required before establishment of a uniform price or rate. The reports of value differences in fiscal 1958 increased to 6,886 from 6,118 in 1957. The number of differences in classification were 3,355 in 1958, while in 1957 there were 3,154, reflecting a slight increase in new commodities received. An increase in the variety of merchandise being imported is reflected in the number of foreign inquiries requiring detailed investigation abroad to procure information sufficient for appraisement purposes. There were 454 such inquiries in 1958 and 412 in 1957. Technical services.—This branch of the Customs Service furnishes chemical, engineering, statistical sampling, and other scientific and technical services; provides proper weighing and gauging equipment; designs and oversees the construction of border inspection stations; and directs thc'field operations of customs laboratories. In 1958 the laboratories analyzed more than 120,000 samples, about one-half of which consisted of ores and metals, sugar, and wool. The large majority were '^import'' samples of dutiable merchandise analyzed to develop and report facts needed for tariff classification purposes. Other types of samples tested included those taken from customs seizures, mostly narcotics and other prohibited articles; preshipment samples of articles intended for shipment to the United States, analyzed to assist in establishing their proper classification; and samples tested for other Government agencies. Statistical quality control of sample weighing operations, by making analyses of cargo sample weighing data to assure accuracy and precision within control limits, was continued during fiscal 1958. There were 786 such weighing operations, consisting of 583 cargoes of raw sugar, 51 cargoes of refined sugar, 146 cargoes of cigarette tobacco, and 6 cargoes of other merchandise. Statistical control over the verification of liquidations (final determination of duties and taxes due) was continued. The sampling guide, completely revised as a new part of the Customs Manual, should provide a more uniform and "•Revised. 82 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY equitable assessment of duties and taxes by extending the use of the proven sampling techniques to a wider range of commodities. Construction and installation of a 50-ton truck scale in Brooklyn, N. Y., was completed. In cooperation with the Immigration and Naturalization Service, three contracts were awarded for construction of border stations (station and two residences) under the $60,000 limitation. The General Services Administration continued development of plans for construction of 12 border stations over the customsimmigration $60,000 limitation. Plans for the construction of truck handling facilities by the General Services Administration were completed and approved at 7 locations. Six sites are in the process of being procured in anticipation of constructing border stations. Export control.—Export declarations authenticated declined in 1958 although the number of shipments examined and the number of seizures increased. The following table shows the volume of export control activities during fiscal 1957 and 1958. Activity 1957 E x p o r t declarations a u t h e n t i c a t e d •Shipments e x a m i n e d . N u m b e r of seizures V a l u e of seizures . E x p o r t control e m p l o y e e s - . . 4,596,141 ' 563, 790 309 ^ $738,822 198 1968 4, 562,437 564, 530 358 $460,005 194 Percentage increase, or decrease (—) -0.7 .1 15.9 -37.7 -2.0 «• Revised. Protests and appeals.—Reversing the trend of 1956 and 1957, there was a pronounced increase in the number of protests ffled by importers against the rate and amount of duty assessed and other decisions by the collectors. Appeals for reappraisement ffled by importers who did not agree with appraisers as to the value of merchandise were 87.7 percent more than in 1957. The increase was due, in part, to the Customs Simplification Act of 1956. The following table shows the number of protests and appeals filed and acted on during the fiscal years 1957 and 1958. 1957 P r o t e s t s a n d appeals Protests: F i l e d w i t h collectors b y i m p o r t e r s Allowed b y collectors D e n i e d b y collectors a n d forwarded to customs court Appeals fo'- r e a p p r a i s e m e n t filed w i t h collectors . 29,400 2.661 25, 664 15, 272 1958 37, 787 3,182 25,643 28, 664 Percentage increase, or decrease ( - ) 28.5 20.0 -.1 87.7 Marine activities.—The American merchant marine continued its steady growth as reflected in the total number of vessels documented at the close of the fiscal year as compared with 1957. On June 30, 1958, there were 46,071 vessels in the documented fleet compared with 44,680 "" on the corresponding date of the previous jesn. Of the total, slightly more than 4,000 were documented as 3'achts while ' Revised. ADMINISTRATIVE 83 REPORTS nearly 42,000 were authorized through documentation for commercia] use in foreign, coasting, or fishing trades. During the year 1,421 vessels were removed from documentation. The following table shows the volume of marine documentation activities during the fiscal years 1957 and 1958. Activity 1967 T o t a l vessels d o c u m e n t e d a t e n d of year D o c u m e n t s issued (registers, enrollments, a n d licenses) Licenses r e n e w e d a n d changes of m a s t e r endorsed Mortgages, satisfactions, notices of lien, bills of sale, a b s t r a c t s of t i t l e , a n d other i n s t r u m e n t s of title recorded A b s t r a c t s of title a n d certificates of ownership issued N a v i g a t i o n fines i m p o s e d T o n n a g e tax p a y m e n t s 1958 Percentage increase, or decrease (—) r 44, 680 15,371 47, 748 46,071 14, 277 46,153 3.1 -7.1 -3.3 13, 681 6,822 2,414 24, 739 12, 456 5,849 2,496 23, 363 -9.0 -14.3 3.4 -5.6 ' Revised. During the year, vessels of certain foreign countries posed a difficult problem by presenting two sets of papers describing the tonnage. Papers for some showed dual tonnages as open and closed shelter deckers. Others showed dual tonnages as ore or grain carriers. Since it was not practicable to verify the tonnage used, tonnage tax was charged upon the higher of the two net tonnages shown. The entire situation was under consideration at the end of the year for determining whether any satisfactory method of establishing the true applicable tonnage could be worked out. The following tabulation shows the number of entrances and clearances of vessels in fiscal 1957 and 1958. Vessel movements Entrances: Direct from foreign ports Via other domestic ports. . Total Clearances: Direct to foreign ports Via other domestic ports _ . Total 1957 .• . 1958 Percentage increase, or decrease (—) 54,423 28,857 51,822 33,067 —4.8 14.6 83,280 84,879 1.9 57, 511 29,630 46,447 32,946 —19.2 11.2 87,141 79,392 -8.9 Regulations were issued under recent congressional legislation governing the loss of coastwise privileges by vessels rebuilt in foreign shipyards. Waivers of navigation laws granted during the year related to various operations in connection with the construction of the Saint Lawrence Seaway and Power Project. The Department forwarded to the Congress certain draft legislation which would repeal existing statutes prohibiting the collection of fees in connection with the admeasurement, documentation, and inspection of vessels. If the proposed legislation is enacted into law, uniform charges will be prescribed under existing general authority to recover the Government's cost for the services provided. 84 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Legislation was enacted again during 1958 permitting certain Canadian vessels to provide service, principally passenger, to those ports in Alaska where American vessels do not now provide service. This year the legislation provides for termination of the authority when the Secretary of Commerce determines that American vessels are available to furnish such service. Legal problems and proceedings.'—The Office of the Chief Counsel considered many legal problems and questions arising in connection with the administration and enforcement of the customs and navigation laws and other related laws. Among these were various problems relating to classification and appraisement of imported merchandise; interpretation of enforcement provisions; rights and duties of Customs employees; delegations of authority to Customs officers; activities of customs brokers; drafting proposed legislation; preparing and reviewing reports on pending legislation; and preparing and reviewing customs regulations. Many of the questions considered arose in connection with amendments of the tariff act and other new legislation. Special consideration was given to questions arising in connection with the interpretation and implementation of the Customs Simplification Act of 1956; of laws relating to insular possessions; and to various matters relating to reimbursement for services and other benefits furnished to parties in interest. Much work was done in connection with new customs administrative bills which were introduced in the 85th Congress in August 1957 as H. R. 9424 and H. R. 9425. Attention was given also to matters that arose in connection with the proposed amendments in H. R. 6006 of the Antidumping Act of 1921. Assistance was given to the office of the Assistant Attorney General in charge of the trial and appeal of customs cases in the Customs Court and the Court of Customs and Patent Appeals, and also the Department of Justice in connection with litigation in the Court of Claims. To improve coordination and supervision of legal activities in New York, the solicitor to the collector of customs was made solicitor for the port of New York. The solicitor's function as legal adviser to the collector was combined with the additional functions of legal adviser to all other branches of the Customs Service in New York City, and supervising, on behalf of the Customs Service throughout the country, liaison with the attorneys of the Department of Justice charged with the trial of cases in the Customs Court. Law enforcement and investigative activities.—The Customs Agency Service conducted 16,282 investigations during fiscal 1958, compared with 16,473 in fiscal 1957, a decrease of 191 cases. These investigations arose not only under the customs, navigation, and related laws administered by the Bureau of Customs, but also in connection with a number of laws administered by other Government agencies and enforced by Customs. Table 96 shows the investigative activities for the fiscal years 1957 and 1958. Major enforcement problems involved the smuggling into the United States of narcotic drugs, diamonds, and watch movements, and the smuggling out of the country of arms, ammunition, and implements of war. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 85 One Customs enforcement officer was killed during this fiscal year, the first supreme sacrifice in line of duty made by an officer of the Customs Service since 1947. There was a substantial increase both in the number and amount of seizures of narcotic drugs and marihuana taken into custody. A total of 778 seizures was made during the year compared with 641'" in 1957. The drugs seized included 171 ounces of heroin, 1,710 ounces of smoking opium (of which 77 percent was seized in December 1957)^, 207 ounces of raw opium, and 39,641 ounces of marihuana. There were 2,275 marihuana cigarettes seized this year as compared with 7,868 seized in 1957. The largest seizure of marihuana ever made in the United States, 11,859 ounces, was accomplished in February 1958. This substantially equaled the total of the 3 largest seizures made in previous years. The marihuana problem on the Mexican border, where this type of illegal traffic enters the United States, shows no sign of abating. There seems to be a shift in the established ''trade route'' which formerly led from the border to New York City, but now has shifted to the Midwest, centered in the area around Chicago. Under the provisions of the Narcotic Control Act of 1956, which was in effect during the entire fiscal year, 219 arrests under the registration law were made and a total of 187 dispositions reported. In practically ever}^ case where a violator was sentenced to serve time, it was recommended that he be sent to a Federal hospital for treatment of narcotic addiction. Cocaine, which was largely out of the picture for several years, returned to prominence with three large seizures during the year, one at Miami and two at New York. Heroin continues to be received from both Europe and the Far East, while numerous shipments were intercepted on the Mexican border. The unlawful entry of watches and watch movements into this country continues one of the most important enforcement problems. Diamond smuggling apparently continues on a substantial scale, undoubtedl}^ motivated by the savings from evasion of income and luxury taxes and also by avoidance of the customs duty imposed by this Government. These diamond shipments usually originate in Belgium, with New York as the ultimate point of destination. The smuggling of arms, ammunition, and implements of war out of the country due to the confiict in Cuba has been another problem confronting our enforcement officers. This activity was confined principall}^ to New York and Miami and to ports on the Gulf of Mexico. The Mutual Security Act under which these attempted exports are prohibited is administered by the Department of State and enforced by the Bureau of Customs. Seizures of merchandise throughout the country during 1958 for violations of laws enforced by the Customs Service numbered 18,807, with an appraised value of $8,443,568, compared with 14,812 seizures in 1957, appraised at $11,596,706. This was an increase of 27 percent in the number of seizures, but a decrease of 27.2 percent in the appraised value. Title to only a small fraction of these seizures actually passes to the Government, as the majority are destroyed or remitted to the owners upon payment of fines or penalties. Details of seizures are shown in table 95. There were 1,268 arrests for violations of ' Revised. 86 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY laws enforced by the Bureau of Customs in 1958, or 369 more than i n 1957. The additional arrests stemmed largely from narcotic registration act cases and those involving violation of the Mutual Security Act. The number of arrests exceeds substantially the number in any one of the last 21 years. The following tabulation shows the number of arrests and dispositions during fiscal 1957 and 1958. 1958 1957 Activity 899 457 35 86 86 58 285 Arrests Convictions Acquittals Nolle pressed Dismissed Not indicted Under, or awaiting indictment. 1,268 704 25 61 247 13 372 Percentage increase, or decrease (—) 41.0 54.0 -28.6 -29.1 187.2 -77.6 30.5 Foreign trade zones.—Duties and intern ah revenue taxes collected on merchandise entered from Foreign Trade Zone No. 1 at Staten Island, N. Y., exceeded by more than $1}^ million the amount collected in fiscal 1957. Other activities in the zone showed a considerable decrease, however, 70 ships berthed in the zone to lade domestic ship's stores and 19 vessels used the zone facilities for discharging cargo from foreign countries. In Foreign Trade Zone No. 2 in New Orleans, La., the tonnage received declined, but the value of the merchandise received was increased b}^^ 40.5 percent over that in fiscal 1957. There was also an increase of approximately $282,000 in amount of duties and internal revenue taxes collected over those in 1957. For the second consecutive year, the volume of operations in Foreign Trade Zone No. 3 in San Francisco, Calif., declined. The only increase was in the value of merchandise delivered from the zone. There was a slight rise in the number of entries into Foreign Trade Zone No. 5 at Seattle, Wash., and in the number of long tons delivered from the zone. All other activities decidedly decreased. The following table contains a brief summary of foreign trade zone operations during fiscal 1958. Trade zone New York New Orleans San Francisco Seattle Number of entries] 4, 859 5,174 5,744 551 Received in zone Long tons 22, 660 33, 734 2,256 5,430 Value $20, 356, 946 21, 049, 413 2, 276,120 483, 852 Delivered from zone Long tons 25,503 26, 517 1,628 11, 606 Value $19, 245, 507 14,191,306 2, 289,112 765, 250 Duties and internal revenue taxes collected $4, 656, 672 1,314,362 169, 368 57, 478 Custoins ports oj entry, stations, and airports.—Ysleta, Tex., was abolished as a port of entry and by annexation is now within the port hmits of El Paso, Tex. The designations of Fort Pierce, Fla., and Taku Inlet, Alaska, as customs stations were revoked and a customs station at Grammerc}^-, La., was created during the year. The limits of the following ports were extended to include areas not heretofore 87 ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS covered: Fall River, Mass."; Jacksonville, Fla.; Houston, Tex.; Los Angeles, Calif.; and Green Bay, Wis. The name of the DetroitWa5me Major Airport, Detroit, Mich., was changed to the Detroit Metropolitan Wayne County Airport. Cost of administration During 1958 regular customs employment, both nonreimbursable and reimbursable, increased slightly, whUe employment financed by funds from the Departments of Agriculture and Commerce decreased. The following table shows employment data during the fiscal years 1957 and 1958. Operation Regular c u s t o m s operations: Nom'eimbursable _ Reimbursable 1 . 1957 _ . . . . _ T o t a l regiilar "customs e m p l o y m e n t E x p o r t control A d d i t i o n a l inspection for D e p a r t m e n t of jVgricultui'e Total employment - 1958 Percentage increase, or decrease ( - ) 7,175 289 7,187 291 0 2 .7 7,464 198 171 7,478 194 170 .2 —2 0 -.6 7,833 7,842 .1 1 Salaries reimbursed to the Government by those private firms who received the exclusive services of these employees. Customs operating expenses totaled $51,878,261, including export control expenses for which the Bureau was reimbursed by the Departr ment of Commerce, and the cost of additional inspection reimbursed by the Department of Agriculture. Management improvement program The Customs management improvement program is designed to facilitate international trade and travel, and develop an efficient customs organization. Management actions taken in 1958 to simplify customs procedures and improve the utilization of personnel, space, and equipment produced annual recurring savings in manpower equal to 49 man-years valued at $267,000. The bulk of these savings consisted of manpower released from certain areas of Customs activity as a result of management and procedural improvements and reassigned, to other areas where increased worldoads required additional resources not avaUable from budgeted funds. In addition, onetime savings of $61,000, representing the value of equipment obtained without cost to the customs appropriation, were also realized. The total savings of $328,000 enabled Customs to meet an overall workload increase of approximately 5 percent without significantly increasing the average number of employees. Marked progress was also made in the Bureau's continuing program of customs simplification. Descriptions of some of the more important legislative and administrative improvements follow. Legislation.—Two laws sponsored by Customs and enacted during the 2d Session of the 85th Congress are of particular interest and benefit to manufacturers who use imported materials in new products which are subsequently exported. Public Law 85-414, approved 88 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY May 16, 1958, permits the free importation of merchandise and materials to be used for such purposes under a temporary importation, bond. Formerly, it was necessary to make a formal entry of the merchandise and deposit the duties which were then refunded as drawback when the new products were exported. Public Law 85-673, approved August 18, 1958, extends to all classes of merchandise the privilege of substituting domestic merchandise for imported merchandise in order to obtain a refund of duties when the new product is exported. The provisions of this law will enable manufacturers to reduce inventory control costs and simplify materials stockpiling. Other legislation. Public Law^ 85-925, approved September 2, 1958, permits automobiles rented abroad by United States residents to be imported free under certain conditions. In view of the increased use of rented automobUes in recent years, this law will do much to facilitate motor vehicle travel across United States borders. Delegations of authority.—To expedite the refund of duties on transactions in field offices and reduce the number of cases referred to Washington headquarters, collectors of customs were authorized to extend the time allowed for the return to Customs custody and exportation of merchandise not conforming to sample or specification. Collectors were also authorized to approve certain supplemental drawback statements filed by manufacturers operating under existing rates of drawback and to amend these rates to cover the desired changes. Some of the delays and difficulties in recruiting and placing new personnel were eliminated by giving principal field officers the authority to appoint individuals before completion of qualifications and fitness investigations when such action is warranted. Authority was delegated also to field officers to approve certain applications to engage in outside emplo^^ment and acquire private interests in business. Previously, all such cases were referred to Washington for decision. Entry of merchandise.—Installation of a modern conveyor belt system for processing foreign mail parcels at the port of New York was completed and placed in operation early in the year. This equipment has reduced the labor required to move some 18 million mail parcels annually through customs inspection and examination and has prevented the accumulation of large backlogs that formerly occurred. In addition, it has been possible to expand the operations at New York to include the examination of ordinary and insured mail packages valued at $250 or less which were formerly sent from the New York Post Office to Baltimore and Philadelphia for customs treatment. The increased efficiency and capacity of the New York mail division as a result of this installation effected personnel savings of 16 man-years with annual recurring savings of $80,000. Simplified procedures were adopted to clear articles purchased abroad by United States residents which are shipped or mailed separately, and are entitled to free en try, under tourist exemptions. A returning resident, who declares such ^'articles to follow" at the port of arrival is now furnished with a new form of declaration which he retains until the articles actually arrive. At that time a new declaration, when properly executed, may be tendered to postal or customs authorities in lieu of duties and taxes levied on the shipment. The exemptions so allowed are post audited. Under the old procedures, unaccompanied tourist purchases were released only upon payment of ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 89 the duties which were afterward refunded, or were held by Customs until the claim for exemption could be verified. In order to make the new declaration available on as wide a basis as possible, it was also printed on the reverse of a newly designed entry form used for informal mail shipments (less than $250 in value)-, and thus will automatically accompany all informal mail shipments delivered by the post office. Large passenger vessels operating between New York and foreign ports have adopted, on an optional basis, a new form of crew declaration which makes unnecessary the preparation by steamship personnel of a separate itemized list of crew purchases made abroad. Companies operating vessels with large crews predict substantial savings in administrative costs by utilizing the new procedure. The application of modern sampling techniques to the inventory of imported merchandise stored in customs bonded warehouses has reduced operating costs for warehouse proprietors without significant loss of customs control. Formerly, a complete physical inventory was required annually. Specified periods of time were established for retention by importers and manufacturers of certain records dealing with leather importations, bonded wool or hair, smelting and refining, imported wheat, and drawback claims. Since no retention period had ever been specified, these records were being retained indefinitely at considerable expense. New instructions were issued providing for immediate processing of claims for shortages of merchandise and notification to the importer if no allowance in duties or taxes would be made. Formerly, action on shortage claims was suspended until final determination of duties and taxes which could be several months after shortages occurred. Such clarification of Customs - practice in allowing or disallowing claims for shortages benefits importers, brokers, and attorneys. A program was inaugurated on April 10, 1958, of publishing in the weekly Treasury Decisions a continuing series of abstracts of unpublished Bureau decisions on matters of interest to Customs and the importing public. Usually issued in response to specific requests from importers and brokers, they cover a wide range of customs problems including tariff classification, entry requirements, and marking to indicate country of origin. Wide dissemination of these decisions assists importers, brokers, and agents in complying with Customs laws and regulations, and expedites entry and clearance of imported merchandise. Information on Customs requirements and procedures in pamphlet or sheet form is now available for free distribution. These '^Customs Handouts" are brief nontechnical summaries of the most common problems encountered by the public. They are used extensively in the Washington headquarters and in the field offices in answering inquiries from the public. Other improvements included: A new special customs invoice to replace a foreign service form made obsolete by elimination of consular certification; a new mail entry form with a window envelope to eliminate hand addressing of 800,000 envelopes annually; simplified procedures for entering noncommercial mail importations valued at more than $250 to reduce customs formalities for individuals importing merchandise for personal or household use; elimination of intransit '90 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY manifests on empt}^ rail cars moving through Canada between the Niagara and MicJtiigan frontiers, to reduce further the documentation requirements on the Canadian border; the use of a single unconditionally free entry to enter several shipments of merchandise received on the same day, each valued at $250 or less, in lieu of one entry for each shipment; and arrangements to transfer intact merchandise landed in truck trailers and lift vans to a central distribution facility for entry, examination, and release. Liquidation of entries.—Continued efforts were made to increase liquidation production and reduce the backlog of unliquidated entries. (Liquidation is the final determination of duties and taxes on imported merchandise.) Measures taken include the transfer of 23,000 entries from ports with heavy backlogs to ports with seasonal surpluses of manpower, and the liquidation of 37,000 unconditionally free entries at district subports. In several districts management inspection teams reorganized entry and liquidating divisions so as to increase both the total manpower assigned to liquidating and the output of each liquidator. Additional personnel, obtained from existing manpower resources, were authorized at several ports with critical backlogs. As a result, the number of formal entries liquidated increased from 1,058,000 in 1957 to 1,152,000 in 1958. Despite this increase, the number of entries liquidated was 34,000 less than the number filed b}^ importers, and the total bacldog of unliquidated entries was increased by a similar number. On June 30, 1958, this backlog totaled 736,000 entries. A management survey of staffing requirements and manpower utilization at New York International Airport resulted in the transfer of certain liquidating functions and personnel from the customhouse in New York City to the airport. The liquidators who were transferred are available to assist in the exainination of passengers' baggage during periods of heavy traffic and certain inspectors are being utilized as liquidators when their services are not required for baggage examination. This arrangement has, to a large extent, solved a difficult problem in adequatel}^ staffing the New York International Airport to meet peak dail}^ and seasonal worldoads without, at the same time, producing an overstaffing situation during slack periods. Travel and air commerce.—Preflight baggage examination in effect at Toronto, Canada, for a number of years, was extended to Dorval Airport, Montreal, Canada. Under this arrangement air passengers destined for the United States are cleared by United States Customs prior to boarding; on arrival in the United States they proceed without further customs formality. To assist private aircraft operators who travel abroad and return in their own aircraft, a list of airports was published where Customs employees are assigned on a regular schedule, and other airports where, although no Customs personnel are regularly assigned, landing rights are ordinarily granted and inspection services ma}^ be obtained. Simplified procedures were established to transfer air cargo arriving at New York International Airport to Newark, N. J., for entry, examination, and release. Previousl}^, importers in the Newark area were required to make entry at the International Airport for merchandise consigned to them. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 91 Duplicate baggage declarations were eliminated for returning residents whose baggage is examined in foreign territory. This action removed the last remaining requirement for the preparation of more than one baggage declaration when entering the United States. Fees and charges.—A complete review of Customs fees and charges was made tp determine necessary action to meet requirements of the Bureau of the Budget with respect to user charges for Government services. As a result of this stud37^, proposed legislation was submitted to repeal navigation laws which prohibit or restrict reasonable service charges as described under marine activities; to obtain authority to include administrative costs in assessment of reimbursable charges, and to bring about uniformity in charges for various services; and to permit recovery of the full cost of assigning an employee to a foreign countiy to provide tentative customs preclearance of articles, passengers, and carriers. Under existing administrative authority, the prices of salable customs forms were increased to meet current production and distribution costs. Charges were also established for Customs inspectors' services required when the owners of merchandise moving in-bond through the United States are permitted to weigh, sample, or examine it while still in customs custody. Notices have also been published of the intention to increase certain other charges and to establish certain minimum charges for services and products so as to recover actual costs. Training and orientation.—A booldet entitled Code of Conduct for Employees covering the standards of conduct and behavior expected of each emplo3^ee of the Customs Service, and disciplinary actions that may be taken if the standards are violated, was distributed to the entire personnel during the year. . In an effort to achieve maximum efficiency in performance of services by customs officers for the Immigration and Naturalization Service, and by immigration officers for the Customs Service on the Canadian and Mexican borders, Customs and Immigration have established training and performance standards for the guidance of supervisory field officers of the opposite service. The training will be conducted locally and will include all inspectors, both line and supervisory. Arrangements were made for a member of the Washington headquarters' legal staff to assist and instruct Customs field officers in preparing informational reports required by United States attorneys representing the Government in litigation before the Customs Court. I t is expected that this will improve reporting which will in turn contribute to the Government's success in the Customs Court. Internal check procedures.—Procedures for an internal check of daily operations in Customs field offices were revised. The internal check program provides a system of day-to-day checks and post reviews designed to assure continuous and automatic safeguards in the collection of revenues and disbursement of public funds, ac-. counting and reporting, and complying with Bureau policies and procedures. Management inspection.—During the fiscal year, management inspection teams visited 50 of the 104 collection, agency, appraisement, comptroller, and laboratory districts. Improvements attributable 92 19 58 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY to the management inspection program, or to major projects in which management inspection personnel were involved, accounted for $180,000 of the total savings reported. Paperwork management and records disposal.—General Services Administration completed a survey of the directives system in the Washington headquarters and principal field offices. Action is being taken to implement their recommendations including the establishment of a Bureau issuance office, rescission of obsolete directives, and classification and reissuance of current directives. In 1958, a total of 10,191 cubic feet of records were disposed of, and another 17,000 was transferred to Federal Records Centers. Records holdings on June 30, 1958, totaled 149,000 cubic feet of which 121,000 are scheduled for disposal. A revised Comprehensive Records Schedule including a detailed index was prepared and is being distributed to the Washington headquarters and all field offices. As a result of changes in requirements, procedural improvements, and employee suggestions, a total of 91 customs forms were revised, 11 new forms adopted, and 9 abolished. Employee incentive awards program.—Customs employees submitted 734 suggestions during 1958. Of this number, 216 were adopted with awards totaling $6,065. Identifiable savings resulting from adopted suggestions amounted to $28,823 annually. Office of Defense Lending The Office of Defense Lending was established on July 1, 1957, by Treasury Order No. 185.. There were assigned to this office all of the following functions which had been transferred to the Secretary of the Treasury. (1) Liquidation of various assets and liabilities of the former Reconstruction Finance Corporation (Reorganization Plan No. 1 of 1957). (2) Lending activities under Section 302 of the Defense Production Act of 1950, as amended (Section 107 (a) (2) R F C Liquidation Act, and Executive Order No. 10489). (3) Lending activities under Section 409 of the Federal Civil Defense Act of 1950 (Section 104 of the R F C Liquidation Act). Liquidation of Reconstruction Finance Corporation assets The Reconstruction Finance Corporation was abolished effective at the close of June 30, 1957, and its remaining assets, liabilities, and obligations were transferred to the Secretary of the Treasury, the Administrator of the Small Business Administration, the Housing and Home Finance Administrator, and the Administrator of General Services. The Secretary of the Treasury, functioning through the Office of Defense Lending, is responsible for completing the liquidation of business loans and securities with individual balances of $250,000 or more, securities of and loans to railroads, securities of financial institutions, and the windup of corporate affairs. During the fiscal year 1958 there was paid into the Treasury as miscellaneous receipts 93 ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS $12,125,000, representing proceeds of liquidation on the various loans, securities, and commitments. The following table shows the portfolio of R F C loans, securities, and commitments outstanding at the beginning and end of fiscal 1958 and the reductions effected. Outstanding June 30 1957 Loans, securities, and commitments 1968 Decrease In millions of dollars Business enterprises: Loans Undisbursed authorization ... Deferred participation commitments Financial institutions __ _. . . Railroads Total 36.9 .8 4.5 4.8 8.6 32.7 .8 3.6 L8 6.4 4.2 .0 .9 3.0 2;i 55.6 45.3 10.2 Civil defense loans No new loans were authorized during the fiscal year 1958. On July 1, 1957, direct loans for civil defense purposes amounted to $1,207,289 and in addition there was outstanding $2,699,640 in commitments to participate in loans made by banks wherein disbursement of Treasury funds is deferred. By June 30, 1958, these loans had been reduced to $1,111,033 and the commitments to $2,538,994. Activities under the Defense Production Act No new loans were authorized during 1958. The following table shows the loans and commitments outstanding at the beginning and end of fiscal 1958. Outstanding June 30 1957 Loans, securities, and commitments 1968 Increase, or decrease (—) In millions of dollars T>oans , Undisbursed authorization Deferred participation commitments , _ Total __ ^ . 180. 2 6.0 18.3 181.7 -.0 17.0 1.5 —6.0 —L3 204.5 198. 7 —5.8 During 1958, $6,000,000 was paid out, representing the final disbursement on a loan which had been authorized in an earlier fiscal year. Office of Production and Defense Lending The Office of Production and Defense Lending assisted in the transfer of assets, liabilities, commitments, administrative property, and records of the former Reconstruction Finance Corporation to the various transferee agencies. 94 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Treasmy Department Order No. 185, as amended by Order No. 185-1 abolished the Office of Production and Defense Lending effective at the close of October 31, 1957. Bureau of Engraving and Printing The Bureau of Engraving and. Printing designs, .engraves, and prints United States currency, Federal Reserve notes, secmities, postage and revenue stamps, various commissions, certificates, and other forms of engraved work for Government agencies. The Bureau also prints bonds and postage and revenue stamps for the governments of insular possessions of the United States. Deliveries of all classes of work during the fiscal year 1958 totaled 49,231,137,328 pieces as compared with 49,606,517,931 pieces in fiscal year 1957. Although the 1958 total reflects a decrease of 375,380,603 pieces in the overall deliveries, there was an increase of 44,728,000 in the number of currency notes delivered, or approximately 3 percent. The decrease in deliveries of finished products, other than currency, is due primarUy to (1) substantial reduction occurring in the number of requisitions received from the Post Office Department during the last quarter of the fiscal year for postage stamps pending the final outcome of proposed postal legislation, (2) discontinuance o£ the production of Series E bonds which are now being purchased in punch card form from a commercial firm, and (3) a general reduction in the requirements for miscella.neous items produced by the Bureau, such as paper checks and certificates. Organizational changes On March 10, 1958, organizational changes were put into effect which are designed to provide further delegations of authority to previously existing positions and to strengthen the Bureau's management structure. The title of the Office of Administrative and Maintenance Services was changed to the Office of Plant Facilities and Industrial Procurement; an associate chief was designated for the Office of Industrial Relations; an associate controller was designated for the Office of the Controller; and an assistant chief was designated for the Office of Currency and Stamp Manufacturing. For management-tj^pe audits additional responsibility was assigned to the Head, Internal Audit Staff. Management improvements Frequent meetings have been held throughout the year for the purposes of solving problems, reporting on special studies and projects, identifying areas in which savings could be realized, and determining ways in which operations might be improved without sacrificing quality or securit}^ Teamwork and exchange of ideas have been emphasized at all levels. The major portion of the redesigning and modification of the eight sheet-fed rotary presses installed for the dry intaglio printing of cur- ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 95 rency, 32-subjects to the sheet, has been completed. Research and testing relating to inks, papers, and press materials used in rotary currency printings are continuing, and the quality of the printed impression has been improved. As a result of these technical improvements, together with various procedural changes made in this area, spoilage in 32-subject currency production has decreased from 40 percent in October 1957 to 8.3 percent at the close of the fiscal year, and the cost per thousand notes has decreased from $13.41 in October 1957 to approximately $7.00 in June 1958. The estimated annual recurring savings attributable to this phase of the management improvement program may be as much as $1,000,000 or the equivalent of the salaries of 270 employees. Savings will be passed on to the Office of the Treasurer of the United States and the Board of Governors, Federal Reserve System, thi'Ough reduced billing rates. On J u l j 9, 1957, the Bureau began printing the new 1957 series of one dollar notes bearing the inscription ^^In God We Trust," in accordance with an act of Congress approved by the President on July 11, 1955 (31 U. S. C. 324a). The first delivery of these notes was made on September 9, 1957, and formal issuance to the general public was made on October 1, 1957. By the close of the 1958 fiscal year the Bureau had delivered a total of 417,920,000 notes of this series. This 1957 series is the first paper currency on which the inscription has appeared. The gradual installation in recent years of five high speed postage stamp presses has resulted in annual recurring net savings estimated at $180,000. Based on the results of evaluation tests conducted on the prototype equipment installed in the Bureau in the latter part of the fiscal year 1957 for processing postage stamps in coil form, it was decided to invite bids for additional equipment to meet production requirements. These bids were mailed to ten firms, and a contract was awarded to the only firm which submitted a bid. The contract calls for the furnishing of five coil stamp examining machines, three coil stamp perforatingwinding machines, complete with conveying attachment, and five coil stamp wrapping machines. Delivery of the first machine is scheduled for November 1958 and delivery of the last machine is scheduled for March 1960. I t is expected that the processing of coil stamps will be greatly expedited and savings will be realized through use of this equipment. In the meantime the prototype equipment is being utilized for production purposes to meet the increasing demand for coil work. In the program for improved paperwork management, instructions covering a number of clerical and operational areas have been issued in manuals and other written forms. A total of 1,153 requests for form services were processed, resulting in the preparation of 103 new forms, the elimination of 124 nonessential forms, and the improvement and revision of 385 forms. The Bureau disposed of approximately 510 cubic feet of obsolete records. A study is being made of the potential uses of automatic data processing equipment for various Bureau operations. Currently, the 479641—59- ^96 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY :study is centered principally on considering the installation of equipment for processing postmasters' requisitions for postage stamps, which would enable the Bureau to furnish data on punch cards which the Post Office Department could use in their equipment. Studies of the potential uses of the equipment in improving purchasing, stock •control, and pa3a'oll procedures also are being made. Concentrated efforts to improve practices and procedures, together with the technical improvements in presses and related equipment, have resulted in more effective utilization of personnel, increased production, and reduced spoilage in Bureau products. For the fiscal year 1958 total estimated savings resulting from management improvement efforts, including that reported in the incentive awards program, amounts to the salary equivalent of 357 employees and .approximately $1,339,245 on a recurring annual basis. Long-range research program Through continuing research and development activities the Bureau has been able to produce significant technological improvements over a period of years. In addition to the broad program of developing new and modern types of operating equipment, new types of nonoffset inks have been developed and paper improvements have been made. The program will continue in the coming year with plans for further refinement of inks, materials, equipment, and procedures. Continued ^studies are being made of materials which may be suitable for use in remoistenable synthetic adhesives for use on United States postage :s tamps. A study by the National Bureau of Standards has been started and it is expected that during fiscal 1959 findings wUl be available on the jelative length of the circulation life of currency printed by the wet and dry intaglio printing processes. A prototype model machine for automatic replacement of defective currency notes was delivered during fiscal 1958. Improvements to the machine are being made and when these are completed, an evaluation test wUl be conducted. Industrial relations activities The number of employees on the roU decreased from 3,590 on J u n e 30, 1957, to 3,479 on June 30, 1958, or a decrease of 111 employees. The Bureau's training program has included both outside and onthe-job training, particularly when new procedures and methods were introduced in technical phases of operations. The program has also ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 97 included refresher training courses in shorthand and typing, courses in correspondence and letter writing practices, and participation in academic and supervisory training courses. Increased emphasis has been given the safety program. The Bureau's frequency rate ^ has been lowered from 10.13 as of June 30, 1957, to 7.44 as of June 30, 1958. This rate is lower than the nationwide frequency rate of 9.2 for the printing and publishing industry. In the length of service awards program initiated in the Bureau in April, there were 57 employees with 40 or more years of Government service. Approximately 57 percent of the Bureau's employees were eligible for the 15-year award, and 10 percent were eligible for the 30year award, as compared to 19 percent and 5 percent, respectively, on a Government-wide basis. Under the Bureau's incentive awards program, 441 contributions were processed in the fiscal year 1958. Of these contributions, 70 superior work performance awards were approved and 106 suggestions were adopted. The rate of employee participation in the suggestion program again showed an increase—to 115 suggestions per 1,000 employees during fiscal 1958 as compared with 104 during 1957. Savings arising from the suggestion program during the year amounted to $7,869 on a recurring annual basis. Wage increases affecting approximately 2,738 ungraded employees, and amoimting to approximately $454,059 annually, were made to keep wage rates for Bureau jobs aligned with those for comparable jobs in the Government Printing Office and the American Bank Note Company. Internal auditing A number of recommendations resulting from the comprehensive management and inventory audits conducted by the Internal Audit Staff were adopted. Through this program, many areas have been identified where savings were possible and where improved methods for accountabUity, security, and operations were installed. New issues of stamps and deliveries of finished work New issues of postage stamps, for which orders had been received and dies engravecl, are shown in table 97. A comparative statement for 1957 and 1958 of deliveries of finished work appears in table 98. i The number of disabling injuries per million man-hours worked. 98 1 9 5 8 REPORT OF T H E SECRETARY OF T H E TREASURY Finances The Bureau operations are financed by reimbursements to a working capital fund authorized by law. A statement of income and expense for the fiscal year 1958 and comparative balance sheets as of June 30, 1957 and 1958, follow. Statement of income and expense for the fiscal year 1958 Income: F r o m sales of printmg $25,890,982 F r o m operation a n d maintenance of,, incinerator and space utilized b y other Treasury activities 334, 687 From sales of card chc^cks 1, 104, 245 F r o m other direct cliarges for miscellaneous services 106, 093 Total income Expense: Cost of goods sold: Purchase of direct materials D e d u c t : Increase in inventory materials $27, 436, 007 5, 010, 059 of direct 22, 857 Direct materials used Direct labor ,_ Manufacturing expenses (excluding depreciation and amortization) Depreciation and amortization 4, 987, 202 10, 265,006 Total manufacturing costs Add: Decrease in goods in process inventory 26, 153, 080 Subtotal D e d u c t : Increase in finished goods inventory 26, 179, 540 Cost of goods sold Cost of operation and maintenance of incinerator and space utilized by other Treasury activities Cost of card checks (purchases and related costs) Cost of miscellaneous services ^ Nonoperating expense: Loss on disposal of fixed assets 25, 789, 705 Total expense N e t loss for the fiscal year 1958 9, 381, 633 1, 519, 239 26, 460 389, 835 334, 687 1, 104, 197 105, 955 124, 722 27, 459, 266 i 23, 259 1 In accordance with the act approved August 4,1950 (31 U. S. C. 181-181e), the net loss will be recovered from surplus accruing to the fund in a subsequent year before any surplus is deposited into the general fund of the Treasury as miscellaneous receipts. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 99 Comparative balance sheets as of J u n e 30, 1957 and 1958 June 30, 1957 June 30, 1958 ASSETS Current assets: Cash with Treasury. _ Accounts receivable Inventories: Raw materials Goods in process Finished goods Stores Prepaid expenses '- Total current assets .' Fixed assets: ^ Plant machinery and equipment Motor vehicles J Office machines Fm'niture and fixtures Dies, rolls, and plates Building appurtenances Fixed assets under construction Less portion charged off as depreciation . $4,461,458 2,380,729 $4,350,258 1,175,087 970,844 2,405, 676 1,109,047 1,169,000 60,698 993, 701 2,379, 216 1,498,882 1, 290,977 69, 242 12, 557,452 11, 757, 363 16,297,761 66,866 161,150 419,013 3,955,961 1,226,817 252, 674 17,683,313 67,970 169,381 437,275 3,955,961 1,593,244 76,624 22,380,242 6, 563,970 23, 883,76a 7,307,078 16,576,690 Excess fixed assets (estimated realizable value) Total fixed assets..- --- Deferred charges Total assets. .- 1,985 3,045 15, 818,257 16,579,735 452, 391 281,816 -- 28,828,100 28,618,914 -. 670,348 433,188 638,838 1,455,463 96,241 746,281 1,661 910,438 1,265,983 99,758 712,110 1,428 3,608,832 3,422,905 3,250,000 22,000,930 3,250,000 22,000,930 25, 250,930 -31,662 25,250,930 -54,921 LIABILITIES AND INVESTMENT OF THE UNITED STATES Liabilities: Accounts payable Accrued liabilities: Payroll Accrued leave other J Trust and deposit liabilities otherliabilities Totaliiabilities . , Investment of the United States Government: Principal of the fund: Appropriation from United States Treasury Donated assets, net Total principal Earned surplus, or deficit (—) 2 Total investment ofthe United States Government Total liabilities and mvestment of the United States Government. 25, 219,268 25,196,009 28,828,100 28,618, 914 J, Fixed assets acquii-ed prior to July 1, 1950, are capitalized at appraised values (estimated replacement -cost as of July 1,1951, reduced to recognize the depreciated condition of the assets being capitalized); subsequent additions have been capitalized at cost, except that on and after July i; 1951, all costs of manufacturiag dies, rolls, and plates have been charged to current operations. The-act approved August 4, 1950 (31 U. S. C. 181-181e), which established the Bureau of Engraving and Printing Fund, specifically excluded from the assets of the fund the land and buildings occupied by the Bureau. In accordance with the ComptroUer General's decision of October 4,1951 (B-104492), however, replacements of buildmg facilities and improvements to buildings made on and after July 1,1951, have been financed by the fund. Such items of significant dollar amounts have been capitalized at cost and appear in the foregoing balance sheets under the caption "Building appurtenances." 2 Earned surplus or deficit arises through billiug for products at unit prices established prior to the development of actual costs. Sectibn 2 (e) of the act of August 4, 1950, requires that any surplus accruing to the revolving fund during any fiscal j^ear be deposited into the general fund of the Treasury as miscellaneous receipts during the ensuing fiscal year, provided that such surplus may first be applied to offset any deficit resuJting from operation in prior years. 100 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Fiscal Service The Fiscal Assistant Secretary of the Treasury exercises general supervision over the operations of the Fiscal Service, consisting of the Office of the Fiscal Assistant Secretary, the Bureau of Accounts, the Bureau of the Public Debt, and the Office of the Treasurer of the United States. Among the duties of the Fiscal Assistant Secretary, under the general direction of the Under Secretary for Monetar}^ Affairs, are the administration of the financing operations of the Treasury; preparation of estimates of the future cash position of the Treasury for use of the Department in its financing; direction of the distribution of funds between the Federal Reserve Banks and other Government depositaries; preparation of calls for the withdrawal of funds from the special depositaries to meet current expenditures; administration of Treasury responsibilities under Executive orders with respect to the purchase, custody, transfer, and sale of foreign currencies acquired under international agreements in connection with United States programs operated abroad; and direction of fiscal agency functions in general. Additional responsibilities of the Fiscal Assistant Secretary include continuous liaison with other departments and agencies of the Government with respect to and the coordination of their financial operations with those of the Treasury; supervising the administratipn of accounting functions and related activities of all units of the Treasury Department through the Commissioner of Accounts; and carrying out the Treasury's participation in the joint accounting improvement program of the Secretary of the Treasury, the Director of the Bureau of the Budget, and the Comptroller General of the United States pursuant to the provisions of the Budget and Accounting Procedures Act of 1950. More detailed explanations of the operations involved under the responsibilities of the Fiscal Assistant Secretary are given in the reports of the Commissioner of Accounts, the Commissioner of t h e Public Debt, and the Treasurer of the United States which follow. BUREAU OF ACCOUNTS Many functions of the Bureau of Accounts relate to statutory responsibilities of the Secretary of the Treasury, are of Governmentwide significance, and involve varied operations. Included in the responsibilities and functions of the Bureau are: Maintenance of a system of central accounts; participation with the Office of the FiscaL Assistant Secretary in the joint program for improvement of Government accounting and reporting; preparation of central financial reports of the Government; accounting and reporting for foreign currencies in the custody of the Secretary of the Treasury; coordination of the internal audit activities and giving assistance to Treasury bureaus in development of comprehensive audit programs; issuance of checks to Government creditors in payment of obligations incurred by the executive departments and agencies, with certain exceptions; administrative work relating to the designation of Government depositaries; determination of qualifications and underwriting limitations of surety companies to write fidelity and other surety bonds to cover Govern- ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 101 ment activities; investment of social security and other Governmenttrust funds; and administration of the loans and advances by the Treasury to Government corporations and other Federal agencies.The Bureau of Accounts also administers the payment of claims under certain international agreements; maintains accounts and collects amounts due from foreign governments under lend-lease and other agreements; furnishes technical guidance and assistance in accounting matters to Treasury bureaus and other executive agencies; and performs such other fiscal work as may be required by the Secre^ tary. By Department Order No. 170-5, dated September 26, 1957, the functions of the Government Actuary were transferred from the Bureau of Accounts to the Office of the Secretary. Accounting, Reporting, and Related Matters Central accounting The Treasury's system of central accounts for the Federal Government, (as authorized by Section 114 of the Budget and Accounting Procedures Act of 1950 (31 U. S. C. 66b) and established pursuant to* Treasury Department Circular No. 945, dated May 11, 1954, as supplemented), completed its first full ^^^ear of operation with modifications to meet changing conditions. The central accounting system includes summary controlling accounts comprising cash assets and. liabilities, .receipts, and expenditures for the cash transactions of the Government. Subsidiary records show the receipts of the Government by source and the expenditures by each appropriation or fund. The central accounts provide the accounting basis for compilings reports of receipts and expenditures published in the official statements of the Government, which include the Monthly Statement o j Receipts and Expenditures oj the United States Government; the annual Combined Statement oj Receipts, Expenditures and Balances ojthe United States Government; the Budget oj the United States Government for which are furnished the actual figures for the last completed fiscal year; and a monthly statement of Appropriations and Other Authori zations. Expenditures and Unexpended Balances oj the Federal Govern ment. For this last publication, during fiscal 1958, provision wa& made for the monthly preparation of data, rather than less frequently in order to provide more timely information for the Congress and the Government agencies. A significant development in central accounting was made by revision of public debt accounting procedures involving operations of the Bureau of Accounts, Office of the Treasurer of the United States, and the Bureau of the Public Debt. Effective July 1, 1957, on the basis of monthly reports received from the Bureau of the Public Debt, public debt transactions are recorded in the central summary accounts of the Government and appropriation warrants for public debt redemptions are issued by the Division of Central Accounts. As a result of the revised procedures, the Bureau of Accounts discontinued recording public debt receipts from certificates of deposit and redemptions from public debt requisitions and accountable warrants. Also on July 1, 1957, an improved method in recording receipts collected by the Internal Revenue Service was installed similar to the system for Customs receipts. Receipts of these two revenue collect- 102 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY ing agencies of the Government are now recorded in the central accounts on the basis of monthly statements of accountability and statements of transactions rendered by the collectors of customs and district dhectors of internal revenue, rather than on the basis of individual certificates of deposit and related debit vouchers. These changes resulted in a significant decrease in the number of receipt transactions in 1958. The volume of accounting items processed through the central and regional accounting offices of the Division of Central Accounts during the fiscal years 1957 and 1958 is shown in the following tabulation. Work volume Classification 1957 Receipts Expenditures.. Other items . _ Total . - - - - - 1958 2,121,118 3,106, 785 11, 383 1, 621, 582 3,081, 618 13, 536 5, 239, 286 4, 716, 736 Accounting procedures and systems Bureau staff' continued to render technical assistance to other Treasury offices in the development and improvement of accounting systems by furnishing technical advice and counsel when requested. Attention was dhected chiefly to fulfilling the requhements of Public Law 863, approved August 1, 1956, (31 U. S. C. 18c, 24, 66a (c), 665 (g)) and Budget Circular 57-5. Department Circular No. 987, relating to the implementation within the Treasury Department of Public Law 863, was revised" to require all bureaus to maintain adequate monetar}^ property accounting records so that financial reports can be prepared on an accrual basis, that is, cost of goods and services received, as of the close of each fiscal year and at such other significant reporting dates as determined by the head of each bureau (exhibit 68). The staff also developed procedures, and prepared Treasm-y circulars, accounting bulletins, and instructions concerning: Undeliverable checks, deposits by States under agreements reached with the Social Securit}^ Administration; deposits of employer and employee taxes and other receipts with Federal Reserve and depositary banks; withholding of State income taxes by Government agencies; uncurrent checks, substitute and unavailable checks; and other matters relating to various functions of the Fiscal Service. Regulations issued pursuant to Public Law 85-183, approved August 28, 1957 (31 U. S. C. 528), which provided for simplification of procedures for issuing and accounting for substitute checks for those lost, stolen, destroyed, or mutilated are included in Department Circular No. 1001, dated December 18, 1957 (exhibit 67). Regulations relating to the use of a new certificate of deposit (Form No. 219) are included in Department Circular No. 945 (Revised) Supplement No. 1, Third Amendment, dated September 11, 1957 (exhibit 66). . Current requirements relating to deposits of employer and emplo3''ee taxes are contained in Department Circular No. 848, Second Revision, dated May 2, 1958 (exhibit 69). ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 103 The Bureau participated with the General Accounting Office and the Bureau of the Budget in projects of Government-wide scope involving: Reviews of proposed changes and issuances of the General Accounting Office and the Bureau of the Budget; consideration of matters of interest common to the three agencies; and participation in working groups under the direction of the steering committee for the joint accounting improvement program. Studies and reviews were made of: The requirements for submission of financial reports by Government agencies to the Bureau of the Budget, the Treasury Department, and the General Accounting Office; administrative control regulations of Government agencies; allotment practices; indirect expenses; university grants and contracts; and financial reporting of the industrial and stock funds of the Department of Defense. In addition, the joint regulation for small purchases utilizing imprest funds was revised to permit their use for paying utility bills of less than $15, emergenc}^ travel expenses not exceeding $50, and reimbursement for travel advances when the payment of the traveler did not exceed $50. Department Circular No. 908 which governs the use of imprest funds by Treasury offices was amended accordingly (exhibit 64). Central reporting The review and improvement of central financial reporting, a continuing project of the Bureau through the Division of Central Reports, was pursued throughout the year. In response to the annual request from the Committee on Government Operations, Plouse of Representatives, rei3orts on real and personal property were compiled for use of the committee in its continuing study and reporting of the assets of the Federal Government. With the receipt of more and comprehensive agency reports, work is going forward toward the ultimate preparation of a complete balance sheet of the United States Government. Improvements were made also in the periodic reports of the Bureau designed to serve the special needs of congressional committees, staff members of other Government agencies, and the public. These reports include the Monthly Statement oj Receipts and Expenditures, the monthly Statement oj Appropriations, Authorizations, Expenditures and Balances, the monthly Treasury Bulletin, the Annual Report oj the Secretary oj the Treasury, and the Combined Statement oj Receipts, Expenditures and Balances. Work continues with Government agencies and in collaboration with the Bureau of the Budget and the General Accounting Office to eliminate, wherever possible, duplication and overlapping of financial reporting and to coordinate agency and central financial reporting. The format of the Combined Statement oj Receipts, Expenditures and Balances was revised to meet the requirements of the act, approved July 25, 1956, (31 U. S. C. 701-708), and Bureau of the Budget Circular No. A-11 with respect to the treatment of obligated and unobligated balances of appropriations. Agencies submitted reports on unfunded contract authorizations pursuant to Department Circular No. 993, issued September 4, 1957 (exhibit 65), for inclusion in the Combined Statement. There was also released on August 8, 1958, Department Circular No. 1014 (exhibit 70), requiring annual reports 104 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY from agencies on expenditures by States and Territories for grantsin-aid to and payments within States and Territories. Control of foreign currencies Legislation enacted in fiscal 1958 (primarily the extension of the Agricultural Trade Development and Assistance Act of 1954 and the M u t u a l Security Act of 1958) continued to expand the Treasury responsibility of controlling the acquisition, custody, transfer, and sale of foreign currencies acquired without payment of dollars. (See exhibit 62.) With this expansion, the work of the Division of Central Reports in reviewing reports, maintaining Treasury accounts, and preparing summary statements and reports was substantially in'Creased. Uniform procedures, consistent with provisions of the international agreements involved, are prescribed so as to provide data for adequate Treasury reports. For the first time, all the foreign currency accounts of this category were to be included in the Combined Statement of Receipts, Expenditures and Balances for the fiscal year 1958. A comprehensive manual covering the operations of the foreign currency section was prepared and distributed. During 1958 the amount of foreign currencies collected or acquired b}^- Government agencies from all sources, without pa^^^ment of dollars, was the equivalent of $1,196.6 million. Withdrawals of foreign curTencies which the Treasury Department sold to United States Government agencies for dollars amounted to $268.6 million, while transfers of foreign currencies made without reimbursement, pursuant to provisions of law, were in the equivalent amount of $563.5 million. 'The balances of foreign currencies in Treasury accounts as of June 30, 1958, amounted to the equivalent of $1,454.6 million. In addition, the unexpended balances of foreign currencies transferred without reimbursement and held for the account of various Federal agencies, as of June 30, 1958, were equivalent to $366.0 million. A summary statement showing foreign currency collections, withdrawals, and balances for the fiscal year 1958 is included in this report as table 105. Internal auditing All Treasury bureaus now have active internal audit programs tailored to their operating needs. These programs were developed under the Budget and Accounting Procedures Act of 1950. T h e internal audit programs, as independent management controls, are designed to provide surveillance over operating controls. They are not a part of the operations. Internal auditing inspects, verifies, and evaluates operating controls; recommends improvements where weaknesses are found and points up deviations from policies, prescribed procedures, and laws—all to safeguard assets, maintain integrity, and promote efficiency. The results, year by year, have been progressive^ constructive. The accountability aspects of. fiscal control were emphasized in the fiscal year 1958. Audits were participated in covering certain procurement, supply, utilization, and storage of valuables; the evaluation of reports and financial statements; the study and appraisal of procedures attending the recording and reconciliation of cash, securities, and deposits. General administration and coordination of the internal audit activities of the Department as a whole were provided through reviews and appraisals of internal audit programs in operation, including surveys of field office ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 105 operations of certain bureaus; meetings and discussions with the principal internal auditors of all bureaus for the purpose of exchanging ideas; and assistance furnished concerning particular internal audit problems. The internal audit coverage within the Bureau of Accounts during fiscal 1958 encompassed segments of the Goverriment central accounts; the many Government trust funds and special deposit accounts; the Bureau administrative accounts; and continuing of the comprehensive audits at regional disbursing and field accounting offices. All regional offices have now been audited under the cycle program for comprehensive audit except the Cleveland, Ohio, office and an audit will be made there early in fiscal 1959. Management and procedural reviews were made at the Kansas City and New York City offices during fiscal 1958 and a review of operations was made at the Juneau, Alaska, office. An extensive review of the operations of the Surety Bonds Branch was nearing completion at the year end. Bureau of Accounts personnel also make certain other audits or appraisals for the Treasury Department, such as that of the Comptroller of the Currency, and the Commodity Credit Corporation. 'Commodity Credit Corporation appraisal The act of March 8, 1938, as amended (15 U. S. C. 713a-l), requires the Secretary of the Treasury, as of June 30 of each year, to appraise all assets and liabilities of the Commodity Credit Corporation to determine the Corporation's net worth. This appraisal is the basis for the Congress to provide funds to the Corporation to remove any impairment of its capital or for the Corporation to pay any excess funds or surplus into the Treasury. The amended act defines asset values, for the purpose of determining the net worth, as the cost of such assets to the Corporation. The appraisal, which included an examination of accounting policies and practices, disclosed an impairment of the Corporation's capital for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1957, of $1,760,399,886. This amount does not include losses from programs under specific legislation authorizing separate appropriations to reimburse the Corporation for the losses. An amount equivalent to the capital impairment as determined by the appraisal was appropriated by Public Law 85-459, approved June 13, 1958. Disbursing Operations As the Government's principal check-issuing organization, the Division of Disbursement provides centralized disbursing for all executive departments and establishments except the Department of Defense, the Postal Service, and a few relatively small agencies. Through its 21 regional offices, the Division processes payments and issues United States savings bonds for more than 1,400 Government offices located throughout the United States, its Territories, and the Philippines. In addition technical supervision is exercised over officers of other agencies who perform disbursing operations by delegation pf the Chief Disbursing Officer, such as disbursing officers of the Department of State stationed at embassies and consulates in 106 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY foreign countries. The Division also serves as a focal point in Arranging for foreign disbursing service for all civilian agencies. Considerable progress was made by the Division during the year in its continuing program to reduce costs and increase production through adoption of new electronic machine applications, improvement of manpower utilization, and streamlining procedures. Results demonstrate the value of a centralized disbursing system wherein a large volume of work concentrated at a few strategic locations makes the most effective use of modern, high-speed equipment and a variety of laborsaving, mass production techniques. Recurring annual savings of $993,472 were effected under the management improvement program during 1958. Including improvements begun during 1957, the savings actually realized during fiscal 1958 were $570,100. Some of the more significant developments include: Consolidation of social securit}^- benefit pa5^ments to husband and wife into a single check (in cooperation with the Social Security Administration); installation of high-speed electronic check processing equipment in three additional regional offices; realignment of work and reorganization of production-line activities in the Washington Regional Office; reduction in personnel ceilings based on increased production standards; improvements in procedure for processing claims for substitute checks; simplification of procedure for verif3dng thermal piinted checks; and combining of microfilming and check signing operations b}^ equipping microfilm machines with check-signing attachments. The unit cost for processing checks (excluding postage) was 4.16 cents in fiscal 1958, as compared with 4.09 cents in fiscal year 1957. This increase is attributed to increased costs in 1958 resulting from: The retroactive pay raise authorized b}^^ the Federal Employees Salary Increase Act of 1958, approved June 20, 1958; the increased contribution to the civil service retirement and disability fund required by law; and nonrecurring costs for changing 2,000,000 payment files to give eft'ect to the increase in rates of compensation for veterans as provided by the act approved June 17, 1957, effective October 1, 1957 (38 U. S. C. 2315, 2316, 2335, 2336); and as investments for annual recurring savings, plate changes to consolidate social security benefit payments for husband and wife into a single check, and conversion expenses for the installation of electronic check processing equipment. The interagency committee designated by the Secretary of the Treasury, the Director of the Bureau of the Budget, and the Comptroller General of the United States to consider all phases of disbursing and to prepare a report as a basis for a policy decision completed its year-long study in December 1957. A major question to be resolved was whether the large-scale disbursing functions of the Division of Disbursement could be performed more economically b}^ certain administrative agencies of the Government. The committee's report showed that the Government's cost would be greater if the disbursing work were transferred from the division and recommended against such action. The report also indicated further improvements and savings possible under the present system through a joint, cooperative approach by the administrative agencies and the division. Considerable progress has been made in this direction. ADMINISTRATIVE 107 REPORTS The volume of work processed during fiscal 1958 compared with that in 1957 was as follows: Number Classification 1967 Payments made: Social security._ . _ Veterans' benefits J Income tax refunds __.__ ___Veterans' national service life insm-ance dividend nroeram other . Adjustments and transfers Savings bonds issued TotaL _ _. ___ - 1968 ^ 103, 573, 424 r 63, 314, 463 35, 333, 566 3, 619,058 •• 34, 084, 735 302, 516 2, 941, 416 115, 804,163 63, 665, 850 36, 794, 293 3, 843, 530 41, 753, 268 278, 458 2, 933, 491 243,169,178 265, 073, 053 ' Revised. Deposits, Investments, and Related Operations Federal depositary system At the present time approximately 11,500 banking institutions serve as depositaries. Of these, 11,341 were designated as special depositaries as of June 30, 1958, to receive proceeds frpm deposits of taxpayers and the sale of public debt securities. Also, 3,964 were authorized to receive deposits from Government agencies and to provide other fiscal services. These institutions supplement the Office of the Treasurer of the United States, the Bureau of the Mint, and the Federal Reserve Banks and branches. The supervision of depositaries by the Bureau of Accounts, under the general direction of the Fiscal Assistant Secretary, is carried out under Department regulations governing the authority, qualifications, and other requirements applicable to the depositaries. Investments Pursuant to specific provisions of law, the Secretaiy of the Treasur}^ has the duty of investing trust and other Federal funds in obligations of the United States. The handling of and the maintenance of records of investment transactions of the several funds is the responsibilit}^ of the Investments Branch. The facilities of the Treasury Department are available also for handling investments for other agencies of the Government, for quasi-governmental funds, and for the Government of the District of Columbia. Investment accounts handled primarily b}^ the Treasury are shown in table 60. Records regarding securities held in safekeeping by the Treasurer of theUnited States and the Federal Reserve Banks subject to the order of the Secretarj^ of the Treasury also are maintained in the Investments Branch. Highway trust jund.—The Highway Revenue Act of 1956, Section 209 (a), (23 U. S. C. 173), approved June 29, 1956, established the highway trust fund. The act requires the Secretary of the Treasury to estimate the amounts of collections of Federal excise taxes on gasoline, tires, trucks, and other highway-user levies, to be transferred from the general fund to the highway trust fund, subject to adjustment to actual tax receipts and to invest such portion of these funds as are not. 108 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY in his judgment, needed to meet current withdrawals. After consultation with the Secretary of Commerce, the Secretary of the Treasury, in accordance with provisions of Sec. 209 (e) (1) of the act, is required to submit an annual report to Congress on the financial status of the fund, the results of the preceding year operations, and estimates on its expected condition and operations through the fiscal year 1973. The last such report was made on February 28, 1958 (exhibit 52). The total amount appropriated to the trust fund during fiscal year 1958 was $2,116,028,210.57 highway taxes and $17,686,110.43 representing interest earned on investments. Expenditures during the year amounted to $1,601,515,884.93. Table 70 shows the status of the fund as of June 30, 1958. Loans and advances by the Treasury Pursuant to specific provisions of law, the Secretary of the Treasury is authorized and directed to make loans to Government corporations and agencies, at interest rates determined by the Secretary of the Treasury, except in those instances where the rate of interest is established or the basis for its determination is specified in legislation. Loan agreements are prepared and records maintained regarding these loans by the Investments Branch. Transactions are processed and records maintained relating to other advances and subscriptions to capital stock of Government corporations by the Secretary of the Treasury. Table 111 shows the status of loans made by the Treasury to Government corporations and business-type activities, and repayments, cancellations, and balances in the fiscal year 1958. Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation.—In accordance with the act of May 13, 1954 (33 U. S. C. 981-985), the Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation was established for the purpose of constructing part of the Saint Lawrence Seaway in United States territory in the interest of national security. To finance its activities the corporation issues revenue bonds payable from its revenues to the Secretary of the Treasury who is authorized and directed to purchase any obligations of the corporation. Public Law 85-108, approved July 17, 1957 (33 U. S. C. 985), set the total face value of all bonds which may be issued by the corporation at $140,000,000 and the amount of bonds which may be issued in any one year at 50 percent of this amount. Any interest accrued on such bonds and deferred by the Treasury Department during the peiiod prior to the collection of revenue may not be charged against the debt limitation of $140,000,000. During the fiscal year the Secretary of the Treasury purchased bonds totaling $48,400,000. As of June 30, 1958, total, purchases of the corporation's bonds by the Treasury amounted to $96,700,000. Rejugee reliej.—^Under the Refugee Relief Act of 1953, Section 16 (50 App. U. S. C. 1971n), the Secretary of the Treasury was authorized to make loans not to exceed $5,000,000 in the aggregate, to public or private agencies of the United States, to finance the transportation, from ports of entry to places of resettlement in the United States, of persons receiving immigrant visas who lacked the resources to finance the expense involved. The act expired on December 31, 1956. Loans totaling $384,000 were made during the life of the program, and under the loan agreements the borrowing agencies have until June 30, 1963, to make interest-free repayment of the amounts borrowed. Repay- ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 109' ments subsequent to June 30, 1963, bear interest at the rate of three percent per annum on the unpaid balance. During the jesir ended June 30, 1958, the agencies repaid $183,000. Table 85 shows the balances due from each of the four borrowing agencies. District oj Columbia.—The District of Columbia Appropriation Act of June 2, 1950, as amended (D. C. Code, Section 43-1540, 1951 edition), authorized the Commissioners of the District of Columbia toborrow funds not in excess of $35,000,000 from the United States Treasury to finance the expansion and improvement of the water system of the District of Colambia. During the fiscal year loans madeamounted to $2,000,000 and repayments amounted to $76,721.52. Through June 30, 1958, total loans for this purpose amounted to $10,100,000, repayments amounted to $153,648.37, leaving a balance due as of June 30, 1958 of $9,946,351.63 and accrued interest thereon amounting to $327,190.93. These loans are repayable over a period of thirty years from date of borrowing at rates of interest from 2%, percent to 3% percent. Surety bonds The Secretary of the Treasury issues certificates of authority to corporate sureties making application and qualifying under the act approved July 30, 1947, To U. S. C. 8), to execute bonds in favor of the United States. A list of companies holding such certificates (Form 356, Revised) is published annually by the Treasury on or about M a y 1. The Surety Bonds Branch in the Bureau of Accounts examines the applications of companies requesting authority to write Federal bonds and currently reviews the qualifications of the companies so authorized. All bonds in favor of the United States, except certain Post Office Department and Defense Department bonds, are examined and approved as to corporate surety in the Bureau of Accounts. The Bureau has custody of a large portion of the bond& examined with the exception of contract bonds and some special type bonds. As of June 10, 1958, 176 companies held certificates of authority qualifying them as sole sureties on recogaizances, stipulations, bonds,, and undertakings permitted or required by the laws of the United States, to be given with one or more sureties. During the fiscal year, certificates of authority were issued to 11 companies, qualifying them as sole sureties on bonds in favor of the United States; and the authority of 6 was revoked. In addition, certificates were issued to 3 companies as acceptable reinsurers only, .the authority of one reinsurer was revoked, and 3 companies changed names. There were 21 companies holding certificates of authority as acceptable reinsurers only,, issued under Department Circular No. 297, as amended. During the fiscal year 31,311 bonds and consent agreements were examined for approval as to corporate surety. The head of each department and independent establishment in the executive branch of the Federal Government is required to obtain,, under the provisions of Public Law 323, approved August 9, 1955 (6 U. S. C. 14), and regulations promulgated by the Secretary of the Treasury, blanket, position schedule and other types of surety bonds covering civilian officers and employees and military personnel who are required to be bonded and to pay bond premiums from any funds 110 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY available for its administrative expenses. The law permits officials of the legislative and judicial branches, a t their discretion, to obtain surety bonds covering officers and employees under their respective) jurisdictions. The Secretary of the Treasury is required to transmit to Congress, on or before October 1 of each year, a comprehensive report on bonding activities under the act. A summary of the information reported by agencies for transmittal to Congress, showing, coverage as of June 30, 1958, as compared with coverage June 30, 1957, follows. J u n e 30,1957 N u m b e r of officers a n d employees covered: Executive branch Legislative a n d judicial b r a n c h e s Total ._! Aggregate penal s u m s of b o n d s procured: Executive b r a n c h . . _ _ . . . Legislative a n d judicial b r a n c h e s Total _ __ _. .- Total premiums paid b y Government: Executive branch Legislative a n d judicial b r a n c h e s • Total A d m i n i s t r a t i v e expenses: Executive branch Legislative a n d judicial branches Total . J u n e 30,1958 957, 585 1,263 944,595 1,275 958,848 945,870 $3,459, 393, 385 10, 245, 500 $3,405,432,311 10,280,000 3,469, 638,885 3,415, 712,311 371,728 7,130 293,459 4,494 J 378, 858 1 297,953 20,145 603 2 29,050 456 20, 748 29, 506 1 Premiums on bonds are shown on the basis of the proportionate cost for one year, together with the premiums on one-year bonds in order to arrive at an annual rate. 2 Administrative expenses were greater for the fiscal year 1958 since most two-year bonds expired December 31,1957, and new bonds were procm-ed. Foreign Indebtedness World War I During the fiscal year 1958 the Treasury received from the government of Finland its semiannual payments of principal and interest ainounting to $396,489.36, due under funding and moratorium agreements covering indebtedness growing out of World War I. This amount was made available to the Department of State for financing educational exchange programs between Finland and the United States in accordance with provisions of the act of August 24, 1949 •(20U. S. C. 222). Tables 107 and 108 show the status of the World War I indebtedness of foreign governments to the United States. World War II During the fiscal jesiv 1958 the Treasury Department received payments from foreign governments under the lend-lease and surplus property agreements in United States dollars amounting to $139.8 million, foreign currencies having an equivalent value in United States dollars of approximately $61.2 million, and real propert}^ and ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS '"-' ' ' 111 improvements to real property with an estimated valtie'of $0.3 million, resulting in total credits amounting to $201.3 million.. ^ Fr9m. inception, of the-lend-lease and surplus property programs, payments in-foi'ei^ currencies and real property and improvements Vrepresei^i''^f|(:(it estimated dollar value received of $453.9 million, while tjiie^^^ United States dollar receipts and other credits have amouiited tH $2,981.7 million. - > i... Silver bullion totaling 409,782,670.64.fine troy ounces and valued at $291,401,010.lO'was transferred by the Treasury to certain foreign governments during World War I I for coinage and industrial use, pursuant to the Lend-Lease Act of March 11, 1941 (22 U. S. C. 4 1 1 419). A total of 111,040,038 fine troy ounces of silver, valued at $78,961,805 was received by the Treasury Department as repayinents during the fiscal year 1958. Through June 30, 1958, foreign governments have returned 267,013,469 fine troy ounces having a dollar value of $189,876,245. In addition 8,228,398 ounces of silver valued at $5,851,305 were received by the Bureau of the Mint, but as of June 30, 1958, had not been documented for recording in the central accounts of the Treasury The status of indebtedness of foreign governments under lend-lease and surplus property agreements is stated in table 110. As of June 30, 1958, the accounts receivable amounted to $1,939 million, including the balance of silver transferred under the lend-lease program'. Credit to the United Kingdom A loan of $3,750,000,000 was made by the United States to the United Kingdom under the terms of the financial agreement dated December 6, 1945. On March 6, 1957, this agreement was amended permitting the United Kingdom to defer aiiy principal and interest installment due after 1956, but limiting such deferrals to a total.of seven. This amendment was approved by the act of April 20, 1957 (22 U. S. C. 2861). Through June 30, 1958, the United Kingdom had exercised its right to defer payment of the interest installment due December 31, 1956, amounting to $70,385,447.48, and the principal and interest installments due December 31, 1957, amounting to $119,336,250. The balance of principal and deferred interest on the indebtedness of the United Kingdom as of June 30, 1958, under this agreement totals $3,470,321,571.94. Germany, postwar (World War II) economic assistance Settlement of claims of the United States for postwar (World War II) economic assistance furnished Germany was provided for in the agreement signed February 27, 1953, between the Federal'Republic of Gerrnany and the Government of the United States. Interest payments provided for in the agreement in the amount of $12,500,000.00 due semiannually have been received by the Treasury for the fiscal year 1958. Payments on the principal start on July 1, 1958. 479641—51) 112 195 8 REPORT OF THE; SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Claims Against Foreign Governments and Nationals Foreign Claims Settlement Commission The International Claims Settlement Act of 1949, as amended by Pubhc Law 285, 84th Congress, approved August 9, 1955 (22 U. S. C. 1641-1641q), provides for the adjudication by the Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of claims of American nationals which arose during the general period of World War I I against Bulgaria, Hungary, Italy, Rumania, and the Soviet Union. The Commission is required to resolve the claims and to certify awards on account of the claims to the Treasury not later than August 9, 1959, for payment from the funds established for each country i n accordance with the act. Payments on awards certified are subject to a system of priorities prescribed in the act. Generally, subject to the adequacy of the particular fund, all awards in principal amounts of $1,000 or less are required to be paid in full, and an amount of $1,000 is required to be paid on the principal of awards in excess of $1,000. Additional payments are rnaid^^.pn a pro rata basis until the fund is exhausted or until the principal amounts of all awards have been paid in full. Any funds remaining after payment of principal in full are then applied to interest when allowed. Claims of American nationals against the Governments of Bulgaria, Hungary, and Rumania arose out of their failure: To pay for or restore property as required in the treaty of peace after World War I I ; to pay, chiefly, for property lost by confiscation or forced liquidation before August 9, 1955; and to meet their United States contractual currency obligations acquired by Hungary and Rumania before September 1, 1939, and by Bulgaria before April 24, 1941, all of which became payable before September 15, 1947. No funds were paid to the United States by any of the three, but for each country claims funds were provided by net proceeds of liquidation and disposition of certain of their assets vested by the Office of Alien Property, Department of Justice. The claims of American citizens against the Government of Italy arose out of the war in which Italy was engaged from June 10, 1940, to September 15, 1947, and with respect to which no provision was made in the treaty of peace with Italy. Under the ^'Lombardo Agreement" dated August 14, 1947, Italy paid $5,000,000 to the United States in full settlement of those claims. The claims against the Soviet Union are founded upon liens obtained prior to November 16, 1933, by nationals of the United States arising out of judgments or warrants of attachment against assets of Russian nationals in the United States, and those of a general nature of citizens of the United States against the GovernmcDt of the Soviet Union which arose before November 16, 1933. Under the ''Litvinov Assignment" of 1933, the Soviet Government assigned to the United States Government certain assets relating to unsettled claims between the two Governments and these nationals. Under this assignment and liquidation of the assets, the United States Government collected $9,114,444, including postal funds due the Soviet Union. ADMINISTRATIVE 113 REPORTS The status as of June 30, 1958, of each of the five claims funds and the awards is shown in the following table. i Bulgaria Net proceeds: Vested by the Office of Alien Property Payment under the "Lombardo Agreement" w..: Collections under the "Litvinov Assignment".. Deposited in claims fund 2 Claims filed (number) 1 Awards: . Certified: Number Amount _. Amount paid. Balance in claims fund ^ Hungary Rumania Italy U. S. S. R. 1 $24, 000,000 1 $3,000,000 $5,000,000 $2, 245,198 400 $357, 531 2,700 140 $1, 275, 783 $100, 608 $2,032,330 247 $1, 520,472 $339, 655 $19, 066, 990 $5,000. 000 • 1,000 2,000 ;9,114,444;9,114,444 4,000 170 294 $1, 273, 412 $813, 213 $126,250 $181, 631 $17, 987,391 $4, 568, 369 1,257 $5, 601, 888 $1, 633, 273 $7,125,449 1 Estimated. 2 Includes 5 percent deposited to miscellaneous receipts for statutory deduction for administrative expenses. Mixed Claims Commission, United States and Germany Pursuant to the terms of the agreement between the United States and the Federal Republic of Germany, dated February 27, 1953, the Treasury Department received the annual payment due in April 1958, amounting to $3,700,000. A summary of the terms of this agreement was included in the Annual Report for 1954,. page 109. This payment permitted a distribution of an additional 6.8 percent on account of interest accrued on Class I I I awards (those over $100,000) of the Mixed Claims Cominission, United States and Germany, and payments under Private Law No. 509, approved July 19, 1940. A statement showing payments on awards and the status of the accounts as of June 30, 1958, is shown in table 99. Yugoslav claims fund The litigation that delayed further payment from the Yugoslav claims fund on awards under the agreement of July 19, 1.948, with Yugoslavia, terminated favorably to the awardees of the Foreign. Claims Settlement Commission during the fiscal year 1958, and a final distribution was authorized. The status of the fund as of June 30, 1958, is shown in table 101. American-Mexican Claims Commission Under this program, payments amounting to $10,374.60 were made during the fiscal year 1958, to individuals who had not previously submitted an appropriate voucher for the final distribution authorized during fiscal year 1956 or who had not in previous years furnished adequate evidence of their right to payment. A statement of the Mexican claims fund appears as table 100. Trading With the Enemy Act, as amended The act of August 6, 1956 (50 App. U. S. C. 6b), required the Office of Alien Property of the Department of Justice to dispose of assets remaining in its custody which were seized prior to December 18, 1941, under the Trading with the Enemy Act. Through June 30, i958, there has been received under this^act a total of $803,919.37, of which $599,539.25 was deposited into miscellaneous receipts. In 114 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY addition, there were also received participating certificates aggregating $57,434,529.22 issued by the Secretary of the Treasury, in accordance with Section 25 of the Trading with the Enemy Act; and the contingent remaining interest of certain successors in interest to the Estate of Morris Littman, deceased, carried on the books of Attorney General in Trust No. 47683, German claimants. Divested property of enemy nationals Pubhc Law No. 285, 84th Congress, approved August 9, 1955 (22 U. S. C. 163 (b)), provides that the net proceeds of any property vested in the Alien Property Custodian or the Attorney General after December 17, 1941, pursuant to the Trading with the Enemy Act, as amended, and which at the date of vesting was owned directly or indirectly by Bulgaria, Hungary, or Rumania, or any national thereof, shall, after completion of the administration, liquidation, and disposition of such property pursuant to such act, be covered into the Treasury, except that proceeds of property owned by a natural person at the date of vesting shall be divested and carried in blocked accounts with the Treasury in the name of the owner thereof subject to claim. As of June 30, 1958, mone3^s of 251 individuals had been divested, certified, and deposited in the Treasury. These funds, totaling $351,337, were credited to Treasury accounts as follows: For nationals of Bulgaria, $58,001; for nationals of Hungary, $184,670; and for nationals of Rumania, $108,666. Other Activities Management improvement program Total annual savings for the Bureau from improvements adopted during the year amounted to $1,064,194 of which the annual recurring savings are estimated at $1,028,600, the equivalent of 183.7 manyears. These figures do not include carryover savings from prior years, estimated at $106,034. The savings actually realized during the fiscal year 1958 were $595,182. The savuigs indicated above are attributed primarily to the Division of Disbursement, some significant examples of which are referred to on page 106 of this report. Examples of money saving achievements by other divisions in the Bureau include the revisions of reporting and reproduction procedures for several periodic reports; increased efficiency in operation and utilization of tabulating equipment and manpower; and various adopted suggestions under the employee awards program. The Bureau has continued its efforts to provide effective training for its employees and participation in special safety training sessions. The procedure for reports control was applied in all divisions of the Bureau. Employees of the Bureau submitted 221 suggestions during the year under the cash awards program. Adopted suggestions numbered 89 on which awards aggregating $1,545 were approved. There were 40 suggestions submitted by employees of other Government departments and agencies, of which 7 were adopted and awards of $120 paid. There were also 11 outstanding and superior work performance awards. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 115 Donations and contributions During 1958, the Treasury Department deposited in the general fund, so-called ^'Conscience fund" contributions totaling $60,039, Other unconditional donations to the United States amounted to $133,074, including several bequests, the largest of which was $79,802. Government agencies, other than the Treasury, deposited ''Conscience fund" contributions totaling $27,976 and unconditional donations amounting to $7,769. Deposits to the credit of Library.of Congress trust funds, permanent loan account, amounted to $120,141, representing cash donations and proceeds from the sale of seeurities belonging to the funds. Conditional gifts in the amount of $14,402 were received to further the defense effort. Government losses in shipment Under the Government Losses in Shipment Act (5 U. S. C. 134134h; 31 U. S. C. 528, 738a, 757c (i)), approved July 1, 1937, the Government assumed the risk on its shipments of money, bullion, securities, and other valuables while in transit between Government departments and agencies, and depositaries, etc. A revolving fund was established in the Treasury laiown as the ''Fund for the Payment of Government Losses in Shipment," from which losses are paid. The administrative work in connection with processing the claims filed under the act is supervised by the Bureau of Accounts. During the fiscal year 1958, claims amounting to $33,669.53 were paid from the revolving fund, while recoveries amounted to $11,230.25, making a net expenditure of $22,439.28 for losses. Detailed statements relating to the operation of the Government Losses in Shipment Act are found in table 121. Deposits of interest charged on Federal Reserve notes . Section 16 of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U. S. C. 414), authorizes the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System to charge Federal Reserve Banks interest on the amount of unredeemed Federal Reserve notes issued to such banks in excess of gold certificates held as collateral against such notes. Annual interest payments equal to approximately 90 percent of the net earnings of the Federal Reserve Banks have been made to the United States Treasury beginning in 1947. The amount deposited in the fiscal year 1958 was $663,728,837.41 as compared with $433,500,481.72 deposited in 1957. The total deposits since 1947 have amounted to $3,234,671,298.66 as shown in table 15. Withholding of income taxes for States and Territories The act of July 17, 1952 (5 U. S. C. 84b, 84c), authorizes the Secretary of the Treasury to enter into agreements with States and Territories for the withholding of income taxes from the compensation of Federal employees regularly employed in the States or Territories. Since the passage of the act, agreements have been entered into with 13 States and Territories. The District of Columbia entered into an agreement pursuant to the act of March 31, 1956 (77 Stat. 77). There were no new agreements entered into during fiscal year 1958. 116 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Payment of pre-1934 Philippine bonds Through the use of funds held in a trust account established in the United States Treasury, the Treasury Department makes payments of principal and interest on pre-1934 bonds issued by the Government of the Republic of the Philippines as provided in the act of August 7, 1939,'as amended (22 U. S. C. 1393 (g) (4) (5)). Table 78 shows the status of this trust account as of June 30, 1958. Withheld foreign checks Restrictions against the delivery of United States Government checks to payees residing in certain foreign areas (in accordance with Treasury Department Circular No. 655, dated March 19, 1941, as amended), continued in effect during 1958. These restrictions applied during the year to Albania, Bulgaria, Communist-controlled China, Czechoslovakia, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Rumania, the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, the Russian Zone of Occupation of Germany, and the Russian Sector of Occupation of Berlin. Delivery of checks to nationals of North Korea without appropriate licenses is prohibited also by Foreign Assets Control regulations issued by the Treasury Department on December 17, 1950. BUREAU OF THE PUBLIC DEBT • The Bureau of the Public Debt, in support of the management of the public debt, has responsibility for the preparation of offering circulars, the formulation of instructions and regulations pertaining to each security issue, the direction of the handling of subscriptions and making of allotments, the issuance of the securities and the conduct or direction of transactions in the issues outstanding, the final audit and custody of retired securities, the maintenance of the control accounts covering all public debt issues, the keeping of individual accounts with owners of registered securities and authorizing the issue of checks in payment of interest thereon, and the handhng of claims on account of lost, stolen, destroyed, or mutilated securities. Four offices are maintained. The principal office, including the headquarters of the Bureau, is in Washington, D. C. This office issues and conducts subsequent transactions in outstanding public debt securities (including governmental agency securities) other than savings bonds, and audits and maintains custody of these securities as they are retired. A departmental office in Chicago, 111., conducts transactions relating to savings bonds outstanding and maintains the issue and retirement records of the paper type savings bonds. A field branch audit office located in Cincinnati, Ohio, audits the retired paper type savings bonds and records their retirement. All issue and retirement records of the new punched card type savings bonds are prepared and maintained in an office located at Parkersburg, W. Va., where the major recording and accounting operations are performed through the use of a large scale electronic data processing system. Under Bureau supervision many transactions in public debt securities are conducted through nationwide agencies, which are, principally, Federal Reserve Banks, as fiscal agents of the United States, and their branches; selected post offices, financial institutions, industrial organi- ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 117 zations, and others, approximately 23,000 in "all, which cooperate in the issuance of savings bonds; and over 18,000 financial institutions that redeem savings b t o d s . • Bureau administration Management improvement.—The Bureau continued during the year to review and reappraise its methods and procedures in order to employ personnel and equipment so as to reduce operating costs without impairing adequate servicing of the public debt. Substantial progress was made to this end in the major project of utilizing the accuracy, speed, and versatility of electronic equipment applied to the large volume of registering and accounting operations related to issuing and retiring United States savings bonds. In August 1957 the new office established in Parkersburg, W. Va., commenced preparations for the initial operations of filming, key punching, and key verifying the new punched card type savmgs bonds, as all Series E bonds bearing issue dates of October 1957 and thereafter are from punched card type bond stock. After key verification the work is converted to magnetic tape for data processing under electronic procedure. Initial space requirements were met by leasing an existing building; and arrangements were made to meet projected space requirements by leasing upon completion a newly constructed building adjacent to and connected with the first building. The new building is suitably designed and conditioned to house the electronic processing system units. The first unit of the system, an input converter which converts source data on punched cards into recorded data on magnetic tape, was installed and placed in operation April 1, 1958. Thereupon, the electronic recording began of a substantial backlog of work, nearly 38,000,000 stubs of issued card bonds and over 8,000,000 retired card bonds. The new electronic S3^stem was expected to be in full operation in November 1958. Further implementation of the management improvement program was made in other areas. As a result of the advent of the punched card savings bond, the decrease in the number of retired paper bonds ' received for audit during the year made possible the closing of the savings bond audit branch in New York City. This was one of the two remaining field offices of the five established years ago to audit, microfilm, and deliver for destruction the retired savings bonds. Beginning in March 1958 shipments of retired paper bonds were diverted, on a staggered basis, to the Cincinnati audit branch; and the New York office was formally closed on June 27, 1958. The adoption of the punched card bond also permitted modification of various operating procedures in handling the bonds prior to issuance, which resulted in nominal savings. To further consolidate check issuing operations within the Department, the interest check issue function relating to all registered securities other than savings bonds was transferred from the Division of Loans and Currency of this Bureau to the regional office of the Division of Disbursement, Bureau of Accounts, both in Washington. The transfer was effective for all checks issued subsequent to the July 1, 1957, interest payment date. A related accounting refinement in the Division of Loans and Currency facilitated the transition to; a machine operation of the former method of manual posting of check 118 195 8 REPORT ,OF THE SECRETARY .,OF THE TREASURY numbers to an individual interest card maintained for each, account holder. Also, effective August 1, 1957, the interest check issue function relating to current income savings bonds was transferred from the Chicago departmental office of this Bureau to the Chicago regional office of the Division of Disbursement. Since the beginning of the United States savings bond program in 1935, there have accumulated over 78,000 bonds, amounting to $2,200,000 maturity value, which are unclaimed by the registered owners. In order to discontinue the work involved in controlling, auditing, and safekeeping of this large quantity of bonds for an indefinite period of years, decision was made to destroy bonds unclaimed for two years. This reduced the undeliverable bond file to 6,000 pieces. Prior to destruction, the bonds are arranged iri serial number sequence by letter series and denomination and microfilmed. A notation is made on the numerical register against the number of each such bond. Whenever a claim is received and approved for any bond so destroyed, the registered owner will be issued a new bond. This procedure not only reduces the cost of auditing and maintaining the file, but is most advantageous from the standpoint of security. The study of the public debt accounting system is in the final stage. The cash accounting phase of the new system was put into effect on July 1, 1957. The conversion of all public debt securities accounts except those relating to savings bonds has been completed. The new savings bond reporting procedures were initiated on March 1, 1958, and while the accounts have been established, some work remains to be done in this area. As a part of the overall system change, the Chicago office has put into effect revisions of accounting and reporting procedures and a simplified method of handling adjustments. A concurrent study of internal accounting and processing in the Washington office has resulted in the development of a double-entry accounting system for controlling securities in the Division of Loans and Currency. The system has been approved and is being installed. Continuing attention was given during the year to records management, control of forms and reports, and the safety program, all of which underwent further desirable developments. Technical training in the employment and operation of electronic data processing equipment has been given to programmers and other key personnel. Emphasis on executive and supervisory development training has been continued. One hundred and eighty-two suggestions were adopted under the incentive awards program; estimated savings totaled $30,035 and awards paid amounted to $2,575. Superior performance awards were made to 387 employees, and 204 employees shared in six group awards. The Bureau has been active in developing plans for recognizing and rewarding employees engaged in measurable work of a repetitive nature whose production or accuracy is superior. Bureau operations The public debt.—^A summary of public debt operations handled by the Bureau appears on pages 26 to 33 of this report, and a series of statistical tables dealing with the public debt will be found in tables ,18 to 51. ADMINISTRATIVE 119 REPORTS The public debt of the United States falls into two broad categories: (1) public issues, and (2) special issues. The public issues consist of marketable obligations, chiefly Treasury bills, certificates of indebtedness. Treasury notes, arid Treasury bonds; and nonmarketable obligations, chiefly United States savings bonds and Treasury bonds of the investment series. Special issues are made by the Treasury directly to various Government funds and payable only for account of such funds. During the fiscal year 1958 the gross public debt increased by $5,816 million and the guaranteed obligations held outside the Treasury decreased by $6 million. The most significant changes in the composition of the outstanding debt during the year were the increase of $10,970 million in interest-bearing marketable public issues, and the decrease of $4,177 million interest-bearing nonmarketable public issues, over three-fifths of which was due to the decrease during the year of the total of all series of United States savings bonds outstanding. Total public debt issues, including issues in exchange for other securities, amounted to $213,717 million during 1958, and retirements amounted to $207,901 million. The following statement gives a comparison of the changes during the fiscal years 1957 and 1958 in the various classes of public debt issues. Increase, or decrease (—) (In millions of dollars) Classification 1957 Interest-bearing debt: Treasury bonds, investment series United States savings bonds Marketable obligations Special issues __--. Other Total interest-bearing debt. Matured debt and debt bearing no mterest. Total 1958 -874 - 2 , 875 752 1,713 -114 - 1 , 514 - 2 , 638 10, 970 -581 -25 -1,398 -826 6, 212 -396 -2,224 5,816 United States savings bonds.-—In volume of work, the issuance and redemption of savings bonds represent the largest administrative problem of this Bureau. Since these bonds are in registered form and owned by millions of people, the maintaining of alphabetical and numerical records of nearly 2.0 billion of these bonds, which have been issued continuously siiice 1935, replacing lost, stolen, and destroyed bonds, and handling and recording retired bonds are no inconsiderable undertaking. Receipts from sales of savings bonds during the year were $4,670 million and accrued discount charged to the interest account and credited to the savings bonds principal account amounted to $1,226 million, a total of $5,896 million. Expenditures for redeeming savings bonds charged to the Treasurer's account during the year, including about $3,730 million of matured bonds, amounted to $8,544 million. The amount of savings bonds of all series outstanding ori June 30, 1958, including accrued discount and matured bonds, was $52,349 million, a decrease of $2,647 million from the amount out- 120 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY standing on June 30, 1957. Detailed information regarding savings bonds will be found in tables 38 to 42, inclusive, of this report. During the fiscal year 1958, 96.6 million stubs representing issued bonds, of Seiies E were received for registration, making a total of 1,993.5 million, including reissues, received through June 30, 1958. The original stubs of paper type bonds are first arranged alphabetically in semiannual blocks, by name of owner, and microfilmed. They are then arranged in the numerical sequence of their bond serial number in ia full calendar year file and microfilmed, after which they are destroyed. The microfilms serve as permanent registration records. The original issue of paper bonds has been discontinued. The issue stubs of the new punched card type bonds are microfflmed by batches as they are received. Before being destroyed, the stubs are audited and recorded by electronic processing equipment. Magnetic tape ffies of the bond issues, in both alphabetical and numerical sequence, are established and maintained with each bond ffle item containing information indicating the location of the microfflm which contains the complete image of the original bond stub. The following tables show the processing by steps of the registration stubs of Series E savings bonds of the paper type and the card type. The table on the card type bonds also shows the steps taken to retire these bonds. , . S t u b s of issued p a p e r t y p e Series E savings b o n d s in. Chicago office (In millions of pieces) A l p h a b e t i c a l l y sorted P.eriod. Stubs received ! •• C u m u l a t i v e t h r o u g h J u n e 30, ' 1953 Fiscal year: 1954 . _ 1955 1956' " . — : . --_ 1957 1958. Total Alphabetically filmed NumeriDestroyed cally after filming filmed , Restricted basis sort i F i n e sort prior t o filming 2 1, 539.1 1,518.0 1,468.3 1,437. 7 1,359.4 1,354.6 88.2 87.0 91.5 91.1 37.1 89.0 88.4 87.2 88.9 62.1 82.0 99.3 85.0 90.4 85.7 82.2 88.1 88.0 108.1 89.9 72.7 25.7 5.8 192.3 178.3 73.3 29 9 1, 934.0 1,933. 6 1,910. 7 1,894. 0 1,834. 2 191 3 184 1 . 1,833.2 • 1 Not in' complete alphabetical arrangement but sorted to such a degree that individual stubs can be located. Includes those stubs fine sorted. 2 Completely sorted. Balance Microfilmed Keypunched Converted Audited to magnetic] and classitape fied Unfilmed Not keypunched Not converted to magnetic tape Unaudited S t u b s of issued card t y p e Series E savings b o n d s t u P a r k e r s b u r g office (In millions of pieces) 69.5 i ' •• .. 17.5 57. 8 41.4 5.7 34.7 1.7 18.1 53.8 24.8 R e t i r e d card t y p e Series E savings b o n d s recorded i n P a r k e r s b u r g office (In inillions of pieces) 16.7 10.5 .11 7.3 .8 7.0 17. 39 10.2 ADMINISTRATIVE 121 REPORTS There were 99.3 million retired savings bonds of all series received during the year. ^ Retired card bonds, issued only in Series E, are handled in a processing center where, after microfilming, the bonds are permanently recorded and audited by an electronic data processing system prior to being destroyed. Retired paper bonds of all seiies are processed through a branch audit office where they are audited, microfflmed, and destroyed. A list of the bond serial numbers is transmitted to the Chicago departmental office for posting of retirement reference data to numerical, ledgers as a permanent record. The following tables show the status of the operations for the paper type bonds. Retired paper type savings bonds of all series in the branch audit offices (In millions of pieces) Period Cumulative through June 30,1953. Fiscal year: 1954 1955 1966- — 1957 --1958 --Total Balance Bonds received Audited 669 3 667 5 655 4 1 8 13 9 596.0 97 3 99 0 97.4 100.2 81.8 96 0 98 1 96.5 102.1 81.2 95 5 98 7 96.0 99.8 82.6 31 40 4.9 3.0 3.6 46 49 6.3 6.7 5.9 81.6 ' 102.0 117.9 100.0 79.3 1145. 0 1141.4 1128. 0 36 5.9 1076.8 Microfilmed Destroyed Unaudited Unfilmed 1 1 Beginning June 30, 1954, excludes 9.4 million pieces of unfilmed spoiled stock transferred to permanent storage and 1.7 million pieces of unissued stock to be destroyed without microfilming. Retired paper type savmgs bonds of all series recorded in Chicago office (In millions of pieces) Period Cumulative through June 30, 1953 Fiscal year:' 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 Total ... Number of retired bonds reported Status of posting Posted Verified Unposted Unverified 1,129. 7 1,129. 7 1,127.0 94.6 101.3 98.2 100.1 84.6 89.9 102.7 96.7 99.0 87.2 88.7 123 7 93 4 102.3 64 0 47 33 48 59 3 3 8.1 4.8 28.0 1, 608. 5 1, 605.2 1, 499 1 33 28.0 2.7 3.9 1 During the period October 1954 to June 1955, only a 7 percent test verification was made of the postings. Of the 93.8 million Series A - E savings bonds redeemed prior to release of registration and received in the audit offices during the year, 90.3 million, or 96.3 percent, were redeemed by more than 18,500 paying agents. These agents were reimbursed for this service in each quarter-year at the rate of 15 cents each for the first 1,000 bonds paid and 10 cents each for all over the first 1,000. The total amount paid to agents on this account during the year was $11,297,542, which was at the average rate of 12.51 cents per bond. 122 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY The following table shows the number of issuing and paying agents for Series A - E savings bonds by classes. Post offices J u n e 30 Banks Building a n d savings a n d loan associations Credit unions Companies operating payroll plans All others Total I s s u m g agents 1945 1950 _ 1955 1956 1957...L 1958 24,038 25,060 • 2 2, 476 2 1, 768 2 1, 401 2 1,178 _ _ 15,232 15, 225 15, 692 15, 845 15, 978 16, 047 3,477 1,557 1,555 1,606 1,665 1,702 2,081 522 428 411 379 357 1 9,605 3,052 2,942 2,898 2,788 2,640 550 688 626 611 587 . 54, 433 45, 966 23,681 23,154 22,822 22, 511 P a y i n g agents 1945 1950 1955 1956 1957 1958 _. __ 13, 466 15, 623 16, 269 16, 441 16, 613 16, 744 874 1,188 1,300 1,438 1,580 137 139 138 172 171 57 56 54 59 59 13, 466 16, 691 17, 652 17,933 18,282 18, 554 1 Includes all others. 2 Estimated by the Post Office Department. Sale of Series E savings bonds was discontinued at post offices at the close of business on December 31,1953, except in those localities where no other public facilities for their' sale were available. During the fiscal year 1958, 5,749,161 interest checks with a value of $312,917,141 were issued on current income type savings bonds. This was a decrease of 618,993 checks from the number issued during 1957, and a decrease of $55,841,020. A total of 215,136 new accounts was established compared with 217,194 in the previous year. As of June 30, 1958, there were 2,142,459 active accounts with owners of this type savings bonds, a decrease of 123,981 accounts from the previous year. There were reductions of 279,770 in accounts of Series G bonds which have been maturing since May 1, 1953, and 6,200 in accounts of Series K which were first sold on May 1, 1952, and discontinued effective at the close of business April 30, 1957, and an increase of 161,989 in accounts of Series H bonds, which were first sold on June 1, 1952. There were 49,616 applications during the 3^ear for the issue of duplicates of lost, stolen, or destroyed savings bonds, in addition to 1,847 cases on hand at the beginning of the year, making a total of 51,463 cases. In 29,424 cases the bonds were recovered, and in 20,162 cases the issuance of duplicate securities was authorized. On June 30^ 1958, 1,877 cases remained unsettled. Other United States securities.—During the year 17,535 individual accounts covering publicly held registered securities were opened and 20,347 were closed. This reduced the total of open accounts on June 30, 1958, to 196,152 covering registered securities in the principal amount of $17.5 billion. There were 379,058 interest checks with a value of $510,323,770 issued to owners of record during the year.. This was a decrease of 1,664 checks from the number issued during 1957, and a decrease in value of $16,074,350. Redeemed and canceled securities received for audit included 3,576,000 bearer securities and 116,000 registered securities, a total of ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 123 3,692,000, as compared with 3,223,000 in 1957; and 15,275,000 coupons were received, which was 1,815,000 more than in 1957, OFFICE OF THE TREASURER OF THE UNITED STATES The Treasurer of the United States is charged by law with the receipt, custody, and disbursement, upon proper order, of the public moneys and is required by law and administrative authority with maintaining records and making periodic reports on the source, location, and disposition of these funds. Although the Treasurer does not maintain branch or field offices, the Federal Reserve Banks, as fiscal agents of the United States, perform many fiscal functions for the Treasurer throughout the country. These include the verification and destruction of United States paper currency, the redemption of public debt securities from the Treasurer's funds, keeping the operating cash accounts of the Treasury, charging the Treasurer's account for the majority of the checks drawn on the Treasurer, the acceptance of deposits made by Government officers for credit of the Treasurer, and maintaining custody of bonds held to secure public deposits in commercial banks. Commercial banks within the United States and its possessions, and in foreign countries also are utilized by the Treasurer to provide banking facilities for local activities of the Government. Information on the transactions handled in the name of the Treasurer by the Federal Reserve Banks and commercial banks fiows into Washington where it is taken into the Treasurer's general accounts. Specifically, the Treasurer maintains current accounts of all receipts and expenditures; pays the principal and interest on the public debt; provides checking account facilities for Government disbursing officers, corporations, and agencies; pays checks drawn on the Treasurer of the United States; procures, stores, issues, and redeems Uriited States currency; audits redeemed Federal Reserve currency; examines and determines the value of mutilated currency; acts as special agent for the payment of principal and interest on certain obligations of corporations of the United States Government, Puerto Rico, and the Philippine Islands; and maintains facilities in the Main Treasury building for (a) the deposit of public moneys by Government officers, (b) the cashing of United States savings bonds and checks drawn on the Treasurer, (c) the receipt of excess and/or unfit currency and coins from local concerns and banks, and (d) the conduct of transactions in both marketable and nonmarketable public debt securities for banks and for the public. The Office of the Treasurer prepares the Daily Statement oj the United States Treasury and the monthly Circulation Statement oj United States Money. Under authority delegated by the Comptroller General of the United States, the Treasurer acts upon claims arising from the forgery of endorsements and other irregularities involving checks paid by the Treasurer and, in the case of unpaid checks which are lost or destroyed, passes upon claims for substitute checks. The Treasurer of the United States is also Treasurer of the Board of Trustees of the Postal Savings System, and custodian of bonds held to secure public deposits in commercial banks, bonds held to secure postal 124 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY savings on deposit in such banks, and miscellaneous securities and trust funds. Management improvement and internal audit The Office continued its program of surveying and evaluating operations and methods and made many changes which resulted in increased efficiency and economies. The following are among the more significant improvements: The program was completed which provided for conversion to electronic equipment in the payment of checks drawn on the Treasurer of the United States. Approximately 356 million checks were paid in fiscal 1958 through use of electronic equipment and about 42 million checks were paid under the old procedure. From experience gained duririg the conversion period, all fourteen programs of the electronic data processing system were reprogrammed, enabling the Office to handle a substantially greater volume of checks in less time. Functions previously performed by the Bureau of Accounts in handling claims for substitute checks were transferred to this Office on January 1, 1958. Prior to this transfer before a substitute check was issued a form was mailed to the claimant for execution. Now, however, in most cases, the Treasurer has authority to approve the issuance of a substitute check on the basis of the original written statement of the claimant. This expedites the settlement of this type of claim and also saves the cost of printing, mailing, and handling thousands of forms annually. On July 1, 1957, the maintenance of detailed cash accounts of public debt principal transactions and preparation of related reports were transferred from this Office to the Bureau of the Public Debt. Since then the Treasurer's Office has been receiving and recording information relating to such transactions in summar}^^ form only. Acting as fiscal agents of the United States, all Federal Reserve Banks and certain branch banks redeem, verify, and destroy unfit United States currency. A representative of this Office visits each of the banks at least once each year to inspect and discuss the operations with the responsible officials. These inspections also give this Office an opportunity to determine whether the banks are following the established standard of fitness when sorting United States currency between that which is fit for return to circulation and t h a t which is unfit for circulation and should be destroyed. The banks are satisfactorily performing this currency function. Internal audits provide management with independent appraisals •of the fiscal activities of the Office. During the past year the internal audit program was expanded to include examination and verification of unused checks of discontinued checking accounts received from disbursing officers for destruction. Audits were made of cash, securities, and other assets aggregating many millions of dollars and yarious money operations were studied by the auditors, Recommendations resulting from the audits were adopted to improve accountability for and control over the assets for which the Treasurer is responsible. Cost accounting, supervisory training, forms and reports analysis arid control, records management, and periodic safety inspections are all continuing programs. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS .1^5 •yU Under the incentive awards program, 35 cash a/wards ."wei^e.^m^ide for suggestions adopted, 27 for superior sustained performance,(ji2ipr outstanding performance, 6 for special acts or services,,and there we;pe seven group awards. Six hundred and fifty-seven employees;(71 .ft^rf cent of the total on the rolls), received length of service pins or buttoris); of these, 585 were for 15 to 30 years of Government service and 72 for 30 or more years of service. :, ,,. ,,,: :..j;i. ; Moneys received and disbursed by the Treasurer '^' ' . ' • : , ' • ' : ' J - ^ ^ Moneys collected by Government officers are deposited with thie Treasurer at Washington, in Federal Reserve Banks, and in designated Government depositaries for credit to the account of the Treasurer of the United States, and all payments are withdrawn from this account. Moneys deposited and withdrawn for the fiscal years 1957 and 1958, exclusive of intragovernmental transactions, are shown in the following table on the basis of the Daily Statement of the United States Treasury. Deposits, withdrawals, and balances in Treasurer's account Cash deposits (net) (includes internal revenue, customs, trust funds, etc.) Public debt receipts i Less accrued discount on U. S. savings bonds and Treasury bills.. Total net deposits Balance at beginning of fiscal year.. Total *.. -- --.- Cash withdrawals (includes budget and trust accounts, etc.) Net transactions in: Investments of Government agencies in public debt securities Sales and redemptions of obligations of Government agencies in market, excess of redemptions, or sales (—) Public debt redemptions i Less redemptions included in cash withdrawals -.. Total net withdrawals Balance at close of fiscal year 1957 $81,874, 970, 189, 974, 734, -1, 950, 818, 432 733 675 $82, 213, -1, 269, 490 868 293, 070,358 299, - 898, 886, 546, 183, 6, 276, 445, 093, 702, 765 716, 956, 869 890, 245,129 920, 414, 505 589, 952,362 5, 366, 867 79,182, 970, 490 83,188, 037, 485 459, 870, 530 713, 880, 040 -742, 953, 192,198, 376, -2,243, 145, 857 486 654 445, 690 207, 900, 911,020 -2,090, 010, 346 855, 117, 589, 952, 996 362 289, 2, 270, . 1958 5, 510, 9, 761, 263, 749, 102, 889 978 1 For details for 1958, see table 29. Assets and liabilities in the Treasurer's account.—The assets of the Treasurer consist of gold and silver bullion, coin and paper currency, deposits in Federal Reserve Banks, and deposits in commercial banks designated as Government depositaries. A summary of the assets and liabilities in the Treasurer's account a t the close of the fiscal years 1957 and 1958 is shown in table 52. Gold.—Disbursements of gold during 1958, largely effected during the final months of the fiscal year, amounted to $1,535.0 million. Receipts of $268.4 million left a net decline in the gold assets on the daily Treasury statement basis of $1,266.6 million. The gold assets, which had reached a five-year high of $22,784.8 million on February 1.9, 1958, were down to $21,356.0 million as the year closed. The gold assets on June 30, 1958, were held to cover liabilities of $20,798.6 million in gold certificates or credits payable in gold certificates and $156.0 for the gold reserve against currency, leaving a free gold balance df $401.4 million. 126 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY ' Silver.—During the year 14.8 million ounces of silver bullion, which had been carried in the Treasurer's account a t cost value of $13.4 million, were revalued a t the monetary value of $19.1 million. Holdings of silver dollars declined by $16.2 million, leaving a net increase •of $2.9 million for the year in silver assets at monetary value. These assets, from which silver bullion at cost and recoinage value and subsidiary silver coin are excluded, amounted to $2,441.8 million on June 30, 1958. Liabilities against these assets on that date consisted of $2,419.7 million of outstanding silver certificates and $1.1 million of outstanding Treasury notes of 1890, leavmg a.balance of $20.9 million of silver a t monetary value in the Treasurer's general account. Silver bullion held a t cost value was increased by net purchases of $103.3 million during the year and reduced by the monet zed amount of $13.4 million, previously mentioned, and by $34.7 million used for coinage. The net increase of $55.2 million brought the value of this bullion at the end of the year to $125.6 million. SUver a t recoinage value amounted to $1.0 million on June 30, 1958. Paper currency.—By law the Treasurer is the agent for the issue and redemption of United States currency. The cashier of the Treasurer's Office procures all United States paper currency from the : Bureau of Engraving and Printing and places it in circulation throughout the Nation as needed, chiefly through the facilities of the Federal Reserve Banks and their branches. The Federal Reserve Banks and branches as agents of the Treasury also redeem and destroy unfit United States currency, except that received from local sources in Washington and that which has been . burned or mutilated. In the Currency Redemption Division mutilated currency is examined for approximately 45,000 claimants annually. Charred, torn, moldy, or claylike chunks of money are identified through use of special techniques involving rare skill and unlimited patience. During the year currency valued a t more than $6.7 million was identified for lawful redemption. Table 59 shows by class and denomination the value of paper currency issued and redeemed during the fiscal year 1958, and the amounts outstanding at the end of the year. A comparison of the amounts of paper currency of all classes, including Federal Reserve notes, issued, redeemed, and outstanding, during the fiscal years 1957 and 1958 follows. 1958 1957 • Pieces O u t s t a n d i n g at beginning of year Issues d u r i n g y e a r . . . Redempti'^ns d u r i n g year O u t s t a n d i n g a t e n d of year . 3, 310, 440, 817 1, 743, 010, 238 1, 685, 386, 962 3, 368, 064, 093 Amount $33,017, 044, 203 8, 087, 208, 000 • 7,661,416,915 33, 442, 835, 288 Pieces 3,368,064,093 1, 751, 734, 454 1, 731, 429, 644 3, 388, 368, 903 Amount $33, 442, 835, 288 7, 563, 339,000 . 7, 690, 707, 583 33, 315, 466,705 ' For further details on stock and circulation of money in the United States, see tables 54 through 57. ADMINISTRATIVE 127 REPORTS Depositaries.—The following table shows the number of each class of depositaries and balances on June 30, 1958. Class Number of depositaries 1 Federal Reserve Banks and branches Otherbanfcs in-continental United States: General, depositaries Special depositaries. Treasury tax and loan accounts. Insular and territorial depositaries.Foreign depositaries 3 _ Total...- . Deposits to the credit of the Treasurer of the United States June 30,1958 2 $697, 334, 483.92 301,-372, 960.45 8,217, 726,146. 96 40, 019, 589.22 23, 638, 465. 51 12, 712 9, 280, 091,646. 06 1 Does not include limited depositaries which have been designated for the sole purpose of receiving deposits made by Government ofBcers for credit in their official checking accounts with such depositaries and which are not authorized to accept deposits for credit of the Treasurer of the United States. 2 Includes checks for $286,905,249.06 in process of collection. 3 Principally branches of institutions in the United States. Checking accounts oj disbursing^ officers and agencies.—As of June 30, 1958, the Treasurer maintained 2,430 disbursing accounts as compared with 2,503 accounts on June 30, 1957. The number of checks paid, by categories of disbursing officers, during the fiscal years 1957 and 1958 follows. Disbursing officers Number of checks paid 1957 Treasury. Army Navy-J-^Air Force, other..-. 1958 244, 991,164 27, 963,906 33, 201, 413 28, 376, 769 28, 568, 675 267, 457, 016 28, 825, 786 35,933,564 33, 880, 664 31, 492, 796 363,101, 927 397, 589, 826 Of the 398 million checks paid last fiscal year, 356 million were paid by the Treasurer in Washington and the remaining 42 million were paid by the Federal Reserve Banks and the Manila branch of the First National City Bank of New York acting as fiscal agents of the Treasurer. Approximately one out of every four checks issued by the Government and its agencies in fiscal year 1958 was for a payment from the Federal old-age and survivors insurance trust fund. Also, one out of every four checks was for the Department of Defense. These two categories accounted for approximately 54 percent of the checks paid in the fiscal year. Check claims.—The Treasurer of the United States acted upon 122,022 paid check claims during the fiscal year, referring to the United States Secret Service for investigation those which involved the forging, altering, counterfeiting; or fraudulent issuance and negotiation of Treasury checks. The Treasurer reclaimed almost $2.0 million from those having liability to the United States as the result of improperly negotiated checks and made settlements and, adjust479641—59- -10 128 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY ments in the sum of $1.8 million from funds recovered duiing and before the 1958 fiscal year. Disbursements from the check forgery insurance fund, established by Congress to enable the Treasurer to expedite settlement of check claims, totaled over $142,000. Claims for the proceeds of iapproximately 75,000 outstanding checks were acted upon, resulting in the issuance of over 57,000 substitute checks totaling $17.8 millidn by the Chief Disbursing Officer to replace checks which were not received or were lost, stolen, or destroyed. The Treasurer alsd adjudicated 477 forgery claims for theproceeds of the Philippine War Damage Commission and Veterans Administration United States depositary checks payable to residents of the Philippines in indigenous currency and certified 275 disbursements totaling over 156,000 pesos. Treasurer's Cash Room.—More than six million commercial checks, drafts, money orders, etc., were deposited by Government officers with the Treasurer's Gash Room in Washington for collection during the fiscal year. The Cash Division also prepared and sold to collectors approximately 32,000 sets of uncirculated coins minted in 1957. This service was rendered at no expense to the Government as, in addition to the face value of the coins, a fee of 50 cents a set was charged for the cost of assembling and handling the coins. Securities held in custody.—The face value of securities held in the custody of the Treasurer as of June 30, 1957 and 1958, is shown in the following table. ' June 30— Purpose for which held 1957 A3 collateral: To secure deposits of public moneys in depositary banks.. To secure postal saving^ funds.In lieu of sureties • In custody for Government officers and others: Secretary of the Treasury i. Board of Trustees, Postal Savings System Comptrollerof the Currency.. : Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation. Rural Electrification Administration District of ColumbiaCommissioner of Indian Affairs -. Foreign obligations other 2 _. For Government security transactions: Unissued bearer securities Total $221, 699, 400 27, 615, 000 6. 588, 700 $194, 646, 600 25, 795, 200 6,370,600 26, 010, 142, 520 1, 096, 937, 000 12, 925, 500 1,197, 509, 000 62, 042, 956 36, 249, 093 36, 081, 435 12, 083, 875,132 108, 916, 090 26,170, 785, 087 829,137, 000 12, 575, 500 1, 267, 900, 000 .73, 543, 411 38,259,371 . 37,571,7.95 12/079.782,132 85,246,106 394,883,550 1, 223, 914, 250 41,295,465,376 42,045, 527, 052 1 Includes those securities listed in table 111 as in custody of the Treasury. 2 Includes United States savings bonds in safekeeping for individuals. 1958 ADMINISTRATIVE 129 REPORTS Servicing of securities for Federal agericies and for certain other governments.—In accordance with agreements between the Secretary of the Treasury and various Government corporations and agencies and Puerto Rico, the Treasurer of the United States acts as special agent for the payment of principal of and interest on their securities (including pre-1934 bonds of the Philippine Government). The amounts of such payments duiing the fiscal year 1958, on the basis of the daily Treasury statement, were as follows: Principal P a y m e n t s m a d e for F e d e r a l h o m e loan b a n k s $1, 276, 285, 000 698, 938, 900 Federal land banks 25, 200 Federal F a r m Mortgage Corporation... 58, 832, 400 Federal Housing Administration F e d e r a l N a t i o n a l M o r t g a g e Association. 2, 407, 592, 000 H o m e Owners' Loan Corporation 23, 625 842, 500 Philippine Islands 335, 500 P u e r t o Rico Total 4, 442, 875,125 .. Interest paid w i t h principal $31,973,916.41 228,129. 73 90.00 482, 541. 45 35, 960, 645.59 326. 25 3, 642. 50 68,649, 291.93 Registered interest i $3,084, 507.69 Coupon interest $47, 806, 519. 99 2,347 87 3, 513,199. 85 56, 625.00 6, 654, 332. 54 29, 997, 682 34 3,951. 42 168, 795. 00 197,307.50 78,176,604.12 1 On the basis of checks issued. Internal Revenue Service The Internal Revenue Service is responsible for the collection of the internal revenue and for the enforcement of the internal revenue laws and certain other statutes. These other statutes include the Federal Alcohol Administration Act (27 U. S. C. 201-212); the Liquor Enforcement Act of 1936 (18 U. S. C. 1261, 1262, 3615); the Federal Firearms Act (15 U. S. C. 901-909); and the National Firearms Act (26 U. S. C. 5801-5862). Review of operations Collections.—Internal revenue collections for the fiscal year 1958 totaled $80.0 billion, nearly equaling the $80.2 billion collected in 1957. Corporation and individual income tax collections decreased .as a result of the decline in business activity b u t these decreases were largely offset by increases in collections of employment taxes and excise taxes. Collections by tax sources for the fiscal years 1929-58 are shown in detail in table 13 in the tables section of this report. Collections 1 More detailed information will be found in the separate annual report of the Commissioner of Internal Revenue. 130 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY from the principal sources of tax revenue for the fiscal years 1957 and 1958 are summarized in the following table. I n thousands-of dollars Source 1957 I n c o m e a n d profits taxes: Corporation . Individual: W i t h h e l d b y employers 1 other 1 1.- . . . . 21, 530, 653 20, 533,316. 26,727,543 12,302, 229 27,040, 911 • llr527, 648. 39,029, 772 38, 568, 559' 60,560, 425 59,101,874 _._ 6, 634,467 330,034 616.020 7, 733, 223; 335,880 575, 282' . 7, 580, 522 8, 644. 386- 1, 377,999 1, 410, 925 2, 973,195 1, 674,050 5,990, 299 2,946, 461 1, 734,021 6,133, 786 10, 637, 544 10,814, 268 --_ - • T o t a l i n d i v i d u a l income taxes . - -- T o t a l income a n d profits taxes E m p l o y m e n t taxes: Old-ao'e a n d disability insurance ' Unemployment insurance-. Railroad r e t i r e m e n t . __ T o t a l e m p l o y m e n t taxes E s t a t e a n d gift taxes -. _ Excise taxes: Alcohol taxes Tobacco taxes._ o t h e r excise taxes __ ... _ - . ._ T o t a l excise taxes - Taxes n o t otherwise classified 2.__ . T o t a l collections --_ _ __ .J 1958 15.482 ;T,;O24 80,171, 971 79, 978, 476 NOTE.—Collections are adjusted to exclude amounts transferred to the Government of Guam under the act approved August l, 1950 (48 U. S. C. 1421 h). Excluded for 1958 was $3,500,000 in individual income tax withheld. 1 Estimated. Collections of individual income tax withheld are not reported separately from old-age and disability insurance .taxes,,on wages and salaries. Similarly, coUections of individual income tax not withheld are not reported separately from old-age and disability insurance taxes on self-employment income. The amount of old-age and disabihty insurance tax collections shown is based on estimates-made by the Secretary of the Treasury pursuant to the provisions of Section 201 (a) of the Social Security Act as amended (42 U. S. 0. 401 (a)), and includes all old-age and disability insurance taxes. The estimates shown for the two classes of individual income taxes were derived by subtracting the old-age and disability insurance tax estimates from the combined totals reported. 2 Includes amounts of unidentified and excess collections and profit from sale of acquired property. For the fiscal year 1957 this item also includes depositary receipts outstanding six months or more for which no tax accounts were identified. Receipt and processing oj returns.—The total number of tax returns filed during fiscal 1958 was 93.5 million, representing a slight increase as compared with the 93.2 million returns filed during 1957. Income tax returns filed by individuals and fiduciaries numbered 60.8 million, showing a gain of about 0.6 million and accounting for nearly twothirds of the total number received. The number of information documents received totaled approximately 259 million. Upon receipt in internal revenue offices, the tax returns are processed through a series of operations which include the assessment of the taxes reported, verification of tax credits, computation or verffication of tax liability, issuance of bills for unpaid accounts, and the scheduling of tax refunds. Duiing 1958 an increased portion of this work was done in the three service centers, using large-scale machine facilities. Service center processing of individual income tax returns and decla,rations of estimated tax was extended to cover 50 districts, or 36 States. Service center facilities also were utilized in the matching of information documents, the mailing of tax return packages to tax- ADMINISTRATIVE 131 REPORTS payers for the next year's filing, and in the processing of claims for refund of Federal tax on gasoline used on farms. As a means of adding to the consumer spending potential at the time of recession in the economy, steps were taken to speed up the scheduling of refunds to taxpayers who overpaid their individual income tax for tax year 1957. Except for cases involving questionable claims or faultily prepared returns, this work was completed by May 9, .1958, less than four weeks following the April 15 filing deadline. The :accelerated scheduling, coupled with an increase in the number of 'Overpayments, brought the number of such refund checks issued rand credits scheduled to more than 37 million during 1958, about 2 million more than last year. Tax computations were mathematically verified on 58,365,000 income tax returns, about 3 percent more than were verified in the preceding year. The number of returns found to contain errors was 1,908,000, with tax increases aggregating $109,674,000 and tax decreases totaling $47,796,000. Enjorcement activities.—For the third consecutive year, the number •of returns examined was increased. Income tax examinations rose to 2,496,000 as compared with 2,310,000 in 1957. This continued improvement is directly attributable to a constant appraisal and adjustment of the audit operations. Advances during the year included the establishment of a program for the classification and examination of exempt organizations, revision of existing instructions for the disposition of disputed office audit cases, increased training material and classroom instructions for both new and experienced audit personnel, and the establishment of guidelines for the assignment of work to revenue agents in accordance with their training and experience. A comparison of the number of returns examined during the last two years follows. I n t h o u s a n d s of r e t u r n s T y p e of r e t u r n 1957 1958 • I n c o m e tax: Corporation I n d i v i d u a l and -- . fiduciary--, T o t a l income tax _ E s t a t e a n d gift taxes _ Excise a n d e m p l o y m e n t taxes ^ G r a n d total - . - _-_ . _ ... _ - _-_ . _ . 170 2,140 159 2,336 2, 310 28 284 2,496 28 317 2; 622 2,841 1 Excludes examinations in which there were no tax changes and which were completed as part of examinations covering both income and excise and/or employment tax returns. The additional tax, interest, and penalties resulting from audit totaled $1,449,564,000 for 1958, closely approaching last year's total ol $1,451,674,000 and well above the totals reached in other recent years.' The amount saved through the audit and disallowance of improper refund claims totaled $271,168,000 as compared with $387,815,000" in the preceding year. In each of the last two fiscal years, over one million investigations were completed on the basis of preliminary information indicating r Revised. 132 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY that the persons or firms involved had failed to file required returns. As a result of these investigations and the canvassing operations undertaken to discover nonfilers, a total of 890,882 delinquent returns was secured during 1958, approximately the same number as in 1957. The tax, interest, and penalties on these returns aggregated $125,227,000, an increase of 12.3 percent. A comparison of the enforcement results for 1957 and 1958.follows. I n t h o u s a n d s of dollars Source 1957 A d d i t i o n a l tax, interest, a n d penalties resulting from a u d i t Increase i n income t a x resulting from m a t h e m a t i c a l verification T a x , interest, a n d penalties o n d e l i n q u e n t r e t u r n s i T o t a l a d d i t i o n a l tax, interest, a n d penalties C l a i m s disallowed 1958 1.451,674 ' 99,983 111, 557 1,449, 564 109, 674 125,227 ' 1, 663,214 r 387, 815 1, 684,465' 271,168 «• Revised. « Delinquent returns secured by Audit Division are excluded for both years, owing to nonavailability of data for periods prior to January 1,1957. Amount excluded for 1958 is $21,308,000. The dollar inventory of past-due tax accounts was reduced for the third straight year. However, as the result of a 9 percent increase in the number of accounts becoming overdue during the year, there was a small increase in the number of accounts on hand at the year-end. The inventory on June 30, 1958, totaled 1,505,000 cases involving $1,466,000,000 in unpaid taxes. This was 1.1 percent higher than a year earlier in number of cases, b u t 6.1 percent lower dollarwise. The accounts closed by collection, abatement, or other action during 1958 totaled 2,960,000 cases and $1,447,000,000, representing increases of 7.2 percent in number and 9.5 percent in amount as compared with 1957. T h e collections amounted to $1,012,000,000, which is 7.3 percent more than in 1957. T h e increases were accomplished primarily through improved procedures, with expanded use of office collection methods on easier cases in order to permit the revenue officer staff to concentrate on the more difficult ones. More authority in combating tax delinquencies was given the Service b y Public Law 85-321, approved February 11, 1958, which provides that upon notification, taxpayers must make deposits in a special fund in trust of moneys from withheld income and social security taxes and excise taxes on facilities and services. In fraud investigations, emphasis was continued on the identffication and investigation of cases having maximum deterrent value. Steps also were taken to widen the coverage of such investigations both as to geographical areas and classes of taxpayers involved. Partly owing to these policies and partly to a 2 percent decrease in special agent man-years, the number of full-scale investigations decreased in 1958, totaling 4,184 cases as compared with 4,538 in 1957. However, the additional tax and penalties involved in these cases increased 25 percent over the previous year. The investigations completed in 1958 ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 133 included 1,946 cases in which prosecutions were recommended, as compared with 2,271 in 1957. Indictments were returned against 1,359 defendants during 1958 compared with 1,666 defendants indicted in 1957. In the cases reaching the courtroom, 968 defendants pleaded guilty or nolo contendere, 128 were convicted after trial, 106 were acquitted, and 325 were dismissed. The following table presents the record of convictions, including pleas of guilty or nolo contendere, for the years .1953 through 1958, in cases involving all classes of internal Tevenue taxes except alcohol or tobacco taxes. • . ... 1953 1954. 1955 1956 1957 1958 Number of individuals convicted .Fiscalyear . : - . - - - . s _ - _ . - . - . - 929 1,291 1,339 1,572 1,256 1,096 International operations.—International operations of the Service are centralized in the International Operations Division with headquarters in Washington, D . C , and permanent field offices in France, Germany, Canada, the Philippines, and Puerto Rico. Through these offices and through brief visits made by revenue agents to more than 30 other countries, the Service supplies information and assistance to United States taxpayers abroad, conducts a program of enforcement activities, and obtains information needed in tax cases under consideration in its domestic offices. The collection of delinquent taxes due from overseas military personnel was facilitated through the use of pajroll deduction agreements obtained by correspondence with the taxpayers and referred to the Defense Department as authority for salary deductions to cover the unpaid taxes. Alcohol tax administration.—Efforts to combat illicit production and sale of alcoholic beverages through revised enforcement procedtires brought tangible results during 1958. An indication of the success of the drive against major violators is found in the longer sentences recently imposed for violations of the Federal liquor laws. An intensified preventive program was carried out through the cooperation of thousands of dealers who voluntarily refused to sell the essential raw materials to suspicious persons or known violators. The support of the press in this preventive approach to the ^'moonshine" problem has been most gratifying and tends to belie the occasional^ held belief that ^^moonshining" may be regarded with amused and sympathetic tolerance. Considerable success has also been achieved by court actions which sustain the forfeiture of vehicles being used to transport sugar, yeast, and other materials under circumstances clearly indicating that they were intended for the manufacture of illicit spirits. Seizures for violations of alcohol tax laws decreased but the number of arrests increased slightly as investigations were extended and raids more 134 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY carefully planned. The following table compares 1958 results with those for 1957 and earlier years. N u m b e r of stills seized Fiscal y e a r 1940 1945 1950 1955 1956 1957 1958 - _ — - - 10,663 8,344 10,030 12, 509 14, 499 11, 820 9,272 W i n e gallons of m a s h seized 6, 480, 200 2, 945, 000 4, 892, 600 7, 375, 300 - 8,643,200 6, 756, 600 5,140, 800 N u m b e r of arrests madei 25, 638 11,104 10, 236 10, 545 11,380 11, 513 11, 631 1 Includes arrests for firearms violations and, begiiming with 1955, tobacco tax violations. Arrests involving these two classes of violations during 1958 numbered 513 and 9, respectively. Proposals of the Service for simplifying alcohol tax administration and bringing up to date the statutory requirements relating to production, warehousing, processing, removal, and use of all types of distilled spirits are embodied in H. R. 7125, which was under consideration by the Senate Finance Committee during the year, and was enacted shortly thereafter (September 2, 1958). Rejunds.—The total amount of internal revenue refunds, plus interest, for the fiscal year 1958 was $4,651,656,000 ^ as compared with $4,009,335,000 ^ in the preceding year, with individual income tax refunds accounting for over 80 percent of the amount for each year. Interest payments included in these totals amounted to $73,675,000 in 1958 as compared with $57,009,000 in 1957. The amounts refunded and the interest thereon, as requhed by law, are paid out of appropriations separate from that covering Internal Revenue Service administrative expenses. Appeals and civil litigation.—Cases in which an agreement cannot be reached in the Audit Division are referred at the taxpayer's request to the Appellate Division for consideration of protests. The volume of protests referred to the Appellate Division has increased steadily in recent years as a result of increased audit activity. As of June 30, 1958, the inventory of protested income, profits, estate, and gift tax cases pending in the Appellate Division totaled 14,268 as compared with 12,576 cases on hand at the beginning of the year. Notwithstanding the larger worldoad, the policy of considering protested cases promptly has continued with the result that the inventory at the close of the year was in a substantially current condition. The inventory of docketed Tax Court cases, in which the Service endeavors to reach agreements with taxpayers prior to trial, increased from 8,761 cases, at the beginning of the year to 10,395 cases at the close of fiscal 1958.. Litigation and settlement procedures in Tax Court cases were strengthened, effective May 1, 1958, by assigning the Regional Counsel full responsibility for settlement of a case on and after the opening day of the session of the Tax Court at which the case is calendared for trial. Prior to the opening date of the 1 Figures have not been reduced to reflect reimbursements from the Federal old-age and survivors insurance trust fund amounting to $75,465,000 in 1958 and $58,190,000 in 1957, and from the highway trust fund amounting to $89,913,000 in 1958 and $17,000 in 1957. >• Revised. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 135 session, settlements remain the joint responsibility of the Regional Counsel and the Appellate Division.. In cases outside the jurisdiction of the Tax Court and in most cases within the Tax Court jurisdiction, taxpayers who have paid a disputed tax can, if they wish, sue for refund in the Court of Claims or in a "United States district court. During 1958 receipts of such cases in courts other than the Tax Court exceeded disposals and backlogs rose slightly from 2,799 cases as of July 1, 1957, to 2,813 cases pending June 30, 1958. Technical services.—Technical services include the interpretation of statutory provisions, the preparation and issuance of rulings and advisory statements to the public and revenue officials, the preparation of regulations and other tax guide materials, technical advice and assistance in the preparation and issuance of tax forms, continuing research of tax inequities, and the development of programs for clarification and simplification of tax rules. Technical assistance also is provided in programs for legislative revision and in conducting the negotiation of tax treaties. The program for the issuance of new regulations under the Internal Revenue Code of 1954 was advanced during the year by the publication of a number of important regulations. Included in this group was the new estate tax regulation (T. D. 6296) which represented the first major tax regulation completed under the originally enacted provisions of the 1954 Code. Other important regulations in this group related to research and experimental expenditures (T. D. 6255), declarations of estimated income tax and failure by individual or corporation to pay estimated income tax (T. D. 6267), methods of accounting (T. D. 6282), and certain itemized deductions for individuals and corporations (T. D. 6291). Of the total of 152 separate Treasury Decisions (not including alcohol and tobacco tax provisions) scheduled for preparation and issuance under the 1954 Code, 92 have now been published in final form and an additional 11 in proposed form. A total of 32 regulations implementing the alcohol and tobacco tax provisions of the 1954 Code have now been issued, while two tobacco tax regulations remain to be issued. Requests for tax rulings and technical advice totaled 45,170, comprised of 41,378 from taxpayers and 3,792 from field offices. The total number of revenue rulings and revenue procedures published in the Internal Revenue Bulletin during the year was 687, compared with 737 in fiscal 1957. Approximately 223 public-use forms, instructions, and publications, were reviewed and revised to conform with recent legislation or to incorporate other changes. The simplification of public-use forms and the reduction of paperwork continued to be primary objectives of the forms management program. Personnel.—The employees on Internal Revenue Service rolls at the close of the year numbered 50,816, consisting of 2,909 employees iri the national office and 47,907 in the regional and district offices. At the close of the preceding year the number of persons employed totaled 51,364, comprising 2,832 national .office employees and 48,532 regional and district office employees. 136 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY The number of einployees in the vaiious branches of the Internal Revenue Service a t the close of the fiscal years 1957 and 1958 is shown in the followiag table. Number on pa5Toll at close of fiscal year Location and type 1957 .....J.;^.-„...1958 B Y LOCATION 2,832 48, 532. National ofiBce > Regional and district oflQces 2,909 • 47. 907 B Y TYPE Permanent personnel: Supervisory personnel Enforcement personnel: Revenue officers 2 OflQce auditors —. Returns examiners Revenue agents Special agents Alcohol tax inspectors Alcohol tax investigators Storekeeper-gaugers Total enforcement personnel ^ Legal personnel Other technical personnel Clerical personnel, messengers, and laborers Total permanent personnel Temporary personnel Grand total 523 547 5,782 2,137 1,466 10,822 1,542 465 .954 833" 5,476 2,095 1,604 10, 510 1,470 438 , 912 771 24,001 501 3,978 21, 794 23, 276 513 4,252 21, 246 50, 797 567 49,834 982 50, 816 1 National oflQce figures include International Operations Division personnel (headquarters and field oflQces) numbering 230 for 1957 and 271 for 1958. 2 Formerly designated as collection oflQcers. Cost of administration.—The entire cost of Internal Revenue Service operations during the year, including all items of expense except amounts refunded to taxpayers, was $337,429,000, as compared with $305,538,000 for 1957. ' The Gov^ernment's contribution to the civil service retirement fund, included in the obligations of each agency for 1958 and subsequent fiscal years, accounted for over half of the increase. Another major factor was the increase in salary rates, beginning January 12, 1958, under the provisions of t h e Federal Employees Salary Increase Act of 1958. Management improvements Significant improvements were reported in every functional area as personnel at all levels became increasingly aware of the benefits to be gained through a constant search for more economical ways to collect taxes and administer the internal revenue laws. Estimated annual savings totaled $2,861,000 of which $2,361,000 was applied to cushion the impact of expanding workloads, in essential activities, and $500,000 was applied to reduce the appropriation request for 1959. The principal management actions and organizational changes are summarized below. Executive selection program.—The development and maintenance of a ^'Blue Ribbon" career service continued bo receive major attention. An executive selection program was initiated to assure that ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 137 •employees in key positions throughout the Revenue Service are automatically considered for vacancies in regional commissioner, assistant regional commissioner, and district director positions. .Placements in assistant district director positions are made on the basis of nationwide competition through the executive development program, instituted in July 1955 for the selection and training of Service personnel who are judged to have the greatest promise as future executives. -"^ Organizational changes.—^Treasury Department ..Order No. 150-46 dated May 19, 1958, established the office of Assistant Commissioner (Planning and Research). This office is responsible fcr the coordination of all proposed modifications of administrative policies and for developing new approaches whereby the Service's operations may be improved and the compliance burden on taxpayers reduced. It will furnish leadership and guidance for planning, research, and systems activities throughout the Service. An Employee Relations Branch was established in the Personnel Pivision of the national office. The new braach provides personnel ^ i d a n c e and permits increased attention and emphasis to be given .employee relations matters. A realignment of district collection division office branches was initiated in the latter part of the year, following tests in the Pittsburgh and Phoenix offices. Through a balanced grouping of the office •collection functions and a carefully developed supervisory structure, the realignment wffi encourage sound managerial planning and control and wffi permit the most effective use of employee skills. An important feature is the establishment of a Taxpayer Service Branch which concentrates in one central area all taxpayer inquiries pertaining to collection matters. Control of processing operations.—A work planning and control system was installed in all district offices to provide uniformly •effective control over the cashier, accounting, and returns processing operations of the collection activity. This area represents one of the major functions of trie Service and is basic to the entire revenue system, providing the only point of contact with most taxpayers and the starting point for enforcement activities. The new system achieves its objectives through establishment and realistic evaluation of work plans, effective development and justification of budgets, proper allocation of manpower and other resources, and periodic review of work status. Mechanization of payroll operations.—Substantial progress was made in a long range program to apply improved mechanical and electronic techniques to payroll, budget, and related operations. Following successful tests of a mechanized payroll operation for the Boston region ia the Northeast Service Center, this installation was assigned to handle payrolls for the Atlanta, Cincinnati, New York and Philadelphia regions, and the national office. Preparations were made for the centralization of payroll operations for the four western regions in the Western Service Center. The centralized payroll records established under this program serve also to provide personnel data and other information used in developing financial plans. Relocation and consolidation of office space.—Steps were taken to improve the field office quarters through relocation and consolidation. 138 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY The Columbia and Jacksonville district offices were moved into new buildings designed primarily for the Internal Revenue Service. The Camden office was relocated in a completely remodeled air-conditioned building! A new building is to be erected for the Baltimore office and completely remodeled buildings are scheduled for the Milwaukee, Cincinnati, and Lbs Angeles offices. In addition, approximately 68 locatioQS were improved by providing housing that meets standards for effective operation. Office of International Finance The Office of International Finance assists the officers of the Department in the formulation and execution of policies and programs in international financial and monetary matters. By direction of the Secretary, the responsibilities of the Office of International Finance include the Treasury's activities in relation to international financial and monetary problems, covering such matters as the convertibility of currencies, exchange rates and restrictions, and the extension of stabilization credits; gold and silver policy; the Bretton Woods Agreements Act, and the operations of the International Monetary Fund, the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, and the International Finance Corporation; foreign lending and assistance; the North Atlantic Treaty Organization; the activities of the National Advisory Council on International Monetary and Financial Problems; the Anglo-American Financial Agreement; the United States Exchange Stabilization Fund; and the Foreign Assets Control. The Office also acts for the Treasury on the financial aspects of international treaties, agreements, and organizations in which the United States participates, and it takes part in negotiations with foreign governments with regard to matters included within its responsibilities. I t assists the Secretary on the international financial aspects of problems arising in connection with his responsibilities under the Tarffi Act. The Office also represents the Treasury in the work of the subordinate organs of the National Advisory Council on International Monetary and Financial Problems, of which the Secretary of the Treasury is chairman. The Office of International Finance advises Treasury officials and other departments and agencies of the Government concerning exchange rates and other financial problems encountered in operations involving foreign currencies. In particular, it advises the Department of State and the Department of Defense on financial matters related to their normal operations in foreign countries and on the special financial problems arising from defense preparation and mffitary operations. In conjunction with its other activities, the Office studies the financial policies of foreign countries, exchange rates, balances of payments, the fiow of capital, and other related problems. The Division of Foreign Assets Control administers certain regulations and orders issued under Section 5 (b) of the Trading with the ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 139 Enemy Act. The Foreign Assets Control Regulations block all property in the United States in which any Communist Chinese or North Korean interest exists and prohibit all trade or other financial transactions with those areas or their nationals. The Control •carries on licensing activities in connection with transactions otherwise prohibited, and takes action to enforce the regulations. The Control also administers regulations which prohibit persons in the United States from purchasing, selling, or arranging the purchase or sale of strategic commodities outside the United States for ultimate shipment to the Soviet bloc. These latter regulations supplement the export control laws administered by the Department of Commerce. In addition, the Control has responsibilities with respect to blocked accounts of approximately $9 million received from the sale of a Czechoslovak-owned steel mill sold pursuant to an order issued by the Secretary on March 25, 1954. (See also exhibit 42.) Bureau of the Mint ^ The principal functions of the Bureau of the Mint include the manufacture of coin, both domestic and foreign; the distribution of .doiiiestic coin between the mints, the Fed.eral Reserve Banks and "brariches, and the Treasurer of the United States in Washington, D. C ; the custody, processing, and movement of gold and silver bullion; the administration of the regulations issued under the Gold Reserve Act of 1934, asamended (31 U. S. C. 440-446), and Section .5b of the act of October 6, 1917, as amended (12 U. S. C. 95a), including the issuance and denial of licenses, the purchase of gold, and the sale of gold bullion for industrial use; the administration of silver regulations issued under the acts of July 6, 1939 (31 U. S. C. 316c), and July 31, 1946 (31 U. S. C. 316d); the manufacture of historic and special Government medals; and other technical services. Six field institutions were in operation during trie fiscal year 1958, the Philadelphia, Denver, and San Francisco Mints; the New York Assay Office; trie Fort Knox Gold Bullion Depository; and the West .Point Silver Bullion Depository which operates as an adjunct of the New York Assay Office. "^ Since discontinuance of coinage operations .in Mapch 1955 aod closing of the electrolytic refinery at the end of fiscal year 1957 the San Francisco Mint has operated as an assay office and bullion depository. Coinage The Philadelphia and Denver Mints manufactured a total of 2.0 billion domestic coins during the fiscal year 1958, an increase of 6 percent over the previous year's output. Production consisted of silver subsidiary and minor coins only, as the mint stock of silver 1 More detailed information .concerning the Bureau of the Mint is contained in the separate amiual report ^of the Director of the Mint. 140 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY dollars has been adequate since September 1935. A table follows showing the production of domestic coins in 1958. Denomination 1-cent pieces. 5-cent pieces Dimes __ Quarter dollars Half dollars Composition Number of coins Face value produced i Gross weight In millions Short tOQs Bronze. ,(95% copper, 5% zinc and tin) Ciipronickel (75% copper, 25% nickel) - '900 parts silver, 100 copper do - _. do -- Total 1,401. 7 227.2 • 232.8 124.5 27.7 $14.0 11.4 23:3 31.1 13.8 4,805 1,252 641 858 383 2, 013. 9 93.6 2 7,939 ' Includes 788,204 sets of proof coins manufactured. 2 Consists ol 1,693 tons of silver; 5,693 tons of copper; 313 tons of nickel; and 240 tons of zinc and tin. In addition to domestic coinage the Philadelphia Mint manufactured 77.5 million coins for three foreign governments during the year, as follows: Dominican Republic: 1 centavo. Ethiopia: 10 cents 5 cents . -. - ' Number of coins produced (in millions) Composition Government and denomination '. 95% copper, 5% zinc and. tin 5.0. 95% copper, 5% zinc do - 40.6 10.0 50.0 Haiti: 10 centimes 5 centimes 70% copper, 18% zinc, 12% nickel do 7.5 15.0 22.6 77.5 Total During the fiscal year 1958 the mints delivered 1.8 billion domestic coins for circulation. The one-cent pieces and dimes were in greatest demand. Shipments of the six denominations are shown in the following table. Denomination 1-centpieces ' 5-cent pieces. _ . Dimes Quarter dollars. Half dollars Silver dollars . Total . _.".'.'". . . 1 __ . . . . - 1 Includes 791,221 sets of proof coins sold by the Philadelphia Mint. Number of couis Face value shipped 1 Gross weight In millions Short tons 1,326.1 148.5 234.9 . 95.2 24.1 12.7 $13.3 7.4 23.5 23.8 12.0. 12.7. 4,546 819 647 656 331 •374 1,841.5 92.7 7,373 141 ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS The total stock of domestic coins, comprising the amount held in the mints and other Treasury offices, in Federal Reserve Banks, commercial banks, and in the hands of the public, is compared at the beginning and close of the fiscal year in the following statement. Face value (in millions) stock of United States coins Minor coins Subsidiary sUver colas Silver dollars ._ Total _. . July 1, 1957 June 30, 1958 $484.6 1,382. 5 488.4 $509.8 1,448.8 488.2 $25.2 66.3 1 —.2 2,355. 5 2, 446. 8 91.3 Increase, or decrease (—) J Decrease represents the amount of uncurrent (worn) silver dollars withdrawn from circulation and returned to the mints. Gold The three mints and the New York Assay Office received 7.7 million fine ounces of gold valued at $268.3 million during fiscal year 1958. Issues of gold totaled 36.3 million fine ounces valued at $1,2.69.8: million, of which 0.6 million fine ounces valued at $19.8 million were sold for domestic industrial, professional, and artistic use. The amount of gold in storage at Fort Knox remained unchanged at 356.7 million ounces valued at $12.5 billion. Total holdings in custody of the five mint institutions at the beginning and close of the year, and total receipts and issues, are shown in the following table. Gold holdings and transactions (excludmg intermint transfers) Holdings on June 30, 1957 Total receipts during fiscal year 1958. Total issues during fiscal year 1958.., Holdiags on June 30, 1958-.. Net decrease 1,001.5 142 19 58 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Silver Silver bullion transactions at the three mints, the New York Assay Office, and the West Point Depository, are summarized in the following statement. Silver bullion holdingS'and'-transactions (excluding iatermiat transfers) Holdiags on June 30, 1957 Fine ounces (ia millions) 1 1,741. 8 Receipts during fiscal year 1958: Newly mined domestic silver, act of July 31, 1946 (31 U. S. C. 316d) Lend-lease silver from foreign governments: India ^ 1 Pakistan 26.2 104.3 15.0 Total lend-lease silver Recoiaage bullion from uncurrent United States silver coins other miscellaneous silver 119.3 1.4 Totalreceipts Issues during'fiscal year 1958: Manufactured into United States subsidiary silver coias Sold under act of July 31, 1946 (31 U. S. C. 316d) other misceUaneous issues 147..6 49.4 (*) Total issues Holdings on June 30, 1958 Net increase in silver bullion 49.5 2 i; 839. < .1 *Less than 500,000 ounces. ' Includes 1,643.9 million ounces held as security for silver certificates, 3 Includes 1,658.7 million ounces held as secm-ity for silver certificates. Revenue and monetary assets Revenue deposited b y the Bureau of the Mint into the general fund of the Treasury during the fiscal year 1958 totaled $60.5 million, an increase of $10 million over the amount deposited the previous year. The principal item consisted of seigniorage which totaled $59.5 million. Seigniorage on subsidiary silver coinage amounted to $32.3 milliori; on minor coinage $21.5 million; and on 14.8 million ounces of silver bullion revalued as security for silver certfficates from cost to monetary value, $5.7 million. Other miscellaneous deposits amourited to $1.1 milhon. •• •" -:-~ - ^ - - - : : Monetary assets of gold and silver bullion, silver and minor coins, and other .values in the m i n t institutions totaled $24.7 billion at the beginning of the fiscal year and $23.8 billion at the close of the year. United States gold and silver production and consumption The estimates of United States gold and silver production and issues of gold and silver for domestic industrial, professional, and artistic use, made annually by the Office of the Director of the Mint, are on a calendar year basis. In the calendar year 1957 total domestic gold production amounted to 1,800,000 fine ounces, and silver production, 38,720,200 fine ounces. Gold and silver issued for domestic industrial, professional, and artistic use amounted to 1,450,000 fine ounces and 95,400,000 fine ounces, respectively. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 143 Management improvement The management improvement program of the Bureau of the Mint, continuing during fiscal year 1958, resulted in total monetary savings of $172,650 on an annual recurring basis, and a savings in manpower .requirements of 19 employees. The major monetary savings in 1958, amounting to $151,000, were jrealized from curtailment of operations at the San Francisco Mint. Refinery operations were discontinued at the close of fiscal year 1957 and the mint has since been operated as an assay office and gold and :silver depository. Equipment and supplies related to both coinage and refinery activities were transferred to other mint institutions or .sold. In addition, various other actions of signfficance contributed to the general efficienc}^ and economy of the mint. For example, the modernization program of the Philadelphia Mint was continued with the installation of modernized melting and rolling equipment. Coinage presses transferred to the Denver Mint from San Francisco increased the number of presses there from 22 to 29. Denver's coinage production thereb}^ increased 36.9 percent with an increase of only 25 percent in personnel. Other savings at Denver, amounting to $11,650,, were obtained by remodeled coin storage facilities; improved handling of coinage ingots and cut blanks; improved transportation of silyer .and copper from storage to make-up; and the installation of X-ray .automatic strip gauge control. As a source of copper for coinage, arrangements were made with the Navy Department to purchase about 1,800,000 pounds of cathode copper which were surplus to Navy's needs, at about 5 cents per pound below the market price. Its use in the manufacture of minor -coins will result in an increase of approximately $90,000 in seigniorage:. Continued attention was given to the programs of records-manager .ment, forms and reports control, safety, coritrol of communication -costs, and incentive awards. Cash awards amounting to $245 were granted to employees for suggestions resulting in savings of $2,463 per year and intangible benefits. Bureaii of Narcotics ^ The Bureau of Narcotics administers. a program designed to. deal with the control of international, national, and local sources of the illicit supply of drugs. Within the United States the Bureaii is charged with the investigation, detection, and prevention of violations of the Federal narcotic and marihuana laws and of the Opium Poppy Control Act of 1942, and related statutes. The scope of the Bureau's operations continues to enlarge as additional drugs are made subject to these laws. Opium and coca leaves and their derivatives have been under national control since 1915; marihuana has been under control since 1937; isonipecaine, a synthetic known more general^ as meperidine and internationally as pethidine, was brought under control in 1944; and under the act of March 8, 1946 (26 U. S. C. 4731 (g)), a total of 26 1 Further iaformation concerning narcotic drugs is available in the separate report of the Bureau of Nar•cotics entitled Traffic in Opium and Other Dangerous Drugs for the Year Ended December 31, 1957. 479641—59 11 144 19 58 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY other synthetic narcotics have been brought under control through findings by the Secretary of the Treasury, proclaimed by the President, that the drugs possess addiction liability similar to morphine. Internationally, opium, coca leaves, marihuana, and their more important derivatives have been under control by the terms of the Opium Conventions of 1912, 1925, and 1931. In addition, under Article 11 of the 1931 Convention and the iriternational Protocol of November 19, 1948, two secondary derivatives of opium and 37 synthetic drugs have been found to have addicting qualities similar to mori3hine or cocaine and have been brought under international control by a procedure similar to that provided in our national legislation. The agreement to limit the production of opium to world ihedical and scientific needs signed at the United Nations on June 23, 1953, and approved by the United States Senate August 20, 1954, was followed by Senate Resolution 290 of June 14, 1956, urging other governments also to rsitiij. This Protocol requires the ratifications of 25 states including any three of seven named producing countries and any three of nine named manufacturing countries. As of June 30, 1958, 32 ratifications had been deposited including five from manufacturing countries, but only one from a producing country. When two additional producing states have deposited their ratification the Protocol will become eft'ective and should then accomplish a much further reduction in the amount of opium available to the illicit traffic. In the United States important and effective aid in discouraging the illicit traffic in narcotics and marihuana continues to be afforded by the Narcotics Control Act of 1956 (21 U. S. C. 174). The effects of these laws continue to be refiected in the sentences imposed. In Federal courts the average sentence per conviction for unregistered narcotic violators was 6 years 1 month in 1958 as compared with 5 years 6 months in 1957; and for marihuana violators it was 4 years 11 months as compared with 4 years 8 months in 1957. The gradual stiffening of penalties at both national and State levels is slowly but steadily producing a deterrent to illicit traffic in the areas affected by the heavier sentences. Excellent cooperation continues between Federal, State, and municipal narcotic law enforcement agencies in the exchange of narcotic law enforcement information. The names of 44,146 addicts were recorded in our central index as of December 31, 1957. The narcotics training school, for State and municipal officers, is staft'ed by 20 experts in narcotic law enforcement. I t has now graduated 376 State and municipal narcotic law enforcement officers, representing 159 ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 145 separate law enforcement agencies from 34 States and Puerto Rico. Officers from Canada, Afghanistan, Indonesia, Iran, Jordan, Lebanon, Mexico, Japan, and Turkey also have attended the school. The Bureau's inservice training program for its own officers was augmented during the year, and 33 of its agents completed courses in the Treasury Department law enforcement school; the Bureau's fiscal procedures were further streamlined in connection with a site audit by a General Accounting Office team. Cash awards for management improvement suggestions were paid to 21 employees. The Bureau directs its principal activities toward the suppression of the illicit traffic in narcotic drugs and marihuana and the control of the legitimate manufacture and distribution of narcotics through the^ customary channels of trade. I t issues permits for import of the crude narcotic drugs and for export and intransit movements of narcotic drugs and preparations passing through the United States from one foreign country to another. I t supervises the manufacture and distribution of narcotic substances within the country and has authority to issue licenses for the production of opium poppies to meet the medical needs of the countr}^ if and when such production should become in the public interest. Cooperation is given to States in local narcotic legislation and enforcement and to the Department of State in the discharge of the international obligations of the United States concerning the abuse of narcotic drugs and marihuana. During the fiscal year 1958 the total quantity of narcotics seized amounted to 2,902 ounces as compared with 2,089 ounces in 1957. Seizures of marihuana during 1958 amounted to 660 pounds bulk, and 1,620 cigarettes, as compared with; 1,049 pounds bulk and 3,051 cigarettes in 1957. Thefts of narcotics from persons authorized to handle the drugs increased slightly in number during 1958. The quantity stolen, however, was somewhat less, 1,365 ounces as compared with 1,514 ounces in 1957. During the fiscal year there were approximately 302,000 persons registered with directors of internal revenue under the Federal narcotic and marihuana laws to engage in legitimate narcotic and marihuana activities. The table following shows for the fiscal year the number of violations of the narcotic and marihuana laws by persons registered to engage in legitimate narcotic and marihuana activities and by persons who have not qualified by registration to engage in such activities, as reported by Federal narcotic enforcement officers. 146 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Number of violations of the narcotic and marihuana laws reported during the fiscal....... . year 1958 with their dispositions and penalties Marihuana laws Narcotic laws • Registered persons Federal Court State Court Pending July 1,1957 -Reported during 1958: Federal! .. Joiat 1 - --. Total to be disposed of _.. Convicted: Federal . . Joint Acquitted: Federal Joint - Dropped: Federal Joiat Nonregistered persons Federal Court Federal Court Total 752 141 1,508 200 55 2,260 341 2 940 1 197 1 148 34 1 37 9 1 20 2 306 5 15 1 41 5 35 1 3 1 1,549 711 2 18 . 6 5,774 Average sentence per conviction: 1958 1957 Average fine per conviction: • 1958 1957- — 6 $16,520 $127,124 100 16,520 127,224 Joint Total 237 104 Yrs. Mos. Yrs. Mos. Yrs. Mos. Yrs. Mos. Yrs. Mos. 2 6 5,769 6 6 766 18 1 731 5 5 - Fines imposed: State Court 16 33 22 —- State Court 39 8 Total disposed of Pending June 30,1958 Sentences imposed: Federal Joiat - — Nonregistered persons 771 . 7 731 6 Yrs. Mos. 2 97 97 2 $9,057 $3,068 $6,200 9,057 3,068 6,200 Yrs. Mos. Yrs. Mos. Yrs. Mos. Yrs. Mos. Yrs. Mos. Yrs. Mos. 6 4 2 3 1 3 3 10 11 2 10 1 4 4 5 .2 6 3 10 9 3 8 4 $2,065 365 $340 $135 199 $46 55 $21 317 $182 16 1 Federal cases are made by Federal officers workiag independently, whUe joint cases are made by Federal and State officers workiag in cooperation. I n foreign countries, investigation, surveillance, and negotiation are undertaken to restrict the amount of narcotic drugs entering this country. In fiscal 1958 through cooperation with the Canadian, French, Swiss, Italian, Greek, Turkish, Syrian, Lebanese, Ecuadoran, and Cuban Governments several large seizures of crude, semiprocessed, and finished narcotics destined for the United States were effected and two large clandestine laboratories closed. The Bureau continues on guard against the large supplies of opium and heroin which are available in Communist China. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 147 The importation, manufacture, and distribution of opium and its derivatives are subjected to a system of quotas and allocations designed to secure their proper distribution for medical needs. Additional quantities of opium were imported during the year. Coca leaf imports were sufficient both for medicinal purposes and for the manufacture of nonnarcotic fiavoring extracts. The quantity of narcotic drugs exported in 1958 was slightly less than in 1957. The export total is not significant in comparison with the quantity used domestically. The manufacture of opium derivatives continued high, principally because of the high medical consumption of codeine and papaverine. United States Coast Guard The basic duties of the United States Coast Guard are prescribed in Title 14 of the United States Code. In general they include: Enforcement or assistance in enforcing Federal laws on the high seas and waters over which the United States has jurisdiction, in particular, laws governing navigation, shipping, and other maritime operations, and protection of life and property within this jurisdiction. The Service is also responsible for promoting the safety and efficiency of merchant vessels; the development, estabhshment, maintenance, and operation of aids to maritime navigation to meet the needs of commerce and the armed forces; maintenance of a state of readiness to function as a specialized service in the Navy in time of war; and maintenance and training of an adequate reserve force. Prevention of loss of life and property due to illegal or unsafe practices is a major aim of the Coast Guard. The maintenance of maritime safety and order includes not only strict law enforcement, but also an educational program to prevent marine casualties by gaining the cooperation and self-regulation of ship operators and boatmen. Search and rescue operations A rise in the Nation's waterborne and airborne commerce, together with the phenomciial growth of pleasure boating, makes ever-increasing demands on the Coast Guard's search and rescue facilities. Lifeboat stations, air stations, and fioating units along both coasts, the inland waterways, Alaska, Hawaii, Bermuda, Puerto Rico, and Newfoundland are integrated into an effective search and rescue network by radio stations, communication centers, and rescue coordination centers. All Coast Guard air and surface craft are available fdr search and rescue duties primarily, or in conjunction with regularly assigned duties. The Coast Guard continued to improve its communication network as part of its responsibility under the President's National Search and Rescue Plan for coordinating the facilities of all agencies capable of assisting in maritime cases in the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, the Caribbean, and the Gulf of Mexico. Agreements were completed with all agencies concerned; lectures were given on procedures; several seminars were held; and full-scale search and rescue exercises for airlines' personnel and other agencies were held quarterly in Honolulu, and begun at Miami on a semiannual basis. 148 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY On July 1, 1958, the merchant vessel position reporting program was inaugurated in the Atlantic. Under this program United States and foreign merchant vessels are encouraged to send their position course and - speed to Coast Guard shore-based radio stations and ocean station vessels for relay to rescue coordination centers. From a tabulation of reports in the New York center, the names, radio call signs, and location of merchant vessels in the best position to assist can be obtained in minutes. This will make unnecessary the diversion of all merchant ships in a large area to the scene of distress. Typical examples of assistance by the Coast Guard in 1958 are as follows: Pacijic search.—On November 8, 1957, an alert was issued on the Pan American stratocruiser, Romance oj the Skies, en route from San Francisco to Honolulu with 36 passengers and eight crew members on board. The last word from the plane was received by the U. S. C. G. C. Minnetonka which was occup37ing Ocean Station November. Thereafter ensued the most extensive search that had ever been undertaken in the Pacific, lasting eight days, crossing and crisscrossing a 150-mile wide path 1,000 miles long between Ocean Station November and Honolulu. I t is estimated that 76 land-based planes flew 320,000 miles, 45 carrier-based aircraft and helicopters, 30,000 miles, and 38 assorted surface vessels cruised 30,000 miles. Eight Coast Guard vessels and three aircraft assisted in the search. By the sixth day 19 bodies had been recovered, but there were no survivors. All operations were coordinated in Coast Guard and Navy rescue centers at Honolulu under the overall direction of the Central Pacffic Search and Rescue Coordinator, Commander, 14th Coast Guard District. Offishore landing.—On July 5, 1957, a P5M Martin seaplane from the Coast Guard Air Station San Francisco made a successful offshore landing at the extreme operating range of 950 miles southwest of San Francisco to remove a seriously ill seaman, who had been transferred from the M/V Kirribilli to the U. S. S. George. The patient was evacuated without incident to the U. S. Public Health Service Hospital San Francisco for further treatment. Cutter assistance.—On September 21, 1957, the German training barque S. S. Pamir with 90 persons on board, including 54 German naval cadets, foundered and sank 500 miles west of the Azores. The U. S. C. G. C. Absecon, manning Ocean Station Delta, intercepted the SOS message and proceeded to the scene. Tln^ee days later six survivors were rescued by the Absecon and assisting vessels. The remaining 84 were lost. The search continued for seven days with the Absecon dhecting on-scene operations of 60 merchant vessels from 13 nations and American and Portuguese aircraft. Reports from survivors indicate the Pamir was caught in the northern perimeter of hurricane ''Carrie" and foundered when caught in extremely rough seas. On July 27, 1957, a fire of unknown origin was discovered b}^ the Boston Captain of the Port patrol vessel at the Mystic Coal Yard. The U. S. C. G. C. Cactus, 150 coastguardsmen, and portable firefighting equipment were dispatched from the Coast Guard Base, Boston to assist. The Cactus moved a 450-foot Norwegian freighter from the burning dock while the fire was brought under control by ADMINISTRATIVE 149 REPORTS the shore party with the assistance of local agencies. Eight coastguardsmen were hospitalized for injuries received while fighting the fire. Aircraft assistance.—On February 8, 1958, a Navy plane (P5M) en; route from San Juan to Norfolk lost one engine and changed course to the island of San Salvador, B. W. I., to attempt a night ditching. Coast Guard Air Station, Miami sent up a U F amphibian plane, later reinforced by a second amphibian. The pilot of the first amphibian contacted the disabled Navy plane, talked the pilot out of attemptirig to ditch without benefit of illumination, and alerted the commanding officer of the San Salvador Coast Guard Loran Station for assistance after ditching. Utilizing an 18-foot boat and a borrowed truck, the commanding officer was on the scene IK miles offshore when the Navy plane landed with two minutes pf fuel remaining. One of the Coast Guard amphibians provided additional illumination while the Navy plane was guided thi'ough a dangerous reef to a mooring, using her operative port engine. There were no casualties. A statistical summary of search and rescue assistance during the fiscal year 1958 follows. Rescue operations Vessels assisted: Refloated ( n u m b e r ) Towed (number) o t h e r w i s e aided ( n u m b e r ) P r o p e r t y i n v o l v e d (value i n c l u d i n g cargo) Miles t o w e d . Aircraft assisted: Escorted ( n u m b e r ) Otherwise aided ( n u m b e r ) -. P r o p e r t y i n v o l v e d (value i n c l u d i a g cargo) Miles escorted . . Persons assisted Miscellaneous assisted (floods, forest fires, etc.) A t t e m p t s to assist (no physical assistance rendered) Persons involved ( n u m b e r ) : L i v e s saved or rescued from peril M e d i c a l assistance furnished . _ O t h e r assistance M e n a c e s to n a v i g a t i o n r e m o v e d . Miscellaneous p r o p e r t y i n v o l v e d ( v a l u e ) . B y aviation units B y vessels! B y other equipment 2 83 281 558 195 2,166 504 1,524 9,472 333 1,802 11, 919 1 395 $530, 440, 800 110, 073 340 112 2 40 12 184 547 114 1,997 426 217 1,702 1,496 1,919 5, 234 354 336 $735, 701, 200 52, 051 2,469 2,1,50 8,933 Total 1,984 2 118 71, 791 1 947 $171, 975,100 1 Vessels 56-ft. and over in length. 2 Small boats, vehicular and other equipment. Rescue and survival training programs for overseas aircraft This program is conducted by the Coast Guard for the benefit of civil and militaiy air carrier organizations. Flight crews and other personnel directly concerned with overwater operations, including those in such fields as communications and air traffic control, are given indoctrination in every subject which might contribute to safety and ultimate survival. Emphasis is placed upon coordination between •distressed aircraft and search and rescue agencies, procedures for making emergency landings at sea, use of survival equipment, and rescue techniques. Strong, interest in this program is evidenced by the continued and vigorous participatiori by numerous organizations. In fiscal 1958, participating organizations numbered 273 with 6,428 persons attending, compared with 120 organizations and 5,088 persons during 1957. 150 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Marine inspection and allied safety measures Promotion by the Coast Guard of safety of life and property on vessels subject to inspection and navigation laws includes promulgation and related enforcement of regulations. Encompassed are inspection of vessels and their equipment, construction and repair of vessels, investigation of maiine casualties, manning and citizenship requirements, mustering and drilling of crews, and protection of merchant seamen. Also included are the licensing of officers and pilots, certificating of seamen, load line requirements, pilot rules, transportation of dangerous cargoes on vessels, outfitting and operation of motorboats, licensing of motorboat operators, and patrolling regattas and marine parades. As anticipated, the full effect of the law permitting biennial inspection of cargo vessels (46 U. S. C. 391 (a)-(e)) has resulted in a marked reduction in cargo vessel inspections for certification, and a corresponding increase in reinspections. The act of May 10, 1956 (46 U. S. C. 390 a-g), effective June 1, 1958, requires the inspection and certification of all small passenger vessels carrying more than six: passengers. A portion of these small passenger vessels was inspected on a voluntary basis from January 1 to June 1, 1958. The voluntary inspections, plus the inspections of small passenger vessels for the month of June 1958, resulted in the issuance of 1,722 certificates for the six months ended June 30, 1958. The American public continues its interest in boating on the navigable waters of the United States as evidenced by the 10 percent increase over the previous fiscal year in the' number of vessels issued Certfficates of Award of Number under the act of June 7, 1918, as. amended (46 U. S. C. 288). This represents a signfficant acceleration of the trend in the past few years. There were 3,970 maiine casualties reported, of which 2,032 were^ the subject of detailed investigations. Five of these casualties were considered major, and were investigated by marine boards of investigation, which determined that 385 persons lost their lives from marine casualties, 244 from marine hazards, and 277 from miscellaneous causes such as natural deaths and suicides. There were no passengers' lives lost during the year from casualties on inspected passenger vessels or their equipment. The most serious casualty was the collision between the United States freight vessel S. S. Mormacsurj and the Argentine passenger vessel S. S. Ciudad de Buenos Aires in the Rio de La Plata. There were no injuries or lives lost aboard the Mormacsurj, but the Ciudad de Buenos Aires sank with a reported loss of 75 to 80 persons. Although no witnesses from the Argentine vessel were available for interrogation by the Marine Board of Investigation, it was concluded that the Monnacsur/was not at fault. New construction and major conversions kept shipbuilding a c tivity at a high level during the year. The Santa Rosa, one of four large passenger vessels under construction, was delivered to the owners, and the other three were expected to follow soon. Twolarge passenger vessels, the Matsonia and the Atlantic, were placed in service after essentially complete rebuilding. The keel was laid for the N . S. Savannah, the world's first nuclear-powered merchant, vessel. ADMINISTRATIVE 151 REPORTS In September 1957, the State Department received a note from the British Embassy proposing that a conference be held in the spring of 1960 to draft revisions of the 1948 International Convention on Safety of Life at Sea and the 1930 International Load Line Convention. The State Department requested the Commandant of the Coast Guard to assume overall responsibility for United States preparations for this conference. Accordingly various committees were established to develop American proposals. As a result of the Stockholm-Andrea Doria collision, a committee had already made studies aimed at revising standards for watertight subdivision, damage stability, and ballasting. This committee was requested to serve as a construction committee in developing American proposals, and additional committees were appointed to report on lifesaving appliances, safety of navigation, radio, nuclear power, and load lines. Stemming from casualties caused by shifting ore cargoes, a panel of industry representatives was appointed to study the factors involved, and to make recommendations to the Commandant regarding the safe stowage of such cargoes on general cargo vessels. This panel proposed a ^^Code of Good Practice" which has been circulated to the industry for comment. In March 1958 the requirements were fulfilled to effect the International Convention establishing the Intergovernmental Maritime Consultative Organization (IMCO), which will function as a specialized agency of the United Nations. The Coast Guard's role in this organization will be to encourage adoption of the highest practicable standards for safety and efficiency of navigation. A provision of the 1948 International Convention on Safety of Life at Sea requires that contracting governments cooperate in the interchange of pertinent information regarding major marine casualties to facilitate the development of any changes which might be necessary in the safety requirements of the Convention. To comply more effectively with this requhement, a new committee has been established with representation from the Coast Guard, the Maritime Administration, and the State Department. This committee has the responsibility of reviewing all reports of major casualties investigated by the Coast Guard, and of disseminating to other signatory countries information having a bearing on international safety requirements. Effective March 1, 1958, a Merchant Marine Technical Section was established in the Coast Guard District Office in New Orleans to expedite and improve the handling of plan approvals and other technical matters concerning merchant ship construction, conversion, and alteration for the Gulf and Western Rivers areas. A digest of certain phases of marine inspection follows. Number of vessels Vessel inspections completed Dry dock examinations Reinspections Miscellaneous inspections . Undocumented vessels numbered under provisions of the act of June 7, 1918, as amended (46 U. S. C. 2 8 8 ) . . ..., Violations of navigation and vessel inspection laws Factory inspections ."Merchant vessel plans reviewed 4,514 5,931 5, 272 22, 460 461,117 12,911 1, 004, 796 29, 000 Gross tonnage 6, 049, 741 15. 866,139 14, 563,094 152 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE, TREASURY The Merchant Marine Council held eight regular meetings and one public hearing, supplemented by numerous Coast Guard District Commanders' informal hearings and discussions with affected parties, ' to consider proposed regulations implementing new legislation or amending present requirements. The regulations considered included the following: Rules and regulations for small passenger vessels carrying more than six passengers, act of May 10, 1956 (46 U. S. C. 390a390g); private aids to navigation on the outer Continental Shelf and waters under the jurisdiction of the United States; lights for barges towed on the Gulf intracoastal waterways or western rivers; requirements for radar observers; alternate stowage requhements for carriage of bulk grain cargoes; miscellaneous amendments to vessel inspection regulations; specifications for kapok and fibrous glass life preservers and buoyant vests on nonpassenger-carrying motorboats; dangerous cargo regulations and transportation of military explosives on board vessels (the dangerous cargo regulations were made available as a separate volume of the Code of Federal Regulations); proposed ^'Code of Good Practice" for the stowage of bulk cargoes such as ore and ore concentrates when carried in general cargo vessels; certfficates issued by the International Cargo Gear Bureau, Inc., for cargo handling gear; disclosure of information from marine safety records; and fees and charges for copying, certifying, or searching records and for duplicating documents and certificates. The Coast Guard participated in meetings and conferences promoting merchant marine safety, including the marine section of the National Safety Council's Exposition and Congress in Chicago, 111., the Merchant Marine Conference sponsored by the XJ: S. Propeller Club in Houston, Tex., and the Western Rivers Panel of the Merchant Marine Council in St. Louis, Mo. The Secretary of the Treasury sponsored the first National Small Boat Safety Conference, held in Washington, D. C , December 11 and 12, 1957. The Conference was attended by representatives from 36 industry and boating organizations, boating publications, and Government agencies, and resulted in 19 recommendations for the promotion of small boat safety. The Coast Guard cooperated with the Council of State Governments in drafting a model State law to supplement H. R. 11078, a bill to promote boating safety, to enable coordination, cooperation, and uniformity of boating laws. . Recognizing the tremendous increase in recreational boating, the Coast Guard published 200,000. copies of a pamphlet entitled Motorboat Sajety jor 1957-1958. The publication entitled Proceedings oj the Merchant Marine Council, which contains timely information and articles of interest to mariners, was distributed monthly to approximately 13,700 persons interested in marine safety activities administered by the Coast Guard. Merchant marine personnel.—Merchant marine personnel were issued 86,214 documents during the fiscal year, and shipping commissioners supervised the execution of 9,507 sets of shipping articles in connection with the shipment and discharge of seamen, f^s^**^'' Merchant marine investigating sections in major United States ports and merchant marine details in certain foreign ports continued to operate in the administration of discipline in the merchant marine,. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 153 as requhed by the act approved July 15, 1954 (46 U. S. C. 239 a and b). During the year a total of 14,762 investigations of cases involving negligence, incompetence, and misconduct were conducted. Charges were preferred and hearings held on 1,498 of these,cases by civilian examiners. Security checks were made of 21,723 persons deshing employment on merchant vessels and 18,268 original merchant mariners^ documents evidencing security clearance were issued. The Coast Guard was requested by the Customs Service to cooperate in publicizing the requirements of the Narcotic Control Act of 1956 (46 U. S. C. 1407), because of inability to prosecute persons who fail to register as narcotic offenders, pleading ignorance of the law. Steps were taken to comply with this request. Changes in the licensing regulations for merchant marine personnel made during the year included the following: Requirements were established for qualifications of radar observer, for license as master of small passenger-carrying vessels, and for license as operator of passenger-carrying vessels (Federal Register, October 5, 1957, Part I I (referred to as Subchapter T)). Requirements were revised for renewal of hcenses, for license as master of sail vessels to provide for sail vessels subject to the act of May 10, 1956, for license as motorboat operator, for licenses issued under the act of May 10, 1956, Subchapter T, and for members of the U. S. Merchant Marine Cadet Corps, Law enforcement The port security operations (conducted under authority of Executive Order 10173, as amended by Executive Orders 10277 and 10352, implementing provisions in the Espionage Act of June 15, 1917, as amended (50 U. S. C. 191)), continued to consist of: Control of entry of merchant vessels into United States ports; supervision of loading of Class A explosives and administration of the regulations relative to dangerous and hazardous cargoes; screening of merchant seamen employed on certain categories of United States vessels and waterfront workers for admittance to waterfront facilities under certain specffied conditions; and protection of selected vessels and waterfront facilities in designated port areas from the waterside, and, by spot checks, from the shoreside. After appropriate screening of warehousemen, pilots, and other waterfront workers, 13,392 port security cards were issued. Two hearings were granted upon appeal by individuals whp had been found to be poor security risks. The following statistics reflect the volume of enforcement work of the Coast Guard during the year. Vessels boarded Waterfront facilities inspected Violations of Motorboat Act reported Violations of port security regulations reported Violations of the Oil Pollution Act reported Violations of other laws reported Explosives loading permits issued Explosives loadings supervised Explosives covered by above permits (tons) Other hazardous cargoes inspected Anchorage violations 181, 383 13, 224 12, 514 1, 077 245 124 1, 009 2, 335 81, 310 14, 483 12 154 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY The Coast Guard also assisted the Federal agencies having primary responsibility for enforcing the Oil Pollution Act (33 U. S. C. 431-437), anchorage regulations, laws relating to internal revenue, customs, immigration, quarantine, and the conservation and protection of wildlife and the fisheries. Cooperation with other Federal agencies The Coast Guard performed services for other Federal agencies as follows: Alcohol and Tobacco Tax Division, Treasury (aircraft days) Coast and Geodetic Survey: (aerial surveys days) Fish and Wildlife (censuses taken) Weather Bureau: (a) Reports furnished (b) Warnings disseminated Aids to navigation 74 52 51 121, 219 18, 318 On June 30, 1958, there were 39,992 aids to navigation maintained in the navigable waters of the United States, its Territories and possessions, the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, and at overseas bases, consisting of loran stations, light stations, lightships, lighted and unlighted buoys, and minor lights and daybeacons. During the year 8,190 new aids to navigation were established, and 6,730 aids were discontinued. The increase of 1,460 was required to mark newly completed river and harbor improvements and areas having increased maritime commerce as well as to improve the existing system. The world-wide loran system now has three major components, Loran-A, Loran-B, and Loran-C. On June 30, 1958, the system consisted of 64 stations, of which 54 were operated by the Coast Guard. Sixty-one of the total are Loran-A stations while three are Loran-C stations. Two replacement Loran-A and three Loran-B stations being constructed will be completed in fiscal 1959. During 1958 three Loran-C stations and two Loran-A stations were completed. The Coast Guard, in cooperation with the St. Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation and the Corps of Engineers, U. S. Army, completed the plans and design for the system of aids to navigation to mark the main channel of the St. Lawrence Seaway between St. Regis, New York, and Lake Ontario, scheduled to be opened on July 5, 1958. This entire system includes 83 minor lights, 3 lighted ranges, 33 lighted buoys, and 33 unlighted buoys. In addition, ten lighted buoys and one minor light are being maintained temporarily until final dredging has been completed. 155 ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS A summary of aids to navigation maintained at the close of each of the last two fiscal years follows. Type Total number June 30 1957 Loran transmitters Radiobeacons Radarbeacons Fog signals (except sound buoys) Lights (including lightships) Daybeacons Buoys, lighted (including sound) Buoys, unlighted s:>und Buoys, unlighted metal Buoys, Mississippi River t y p e Buoys, spar -Total 1958 49 192 7 582 10, 360 5,604 3,286 373 13, 434 3,818 827 579^' 10, 344: 5, 641. 3,394 367 13, 353 4,937 1,130 38, 532 39, 992 154 19a- 1 Includes three experimental Loran-C stations. Northwest Passage Duiing the summer of 1957, the U. S. Coast Guard Cutters Storis, Spar, and Bramble were assigned to the Arctic area for surveys in the Canadian Archipelago. While on this assignment, the three ships were given the mission of surveying a practicable west to east deep water passage through the Archipelago. Successfully completing this mission, they were the first American ships to travel from th? Pacific Ocean to the Atlantic Ocean across the roof of the North American Continent. One of the ships, the Spar, set an additional record as it became the first American vessel to completely circumnavigate the North American Continent in one summer. The Spar departed Bristol, R. I., in May 1957, traveled through the Panama Canal and up the west coast, and returned to Bristol via the Arctic. Ocean stations Throughout fiscal 1958 the Coast Guard maintained four ocean stations in the North Atlantic Ocean and two in the North Pacific. Ocean station vessels located at strategic points provided meteorological services for air and marine commerce; communications for iransoceanic trafiic; air navigation facilities in the ocean areas regularly traversed by aircraft of the United States and other cooperating governments; and search and rescue facihties. During the year Coast Guard vessels transmitted 39,208 weather reports, rendered assistance in 73 cases, and cruised approximately 470,758 miles in this program. 156 19 58 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY International Ice Patrol The International Ice Observation and Ice Patrol Service in the North Atlantic Ocean completed its calendar 1957 season by conducting a postseason oceanographic cruise during August 1957 and by conducting aerial ice reconnaissance until September 1957. Aerial ice reconnaissance began during January 1958 for the 1958 ice season. Oceanographic work of the U. S. C. G. C. Evergreen commenced in April 1958. After a very light ice year the operations for the calendar 1958 ice season terminated on June 15. Bering Sea Patrol The Bering Sea Patrol was carried out by the U. S. C. G. C. Wachusett during July, August, and September 1957. This patrol performs certain law enforcement duties and assists other Federal agencies in law enforcement; renders aid to distressed persons, vessels, and aircraft; provides logistic services to outlying Coast Guard units; performs aids to navigation duties and marine inspection; and collects hydrographic, oceanographic, and meteorological data. During this patrol, the Wachusett cruised 12,569 miles, carried 39 passengers on missions in the public interest, and supplied medical treatment to 816 persons and dental treatment to 976 persons in remote areas contiguous to the Bering Sea and Arctic Ocean. Facilities, equipment, construction, and development Floating units.—Large ships in active commission at the end of the year consisted of 183 cutters and buoy tenders of various types, 80 patrol boats, 33 lightships, 39 harbor tugs, and 11 buoy boats. During the year they cruised 2,950,118 miles as compared with 2,795,729 miles the previous year. Included in the 183 cutters are two special units, the U. S. C. G. C. Courier and the U. S. C. G. C. Eagle. The Courier, a 339-foot vessel equipped with radio broadcasting facihties, is manned and operated by the Coast Guard for the United States Information Agency. The Eagle, a 295-foot bark, is used exclusively for training purposes. A new buo}^ tender, the Azalea, was completed as a modern replacement for the 40-year old Palmetto. A new class of 95-foot steel patrol boats is under construction to replace old wooden 83-foQt patrol boats. Shore establishments.—New base facilities are under construction in New York, N. Y. One lifeboat station was disestablished following the recommendation of a Board of Survey of Coast Guard Facilities in 1955-1956. A reduction of seven manned lights resulted from conversion of some to automatic, unattended, and the elimination of others. One radiobeacon station was discontinued where the service was no longer justified. Other changes were the addition of one marine inspection ofl&ce, five group offices, and one electronic repair shop, while one section ofl&ce was discontinued. (Construction of new loran stations is described in an earlier paragraph on aids to navigation.) Planning continues on problems of water safety. Fifteen mobile boarding teams, which were very effective and well received, were operated in the early part of fiscal 1958. Aviation and aircrajt.—On February 26, 1957, the Secretary of the Treasury and the Commandant of the Coast Guard transmitted to Congress their ^'Joint Report on the Requhements of Coast Guard ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS • 157; Aviation.'' This report, based on a study by a special board of senior Coast Guard ofl&cers, presents a plan for aircraft replacement and for meeting the. increasing demands upon Coast Guard aviation. On January 20, 1958, a revision of this report was transmitted to Congress.; The principal item of this revision is the development of a new financial plan. The end of fiscal year 1958 marks the conipletion of the first, year of the six-year program. . During 1958 the number of types of aircraft operated by the Coast/. Guard [was reduced from 14 to 10. The total number of ahcraft operated has, however, been maintained between 125 and 128. To replace overage aircraft, 9 new helicopters and 3 new seaplanes were acquired. Of 32 used aircraft acquired from the Air Force, 25 were placed iri operation as replacements for overage aircraft, and 7 are in storage. Of these 25 operational aircraft 9. are R5Ds and are being utilized to sustain operations of the long range landplai;ies pending procurement of SC-130B aircraft. To provide logistic support for the expanding Loran Program, the Coast Guard has requested 6, G-123 aircraft from the Department of Defense. The procurenient and disposal of aircraft during the past year have been in accordance with the basic plan established by the Aviation Board. \ i The primary mission of Coast Guard aircraft is the support of| search and rescue missions. In accomplishing this mission Coast; Guard ah-craft (both fixed wing and rotary) were deployed during the year at 9 air stations and 13 air detachments. In addition to these units, the temporary summer deployment of one helicopter at Los Angeles, Calif., and one at Rockland, Maine, is planned. A helicopter has also been temporarily assigned to the current Bering Sea Patrol Vessel,; the U. S. C. G. C. Northwind, for evaluation. ' The development, testing, and manufacture of towing equipment for larger helicopters was completed. Ten II04S helicopters have beeri; equipped for towing and those remaining will be equipped by January 1, 1959. An operational evaluation of the effectiveness of helicopters in providing logistic support for isolated Coast Guard units is being, conducted in the First Coast Guard District. Isles of Shoals and Boon Island Light Stations are, except for fuel and water, receiving their entire logistic support from heh cop ters operating from Coast Guard Air Station /Sa(em. Data are being kept to compare cost,/ timeliness, and convenience with other modes of support. Communications.—The Coast Guard is participating actively in the work of the Preparatory Committee for the International Radio Conference to be held in Geneva, Switzerland, in 1959. The chairman and vice chairman pf a major committee are Coast Guard officers. Engineering developments Technical advances, some of which are described below, have provided the Coast Guard with the facilities and equipment to improve operating efl&ciency and reduce costs. Tests were completed of equipment and methods that permit a helicopter to tow to safety small boats and ships as large as a few hundred tons. A program was begun to develop in-flight refuehng techniques for helicopters that should lead to increased search and rescue,capabilities. A new high visibility paint scheme, designed to 158 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY reduce the danger of midair collisions and to make the aircraft more visible to persons in distress, was adopted for trial. High intensity loudspeakers are being developed for installation on aircraft to permit the pilot to talk to ships and boats during rescue operations. Construction has been started on a 40-foot plastic utility boat which is expected to cost less to maintain than conventional steel boats. The cost of cleaning fuel tanks on large cutters should b e . reduced materially if tests of chemical cleaning methods are successful. AL commercial hydrofoil adapted to a Coast Guard boat has led to greatly improved speed in smooth and slightly rough water, thus increasing the usefulness of the boat for work in safety programs. An iriitial record of spectacular rescue work has proved the excellence of the design and construction of the new 52-foot motor lifeboat. Outstanding characteristics of foreign lifeboats are being studied for Coast Guard use. River buoys that are vulnerable to collision are being filled with a plastic foam to reduce losses. A device that will convert the energy of sunlight into electrical energy has been put on trial with the objective of providing a low cost power source for minor navigational lights. A 14 million candlepower light, the first of its kind, was placed in service at Oak Island, N . C., on top of a new lighthouse built to modern, low maintenance design criteria. Development was started on a low cost, high capacity, throwaway storage battery for service in lighted buoys. A modern buoy lantern, utilizing electronic circuits in the place of a mechanical flasher mechanism, is being tested. Lenses are being developed that will increase significantly the visible range of navigational lights. A major breakthrough in electronics aids to navigation has been accomplished in developments extending the loran system. The loran system can provide highly precise navigational service at short, medium, and long distances. The major portion of a program for the installation of modern electronics equipment to replace obsolete and overage equipment on ships, aircraft, and shore units was completed during the year. Three microwave radio links were installed to replace submarine telephone cables spanning busy harbor areas. Installation of F M communications equipment for port security operations was completed in two major harbor areas and started in six others. The Ship Structure Committee, a joint effort of Coast Guard, Navy, Maritime Administration, and American Bureau of Shipping to improve the hull structures of merchant ships, has published a number of research findings which will enable larger and faster merchant ships to be built with greater structural integrity. Coast Guard Reserve The purpose of the Coast Guard Reserve is to provide trained units and qualified persons available for active duty in time of war or national emergency and at such other times as the national security requhes. During the fiscal year, 9,174 applications for enlistment in the Reserve were considered. Of these applicants 4,151 were found qualified and enlisted. Procurement of persons between the ages of 17 and 26 for the six-year enlistment program was suspended in the ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 159 fall of 1957 for the remainder of fiscal year 1958. On December 18, 1957, the fiscal year 1958 quota of enlistments in the two-year active duty Reserve program was filled and the program was temporarily suspended until resumption in October 1.958. Procurement of Reservists for the six-months training program was intensified, however. During the first six months of the fiscal year recruiting in the under 18K year-age group failed to meet expectations, and an additional program was established for persons between the ages of 18K and 21. These two programs accounted for approximately 69 percent of enlisted procurement in fiscal 1958. On April 1, 1958, the minimum qualifying score required for enlistment in the Coast Guard Reserve was increased frorri 10 percentile to 31 percentile. This step was taken to provide the Reserve with enlistees of greater petty ofl&cer potential and to reduce the number of administrative discharges resulting from enlistment of personnel in lower mental groups. On June 30, 1958, the total Ready Reserve strength of the Coast Guard Reserve was 3,216 ofl&cers and 26,402 enlisted persons, which represents approximately 75 percent of the planned ultimate strength of 39,600. Of this number, 1,637 ofl&cers and 8,359 enlisted persons were assigned to training units. An extensive program of training was carried out for approximately 6,975 persons. The major portion of this number participated in training involving port security duties, and the remainder in shipboard and individual specialty training. The expansion of the Reserve program has required the establishment of additional training units to absorb the planned increase in Reservists. As of June 30, 1958, there were 147 organized Reserve training units, in commission, representing an increase of 18 percent for fiscal 1958. A program to establish additional types of specialized training units is under study. The first of these units, a rescue coordination center unit, was established in San Francisco, Calif., during March 1958 to train personnel for possible duty in the Western Area Rescue Center in the event of mobilization. If successful, additional units will be established in other Coast Guard districts during fiscal 1959. Several other types of units are being established, including one to provide training in marine inspection and another to provide training in electronics. In administration of the Reserve program, the Coast Guard conforms in general with policies outlined in Department of Defense directives implementing the various laws relative to Reserve components, thus carrying out the intent of Congress that the administration of all Reserve components be as uniform as practicable. Personnel On June 30, 1958, the military personnel strength of the regular Coast Guard on active duty was 30,128, consisting of 2,824 commissioned ofl&cers, 556 chief warrant officers, 419 warrant officers, 417 cadets, and 25,912 enlisted men. The civilian force consisted of 2,244 salaried persons, 2,379 wage board employees, and 347 lamplighters, exclusive of vacancies. The total strength of the Coast Guard Reserve as of June 30, 1958, was 3,216 officers and 26,402 enlisted persons. 479641--59 12 160. 1958 REPORT OF , THE , SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY On May 27, 1958, 79 members of the Class of 1958 were graduated from the Coast Guard Academy with Bachelor of Science degrees. A total of 417 cadets remained on board. The U. S. C. G. C. Eagle, U. S. C. G. C. Absecon, a;nd the U. S. C. G. C. Yakutat departed on May 29 on the long summer practice cruise for cadets. The cruise ships visited Amsterdam, Netherlands, Dublin, Ireland, Lisbon,' Portugal, and Hamilton, Bermuda, and returned to New London about August 14. During .fiscal 1958, losses of regular commissioned officers totaled 78 through retirements, resignations, revocations, and deaths. In addition, 169 Reserve oflicers were released from active duty following completion of their obligated service. These losses were replaced by the Academy graduates, 203 graduates of the Officer Candidate School, the recall of 21 Reserve officers to active duty, and the appointment of 20 former merchant marine officers. The net gain is just sufficient to meet the increased commitments at the beginning of the fiscal year 1959. Action taken under the provisions of the act of August 9, 1955 (14 U. S. C. 247 and 248), for the retireinent or retention of captains and flag officers, resulted in the rethement of five captains. One rear admiral was retired under other provisions. Throughout the year enlisted Reservists without previous active duty were called up for service under the provisions of Section 4 (c) (2) of the Universal Military Training and Service Act, as amended (50 App. U. S. C. 451-455, 470), and Section 261 of the Armed Forces Reserve Act of 1952, as amended (50 U. S. C. 1012). I t is estimated that on June 30, 1958, there were 2,350 Reservists on active duty. There were 240 voluntary retirements of enlisted men during the year, 123 of which were for statutory reasons. Expansion of the cadet procurement program continued during fiscal year 1958. The 2,616 applications received, for the cadet examination represented an increase of 16 percent over those received in fiscal 1957. From 2,137 qualified applicants authorized to take the examinations held in February, .an eligibility list of 419 was established. Approximately 210 selected from this list are expected to be sworn in as members of the Class of 1962. A new, limited program to procure aviators of the Navy and Marine Corps was the only additional officer procurement program undertaken during fiscal year 1958. The program was established to provide qualified junior officers needed for fiying billets in the Coast Guard. Only five lieutenants, junior grade, actually were commissioned and called to active duty. The program will be continued in fiscal 1959, however, and as many as 30 aviators may be procured. The program to procure licensed officers of the merchant marine, pursuant to the act of August 4, 1949 (14 U. S. C. 225a (5)), resulted in the appointment of 17 commissioned officers and three commissioned warrant, officers in the regular Coast Guard. The officer candidate school program, conducted at the Coast Guard Academy, was the largest officer procurement program conducted in fiscal 1958. Of the 211 who graduated during the year, 147 from civilian status were tendered commissions as ensign in the Coast Guard Reserve, and 64 from enlisted status were tendered temporary commissions in the regular Coast Guard. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 161 The direct commissioning program which provides Reserve officers for assignment to Reserve training units was accelerated during fiscal 1958. New requhements for authorized specialties were developed and appointment processes standardized. The improvements in the program resulted in the submission of 227 applications of basically quahfied individuals to permanent examining boards for evaluation. Of these, 172 were recommended for appointment, representing an increase of 85 percent over the previous fiscal year. Recruiting strength was maintained at substantially the same level throughout fiscal 1958. At the end of the year there were 52 recruiting stations, 13 substations, and five mobile recruiting units in operation, manned by 265 recruiters. The vehicle allowance for recruiting purposes was maintained at 79. Of the 1.4,683 persons applying for enlistment in the regular Coast Guard, 3,247 were accepted. On February 1, 1958, the mental standards for enlistments in the regular Coast Guard were raised, requiring that at least one-half of the regular enlistment quota be filled by applicants who attained a score of 50 percentile or above on the Armed Forces qualification test, and the remainder of the quota be met from applicants attaining a minimum of 40 percentile. Information relating to Reserve enlistments may be found in an earlier paragraph concerning the Coast Guard Reserve. Personnel enlisting in the regular Coast Guard are assigned to one •of the two recruit receiving centers, located at Cape May, N. J., and Alameda, Calif., for 12 weeks of recruit training. During fiscal 1958, 2,233 recruits were trained at Cape May and 885 at Alameda, representing a decrease of 971 recruits from the number trained in fiscal 1957. Under provisions of the Reserve Forces Act of 1955 (50 U. S. C. 928), 1,733 enlisted men completed six months reserve training. In this group were 381 and 405 who completed their entire training at Cape May and Alameda, respectively, 915 who completed basic training at Cape May and received advanced training at the Groton Training Station, and 17 ''critical" skilled persons who completed training at operational units. In addition, 1,174 persons from organized reserve training units were assigned to the receiving centers .and Groton Training Station for two weeks of summer training. During fiscal 1958, 42 officers were assigned to postgraduate training and 47 completed such study, which includes the training of naval architects, electronics engineers, nuclear research personnel, command communicators, financial administrators, and legal specialists. A total of 35 officers entered flight training and 22 completed their training. Twenty-seven aviators completed an eight-week course for qualification as helicopter pilots, and six were assigned to the eightweek Navy flight safety course given at the University of Southern California. A program was also initiated for the assignment of the district search and rescue officers to a short jet ahcraft familiarization course at Olathe, Kans. During fiscal 1958 a total of 2,281 enlisted men graduated from basic petty officer schools and 476 graduated from advanced schools. Of the total of 2,757, 1,568 petty officers were graduated from Coast Guard schools, and 1,189 from Navy and other schools. There were 16,551 new enrollments and 5,680 completions in the Coast Guard Institute courses and 2,650 new enrollments and 341 162 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY completions of courses offered by the United States Armed Forces Institute. Also reported were 364 completions of naval correspondence courses by enlisted men and 964 by officers. Approximately 75 visitors from foreign countries, under the sponsorship of other Government agencies, were extended the use of Coast. Guard facilities for training in aids to navigation, loran, search and rescue procedures, merchant marine safety, vessel inspection, port security, and law enforcement. Public Health Service support.—On June 30, 1958, the following U. S. Public Health Service officers were on duty with the Coast Guard: 46 dental officers, 31 medical officers, 11 nurses, 1 scientist officer, 1 sanitary engineer officer, and 1 pharmacist officer. During the fiscal year full-time professional Public Health Service complements were maintained on units authorized to have such services. Ocean weather station Victor in the Pacific Ocean had 100 percent coverage by the assignment of a medical officer to each vessel engaged in operations on that station. Full-time coverage by medical officers was provided during the year for ocean weather stations Bravo and Charlie in the Atlantic Ocean. Medical and dental officers were assigned full-time to the vessel engaged in the Bering Sea Patrol and the vessel utilized for the operation of Deep Freeze I I I . Full-time officers were assigned to other cruise vessels whose cruises requhed the services of , a medical officer. Military justice.—The United States Court of Military Appeals used a Coast Guard case to mark a fundamental change in military law when it announced on November 15, 1957, in United States v. Rinehart (8 U. S. C. M. A. 402, 24 C. M. R. 212), that thenceforth the manual for courts-martial was not to be used by members of courts during deliberations on the findings and sentence. In another Coast Guard case. United States v. Turner (9 U. S. C. M. A. 124, 25 C. M. R. 386), the Court further altered preexisting procedure when it held that the law officer of a general court-martial and the president of a special court-martial must instruct members in open court on the maximum permissible limits of punishment. The Court also wrote an opinionin a third Coast Guard case during the fiscal year, United States v,. Gray (9 U. S. C. M. A. 208, 25 C. M. R. 470). Petitions for leave to appeal were denied by the Court in two other cases. No Coast Guard cases were pending before the Court at the close of the fiscal year. There were 985 court-martial cases recorded during the year, an increase of 72 over the preceding year. Of these, 16 were general, courts-martial, 234 special courts-martial, and 735 summary courtsmartial. The cases of 39 accused were referred to the Board of Review pursuant to requirements of the Uniform Code of Military Justice. Opinions written in 14 Coast Guard cases were included in the official volumes of Courts-Martial Reports published during the year. The, General Counsel of the Treasury Department in his capacity as Judge,, Advocate General for the Coast Guard rendered the final action in^ four general courts-martial and 45 special courts-martial cases. Final review of 160 special and 698 summary courts-martial was made, in the field by action of district commanders. Board oj Review, Discharges and Dismissals.—The Board of Review,'. Discharges and Dismissals, in conformance with the provisions of 33 C. F. R. 51, reviewed 72 discharges and dismissals of former members. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 163 of the Coast Guard during the year. Of 26 discharges under honorable conditions reviewed, 10 were changed to honorable discharge. Of 32 undesirable discharges reviewed, six were changed to discharge under honorable conditions. Review of 13 bad conduct discharges resulted in the changing of two to discharge under honorable conditions, while one dishonorable discharge was changed to a bad conduct discharge. Personnel sajety program.—Duiing 1958, 1,104 accidents aboard ship and at shore stations were reported. The total exposure waslO,238,458 military man-days and 9,789,588 civilian man-hours. The accidents resulted in 1,075 disabling injuries and in 34 deaths. There was an appreciable decrease in disabling injuries to civilian personnel, but the frequency of disabling injuries to military personnel increased slightly. The highlight of the safety program was a reduction in the number of foot and head injuries due to the wider use of improved protective equipment. Fiscal and supply management A study of the Comptroller organization at the Coast Guard Academy during the year resulted in staffing improvements, development of accounting instructions peculiar to the Academy, and replacement of the manual pay record and payroll system with a complete mechanized system. This conversion, affecting 600 cadet accounts, made use of existing equipment and was effective July 1, 1958. The recommendations of the Hoover Commission and the General Accounting Office that the Coast Guard use Department of Defense sources of logistics support have been further implemented during the fiscal year. This resulted in direct Navy support of all Coast Guard units for general stores, ship's parts, and aviation materials. Negotiations are in progress to obtain direct supply support from the Navy for electronics and ordnance parts. Standing agreements for Navy support of common electronics, aviation, and ordnance •equipment have been revised and updated in line with Coast Guard and Navy policy. Overall agreement has been reached with the Air Force and negotiations are in progress with the Army to obtain logistics support for Coast Guard units within and outside the continental limits. Under authorit}^ of the act approved August 7, 1956 (14 U. S. C. 650), materials valued at $346,103 were transferred to the supply fund, increasing the capital authorization of the supply fund to $7,013,008. Coast Guard inventories were reduced by $1,963,261 and excess material amounting to $513,708 was disposed of during the fiscal year. Additional material with a book value of $1,349,131 awaits disposal. The enthe inventory management program of the Coast Guard is under exainination to insure that inventory controls are effective and economical. Coast Guard Auxiliary The primary purpose of this voluntary, nonmilitary organization is the promotion of safety in the maintenance, operation, and navigation of small boats. Functioning in over 500 communities the Auxiliary conducts public instruction courses in basic seamanship and safe boathandling. During the fiscal year these courses given gratuitously had an enrollment of 50,759. Another phase of the Auxiliary is the 164 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY courtesy motorboat examination wherein qualified Auxiliarists check the vessels of fellow boatmen. If the examined boat satisfies all requhements of the law and additional safety standards of the Coast Guard Auxiliary, a coveted ^'decaP' is awarded to the boat owner. Examinations of 68,006 motorboats were conducted during the fiscal year. The Auxiliary also patrolled 323 regattas and answered 2,227 calls for assistance. On June 30, 1958, the organization had 15,805 members and 9,507 facilities. A Presidential proclamation was issued for the annual observance of National Safe Boating Week, an event initially sponsored by the Auxiliary. Funds available, obligations, and balances The following table shows the amount of funds available for the Coast Guard during the fiscal year 1958, and the amounts of obligations and unobligated balances. Funds available i Net total obligations Appropriated funds: operating expenses, fiscal year 1958 appropriation $170,068,000 $170,044, 336 1, 111, 356 Advance procurements from fiscal year 1959 appropriation. 1, 111, 356 Reserve training--. _ 12,398, 500 12, 398, 500 Retired pay _ 26, 060,000 26, 045, 510 Acquisiti'^n, construction, and improvements: 21, 291, 021 Fiscalyear 1958 funds 2 _-. 22,291, 923 Advance procurements from fiscal year 1959 appro5, 968, 815 priation _. 5, 968, 815 Total appropriated funds. Reimbursements: Operating expenses.._ J Acquisition, construction, and improvements 2.. Total reimbursements Trust fund, United States Coast Guard gift fundGrand total Unobligated balances $23,664' 14,490 1,000,902 237, 898, 594 236, 859,538 1,039,056 25, 258, 528 12, 321, 376 26, 258, 528 8, 890,180 3,431,196 37, 579, 904 34,148, 708 3, 431,196 15,342 6,344 275, 493, 840 4,476,696 1 Funds available reflect transfers of unobligated balances authorized to cover military and civilian pay increases as foUows: From reserve training $2,601,500 From retired pay 340,000 To operating expenses. 1,068,000 To Internal Revenue Service 1,873,500 2 Funds available include unobligated balances brought forward from prior year appropriations as follows: Acquisition, construction, and improvements: Appropriated funds , $6,396,923 Reimbursements 6,821,376 • United States Coast Guard gift fund.... —... 10,550 Management improvement During fiscal 1958 the management improvement program of the Coast Guard led to more effective use of manpower and facilities in many areas, thus alleviating personnel shortages and offsetting increased operating costs. Major improvements, some of which have been described earlier in this report, were: Reorganization of shore units to permit reassignment of personnel td other stations where personnel shortages exist; conversion of light stations and radarbeacon stations to automatic, unattended; reorganization of group commands to improve effectiveness; use of the ' T o t o - L i s f process for preparation and revision of the light list; new procedures for certification of ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 165 inspected vessels; and implementation of a military incentive awards program to provide military members of the Coast Guard the opportunity of participating in management improvement. Incentive awards.—Civilian emplo3^ees submitted 355 improvement suggestions during the fiscal year, and 140 cash awards were paid for ideas adopted. Monetar}^ savings from applied suggestions were estimated at $120,829. Cash awards for superior performance were made to 87 employees and 15 others were recognized for special acts or services. Performance type awards brought tangible savings of $12,800, plus other nonmeasurable benefits stemming from high productivity and outstanding achievements. Reports management.—A continuing and intensive reports management program is being conducted to prevent duplication of reporting as well as to consolidate and simplify reporting requirements where practicable. A significant example of the benefits derived from rigid analysis and evaluation is the following case: The number of reporting units submitting a certain required quarterly report was reduced by 453 per quarter, or 1,812 annually. Also during the year, 23 recurring reports required from field units were discontinued, thus bringing about a considerable reduction in administrative costs. United States Savings Bonds Division The United States Savings Bonds Division serves as a Government nucleus to promote the sale and holding of United States savings bonds, and the sale of savings stamps. With the aid and direction of the Division's staff, thousands of public-spirited men and women act as a volunteer sales corps or as volunteer issuing agents. Without this volunteer support, the savings bonds sales program could not have achieved its present success. Throughout the 23 3^ears of their continuous sale, savings bonds have proved a vital instrument in promoting thrift and nationwide saving by the public. Milhons of Americans have accumulated their first savings through the payroll savings or bond-a-month plan. Regular saving has become a pattern for these people. They have found these ^^save-as-3''ou-earn" plans an ideal way of S3^stematically buildingup financial reserves. Their savings have been translated to mean more security, better education for children, home ownership, and the funds to meet countless other individual needs. Furthermore, the thrift habit acquired tlirough savings bonds purchases has been reflected in increased savings in many forms. Savings bonds promotion continues to be an important part of the Government's effort to encourage the additional savings in aU forms needed to finance our grooving economy soundly and to provide even greater future financial security for the American people and Nation. Investment in these bonds also contributes to economic stability and a healthy debt structure through keeping the public debt widely distributed among real savers. I t is estimated that 40 million persons, or almost one-fourth of the Nation's total population, own Series E and H savings bonds. 166 19 58 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Series E savings bonds, the most popular Government security investment, attained theh seventeenth anniversary of sales on May 1, 1958. On June 30, 1958, E bonds outstanding, together with their current-income companion H bonds (on sale since first issued on June 1, 1952), had a cash value of $42,142 million, an alltime record. I t represents 15.2 percent of the total public debt. Individuals own nearly $67 billion of the Government debt and over 72 percent of this total is held in savings bonds of all series. Since the savings bonds revision in the spring of 1957, the only series of savings bonds offered by the Government have been the E and H bonds. These are the bonds primarfly designed for the millions of average individual American savers, and it is to this group that the Division's promotional efforts are directed. However, effective January 1, 1958, aU investors, except commercial banks, became eligible buyers up to an annual amount of $10,000 (maturity value) of each series. This is the same annual purchase limit that applies to individuals. By broadening the list of eligible buyers, the Treasury responded to requests from many former buyers of J and K bonds. When these series were withdrawn from sale on Aprfl 30, 1957, small institutional investor groups such as labor unions, fraternal, civic, service, patriotic, and veterans organizations, eleemosynary institutions, etc., did not have available to them any Government security with guaranteed protection against market fluctuations. Total purchases.of Seiies E and H bonds combined amounted to $4.7 billion during fiscal year 1958 and were 1.2 percent more than the 1957 total. The sales volume increased substantially in the last six months of the year (January-June 1958), when purchases of the two series topped the corresponding months of the preceding year by 7.1 percent. On the other hand, sales in the flirst six months (July-December 1957) were 4.6 percent lower than in the corresponding months of the previous year. The redemption record also improved considerably in the second half of fiscal year 1958. Total cashings of matured and unmatured E and H bonds were 10.1 percent below the January-June 1957 :amount. In contrast, redemptions in the first half of fiscal year 1958 were 12.2 percent more than the corresponding period in the previous year. During the full fiscal year 1958, total redemptions of matured and unmatured E and H bonds amounted to $5.2 billion, of which $1.9 billion represented retirements of matured E bonds. Aggregate redemptions, and also those of E bonds after maturity, were approximately the same as in 1957. Throughout 1958, the retention rate on E bonds after their original maturity continued at approximately 60 percent of original maturity value. From May 1951, when the first E bonds started maturing, through June 1958, approximately $25.6 billion in E bonds came due. Less than $11 biUion of that amount was turned in for cash; the balance, nearly $15 billion, is being retained for a longer period under the automatic extension option, and has earned about $1.5 billion in additional interest. The cash value of matured E bonds outstanding at the close of fiscal year 1958 was $16.4 billion. During the extension period, up to ten additional years, E bonds issued from May 1942 through April 1957 earn, interest at the rate of approxi- ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 167 mately 3 percent per annum, compounded semiannually. E bonds issued in the year prior to May 1942 yield only slightly less. Experience has shown, that the payroll savings plan is the most effective method of channeling regular systematic savings into E bonds. In the last half of fiscal 1958 ^^Share in America" savings bonds campaigns were inaugurated in 233 large cities and metropolitan areas throughout the country to enlarge the number of payroU savings participants and to encourage more Americans, including the youth of the Nation, to save for specific purposes and to save regularly. More than 8 million persons employed in industry and Government were signed up on the pa3rroll savings plan at the close of fiscal 1958. Nearly 45,000 separate businesses operate and manage payroll savings plans for the benefit of their employees as a public service without charge. Promotional efforts to increase stamp sales also have been expanded, to bring new savers into the savings bonds program. Selling stamps is an important part of the overall sales program. Through stamp purchases, students at school and others can buy savings bonds on the installment plan. In the past three years, stamp purchases have exceeded $19 million annually, representing average annual sales of over 110 million individual pieces of stamps. Of importance equal to the savings bonds promotional efforts of the volunteer sales corps and the 17 years of public service by the voluntary issuing agents is the generous free advertising donated by the Nation's advertisers as well as all publicity and advertising media. Currently the value of the advertising contributed amounts to more than $50 million a year. As a result of all volunteer support, the promotional cost of the program to the Government is only slightly over $1 for every $1,000 of Series E and H bonds sold. The United States Savings Bonds Division is headed by a National Dhector and is organized into four principal branches: Sales, Planning,. Advertising and Promotion, and Administration. The heads of these branches, together with the National Dhector, comprise the Division's Management Committee, whose main objective is the improvement of services of the Division. Management improvements During the year decentralized regional organizations were further strengthened. Realignment of area responsibility boundaries within State organizations was continued. In some instances, the area manager's post of duty was relocated. More economical and effective work schedules resulted in better manpower utilization. Savings from these improvements are estimated at $145,980. Better controls have been effected through procedural guides developed for headquarters and field staffs. Further economies have resulted by consolidation of certain types of printed material and more selective distribution methods which have reduced the volume of promotional material and circular mailings. These economies were eft'ected without curtailing the meeting of requhements. Moreover, a great deal of progress was made in further standardizing methods, reports, and forms. These improvements will bring estimated savings of $35,000 on an annually recurring basis. 168 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Training courses for personnel throughout the year emphasized particularly methods that would result in economies and increased assistance to the volunteer corps as well as effective sales techniques. United States Secret Service The major functions of the United States Secret Service are protection of the person of the President of the United States and members of his immediate family, of the President-elect, and of the Vice President at his request; the detection and arrest of persons committing any offenses against the laws of the United States relating to obligations and securities of the United States and of foreign governments; and the detection and arrest of persons violating certain laws relating to the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, Federal land banks, joint-stock land banks, and national farm loan associations. These and other duties of the Secret Service are defined in Section 3056 of Title 18 of the United States Code. Management improvement . Improvements in administrative procedures during the year included adoption of a 'Svanted notice" card which facilitates the distribution of 'Svanted notices" to Secret Service field offices and police departments and their filing and cancellation; simplification of the daily reports made by special agents; and standardizing of procedure for reporting on investigative matters. A manual of procedure for the Purchase and Supply Section was completed and progress was made in developing manuals for other administrative activities. A unique program designed to train special agents in the techniques of handwriting examination to aid in the detection of multiple forgeries was begun this year. Initial results were so successful that it is planned to extend this training to other personnel. Protective and security activities During the year Secret Service agents rendered the usual protection to the President, members of his family, and the Vice President while in residence and during various trips made abroad. This included the trip of the President to Paris, France, in December 1957 to attend the NATO Conference. A protective operation which attracted great attention occurred during the trip of the Vice President to South America in April and May 1958. During this trip the safety of the Vice President and Mrs. Nixon was seriously threatened by uncontrolled, vicious, demonstrating mobs which hurled stones at the Vice President and his party and with clubs and iron bars attacked the car in which the Vice President was riding. The Secret Service men fought off the mob without resorting to weapons and received high praise from the Vice President and many others for their manner of dealing with an extremely dangerous and provocative situation. For their performance the twelve Secret Service agents who made up the detail were awarded the Exceptional Civilian Service Award by Secretar3^ of the Treasury Anderson. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS 169 Enforcement activities Investigations of all types showed an increase of 34.4 percent. The sharpest rise, 79.1 percent, was in counterfeiting cases. During the year Secret Service agents captured 21 plants for the manufacture of counterfeit paper money compared with 12 plants in the previous year. A total of $702,753 in counterfeit notes was seized. Of this amount $568,249 was captured before it could be placed in circulation and $134,503 was passed on merchants and cashiers. Representative value of counterfeit coins seized was $8,540.16, of which $8,118.81 was passed. There were 305 new issues of counterfeit notes, an increase of 202 percent, and 335 persons were arrested for violating the counterfeiting laws as compared with 319 persons in 1957. The following cases are summarized. Two men were arrested in Chicago for manufacturing counterfeit $1 silver certificates and $10 and $20 Federal Reserve notes. Both were employed in a printing shop and without the knowledge of the owner they worked after hours using company supplies and printing notes, six notes to a sheet. Altogether they printed $60,000 in notes and sold the entire output to a distributor in payment for narcotics. The distributor also was arrested along with seven others who purchased notes from him. One passer who had indicated that he would testify for the Government was later found d3dng in an alley, and died without recovering consciousness. Two men and a woman who operated a printing shop were arrested in Austin, Tex., for the manufacture and passing of counterfeit $20 Federal Reserve notes. The woman made the mistake of passing a note on the wife of a constable and this ultimately led to seizure of the plant. At the time of the seizure many counterfeit cashier's checks :and Texas driving licenses were captured and turned over to State authorities. Notes representing $4,500 were seized, and the group -admitted passing 50 of the notes. • In another case, after several weeks of negotiations, $77,000 in counterfeit $10 and $20 Federal Reserve notes were delivered to an undercover agent, and three men were arrested for their manufacture and sale. Agents raided a 15-room colonial house in. a western Massachusetts city and captured a complete counterfeiting plant, seizing $5,500 in additional counterfeit notes plus a large quantity of unfinished notes. This group had plans for the wholesale counterfeiting of United States and Canadian currency as well as American Telephone and Telegraph Company stock, plates for which were seized. Two men were arrested for making plates and printing counterfeit $5 and $10 notes. One of the defendants operated a letter service ^nd the other was a printer. They had made $136,000 in counterfeit notes. • In California and Illinois eight men were arrested for passing counterfeit $10 and $20 notes. The notes were printed in Los Angeles by three of the defendants who planned to establish a counterfeiting plant in Chicago after passing enough counterfeit notes to finance a second plant. Two men and a woman were arrested in Arkansas for passing counterfeit $20 Federal Reserve notes in fom-teen States. The maker, who operated a printing shop, was arrested in Tennessee after he had 170 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURT delivered $72,000 in counterfeit notes to an undercover agent. A fourth man was arrested when execution of a search warrant at his residence revealed all of the paraphernalia for counterfeiting together with additional notes. As a sequel to the publicity and arrests.in this case, a man and his wife were arrested after attempting to pass a counterfeit note. A large quantity of counterfeit $10 and $20 notes was seized in the glove compartment of their automobile and $120,000; in the notes were found in a valise in the trunk of the car. Later the manufacturer of the notes was arrested in California and counterfeiting equipment was seized in his home. In Nice, France, a group of counterfeiters was arrested by French authorities while in the act of manufacturing counterfeit $100 Federal Reserve notes. A piinting press, numerous plates, ink, and paper were seized together with partly completed notes representing $320,000. The arrests were the culmination of plans made by the: Secret Service and the Treasury Representative in Charge at Paris who conducted negotiations with an informant. The following table summarizes seizures of counterfeit moneys during the fiscal years 1957 and 1958. Counterfeit money seized, fiscal years 1.957 and 1958 1957 Counterfeit and altered notes: After circulation Before circulation . Total Counterfeit coins seized: After circulation _. Before circulation _. Percentage mcrease, or . decrease (—) $134, 503. 45 $32, 738. 46 668,249.25 -878,152. 75 32.2: -60.7- 1, 548,167.00 702, 752. 70 -845, 414. 30 —54 6 8,118. 81 421.35 2, 588. 60 119.31 46.839.6- 8, 640.16 2, 707. 91 46.4 711, 292. 86 -842, 706.39 -54.2- 5, 832.26 . Increase, or decrease ( - ) $101, 765.00 1,446, 402.00 6, 530. 21 302.04 Total Grand total _ _ 1958 1, 653,999.25 Forgery and fraudulent negotiation of Government checks continues to be a major criminal enforcement problem. During the fiscal year 1958 the Secret Service received 33,648 such cases for investigation, an increase of 35.4 percent over the previous year. Agents completed investigation of 27,505 check forgery cases representing $2,577,593.30. There had been 10,034 forged check cases on hand at the beginning of the year and at the close of the year there was a backlog of 16,177 awaiting investigation. There were 2,763< arrests for forgery of Government checks. Two Air Force noncommissioned officers at Parks Air Force Base,. Calif., conspired to forge and negotiate checks obtained through fraudulent payroll vouchers. The two men were arrested and later ADMINISTRATIVE 171 REPORTS three others were arrested for complicity in the offense which involved several hundred checks representing approximately $100,000. Three men were arrested in Baltimore for forging and negotiating a number of United States Treasury checks which were part of 225 blank checks stolen in a burglary of a Mar3dand post office. The cihecks were drawn in varying amounts in the names of fictitious payees. A fourth member of the group, arrested in Seattle, Washington, committed suicide in a jail cell and a fifth member was arrested in St. Louis. Analysis of burglary tools seized in the apartment of one of the defendants demonstrated conclusively that they had been used in the burglar3^ of the post office. Two long sought fugitives, inveterate forgers, were arrested. One admitted stealing, forging, and cashing $100,000 in forged checks, including Government checks, and the other has admitted to the theft and forger3^ of more than 50 checks. During the year the Secret Service received 4,043 investigative cases concerning the forgery of United States savings bonds, an increase of 19.5 percent over those in 1957. Agents closed 4,205 cases having a representative value of $650,872.28 and 72 persons were :arrested for bond forgeries. There had been 2,189 cases pending from the previous year and at the close of the 3^ear 2,027 were pending. The following table shows the number of criminal and noncriminal -cases completed during the fiscal'years 1957 and 1958. .Number of criminal and noncriminal investigations coinpleted, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 1957 Cases closed ' C r i m i n a l cases: Counterfeiting. Forged G o v e r n m e n t checks Stolen or forged b o n d s . . . P r o t e c t i v e research Miscellaneous (crimiaal) Total ^"Noncriminal Grand t o t a l . . . _ _ 1958 Increase Percentage increase 1,739 26, 531 3,594 896 296 2,978 27, 505 4,205 1,092 436 1,239 974 611 196 140 71.2 3 7 17 0 21.9 47 3 33,056 1,540 36,216 1,818 3,160 278 9.6 18.1 34, 696 38,034 3,438 9.9 Secret Service agents arrested 173 persons for crimes other than counterfeiting or forgery, making a total of 3,343 offenders arrested. There were 3,047 convictions representing 98.9 percent in all cases prosecuted, some of which were pending from the previous year. Cases of all types received for investigation, including counterfeiting and forgery cases, aggregated 44,102 and 12,992 had been pending at the beginning of the year. Although 38,034 were closed •during the year as of June 30, 1958, there were 19,060 cases pending .and 1,049 defendants awaiting prosecution. 172 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY The following table is a statistical summary of Secret Service arrests and dispositions for the fiscal years 1957 and 1958. Number of arrests and cases disposed of, fiscal years 1957 and 1958 1957 1958 Increase, Percentage or deincrease, or crease (—) decrease (-) Arrests for: Counterfeiting Forged Government checks Violation of Gold Reserve Act Stolen or forged bonds Protective research Miscellaneous 1 Total.Cases disposed of: Convictions in connection witb: Counterfeiting Forged Government checks Violation of Gold Reserve Act Stolen or forged bonds Protective research Miscellaneous ^ Total convictions.. Acquittals Dismissed, not indicted or died before trial. Total cases disposed of •Less than 0.06%. 319 2,762 4 68 66 53 335 2,763 4 72 78 91 3,272 3, 343 251 2,473 11 65 65 60 259 2, 659 9 69 72 79 2,916 46 217 3,047 33 217 3,178 (*) 5.0 6.9 18.2 71.7 2.2 -2 4 7 132 -13 3.2 3.5 -18.2 6.2 10.8 68.0 4.5 m3 3.7 EXHIBITS Public Debt Operations and Calls of Guaranteed Obligations Treasury Certificates of Indebtedness, Treasury Notes, and Treasury Bonds OjBferedand Allotted, and Treasury Bonds Called for Redemption ExmBiT 1.—Treasury certificates of indebtedness Two Treasury circulars containing representative certificate offerings during the fiscal year 1958 are reproduced in this exhibit. The first circular is a cash offering of an additional issue and the second is an exchange offering of the regular series of certificates. Circulars pertaining to the other offerings are similar in form and therefore are not reproduced in this report. However, the essential details for each issue are summarized in the first table following the circulars and the final allotments of new certificates issued for cash or in exchange for maturing securities are shown in the second table. DEPARTMENT CIRCULAR NO. 994. PUBLIC DEBT TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, September 16, 1957» I. OFFERING OF CERTIFICATES I. The Secretary of the Treasury, pursuant to the authority of the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, invites subscriptions, at par and accrued interest, from the people of the United States for certificates of indebtedness of the United States, designated 4 percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series C1958. The amount of the offering under this circular is $750,000,000, or thereabouts. In addition to the amount offered for public subscription, the Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right to allot up to $100,000,000 of these certificates to Government investment accounts. The books will be open only on September 16, 1957, for the receipt of subscriptions for this issue. II. DESCRIPTION OF CERTIFICATES 1. The certificates now offered will be an addition to and will form a part of the 4 percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series C-1958 issued pursuant to Department Circular No. 991, dated July 22, 1957, will be freely interchangeable therewith, are identical in all respects therewith, and are described in the following quotation from Department Circular No. 991: " 1 . The certificates will be dated August 1, 1957, and will bear interest from that date at the rate of 4 percent per annum, payable semiannually on February I and August 1, 1958. They will mature August 1, 1958. They will not be subject to call for redemption prior to maturity. ''2. The income derived from the certificates is subject to all taxes imposed under the Internal Revenue Code of 1954. The certificates are subject to estate, inheritance, gift, or other excise taxes, whether Federal or State, but are exempt from all taxation now or hereafter imposed on the principal or interest thereof by any State, or any of the possessions of the United States, or by any local taxing authority. "3. The certificates will be acceptable to secure deposits of public moneys. They will not be acceptable in payment of taxes. "4. Bearer certificates with interest coupons attached will be issued in denominations of $1,000, $5,000, $10,000, $100,000, $1,000,000, $100,000,000, and $500,000,000. The certificates will not be issued in registered form. "5. The certificates will be subject to the general regulations of the Treasury Department, now or hereafter prescribed, governing United States certificates.'.' 4.79641—50—13 175 176 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY III. SUBSCRIPTION AND ALLOTMENT 1. Subscriptions will be received at the Federal Reserve Banks and branches and at the Oflfice of the Treasurer of the United States, Washington. Commercial banks, which for this purpose are defined as banks accepting demand deposits, may submit subscriptions for account of customers, but only the Federal Reserve Banks and the Treasury Department are authorized to act as official agencies. Others than commercial banks will not be permitted to enter subscriptions except for their own account. Subscriptions from commercial banks for their own account will be received without deposit, but will be restricted in each case to an amount not exceeding 50 percent of the combined capital, surplus, and undivided profits, of the subscribing bank. Subscriptions from all others must be accompanied by payment of 2 percent of the amount of certificates applied for, not subject to withdrawal until after allotment. Following allotment, any portion of the 2 percent payment in excess of 2 percent of the amount of certificates allotted may be released upon the request of the' subscribers. .2. Commercial banks in submitting subscriptions will be required to certify that they have no beneficial interest in any of the subscriptions they enter for the account of their customers, and that their customers have no beneficial interest in the banks' subscriptions for their own account. 3. The Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right to reject or reduce any subscription, and to allot less than the amount of certificates applied for; and any action he may take in these respects shall be final. Allotment notices will be sent out promptly upon allotment. IV. PAYMENT 1. Payment at par and accrued interest from August 1, 1957, to September 26 1957 ($6.08696 per $1,000), for certificates allotted hereunder must be made orcompleted on or before September 26, 1957, or on later allotment. In every case' where payment is not so completed, the payment with application up to 2 percent of the amount of certificates allotted shall, upon declaration made by the Secretary of the Treasury in his discretion, be forfeited to the United States. Any qualified depositary will be permitted to make payment by credit for certificates allotted to it for itself and its customers up to any amount for which it shall be qualified in excess of existing deposits when so notified by the Federal Reserve Bank of its district. v . GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. As fiscal agents of the United States, Federal Reserve Banks are authorized and requested to receive subscriptions, to make allotments on the basis and up to the amounts indicated by the Secretary of the Treasury to the Federal Reserve Banks of the respective districts, to issue allotment notices, to receive payment for certificates allotted, to make delivery of certificates on full-paid subscriptions allotted, and they may issue interim receipts pending delivery of the definitive certificates. 2. The Secretary of the Treasury may at any time, or from time to time, prescribe supplemental or amendatory rules and regulations governing the offering,, which will be communicated promptly to the Federal Reserve Banks. ROBERT B . ANDERSON, Secretary of the Treasury, DEPARTMENT CIRCULAR NO. 1003. PUBLIC DEBT TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, February 3, 1958. 1. OFFERING OF CERTIFICATES 1. The Secretary of the Treasury, pursuant to the authority of the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, invites subscriptions from the people of the United States for certificates of indebtedness of the United States, designated 2H percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series A-1959, in exchange for which any EXHIBITS 177 of.the following listed securities, singly or in combinations aggregating $1,000 or multiples thereof, may be tendered: 3^^ percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series A-1958, maturing February 14, 1958 2y2 percent Treasury bonds of 1956-58, maturing March 15, 1958 VA percent Treasury notes of Series EA-1958, maturing April 1, 1958 Treasury bills (special issue) maturing April 15, 1958 3>^ percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series B-1958, maturing April 15, 1958. Exchanges will be made at par with an adjustment of interest as set forth in see" tion IV hereof. The amount of the offering under this circular will be limited to the amount of the eligible securities of the five issues enumerated above tendered in exchange and accepted. The books will be open only on February 3 through February 5 for the receipt of subscriptions for this issue. 2. In addition to the offering under this circular, holders of the eligible securities are also offered the privilege of exchanging all or any part of such securities for 3 percent Treasury bonds of 1964 or 3 ^ percent Treasury bonds of 1990, which offerings are set forth in Department Circulars Nos. 1004 and 1005, issued simul-^ taneously with this circular. II. DESCRIPTION O F CERTIFICATES 1. The certificates will be dated February 14, 1958, and will bear interest from that date at the rate of 2}i percent per annum, payable semiannually on August 14, 1958, and February 14, 1959. They will mature February 14, 1959. They will not be subject to call for redemption prior to maturity. 2. The income derived from the certificates is subject to all taxes imposed under the Internal Revenue Code of 1954. The certificates are subject to estate^ inheritance, gift, or other excise taxes, whether Federal or State, but are exempt from all taxation now or hereafter imposed on the principal or interest thereof by any State or any of the possessions of the United States, or by any local taxing authority. :?i:c 3. The certificates will be acceptable to secure deposits of public''moneys. They will not be acceptable in payment of taxes. 4. Bearer certificates with two interest coupons attached will be issued in denominations of $1,000, $5,000, $10,000, $100,000, $1,000,000, $100,000,000, and $500,000,000. The certificates will not be issued in registered form. 5. The certificates will be subject to the general regulations of the Treasury Department, now or hereafter prescribed, governing United States certificates. in. SUBSCRIPTION AND ALLOTMENT 1. Subscriptions will be received at the Federal Reserve Banks and branches and at the Office of the Treasurer of the United States, Washington. Banking institutions generally may submit subscriptions for account of customers, but only the Federal Reserve Banks and the Treasury Department are authorized to act as official agencies. 2. The Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right to reject or reduce any subscription, and to allot less than the amount of certificates applied for; and any action he may take in these respects shall be final. Subject to these reservations, all subscriptions will be allotted in full. Allotment notices will be sent out promptly upon allotment. IV. PAYMENT 1. Payment at par for certificates before February 14, 1958, or on later securities of the five issues enumerated at par, and should accompany the allotted hereunder must be made on or allotment, and may be made only in thein Section I hereof, which will be accepted subscription. Interest adjustments per 178 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY $1,000 will be paid to or collected from subscribers in accordance with the folio wing^table: Securities surrendered SH% certificates, Series A-1958 2]^% bonds of 1956-58 lV^%notesof Series EA-1958 Treasury bills 3 ^ % certificates, Series B-1968 Interest Net amount Net amount Interest credited to charged to to be paid to be colsubscriber subscriber subscriber lected from subscriber . . • $16.78 10.49724 7.50 17.60 $3.17680 4.14365 4.14365 1 $16.78 10.49724 4.32320 13.35636 $4.14365 > Feb. 14, 1958, coupon to be detached by subscriber and cashed when due. V, A S S I G N M E N T O F REGISTERED BONDS 1. Treasury bonds of 1956-58 in.registered form tendered in payment for certificates offered hereunder should be assigned by the registered payees or assignees'ther'eof to ''The Secretary of the Treasury for exchange for 2^ percent certificates of indebtedness of Series A-1959 to be delivered to ", in accordance with the general regulations of the Treasury Department governing assignments for transfer or exchange, and thereafter should be presented and surrendered with the subscription to a Federal Reserve Bank or branch or to the Office of the Treasurer of the United States, Washington. The bonds must be delivered at the expense and risk of the holders. VI. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. As fiscal agents of the United States, Federal Reserve Banks are authorized and requested to receive subscriptions, to make allotments on the basis and up to the amounts indicated by the Secretary of the Treasury to the Federal Reserve Banks of the respective districts, to issue allotment notices, to receive payment for certificates aliotted, to make delivery of certificates on full-paid subscriptions allotted, and they may issue interim receipts pending delivery of the definitive^ certificates. . , ,. 2. The Secretary of the Treasury may at any time, or from time to time, prescribe supplemental or amendatory rules and regulations governing the offering, which will be communicated promptly to the Federal Reserve Banks. JULIAN B . BAIRD, Acting Secretary of the Treasury. Summary of information pertaining' to Treasury certificates of iiidebtedness issued during the fiscal year 1958 Department circular Date of preliminary announceNumber ment Date Concurrent offermg, circular number Oertificates of indebtedness issued for cash or in exchange for maturing or called securities 1957 July 18 990 1957 July 22 991,992 3% percent Series E-1957 issued in exchange for— 2 percent Series C-1957 Treasury notes maturing Aug. 15, 1957. 2% percent Series D-1967 Treasury notes maturing Aug. 1, 1967. July 18 991 July 22 990,992 Sept. 12 Nov. 18 994 998 Sept. 16 Nov. 20 1958 Jan. 29 1003 1958 Feb. 3 1004,1005 4 percent Series C-1958 issued in exchange for— 2 percent Series C-1957 Treasury notes maturing Aug. 15, 1967. 2H percent Serie.s D-1967 Treasury notes maturing Aug. 1, 1957. 3H percent Series D-1967 certificates inaturing Oct. 1, 1957. IH percent Series E0-1957 Treasury notes maturing Oct. 1, 1967. 4 percent Series C-1968 (additional issue) issued for cash 3% percent Series D-1958 issued in exchange for— 3 ^ percent Series E-1957 certificates maturing Dec. 1,1957. May 29 1010 June 4 1011 2H percent Series A-1959 issued in exchange for— _ 3H percent Series A-1958 certificates inaturing Feb. 14,1958. 2H percent Treasury bonds of 1956-68 maturing Mar. 15, 1958. IH percent Series EA-1958 Treasury notes maturing Apr. 1, 1958. Treasury bills (special issue) maturing Apr. 15, 1968. 3H percent Series B-1968 certificates maturing Apr. 15,1958. IH percent Series B-1959 issued in exchange for— 2% percent Series A-1958 Treasury notes maturing June 16, 1958. 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1968-63 called for redemption June 15, 1968. - 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1958 maturing June 15, 1958. 1 Following acceptance of surrendered notes of Series C-1957 with final coupons attached, accrued interest from Feb. 15 to Aug. 1, 1957 ($9.22652 per $1,000) was paid to subscribers. 2 Followmg acceptance of surrendered notes and certificates with final coupons attached, accrued interest was paid to subscribers as follows: From Feb. 15 to.Aug. 1, 1967 ($9.22652 per $1,000) on Series C-1957 notes; from Apr. 1 to Aug. 1, 1967 ($10.83333 per $1,000) on Series D-1957 certificates; from Apr. I t o Oct. 1, 1957 ($7.50 per $1,000) was credited, accrued interest from Aug. 1 to Oct. 1,1957 ($6.63043 per $1,000) on the new certificates was charged, and the difference ($0.86957 per $1,000) was paid on Series E 0-1957 notes. Date of issue Allotment Date sub- payment Date of scription date on books or before maturity closed (or on later allotment) 1957 Aug. 1 1957 Dec. 1 1967 July 24 1967 I Aug. 1 Aug, 1 1958 Aug. 1 July 24 2 Aug. 1 Aug. 1 Dec. 1 Aug. 1 Dec. 1 Sept. 16 1 Sept. 26 Nov. 22 Dec. 2 g 1958 Feb. 14 1959 Feb. 14 1958 1958 Feb. 5 4 Feb. 14 ^ CO June 15 May 15 June 6 «June 16 H 3 See Department Circular No. 994, sees. I l l and IV, in this exhibit, for provisions for subscription and payment of interest. 4 See Department (Circular No. 1003, sec. IV, in this exhibit, for provisions for payment of uiterest. «All coupons subsequent to June 15,1968, were required to be attached to 2^4 percent Treasury bonds of 1958-63 when surrendered. Final interest due June 15, 1958, oil registered bonds was paid by check drawn tu accordance with assignments on bonds surrendered or by credit in any account maintained by a banking institution with the Federal Reserve Bank of its district. ^ ^ 00 O Allotments of Treasury certificates of indebtedness issued during the fiscal year 1958, by Federal Reserve districts Ol 00 [In t h o u s a n d s of dollars] 3^i p e r c e n t Series E-1957 certificates issued i n exchange for— F e d e r a l Reserve district Boston New York Philadelphia Cleveland Cincinnati Pittsburgh Richmond Baltimore Charlotte Atlanta Birmingham... Jacksonville Nashville New Orleans... Chicago -. Detroit St. L o u i s Little Rock Louisville Memphis Minneapolis Kansas City Denver Oklahoma City Omaha... Dallas ElPaso Houston FRASER San Antonio Digitized for 2 percent 254 p e r c e n t Series C-1957 Series D-1957 Treasury Treasury notes m a notes maturing Aug. turing Aug. 1, 1957 1 15, 1957 1 7,205 606,565 14,630 14, 670 13,015 29, 612 6,396 2,024 1,424 5,905 813 1,277 1,078 7,313 87, 483 25,914 17, 957 2,073 4,260 573 19, 821 12, 683 1,468 5,770 4,041 3.500 100 524 3,141 46,057 8,479, 457 25,406 25,104 2,560 12, 603 3,626 2,800 538 5,467 399 4,609 852 4,397 101,957 8,125 25,786 674 4,645 874 12, 593 10,131 5,244 9,598 1,689 9,087 1,560 395 Total issued 53,262 9,086, 022 40,036 39,774 15, 575 42,215 10,022 4,824 1,962 11,372 1,212 6,886 1,930 11, 710 189, 440 34,039 43, 743 2,-747 8,805 1,447 32,414 22, 814 6,712 15, 368 5,730 12, 587 100 2,084 3,636 4 p e r c e n t Series C-1958 certificates issued i n exchange for— 3K percent I H percent 2 percent 2% percent Series C-1957 Series D-1967 Series D-1957 Series E O Treasury certificates 1967 T r e a s u r y Treasury notes m a t u r notes m a maturing notes m a ing Oct. 1, t u r i n g A u g . Oct. 1,1957 3 turing Aug. 1957 3 1, 1957 2 16, 1957 2 36,296 697, 496 54,089 17,867 21,007 13,316 16, 410 8,772 3,610 21, 771 14, 488 7,034 6,912 11, 696 179,333 22, 991 31, 664 5,877 22,480 4,064 34,419 35,645 24, 387 13, 848 13, 009 11, 489 1,717 15, 549 4,254 68,792 847, 527 40, 222 94, 227 10, 892 12, 816 6,664 24, 483 2,177 28, 314 8,686 11, 518 3,529 33, 925 219, 560 14, 998 43. 549 5,103 25, 393 6,605 58, 424 25, 210 12, 869 11,170 8,801 14, 093 1,478 19, 731 5,748 26, 6,202, 12, 19, 7, 9, 11, 9, 2, 14, 4, 7, 2, 11, 104, 10, 19, 4, 26, 1, 23, • 9, 6, 5, 5, 440 724,752 3,593 314 2,050 312 21 432 200 5,070 3,870 725 649 25 39 225 250 Total issued 131,774 8,372,183 110, 749 131, 734 41,182 36,180 34,112 43, 228 8,032 64, 957 27, 929 26, 700 12, 993 56, 841 508, 876 51, 896 95, 382 16, 856 74, 319 12, 517 116, 390 70,984 43, 520 30. 835 27,497 33.907 4; 160 45,772 12,042 3% percent Series D-1958 certificates 4 percent Series C-1968 issued i n exchange for certificates (additional 3 H percent issue) issued Series E-1957 for cash * certificates maturing D e c . 1,1957 32, 696 245, 529 44,790 30, 619 11, 666 9,886 25,743 9,838 4,267 12, 536 7,911 10,714 7,836 12,799 117, 274 21, 919 17, 630 2,099 6,982 9,307 34, 711 18,174 7,870 11, 069 10, 803 41. 607 1,719 3,268 3,657 27,322 , 154,010 33,879 42,550 5,512 4,647 3.147 6,721 3,038 12,864 2,676 6,182 2,757 7,002 228,141 16, 369 39,335 2,702 9,855 1,332 48, 062 20, 857 5,702 8,502 3,465 12,767 2,804 4.908 O ?d o ZP o O ft) > Ul d San Francisco Los Angeles Portland.. Salt Lake City Seattle Treasury Government mvestment accounts 53,700 2,473 2,384 6,983 4,278 7 321 Total certificate allotments. Maturmg securities: Exchanged in concurrent offerings.. 978, 374 73,490 24, 914 . 6, 543 1,558 6,346 3, 314 26,073 11, 295 3,013 386 4,537 6,693 129 103 126,148 73,202 14, 484 3,873 15, 629 10, 630 100, 000 743, 203 10, 586, 512 16, 316 6,886 8,681 4, 202 22, 636 125 100, 000 5i,72& 15,481 14,635 6,754 2,934 25, 308 69, 069 37, 412 2,979 7,081 7,342 9,935 100, 000 26,456 36, 890 4,928 1,929 4,746 623 8, 892, 812 9. 971,186 1,327, 050 2, 821, 557 5, 266, 436 2, 096, 203 9, 931, 800 319, 468 32, 243 12. 379, 714 3, 423, 253 11, 714, 369 6, 963,158 775, 446 22, 866, 226 341, 722 317, 784 48, 750 1, 077, 031 138, 467 12, 056, 091 7, 270. 942 824,196 23, 943, 267 9, 971,186 45, 369 34,939 595 98 3,064 2,614 1 2 444 879 Total exchanged . Redeemed for cash or carried to matured debt.. 3, 423, 253 Total maturing securities... 3 792 028 368, 775 11, 714, 369 . 15,137, 622 341, 722 710,497 12, 056, 091 16, 848,119 368,775 3,792, 028 1, 782, 569 6, 633, 690 932, 565 9, 832, 719 9, 832, 719 Footnotes at end of table. H n H3 U2 00 Allotments of Treasury certificates of indebtedness issued during the fiscal year 1958, by Federal Reserve districts—Gontinued 00 [In thousands of doUars] IH percent Series B-1959 certificates issued in exchange for— 2H percent Series A-1959 certificates issued in exchange for— 2H percent IH percent 3^/i percent Treasury 3H percent Treasury Series EASeries A-1958 bonds of 1958 Treasury bUls (special Series B-1958 certificates certificates 1956-68 manotes maissue) mamaturing maturing turing Mar. turing Apr. turing Apr. 1, 1958 5 Feb. 14, 1958 51 16,1958 6 15, 1958 8 Apr. 15, 1958 «| Federal Reserve district Total issued 2% percent 2% percent 2H percent Treasury Series A-1958 Treasury bonds of bonds of Treasury notes ma1958-63 called] 1958 maturturing June for redemp- ing June 15, 1958 9 tion June 15,1958 8 15,1968 6 Total issued o o Boston New York Philadelphia Cleveland Richmond Atlanta Chicago St. Louis Minneapolis Kansas City Dallas San Francisco Treasury .-. . Total certificate.aUotments. Maturing securities: Exchanged in concurrent offerings Total exchanged Redeemed for cash or carried to matured debt Total maturing securities.-. 2,040 35 4,852 1 13, 292 384, 822 8,252 43, 604 22, 315 13, 289 122, 010 10, 610 21, 623 23, 406 18, 015 29, 614 140 42, 669 1, 020,121 31,785 79, 767 34, 311 44, 262 266, 978 40, 462 37,035 95, 334 44,445 87,702 2,661 1. 014, 463 91, 067 710, 992 1, 816, 522 6, 581,197 3,195, 927 799, 868 3, 391, 739 7, 387, 534' 1,994, 528 15, 351, 088 9, 204, 066 67,053 6, 609,176 62, 986 99,171 20, 391 100, 368 197, 917 94, 310 70, 323 73. 756 47, 976 152, 904 6,694 10, 594 210,129 5,144 13, 013 7,147 13,195 39,100 7,675 3,458 5,711 5,207 21, 207 1,051 1,632 145, 961 6,803 7,451 679 359 17, 708 1,254 95 3,313 2,005 7,620 30 27, 752 411, 015 7,120 17,182 3,837 28, 908 116, 040 8,926 22,165 8,664 8,612 14, 996 2,410 20,191 685, 485 10, 880 46, 404 12, 248 38, 078 101, 641 28, 836 12, 867 29, 517 21,169 55, 433 1,160 127, 222 7, 961, 766 81, 933 183, 221 44,302 180, 908 471, 306 14L 001 108, 908 120, 961 84, 968 262,160 11, 246 26. 910 596, 428 15, 211 35, 654 11, 045 29, 965 103, 927 28, 971 15, 313 69, 888 26, 395 63, 236 2,620 2,467 39, 871 8,322 499 951 1,008 30, 041 7, 492,924 342, 631 193, 900 676, 627 1, 063, 809 9, 769, 891 930, 719 140,130 3,100, 646 334, 030 1,144, 440 4, 210, 390 890, 935 4,102, 731 267, Oil 164, 225 48, 765 606, 653 356, 634 1, 433, 288 181, 401 27, 846 142, 080 10, 850, 581 1, 448, 745 382,795 1, 761,093 2, 351,162 16,784, 376 4, 391, 791 918,781 4, 244, 811 10, 693, 670 1, 284, 620 o fe! o fej 361, 327 9, 555, 383 fej > 1 Series C-1958 Treasury 4 percent certificates and Series A-1961 Treasury 4 percent notes also offered in exchange for this maturity; see exhibit 2. 2 Series A-1961 Treasury 4 percent notes and Series E-1957 Treasury 3H percent certificates also offered in exchange for this maturity; see exhibit 2. 3 Series A-1961 Treasury 4 percent notes also offered in exchange for this maturity; see exhibit 2. * Subscriptions for $100,000 or less were allotted in full and subscriptions in excess of $100,000 were allotted 22 percent but not less than $100,000. 8 3 percent Treasury bonds of 1964 and 3H percent Treasury bonds of 1990 also offered in exchange for this maturity; see exhibit 3. 8 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1965 also offered in exchange for this security; seeexhibit 3. d w K| EXHIBITS 183 EXHIBIT 2.—Treasury notes Two Treasury circulars, one containing a cash and the other an exchange note offering during the fiscal year 1958, are reproduced in this exhibit. Circulars pertaining to the other note offerings during 1958 are similar in form and therefore are. not reproduced in this report. However, the essential details for each issue are summarized in the first table following the circulars and the final allotments of the new notes issued for cash or in exchange for maturing securities are shown in the second table. DEPARTMENT CIRCULAR NO. 992. PUBLIC DEBT TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, July 22, 1957, I. OFFERING OF NOTES 1. The Secretary of the Treasury, pursuant to the authority of the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, invites subscriptions from the people of the United States for notes of the United States, designated 4 percent Treasury notes of Series A-1961, in exchange for 2 percent Treasury notes of Series C-1957, maturing August 15, 1957; 2% percent Treasury notes of Series D-1957, maturing August I, 1957; 3J4 percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series D-1957, maturing October I, 1957, or IM percent Treasury notes of Series EO-1957, maturing October 1, 1957. Exchanges will be made par for par in the case of the Series D-1957 notes; at par with an adjustment of interest as of August 1, 1957, in the case of the Series C-1957 notes and the Series D-1957 certificates, and at par with an adjustment of interest as of October 1 in the case of the Series EO-1957 notes. In addition to the amount offered for exchange, the Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right to allot up to $100,000,000 of these notes at par to Government investment accounts. The books will be open only on July 22 through July 24 for the receipt of subscriptions for this issue. 2. In addition to the offering under this circular, holders of the maturing securities are offered the privilege of exchanging all or any part of such securities for 4 percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series C-1958, which offering is set forth in Department Circular No. 991, issued simultaneously with this circular, and holders of the two August maturities are also offered the privilege of exchanging all or any part of such securities for 3^^ percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series E-1957, which offering is set forth in Department Circular No. 990, issued simultaneously with this circular. I I . DESCRIPTION OF NOTES 1. The notes will be dated August 1, 1957, and will bear interest from that date at the rate of 4 percent per annum, payable semiannually on February 1 and August 1 in each year until the principal amount becomes payable. They will mature August 1, 1961, and will not be subject to call for redemption prior to maturity. However, they will be redeemable at the option of the holders on August 1, 1959, at par and accrued interest, if notice in writing of intention to redeem on that date is given to the Office of the Treasurer of the United States or to any Federal Reserve Bank or branch on or before May 1, 1959, and the notes are temporarily surrendered to the office to which notice is given for the purpose of having an appropriate stamp placed on them to indicate that they will be redeemed on August 1, 1959, and for detaching coupons dated subsequent to that date. 2. The income derived from the notes is subject to all taxes imposed under the Internal Revenue Code of 1954. The notes are subject to estate, inheritance, gift, or other excise taxes, whether Federal or State, but are exempt from all taxation now or hereafter imposed on the principal or interest thereof by any State, or any of the possessions of the United -States, or by any local taxing authority. ^ 3. The notes will be acceptable to secure deposits of public moneys. They will not be acceptable in payment of taxes. 4. Bearer notes with interest coupons attached will be issued in denominations of $1,000, $5,000, $10,000, $100,000, $1,000,000, $100,000,000, and $500,000,000. The notes will not be issued in registered form.' 184 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY 5. The notes will be subject to the general regulations of the Treasury Department, now or hereafter prescribed, governing United States notes. III. SUBSCRIPTION AND ALLOTMENT 1. Subscriptions will be received at the Federal Reserve Banks and branches and at the Office of the Treasurer of the United States, Washington. Banking institutions generally may submit subscriptions for account of customers, but only the Federal Reserve Banks and the Treasury Department are authorized to act as official agencies. 2. The Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right to reject or reduce any subscription, and to allot less than the amount of notes applied for; and any action he may take in these respects shall be final. Subject to these reservations, all subscriptions will be allotted in full. Allotment notices will be sent out promptly upon allotment. IV. PAYMENT 1. Payment at par for notes allotted hereunder must be made on or before August 1, 1957, or on later allotment, and may be made only in Treasury notes of Series C-1957, maturing August 15, 1957, Treasury notes of Series D-1957, maturing August 1, 1957, Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series D-1957, maturing October 1, 1957, or Treasury notes of Series EO-1957, maturing October 1, 1957, which will be accepted at par, and should accompany the subscription. Coupons dated August 15, 1957, niust be attached to the notes of Series C-1957 when surrendered, and accrued interest from February 15, 1957, to August 1, 1957 ($9.22652 per $1,000) will be paid to subscribers following acceptance of the notes. Coupons dated October 1, 1957, must be attached to the certificates of Series D-1957 when surrendered, and accrued interest from April 1, 1957, to August 1, 1957 ($10.83333 per $1,000) will be paid to subscribers following acceptance of the certificates. Coupons dated October 1, 1957, must be attached to the notes of Series EO-1957 when surrendered, and accrued interest from April 1, 1957, to October 1, 1957 ($7.50 per $1,000) will be credited, accrued interest from August 1, 1957, to October!, 1957 ($6.63043 per $1,000) on the notes to be issued will be charged, and the difference ($0.86957 per $1,000) will be paid to subscribers following acceptance of the notes. In the case of the notes of Series D-1957, coupons dated August 1, 1957, should be detached by holders and cashed when due. V. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. As fiscal agents of the United States, Federal Reserve Banks are authorized and requested to receive subscriptions, to make allotments on the basis and up to the amounts indicated by the Secretary of the Treasury to the Federal Reserve Banks of the respective districts, to issue allotment notices, to receive payment for notes allotted, to make delivery of notes on full-paid subscriptions allotted, and they may issue interim receipts pending delivery of the definitive notes. 2. The Secretary of the Treasury may at any time, or from time to time, prescribe supplemental or amendatory rules and regulations governing the offering, which will be communicated promptly to the Federal Reserve Banks. G. M. HUMPHREY, Secretary of the Treasury. DEPARTMENT CIRCULAR NO. 995. PUBLIC DEBT TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, September 16, 1957. I. OFFERING OF NOTES 1. The Secretary of the Treasury, pursuant to the authority of the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, invites subscriptions, at par and accrued interest, from the people of the United States for notes of the United States, designated 4 percent Treasury notes of Series B-1962. The amount of the offering under this circular is $1,750,000,000, or thereabouts. In addition to the amount offered EXHIBITS 185 for public subscription, the Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right to allot up to $100,000,000 of these notes to Government investment accounts. The books will be open only on September 16 for the receipt of subscriptions for this issue. n . DESCRIPTION OF NOTES 1. The notes will be dated September 26, 1957, and will bear interest from that date at the rate of 4 percent per annum, payable on a semiannual basis on February 15 and August 15, 1958, and thereafter on February 15 and August 15 in each year until the principal amount becomes payable. They will mature August 15, 1962, and will not be subject to call for redemption prior to maturity. However, they will be redeemable at the option of the holders on February 15,, 1960, at par and accrued interest, if notice in writing of intention to redeem on that date is given to the Oflfice of the Treasurer of the United States or to any Federal Reserve Bank or branch on or before November 16, 1959, and the notes are temporarily surrendered to the office to which notice is given for the purpose of having an appropriate stamp placed on them to indicate that they will be redeemed on February 15, 1960, and for detaching coupons dated subsequent to that date. 2. The income derived from the notes is subject to all taxes imposed under the Internal Revenue Code of 1954. The notes are subject to estate, inheritance, gift, or other excise taxes, whether Federal or State, but are exempt from all taxation now or hereafter imposed on the principal or interest thereof by any State, or any of the possessions of the United States, or by any local taxing authority. 3. The notes will be acceptable to secure deposits of public moneys. They will not be acceptable in payment of taxes. 4. Bearer notes with interest coupons attached will be issued in denominations of $1,000, $5,000, $10,000, $100,000, $1,000,000, $100,000,000, and $500,000,000. The notes will not be issued in registered form. 5. The notes will be subject to the general regulations of the Treasury Department, now or hereafter prescribed, governing United States notes. III. SUBSCRIPTION AND ALLOTMENT 1. Subscriptions will be received at the Federal Reserve Banks and branches and at the Office of the Treasurer of the United States, Washington. Commercial banks, which for this purpose are defined as banks accepting demand deposits, • may submit subscriptions for account of customers, but only the Federal Reserve Banks and the Treasury Department are authorized to act as official agencies. Others than commercial banks will not be permitted to enter subscriptions except for their own account. Subscriptions from commercial banks for their own account will be received without deposit, but will be restricted in each case to an amount not exceeding 50 percent of the combined capital, surplus, and undivided profits, of the subscribing bank. Subscriptions from all others must be accompanied by payment of 2 percent of the amount of notes applied for, not subject to withdrawal until after allotment. Following allotment, any portion of the 2 percent pabyment in excess of 2 percent of the amount of notes allotted may be released upon the request of the subscribers. 2. Commercial banks in submitting subscriptions will be required to certify that they have no beneficial interest in any of the subscriptions they enter for the account of their customers, and that their customers have no beneficial interest in the banks' subscriptions for their own account. 3. The Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right to reject or reduce any subscription, and to allot less than the amount of notes applied for; and any action he may take in these respects shall be final. Allotment notices will be sent out promptly upon allotment. IV. PAYMENT 1. Payment at par and accrued interest, if any, for notes allotted hereunder must be made or completed on or before September 26, 1957, or on later allotment. In every case where payment is not so completed, the payment with application up to 2 percent of the amount of notes allotted shall, upon declaration made by the Secretary of the Treasury in his discretion, be forfeited to the United States. 186 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Any qualified depositary will be permitted to make payment by credit for notes allotted to it for itself and its customers up to any amount for which it shall be qualified in excess of existing deposits when so notified by the Federal Reserve Bank of its district. v . GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. As fiscal agents of the United States, Federal Reserve Banks are authorized and requested to receive subscriptions, to make allotments on the basis and up to the amounts indicated by the Secretary of the Treasury to the Federal Reserve Banks of the respective districts, to issue allotment notices, to receive payment for notes allotted, to make delivery of notes on full-paid subscriptions allotted, and they may issue interim receipts pending delivery of the definitive notes. 2. The Secretary of the Treasury may at any time, or from time to time, prescribe supplemental or amendatory rules and regulations governing the offering, which will be communicated promptly to the Federal Reserve Banks. ROBERT B . ANDERSON, Secretary of the Treasury, Summary of information pertaining to Treasury notes issued during the fiscal year 1958 Date of issue AUotment Date sub- payment Date of scription date on books or before maturity closed (or on later aUotment) 1967 Aug. 1 1961 Aug. 1 Department circular Date of preliminary announce- Number ment 1967 July 18 Sept. 12 Nov. 18 1958 Apr. 2 992 995 999 1007 Date 1957 July 22 Sept. 16 Nov. 20 1958 Apr. 7 Concurrent offering circular number 990,991 Treasury notes issued for cash and in exchange for maturing securities 4 percent Series A-1961 issued in exchange for— 2 percent Series C-1967 Treasury notes maturing Aug. 16,1967. 2% percent Series D-1967 Treasury notes maturing Aug. 1,1957. 3H percent Series D-1957 certificates maturing Oct. 1,1957. I H percent Series EO-1957 Treasury notes maturing Oct. 1,1957. 4 percent Series B-1962 issued for cash 3M percent Series C-1962 issued for cash...: 2 ^ percent Series A-1963 issued for cash 1 See Department Circular No. 992, sec. IV, in this exhibit, for provisions for payment of interest. 2 See Department Circular No. 995, sees. I l l and IV, in this exhibit, for provisions for subscription and payment of interest. 3 Commercial banks were permitted to subscribe, without deposit, for their own account for an amount not exceeding 60 percent of the combined capital, surplus, and undivided profits of the subscribing bank as of Juue 30, 1957. Qualified depositaries 1967 1957 July 24 lAug. 1 W »—I Sept. 26 Nov. 29 1958 Apr. 15 1962 Aug. 15 Nov. 15 1963 Feb. 15 CO Sept. 16 2 Sept. 26 Nov. 20 "Nov. 29 1958 1958 Apr. 7 *Apr. 15 were permitted to make payment for notes allotted to them and their customers by credit in Treasury tax and loan accounts. 4 Commercial banks were permitted to subscribe, without deposit, for their own account for an amount not exceeding 75 percent of the combined capital, surplus, and undivided profits of the subscribing bank. Qualified depositaries were permitted to make payment for note^ allotted to them and their customers by credit in Treasury tax and loan accounts. 00 00 00 Allotments of Treasury notes issued during the fiscal year 1958, by Federal Reserve districts [In thousands of doUars] Ox 00 4 percent Series A-1961 Treasury notes issued in exchange for— Federal Reservo district Boston New York PhUadelphia Cleveland. Cincinnati Pittsburgh Richmond Baltimore _. Charlotte Atlanta Birmingham JacksonviUe NashviUe New Orleans.-.. Chicago Detroit St. Louis Little Rock . Louisville Memphis Minneapolis Kansas City Denver Oklahoma City. Omaha D'aUas El Paso. Houston San Antonio San Francisco Los Angeles Portland Salt Lake City. Seattle. 4 percent Series 3H percent Series 2% percent Series B-1962 Treasury C-1962 Treas iry A-1963 Treasury notes isssued for nctes issued for notes issued for 2 percent Series 2M percent Series l3K..percent Series 114 percent Series cash 3 cash * C-1957 Treasury D-1967 Treasury D-1957 certificates] E 0-1967 Treasury! Total issued cash 5 notes maturing notes maturing maturing Oct. 1 notes maturing 1957 2 Oct. 1,1957 2 Aug. 1, 1957 1 Aug. 15, 1957 I 35, 568 421, 587 21, 259 44, 445 17,101 5,445 13, 957 10,740 1,105 14, 477 2,907 4,170 5,712 11, 859 176, 547 11, 595 29, 4873,055 23, 486 3,328 47, 065 35,162 6,792 12. 587 9,898 18, 934 1. 464 13,193 7,816 44, 779 51, 867 2.372 2, 219 3.293 32, 432 484, 021 37, 015 66,879 10. 552 4,941 5,817 7,084 391 15, 099 2,231 8,023 2,168 8,038 113,025 7,207 22, 492 2,826 11, 439 • 1,602 30, 568 25, 563 5,428 10, 648 6.417 15,860 1,475 6,676 14, 653 50, 620 24, 872 L035 4,813 8,163 17,434 119, 693 5,217 10, 623 2,293 3,398 1,316 1,248 592 5,473 1,366 4,763 2,430 3,042 56,628 1,226 7,168 462 5,933 788 14,837 7,393 1,937 1,964 1,069 5,545 1,101 4,190 1,203 20,009 5,729 55 1,475 1,503 1,252 13,783 692 481 1,042 130 127 185 3 20 3 100 1,253 120 100 820 1,430 235 376 500 4,500 20 'i,'ooo' 1,039, 084 64.183 111,428 30, 988 13, 914 21,217 19, 072 2,088 36,234 6,507 16, 976 10,313 23.039 350,269 20,028 60,390 6,343 40,977 5,818 93,290 69, 538 14, 392 26, 474 16,384 40, 339 4,040 24,069 24,072 119, 908 82, 468 3,482 8,507 13,959 98.584 666,954 17, 979 55. 621 44,115 25, 835 12, 714 14, 870 4,554 14,089 13. 441 13,223 218,018 47,220 ^ 41,003 2,861 9,985 7,777 61, 689 36,035 8.199 16,766 12,869 66, 940 4,530 22, 716 5,127 111,448 58,678 12,488 8.384 24,468 53,699 466, 258 35 240 36,548 8,735 25, 637 18, 307 17, 052 7,249 10,110 3,008 8.969 8,654 6,641 98,097 26,123 16, 233 1,397 4,644 4,688 17, 679 9,610 3,560 5,611 4,868 26, 885 1,766 9,476 2,599 53,095 24,425 9,264 4,338 12,663 199,136 1, 565. 641 137, 924 109,224 39, 511 89, 570 76,832 45,171 30, 562 46, 519 15, 319 46,542 27,091 32,873 381,211 120,342 72, 764 6,075 20, 580 21,433 78,709 59,949 17,924 30, 669 26,456 116, 533 6,903 37,927 11, 739 202, 270 105, 484 31, 670 22,149 47,97S O o O Kl O > zn Treasm'y ^.=. Government investment accounts 2.559 Total note aUotments Maturing securities: Exchanged in concmrent offerings 1,117,829 1.038, 988 319,468 1,125 376 a 32, 243 4,062 118 138 120 100,000 100,000 100,000 «100,000 2, 608, 528 2, 000,387 1,142,956 3,970,698 2,305,424 10, 675, 381 6, 633,690 743, 203 20,357, 698 Total exchanged Redeemed .for cash or carried to matured d e b t - 3,423, 253 11, 714,369 6, 963,158 776. 446 22, 866 226 368, 775 341, 722 317, 784 48, 750 1,077.031 Total maturing securities 3,792. 028 12, 056,091 7, 270, 942 824,196 23, 943, 257 1 Series E-1957 Treasury 3^i percent and Series C-1958 Treasury 4 percent certificates also offered in exchange for this maturity; see exhibit 1. 2 Series C-1958 Treasury 4 percent certificates also offered in exchange for this maturity; see .exhibit 1. 3 Subscriptions for $100,000 or less were allotted in full and subscriptions in excess of $100,000 were aUotted 28 percent but not less than $100,000. * Subscriptions for $10,000 or less were allotted in fuU and subscriptions in excess of $10,000 were aUotted 25 percent to savings-type investors and 12 percent to all other subscribers but not less than $10,000. «Subscriptions for $25,000 or less were allotted in full and subscriptions in excess of $26j000 were aUotted 24 percent but not less than $25,000. fl Includes $10,000,000 aUotted through New York Federal Reserve Bank. H CQ 00' CD 190 1058 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY E X H I B I T 3.—Treasury bonds Two Treasury circulars, one containing a cash a n d t h e other an exchange bond offering during t h e fiscal year 1958, are reproduced in this exhibit. Circulars pertaining to t h e other bond offerings during 1958 are similar in form a n d therefore are not reproduced in this report. However, t h e essential details for each issue are summarized in t h e first table following t h e circulars and t h e final allotments of new bonds issued for cash or in exchange for maturing securities are shown in t h e second table, D E P A R T M E N T C I R C U L A R N O . 1004. PUBLIC DEBT TREASURY DEPARTMENT, • Washington, February 3, 1958. I. O F F E R I N G OF BONDS 1. T h e Secretary of t h e Treasury, p u r s u a n t to. t h e a u t h o r i t y of t h e Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, invites subscriptions from t h e people of t h e United States for bonds of t h e United States, designated 3 percent Treasury bonds of 1964, in exchange for which any of t h e following listed securities, singly or in combinations aggregating $500 or multiples thereof, m a y be tendered: 3% percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series A-1958, maturing. F e b r u a r y 14, 1958 2)4 percent Treasury bonds of 1956-58, maturing March 15, 1958 l}i percent T r e a s u r y notes of Series E A - 1 9 5 8 , m a t u r i n g April 1, 1958 Treasury bills (special issue) maturing April 15, 1958 3 ^ percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series B^1958, m a t u r i n g April 15, 1958. Exchanges will be m a d e a t p a r with an adjustment of interest as set forth in section IV hereof. T h e a m o u n t of t h e offering under this circular will be limited tot h e a m o u n t of t h e eligible securities of t h e five issues e n u m e r a t e d above tendered in exchange and accepted. T h e books will be open only on F e b r u a r y 3 t h r o u g h F e b r u a r y 5 for t h e receipt of subscriptions for this issue. 2. I n addition to t h e offering under this circular, holders of t h e eligible securities are also offered t h e privilege of exchanging all or any p a r t of such securities for 2M percent Treasury certificates of indebtedness of Series A-1959 or 3J^ percent Treasury bonds of 1990, which offerings are set forth in D e p a r t m e n t Circulars Nos. 1003 and 1005, issued simultaneously with this circular. n. DESCRIPTION OF BONDS 1. T h e bonds will be dated F e b r u a r y 14, 1958, and will bear interest from t h a t d a t e a t t h e r a t e of 3 percent per annum, payable on a semiannual basis on August15, 1958, and thereafter on F e b r u a r y 15 and August 15 in each year until t h e principal a m o u n t becomes payable. T h e y will m a t u r e February 15, 1964, and will not be subject to call for redemption prior to m a t u r i t y . 2. T h e income derivied from t h e bonds is subject to all taxes imposed under t h e Internal Revenue Code of 1954. T h e bonds are subject to estate, inheritance,, gift, or other excise taxes, whether Federal or State, b u t are exempt from all t a x a tion now or hereafter imposed on t h e principal or interest thereof by any State, or any of t h e possessions of t h e United States, or by any local taxing authority. 3. T h e bonds will be acceptable to secure deposits of public moneys. 4. Bearer bonds with interest coupons attached, and bonds registered as to principal and interest, will be issued in denominations of $500, $1,000, $5,000, $10,000, $100,000, and $1,000,000. Provision will be made for t h e interchange of b o n d s of different denominations and of coupon and registered bonds, and for t h e transfer of registered bonds, under rules and regulations prescribed by t h e Secretary of t h e Treasury. 5. T h e bonds will be subject to t h e general regulations of t h e Treasury D e p a r t ment, now or hereafter prescribed, governing United States bonds. in. SUBSCRIPTION AND ALLOTMENT I. Subscriptions will be received a t t h e Federal Reserve Banks and branches a n d at t h e Office of t h e Treasurer of t h e United States, Washington. Banking institutions generally m a y submit subscriptions for account of customers, b u t only 191 EXHIBITS the Federal Reserve Banks and the Treasury Department are authorized to act as official agencies. 2. The Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right to reject or reduce any subscription, and to allot less than the amount of bonds applied for; and any action he may take in these respects shall be final. Subject to these reservations, all subscriptions will be allotted in full. Allotment notices will be sent out promptly upon allotment. IV. PAYMENT 1. Payment at par for bonds allotted hereunder must be made on or before February 14, 1958, or on later allotment, and may be made only in the securities of the five issues enumerated in section I hereof, which will be accepted at par, and should accompany the subscription. Interest adjustments per $1,000 will be paid to or collected from subscribers in accordance with the following table: Interest credited to subscriber Securities surrendered 3%% certificates. Series A-1968 21^% bonds of 1956-58 1H% notes of Series EA-1958 Treasury bills 3H% certificates, Series B-1958 Interest charged'to subscriber $16.78 10.49724 7.50 . 17.50 $3.81080 4.97102 4. 97102 Net amount to be paid subscriber Net amount to be collected from subscriber I $16. 78 10.49724 3.68920 12. 52898 $4 97102 1 Feb. 14, 1968, coupon to be detached by subscriber and cashed when due. V. ASSIGNMENT OF REGISTERED BONDS 1. Treasury bonds of 1956-58 in registered form tendered in payment for bonds offered hereunder should be assigned by the registered payees or assignees thereof, in accordance with the general regulations of the Treasury Department governing assignments for transfer or exchange, in one of the forms hereafter set forth, and thereafter should be presented and surrendered with the subscription to a Federal Reserve Bank or branch or to the Office of the Treasurer of the United States, Washington. The bonds must be delivered at the expense and risk of the holder. If the new bonds are desired registered in the same name as the bonds surrendered, the assignment should be to "The Secretary of the Treasury for exchange for 3 percent Treasury bonds of 1964"; if the new bonds are desired registered in another name, the assignment should be to "The Secretary of the* Treasury for exchange for 3 percent Treasury bonds of 1964 in the name of "; if new bonds in coupon form are desired, the assignment should be to "The Secretary of the Treasury for exchange for 3 percent Treasury bonds of 1964 in coupon form to be delivered to ". VI. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. As fiscal agents of the United States, Federal Reserve Banks are authorized and requested to receive subscriptions, to make allotments on the basis and up to the amounts indicated by the Secretary of the Treasury to the Federal Reserve Banks of the respective districts, to issue allotment notices, to receive payment for bonds allotted, to make delivery of bonds on full-paid subscriptions allotted, and they may issue interim receipts pending delivery of the definitive bonds. 2. The Secretary of the Treasury may at any time, or from time to time, prescribe supplemental or amendatory rules and regulations governing the offering which will be communicated promptly to the Federal Reserve Banks. JULIAN B . BAIRD, Acting Secretary of the Treasury. 479641—59' 14 192 1 9 5 8 REPORT OF T H E SECRETARY OF T H E TREASURY D E P A R T M E N T C I R C U L A R N O . 1006. P U B L I C D E B T TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, February 28, 1958. I. OFFERING OF BONDS I. T h e Secretary of the Treasury, p u r s u a n t t o t h e a u t h o r i t y of t h e Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, invites subscriptions, a t p a r and accrued interest, from t h e people of t h e United States for bonds of t h e United States, designated 3 percent Treasury bonds of 1966. T h e a m o u n t of t h e offering under this circular is $1,250,000,000, or thereabouts. I n addition to t h e a m o u n t offered for public subscription, t h e Secretary of t h e Treasury reserves t h e right t o allot u p t o $100,000,000 of these bonds t o Government investment accounts. T h e books will be open only on F e b r u a r y 28 for t h e receipt of subscriptions for this issue. II. DESCRIPTION O F BONDS 1. T h e bonds will be d a t e d F e b r u a r y 28, 1958, a n d will bear interest from t h a t d a t e a t t h e rate of 3 percent per annum, payable on a semiannual basis on August 15, 1958, a n d thereafter on F e b r u a r y 15 a n d August 15 in each year until t h e principal a m o u n t becomes payable. T h e y will m a t u r e August 15, 1966, a n d will n o t be subject t o call for redemption prior t o m a t u r i t y . 2. T h e income derived from t h e bonds is subject to all taxes imposed under t h e I n t e r n a l Revenue Code of 1954. T h e bonds are subject to estate, inheritance, gift, or other excise taxes, whether Federal or State, b u t are exempt from all taxation now or hereafter imposed on t h e principal or interest thereof b y a n y State, or a n y of t h e possessions of t h e United States, or b y a n y local taxing authority. 3. T h e bonds will be acceptable t o secure deposits of public moneys. 4. Bearer bonds with interest coupons attached, a n d bonds registered as t o principal a n d interest, will be issued in denominations of S500, $1,000, $5,000, $10,000, $100,000, a n d $1,000,000. Provision will be made for t h e interchange of bonds of different denominations a n d of coupon a n d registered bonds, a n d for t h e transfer of registered bonds, under rules a n d regulations prescribed b y t h e Secretary of t h e Treasury. 5. T h e bonds will be subject to t h e general regulations of t h e Treasury D e p a r t ment, now or hereafter prescribed, governing United States bonds. III. SUBSCRIPTION AND ALLOTMENT 1. Subscriptions will be received a t t h e Federal Reserve Banks a n d branches and a t t h e Office of t h e Treasurer of t h e United States, Washington. Commercial banks, which for this purpose are defined as banks accepting d e m a n d deposits, m a y submit subscriptions for account of customers, b u t only t h e Federal Reserve Banks a n d t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t are authorized t o act as official agencies. Others t h a n commercial banks will not be permitted to enter subscriptions except for their own account. Subscriptions from commercial banks for their own account will be received without deposit, b u t will be restricted in each case to an a m o u n t not exceeding 25 percent of t h e combined capital, surplus, a n d undivided profits of t h e subscribing b a n k . Subscriptions from all others m u s t be accompanied b y p a y m e n t of 15 percent of t h e a m o u n t of bonds applied for, which paym e n t m u s t be m a d e with t h e subscription, t o t h e Federal Reserve Bank or branch, or t o t h e Treasurer of t h e United States, in immediately available funds or by credit in a Treasury t a x a n d loan account of t h e bank through which t h e subscription is entered. Following allotment, a n y portion of t h e 15 percent p a y m e n t in excess of t h e a m o u n t of bonds allotted will be returned t o t h e subscribers. 2. Commercial banks in submitting subscriptions will be required t o certify t h a t they have no beneficial interest in a n y of t h e subscriptions they enter for t h e account of their customers, a n d t h a t their customers have no beneficial interest in t h e b a n k s ' subscriptions for their own account. EXHIBITS 193 3. The Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right to reject or reduce any :subscription, and to allot less than the amount of bonds applied for, and to make different percentage allotments to various classes of subscribers; and any action he may take in these respects shall be final. The basis of the allotment will be publicly announced and allotment notices will be sent out promptly upon allotment. IV. PAYMENT 1, Payment at par and accrued interest for bonds allotted hereunder in excess of payments accompanying subscriptions must be made or completed on or before March 10, 1958, or on later allotment. In every case where payment is not so •completed, the payment with application up to 15 percent of the amount of bonds allotted shall, upon declaration made by the Secretary of the Treasury in his discretion, be forfeited to the United States. Any qualified depositary will be permitted to make payment by credit for bonds allotted to it for itself and its customers up to any amount for which it shall be qualified in excess of existing deposits, -when so notified by the Federal Reserve Bank of its district. V. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.. As fiscal agents of the United States, Federal Reserve Banks are authorized and requested to receive subscriptions, to make allotments on the basis and up to the amounts indicated by the Secretary of the Treasury to the Federal Reserve > Banks of the respective districts, to issue allotment notices, to receive payment for bonds allotted, to make deliver}^ of bonds on full-paid subsciriptions allotted, and they may issue interim receipts pending delivery of the definitive bonds. 2. The Secretary of the Treasury may at any time, or from time to time, prescribe supplemental or amendatory rules and regulations governing the offering, -which will be communicated promptly to the Federal Reserve Banks. ROBERT B . ANDERSON, Secretary of the Treasury. CO Ox 00 S3 Summary of information pertaining to Treasury bonds issued during the fiscal year 1958 O Department circular Date of preliminary announcement Number Date Concurrent offering circular number Treasury bonds issued for cash or in exchange for maturing or called securities Date of issue AUotment Date sub- payment Date of scription date on maturity books or before closed (or on later allotment) O CQ 1957 Sept. 12 996 1957 Sept. 16 4 percent of 1969 issued for cash 1957 Oct. 1 Nov. 18 1000 Nov. 20 3J4 percent of 1974 issued for cash Dec. 2 1004 1958 Feb. 3 1003,1005 1958 Jan. 29 Jan. 29 1005 Feb. 3 1003,1004 Feb. 20 1006 May 29 1009 June 3 May 29 1011 June 4 Feb. 28 1010 1958 Feb. 14 3 percent of 1964 issued in exchange for—._ 3% percent Series A-1958 certificates maturing Feb. 14, 1958. 2H percent Treasury bonds of 1966-58 maturing Mar. 15,1968. 13^ percent Series EA-1958 Treasury notes maturing Apr. 1, 1958. Treasury biUs (special issue) maturing Apr. 15, 1958. 3}4 percent Series B-1958 certificates maturing Apr. 15,1958. 3}4 percent of 1990 issued in exchange for— 3% percent Series A-1958 certificates maturing Feb. 14, 1958. 2K percent Treasury bonds of 1956-68 maturing Mar. 15, 1958. IH percent Series EA-1968 Treasury notes maturuig Apr. 1, 1958. Treasury bills (special issue) maturing Apr. 16, 1968. 3K percent Series B-1958 certificates maturing Apr. 15,1958. 3 percent of 1966 issued for cash Feb. 28 3H percent of 1985 issued for cash June 2H percent of 1966 issued in exchange for— 2li percent Series A-1968 Treasury notes maturing June 16,1958. 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1958-63 called for redemption on June 15, 1958. 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1968 maturing June 15, 1958. June 16 Feb. 14- 1957 1957 Oct. 1, Sept. 16 1 Oct. 1 1969 Nov. 16, Nov. 20 2 Dec. 2 1974 1958 1958 Feb. 16, Feb. 5 3 Feb. 14 1964 Feb. 15, Feb. 1990 o Si Hi o 4 Feb. 14 y ^ 3 Aug. 15, Feb. 28 5 Mar. 10 1965 May 15, June 3 6 June 18 1985 Feb. 15, June 6 ' June 16 1965 fei Hi 1 Commercial banks were permitted to subscribe, without deposit, for their own account for an amount not exceeding 60 percent of the combined capital, surplus, and undivided profits of the subscribing bank. Qualified depositaries were permitted to make payment for bonds aUotted to them and their customers by credit in Treasury tax and loan accounts. Payment for iiot more than 60 percent of bonds allotted was deferred not later than Oct. 21. Payments made subsequent to Oct. 1 were accompanied by accrued interest from that date at the rate of $0.11 per $1,000 per day, 2 Commercial banks were permitted to subscribe, without dejposit, for their own account for an amount not exceeding 26 percent of the combined capital, surplus, and undivided profits of the subscribing bank as of June 30, 1957. Qualified depositaries were permitted to make payment for bonds aUotted to them and their customers by credit in Treasm-y tax and loan accounts. 3 See Department Circular No. 1004, sec. IV, in this exhibit, for provisions for payment of interest. 4 Following acceptance of surrendered securities interest adjustment per $1,000 was paid to or collected from subscribers as follows: $16.78 was paid on Series A-1958 certificates; $10.49724 was paid on bonds of 1956-58; $7.60 was credited, $4.44594 was charged and the difference of $3.06406 was paid on Series EA-1958 iiotes; $5.79953 was coUected on Treasurj'- biUs; and $11.73077 was paid on Series B-1958 certificates. 6 See Department Circular No. 1006, sees. HE and IV, in this exhibit, for provisions or subscription and payment of interest. 8 Subscriptions from commercial banks for their owii account were restricted to ail amount not exceeding 2 percent of the combined aniount of time certificates of deposit (but only those issued in names of individuals, and of corporations, associations, and other organizations not operated for profit), and of savings deposits, or 5 percent of the combined capital, surplus, and undivided profits of the subscribing bank, whichever is greater. Qualified depositaries were permitted to make payment for bonds aUotted to them and their customers by credit in Treasm-y tax and loan accounts. In the case of aUotments at a rate exceeding 20 percent of subscription, payment at lOOH and accrued interest in the amount of $1,335 per $1,000 par amount for bonds aUotted, less adjustment for amount of deposit, and accrued interest thereon in the amount of $1,335 per $1,000 was required on June 18 or on later aUotment. Payment for remaining bonds allotted was required on June 18 together with accrued interest at the rate of $0,089 per day per $1,000 from June 3 to payment date. 7 All coupons subsequent to June 15, 1958, were required to be surrendered attached to bonds of 1958-63. Final interest due June 15, 1958, on registered bonds was paid by check drawn in accordance with assignments on bonds surrendered or credited in any account mauatained by a banking institution with the Federal Reserve Bank of its district. ZP CO Or CO Allotments of Treasury bonds issued during the fiscal year 1958, by Federal Reserve districts [In thousands of doUars] fej o 3 percent Treasm-y b o n d s of 1964 issued In exchange for— F e d e r a l R e s e r v e district Boston . . New York PhUadelphia Cleveland CinciTinati. Pittsburgh _ R i c h m o n d -_ Baltimore Charlotte - .. Atlanta.BirTningham, _ JacksonviUe Nashville _ . . , , . N e w Orleans Chicago Detroit St. Louis Little Rock LouisvUle Memphis Minnep.poli.«; Kansas City . Denver Oklahoma City Omaha . . _. DaUas _ ElPaso Houston FRASERS a n A n t o n i o , , — , - , , . , _ , - - . Digitized for 4 percent Treasu r y b o n d s of 1969 issued for cash i 3 % percent Treasury bonds of 1974 issued for cash 2 21,384 252.839 16,774 5.929 6,613 18,211 8,044 5,229 4,333 1,845 2,832 3,970 8,831 3,979 51,837 12,478 11,041 603 2,638 1,161 11,898 5,571 2,337 4,828 2,747 22,346 860 5,489 2,107 48,434 272,529 15, 566 13,568 4,680 9,735 8,395 4,621 2,145 3,607 3,414 4,192 7,063 1,964 54,465 10,661 6,648 208 2,610 2,141 6,943 2,997 992 4.062 1,115 13, 268 455 3,133 1,084 o 3 % percent Series A-1958 certiflcates maturing F e b . 14, 1968 3 2H percent Treasury bonds of 1956-58 maturing M a r . 15, 1968 3 I K percent Series EA-1968 T r e a s u r y notes maturing A p r . 1,1968 3 T r e a s u r y bUls (special issue) maturing A p r . 15, 1968 3 '56,894 852,827 48,184 112,748 24,638 294,673 16,697 28,908 1,055 65,760 609 6,421 11,209 142,768 4,933 35,087 17,811 270,274 24,052 25,612 111, 607 1,616,292 93,476 208,676 46,277 12,614 9,381 .7,600 20,684 96, 666 82,603 3,696 2,277 16,686 37, 798 143,059 3 H percent Series B-1958 certificates maturing A p r . 15, 1958 fei T o t a l issued fej ZP fej o fej o fej 321,814 93,962 19, 636 53,467 143,917 632,786 86,776 23,470 4,027 26, 020 21,677 161,970 46,121 68, 520 9,969 22,169 3,438 4,020 17, 604 13, 525 23,276 18,178 100,308 126,412 38,993 9,076 4,348 8,121 25,462 86,000 w fej fej _.__ 1^-7-7 > ZP d San Francisco _. Los Angeles . . Portland -_. Salt Lake City Seattle Treasury Government investment accounts Total bond aUotments, .Maturing securities: Exchanged in concurrent offerings 23.636 16,053 8,733 2,627 6,887 343 16,411 11,467 6,294 1,256 9.673 57 100,000 100,000 666,933 663,812 217,029 49,616 869 3,068 1,979,655 691, 555 4,463 115, 435 33,058 166,564 470, 730 1, 692 682 6,311 371,650 795,887 3,854,182 8,613, 915 692,965 218, 595 772,790 1,198, 641 11,496,906 Total exchanged _. Redeemed for cash or carried to matured debt.. _ 10, 593, 570 1,284, 620 334,030 1,144,440 1,994, 528 15,351, 088 267, Oil 164, 226 .48, 765 . 606, 653 356, 634 1,433, 288 Total maturing securities. 10,860, 581 1,448, 746 382, 795 1, 761, 093 2,351,162 16 784 376 Footnotes at end of table. fej ZP CO CO (X) Allotments of Treasury bonds issued during the fiscal year 1958, by Federal Reserve d^'s^nc^s—-Continued [In thousands of dollars] 2% percent T r e a s u r y b o n d s of 1965 issued i n exchange for— 3 H p e r c e n t T r e a s u r y b o n d s of 1990 issued i n exchange for— F e d e r a l R e s e r v e district Boston -- ._ New York P h U a d e l p h i a ._ . - . Cleveland Cincinnati Pittsburgh Richmond Baltimore Charlotte Atlanta _ __ ----_. Birmingham Jacksonville NashvUle N e w Orleans Chicago Detroit S t . Louis - . __ Little Rock Louisville. _ Memphis ' Minneapoli.s . Kansas City Denver Oklahoma City Omaha Dallas E l Paso Houston FRASER . San Antonio Digitized for I H per3 H percent Series 2H perc e n t Series c e n t T r e a s - EA-1968 A-1958 cer- u r y b o n d s T r e a s u r y of 195fr-68 terfi cates notes maturing maturing maturing M a r . 15, A p r . 1, F e b . 14, 1968 4 1958 4 1968 4 Treasury bUls (special issue) maturing A p r . 15, 1958 4 3 H perc e n t Series B-1958 certerficates maturing A p r . 16, 1958 4 Total issued 13,927 61,679 1,110 836 9,250 66,064 4,468 3,306 83,365 1, 266, 526 42, 262 31,476 10, 915 310 964 31,404 419 194 2,558 18, 731 29,935 881,277 33, 253 20, 285 28,624 240,957 3,381 7,014 19, 225 15, 660 1,629 17,549 50 35 48,159 20,118 2,989 7,665 35,243 114,164 15, 526 2,841 7 5i5 231 i9, i20 2,579 8,469 336 3,619 2,693 1,169 38 90 213 2,634 2,275 8,958 1,386 12,123 16,188 6,137 3 percent 3H percent Treasury Treasury 2y4 p e i 2 ^ pei2 % perbonds cent Series cent T r e a s bonds u r y bonds cent Treasof 1985 of 1966 A-1958 of 1968-63 u r y b o n d s issued issued Treasury called for for cash 5 for cash e of 1968 notes redempmaturing maturing tion o n J u n e 15, J u n e 15, J u n e 15, 1968 7 1968 7 1968 7 69.087 613,133 44,887 37,734 11,842 24,849 28,191 14,825 8,035 14,073 4,119 14,048 9,329 9,435 130,879 47,165 23.088 1,348 7,093 6,471 24,863 14,932 4,394 [8,119 7,606 41,119 1,806 11,589 3,612 SJ fej ^ o sn 1^ Total issued o fei fei 76,103 474,392 24,704 44,396 100, 510 1, 709,508 48, 601 116, 689 47,921 438,926 12,158 7,831 80,156 1,891, 692 81,922 153, 600 228, 687 4, 040,126 142, 681 278,120 48,423 43,379 42,618 50, 650 136, 647 31,840 103,466 6,170 107,348 216,983 ZP fei o S) fei o fei 119, 999 483, 567 i34,999 445,999 1, 064, 665 23,905 96,920 29,544 117,429 242, 893 fej SJ fei 23, 772 16,281 86, 666 106,620 8,460 23,618 73, 703 114, 061 ^167,819 244, 299 45,968 84,481 9,694 80, 202 174,377 > ZP d SJ Hi San Francisco Los Angeles Portland Salt Lake City Seattle Treasmy Government investment accounts Total bond allotmentsMaturing securities: Exchanged in concurrent offerings Total exchanged Redeemed for cash or carried to matured debt Total maturing securities 40,839 30,442 2,268 4,683 3,398 81. 530 3,201 600 40 232 16 3,989 1,120,991 350, 334 24,695 96,163 134,832 105, 673 206,810 37,045 188, 361 432, 216 412 10, 721 884 6,716 18,321 100, 000 100, 000 3,195,927 799,868 3, 391,739 7,387, 634 1, 727, 016 1,484, 298 1,134, 868 9,472, 579 934,186 309,335 1,048, 277 1,859, 696 13, 624, 073 1, 014,463 91, 067 710, 992 1 816 522 10, 593, 570 1, 284, 520 334, 030 1,144,440 1,994, 528 15, 351,088 4, 210, 390 890,935 4,102, 731 9, 204 056 257, Oil 164, 225 48, 765 606, 653 356, 634 1,433, 288 181,401 27,846 142,080 351, 327 10, 850, 581 1, 448, 745 382, 796 1, 761, 093 2,361,162 16, 784,376 4, 391, 791 918, 781 4, 244,811 9, 655,383 1 Subscriptions for $50,000 or less were allotted in fuU and subscriptions in excess of $60,000 were aUotted 10 percent but not less than $60,000. 2 Subscriptions for $10,000 or less were aUotted in fuU and subscriptions in excess of $10,000 were allotted 26 percent to savings-type investors and 10 percent to aU other subscribers but not less than $10,000. 3 Series A-1959 Treasury 2H percent certificates and 3H percent Treasury bonds of 1990 also offered in exchange for this matm-ity; see exhibit 1. 4 Series A-1959 Treasury 2H percent certificates and 3 percent Treasury bonds of 1964 also offered in exchange for this maturity; see also exhibit 1. 68, 560 37,488 9,726 12, 293 18, 489 191 5 Subscriptions for $10,000 or less were allotted in full and subscriptions in excess of $10,000 were aUotted 20 percent but not less than $10,000. 6 Subscriptions for $5,000 or less were allotted in full and subscriptions in excess of $5,000 were allotted 60 percent to savings-type investors, 40 percent to commercial banks for their o^vn account and 26 percent to all other subscribers but not less than $6,000. 7 Series B-1959 Treasury IH percent certificates also offered in exchange for this security; see exhibit 1. ZP CO CO 200 1 9 5 8 RE.PORT OF T H E SECRETARY OF T H E TREASURY E X H I B I T 4.—Call, February 14, 1958, for redemption on J u n e 15, 1958, of 2 % percent Treasury bonds of 1958-63, dated J u n e 15, 1938 (press release of February 14, 1958) T h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t t o d a y issued t h e official notice of call for redemption on J u n e 15, 1958, of t h e partially tax-exempt 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1958-63, dated J u n e 15, 1938, due J u n e 15, 1963. There are now outstanding $918,780,600 of these bonds. I t has been t h e practice of t h e Treasury t o call t h e partially tax-exempt bonds a t t h e first call dates because t h e total cost of these borrowings t o t h e Treasury, taking into account interest and t h e t a x advantages t o t h e holders, is greater t h a n t h e cost based upon current interest rates of new issues of comparable maturities. T h e text of t h e formal notice of call is as follows: Two AND T H R E E - Q U A R T E R S PERCENT JUNE TREASURY BONDS O F 1958-63 ( D A T E D 15, 1938) NOTICE O F CALL F O R REDEMPTION To Holders of 2% Percent Treasury Bonds of 1958-63, and Others Concerned: 1. Public notice is hereby given t h a t all outstanding 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1958-63, dated J u n e 15, 1938, due J u n e 15, 1963, are hereby called for redemption on J u n e 15, 1958, on which d a t e interest on such bonds will cease. 2. Holders of these bonds may, in advance of t h e redemption date, be offered t h e privilege of exchanging all or any p a r t of their called bonds for other interestbearing obligations of t h e United States, in which event public notice will hereafter be given a n d a n official circular governing t h e exchange offering will be issued. 3. Full information regarding t h e presentation a n d surrender of t h e bonds for cash redemption under this call will be found in D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 300, Revised, dated April 30, 1955. ROBERT B . ANDERSON, Secretary of the Treasury. E X H I B I T 5.—Call, M a y 14, 1958, for redemption on September 15, 1958, of 2 % percent Treasury bonds of 1956-59, dated February 1, 1944, a n d 2 % percent Treasury bonds of 1957-59, dated M a r c h 1, 1952 (press release of May 14, 1958) T h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t today issued t h e official notices of call for redemption on September 15, 1958, of t h e 2J4 percent Treasury bonds of 1956-59, dated F e b r u a r y I, 1944, d u e September 15, 1959, a n d t h e 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1957-59, dated March 1, 1952 d u e March 15, 1959. There are now outstanding $3,818,075,000 of t h e 2H percent bonds a n d $926,811,000 of t h e 2 ^ percent bonds. T h e texts of t h e formal notices of call are as follows: Two AND O N E - Q U A R T E R PERCENT TREASURY FEBRUARY I, BONDS O F 1956-59 (DATED 1944) NOTICE O F CALL F O R REDEMPTION To Holders of 2% Percent Treasury Bonds of 1956-59, a n d Others Concerned: 1. Public notice is hereby given t h a t all outstanding 2}^ percent Treasury bonds of 1956-59, dated February 1, 1944, d u e September 15, 1959, are hereby called for redemption on September 15, 1958, on which date interest on such bonds will cease. 2. Holders of these bonds may, in advance of t h e redemption date, be offered t h e privilege of exchanging all or any p a r t of their called bonds for other interestbearing obligations of t h e United States, in which event public notice will hereafter be given a n d a n official circular governing t h e exchange offering will be issued. 3. Full information regarding t h e presentation a n d surrender of t h e bonds for •cash redemption under this call will be found in D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 300, Revised, dated April 30, 1955. R O B E R T B . ANDERSON, Secretary of the Treasury. EXHIBITS Two AND THREE-EIGHTHS PERCENT TREASURY MARCH 1, 201 BONDS OF 1957-59 (DATED 1952) NOTICE OF CALL FOR REDEMPTION To Holders of 2ys Percent Treasury Bonds of 1957-59, and Others Concerned: 1. Public notice is hereby given that all outstanding 2% percent Treasury bonds of 1957-59, dated March I, 1952, due March 15, 1959, are hereby called •for redemption on September 15, 1958, on which date interest on such bonds will cease. 2. Holders of these bonds may, in advance of the redemption date, be offered the privilege of exchanging all or any part of their called bonds for other interestbearing obligations of the United States, in which event public notice will hereafter be given and an official circular governing the exchange offering will be "issued. 3. Full information regarding the presentation and surrender of the bonds for •cash redemption under this call will be found in Department Circular No. 300, Revised, dated April 30, 1955. ROBERT B . ANDERSON, Secretary of the Treasury. Treasury Bills Offered and Accepted EXHIBIT 6.—Treasury bills During the fiscal year 1958 there were 52 weekly issues of Treasury bills, one -special issue of 237-day bills, and one issue of the tax anticipation series. Three press releases inviting tenders and three releases announcing the acceptance of tenders are reproduced in this exhibit. The press releases of August 12 and 15, 1957, are in a form representative of bills issued for cash only and the releases of May 8 and 13, 1958, are representative of the weekly series of Treasury bills. The tax anticipation series is represented by the releases of June 24 and 27, 1957. The essential details regarding each issue of Treasury bills during the fiscal year 1958 are summarized in the table following the press releases. PRESS RELEASE OF AUGUST 12, 1957 The Treasury Department, by this public notice, invites tenders for $1,750,000,000, or thereabouts, of 237-day. Treasury bills, to be issued on a discount basis under competitive and noncompetitive bidding as hereinafter provided. The bills of this series will be dated August 21, 1957, and will mature April 15, 1958, when the face amount will be payable without interest. They will be issued in bearer form only, and in denominations of $1,000, $5,000, $10,000, $100,000, $500,000, and $1,000,000 (maturity value). Tenders will be received at Federal Reserve Banks and branches up to the closing hour, one-thirty o'clock p. m., eastern daylight saving time, Wednesday, August 14, 1957. Tenders will not be received at the Treasury Department, Washington. Each tender must be for an even multiple of $1,000, and in the case of competitive tenders the price offered must be expressed on the basis of 100, with not more than three decimals, e. g., 99.925. Fractions piay not be used. It is urged that tenders be made on the printed forms and forwarded in the special envelopes which will be supplied by Federal Reserve Banks or branches on application therefor. Others than banking institutions will not be permitted to submit tenders except for their own account. Tenders will be received without deposit from incorporated banks and trust companies and from responsible and recognized dealers in investment securities. Tenders from qthers must be accompanied by payment of 2 percent of the face amount of Treasury bills applied for, unless the tenders are accompaned bj^^ an express guaranty of payment by an incorporated bank or trust company. Immediately after the closing hour, tenders will be opened at the Federal Reserve Banks and branches, following which public announcement will be made by the Treasury Department of the amount and price range of accepted bids. Those submitting tenders will be advised of the acceptance or rejection thereof. The Secretary of the Treasury expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all tenders, in whole or in part, and his action in any such respect shall be final. Subject to these reservations, noncompetitive tenders for $300,000 202 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY or less without stated price from any one bidder will be accepted in full at the average price (in three decimals) of accepted competitive bids. Payment of accepted tenders at the prices offered must be made or completed at the Federal Reserve Bank in cash or other immediately available funds on August 21, 1957, provided, however, any qualified depositary will be permitted to make payment by credit in its Treasury tax and loan account for Treasury bills allotted to it for itself and its customers up to any amount for which it shall be qualified in excess of existing deposits when so notified by the Federal Reserve Bank of its district. The income derived from Treasury bills, whether interest or gain from the sale or other disposition of the bills, does not have any exemption, as such, and loss from the sale or other disposition of Treasury bills does not have any special treatment, as such, under the Internal Revenue Code of 1954. The bills are subject to estate, inheritance, gift, or other excise taxes, whether Federal or State, but are exempt from all taxation now or hereafter imposed on the principal or interest thereof by any State, or any of the possessions of the United States, or by any local taxing authority. For purposes of taxation the amount of discount at which Treasury bills are originally sold by the United States is considered to be interest. Under Sections 454 (b) and 1221 (5) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954 the amount of discount at which bills issued hereunder are sold is not considered to accrue until such bills are sold, redeemed, or otherwise disposed of, and such bills are excluded from consideration as capital assets. Accordingly, the owner of Treasury bills (other than life insurance companies) issued hereunder need include in his income tax return only the difference betweea the price paid for such bills, whether on original issue or on subsequent purchase, and the amount actually received either upon sale or redemption at maturity during the taxable year for which the return is made, as ordinary gain or loss. Treasury Department Circular No. 418, Revised, and this notice, prescribe the terms of the Treasury bills and govern the conditions of their issue. Copies of the circular may be obtained from any Federal Reserve Bank or branch. PRESS RELEASE OF AUGUST 15, 1957 The Treasury Department announced last evening that the tenders for $1,750,000,000, or thereabouts, of 237-day Treasury bills to be dated August 21, 1957, and to mature April 15, 1958, which were offered on August 12, were opened at the Federal Reserve Banks on August 14. The details of this issue are as follows: Total applied for $3, 177, 328, 000' Total accepted (includes $296,329,000 entered on a noncompetitive basis and accepted in full at the average price shown below) 1, 750, 043, 000' Range of accepted competitive bids (excepting four tenders totaling $4,690,000): High, equivalent rate of discount approximately 3.843% per annum 97. 470' Low, equivalent rate of discount approximately 4.250% per annum 97. 202 Average, equivalent rate of discount approximately 4,173% per annum 1_ 97. 253 (49 percent of the amount bid for at the low price was accepted.) Total applied for Federal Reserve district Boston New York PhiladelphiaCleveland „^ ^. „. ....^ Richmond Atlanta ._ . _ _ __ Chicago St. Louis Minneapoli.t; ^_. .. Kansas City Dallas San Francisco Total ._ , __ _ _ . " .. __ _ i.„. _ ._ , . - , - , ... .- . . Total accepted $119,737,000 1, 629,083,000 127, 505, 000 118, 662,000 77,023,000 78, 740,000 405,098,000 82, 681,000 95,835,000 61, 210,000 157,147,000 224, 707,000 $86,721,000 540,000,000 102,028,000 90,492,000 69, 748,000 70,816,000 293,719,000 68, 641,000 95, 733,000 53,188,000 156, 790,000 123,167,000 3,177,328, 000 1, 760,043,000 EXHIBITS 203 PRESS RELEASE OF MAY 8, 1958 The Treasury Department, by this public notice, invites tenders for $1,700,000,000, or thereabouts, of 91-day Treasury bills, for cash and in exchange for Treasury bills maturing May 15, 1958, in the amount of $1,709,489,000, to be issued on a discount basis under competitive and noncompetitive bidding as hereinafter provided. The bills of this series will be dated May 15, 1958, and will mature August 14, 1958, when the face amount will be payable without interest. They will be issued in bearer form only, and in denomination of $1,000, $5,000, $10,000, $100,000, $500,000, and $1,000,000 (maturity value). Tenders will be received at Federal Reserve Banks and branches up to the closing hour, one-thirty o'clock p. m., eastern daylight saving time, Monday, May 12, 1958. Tenders will not be received at the Treasury Department, Washington. Each tender must be for an even multiple of $1,000, and in the case of competitive tenders the price offered must be expressed on the basis of 100, with not more than three decimals, e. g., 99.925. Fractions may not be used. It is urged that tenders be made on the printed forms and forwarded in the special envelopes which will be supplied by Federal Reserve Banks or branches on application therefor. Others than banking institutions will not be permitted to submit tenders except for their own account. Tenders will be received without deposit from incorporated banks and trust companies and from responsible and recognized dealers in investment securities. Tenders from others must be accompanied by payment of 2 percent of the face amount of Treasury bills applied for, unless the tenders are accompanied by an express guaranty of payment by an incorporated bank or trust company. Immediately after the closing hour, tenders will be opened at the Federal Reserve Banks and branches, following which public announcement will be made by the Treasury Department of the amount and price range of accepted bids. Those submitting tenders will be advised of the acceptance or rejection thereof. The Secretary of the Treasury expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all tenders in whole or in part, and his action in any such respect shall be final. Subject to these reservations, noncompetitive tenders for $200,000 or less without stated price from any one bidder will be accepted in full at the average price (in three decimals) of accepted competitive bids. Settlement for accepted tenders in accordance with the bids must be made or completed at the Federal Reserve Bank on May 15, 1958, in cash or other immediately available funds or in a like face amount of Treasury bills maturing May 15, 1958. Cash and exchange tenders will receive equal treatment. Cash adjustments will be made for differences between the par value of maturing bills accepted in exchange and the issue price of the new bills. The income derived from Treasury bills, whether interest or gain from the sale or other disposition of the bills, does not have any exemption, as such, and loss from the sale or other disposition of Treasury bills does not have any special treatment, as such, under the Internal Revenue Code of 1954. The bills are subject to estate, inheritance, gift, or other excise taxes, whether Federal or State, but are exempt from all taxation now or hereafter imposed on the principal or interest thereof by any State, or any of the possessions of the United States, or by any local taxing authority. For purposes of taxation the amount of discount at which Treasury bills are originally sold, by the United States is considered to be interest. Under Sections 454 (b) and 1221 (5) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954- the amount of discount at which bills issued hereunder are sold is not considered to accrue until such bills are sold, redeemed, or otherwise disposed of, and such bills are excluded from consideration as capital assets. Accordingly, .the owner of Treasury bills (other than life insurance companies) issued hereunder need include in his income tax return only the difference between the price paid for such bills, whether on original issue or on subsequent purchase, and the amount actually received either upon sale or redemption at maturity during the taxable year for which the return is made, as ordinary gain or loss. Treasury Department Circular No. 418, Revised, and this notice, prescribe the terms of the Treasury bills and govern the conditions of their issue. Copies of the circular may be obtained from any Federal Reserve Bank or branch. PRESS RELEASE OF MAY 13, 1958 The Treasury Department announced last evening that the tenders for $1,700,000,000, or thereabouts, of 91-day Treasury bills to be dated May 15 and to mature August 14, 1958, which were offered on May 8, were opened at the Federal Reserve Banks on May 12. "• 204 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY The details of this issue are as follows: Total applied for $2, 635, 044, 000^ Total accepted (includes'$288,696,000 entered on a noncompetitive basis and accepted in full at the average price shown below) 1, 700, 627, 000' Range of accepted competitive bids: High, equivalent rate of discount approximately 1.068% per annum 99. 730' Low, eouivalent rate of discount approximately 1.127% per annum 99. 715Average, equivalent rate of discount approximately 1.112% per annum___ 99. 719' (51 percent of the amount bid for at the low price was accepted.) Federal Reserve district Boston New York Philadelphia Cleveland Richmond Atlanta Chicago.. St. Louis Minneapolis.Kansas City Dallas -. -San Francisco - - -._- - -. - . Total . - --- • _. __ Total applied for __ _ -- _.^-_- Total accepted $36,935,000 1, 875, 284,000 47, 685,000 49,240, 000 15,811, 000 41,176, 000 266,610, 000 21,810, 000 18, 701,000 66, 972,000 29,611, 000 176,210,000 $26 935 000 1,062,324,000 39, 685, 000 49,240,000 15,811,000 37, 790,000 204,140, 000 21,810,000 18,701,000 50,360, 000 23, 611,000 160,220, 000 2, 636, 044,000 1,700,627, OOO PRESS RELEASE OF JUNE 24, 1957 The Treasury Department, by this public notice, invites tenders for $3,000,000,000, or thereabouts, of 264-day Treasury bills, to be issued on a discount basis under competitive and noncompetitive bidding as hereinafter provided. The bills of this series will be designated tax anticipation series, they will be dated July 3, 1957, and they will mature March 24, 1958. They will be accepted at face value in payment of income and profits taxes due on March 15, 1958, and to the extent they are not presented for this purpose the face amount of these bills will be payable without interest at maturity. Taxpayers desiring to apply these bills in payment of March 15, 1958, income and profits taxes have the privilege of surrendering them to any Federal Reserve Bank or branch or to the Office of the Treasurer of the United States, Washington, not more than fifteen days before March 15, 1958, and receiving receipts therefor showing the face amount of the bills so surrendered. These receipts may be submitted in lieu of the bills on or before March 15, 1958, to the District Director of Internal Revenue for the district in which such taxes are payable. The bills will be issued in bearer form only, and in denominations of $1,000, $5,000, $10,000, $100,000, $500,000, and $1,000,000 (maturity value). Tenders will be received at Federal Reserve Banks and branches up to the closing; hour, one-thirty o'clock p. m., eastern daylight saving time, Wednesday, June 26^ 1957. Tenders will not be received at the Treasury Department, Washington. Each tender must be for an even multiple of $1,000, and in the case of competitive tenders the price offered must be expressed on the basis of 100, with not more than three decimals, e. g., 99.925. Fractions may not be used. It is urged that tenders be made on the printed forms and forwarded in the special envelopes which will be supplied by Federal Reserve Banks or branches on application therefor. Others than banking institutions will not be permitted to submit tenders except for their own account. Tenders will be received without deposit from incorporated banks and trust companies and from responsible and recognized dealers in investment securities. Tenders from others must be accompanied by payment of 2 percent of the face amount of Treasury bills applied for, unless the tenders are accompanied by an express guaranty of payment by an incorporated bank or trust company. Immediately after the closing hour, tenders will be opened at the Federal Reserve Banks and branches, following which public announcement will be made bythe Treasury Department of the amount and price range of accepted bids. Those submitting tenders will be advised of the acceptance or rejection thereof. The Secretary of the Treasury expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all tenders, in whole or in part, and his action in any such respect shall be final 205 EXHIBITS Subject to these reservations, noncompetitive tenders for $400,000 or less without stated price from any one bidder will be accepted in full at the average price (in three decimals) of accepted competitive bids. Payment of accepted tenders at the prices offered must be made or completed at the Federal Reserve Bank in cash or other immediately available funds on July 3, 1957, provided, however, any qualified depositary will be permitted to make payment by credit in its Treasury tax and loan account for Treasury bills allotted to it for itself and its customers up to an}^ amount for which it shall be qualified in excess of existing deposits when so notified by the Federal Reserve Bank of its district. The income derived from Treasury bills, whether interest or gain from the sale or other disposition of the bills, does not have any exemption, as such, and loss from the sale or other disposition of Treasury bills does not have any special treatment, as such, under the Internal Revenue Code of 1954. The bills are subject to estate, inheritance, gift, or other excise taxes, whether Federal or State, but are exempt from all taxation now or hereafter imposed on the principal or interest thereof by any State, or any of the possessions of the United States, or bj^ any local taxing authority. For purposes of taxation the amount of discount at which Treasury bills are originally sold by the United States is considered to be interest. Under Sections 454 (b) and 1221 (5) of the Tnternal Revenue Code of 1954 the amount of discount at which bills issued hereunder are sold is not considered to accrue until such bills are sold, redeemed, or otherwise disposed of, and such bills are excluded from consideration as capital assets. Accordingly, the owner of Treasury bills (other than life insurance companies) issued hereunder need include in his income tax return only the difference between the price paid for such bills, whether on original issue or on subsequent purchase, and the amount actually received either upon sale or redemption at maturity during the taxable year for which the return is made, as ordinary gain or loss. Treasury Department Circular No. 418, Revised, and this notice, prescribe the terms of the Treasury bills and govern the conditions of their issue. Copies of the circular may be obtained from any Federal Reserve Bank or branch. PRESS RELEASE OF JUNE 27, 1957 The Treasury Department announced last evening that the tenders for $3,000,000,000, or thereabouts, of tax anticipation series 264-day Treasury bills to be dated July 3, 1957, and to mature March 24, .1958, which were offered on June 24, were opened at the Federal Reserve Banks on June 26. The details of this issue are as follows: Total applied for $4, 545, 824, 000 Total accepted (includes $368,809,000 entered on a noncompetitive basis and accepted in full at the average price shown below) 3, 000, 004, 000 Range of accepted competitive bids (excepting three tenders totaling $1,200,000): High, equivalent rate of discount approximately 3.200% per annum 97. 653 Low, equivalent rate of discount approximately 3.560% per annum 97. 389 Average, equivalent rate of discount approximately 3.485% per annum 97. 445 (83 percent of the amount bid for at the low price was accepted.) Federal Reserve district Boston...!! NewYork Philadelphia Cleveland Richmond Atlanta Chicago St. Loiiis Minneapolis Kansas City Dallas . San Francisco . i Total apphed for _ , Total . . . . . -- . - -- Total accepted $180,630,000 2, 215,036,000 190,630,000 224,042,000 109,995,000 149,985,000 644,034,000 152,641,000 113,926,000 91,406,000 220,110,000 353,390,000 $180,230,000 1 010 036 000 164,630,000 206 942 000 93, 895,000 139, 685,000 427, 234,000 138 921 000 109,926,000 85,406,000 218, 710,000 234,390.000 4, 545, 824,000 3,000,004.000 bO o Summary of information pertaining to Treasury bills ^ issued during thefiscal year 1958 [Dollar amounts in thousands] CO cn 00 Maturity value Prices and rates Total bids accepted 2 Tenders accepted Date of issue Date of maturity Days to maturity Total applied for Competitive bids accepted .High Total accepted On competitive basis On noncompetitive basis 2 For cash In exchange Average ! Equivalent price average per Price hundred 3 rate* per (percent) hundred Amount maturing on issue date of new offering Low EquivaPrice lent per rate * hundred (percent) O o Equivalent rate 4 (percent) 03 Weekly Se'ries 1957 July 6 11 18 25 Aue. 1 8 16 22 29 Sept. 5 12 19 26 1957 Oct. 3 10 17 24 31 Nov. 7 14, 21 29 Dec 6 12 19 26 1958 3 Tan. 2 9 10 16 17 23 24 30 31 Nov. 7 Feb. 6 13 14 21 20 29 27 http://fraser.stlouisfed.org/ Oct. Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis o t?d 90 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 92 91 91 91 91 $2, 312, 828 $1, 599, 216 $1,254.010 $345,206 $1. 526,019 2, 407, 927 1, 599, 742 1,213,247 386, 495 1, 670, 067 2, 719, 015 1, 600, 562 1,190, 580 409, 982 1, 663, 486 2, 279, 233 1, 600, 512 1, 236,944 363. 568 1, 568. 514 2, 414, 848 1, 699, 862 1, 339,155 360; 707 1, 662, 308 2, 645, 409 1, 700,194 1, 335,112 365, 082 1, 669.103 2, 595, 574 1, 699, 926 1, 311, 090 388, 835 1, 671, 565 2, 353,182 1, 799, 723 1, 457, 860 341, 863 1, 682, 012 2, 469, 465 1, 800, 664 1, 476, 377 325, 287 1,690,489 2, 423. 273 1,800,991 1,483, 832 317,159 1, 704. 962 2, 624' 989 1,802, 221 1.373 425 428 796 1, 763, 287 2, 384, 249 1, 600, 444 1,177,926 422, 618 1, 557, 772 2, 610, 676 1,601,601 1,172,076 1, 566, 329 429, 626 $73,197 29, 675 37, 076 31.998 37, 554 31, 091 28, 360 117,711 110,175 96, 029 38, 934 42, 672 36, 272 99.190 99.198 99.218 99. 202 99.160 99.164 99.116 99.152 99.106 99 097 99 096 99.082 99.107 3.239 3.172 3 092 3 158 3.363 3.308 3.498 3 364 3 497 3 571 3 576 3.632 3.634 99.197 99. 206 a 99 229 99 241 6 99.191 7 99.178 8 99.136 9 99 163 10 99 115 11 99 115 12 99 103. 99.115 99.115 3.212 3.141 3.050 3.003 3.200 3.252 3.418 3. 311 3.463 3. 501 3.649 3.501 3.601 99.185 99.195 99. 216 99.179 99.142 99.157 99.110 99.146 99.102 99. 093 99. 094 99.079 99.105 3.260 3.186 3 102 3 248 3 394 3.335 3.521 3.382 3.614 3 588 3 584 3.644 3.641 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 90 2, 289, 502 2,200 852 2, 453 480 2, 352, 521 2, 502, 249 2, 475, 547 • 2, 646, 616 2, 688, 097 2, 430, 281 1. 478, 652 1, 565, 316 1, 568, 388 1, 566, 559 1,635.671 1, 650, 599 1, 669,174 1, 770, 601 1,720,806 121. 042 34, 945 41,944 34.189 63, 618 49. 849 30,913 29, 826 79,838 99 108 99 109 99 076 99. 085 99. 085 99. 097 99 122 99 205 99 210 3 628 3 525 3 660 3.619 3. 621 3.672 3.473 3.146 3.158 99 123 99 126 99 116 13 99. 093 99.105 1^ 99.100 99.129 15 99. 209 99. 222 3.469 3.458 3.501 3.588 3.641 3.560 3.446 3.129 3.112 99.104 99.106 99.070 99.083 99.082 99. 095 99.121 99.203 99.207 3 645 3 537 3 679 3.628 3.632 3.580 3 477 3 153 3 172 $1. 603, 630 1, 611, 406 1, 600. 396 1, 600, 412 1, 701, 993 1, 699, 381 1, 700, 033 1,800, 033 1, 800, 624 1, 799, 672 1, 799, 907 1, 600, 298 1, 601, 643 o te) te) t> 1, 599, 694 1,600 260 1,600 332 1,600,7481, 699.189 1, 700, 448 1. 700. 087 1,800, 427 1,800, 644 1, 245, 536 1,206 379 1,188 063 1, 211; 002 1, 326. 613 1.336 715 1, 339,992 1, 427. 424 1, 473, 835 364,158 393. 881 412,269 389,746 372, 576 363, 733 360,095 373,003 326,809 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1. 1, 1. 1, 599. 216 699, 742 600, 562 600. 512 699, 862 700,194 699, 926 799, 723 800, 664 d Dec. 5 12 19 26 5 1958 05 J a n . 2 16 23 30 6 Feb. 13 20 27 Mar. 6 13 20 27 Apr. 3 10 17 24 May 1 8 15 22 Mar. 6 13 20 27 91 91 91 91 Apr. 3 10 17 24 1 8 15 22 29 5 12 19 26 3 10 17 24 31 7 14 21 28 4 11 18 25 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 9l 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 May June July Aug. 29 June 5 12 19 26 Sept 2, 655, 2, 811, 2. 347, 2. 415, 092 613 513 999 388,184 430,155 681, 962 750, 995 691, 808 356, 068 502, 369 618, 863 597, 304 194, 747 436, 329 506, 518 479, 667 204, 687 271, 980 727, 534 594,000 801, 460 653, 330 634, 444 504,397 383. 651 414. 949 449, 953 471, 776 470, 981 799, 986 802, 558 700,115 700,152 1, 463, 279 1, 380,160 1, 301, 378 1, 312, 802 336, 707 422, 398 398, 737 387, 350 1, 1, 1, 1, 725, 403 764, 489 650, 722 648, 942 74, 583 38, 069 49, 393 51, 210 99. 215 99. 244 99. 206 99.198 3.105 2.991 3.140 3.173 99.220 99. 248 16 99. 225 99. 213 3.086 2.975 3.066 3.113 99. 212 99. 242 99.202 99.195 3.117 2.999 3.157 3.185 1, 800, 991 1, 802, 221 1, 600, 444 1, 601, 601 1, 700, 340 1, 699, 903 1, 700, 648 1, 701, 606 1, 700, 563 1, 699, 718 1, 709, 489 1, 800, 701 1, 802, 235 1, 800,147 1, 699, 839 1, 699, 678 1, 700, 801 1, 700, 087 1, 700,140 1, 701, 300 1, 699,866 1, 701, 714 1, 700, 410 1, 700, 027 1,800, 750 1, 800, 230 1, 800, 204 1, 700, 209 1, 701, 012 1, 700, 384 1, 332, 480 1, 288, 949 1,259, 547 1, 345,129 1, 316, 040 1, 378, 873 1, 393,125 1, 498, 568 1, 533, 551 1, 562, 402 1, 388, 222 1, 370, 341 1, 369, 727 1, 436, 342 1, 407. 086 1, 370; 808 1, 391, 970 1, 411, 765 1, 409, 671 1, 411, 931 1,555,908 1, 609, 615 1, 633, 314 1, 463,063 1, 439. 854 1, 432, 783 367, 860 410, 954 441,101 356, 477 384, 523 320, 845 316, 364 302,143 268, 684 237, 745 311, 617 329, 337 331, 074 263. 745 293, 054 330, 492 307, 896 289, 949 290, 739 288, 096 244, 842 190, 615 166, 890 237,146 261,158 267, 601 1, 671, 705 1, 613, 571 1, 660, 069 1, 558, 697 1, 533, 413 1, 609,815 1, 679, 961 1, 695, 766 1, 778, 607 1,732,339 1, 671, 446 1, 640, 685 1, 661, 800 1, 649, 056 1, 676, 070 1, 651, 812 1, 669,080 1, 563, 791 1, 589, 628 1, 677,147 1, 669, 467 1, 675, 872 1, 660, 573 1, 559, 829 1, 549, 999 1, 523, 391 28, 635 86, 332 40, 579 142, 909 167,150 89, 903 29, 528 104, 935 23, 628 67, 808 28, 393 68, 993 39, 001 51, 031 25, 070 49, 488 30, 786 137, 923 110, 782 22, 880 131, 283 124, 358 139. 631 140, 380 161,013 176, 993 99.304 99.278 99. 345 99. 346 99. 443 99. 600 99. 563 99. 562 99. 696 99. 668 99. 613 99. 661 99. 700 99. 710 99. 729 99. 690 99.733 99. 665 99. 700 99. 719 99. 765 99. 840 99. 817 99. 787 99. 759 99. 746 2.753 2. 858 2. 591 2.687 2.202 1.583 1.730 1.732 1.202 1.351 1.532 L342 1.188 1.148 L074 L226 1.055 1.366 1.187 1.112 0.930 0.635 0.723 0.841 0.953 1.006 99.312 17 99. 288 99. 350 18 99. 369 99.-450 99. 634 99. 620 99. 682 99. 701 99. 670 18 99. 660 99. 671 99. 704 99. 725 99. 740 20 99. 729 21 99. 744 22 99. 671 23 99. 703 99. 730 99.770 99. 852 99. 840 24 99. 803 99. 860 99. 759 2.722 2.817 2. 571 2.536 2.176 L448 1.603 1.654 L183 1.305 1.345 1.302 1.171 L088 1.029 1.072 1.013 1.302 1.175 1.068 0.910 0.585 0.633 0.779 0.593 0.953 99. 272 99. 344 99.344 99. 442 99. 573 99. 558 99. 660 99. 690 99. 646 99. 609 99. 657 99. 696 99. 696 99. 720 99. 688 99. 729 99. 662 99. 699 99. 716 99. 761 99. 830 99. 810 99. 782 99. 755 99. 743 2.777 2.880 2. 595 2. 595 2.207 1.689 1.749 1. 741 1.226 1.400 1. 547 1. 357 1.203 1.203 1.108 1.234 1.072 1.377 1.191 1.127 0.945 0.673 0.752 0.862 0.969 1.017 1, 599,694 1, 600,260 1, 600,332 1, 600,748 1, 699,189 1, 700,448 1, 700,087 1, 800,427 1, 800,644 1, 799,986 1, 802,568 1, 700,115 1, 700,152 1, 700,340 1, 699,903 1, 700,648 1, 701.606 1, 700,563 1, 699,718 1, 709,489 1,800, 701 1,802, 235 1,800, 147 1, 699,839 1, 699,678 1, 700,801 97. 253 4.173 25 97. 470 3.843 97. 202 4.250 97. 444 3.485 26 97. 653 3.200 97. 389 3.560 1, 1, 1, 1, te) ZP Special Issue 1957 A u g . 21 A p r . 16 237 $3,178, 378 $1, 751, 093 $1, 454, 014 $297, 079 $1, 751, 093 T a x A n t i c i p a t i o n Series 1957 July 3 M a r . 24 264 $4, 547, 484 $3, 001, 664 $2, 630, 995 " $370, 669 $3, 001, 664 F o o t n o t e s on following page. to o 1 The usual timing with respect to issues of Treasury bills is: Press release inviting tenders, 7 days before date of issue; closing date on which tenders are accepted, 3 days before date of issue; and press release aimouncing acceptance of tenders, 2 days before date of issue. Figures are final and differ in many instances from those shown in press release announcing preliminary details of a particular issue. 2 Noncompetitive tenders from any one bidder for $200,000 or less, without stated price, were accepted in fuU at the average price for accepted competitive bids, except that for the special issue dated August 21, the amount was $300,000, and the tax anticipation series dated July 3, the amount was $400,000. • 3 Price at which noncompetitive tenders were accepted. * Bank-discount basis. 5 Except $11,000 at 99.241. 6 Except $125,000 at 99.241, $100,000 at 99.218, $20,000 at 99.210, $100,000 at 99.202, and $200,000 at 99.199. 7 Except $2,000 at 99.241. 8 Except $1,000,000 at 99,180, $300,000 at 99.178, $300,000 at 99.165, $10,000 at 99.164, $275,000 at 99.160, $200,000 at 99.156, and $50,000 at 99.150. 9 Except $15,000 at 99.191. 10 Except $151,000 at 99.185, $1,450,000 at 99.163, $2,000,000 at 99.155, $200,000 at 99.154, $200,000 at 99.153, and $200,000 at 99.152. n Except $100,000 at 99.150 and $30,000 at 99.140. 12 Except $100,000 at 99.140, $1,000,000 at 99.127, and $130,000 at 99.116. i3 Except $200,000 at 99.117, $600,000 at 99.115, and $500,000 at 99.110. 1* Except $300,000 at 99.115. 15 Except $50,000 at 99.216. is Except $15,000 at 99.248, $100,000 at 99.242, $300,000 at 99.241, and $100,000 at 99.240. i7 Except $350,000 at 99.304. is Except $600,000 at 99.368. is Except $100,000 at 99.684. 20 Except$1,000,000 at 99.760, and $550,000 at 99.750. 21 Except$300,000 at 99.752. 22 Except$200,000 at 99.750, and $200,000 at 99.722. 23 Except$100,000 at 99.709. 24 Except $2,000,000 at 99.820, $20,000 at 99.817, and $2,370,000 at 99.810. 25 Except$300,000 at 97.641, $50,000 at 97.575, $1,880,000 at 97.539, and $2,460,000 at 97.535. 26 Except $500,000 at 97.711. o 00 CO Ox 00 W te) •rj O O te) ZP te) o te) KJ o te) te) te) > ZP d Kj EXHIBITS 209 United States Savings Bonds Regulations E X H I B I T 7.—Third a m e n d m e n t , July 1, 1957, to Department Circular No. 677i Second Revision, amending various provisions affecting the interest r a t e , investment yield, and t h e payroll savings plan of United States savings bonds TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, J u l y 1, 1957. D e p a r t m e n t Circular N o . 677, Second Revision, as amended, is hereby further aniended in view of t h e provisions of D e p a r t m e n t Circular N o . 653, F o u r t h Revision, concerning United States savings bonds. Series E, and other requirements. P a r a g r a p h 6 (g) is amended t o read as follows: "(gj T h e approximate investment yield, compounded semiannually if held to m a t u r i t y , of t h e currently offered bond is 3.25 percent per a n n u m . This bond m a t u r e s 8 years a n d 11 m o n t h s from t h e issue date. All bonds m a y be redeemed a t t h e owner's option a t a n y time after 2 m o n t h s from t h e issue date a t redemption values fixed b y t h e United States Treasury D e p a r t m e n t in its Circular N o . 653, F o u r t h Revision, d a t e d April 22, 1957.'' . P a r a g r a p h 6 (hj is hereby deleted. P a r a g r a p h 17 is amended t o read as follows: "17. I n case of d e a t h of a n employee, t h e payroll allotment authorization will be automatically canceled a n d t h e Government will refund a n y a m o u n t due t h e employee in accordance with t h e provisions of General Regulations N o . 104, Second Revision, dated March 5, 1957." P a r a g r a p h 29 is amended t o read as follows: "29. T h e bond procured for t h e Chief Disbursing Officer and each regional disbursing officer under D e p a r t m e n t Circular N o . 969, d a t e d November I, 1955 (31 C F R 226) which covers t h e faithful performance of t h e duties of his office shall also cover t h e faithful performance of his duties as a bond issuing officer. E a c h officer shall be responsible for maintaining a d e q u a t e records and safeguards of his unissued stock; of seeing t h a t bonds are issued in t h e proper form and in t h e proper a m o u n t s a n d are delivered t o t h e registered owners; a n d t h a t all bond stocks shipped t o him a r e properly accounted for t o t h e Federal Reserve Bank of which he is an.issuing a g e n t . " P a r a g r a p h 31 is hereby deleted. Detailed information concerning United States savings bonds. Series H , which are also available t h r o u g h t h e voluntary payroll savings plan for those agencies served b y t h e Washington Regional Office of t h e Division of Disbursement, is contained in T r e a s u r y D e p a r t m e n t Circular N o . 905, Revised, dated April 22, 1957. W. RANDOLPH BURGESS, Acting Secretary of the Treasury, E X H I B I T 8.—First a m e n d m e n t , D e c e m b e r 2 3 , 1957, to D e p a r t m e n t Circular N o , 905, Revised, enlarging t h e group of investors permitted to buy Series H savings bonds TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, December 23, 1957, Section 332.8 of D e p a r t m e n t Circular N o . 905, Revised, d a t e d April 22; 1957 (31 C F R 332j, is hereby amended effective J a n u a r y 1, 1958, t o read as follows. Sec. 332.8. Registration.—(aj General.—Generally, only residents (whether n a t u r a l persons or othersj of t h e United States, its Territories and possessions, t h e Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, t h e Canal Zone, a n d citizens of t h e United States temporarily residing abroad are eligible to invest in bonds of Series H . Full information regarding eligibility t o invest in savings bonds, a n d authorized forms of registration and rights thereunder, will.be found in t h e regulations currently in force governing United States savings bonds.^ (bj Individuals.—The bonds m a y be registered in t h e names of n a t u r a l persons (whether adults or minorsj in their own right, in single ownership, coownership, and beneficiary form. ' Department Cii'cular No. 530, 210 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASTJRY (cj Others (only in single ownership formj.—The bonds m a y also be registered a s follows: (lj Fiduciaries.—In t h e names of a n y persons or organizations, public or private, as fiduciaries, except where t h e fiduciary would hold t h e bonds merely or principally as security for t h e performance of a.duty, obligation, or service. (2j Private and public organizations.—In t h e n a m e s of private or public organizations (including private corporations, partnerships a n d unincorporated .associations, a n d States, counties, public corporations, a n d other public bodiesj in their own right, b u t not in t h e names of commercial banks, which are defined for this purpose as those accepting d e m a n d deposits. JULIAN B . BAIRD, Acting Secretary of the Treasury. E X H I B I T 9.—First a m e n d m e n t , D e c e m b e r 23, 1957, to D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 653, Fourth Revision, enlarging the group of investors permitted to buy Series E savings bonds TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, December 23, 1957. Sections 316.7, 316.8, and 316.11 (a) of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 653, F o u r t h Revision, dated April 22,1957 (31 C F R 316), are hereby amended effective J a n u a r y 1, 1958, to read as follows: SEC. 316.7. Registration.—(a) General.—Generally, only residents (whether n a t u r a l persons or others) of t h e United States, its Territories and possessions, t h e Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, t h e Canal Zone, and citizens of t h e United States temporarily residing abroad are eligible to invest in bonds of Series E . Full information regarding eligibility to invest in savings bonds, and authorized forms of registration and rights thereunder, will be found in t h e regulations currently in force governing United States savings bonds.i (b) Individuals.—The bonds m a y be registered in t h e names of n a t u r a l persons (whether adults or minors) in their own right, in single ownership, coownership, and beneficiary form. (c) Others (only in single ownership form).—The bonds m a y also be registered as follows: (1) Fiduciaries.—In t h e n a m e of any persons or organizations, public or private, as fiduciaries, except where t h e fiduciary would hold t h e bonds merely or principally as security for t h e performance of a duty, obligation, or service. (2) Private and public organizations.—In t h e names of private or public organizations (including private corporations, partnerships, and unincorporated associations, and .States, counties, public corporations, and other public bodies) in their own right, b u t not in t h e names of commercial banks, which are defined for this purpose as those accepting demand deposits. S E C . 316.8. Limitation on holdings.—The limits on t h e a m o u n t of bonds of Series E originally issued during any one calendar year t h a t m a y be held by any one person a t any one.time (which will be computed in accordance with t h e regulations currently in force governing United States savings bonds) are: (a) General limitation.—$10,000 (maturity Value) for t h e calendar year 1958 and each calendar year thereafter. (b) Special limitation applicable to employees^ savings plans.—$2,000 (maturity value) multiplied by t h e highest n u m b e r of participants in an employees' savings plan (as defined below) ^ at any time during t h e year in which t h e bonds are issued. 1. Definition of plan and conditions of eligibility.—(i) T h e employees' savings plan m u s t h a v e been established by t h e employer for t h e exclusive and irrevocable benefit of his employees or their beneficiaries, afford employees t h e means ofmaking regular savings from their wages through payroll deductions, and provide for employer contributions to be added to such savings. (ii) T h e entire assets thereof m u s t be credited to t h e individual accounts of participating employees and assets credited to t h e account of an employee m a y be distributed only to him or his beneficiary, except as otherwise provided herein. (iii) Bonds of Series E m a y be purchased only with assets credited t o t h e accounts of participating employees a n d only if t h e a m o u n t t a k e n from any 1 Department Ckcular No. 530. ^ ^ ,^ ^ ^ .. ^ ^^ ,,..... 2 No other investor is authorized to hold bonds.m excess of the general limitation. EXHIBITS. 211 account at any time for that purpose is equal to the purchase price of a bond or bonds in an authorized denomination or denominations, and shares therein are credited to the accounts of the individuals from which the purchase price thereof was derived, in amounts corresponding with their shares. For example, if $37.50 credited to the account of John Jones is commingled with funds credited to the accounts of other employees to make a total of $7,500, with which a bond of Series E in the denomination of $10,000 (maturity value) is purchased in June 1958 and registered in the name and title of the trustee or trustees, the plan must provide, in effect, that John Jones' account shall be credited to show that he is the owner of a bond of Series E in the denomination of $50 (maturity value) bearing issue date of June 1, 1958. (iv) Each participating employee shall have an irrevocable right at any time to demand and receive from the trustee or trustees all assets credited to his account or the value thereof, if he so prefers, without regard to any condition other than the loss or suspension of the privilege of participating further in the plan, except that a plan will not be deemed to be inconsistent herewith, if it limits or modifies the exercise of any such right by providing that the employer's contribution does not vest absolutely until the employee shall have made contributions under the plan in each of not more than sixty calendar months succeeding the month for which the employer's contribution is made. (v) Upon the death of an employee, his beneficiary shall have the absolute and unconditional right to demand and receive from the trustee or trustees all the assets credited to the account of the employee, or the value thereof, if he so prefers. (vi) When settlement is made with an employee or his beneficiary with respect to any bond of Series E registered in the name and title of the trustee or trustees in-whichtheemployee has a share (see (ii). hereof), the bondimust.be submitted for redemption or reissue to the extent, of such share; if an employee or his beneficiary is to receive distribution in kind, bonds bearing the same issue dates as those credited to the employee's account will be reissued in the name of the distributee to the extent to which he is entitled, in authorized denominations, in any authorized form of registration, upon the request and certification of the trustee or trustees in accordance with the provisions of the regulations governing United States savings bonds. 2. Definitions of terms used in this section and related provisions.—(i) The term "savings plan" includes any regulations issued under the plan with regard to bonds of Series E; a copy of the plan and any such regulations, together with a copy of the trust agreement certified by a trustee to be true copies, must be submitted to the Federal Reserve Bank of the district in order to establish, the eligibility of the trustee or trustees to purchase bonds in excess of the general limitation in any calendar year. (ii) The term "assets" means all funds, including the employees' contributions and the employer's contributions and assets purchased therewith as well as accretions thereto, such as dividends on stock, the increment in value on bonds and all other income; but, notwithstanding any other provision of this section, the right to demand and receive "all assets" credited to the account of an employee shall, not be construed to require the distribution of assets in kind when it would not be possible or practicable to make such distribution; for example, bonds of Series E may not be reissued in unauthorized denominations, and fractional shares of stock are not readily distributable in kind. (iii) The term "beneficiary" means the person or persons, if any, designated by the employee in accordance with the terms of the plan to receive the benefits of the trust upon his death or the estate of the employee, and the term "distributee" means the employee or his beneficiary. SEC. 316.11. Purchase of bonds.—(a) Over-the-counter for cash: (1) For natural persons in their own right only (i) at such incorporated banks, trust companies, and other agencies as have been duly qualified as issuing.agents; and (ii) at selected United States post offices; and (2) for all eligible purchasers, at Federal Reserve Banks and branches and at the Treasury Department, Washington 25, D. C. JULIAN B . BAIRD, Acting Secretary of the Treasury. 212 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY E X H I B I T 10.—Eighth Revision, D e c e m b e r 26, 1957, of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 530, regulations governing United States savings bonds TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, December 26, 1957. To Owners of United States Savings Bonds and Others Concerned: P u r s u a n t to Section 22 of the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended (49 S t a t . 21, as amended; 31 U. S. C. 757c), D e p a r t m e n t Circular N o . 530, Seventh Revision, dated M a y 21, 1952 (31 C F R 315), as amended, is hereby further amended and issued as an eighth revision, effective J a n u a r y 1, 1958, to read as follows: SUBPART A — G E N E R A L INFORMATION S E C . 315.-0. Applicability of regulations.—These regulations apply generally t o all United States savings bonds of all series of whatever designation, bearing a n y issue dates whatever, except as otherwise specifically provided herein. SEC. 315.1. Official agencies.—The Bureau of t h e Public Debt of t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t is charged with m a t t e r s relating to United States savings bonds. Transactions in savings bonds after original issue are largely conducted b y t h e Bureau of the Public Debt, Division of Loans and Currency Branch, 536 South Clark Street, Chicago 5, Illinois, t h e Federal Reserve Banks and branches, as fiscal agents of the United States, and the Treasurer of t h e United States, Treasury D e p a r t m e n t , Washington 25, D . C. Correspondence in regard to any such transactions and requests for appropriate forms should be addressed to t h e office in Chicago or t h e Federal Reserve B a n k of the district in which t h e correspondent is located or t h e Treasurer of t h e United States, except t h a t any specific instructions given elsewhere in this circular for addressing correspondence regarding particular transactions should be observed. Notices or documents not filed in accordance with instructions in these regulations will n o t be recognized. T h e Federal Reserve B a n k s a n d branches are located in t h e cities indicated b y their names, asfollows: Federal Reserve B a n k of Boston. Federal Reserve.Bank of New York: Buffalo Branch. Federal Reserve B a n k of Philadelphia. Federal Reserve Bank of Cleveland: . . Cincinnati Branch, '• P i t t s b u r g h Branch. Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond: Baltimore Branch, Charlotte Branch. Federal Reserve Bank of A t l a n t a : Birmingham Branch, Jacksonville Branch, Nashville Branch, New Orleans Branch. Federal Reserve Bank of Chicago: Detroit Branch. Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis: Little Rock Branch, Louisville Branch, Memphis Branch. . Federal Reserve B a n k of Minneapolis: .* . Helena (Montana) Branch. Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas C i t y : Denver Branch, Oklahoma City Branch, Omaha Branch. Federal Reser.ve B a n k of Dallas: .' El Paso Branch, H o u s t o n Branch, San Antonio B r a n c h . s EXHIBITS 213 Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco: Los Angeles Branch, Portland (Oregon) Branch, Salt Lake City Branch, Seattle Branch. SEC. 315.2. Definition of terms as used in these regulations. (a) " A n i n c o m p e t e n t " means any person who is under legal disability for reasons other t h a n minoritj^ and includes individuals whose estates have been placed under the, administration of a guardian or custodian because of t h e age, physical disability, or wishes of t h e individual. (5) " A u t h o r i z e d issuing a g e n t " means an incorporated bank, t r u s t company, savings bank, Federal savings and loan association, instrumentality of the Uniteci States, or other organization qualified as an issuing agent under t h e provisions of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No! 657, as amended and supplemented (31 C F R 317). (c) "Authorized paying a g e n t " means an incorporated bank, t r u s t company, savings bank, savings and loan association, or other organization qualified as a paying agent under t h e provisions of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 750, Revised (31 C F R 321). (d) " C o u r t " ineans a court which has jurisdiction over t h e parties and subject matter. (e) "Federal Reserve B a n k " includes any branch of a Federal Reserve B a n k . (/) " E x t e n d e d m a t u r i t y d a t e " means t h e date of. expiration of any period (hereinafter called "optional extension period") after t h e " m a t u r i t y d a t e " during which t h e owner has t h e option of retaining bonds a t further interest under t h e provisions of t h e D e p a r t m e n t circular offering t h e m for sale.i ig) " E x t e n d e d m a t u r i t y v a l u e " means t h e value of a bond at t h e end of t h e optional extension period. (h) " M a t u r i t y d a t e " means t h e date on which t h e bond will m a t u r e by t h e t e r m s of t h e D e p a r t m e n t circular offering it for sale without regard to any optional extension period. (i) " M a t u r i t y v a l u e " and "face v a l u e " of a bond are used interchangeably unless otherwise indicated. They refer t o t h e value of a bond on its m a t u r i t y date. (jy " P a y m e n t " a n d " r e d e m p t i o n " are used interchangeably, unless otherwise indicated. They refer to t h e p a y m e n t of a savings bond in accordance with t h e governing regulations. (k) "Personal t r u s t e s t a t e " means a t r u s t estate established by natural persons in their own right, for t h e benefit of themselves or other such natural persons, in whole or in part, and common t r u s t funds comprised in whole or in p a r t of such t r u s t estates. {I) "Presented a n d surrendered" and "presentation a n d surrender" mean t h e actual receipt of t h e bond, with an appropriate request for t h e particular t r a n s action, by t h e Bureau of t h e Public D e b t , Chicago office or Washington office, t h e Treasurer of t h e United States, or a Federal Reserve Bank, or, if t h e transaction is one which an authorized paying agent m a y handle, receipt by such authorized paying agent. (m) "Representative of a minor's estate," "representative of an incompetent's e s t a t e , " or "representative of an absentee's e s t a t e " m e a n a guardian, conservator, or similar representative of t h e estate of a minor, incompetent, or absentee a p pointed by court or otherwise legally qualified, regardless of t h e title by which designated. These terms do not refer to a voluntary or natural guardian, such as a parent, including a p a r e n t to whom custody of a child has been awarded through divorce proceedings or a parent by adoption, or to t h e executor or administrator of t h e estate of a decedent. (n) "Reissue" means t h e cancellation and retirement of a bond and t h e issue of a new bond or bonds of the same series, a m o u n t (maturity value) (or t h e remainder thereof in case of partial redemption), a n d issue d a t e . SUBPART B—REGISTRATION SEC. 315.5. General.—United States savings bonds are issued only in registered form. T h e form of registration used m u s t express t h e actual ownership of a n d interest in t h e bond and, except as otherwise specifically provided in Subpart E and Sec. 315.48 of S u b p a r t I of these regulations, will be considered as conclu1 Bonds of Series E bearing issue dates prior to May 1,1957, have an optional extension period. Bonds of other series do not have this feature. 214 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY sive of such ownership and interest. No designation of an attorney, agent, or other representative to request or receive p a y m e n t on behalf of t h e owner or a coowner, nor any restriction on t h e right of. t h e owner or a coowner to receive p a y m e n t of t h e bond or interest, other t h a n as provided in these regulations, m a y be made in t h e registration or otherwise. I n order to avoid difficulty when redemption or reissue is requested or in collecting interest on current income bonds, and for t h e protection of t h e persons intended to be designated as owners, coowners, or beneficiaries, it is very i m p o r t a n t t h a t requests for registration be clear, accurate, a n d complete, t h a t t h e registration conform with one of t h e forms set forth in this subpart, and t h a t t h e registration of all securities owned by t h e same person, organization or fiduciary estate be uniform. The post office address should include, where appropriate, t h e street a n d number, postal zone, a n d route or any other local feature. The owner, coowner or beneficiary should be design a t e d by t h e name by which he is ordinarily known or t h e one under which he does business, including preferably at least one full given name. The n a m e should be preceded by any applicable title, such as " D r . " or " R e v . , " or followed by " M . D . , " " D . D . " or other similar designation. The designation " S r . " or " J r . " should be used whenever applicable. The n a m e of a woman should be preceded by " M i s s " or " M r s . " unless some other applicable title or designation is used. A married woman's own given name, not t h a t of her husband, should be used, for example, " M r s . M a r y A. Jones," not " M r s . F r a n k B . Jones." S E C . 315,6. Restrictions. (a) Restrictions as to residence.—The registration of savings bonds is restricted on original issue, b u t not on authorized reissue, to include only persons (whether n a t u r a l persons or others) who are: (i) Residents of t h e United States, its Territories and possessions, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and t h e Canal Zone; (2) Citizens of t h e United States temporarily residing abroad; (3) Civilian employees of t h e United States or members of its Armed Forces, regardless of their residence or citizenship; and (4) Other n a t u r a l persons as coowners with, or beneficiaries on death of, n a t u r a l persons of any of t h e above classes; except t h a t t h e registration of savings bonds, whether on original issue or reissue, is n o t authorized in any form to include t h e n a m e of any alien who is a resident of any area with respect to which t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t restricts or regulates t h e delivery of checks d r a w n against funds of t h e United States or any agency pr instrumentality thereof.^ (6) Restrictions as to minority or incompetency.— (1) Bonds purchased by another person with funds belonging to a minor should be registered in t h e n a m e of t h e minor without a coowner or beneficiary. If there- is a representative of t h e minor's estate, t h e bonds should be registered in t h e n a m e of t h e minor, or in t h e n a m e or names of all such representatives, followed in either case by an, appropriate reference to t h e guardianship. Bonds purchased by a representative of two or more minors, even though appointed in a single proceeding, should be registered in a form to show each guardianship estate separately. If a bond is purchased as a gift to a minor and either t h e donor or t h e minor resides in a State which by s t a t u t e authorizes t h e donor to designate an adult as custodian for t h e minor, t h e bond m a y be registered as provided in t h e s t a t u t e if such registration includes a clear reference to t h e s t a t u t e . If no reference to t h e s t a t u t e is included in t h e registration set forth in t h e s t a t u t e a parenthetical reference identifying t h e s t a t u t e m u s t be added. A father or mother, as such, or as n a t u r a l guardian, is not considered a representative for purposes of registration. See examples of forms of registration under Sec. 315.7 (b). A minor, whether or n o t under legal guardianship, m a y be n a m e d as owner, coowner, or beneficiary on bonds purchased by another person with t h a t person's own funds. A minor m a y n a m e a coowner or beneficiary on bonds purchased by him from his wages, earnings, or other funds belonging t o him and under his controL (2) Bonds should not be registered in t h e n a m e of an incompetent, unless there is a legal representative of his estate, except under t h e provisions of Sec. 315.53. If there is a legal representative t h e provisions of t h e preceding paragraph, as to registration in t h e n a m e of t h e legal representative or in t h e n a m e of t h e incompetent followed by reference to t h e guardianship, apply. 2 See Department Circular No. 665, as amended (31 CFR 211). EXHIBITS 215 SEC. 315.7. Authorized forms of registration.—Subject to any limitations or restrictions contained in these regulations on the right of any person to be named as owner, coowner, or beneficiary, savings bonds may be registered in the following forms: ^ (a) Natural persons.—In the names of natural persons in their own right. (1) Single owner.—Example: "John A. Jones." (2) Coownership form—two persons (only).—In the alternative as coowners. Example: "John A. Jones or Mrs. Ella S. Jones." No other form of registration establishing coownership is authorized. (3) Beneficiary form—two persons (only).—Examples: "John A. Jones payable on death to Mrs. Ella S. Jones." "John A. Jones P. O. D. Mrs. Ella S. Jones." "Payable on death" may be abbreviated to "P. 0. D." as indicated in the last example. The first named person is hereinafter referred to as the owner and the second named person as the beneficiary. (b) Fiduciaries and private or public organizations.—Only the single owner form of registration is available for bonds owned by other than natural persons, and the registration used must conform to the forms authorized in this subsection. (1) Fiduciaries.—In the name of any persons or organizations, public or private, as fiduciaries, except where the fiduciary would hold the bonds merely or principally as security for the performance of a duty, obligation, or service. (i) Guardians, custodians, conservators, etc.—In the name and title of the legally appointed, designated or authorized representative or representatives of the estate of a minor, incompetent, aged, absentee, etc., or in the name bf a minor, incompetent, or absentee, followed by an appropriate reference to the guardianship. The registration should show the nature of the incompetency or refer to the statute authorizing the appointment of the representative*. If the statute requires particular wording, as in most gift to minors' statutes, the wording required by the statute should be used. Examples: "William C. Jones, guardian (or conservator, trustee, etc.) of the estate of James F. Brown, a minor (or an incompetent, aged, infirm, or absentee)." "John Smith, a minor (or incompetent, aged, infirm, or absentee), under legal guardianship (or conservatorship or trusteeship, etc.) of Henry C. Smith." "John Smith, under legal guardianship of Henry Smith pursuant to Sec. 670.5, Code of Iowa 1950." "John Smith, a minor (or incompetent) under custodianship by designation of the Veterans Administration." "John Smith, an incompetent for whom Henry C. Smith has been designated trustee by the Department of the Army pursuant to 37 U. S. C. 351-354." "William C. Jones, as custodian for John Smith, a minor, under the California Gifts of Securities to Minors Act." "William C. Jones, as custodian for John Smith, a minor, under the laws of the State of Georgia (Chapter 48-3, Ga. Code Anno.)." (ii) Executors, administrators, etc.— (a) In the name of the representative or representatives of the estate of a decedent appointed by a court or otherwise legally qualified. The registration should include the name of the decedent and the name or names of all representatives. The name and title of the representative must be followed by adequate identifying reference to the estate. Example: "John Smith, executor of the will (or administrator of the estate) of Henry J. Smith, deceased." 3 Any question as to the correct form of registration should be promptly submitted to the Federal Reserve Bank of the district or the Bureau of the Public Debt, Division of Loans and Currency, 636 South Clark Street, Chicago 5, Illmois. 216 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY (b) I n t h e n a m e of an executor authorized' to administer a t r u s t under t h e terms of a will although he is not named as trustee. Example: " J o h n Smith, executor of t h e will of H e n r y J. Smith, deceased, in t r u s t for Mrs. Jane Smith, with remainder over." (iii) Trustees.—In t h e n a m e and title (or title alone where hereinafter provided) of the trustee or trustees of a single duly constituted t r u s t estate (which will be considered as an entity), substantially in accordance with the examples set forth in this paragraph. Unless otherwise indicated, an adequate identifying reference should be m a d e t o t h e t r u s t instrument or other authority creating t h e trust. A common t r u s t fund established and maintained according to law by a financial institution duly authorized to act as a.fiduciary will be considered as a single duly constituted t r u s t estate within t h e meaning of these regulations. (a) Will, deed of trust, agreement, or similar instrument.—Examples : " J o h n Smith and the First National Bank, trustees under t h e will of H e n r y J. Smith, deceased." " T h e Second National Bank, trustee under an agreement with George E. White, dated February 1, 1935." If t h e authority creating the t r u s t designates by title only an officer of a board or an organization as trustee, only t h e title of t h e officer should be used in the registration. Example: "Chairman, Board of Trustees, First Church of Christ, Scientist, of Chicago, Illinois, in t r u s t under t h e will of H e n r y J. Smith, deceased." If t h e trustees are too numerous to be designated in t h e inscription by names and title, t h e names or some of t h e names may be omitted. Examples: " J o h n Smith, H e n r y Jones, et al., trustees under t h e will of H e n r y J. Smith, deceased." "Trustees under the will of H e n r y J. Smith, deceased." (b) Pension, retirement or similar fund, or employees' savings plan.—In t h e n a m e and title (or title alone) of the trustee or trustees of a pension, retirement, or similar fund, or an employees' savings plan. If t h e instrument creating the t r u s t provides t h a t t h e trustees shall serve for a limited term, the names of the trustees m a y be omitted. Examples: "First National Bank and T r u s t Company, trustee of t h e Employees' Savings Plan of Jones Company, Inc., U/A dated , 195 " "Trustees of t h e Employees' Savings Plan of Johnson Company, Inc., U/A dated , 195 " " F i r s t National Bank, trustee of pension fund of Industrial Manufacturing Company, under agreement with said company dated March 31, 1949." " T r u s t e e s of Retirement F u n d of Industrial Manufacturing Company, under resolution adopted by its board of directors on March 31, 1949." (c) F u n d s of a lodge, church, society, or. similar organization.—If the funds of a lodge, church, society, or similar organization, whether incorporated or not, are held in t r u s t by a trustee or trustees or a board of trustees, only the title should be used in the registration. Examples: " T r u s t e e s of t h e First Baptist Church, Akron, Ohio, acting as a Board under Section 15 of its bj^-laws." " T r u s t e e s of Jamestown Lodge No. 1,000 Benevolent and P r o tective Order of Elks, under Section 10 of its by-laws.'^ " B o a r d of Trustees of the Lotus Club, Washington, Indiana, under Article X of its constitution." (d) Public officers, corporations, or bodies.—If a public officer, public corporation, or public body acts as trustee under express a u t h o r i t y of law, only the title should be used in the registration. EXHIBITS 217 • Examples: "Sinking F u n d Commission, Trustee of State Highway Certificates of Indebtedness Sinking Fund, under Section 5972. Code of South Carolina." "WardenJ Illinois State Penitentiary, Joliet Branch, Trustee of I n m a t e s ' Amusement Fund, under Chapter 23, Sections 34a and 34b, Illinois Revised Statutes, 1941." (e) School, class, or activity fund.—If the principal or other officer of a public, private, or parochial school acts as trustee for the benefit of the s t u d e n t body or a class, group, or acti vity. thereof, only t h e title should be used in the registration, and if the a m o u n t purchased for any one fund does not exceed $500 (maturity value), no reference need be made to a t r u s t instrument. Examples: "Principal, Western High School, in t r u s t for Class of 1955 Library F u n d . " " D i r e c t o r of Athletics,, Western High School, in t r u s t for Stud e n t Activities Association under resolution adopted M a y 12, 1955." . (iv) Life tenants.—In the name of a life tenant, followed b y adequate identifying reference t o t h e instrument creating the life tenancy. Example: " M r s . Jarie Smith, life t e n a n t under the will of H e n r y J. Smith, deceased." (v) Investrnent agents.—In the name of a bank, t r u s t . company, or . other financial institution, or individual, holding funds of a religious, educational, charitable, or nonprofit organization, whether or not incorporated, as agent under an agreement with the organization for the sole purpose of investing and reinvesting t h e funds and paying the income to t h e organization. T h e name and designation of the agent should be followed by an adequate identifying reference to t h e agreem e n t . . Examples: . . . " B l a c k County National Bank, fiscal agent, under agreement with t h e Evangelical L u t h e r a n Church of The Holy Trinity, dated December 28, 1949:" " F i r s t National Bank and T r u s t Company, investment agent, under agreement with Central City Post No. 1000, D e p a r t m e n t of Illinois, American Legion." (2) Private organizations (corporations, associations, and partnerships, etc.).—In the name of any private organization, b u t not in the names of commercial banks, which are defined for this purpose as those accepting demand deposits. T h e full legal name of the organization, without mention of any officer or member by name or title, should be used, as follows: (i) A corporation.—A business, fraternal, religious, or other private corporation, followed preferably by the words " a corporation" (unless the fact of incorporation is shown in the n a m e ) . Examples: " S m i t h Manufacturing Company, a corporation." " J o n e s and Brown, I n c . " (ii) A n unincorporated association.—An unincorporated lodge, society, or similar self-governing association, followed preferably by the words " a n unincorporated association." T h e t e r m " a n unincorporated association" should not be used to describe a t r u s t fund, a board of trustees, a partnership, or a business conducted under a trade name or as a sole proprietorship. If the association is chartered by or affiliated with a p a r e n t organization, the name or designation of the subordinate or local organization should be given first, followed by the name of the p a r e n t organization. The name of the parent or national organization m a y be placed in parentheses and, if it is well known, m a y be abbreviated. Examples: / ' T h e Lotus Club, an unincorporated association." "Local 447, Brotherhood of Railroad Trainmen, an unincorporated association." " E u r e k a Lodge N o . 317 (A. F . & A. M.), an unincorporated association." 218 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY (iii) A partnership.—A partnership (which will be considered as an e n t i t y ) , followed by the words " a p a r t n e r s h i p . " E x a m p l e s : " S m i t h and Brown, a p a r t n e r s h i p . " " A c m e Novelty Company, a p a r t n e r s h i p . " (iv) Institutions (churches, hospitals, homes, schools, etc.).—In the name of a church, hospital, home, school, or similar institution conducted b y a private organization or b y private trustees, regardless of t h e manner in which it is organized or governed or title to its property is held. Examples: " S h r i n e r s ' Hospital for Crippled Children, St. Louis, Missouri." " S t . M a r y ' s R o m a n Catholic Church, Albany, New York." " R o d e p h Shalom Sunday School, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania." (3) Governmental units, agencies, and officers.—In t h e full legal name or title of t h e owner or official custodian of public funds, other ;than.trust,funds,, as follows: (i) Any governmental unit, as a State, county, city, town, village, or school district. Examples: ' ' S t a t e of M a i n e . " " T o w n of Rye, New York (Street I m p r o v e m e n t F u n d ) . " (ii) Any board, commission, Government owned corporation, or other public body duly constituted by law. E x a m p l e : " M a r y l a n d State Highway Commission." (iii) Any public officer designated b y title only. E x a m p l e : "Treasurer, City of Chicago." (c) Treasurer of the United States as coowner or beneficiary.—Those who desire to do so m a y make gifts to t h e United States b y designating t h e Treasurer of the United States as coowner or beneficiary. Bonds so registered m a y n o t be reissued to change t h e designation. Examples: ' ' J o h n A. Jones or t h e Treasurer of t h e United States of America." " J o h n A. Jones P . O. D . t h e Treasurer of t h e United States of America." S E C . 315.8. Unauthorized registration.—A savings bond inscribed in a form not substantially in agreement with one of those authorized by this s u b p a r t will n o t be considered as validly issued, except t h a t once it is established t h a t t h e bond can.be reissued in a form of registration which is valid under these regulations it will be considered as having been validly issued from the d a t e of original issue. S U B P A R T C — L I M I T A T I O N S ON H O L D I N G S S E C . 315.10. Amount which may be held.—The a m o u n t s of savings bonds of each series, issued in any one calendar year, which m a y be held by any one person a t any one time, computed in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 315.11, are limited as follows: ^ (a) Series E.—$5,000 (maturity value) for each calendar year up to and including the calendar year 1947; $10,000 (maturity value) for t h e calendar years 1948 t o 1951, inclusive; $20,000 (maturity value) for the calendar years 1952 to 1956, inclusive; $10,000 (maturity value) for t h e calendar year 1957 ^ and each calendar year thereafter; except t h a t trustees of an employees' savings plan (as defined in Sec. 316.8 of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 653, F o u r t h Revision, as amended) m a y purchase $2,000 (maturity value) multiplied by the highest n u m ber of employees participating in the plan a t any time during t h e calendar year in which the bonds are issued. (b) Series H.—$20,000 (maturity value) for each calendar year up to and including the calendar year 1956, and $10,000 (maturity value) for t h e calendar year 1957 ^ and each calendar year thereafter. S E C . 315.11. Computation of amount. (a) Definition of "person''.—The t e r m " p e r s o n " for purposes of this section shall mean a n y legal e n t i t y and shall include b u t not be limited t o n a t u r a l persons, corporations (public or private), partnerships, unincorporated associations, a n d t r u s t estates. T h e holdings of each person individually and his holdings in a n y * Bonds of Series F, G, J, and K, which are no longer available for purchase, are subject to the limitations on holdings and rules for computation of holdings set forth in Sees. 315.8 and 315.9 of Department Circular No. 530, Seventh Revision. 6 Effective May 1,1957. Accordingly investors who purchased $20,000 (maturity value) of bonds of Series E bearing issue dates of January 1 through April 1 were not entitled to purchase additional bonds of that series during 1957. The same limitation applies to bonds of Series H bearing those issue dates. Investors who purchased less than $10,000 (maturity value) of bonds of either series prior to May 1 were entitled only to pmxhase enough of either series to bring their total for that series for 1957 to $10,000 (maturity value). EXHIBITS 219 fiduciary capacity authorized b y these regulations, such as, for example, his holdings as a guardian of t h e estate of a minor, as a life t e n a n t , or as trustee u n der a will or deed of trust, shall be computed separately. A pension or retirem e n t fund or an investment, insurance, a n n u i t y or similar fund or t r u s t will be regarded as an e n t i t y regardless of t h e n u m b e r of beneficiaries or the m a n n e r in which their respective interests are established or determined. Segregation of individual shares as a m a t t e r of bookkeeping or as a result of individual agreements with beneficiaries or t h e express designation of individual shares as s e p a r a t e trusts will not operate to constitute separate t r u s t s under these regulations. (b) Bonds that must be included in computation.—Except as provided in p a r a graph (cj of this section, there m u s t be t a k e n into account in computing t h e holdings of each person: (1) All bonds registered in t h e name of t h a t person alone; (2) All bonds registered in t h e n a m e of t h e representative of t h e estate of t h a t person; (3) All bonds originally registered in t h e name of t h a t person as coowner or reissued a t t h e request of t h e original owner t o a d d t h e name of t h a t person as coowner or t o designate him as coowner instead of as beneficiary. However, t h e a m o u n t of bonds of Series E a n d H held in coownership form m a y be applied t o t h e holdings of either of t h e coowners b u t will not be applied to both, or t h e a m o u n t m a y be apportioned between t h e m . (c) Bonds that may be excluded from computation.—There need not be taken into account: (1) Bonds on which t h a t person is n a m e d beneficiary; (2) Bonds in which his interest is only t h a t of a beneficiary under a t r u s t ; (3) Bonds to which he has become entitled under Sec. 315.66 as surviving beneficiary upon t h e death of t h e registered owner, as an heir or legatee of t h e deceased owner, or b y virtue of t h e termination of a t r u s t or the happening of a n y other event; (4) Bonds of Series E purchased with t h e proceeds of m a t u r e d bonds of Series A, Series C-1938, a n d Series D , where such m a t u r e d bonds were presented for t h a t purpose; (5) Bonds of Series E bearing issue dates from M a y 1, 1941, to December 1, 1945, inclusive, held b y individuals in their own right which are not more t h a n $5,000 ( m a t u r i t y value) in excess of t h e prescribed limit; (6) Bonds of Series E or Series H reissued under Sec. 315.60 (b) (lj ;(7) Bonds of Series E or Series H reissued in t h e n a m e of a trustee of a personal t r u s t .estate which did not represent excess holdings prior to such reissue. SEC. 315.12. Disposition of excess.—If any person at any time acquires savings bonds issued during a n y one calendar year in excess of t h e prescribed a m o u n t , t h e excess m u s t be immediately surrendered for refund of t h e purchase price, less (in t h e case of current income bonds) a n y interest which m a y have been paid thereon, or for such other a d j u s t m e n t as m a y be possible. For good cause found t h e Secretary of t h e Treasury m a y permit excess holdings to s t a n d in any p a r ticular case or class of cases. S U B P A R T D — L I M I T A T I O N ON T R A N S F E R OR P L E D G E S E C . 315.15. Limitation on transfer or pledge.—Savings bonds are not t r a n s ferable and are payable only to t h e owners n a m e d thereon, .except as.specifically provided in these regulations, and then only in the m a n n e r and. to the,, extent so provided. A savings "bond m a y not be hypothecated, pledged as collateral, or used as security for t h e performance of an obligation, except as provided in Sec. 315.16. S E C . 315.16. Pledge under Department Circulars Nos. 154 ctnd 657.—A savings bond m a y be pledged b y t h e registered owner in lieu of surety under the provisions of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 154, Revised, if t h e bond approving officer is t h e Secretary of the Treasury, in which case an irrevocable power of attorney shall' be executed authorizing t h e Secretary of t h e Treasury t o request p a y m e n t . A savings bond m a y also be deposited as security with a Federal Reserve Bank under t h e provisions of D e p a r t m e n t Circular N o . 657, as amended and supplemented, by an institution certified under t h a t circular as an issuing agent for savings bonds of Series E . 220 1 9 5 8 REPORT OF T H E SECRETARY OF T H E S U B P A R T E — L I M I T A T I O N ON J U D I C I A L P R O C E E D I N G S — N o PERMITTED TREASURY S T O P P A G E OR C A V E A T S S E C . 315.20. General.—No judicial determination will be recognized which would give effect t o an a t t e m p t e d voluntary transfer inter vivos of a bond or would defeat or impair t h e rights of survivorship conferred b y these regulations upon a surviving coowner or beneficiary, and all other provisions of this s u b p a r t are subject t o this restriction. Otherwise, a claim against an owner or coowner of a savings bond and conflicting claims as to ownership of, or interest in, such b o n d as between coowners or between t h e registered owner a n d beneficiary will be recognized, when established b y valid judicialproceedings, upon presentation a n d surrender of t h e bond, b u t only as specifically provided in this subpart. Neither t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t nor any agency for t h e issue, reissue, or redemption of savings bonds will accept notices of adverse claims or of pending judicial proceedings or u n d e r t a k e t o protect t h e interests of litigants who do not have possession of a bond. SEC. 315.21. Payment to judgment creditors. (a) Creditors.—Payment (but not reissue) of a savings bond registered in single ownership, coownership, or beneficiary form will be made to t h e purchaser a t a sale under a levy or to t h e officer authorized to levy upon t h e property of t h e registered owner or coowner under appropriate process to satisfy a money judgment. P a y m e n t will be m a d e to such purchaser or officer only to t h e extent necessary to satisfy t h e . j u d g m e n t and will be limited to t h e redemption value current sixty days after t h e termination of judicial proceedings or current a t t h e t i m e t h e bond is received, whichever is smaller. P a y m e n t of a bond registered in coownership form p u r s u a n t to a j u d g m e n t or levy against only one of t h e coowners will be limited to t h e extent of t h a t coowner's interest in t h e bond; this interest m a y be established b y an agreement between t h e coowners or b y a judgment, decree, or order of court entered in a proceeding t o which b o t h coowners are parties. (6) Trustees in bankruptcy and receivers.—Payment of a savings bond will be m a d e to a trustee in b a n k r u p t c y , a receiver of an insolvent's estate, a receiver in equity, or a similar officer of t h e court, under t h e applicable provisions of subsection (a) of this section, except t h a t p a y m e n t will be made a t t h e redemption value current on- t h e date of payment.. S E C . 315.22. Payment or reissue pursuant to judgment. (a) Divorce.—A decree of divorce ratifying or confirming a property settlement agreement or otherwise settling t h e respective interests of t h e parties in a bond will not be regarded as a proceeding giving effect, to an atterhpted voluntary transfer under t h e provisions of Sec. 315.20. Consequently, reissue of a savings b o n d m a y be made to eliminate t h e n a m e of one spouse as owner, coowner, or beneficiary, or to substitute t h e n a m e of one spouse for t h a t of t h e other as owner; coowner, or beneficiary p u r s u a n t to such a decree. T h e evidence required under Sec. 315.23 must, be s u b m i t t e d in any case. I n cases where t h e decree does not set o u t t h e terms^ of t h e property settlement agreement a certified copy of t h e agreement m u s t also be submitted, and in any case where t h e bonds are presently registered with a person other t h a n one of t h e spouses as owner or coowner there m u s t be submitted either a request for t h e reissue by such person or a judgment, decree, or order of court entered in a proceeding to which he was a p a r t y , determining t h e extent of t h e interest in t h e bond held by t h e spouse whose n a m e is to b e eliminated, and reissue will be permitted only to t h e extent of t h e spouse's interest in t h e bonds. P a y m e n t r a t h e r t h a n reissue will be m a d e if requested. (Jb) Gifts causa mortis.—A bond belonging solely to one person will be paid or reissued on t h e request of t h e person found b y a court to be entitled thereto b y reason of a gift causa mortis by t h e sole owner. ic) Date for determining rights.^-For t h e purpose of determining whether or not reissue shall be m a d e under this section p u r s u a n t to judicial proceedings, t h e rights of all parties involved shall be those existing under these regulations at t h e time of t h e e n t r y of t h e final judgment, decree, or order. SEC. 315.23. Evidence necessary.—To establish t h e validity of judicial proceedings, there m u s t be s u b m i t t e d certified copies of a final judgment, decree, or order qf court, and of any necessary supplementary proceedings. If t h e judgment, decree, or order of court was rendered more t h a n six months prior to t h e presentation of t h e bond, there m u s t also be submitted a certificate from t h e clerk of t h e court, under its seal, dated within six months of t h e presentation of t h e bond showing t h a t t h e judgment, decree, or order of court is in full force. A request for p a y - EXHIBITS 221 m e n t by a trustee in b a n k r u p t c y m u s t be supported b y duly certified evidence of his a p p o i n t m e n t and qualification. A request for p a y m e n t by a receiver of an insolvent's estate m u s t be supported by a copy of t h e order appointing him, certified by t h e clerk of t h e court, under its seal, as being in full force on a date not more t h a n six m o n t h s prior to t h e date of t h e presentation of the bond. A request for p a y m e n t b y a receiver in equity or a similar officer of t h e court, other t h a n a receiver of an insolvent's estate, m u s t be supported by a copy of an order authorizing him to present t h e bond for redemption, certified by t h e clerk of t h e court, under its seal, as being in full force on a date not more t h a n six m o n t h s prior to t h e presentation of t h e bond. S U B P A R T F — L O S T , S T O L E N , M U T I L A T E D , D E F A C E D , OR D E S T R O Y E D B O N D S SEC. 315.25. Relief in case of loss, etc., after receipt by owner.—Relief either b y t h e issue of a substitute bond marked " D U P L I C A T E " or by p a y m e n t m a y be given in case of t h e loss, theft, destruction, mutilation, or defacement of a savings b o n d after receipt b y t h e owner or his representative. Such relief will be granted only after compliance with t h e provisions of this section; and in cases of loss or theft relief will not ordinarily be granted until six m o n t h s after t h e date of receipt b y t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t of t h e notice of such loss or theft.*^ (a) Procedure to be followed in applying for relief.—In any such case immediate notice of t h e facts, together with a complete description of t h e bond (including series, year of issue, serial number, and n a m e and address of t h e registered owner or coowners) should be given to t h e Bureau of t h e Public Debt, Division of Loans a n d Currency Branch, 536 South Clark Street, Chicago 5, Illinois. T h a t office will furnish t h e proper application form and instructions. I n case of mutilation or defacement, all available fragments of t h e bond in any form whatsoever should be submitted. I n all cases t h e bond must be identified and t h e applicant m u s t s u b m i t satisfactory evidence of loss, theft, or destruction, or a satisfactory explanation of t h e mutilation or defacement. T h e application m u s t be made by t h e person or persons (including both coowners, if living) authorized under these regulations to request p a y m e n t of t h e bond, except as follows: (1) If t h e bond is in beneficiary form and t h e owner and beneficiary are both living, b o t h will ordinarily be required to join in t h e application. (2) If a minor who is not of sufficient competency and understanding to request p a y m e n t on his own behalf is named as owner, coowner, or beneficiary, both parents will ordinarily be required to join in t h e application. (b) Bond of indemnity.—The Treasury D e p a r t m e n t reserves t h e right to require a bond of indemnity, in accordance with Sec. 8 (b), 50 Stat. 481, as amended (31 U. S. C. 738a). (c) Recovery of savings bonds reported lost, stolen, or destroyed.—If a bond reported lost, stolen, or destroyed is recovered before relief is granted, t h e Bureau of t h e Public Debt, Division of Loans and Currency Branch, should be notified p r o m p t l y . If t h e original bond is recovered after relief is granted, it should be surrendered p r o m p t l y to t h e same office for cancellation. SEC. 315.26. Relief in case of nonreceipt.—If'a savings bond, on original issue or on reissue, is not received from t h e issuing agent or agency by t h e registered owner or other person to whom delivery of t h e bond was directed, t h e issuing a g e n t or agency should be notified as p r o m p t l y as possible and given all t h e information available about t h e transaction. If necessary, appropriate instructions and forms will t h e n be furnished. SUBPART G — I N T E R E S T SEC. 315.30. General.—United States savings bonds are issued in one- of two forms: (1) appreciation bonds, issued on a discount basis and redeemable before m a t u r i t y at increasing fixed redemption values; and (2) current income bonds, issued at par, bearing interest payable semiannually ^ and redeemable before mat u r i t y a t par or a t fixed redemption values less t h a n par.^ T h e D e p a r t m e n t 6 See Sec. 8, 50 Stat. 481, as amended (31 U. S. C. 738a). 7 The final interest on bonds of Series H bearing issue dates prior to March 1, 1957, covers a period of two months, from 9H years to maturity. Since May 1, 1957, the only current income savings bonds on sale are those of Series H. 8 The sale of savings bonds of SeriesJ and K was terminated at the close of business April 30,1967. The termsiof these bonds are set forth in Departraent Circular No. 906, as amended. 222 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY circular offering bonds of a particular series to t h e public designates t h e form in which bonds of t h a t series will be available. SEC. 315.31. Appreciation bonds.—Savings bonds issued on a discount basis increase in redemption value a t t h e end of t h e first year or half-year from issue d a t e and at t h e end of each successive half-year period thereafter until their mat u r i t y date, when t h e full face a m o u n t becomes payable.^ Bonds of Series E bearing issue dates from M a y 1, 1941, through April 1, 1957, will continue to increase in redemption value after m a t u r i t y for ten years in accordance with t h e provisions of Sec. 316.13 of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 653, F o u r t h Revision, dated April 22, 1957.10 T h e increment in value on appreciation bonds is payable only on redemption of t h e bonds, whether before, at, or after m a t u r i t y . SEC. 315.32. Current income bonds.. (a) Interest rates.—The interest payable on a current income bond is fixed b y t h e provisions of t h e D e p a r t m e n t circular offering t h e particular series of bonds to t h e public.11 (b) Method of interest payments.—-Interest due on a current income bond is payable semiannually beginning six m o n t h s from its issue date a n d will be paid on each interest p a y m e n t date by check drawn to t h e order of t h e person or persons in whose names t h e bond is inscribed, in t h e same form as their nam.es appear in t h e inscription on t h e bond, and mailed t o t h e address of record (that given for t h e delivery of interest checks in t h e application for purchase or t h e request for reissue or, if no instruction is given as to t h e delivery of inter,est checks, t h e address given for t h e owner or t h e first-named coowner), except t h a t : (1) I n t h e case of a bond registered in t h e form "A payable on d e a t h to B " t h e check will be drawn t o t h e order of " A " alone until t h e Bureau of t h e Public D e b t , Division of Loans a n d Currency Branch, receives notice of A's d e a t h (see p a r a g r a p h (c) of this section), from which time t h e p a y m e n t of interest will be suspended until t h e bond is presented for p a y m e n t or reissue. Interest so withheld will be paid t o t h e ^person found to be entitled t o t h e bond. (2) U p o n receipt of notice of t h e dealih of t h e coowner t o whom interest is being mailed (see p a r a g r a p h (c) of this section), p a y m e n t of interest will be suspended until a request for change of address is received from t h e other coowner, if living, or, if not, until satisfactory evidence is submitted as t o who is authorized to endorse and collect such checks on behalf of t h e estate of t h e last deceased coowner in accordance with t h e provisions of S u b p a r t N . (3) U p o n receipt of notice of t h e d e a t h of t h e owner of a bond (see paragraph (c) of this section), p a y m e n t of interest on t h e bond will be suspended ' until satisfactory evidence is submitted as to who is authorized to endorse a n d collect such checks on behalf of t h e estate of t h e decedent, in accordance with t h e provisions of Subpart N. (4) Whenever practicable t h e accounts for all current income bonds of t h e same series, with t h e same inscription, on which interest is payable on t h e same dates, will be consolidated and a single check will be issued on each interest p a y m e n t date for interest on all such bonds. T h e check inscription m a y vary from t h e inscriptions on t h e bonds in cases of very long inscriptions or where there is lack of uniformity in t h e inscriptions on t h e bonds. (5) T h e interest due at m a t u r i t y will be paid with t h e principal a n d in t h e same manner. However, if t h e registered owner of a bond in beneficiary form dies on or after t h e due date without having presented and surrendered t h e bond for p a y m e n t or authorized reissue, and is survived by t h e beneficiary, t h e interest m a y be paid to t h e legal representative of or the person entitled to t h e registered owner's estate. To obtain such p a y m e n t , t h e bonds with a request therefor by t h e beneficiary should be submitted together with t h e evidence required in Sec. 315.70. (c) Notice affecting interest check delivery.—A notice which would affect t h e 8 Series E bonds issued on or before April 30, 1952, and Series F bonds, the sale of which was terminated April 30,1952, increase in redemption value at the end of the first year from issue date; Series E bonds issued on and after May 1, 1952, and Series J bonds, the sale of which began on May 1, 1952, increase in redemption value at the end of the first half year from issue date. The last mcrease in redemption value of Series E bonds issued on or after May 1, 1962, prior to the start of the ten-year extension period, covers a period of two months, from 9H years through 9 years and 8 months. The last increase in redemption value of ' Series E bonds issued on or after February 1, 1967, covers a period of five months, from 8H years through 8 years and 11 months. 10 See the tables of redemption values at the end of that circular for extended maturity values, and footnote 5 with respect to the extended maturity of bonds bearing issue dates of February l through April 1,1957. " See Department Circular No. 664, Third Revision, as amended, for Series G, Department Circular No. 905, Revised, for Series H, and Department Circular No. 906, as amended, for Series K. EXHIBITS 223 delivery of a n interest check will be acted upon as rapidly as possible, b u t if t h e notice is not received a t least one m o n t h before an interest p a y m e n t date, no assurance can be given t h a t action can be t a k e n in time to change or suspend t h e mailing of t h e interest due on t h a t date. Such notice should be sent to t h e Bureau of t h e Public Debt, Division of Loans a n d Currency Branch, 536 South Clark Street, Chicago 5, Illinois. (d) Change of address.—An owner or coowner of current income bonds should p r o m p t l y notify t h e Bureau of t h e Public Debt, Division of Loans and Currency Branch (see p a r a g r a p h (c) of this section), of any change in t h e address for delivery of interest checks. A notice of change of address given on behalf of a minor or incompetent owner or coowner under t h e conditions a n d in accordance with t h e provisions of Subpart J relating t o t h e p a y m e n t of bonds belonging t o a minor or incompetent ordinarily will be accepted. E a c h bond should be described in t h e notice by issue date, serial number, series (including year of issue), and inscription appearing on t h e face of t h e bond. T h e bonds should not be submitted. (e) Representative appointed for the estate of a minor, incompetent, absentee, etc.— Interest on current income bonds will be paid to t h e representative appointed for t h e estate of t h e owner of such bonds who is a minor, incompetent, absentee, etc., in accordance with t h e provisions of Sec. 315.50 relating to p a y m e n t of t h e bonds. However, if t h e registration of t h e bonds does not include reference t o t h e owner's status, t h e y should be submitted (to t h e Bureau of t h e Public D e b t , Division of Loans a n d Currency Branch, 536 South Clark Street, Chicago 5, Illinois, or a Federal Reserve Bank) for appropriate reissue so t h a t interest checks m a y be properly drawn and delivered. They m u s t be accompanied by t h e proof of a p p o i n t m e n t required by Sec. 315.50. (/) No representative of an adult incompetent's estate appointed.—If an adult owner of a current income bond is mentally incompetent to endorse and collect t h e interest checks, if no other person is legally qualified to do so, a n d if t h e interest is needed for t h e support of t h e incompetent or t h a t of a person legally dependent upon him for support, t h e relative responsible for his support, or some other person, m a y be recognized by t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t as voluntary guardian for t h e purpose of receiving, endorsing, a n d .collecting t h e checks. F o r m P D 2513 should be used in making application for this purpose. (g) Reissue during interest period.—Physical reissue of a bond will be made as soon as practicable without regard to interest p a y m e n t dates. If a current income bond is reissued between interest p a y m e n t dates, interest for t h e entire period will ordinarily be paid on t h e next interest p a y m e n t date^ by check drawn to t h e order of t h e person in whose name t h e bond is reissued. However, if reissue is made during t h e m o n t h preceding a n interest p a y m e n t date, t h e interest due on t h e first day of t h e next m o n t h m a y in some cases be paid to t h e former owner or t h e representative of his estate. (h) Termination of interest.—Interest on current income bonds will cease at m a t u r i t y or in case of redemption prior to m a t u r i t y on the last day of the interest period immediately preceding t h e date of redemption, except t h a t , if the date of redemption falls on an interest p a y m e n t date, interest will cease on t h a t date. For example, if a bond on which interest is payable on J a n u a r y 1 and July 1 is redeemed on September 1, interest will cease on the preceding July I, and no adj u s t m e n t of interest will be ihade for the period from July 1 to September 1. T h e same, rules, shall apply, in case .of ..partial r e d e n ^ p t i o n w i t h respect to the a m o u n t redeemed. (i) Endorsement of checks.—Interest checks may be collected upon t h e endorsem e n t of t h e payee or his authorized representative in accordance with the regulations governing the endorsement and p a y m e n t of Government warrants and checks, which are contained in D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 21 (31 C F R 360). A form for the appointment of an attorney in fact for this purpose may be obtained from t h e Treasurer of the United States or from any Federal Reserve Bank. If no legal representative has been or will be appointed, the Bureau of the Public Debt, Division of Loans and Currency Branch, 536 South Clark Street, Chicago 5, Illinois, or a Federal Reserve Bank will furnish instructions upon request. (j) Nonreceipt or loss of check.—If an interest check is not received or is lost after receipt, t h e Regional Disbursing Office, U. S. Treasury D e p a r t m e n t , 536 South Clark Street, Chicago 5, Illinois, should be notified of the facts and should be given information concerning t h e amount, number, and inscription of the bonds, as well as a description of the check, if possible. 479641—59 16 224 1 9 5 8 REPORT OF T H E SECRETARY OF T H E TREASURY S U B P A R T H — G E N E R A L P R O V I S I O N S FOR P A Y M E N T AND R E D E M P T I O N SEC. 315.35. Provisions applicable both before and after maturity.—Payment of a savings bond will be made to the person or persons entitled thereto under the provisions of these regulations upon presentation of the bond with an appropriate request for p a y m e n t . Such p a y m e n t will be made without regard to any notice of adverse claims to a savings bond and no stoppage or caveat against p a y m e n t in accordance with the registration of the bond will be entered. SEC. 315.36. Before maturity. (a) At option of owner.—Pursuant to its terms, a savings bond may not be called for redemption by the Secretary of t h e Treasury prior to maturity, b u t may be redeemed in whole or in p a r t at t h e option of the owner prior to maturity, under t h e terms and conditions set forth in the offering circular for each series and in accordance with the provisions of these regulations, following presentation and surrender as provided in this subpart. (b) Series E.—A bond of Series E will be redeemed at any time after two months from t h e issue date without advance notice, at the appropriate redemption value as shown in the revision of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 653 current at the time of redemption. (c)- Series F , G, H, J , and K.—A bond of Series F, G, H, J, or K will be redeemed after six months from t h e issue date, on one m o n t h ' s notice in writing to the Bureau of the Public Debt, Division of Loans and Currency Branch, a Federal Reserve Bank, or the Treasurer of the United States, Washington 25, D . C. Such notice may be given separately or by presenting and surrendering the bond with a duly executed request for p a y m e n t . P a y m e n t will be made as of the first day of the first m o n t h following by at least one full calendar m o n t h the date of receipt of notice. For example, if t h e notice is received on J u n e 1, pa5^ment will be made as of July, b u t if notice is received between J u n e 2 and July 1, inclusive, p a y m e n t ordinarily will be made as of August 1. If notice is given separately, the bond must be presented and surrendered with a duly executed request for p a y m e n t to the same agency to which the notice is given, not less t h a n twenty days before the date on which p a y m e n t is to be made. For example, if the notice is received on J u n e 15, the bond should be received not later t h a n July 12. (See Sec. 315.32 (h) for provisions as to interest in case current income bonds are redeemed prior to maturity.) A bond of Series H will be redeemed at par. A bond of Series F, G, J, or K will be redeemed a t t h e appropriate redemption value as shown in the table printed on the bond, except as provided in subparagraph (d) of this section. (d) Series G and K: Redemption at par.— (1) A bond of Series G or K issued in exchange for m a t u r e d bonds of Series E under the provisions of D e p a r t m e n t Circulars Nos. 885 and 906 is payable at par. (2) A bond of Series G or K registered in t h e name of a natural person or persons in their own right will be paid at par upon the request of the person entitled to t h e bond upon t h e death of the owner or either coowner. (3) A bond of Series G or K held b}^ a trustee, life tenant, or other fiduciary (exclusive of trustees of a pension, retirement, investment, insurance, annuity or similar fund, or employees' savings plan) will be paid at par upon appropriate request upon the termination, in whole or in part, of a trust, life tenancy, or other fiduciary estate by reason of the death of a natural person, but in the case cf partial termination, redemption at p a r will be made to the extent of not more t h a n the pro r a t a portion of the t r u s t or fiduciary estate so terminated. Bonds of Series G or K held by a financial institution in its name as trustee of its common trust fund will be paid at par upon the request of the fiduciary upon t h e termination, in whole or in part, of a participating t r u s t by reason of the d e a t h of a natural person, to the extent of not more t h a n t h e pro r a t a portion of t h e common t r u s t fund so terminated. The option to receive paym-ent at par under subparagraph (d) (2) and (3) of this section m a y be exercised by a signed request for paj^ment or hy express written notice, in either case specifying t h a t redemption at par is desired. P a y ment m a y be postponed to t h e second interest p a y m e n t date following t h e date of death, if so requested; otherwise, p a y m e n t will be made in regular course. A death certificate or other acceptable evidence of death must be submitted. I n no case of redemption at par before m a t u r i t y under subparagraph (d) (2) and (3) will interest be payable beyond t h e second interest p a y m e n t date following t h e date of death. (e) Withdrawal of request for redemption.—An owner who has presented and EXHIBITS 225 surrendered a savings bond to t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t or a Federal Reserve Bank, or an authorized paying agent, for p a y m e n t , with an appropriate request for p a y m e n t , m a y withdraw such request if notice of intent to withdraw is given t o and received by t h e same agency to which t h e bond was presented prior to t h e issuance of a check in p a y m e n t by t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t or a Federal Reserve Bank, or p a y m e n t bj^ t h e authorized paying agent. Such request m a y be withdrawn under t h e same conditions by t h e executor or administrator of t h e estate of a deceased owner, or by t h e person or persons entitled to t h e bond under Sec. 315.70 (d), or by t h e representative of t h e estate of a person under legal disability, unless t h e presentation and surrender of t h e bond has cut off tlie rights of survivorship under t h e provisions of Subpart L or Subpart M. S E C . 315.37. At or after maturity.—Pursuant to its terms, a savings bond of any series will be paid at or after m a t u r i t y at its full face or m a t u r i t y value, and in no greater a m o u n t , except t h a t bonds of Series E retained under an extended m a t u r i t y option under t h e t e r m s of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 653 (31 C F R 316), current a t t h e time of redemption, will be paid at t h e redemption values provided in t h a t circular.12 S E C . 315.38. Requests for payment. (a) Form and execution of requests.—A request for p a y m e n t of a savings bond m u s t be executed on t h e form appearing on t h e back of t h e bond unless (1) t h e bond is accepted by an authorized paying agent for p a y m e n t or for presentation t o a Federal Reserve Bank for p a y m e n t without t h e owner's signature to t h e request for p a y m e n t under t h e provisions of D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 888, Revised, or (2) authority is given for t h e execution of a separate or detached request. (b) Date of request.—Ordinarily, requests executed more t h a n six m o n t h s before t h e d a t e of receipt of a bond for p a y m e n t will not be accepted; nor will a bond, ordinarily, be accepted for redemption more t h a n three calendar m o n t h s prior t o t h e d a t e redemption is requested under these regulations. (c) Identification and signature of owner.—Unless t h e bond is presented under t h e provisions of p a r a g r a p h (a) of this section or section 315,42 (b), an owner in whose n a m e t h e bond is inscribed or other person entitled to p a y m e n t under t h e provisions of these regulations m u s t appear before one of t h e officers authorized t o certify requests for p a y m e n t (see Sec. 315.39), establish his identity, and in t h e presence of such officer sign t h e request for p a y m e n t in ink, adding in t h e space provided t h e address to which t h e check issued in p a y m e n t is to be mailed. A signature m a d e by m a r k (X) m u s t be witnessed by a t least one disinterested person in addition to t h e certifying officer and m u s t be attested by endorsement in t h e blank space, substantially as follows: "Witness to t h e above signature by m a r k , " followed by t h e signature and address of t h e witness. If t h e n a m e of t h e owner or other person entitled t o p a y m e n t as it appears in t h e registration or in evidence on file in t h e Bureau of t h e Public D e b t , Division of Loans and Currency Branch, has been changed by .marriage or in any other legal manner, t h e sign a t u r e to t h e request for p a y m e n t should show both names and t h e manner in which t h e change was made, for example, "Miss M a r y T. Jones, now by marriage Mrs. M a r y T. Jones Smith (Mrs. M a r y T. J. Smith, or Mrs. M a r y T. S m i t h ) , " or " J o h n Doe, now by court order Richard R o e . " I n case of a change of name other t h a n by marriage, t h e request should be supported by satisfactory evidence of t h e change. N o request signed in, behalf of t h e owner or person entitled to p a y m e n t by an agent or a person acting under a power of attorney will be recognized by t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t , except as provided in Sec. 315.16, wheri pledged in lieu of surety under D e p a r t m e n t Circular N o . 154, Revised. (d) Certification of request.—After t h e request for p a y m e n t has been signed by t h e owner, t h e certifying officer should complete and sign t h e certificate following t h e request for p a y m e n t , and t h e bond should t h e n be presented a n d surrendered as provided in Sec. 315.42 (a). S E C . 315.39. Certifying officers.—The following officers are authorized to certify requests for p a y m e n t : (a) At United States post offices.—Any postmaster, acting postmaster, or inspector in charge or other post office official or clerk designated for t h a t purpose. One or more of these officials will be found a t every United States post office, classified.branch, or station. A post office official or clerk other than-a postmaster, acting postmaster, or inspector in charge should certify in t h e name of t h e post12 No'extended--maturity option for-Series E bonds with-issue dates after April 1, 1957,-is provided in Departmerit Circular No. 653, Fourth Revision, dated April 22, 1967. 226 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY m a s t e r or acting postmaster, followed by his own signature and official title, for example, " J o h n Doe, postmaster, by Richard Roe, postal, cashier." Signatures of these officers should be authenticated by a legible imprint of t h e post office dating s t a m p . (6) At banks, trust companies, and branches.—Any officer of any b a n k or t r u s t company incorporated in t h e United States (including for this purpose its Territories and possessions and t h e Commonwealth of Puerto Rico) or domestic or foreign branch of such bank or t r u s t company; any officer of a Federal Reserve Bank, Federal land bank, and Federal home loan b a n k ; any employee of any such bank or t r u s t company expressly authorized by t h e corporation for t h a t purpose, who should sign over t h e title "Designated E m p l o y e e " ; and Federal Reserve agents and assistant Federal Reserve agents located a t t h e several Federal Reserve Banks. Certifications by any of these officers or designated employees should be authenticated by either a legible impression of t h e corporate seal of t h e bank or t r u s t company or, in t h e case of banks or t r u s t companies a n d their branches which are authorized issuing agents for bonds of Series E, by a legible imprint of t h e issuing agent's dating s t a m p . (c) Issuing agents not banks or trust companies.—Any officer of a corporation not a b a n k or t r u s t company and of any other organization which is an authorized issuing agent for bonds of Series E. All certifications by such officers m u s t be authenticated by a legible imprint of t h e issuing agent's dating s t a m p . (d) Commissioned and luarrant officers of armed forces.—(Commissioned and w a r r a n t officers of any of t h e armed forces of t h e United States, b u t only for members and t h e families of members of their respective services and civilian employees a t posts or bases or stations. Such certifying officer should indicate his r a n k and state t h a t t h e person signing t h e request is one of t h e class whose request he is authorized to certify. (e) United States officials.—Judges, clerks, and d e p u t y clerks of United States courts, including United States courts for t h e Territories, possessions, t h e Commonwealth of P u e r t o Rico, and t h e Canal Zone; United States Commissioners; United States Attorneys; United States collectors of customs and their deputies; regional commissioners and district directors of Internal Revenue and Internal Revenue agents; t h e officer in charge of any home, hospital, or other facility of t h e Veterans Administration, b u t only for patients and employees of such facilities; certain officers of Federal penal institutions designated for t h a t purpose by t h e Secretary of t h e Treasury; certain officers of t h e United States Public Health Service Hospitals a t Lexington, Kentucky, and F o r t Worth, Texas, and of Uriited States Marine Hospitals a t F o r t Stanton, New Mexico, and Carville, Louisiana, designated for t h a t purpose by t h e Secretary of t h e Treasury (in each case, however, only for inmates or employees of t h e institution involved). (/) Officers authorized in particular localities.—Certain designated officers in t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t ; t h e Governors and Treasurers of Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and Alaska; t h e Governor and Commissioner of Finance of t h e Virgin Islands; t h e Governor and Director of Finance of G u a m ; t h e Governor and Director of Administrative Services of American Samoa; t h e Governor, paymaster, or acting p a y m a s t e r a n d collector, or acting collector of t h e P a n a m a Canal; a n d postmasters and acting postmasters in t h e Bureau of Posts of t h e Canal Zone. (g) I n foreign countries.—In a foreign country requests for p a y m e n t m a y be signed in t h e presence of and be certified by any United States diploniatic or consular representative, or t h e manager or other officer of a foreign branch of a b a n k or t r u s t company incorporated in t h e United States whose signature is attested by an impression of t h e corporate seal or is certified to t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t . If such an officer is not available, requests for p a y m e n t m a y be signed in t h e presence of and be certified by a n o t a r y or other officer authorized to administer oaths, b u t his official character and jurisdiction should be certified by a United States diplomatic or consular officer under seal of his office. (h) Special provisions.—In t h e event none of t h e officers authorized t o certify requests for p a y m e n t of savings bonds is readily accessible, t h e Commissioner of t h e Public Debt, t h e D e p u t y Commissioner of t h e Public D e b t in Charge of t h e Chicago Office, or any Federal Reserve Bank is authorized to make special provision for any particular case. SEC. 315.40. General instructions to certifying officers.—Certifying officers should require positive identification of t h e person signing a request for p a y m e n t and will be held fully responsible therefor. I n all cases a certifymg officer must affix to the certification his official signature, title, seal, or dating s t a m p , address (if not shown in seal or s t a m p ) , a n d the date of execution. Officers of Veterans Adminis- EXHIBITS 227 t r a t i o n Facilities, Public H e a l t h Service hospitals. Marine hospitals, and Federal penal institutions should use t h e seal of the particular institution or service, where such seal is available. If a certifying officer other t h a n a post office official, officer of a b a n k or t r u s t company, or officer of an issuing agent does n o t possess an official seal, a s t a t e m e n t t o t h a t effect should be added to t h e certification b y such officer. S E C . 315.41. Interested person not to certify.—No person authorized to certify requests for p a y m e n t m a y certify a request for p a y m e n t of a bond of which he is t h e owner or in which he has an interest, either in his own right or in any representative capacity. S E C . 315.42. Presentation and surrender. (a) All series.—Except for cases coming within t h e provisions of p a r a g r a p h (bj of this section, after t h e request for p a y m e n t has been duly signed b y t h e owner a n d certified as above provided t h e b o n d should be presented a n d surrendered t o (Ij a Federal Reserve Bank, (2j t h e Bureau of t h e Public Debt, Division of Loans a n d Currency Branch, or (3j t h e Treasurer of t h e United'States,'Wa'shiiigton 25, D . C. Usually p a y m e n t will be expedited b y surrender t o a Federal Reserve Bank. I n all cases presentation will be at t h e expense a n d risk of t h e owner. P a y m e n t will be m a d e b y check drawn t o t h e order of t h e registered owner or other person entitled and mailed t o t h e address given in t h e request for p a y m e n t , or if no address is given in t h e request for p a y m e n t , to t h e address given in the instructions accompanying t h e bond. (bj Optional procedure limited to bonds of Series A to E, inclusive, in names of individual owners or coowners only.—Notwithstanding t h e provisions of any D e p a r t m e n t circulars offering t h e bonds for sale a n d notwithstanding a n y instructions which m a y be.printed on t h e bond, a n a t u r a l person:,whose name is j n s c r i b e d o n t h e face of a bond of Series A, B, C, D , or E, either as owner or coowner in his own right, m a y present such bond for redemption (unless marked " D U P L I C A T E " j t o an authorized p a y i n g agent. T h e owner or coowner m u s t establish his identity t o t h e satisfaction of t h e paying agent, sign t h e request for p a y m e n t , and add his home or business address. E v e n t h o u g h t h e request for p a y m e n t has been signed, or signed and certified, before t h e presentation of the bond, t h e representative of t h e p a y i n g agent m u s t be satisfied t h a t t h e person presenting t h e bond for p a y m e n t is t h e owner or coowner and m a y require him t o sign t h e request for p a y m e n t again. If t h e bond is in order for p a y m e n t , t h e paying agent will make immediate p a y m e n t at t h e appropriate redemption value w i t h o u t charge to t h e owner. This procedure is not applicable to partial redemption cases, or t o deceased owner cases, or other cases in which documentary evidence is required. SEC. 315.43. P a r t i a l redemption.—A savings bond of any series in a denomination greater t h a n $25 (maturity valuej m a y be redeemed in p a r t a t current redemption value b u t only in a m o u n t s corresponding to authorized denominations, upon presentation and surrender of t h e bond in accordance with p a r a g r a p h (aj of Sec. 315.42. In any case in which partial redemption is authorized, before the request for p a y m e n t is signed t h e phrase " t o t h e extent of $ (maturity value) and reissue of t h e r e m a i n d e r " should be added to the first sentence of t h e request. Upon partial redemption of t h e savings bond, the remainder will be reissued as of t h e original issue date, as provided in Subpart I. For p a y m e n t of interest on current income bonds in case of partial redemption, see S u b p a r t G. S E C . 315.44. Nonreceipt or loss of checks issued in payment.—In case a check in p a y m e n t of a bond surrendered for redemption is not received within a reasonable time or in case such check is lost after receipt, notice should be given to t h e same agency to which t h e bond was surrendered for p a y m e n t , accompanied b y a description of t h e bond b y series, denomination, serial number, and registration. T h e notice should state whether or not t h e check was received and should give t h e d a t e - u p o n ' w h i c h t h e bond was surrendered for p a y m e n t . Instructions, will be given as t o t h e necessary procedure to obtain a duplicate. P a y m e n t of u n m a t u r e d bonds of Series F , G, H , J, a n d K is ordinarily m a d e on t h e first day of t h e first m o n t h following b y a t least one full calendar m o n t h t h e date of receipt of notice of intention to redeem, a n d a check should not be expected until t h a t time. S U B P A R T I — R E I S S U E AND D E N O M I N A T I O N A L E X C H A N G E S E C . 315.45. General.—Reissue of a savings bond m a y be made only under t h e conditions specified in these regulations. Reissue is not authorized solely for t h e purpose of effecting an exchange as between authorized denominations, b u t in case of authorized reissue t h e new bond or bonds m a y be issued in any authorized denomination or denominations. Consistent with other provisions of these regula- 228 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY tions, a savings bond m a y be reissued in a form of registration authorized b y the regulations in effect on t h e original issue date or on t h e date of reissue. Reissue will not b e made if t h e request therefor is received less t h a n oiie full calendar m o n t h before t h e m a t u r i t y date, except for bonds of Series E for which an optional extension period has been provided in D e p a r t m e n t Circular No. 653, F o u r t h Revision.13 I n t h e case of such bonds reissue will not be m a d e if t h e request is received less t h a n one full m o n t h before t h e extended m a t u r i t y d a t e . However, a request for reissue of a bond received prior to its m a t u r i t y , or extended m a t u r i t y date (in case of a bond for which an extended m a t u r i t y period has been providedj, will be effective t o establish ownership as though t h e requested reissue h a d been made. A request for reissue of a bond received on or after its m a t u r i t y , or extended m a t u r i t y date (in case of a bond for which an extended m a t u r i t y period has been provided), will n o t be effective to n a m e a coowner or beneficiary or t o promote a beneficiary to a coowner, b u t requests for reissue in t h e names of persons who have become entitled by operation of law will be recognized as establishing t h e right of those persons to receive p a y m e n t . Reissues under t h e provisions of this s u b p a r t m a y be made only a t (1) a Federal Reserve Bank, (2) t h e Bureau of t h e Public Debt, Division of Loans and Currency Branch, or (3) t h e Office of t h e Treasurer of t h e United States, Washington 25, D . C. S E C . 315.46. Requests for reissue.-—A request for reissue should be made on t h e prescribed form by the.person authorized under these regulations to m a k e such request. Appropriate forms m a y be obtained from any Federal Reserve Bank, t h e Office of t h e Treasurer of t h e United States, or from t h e Bureau of t h e Public Debt, Division of Loans and Currency Branch. S E C . 315.47. Effective date.—In any case of authorized reissue, t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t wili t r e a t t h e receipt by a Federal Reserve B a n k or t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t of a bond and an appropriate request for reissue thereof as determining t h e date upon which t h e reissue is effective. S E C . 315.48. Correction of errors.—Reissue of a bond m a y be made to correct an error in t h e original issue, upon appropriate request supported by satisfactory proof of t h e error. S E C . 315.49. Change of name.—An owner, coowner, or beneficiary whose n a m e is changed by marriage, divorce, annulment, order of court, or in any other legal m a n n e r after t h e issue of t h e bond m a y submit t h e bond with a request on F o r m P D 1474 for reissue to substitute t h e new n a m e for t h e n a m e inscribed on t h e bond. This action is recommended in case of a change of n a m e of t h e owner or coowner of a current income bond. T h e signature to t h e request for reissue should show both names and t h e m a n n e r in which t h e change was made, as, for example, " J o h n Doe, now by order of court Richard R o e " or "Miss M a r y T . Jones, now by marriage Mrs. M a r y T . Jones Smith (Mrs. M a r y T. J. Smith or Mrs. M a r y T. S m i t h ) . " If t h e change of n a m e was m a d e other t h a n by marriage, t h e request m u s t be supported by satisfactory proof of t h e change. S U B P A R T J — M I N O R S AND P E R S O N S U N D E R O T H E R L E G A L D I S A B I L I T Y , AND ABSENTEES S E C . 315.50. Payment to representative of an estate.—If the form of registration of a savings bond indicates t h a t t h e owner is a minor, an incompetent, or an absentee and there is a representative of his estate, p a y m e n t will be m a d e t o such representative. T h e request for p a y m e n t appearing on t h e back of t h e bond should be signed by t h e representative as such, for example, " J o h n A. Jones, guardian (committee) of t h e estate of H e n r y W. Smith, a minor (an incompetent, an absentee)." Unless t h e form of registration gives t h e n a m e of t h e representative requesting p a y m e n t , a certificate or a certified copy of t h e letters of a p p o i n t m e n t from t h e court making t h e appointment, under t h e seal of t h e court, or other proof of qualification if not appointed by a court, should be submitted. Except in t h e case of corporate fiduciaries, such evidence should s t a t e t h a t t h e a p p o i n t m e n t is in full force and should be dated not more t h a n one year prior t o presentation of t h e bond for p a y m e n t . Where t h e form of registration does not indicate t h a t there is a representative of t h e estate of a minor owner, a notice t h a t there is such a representative will not be-accepted by t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t for t h e purpose of preventing p a y m e n t to t h e minor or t o a p a r e n t or other person on behalf of t h e minor, as provided in Sees. 315.51 13 Only bonds of Series E with issue dates prior to May 1,1967, have this optional extension period. EXHIBITS 229 a n d 315.52. However, if such representative presents for p a y m e n t a bond registered in t h e n a m e of his ward accompanied by proof of his qualification, p a y m e n t will be m a d e to such representative. (See S u b p a r t N.) SEC. 315.51. Payment to minors.—If t h e owner of a savings bond is a minor and t h e form of registration does not indicate t h a t there is a representative of his estate, p a y m e n t will be m a d e to him upon his request, provided t h a t he is of sufficient competency to sign his n a m e to t h e request for p a y m e n t and to unders t a n d t h e n a t u r e of t h e transaction. I n general, t h e fact t h a t t h e request for p a y m e n t has been signed by a minor and duly certified will be accepted as sufficient proof of competency and understanding. S E C . 315.52. Payment to a parent or other person on behalf of a minor.—If t h e owner of a savings bond is a minor and t h e form of registration does not indicate t h a t there is a representative of his estate, and if such minor owner is not of sufficient competency to sign his n a m e to t h e request for p a y m e n t and to unders t a n d t h e n a t u r e of t h e transaction, p a y m e n t will be m a d e to either parent of t h e minor with whom he resides or, if t h e minor does not reside with either parent, t h e n to t h e person who furnishes his chief support. His p a r e n t or t h e person furnishing his chief support should execute t h e request for p a y m e n t and furnish a certificate, which m a y be typed or written on t h e back of t h e bond, as t o his right t o act for t h e minor. If a p a r e n t signs t h e request, t h e certificate arid signature thereto should be in substantially t h e following form: " I certify t h a t I a m t h e mother (or father) of J o h n C. Jones a n d t h e person with whom he resides. H e is years of age a n d is not of sufficient competency and understanding to m a k e this request. " M r s . M a r y Jones on behalf of J o h n C. Jones." If a person other t h a n a p a r e n t signs t h e request, t h e certificate and signature thereto, including a reference t o t h e person's relationship, if any, to t h e minor, should be in substantially t h e following form: " I certify t h a t J o h n C. Jones does not reside with either p a r e n t and t h a t I furnish his chief support. H e is years of age a n d is not of sufficient competency a n d understanding to m a k e this request. " M r s . Alice Brown, grandmother, on behalf of J o h n C. Jones." T h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t m a y in a n y case require further proof t h a t t h e minor is not of sufficient competency and understanding t o execute t h e request for p a y m e n t and of t h e right of t h e person executing t h e request to act on behalf of t h e minor. SEC. 315.53. Payment or reinvestment upon request of voluntary guardian of incompetent.—If t h e adult owner of a bond is mentally incompetent t o request a n d receive p a y m e n t thereof a n d no other person is legally qualified to do so, t h e relative responsible for his support or some other person m a y submit a n application as voluntary guardian for redemption of t h e bond in t h e following cases: (a) Where t h e proceeds of t h e bond are needed for t h e support of t h e incomp e t e n t or t h a t of a person legally dependent upon him for support, and t h e t o t a l face a m o u n t of United States savings bonds belonging t o t h e incompetent for which redemption is requested in any ninety-day period does not exceed $1,000; (b) Where t h e bond has m a t u r e d a n d it is desired to redeem it and reinvest t h e proceeds in United States savings bonds. T h e entire proceeds m u s t be invested, so far as possible, in bonds of Series E, except t h a t : (1) Any p a r t of t h e proceeds which m a y not be invested therein because of t h e limitation on holdings m a y be invested in Series H bonds so long as t h e limitation on holdings for t h a t series is not exceeded; (2) If t h e m a t u r e d bonds are current income bonds, t h e proceeds m a y be invested in Series H bonds so long as t h e limitation on holdings for t h a t series is not exceeded. T h e new bonds must be registered in t h e same form of registration as t h e m a t u r e d bonds, with t h e words " a n i n c o m p e t e n t " following t h e incompetent's name, unless a n owner, beneficiary, or coowner named in t h e registration of t h e m a t u r e d bond is dead or unless such owner, beneficiary, or coowner disclaims interest in t h e bond a n d consents to t h e elimination of his name. If t h e m a t u r i t y value of t h e m a t u r e d bond does not correspond t o t h e purchase price of a n authorized denomination of savings bonds of any series, or a multiple thereof, t h e odd a m o u n t remaining after t h e reinvestment will be paid t o t h e voluntary guardian for t h e use a n d benefit of t h e incompetent. F o r m P D 2513 should be used in applying for p a y m e n t under this section and should be accompanied by t h e evidence required by t h e instructions on t h e form. 230 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY SEC. 315.54. Reissue.—A savings bond of which a minor or other person under legal disability is t h e owner or in which he has a n interest m a y be reissued u p o n a n authorized reissue transaction under t h e following conditions: (1) Reissue will be restricted t o a form of registration which does not adversely affect t h e existing ownership or interest of t h e minor or such other person, except t h a t a minor of sufficient competency t o sign his n a m e t o t h e request a n d t o u n d e r s t a n d t h e n a t u r e of t h e transaction shall have t h e right t o request reissue t o a d d a coowner or beneficiary t o a bond registered in his n a m e alone or t o which he is entitled in his own right. (2) Requests for reissue under this section should be executed by t h e person authorized t o request p a y m e n t under Sees. 315.50, 315.51, 315.52, a n d 315.53 of this subpart, arid in t h e same manner. SUBPART K — A N A T U R A L P E R S O N AS S O L E O W N E R SEC. 315.55. Payment.—A savings bond registered in t h e n a m e of a n a t u r a l person in his own right, w i t h o u t a coowner or beneficiary, will be paid t o him during his lifetime under S u b p a r t H . U p o n t h e d e a t h of t h e owner such bond will be considered as belonging t o his estate a n d will be paid under S u b p a r t N, except as otherwise provided in these regulations. S E C . 315.56. Reissue for certain purposes.—A savings bond registered in t h e n a m e of a n a t u r a l person in his own right m a y be reissued u p o n appropriate request b y h i m (subject to t h e provisions of Sec. 315.54), u p o n presentation and surrender during his lifetime, for t h e following purposes: (a) Addition of a coowner or beneficiary.—To n a m e another n a t u r a l person as coowner or as beneficiary; F o r m P D 1787 should be used. (b) A trustee of a personal trust estate.—To n a m e t h e t r u s t e e of a personal t r u s t estate created b y t h e owner; F o r m P D 1851 should be used. (c) Upon divorce or annulment.—To n a m e as registered owner t h e other p a r t y t o a divorce or annulment, occurring after issue of t h e b o n d ; F o r m P D 1938 should be used. (d) Certain degrees of relationship.—To name as registered owner a person related t o t h e owner in a n y of t h e degrees of relationship set forth in Sec. 315.60 (bj (lj (ij, provided, however, t h a t t h e Treasury reserves the right t o reject a n y application for reissue hereunder as provided in t h a t section; F o r m P D 1938 should be used. S U B P A R T L — T w o N A T U R A L P E R S O N S AS C O O W N E R S SEC. 315.60. During the lives of both coowners.—A savings b o n d registered in coownership form, for example, " J o h n A. Jones or Mrs. M a r y C. J o n e s , " will be paid or reissued during t h e lives of both, as follows: (a) Payment.—The b o n d will be paid t o either upon his separate request, and upon p a y m e n t t o him t h e other shall cease t o have a n y interest in t h e bond. If b o t h request p a y m e n t jointly, p a y m e n t will be m a d e b y check drawn t o their order jointly, for example, " J o h n A. Jones A N D Mrs. M a r y C. J o n e s . " (b) Reissue.—The b o n d m a y be reissued upon t h e request of b o t h if presented a n d surrendered during t h e lifetime of both, as follows: (lj I n t h e n a m e of either, alone or with a new coowner or beneficiary: (ij if t h e coowner whose n a m e is t o remain on t h e bond and t h e coowner whose n a m e is t o be eliminated are related t o each other a s : h u s b a n d a n d wife; p a r e n t and child (including stepchildj; brother and sister (including t h e half blood, stepbrother and stepsister, and brother a n d sister t h r o u g h a d o p t i o n j ; g r a n d p a r e n t and grandchild; great grandp a r e n t and great grandchild; uncle or a u n t and nephew or niece, including as nephew or niece t h e children of a brother or sister of t h e present spouse; granduncle or g r a n d a u n t and grandniece or grandnephew; mother-in-law or father-in-law a n d daughter-in-law or son-in-law; sisterin-law or brother-in-law; provided, however, t h a t t h e Treasury reserves t h e right to reject any application for reissue hereunder, in whole or in p a r t , u p o n a determination t h a t t h e transaction would t e n d t o evade or defeat t h e purposes of t h e limitation on holdings or t h e restriction against t h e transferability of savings b o n d s ; (iij if one of t h e m marries after t h e issue of the b o n d ; and (iii) if t h e y are divorced or legally separated from each other, or their marriage is annulled, after t h e issue of t h e bond. EXHIBITS 231 Form PD 1938 should be used to request reissue in any of the above three classes of cases. The representative of the estate of a minor or incompetent coowner may request reissue under this paragraph on behalf of the ward to eliminate the other, but a request to eliminate the name of the minor or incompetent will not be recognized unless supported by evidence that a court has ordered the representative to request such reissue (see Sec. 315.23). When no representative has been appointed for a minor coowner who is not of sufficient competency to sign his name to the request for reissue and to understand the nature of the transaction, the person authorized to request payment for the minor under Sec. 315.52 may sign the request for the minor, but only for reissue to promote the minor to sole owner. If no representative has been appointed for the estate of a minor coowner who is of sufficient competency to sign his name to the request for reissue and to understand the nature of the transaction, and if all of the bonds are to be reissued in his name alone or, if he so requests, with a new coowner or a beneficiary, he may sign the request. Reissue will not be made if one coowner is incompetent and a representative of the incompetent's estate has not been appointed, except to add the words "an incompetent" after his name or to eliminate the other coowner from the registration. (2) In the name of a trustee of a personal trust estate created by both coowners. Requests for reissue should be made on Form PD 1851 and will not be approved unless both coowners are of full age and legally competent. No other reissue will be permitted in any form during the lives of both coowners, except as specifically provided in these regulations. SEC. 315.61. After the death of one or both coowners.—If either coowner dies without the bond having been presented and surrendered for payment or authorized reissue, the survivor will be recognized as the sole and absolute owner. Thereafter, payment or reissue will be made as thpugh the bond were registered in the name of the survivor alone (see Subpart K), except that a request for reissue by him must be supported by proof of death of the other coowner, and except further that after the death of the survivor proof of death of both coowners and of the order in which they died will be required. The presentation and surrender of a bond by one coowner for payment establishes his right to receive the proceeds of the bond, and if he should die before the transaction is completed, payment will be made to the legal representative of, or persons entitled to, his estate in accordance with the provisions of Subpart N. If either coowner dies after the bond has been presented and surrendered for authorized reissue (see Sec. 315.47), the bond will be regarded as though reissued during his lifetime. SEC. 315.62. Dpon death of both coowners in a common disaster, etc.—If both coowners die under such conditions that it cannot be established either by presumption of law or otherwise which died first, the bond will be considered as belonging to the estates of both equally, and payment or reissue will be made accordingly. (See Subpart N.) SUBPART M — T w o NATURAL PERSONS AS OWNER AND BENEFICIARY SEC. 315.65. During the lifetime of the registered owner.—A savings bond registered in beneficiary form, for example, "John A. Jones payable on death to Mrs. Mary C. Jones," will be paid or reissued upon presentation and surrender during the lifetime of the registered owner, as follows: (a) Payment.—The bond will be paid to the registered owner during his lifetime upon his properly executed request as though no beneficiary had been named in the registration. The presentation and surrender of the bond by the registered owner for payment establishes his exclusive right to the proceeds of the bond, and if he should die before the transaction is completed, payment will be made to the legal representative of, or the persons entitled to, his estate upon receipt of proof of the appointment and qualification of the representative or the identity of the persons entitled, in accordance with.the provisions of Subpart N. (b) Reissue.—The bond will be reissued on the duly certified request of the registered owner: (1) To name the beneficiary designated on the bond as coowner; Form PD 1787 should be used. (2) To eliminate the beneficiary, to substitute another person as beneficiary, or to name another person as coowner, if the request of the registered • owner is supported by the duly certified consent of the beneficiary to the 232 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY elimination of his n a m e or proof of t h e death of t h e beneficiary; F o r m P D 1787 should be used.i^ (3) I n t h e n a m e of a trustee of a persorial t r u s t estate created by t h e owner, if t h e request of t h e owner is supported by t h e duly certified consent of t h e beneficiary to t h e elimination of his n a m e or proof of t h e d e a t h of the beneficiary; F o r m P D 1851 should be used by t h e owner and F o r m P D 1849 by t h e beneficiary.i^ If t h e registered owner dies after t h e bond has been presented and surrendered for authorized reissue, t h e bond will be regarded as though reissued during his lifetime. S E C . 315.66. After the death of the registered owner.—If t h e registered owner dies without t h e bond having been presented and surrendered for p a y m e n t or authorized reissue and is survived by t h e beneficiary, upon proof of d e a t h of t h e owner t h e beneficiary will be recognized as t h e sole and absolute owner, and p a y m e n t or reissue will be m a d e as though t h e bond were registered in his n a m e alone (see Subpart K). SUBPART N — D E C E A S E D OWNERS SEC. 315.70. Payment or reissue on death of owner. (a) General.—Upon t h e death of t h e owner of a savings bond who is not survived by a coowner or designated beneficiary and who h a d not during his lifetime presented and surrendered t h e bond for p a y m e n t or an authorized reissue, t h e bond will be considered as belonging to his estate and will be paid or reissued accordingly as hereinafter provided, except t h a t reissue under this s u b p a r t will n o t be permitted if otherwise in conflict with these regulations. I n such exceptional case t h e person entitled to t h e bond will have t h e right only: (1) to hold t h e bond without change in registration; (2) to receive p a y m e n t of t h e redemption value of t h e bond a t any time and, if t h e bond is a current income bond, to receive t h e interest as it becomes due, b u t if t h e person entitled is an alien who is a resident of an area with respect to which t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t restricts or regulates t h e delivery of checks drawn against funds of t h e United States or any agency or instrumentality thereof, p a y m e n t of t h e principal of and interest on t h e bond will n o t be m a d e to such person until t h e restriction is removed. A creditor m a y obtain p a y m e n t of a bond b u t not reissue. T h e provisions of this section shall also. apply to savings bonds registered in t h e names of executors or administrators, except t h a t proof of their a p p o i n t m e n t and qualification m a y n o t be required under (b) and (c). . (b) I n course of administration.—If t h e estate of a decedent is being administered in court, t h e bond will be paid to t h e duly qualified representative of the estate or will be reissued in the names of the persons entitled to share in the estate, •upon t h e request of the representative and compliance with the following requircr ments: (1) Where there are two or more legal representatives, all must join in t h e request for p a y m e n t or reissue, except as provided in Sees. 315.77.and 315.78. (2) T h e request for p a y m e n t or reissue should be signed in t h e form, for example, " J o h n A. Jones, administrator of t h e estate (or executor of t h e will) of H e n r y W.' Jones, deceased," and must be supported by proof of t h e representative's authority in t h e form of a court certificate or a certified copy of the representative's letters of appointment. The certificate or t h e certification to the letters must be under seal of the court and, except in t h e case of a corporate representative, must contain a s t a t e m e n t t h a t the app o i n t m e n t is in full force and should be dated within six months of t h e d a t e of presentation of t h e bond, unless the certificate or letters show t h a t t h e appointment was made within one year immediately prior to such presentation. (3) I n case of reissue t h e legal representative of t h e estate should certify t h a t each person in whose n a m e reissue is requested is entitled to t h e extent specified for each and has consented to such reissue. A request for reissue by t h e legal representative should be made on Form P D 1455. If a person in whose n a m e reissue is requested desires to name a coowner or beneficiary, such person should execute an additional request for t h a t purpose, using F o r m P D 1787. (c) After settlement through court proceedings.—If t h e estate of t h e decedent has been settled in court, t h e bond will be paid to, or reissued in t h e name of, t h e 14 The provisions of this subsection do not apply to bonds on which the Treasurer of the United States is named as beneficiary. EXHIBITS 233 person entitled thereto as determined b}^ the court. The request for p a y m e n t or reissue should be made by the person shown to be entitled, supported by a duly certified copy of t h e representative's final account as approved by the court, decree of distribution, or other pertinent court records, supplemented, if there are two or more persons having an apparent interest in the bond, by an agreement executed by t h e m concerning the disposition of t h e bond. Form P D 1787 should be used. (d) Without administration.—When it appears t h a t no legal representative of t h e decedent's estate has been or will be appointed, the bond will be paid to, or reissued in the name of, the person or persons entitled, including those entitled as donees of a gift causa mortis, p u r s u a n t to an agreement and request by all persons entitled to share in t h e decedent's estate. A short form of agreement for settlement without administration (Form P D 1946) may be used for cases in which t h e total a m o u n t of savings bonds (maturity value) and redemption and interest checks (face amount) relating to savings bonds which belong to the decedent's estate is not in excess of $500. A longer form (Form P D 1946-A) is prescribed for other cases of settlement without administration.- Request for t h e appropriate form to be used hereunder m a y be made to any Federal Reserve Bank, the Office of the Treasurer of the Uriited States, or to the Bureau of t h e Public Debt, Division of Loans and Currency Branch. If the persons entitled to share in t h e estate include minors or incompetents, p a y m e n t or reissue of t h e bond will not be permitted without administration except to t h e m or in their names unless their interests are otherwise protected to the satisfaction of the Treasury D e p a r t m e n t . SUBPART 0 — F I D U C I A R I E S S E C . 315.75. Payment.—A savings bond registered in the name of a fiduciary or otherwise belonging to a fiduciary estate will be paid to the fiduciary or fiduciaries in accordance with the provisions of Sees. 315.77 and 315.78. SEC. 315.76. Reissue. (a) I n the name of person entitled.— (1) Distribution of trust estate in kind.—A bond to which a beneficiary of a t r u s t estate has become lawfull}'- entitled in his own right or in a fiduciary capacity, in whole or in part, under the t e r m s of a trust instrument, will be reissued in his name to t h e extent of his interest, upon the request of the trustee or trustees and their certification t h a t such person is entitled and has agreed to reissue iri his name. (2) After termination of trust estate.—If the person who would be lawfully entitled to a bond upon the termination of a t r u s t does not desire to have distribution made to him in kind, as provided in paragraph (1) above, the trustee or trustees should present t h e bond for p a y m e n t before the estate is terminated. If, however, the estate is terminated without such p a y m e n t or reissue having been made, t h e bond will thereafter be paid to or reissued in t h e n a m e of t h e person lawfully entitled upon his request and satisfactory proof of ownership, supplemented, if there are two or more persons having any a p p a r e n t interest in the bond, by an agreement executed by all such persons concerning t h e disposition of t h e bond. (3) Upon termination of guardianship estate.—If the estate of a minor or incompetent or of an absentee is terminated, during the ward's lifetime, a bond registered to show t h a t there is a representative of the estate will be reissued in t h e n a m e of t h e former ward upon the representative's request and certification t h a t t h e former ward is entitled and has agreed to reissue in his name (Form P D 1455 should be used), or will be paid to or reissued in t h e n a m e of t h e former ward upon his own request, supported in either Case by satisfactory evidence t h a t his disability has been removed or t h a t an absentee has returned to claim his property. Certification by t h e representative t h a t a former minor has attained his majority, t h a t a former incompetent has been legally restored to competency, t h a t a legal disability of a female ward has been removed by marriage, if t h e State law so provides, or t h a t an absentee has appeared to claim his property, will ordinarily be accepted as sufficient (see Sec. 315.77 if t h e representative's name is not shown in t h e registration). Upon t h e termination of t h e estate as t h e result of the death Of the ward, a bond registered to show t h a t there is a representative of his estate will be reissued in accordance with the provisions of Subpart N as though it were registered iri the name of the ward alone. ' 234 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY (4) Upon termination of life estate.—Upon t h e death of a life tenant, a bond registered in his name as life t e n a n t m a y be reissued in t h e name of t h e person or persons entitled p u r s u a n t to an agreement and request of all of t h e persons having an interest in t h e remainder. (Jb) I n the name of a succeeding fiduciary.—If a fiduciary in whose n a m e a bond is registered has been succeeded by another, t h e bond will be reissued in t h e name of t h e succeeding fiduciary upon appropriate request and satisfactory evidence of successorship; F o r m P D 1455 should be used. (c) I n the name of financial institution as trustee of common trust, fund.—Aibond held by a bank, t r u s t company, or other financial institution as a trustee; guardian, or similar representative, executor or administrator m a y be reissued in its n a m e as trustee of its common t r u s t fund to t h e extent t h a t participation therein by t h e institution in such capacity is authorized by law or applicable regulations. A request for reissue to t h e institution as trustee of its common t r u s t fund should be executed on its behalf in t h e capacity in which t h e bond is held a n d by t h e cofiduciary, if a n y ; Form P D 1455 should be used. S E C . 315.77. Requests for reissue or payment prior to maturity.—Except as specifically provided, t h e following rules apply to both requests for p a y m e n t and reissue by fiduciaries. A request for reissue or for p a y m e n t prior t o m a t u r i t y , or extended m a t u r i t y for those Series E bonds for which an optional extension period has been provided,!^ must be signed by all acting fiduciaries unless by express s t a t u t e , decree of court, or t h e terms of t h e instrument under which t h e fiduciaries are acting, some one or more of t h e m m a y properly execute t h e request. If t h e fiduciaries named in t h e registration of t h e bond are still acting, no further evidence of authority will be required. I n other cases a request m u s t be supported by evidence as specified below: (a) Fiduciaries^.by-titlefiOnly.T—Ittheobond is registered in-the-titles/'.without.^the names, of fiduciaries n o t acting as a board, satisfactory evidence of their incumbency m u s t be furnished, except in t h e case of bonds registered in t h e title of public officers as trustees. (b) Succeeding fiduciaries.—If t h e fiduciaries in whose names t h e bond is registered have been succeeded by other fiduciaries, satisfactory evidence of successorship m u s t be furnished. (c) Boards, committees, etc.—A savings bond registered in t h e name of a board, committee, commission, or, other body, empowered to act as a unit a n d t o hold title to t h e property of a religious, educational, charitable, or nonprofit-organization or public corporation will be paid upon a request for p a y m e n t signed in t h e n a m e of t h e board or other body by an authorized officer thereof. A request so signed and duly certified will ordinarily be accepted without further evidence of t h e officer's authority. T h e check in p a y m e n t of t h e bond will be drawn in t h e n a m e of t h e board or other body as fiduciary for t h e organization named in t h e registration or shown by satisfactory evidence to be entitled as successor thereto. (d) Corporate fiduciaries.—If a public or private corporation or a political body, such as a State or county, is acting as a fiduciary, a request must be signed in t h e n a m e of t h e corporation or other body in t h e fiduciary capacity in which it is acting, by an authorized officer thereof. A request so signed and duly certified will ordinarily be a c c e p t e d w i t h o u t further evidence of t h e •-officer's authority. (e) Registration not disclosing trust or other fiduciary estate.—If t h e registration of t h e bond does n o t show t h a t it belongs to a t r u s t or other fiduciary estate or does n o t identify t h e estate to which it belongs, satisfactory evidence of ownership m u s t be furnished in addition to any other evidence required by this section. SEC. 315.78. Requests for payment at or after maturity.—A request for p a y m e n t a t or after rnaturity, or extended m a t u r i t y for those Series E bonds for which an optional extension period has been provided,i3 signed by any one or more acting fiduciaries, will be accepted. P a y m e n t will ordinarily be made by check drawn as t h e bond is inscribed. S U B P A R T P — P A Y M E N T OR R E I S S U E OF B O N D S R E G I S T E R E D I N T H E N A M E S OF P R I V A T E ORGANIZATIONS ( C O R P O R A T I O N S , ASSOCIATIONS, P A R T N E R S H I P S , ETC.) AND G O V E R N M E N T A L A G E N C I E S , U N I T S , AND O F F I C E R S S E C . 315.80. Payment io corporations or unincorporated associations.—A savings bond registered in t h e name of a private corporation or an unincorporated association will be paid to t h e corporation or unincorporated association upon request for p a y m e n t on its behalf b y a duly authorized officer thereof. T h e signature 13 Only bonds of Series E with issue dates prior to May 1,1957, have this optional extension period. EXHIBITS 235 to t h e request should be in t h e form, for example, " T h e Jones Coal Company, a corporation, by J o h n Jones, President," or " T h e Lotus Club, an unincorporated association, by William A. Smith, Treasurer." A request for p a y m e n t so, signed a n d duly certified will ordinarily be accepted without further evidence of the officer's-^authority. S E C . 315.81. Payment to partnerships.—A savings bond registered in the name of an existing partnership will be paid upon a request for p a y m e n t signed by a general partner. T h e signature to the request should be in t h e form, for example, " S m i t h and Jones, a partnership, by John Jones, a general p a r t n e r . " A request for p a y m e n t so signed and dul}^ certified will ordinarily be accepted as sufficient evidence t h a t t h e partnership is still in existence and t h a t the person signing the request is duly authorized. S E C . 315.82. Reissue or payment to successors of corporations, unincorporated associations, or partnerships.—A savings bond registered in the name of a private corporation, an unincorporated association, or a partnership which has been succeeded b y another corporation, unincorporated association, or partnership by operation of law or otherwise, as the result of merger, consolidation, incorporation, reincorporation, conversion, or reorganization, or which has been lawfully succee.ded in any manner whereby t h e business or activities of t h e original organization are continued without substantial change, will be paid to or reissued in t h e n a m e of the succeeding organization upon appropriate request on its behalf, supported b y satisfactory evidence of successorship. F o r m P D 1540 should be used. S E C . 315.83. Reissue or payment on dissolution of corporation or partnership. (a) Corporations.—A savings bond registered in the name of a private corporation which is in t h e process of dissolution will be paid to the authorized representative of the corporation upon a duly executed request for payment, supported b y satisfactory evidence of the representative's authority. Upon the termination of dissolution proceedings, t h e bond m a y be reissued in the names of those persons, other t h a n creditors, entitled to the assets of the corporation, to the extent of their respective interests. Reissue under this subsection will be made upon t h e duly executed request of the authorized representative of the corporation and upon proof t h a t all s t a t u t o r y provisions governing the dissolution of the corporation have been complied with and t h a t the persons in whose names reissue is requested are entitled and have agreed to the reissue. If the dissolution proceedings are under t h e direction of a court, a certified copy of an order of the court, showing the a u t h o r i t y of t h e representative to make the distribution requested, m u s t be furnished. (b) Partnerships.—A savings bond registered in the name of a partnership which has been dissolved b y d e a t h or withdrawal of a partner, or in any other manner, will be paid upon a request for p a y m e n t by any partner or partners authorized by law to act on behalf of the dissolved partnership, or will be paid to or reissued in the names of the persons, other t h a n creditors, entitled thereto as t h e result of such dissolution to the extent of their respective interests, upon their request supported b y satisfactory evidence of their title, including proof t h a t t h e debts of the partnership have been paid or properly provided for. S E C . 315.84. Payment to institutions (churches, hospitals, homes, schools, etc.)— A savings bond registered in the name of a church, hospital, home, school, or similar institution without reference in t h e registration to the manner in which it is organized or governed or to the manner in which title to its property is held will be paid upon a request for p a y m e n t signed on behalf of such institution b y an authorized representative. For the purpose of this section, a request for p a y m e n t signed b y a pastor of a church, superintendent of a hospital, president bf a college, or by any official generally recognized as having authority to conduct t h e financial affairs of t h e particular institution will ordinarily be accepted without further proof of his authority. T h e signature to the request should be in the form, for example, "Shriners' Hospital for Crippled Children, St. Louis, Missouri, b y William A. Smith, superintendent," or " S t . M a r y ' s R o m a n Catholic Church, Albany, New York, b y J o h n Jones, pastor." S E C . 315.85. Reissue in name of trustee or agent for investment purposes.—A savings bond registered in the name of a religious, educational, charitable, or nonprofit organization, whether or not incorporated, m a y be reissued in the name of a barik, t r u s t company, or other financial institution, or an individual, as trustee or agent under an agreement with t h e organization under which the trustee or agent holds funds of the organization, in whole or in part, for the purpose of investing and reinvesting the principal and paying the income to the organization. 236 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY F o r m P D 2177 should be used and should be signed on behalf of the organization by an authorized officer. SEC. 315.86. Reissue upon termination of investment agency.—A savings bond registered in the name of a bank, t r u s t company, or other financial institution, or individual, as agent for investment purposes only, under an agreement with a religious, educational, charitable, or nonprofit organization, m a y be reissued in the name of the organization upon termination of the agency. T h e former agent should reauest such reissue and should certif}^ t h a t the organization is entitled by reason rf t h e termination of the agency, using F o r m P D 1455. If such request and certification are not obtainable, the bond will be reissued in the name of t h e organization upon its own request, supported b y satisfactory evidence of the termination of t h e agency. SEC. 315.87. Payment to governmental agencies and imits.—A savings bond registered in t h e name of a State, county, city, town, or village, or in the name of a Federal, State, or local governmental agency such as a board, commission, or corporation, will be paid upon a request signed in the name of the governmental agency or unit by a duly authorized officer thereof. A request for p a y m e n t so signed and duly certified will ordinarily be accepted without further proof of the officer's authority. SEC. 315.88. Payment to Government officers.—A savings bond registered in the official title of an officer of a governmental agency or unit will be paid upon a request for p a y m e n t signed by the designated officer. T h e fact t h a t the request for p a y m e n t is so signed and duly certified will ordinarily be accepted as proof t h a t the person signing is the incumbent of the designated office. [SUBPART Q — F U R T H E R P R O V I S I O N S SEC. 315.90. Regulations prescribed.—These regulations are prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury as governing United States savings bonds issued under the authority of Sec. 22 of the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, and pursuant to t h e various D e p a r t m e n t circulars offering such bonds for sale. T h e prO'\^isions of these regulations with respect to bonds registered in the names of certain classes of individuals, fiduciaries, and organizations are equally applicable to bonds to which such individuals, fiduciaries, and organizations are otherwise shown to be entitled under these regulations. The provisions of .Department Circular No. 300, Revised, have no application to savings bonds. SEC. 315.91. Waiver of regulations.—The Secretary of the Treasury reserves the right, in his discretion, to waive or modify any provision or provisions of these regulations in any particular case or class of cases for the convenience of the United States or in order to relieve any person or persons of unnecessary hardship, if such action would not be inconsistent with law and would not impair a n y existing rights, and if he is satisfied t h a t such action would not subject the United States to any substantial expense or liability. SEC. 315.92. Additional evidence; bond of indemnity.—The Secretary of the Treasury, in any case arising under these regulations, m a y require such additional evidence as he ma}^ consider necessary or advisable, and m a y require a bond of indemnity, with or without surety, or an agreement of indemnity in any case where he m a y consider such a bond or agreement necessary for the protection of the interests of the United States. SEC. 315.93. Preservation of rights.—Nothing contained in these regulations shall be construed to limit or restrict any existing rights which holders of savings bonds heretofore issued m a y have acquired under the circulars offering the bonds for sale or under the regulations in force a t the time of purchase. SEC. 315.94. Supplements, amendments, or revisions.—The Secretary of t h e Treasury m a y a t any time, or from time to time, prescribe additional, supplemental, amendatory, or revised rules and regulations governing United States savings bonds. JULIAN B . BAIRD, Acting Secretary of the Treasury, EXHIBITS 237 United States Savings S t a m p s Regulations E X H I B I T 11.—Department Circular No. 1008, April 25, 1958, regulations governing Treasury savings stamp agents in selling United States savings stamps at schools 1 TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Washington, April 25, 1958. SEC. 338.1. Authority for circular.—The Secretary of t h e Treasury, p u r s u a n t to t h e a u t h o r i t y of t h e Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended (49 Stat. 21, as amended, 31 U. S. C. 757c), hereby prescribes t h e regulations in this p a r t for t h e qualification and control of Treasury savings s t a m p agents. SEC. 338.2. Eligibility for applying for agency.—Any individual is eligible to apply for qualification as a Treasury savings s t a m p agent to sell United States savings stamps (hereinafter referred to as stamps) a t a specific school or schools in t h e United States, its Territories and possessions and the Canal Zone, upon being recommended for qualification by (i) the principal or superintendent, or other person in charge of a school, (ii) a duly constituted school board, or (iii) with t h e consent of the appropriate school official or board to the sale of stamps a t t h e subiect school, an organization, association, or a unit of a State or nationally federated civic, parents', parent-teachers', service, teachers', veterans', or women's organization. SEC. 338.3. Qualification of agents.—An eligible applicant seeking qualification as a Treasury savings s t a m p agent (hereinafter referred to as an agent) shall file a duly completed Application-Agreement, Treasury Form P D 2949 (original and two copies), with the local State Director of t h e Treasury's U. S. Savings.Bonds Division. T h e t e r m " S t a t e Director" shall include any director appointed by t h e U. S. Savings Bonds Division for t h e District of Columbia, or for an3^ Territory or possession of t h e United States, or t h e Canal Zone. If such ApplicationAgreement is accepted, t h e State Director will certify it and distribute a copy bearing his certification to (i) t h e postmaster of the post office, branch or station designated in t h e application, and (ii) t h e agent. Upon receipt of such copies, t h e postmaster and t h e agent are authorized to perform the functions necessary to effect t h e saie of stamps as provided herein. An applicant is not authorizeci to act as or to represent himself to be a Treasury savings s t a m p agent unless and until he receives a completed copy of his Application-Agreement bearing t h e certification of t h e State Director. SEC. 338.4. Responsibility of agents.—Each agent will be responsible for t h e faithful performance of his duties and functions and for full}^ accounting for all stamps received without prepayment, as provided in these regulations. SEC. 338.5. Scope of authority of Treasury savings stamp agent.—An.agent qualified p u r s u a n t to this circular is authorized to sell stamps only a t t h e school or schools designated in t h e agent's Application-Agreement, and in accordance with t h e provisions of this circular. Agents m a y sell stamps only for cash and a t their face value. Qualification as a Treasury savings s t a m p agent does not authorize an individual to act in any other agency capacity for or on behalf of t h e Treasury Department. SEC. 338.6. Supplying stamps to agents.— (a) Agents.—Each agent is authorized to obtain stamps without p r e p a y m e n t in denominations and a m o u n t s sufficient t o meet t h e agent's anticipated sales for t h e day of a school week designated by t h e appropriate school official as t h e day when United States savings stamps m a y be purchased by students of t h e school, provided t h a t t h e agent has properl}^ accouiited for stamps previously obtained without^ p r e p a y m e n t . E a c h agent shall call a t t h e post office designated in his Application-Agreement to obtain t h e stamps and in exchange therefor shall sign a Post Office D e p a r t m e n t receipt form covering t h e full a m o u n t of t h e stamps. T h e stamps m a y be obtained by t h e agent on t h e day they are to be sold or on t h e preceding business day. T h e po3t office from which an agent obtains stamps shall be kept advised by t n e agent of his s t a m p requirements. (b) Post offices.—The post office, branch, or station designated in an agent's Application-Agreement (hereinafter referred to as the post office) is authorized to supply such agent with stamps without prepayment in accordance with the provisions and limitations of this section. The receipt which the agent is required to sign shall be retained by the post office subject to return to the agent when all of the stamps covered by the receipt have been fully accounted for. 1 This is to facilitate the carrying out of the Treasury's school savings program as administered by the Savmgs Bonds Division of the Treasury Department. 238 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY SEC. 338.7. Accounting for stamps by agents.—(a) General.—All stamps obtained by an agent without prepayment, and the proceeds of sales thereof, are t h e property of t h e United States and shall be held in t r u s t by the agent for t h e United States until duly accounted for. T h e total value of such stamps must be accounted for by t h e agent not later t h a n the second business day following t h e day the stamps were to be sold at the school served by t h e agent. T h e accounting shall be in t h e form of unsold stamps or cash, or both, and shall be made a t t h e post office from which t h e stamps were obtained. If sickness or other disability prevents t h e agent from making a timely accounting, he shall cause t h e appropriate post office to be notified of the reasons for his failure to make such accounting. (b) Accounting made in fiill.—When the stamps are fully accounted for t h e postal employee to whom t h e accounting is made shall mark "canceled" over his signature and t h e current date on the receipt covering t h e stamps (see Sec. 338.6 hereof), and shall immediately return t h e receipt to t h e agent. If such receipt is not available for any reason t h e postal employee shall, over his signature and current date, appropriately record t h e facts of t h e accounting and t h e unavailability of t h e receipt on Treasury F o r m P D 2950 (see Sec. 338.8 (b) hereof) for t h e agent's record. (c) Accounting not 'made in full.—If t h e agent does not fully account for t h e stamps, t h e postal employee to whom t h e accounting is made, shall appropriately note t h e facts, under t h e current date, on t h e agent's receipt and require t h e agent to endorse such notation. The receipt will be retained by the post office until a full accounting is made. A similar notation of the facts shall be made and endorsed by t h e postal employee on Treasury F o r m P D 2950 for the agent's record. SEC. 338.8. Records and reports, preparation, maintenance, and destruction by agents.—(a) Receipts by agents for stamps obtained without prepayment.— Sections 338.6 and 338.7 cover t h e preparation and distribution of receipts for stamps obtained by agents without prepayment. A receipt duly canceled and returned to an agent shall be retained by him one calendar m o n t h after t h e m o n t h in which it is returned after which the agent m a y retain or destroy t h e receipt as he m a y elect. (6) Record of transportation of stamps and proceeds thereof to post office.—Each agent shall keep a record, in duplicate, by calendar month, of unsold s t a m p s and/or t h e proceeds of s t a m p sales shipped or otherwise delivered during t h e m o n t h to t h e post office. A Treasury Form P D 2950 is provided for this purpose. Entries shall be made on F o r m P D 2950 at t h e time each shipment or delivery is made. T h e agent shall take the duplicate copy of Form P D 2950 with him each time he makes an accounting to t h e post office for stamps t h a t he obtained without p r e p a y m e n t . T h e original and t h e duplicate copy of this form shall be retained one calendar m o n t h after t h e date of t h e last shipment recorded thereon, after which t h e agent m a y retain or destroy t h e m : Provided, however, t h a t when (i) unsold stamps or the proceeds of s t a m p sales are lost, stolen, or destroyed in transit, or (ii) the agent does not account in full for stamps covered by a receipt, the Form P D 2950 (both copies) shall be retained by t h e agent until one calendar m o n t h after t h e deficiency is removed, unless t h e form is delivered to the Treasury. (c) Other.—Other records prepared and maintained by and for the agent's own use m a y be disposed of at t h e discretion of the agent: Provided, however, t h a t any records, affidavits, etc., t h a t are prepared in connection with a loss which m a y be t h e subject of a claim to the Treasury for relief shall be retained as provided in Section 338.9 (d) hereof. SEC. 338.9. Losses in transportation.—(a) General.—The Government Losses in Shipment Act, as amended, (5 U. S. C. 134-134h) provides protection against losses arising from shipments of valuables made at the risk of the United States, if t h e shipments are made in accordance with prescribed regulations. The t e r m " s h i p m e n t " as used herein is defined (in the same manner as provided in t h e Government Losses in Shipment Act, as amended) to mean " t h e transportation or the effecting of transportation of valuables without limitation as to t h e means or facilities used * * *." The transportation of stamps from the post office to the school and of unsold stamps and/or cash from the school to the post office by or in the possession of a Treasury savings s t a m p agent are shipments of valuables at the risk of t h e United States. Accordingly, an agent may be relieved of his accountability for stamps if they are lost, stolen, or destro3''ed in shipment (see,Sec. 338.9 (d)). (b) Preparation for transportation.—The a m o u n t of stamps and/or proceeds thereof being transported from or to t h e post office m u s t be established, prior EXHIBITS ' 239 to transportation, by actual count by t h e agent. The agent's receipt given at t h e post office for stamps obtained without p r e p a y m e n t will constitute an adequate record of the a m o u n t of stamps being transported by the agent to the school. (c) Procedure for transportation and delivery.—An agent m u s t transport and deliver t h e stamps and/or the proceeds thereof in person, using due care to prevent loss, theft, or destruction in transit. The agent's trip may be made on foot or by private or public transportation facilities. (d) Report of losses and presentation of claims for relief.—Losses occurring during t h e transportation by an agent of stamps or the proceeds thereof shall be p r o m p t l y reported by t h e agent to (i) t h e State Director who certified t h e agent's Application-Agreement and (ii) t h e post office. Local police authorities should also be notified if t h e loss is occasioned b y theft. If p r o m p t recovery of t h e loss does not seem possible, t h e agent should supplement the report of loss by presenting his claim for relief to t h e State Director who, in turn, will present it for consideration by t h e Treasury D e p a r t m e n t . T h e agent's claim should b e supported by t h e appropriate duplicate copy of Form P D 2950; t h e report of any investigation m a d e ; actiori takeri or expected to be taken and of any results obtained or expected; s t a t e m e n t s by t h e agent ^s to t h e circumstances and cause of t h e loss;, and, if available, statements or affidavits of any witnesses to the incident causing t h e loss. T h e foregoing d a t a need n o t be furnished if it has previously been furnished to or obtained by t h e Treasury's Secret Service. S t a m p agents should bear t h e foregoing requirements in mind so t h a t in t h e event of a loss, t h e y m a y be in a position t o obtain d a t a for iustifying a claim for relief from t h e loss. Unless t h e records referred to herein have been turned over to t h e Treasury t h e y should be retained, notwithstanding t h e provisions of Section 338.8 hereof, until one calendar m o n t h after t h e claim is settled. An agent will be relieved of liability for a loss occurring during his transportation of stamps or t h e proceeds thereof, unless it arose as a result of his failure to comply with t h e provisions of this circular and instructions issued hereunder. S E C . 338.10. Action by postmasters in connection with an agent's failure to account.—Postmasters should p r o m p t l y report any failure of an agent t o account, in whole or in part, for s t a m p s supplied to t h e agent without p r e p a y m e n t . Such reports should be m a d e to t h e State Director of t h e United States Savings Bonds Division who certified t h e respective agent's Application-Agreement. S E C . 338.11. Termination of an agent's qualification.—The Secretary of t h e Treasury, t h e Fiscal Assistant Secretary of the Treasury, t h e National Director, or a S t a t e Director of t h e United States Savings Bonds Division m a y terminate t h e qualification of a Treasury savings s t a m p agent a t any time, by written notice to t h e agent, in which event a copy of such notice will be sent to t h e post office concerned. A qualified agent m a y withdraw from and discontinue his agency by giving an appropriate written notice to t h e office of t h e State Director of t h e United States Savings Bonds Division who certified t h e agent's ApplicationAgreement: Provided, however, t h a t t h e agent will be obligated to make a full accounting for all s t a m p s received by him without p r e p a y m e n t . S E C . 338.12. Miscellaneous.—The Secretary of t h e Treasury reserves t h e right, in his discretion, to waive or modify any provision or provisions of these regulations arid to provide supplementary instructions for operations hereunder. Information as to any such actions shall be p r o m p t l y furnished to agents con^ cerned. JULIAN B . BAIRD, Acting Secretary of the Treasury. G u a r a n t e e d Obligations Called E X H I B I T 12.—Calls for partial redemption, before maturity, of insurance fund debentures During t h e fiscal year 1958, there were t w e n t y calls for partial redemption, before m a t u r i t y , of insurance fund debentures, twelve dated September 20, 1957, ' and t h e others dated March 21, 1958. T h e notices of call were published in t h e Federal Registers of September 27, 1957, a n d March 29, 1958. T h e notice covering t h e fourth call of t h e 2}^, 2 ) i 2}i, 2%, and 3 percent Series A A m u t u a l iinor tgage insurance fund debentures is shown in this exhibit. Since t h e other notices of call are similar to this exhibit, they have been omitted b u t t h e essential details are summarized in t h e table following t h e notice of call. 479641—59 17 240 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY NOTICE OF CALL. FEDERAL REGISTER OF SEPTEMBER 27, 1957 To Holders of 2}i, 2%, ;^^, 2^8, and 3 Percent Mutual Mortgage Insurance Pund Debentures, Series A A: NOTICE O F CALL FOR PARTIAL REDEMPTION, B E F O R E MATURITY, O F 2H, 2H, 2 ^ , 2 ^ , AND 3 PERCENT MUTUAL MORTGAGE INSURANCE FUND DEBENTURES, SERIES AA Pursuant to the authority conferred by the National Housing Act (48 Stat* 1246; U. S. C , Title 12, Sec. 1701 et seq.j as amended, public notice is hereby given that 2M, 2^, 2%, 2%, and 3 percent mutual mortgage insurance fund debentures. Series AA, of the denominations and serial numbers designated below, are hereby called for redemption, at par and accrued interest, on January I, 1958, on which date interest on such debentures shall cease: 2^, 2y8, 2%, 2)i, and 3 percent mutual mortgage insurance fund debentures, series AA Denomination $50 _--- 100 500 1,000 5,000 Inclusive serial numbers 557 to 900 1,671 to 2,738 513 to 808 1,136 to 2,017 - 571 to 906 10,000 .. 201 to 477 The debentures first issued as determined by the issue dates thereof were selected for redemption by the Commissioner, Federal Housing Administration, with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury. No transfers or denominational exchanges in debentures covered by the foregoing call will be made on the books maintained by the Treasury Department on or after October 1, 1957. This does not affect the right of the holder of a debenture to sell and assign the debenture on or after October 1, 1957, and provision will be made for the payment of final interest due on January I, 1958, with the principal thereof to the actual owner, as shown by the assignments thereon. The Commissioner of the Federal Housing Administration hereby offers to purchase any debentures included in this call at any time from October I, 1957, to December 31, 1957, inclusive, at par and accrued interest, to date of purchase. Instructions for the presentation and surrender of debentures for redemption on or after January I, 1958, or for purchase prior to that date will be given by the Secretary of the Treasury. K?VRON^T>: September 20, 1957 LAURENCE B . ROBBINS, NORMAN P. MASON, Commissioner. Acting Secretary of the Treasury. Final interest will be paid with principal at the rate of $12.50 per $1,000 for the 2>^%; $13.13 per $1,000 for the 2 ^ % ; $13.75 per $1,000 for the 2%%; $14.38 per $1,000 for the 2%%, and $15.00 per $1,000 for the 3 % debentures redeemed on January 1, 1958. Final interest will be paid with principal at the rate of $0.067935 per day for each $1,000 for the 2 ^ % ; $0.071332 per day for each $1,000 for the 2J^%; $0.074728 per day for each $1,000 for the 2?^%; $0.078125 per day for each $1,000 for the 2%%, and $0.081522 per day for each $1,000 for the 3 % debentures from July 1, 1957, to date of purchase on those purchased between October 1 and December 31, 1957. Summary of information contained in the notices of callfor partial redemption of insurance fund debentures during the fiscal year 1958 2H,2H,2H,2}i,d,nd3 percent m u t u a l mortgage insurance fund debentures, Series A A , fourth caU N o t i c e of call Redemption date Serial n u m b e r s called by denominations: $50 $100 $500 $1,000 $5,000 $10,000 F i n a l d a t e for transfers or d e n o m i n a t i o n a l exchanges ( b u t n o t for sale or a s s i g n m e n t ) . R e d e m p t i o n o n call d a t e , a m o u n t of interest per $1,000 p a i d i n full w i t h p r i n c i p a l . P r e s e n t a t i o n for p u r chase, prior to call date: Period . A m o u n t of accrued i n t e r e s t per $1,000 per d a y p a i d w i t h principal. Sept. 20,1957 J a n . 1, 1968 557-900 1671-2738513-808 1136-2017 671-906 201-477 S e p t . 3 0 , 1967— 2 H , 2 H , 2 H , 2 % . 3, a n d 3>4 p e r c e n t m u t u a l mortgage insurance fund d e b e n t u r e s , Series A A , fifth call M a r . 21, 1958 J u l y 1, 1968 2% a n d 3 p e r c e n t h o u s i n g insurance fund deb e n t u r e s , Series B B , first call Sept. 20, 1957 -- J a n . 1, 1958 - 901-1169 : . 2739-3808809-1136 2018-2736 907-1239 478-730 M a r . 31,1958 2 H , 2 H a n d 3 perc e n t h o u s i n g ins u r a n c e fund debentures. Series B B , seco n d call - M a r 21, 1958 J u l y 1, 1968 1-3 1-26 1-6 1-18 1-7 - 1-416 __. S e p t . 30, 1957 2% and 3 percent servicemen's m o r t g a g e insurance fund deb e n t u r e s . Series E E , first call S e p t . 20, 1957 — J a n . 1, 1968 . . 27-39 19-24 8-9 417-616 M a r . 31,1958 1 1-19 1 1-14. 1 _ Sept. 30, 1967 2 % p e r c e n t serv- 2% p e r c e n t h o u s icemen's m o r t mg msurance gage i n s u r a n c e fund d e b e n t u r e s , fund debenSeries F , first t u r e s . Series E E , caU second call M a r 21, 1958 J u l y 1, 1968 Sept. 20, 1957. — J a n . 1, 1958. 2-3 = 20 2 15-18 1-6. 1-84. 1-2. M a r . 31, 1958 1-50. Sept. 30, 1957. $12.50 for 2 H % , $13.13 for 2 H % , $13.75 for 234%, $14.38 for 27/i%, $16.00 for 3 % . $12.60 for 2 H % , $13,125 for 2 H % , $13.75 for 2-%%, $14,375 for 2 W 0 , $15.00 for 3 % , $16.25 for 3 K % . $13.75 for 2 M % , $15.00 for 3 % . $13.75 for 2 % % , $15.00 for 3 % . $14.38 for 2 % % , $16.00 for 3 % , $14.375 $13.75. Oct. 1-Dec. 31,1957 A p r . 1-June 30, 1958— $0.067936 for 2 H % , $0.071332 for 2 H % , $0.07472S for 2 % % , $0.078126 for 27-^%, $0.081522 for 3 % , from J u l y 1, 1957, t o d a t e of p u r c h a s e . $0.069061 for 23^%, $0.072514 for 2H7o, $0.076967 for 2 % % , $0.079420 for 2 % % , $0.082873 for 3 % , $0.089779 for 3M%, from J a n . 1, 1968, to d a t e of p u r c h a s e . Oct 1-Dee 31 1957. $0.074728 for 2 % % , $0.081522 for 3 % , from J u l y 1, 1957, to d a t e of purchase. A p r . 1-June 30, 1968. $0.075967 for 2 % % , $0.082873 for 3 % , from J a n . 1, 1958, to d a t e of purchase. Oct 1-Dec 31 1957. $0.078125 for 2 % % , $0.081522 for 3 % , from J u l y 1, 1967, to d a t e of purchase. A p r . 1-June 30, 1958. $0.079420 from J a n . 1, 1958, t o d a t e of p u r c h a s e . Oct 1-Dec 31, 1967. $0.074728 from J u l y 1, 1957, t o d a t e of p u r c h a s e . ^ ZP to Summary of information contained in the notices of callfor partial redemption of insurance fund debentures during thefiscal year 1958—Con. 2H and 2% percent armed services housing 2H percent war housing insurance fund debentures. Series H mortgage insurance fund debentures, Series F F First call Notice of c.all Redemption date Serial numbers called by denominations: $50 $100 $500 Sept. 20, 1957--Jan. 1, 1968 $1,000 $5 000 $10,000 Final date for transfers or denommational exchanges (but not for sale or assignment). Redemption oh call date, amount of interest per $1,000 paid in full with principal. Presentation for purchase prior to call date: Period - . 1-5 1-3 1-284 Sept 30, 1967 Amount of accrued interest per $1,000 per day paid with principal. Second call Seventh call Nineteenth call Mar. 21, 1958 July 1, 1968 Sept. 20, 1957 Jan. 1, 1958 Mar. 21,1958...— Sept. 20, 1967 July 1, 1958 Jan. 1,1958 6-31: 4 285-683 Mar. 31, 1958 3903-3978 11239-11906 1754-1809, 28.54• 2903. 12402-12985 3233-3354 31219-33468 Sept.-30, 1957—-.. 3979-4040 11907-12371 2904-3078 12986-13453 3355-3445 i... 3346^-34837.. Mar. 31, 1958 1-4 1-8 1-5 $12.50 for 21^%, $13.75 for 2%%. Eighteenth call 2H percent Title I housing insurance fund debentures. Series L $12.50 for 2H%, $13.75 for 2%%. $12.50 Eighth call Mar. 21,1958 — July 1, 1958 137-140 167-172 80-86 383-406 34-36 Sept. 30, 1957 141-148 173-205 87-101 . - 407-434 36-46 Mar. 31, 1968 bO 2H percent hous- • ing insurance fund debentures, Series M, first call 00 Sept. 20, 1957.' Jan 1, 1958 hd O 4r-8 5-230 2-102 o 7-415 3-19 89-575 Sept. 30, 1967. ox • ^ t ^ ZP $12.50- - $12.50. $12.50 $12.50. o > Si Kj Oct. 1-Dec. 31, 1957.. : Apr. 1-June 30, 1958.. Oct. 1-Dec. 31, 1957. $0.067935 from $0.069061 for 2H%, $0.075967 for 2%%, July 1, 1957', to from Jan. 1, 1958, date of purto date of purchase. chase. $0.067935 for 2H%, $0.074728 for 2%%, from July 1, 1967, to date of purchase. Apr. 1-June 30, 1968. $0.069061 from Jan. 1, 1968, to date of purchase. Oct. 1-Dec. 31, 1957. $0.067935 from July 1, 1967, to date of purchase. Apr. 1-June 30, 1968. $0.069061 from Jan. 1, 1968, to date of purchase. Oct. 1-Dec. 31, 1967. $0.067936 from July 1, 1967, to date of purchase. o S3 > ZP d 2H percent military housing insurance fund debentures, Series N, first call 2H percent housing insurance fund debentures. Series Q, first call 2% percent Title I housing insurance fund debentures. Series R Fifth call Notice of call -_. Redemption date Serial numbers called by denominations: $50$100 $500 $1,000 $5,000 .. —-. $10,000 Final date for transfers or denominational exchanges (but not for sale or assignment) . Redemption on call date, amount of interest per $1,000 paid in full with principal. Presentation for purchase prior to call date: Period Amount of accrued interest per $1,000 per day paid with principal. Sixth call 3 percent Title I housing insurance fund debentures. Series T Fourth call Fifth call Sept. 20, 1957.. Jan. 1, 1958-.-- Sept. 20, 1957-. Jan. 1, 1958—. Mar. 21, 1958.. "July 1, 1958—. Sept. 20, 1957.. Jan. 1, 1958—. Mar. 21,1958. July 1, 1958. 1-10 1-496—. Sept. 30, 1957.. 7-9... 7-10. 650-70 1-6 343-373 ... Sept. 30, 1967.. 30-160.104-162. 20-40--. 50-51.-. 36-54.-. 161-203. 163-26941-64.... 62-75-.. 66-80--. 95-124... 242-390-. 117-178-. 98-163-.. 80-139... Sept. 30, 1957.. Mar. 31, 1968.. Sept. 30,1967.. 125-160. 391-595. 179-233, 154-212. 140-185. 5-6. Mar. 31, 1958. $12.50- $12.60. $13.75. $13.75. $15.00- $15.00. Oct. 1-Dec. 31, 1957.$0.067935 from July 1, 1957, to date of purchase. Oct. 1-Dec. 31, 1957... Oct. 1-Dec. 31, 1957... Apr. 1-June 30,1958$0.067935 from July 1, $0.074728 from July 1, $0.075967 from Jan. 1, 1957, to date of pur1957, to date of pur1968, to date of purchase. chase. chase. Sept. 20, 1957.. Jan. 1, 1958—. 1-26. Oct. 1-Dec. 31,1957..- Apr. 1-June 30, 1958. $0.081522 from July 1, $0.082873 from Jan. 1, 1967, to date of pur1958, to date of purchase. chase. IN3 CO 244 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Legislation EXHIBIT 13.—An act temporarily increasing the public debt limit [Public Law 85-336, 85th Cong., 2d Sess., H. R. 99561 Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled. That, during the period beginning on the date of the enactment of this Act and ending on June 30, 1959, the public debt Hmit set forth in the first sentence of section 21 of the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, shall be temporarily increased by $5,000,000,000. Approved February 26, 1958. EXHIBIT 14.—An act to increase the public debt limit [Public Law 85-912, 85th Cong., 2d Sess., H. R. 135801 Be it enacted hy the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 21 of the Second Liberty Bdnd Act, as amended (31 U. S. C , sec. 757b), is amended to read as follows: '*SEC. 21. The face amount of obligations issued under authority of this Act, and the face amount of obligations guaranteed as to principal and interest by the United States (except such guaranteed obligations as may be held by the Secretary of the Treasury), shall not exceed in the aggregate $283,000,000,000 outstanding at any one time. The current redemption value of any obligation issued on a discount basis which is redeemable prior to maturity at the option of the holder thereof shall be considered, for the purposes of this section, to be the face amount of such obligation." Approved September 2, 1958. Public Debt Management EXHIBIT 15.—Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, January 17, 1958, before the House Ways and Means Committee in support of H. K. 9955 and H. R. 9956, bills to amend the statutory debt limitation. I am glad to have this opportunity to review with the committee the status of the statutory limitation on the public debt. The present limitation of $275 billion is contained in the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, which is the current authority of the Treasury to issue public debt obligations. H. R. 9955 and H. R. 9956, now before the committee for its consideration, would provide a temporary increase of $5 billion in this limit until June 30, 1959. I want to make clear at the outset that the need for a debt limit increase is based on: (1) The fact that cash balances have been running distressingly low, as I will show in detail later. (2) There is need for more flexibility, for more efficient and economical management of the debt. (3) Even with a balanced budget there will still be large seasonal fluctuations in receipts which make operations under the $275 billion limitation most difficult. This request, made within the framework of our 1959 budget estimates for revenue and expenditures, emphasizes not only much-needed flexibihty as outlined above, but takes into account contingencies which might develop in a world filled with uncertainties. After I assumed my responsibilities as Secretary of the Treasury last summer, we reviewed the situation confronting the Treasury and became concerned with the small margin, then indicated, which would exist between the forecasts of our financial requirements during this fiscal year and the statutory debt limitation. We notified this committee and the Senate Finance Committee that we would do all in our power to operate under the $275 billion limitation. At that time, the budget for the fiscal year 1958 still projected a surplus of more than $1.5 billion. Since then, as you know, increased defense expenditures, coupled with a less favorable outlook for revenues, have caused us to project a budget deficit of $400 million, or a net decline of approximately $2 billion from our position last summer. 245 EXHIBITS We have been able to discharge our obligations within the debt limit during the intervening period only by maintaining cash balances which have been distressingly low at times. We have had little or no margin for contingencies. We believe that with some flexibility we would have been better able to manage the public debt to a' better advantage for the public interest. The combined cash inflow and outflow of the Treasury on all accounts during fiscal year 1957 amounted to over $400 billion. We disburse approximately $1.5 billion in an average 5-day week for budget expenditures. Our cash balance has been approximately at that level on several occasions. Here I should like to call your attention to chart A, which is attached to the statements. The bars on the left-hand side of chart A show average monthly budget expenditures over the past 10 years together with our estimates for 1958. The dotted line shows the average Treasury cash balances during those same periods. Cash balances during the period 1948 to 1951, as appear on the chart, were appreciably larger than the monthly budget expenditures, as shown on the left-hand side. CHART A -THE TREASURY GASH BALANCE PROBLEM $Bil. Monthly Averages. Fiscal l948-'58 Operating Cash Balance as % of Budget Expenditures 8- Operating Cash Balance '%!, ,••••" / Budget Expenditures 1948 '52 '55 '58 ''1948 Fiscal Years In recent years, however. Treasury cash balances have been declining while budget expenditures have been increasing. Therefore, in the fiscal year 1958 we estimate that the average Treasury cash balance is sufficient to cover only about 74 percent of the average month's budget expenditures, and this compares, of course, with about 140 percent in the years prior to 1952. Under our Constitution, the Congress has the power to borrow money on the credit of the United States and this power has traditionally been delegated to the Secretary of the Treasury. . The Congress has adopted various means of exercising control over the power which it delegates. The power to borrow money cannot be exercised without regard to the powers of Congress to lay and collect taxes and to appropriate moneys from the Treasury. Prior to World War I the public debt amounted to about $1)1 billion. Up to that time it was customary for the Congress to enact specific laws each time the Treasury was authorized to borrow money, which was at infrequent intervals. This procedure became outmoded in meeting requirements for borrowing due fo heavy expenditures in World War I. In 1917 the Treasury had general authority 246 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY to issue bonds subject to a limitation based upon t h e t o t a l a m o u n t s of issues without regard to interim retirements. We h a d another a u t h o r i t y to issue certificates of indebtedness based upon t h e a m o u n t outstanding. During t h e period from 1918 to 1921 t h e Treasury's borrowing authority was increased a n d extended to include authority to issue Treasury notes, as well as bonds and certificates of indebtedness. In 1929 t h e authority was further extended to permit t h e issuance of Treasury bills. I n 1935, after further increases in a m o u n t s of borrowing authority in 1931 and 1934, t h e limitation applicable to Treasury bonds was changed from one based upon t h e a m o u n t of bonds issued to one based upon t h e a m o u n t of bonds outstanding. I n 1938, t h e separate authorities applicable to different classes of public debt obligations were consolidated under one limitation applicable to all public debt obligations outstanding under t h e Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended. T h e limitation established at t h a t time was $45 billion^ when our public debt amounted to a b o u t $37 billion. This limit was later raised to $49 billion. Early in 1941, before this Nation h a d become actively involved in World W a r I I , t h e debt limitation was increased to $65 billion and t h e public debt was about $46 billion. During t h e period from 1942 until 1945 t h e debt limitation was increased each year by substantial a m o u n t s until it reached $300 billion on April 3, 1945, when our public debt amounted to about $234 billion. After t h e close of World War I I , t h e limitation was reduced from $300 billion to $275 billion in June 1946. At t h a t t i m e our t o t a l debt a m o u n t e d to about $268 billion, and t h e balance in t h e general fund of t h e Treasury amounted to more t h a n $14 billion. Changes during these periods consistently provided larger margins between t h e outstanding debt and t h e successive limits t h a n now exist or which would result from t h e temporary increase under consideration. Primarily to t a k e care of t h e uneven flow of corporate tax collections, it was necessary to increase temporarily t h e $275 billion debt limitation to $281 billion for t h e year ending J u n e 30, 1955. This limit was continued until J u n e 30, 1956, when t h e t e m p o r a r y increase was reduced to $278 billion for t h e year ending J u n e 30, 1957. Since J u n e 30, 1957, we have been operating under a limitation again of $275 billion. T h e committee m a y refer to table I, which outlines these changes, and to chart B, which compares t h e debt outstanding in recent years with t h e debt limit. I should like here to particularly call your attention to chart B. T h e Treasury operated very close, as you will see, to t h e $275 billion debt limit during t h e fiscal year 1954. There was somewhat more leeway under t h e temporary increase in t h e debt h m i t to $281 billion during fiscal 1955, b u t in fiscal 1956 t h e d e b t was close to t h e limit during substantial p a r t s of t h e winter. There was a little greater margin under t h e limit a year ago, b u t , if you will notice, during t h e p a s t m o n t h s t h e Treasury has again been extremely close to t h e s t a t u t o r y debt limit. I think it is significant t h a t you see from t h e chart t h a t we normally have sufficient margiil under t h e debt h m i t on J u n e 30 of each year and t h a t it is during t h e winter when t h e limit is t h e tightest. Total cash balances in Federal Reserve Banks a n d commercial banks (tax a n d loan accounts) were down to $1.6 billion in mid-January, and are estimated to be a b o u t $1.5 billion in mid-February. Here I would like to explain t h a t in order t o have cash in t h e Federal Reserve Banks with which to p a y w h a t we anticipate in drawings against t h e Treasury, we are required to draw out of our accounts in t h e commercial banks (known as tax a n d loan accounts) sufficient a m o u n t s of money in advance to insure t h a t there will be a d e q u a t e cash on h a n d t o meet our expected obligations. While t h e deposits carried in commercial b a n k s are on demand, there are approximately 11,000 banks involved, and t h e physical problem of handling t h e transfer of deposits from t h e commercial banking system t o t h e Federal Reserve Banks involves a lag of several days. As an example of our tight position, during early F e b r u a r y our balances in commercial banks, less withdrawal notices, which will have been sent out, m a y be as low as $250 million—or less t h a n an average day's disbursements. I t is too early to make precise day-to-day projections of our cash balances t h r o u g h March, b u t a t present it appears it m a y be necessary to resort to substantial direct borrowing from t h e Federal Reserve (if there is a u t h o r i t y under t h e debt limitation) in view of heavy p a y m e n t s , including interest, and maturing -.securities due on March 15. 247 EXHIBITS CHART B PUBLIC DEBT OUTLOOK. $Bil.h 280 Legpl Limit 270 260 250 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 Fiscal Yeors Here I might state for the committee, as I am sure most of you realize, we have an authority granted by the Congress of $5 bilhon borrowing authority from the Federal Reserve Bank. Proceeds from corporate tax collections do not become available in large volume to meet expenditures until March 18 and thereafter. One of the most serious difficulties encountered by the Treasury in operating under the present limitation is the problem of carrying out our financing in an orderly and economical manner. A large portion of our pubhc debt is made up of securities with relative short maturity. More than $25 bilhon of Treasury bills come due within the next 90 days and more than $50 bilhon of Treasury certificates, notes, and bonds are coming due in the calendar year 1958. I should like here to caU your attention particularly to charts C and D. Chart C shows that our first maturity in calendar 1958 is on February 14 and we have some further maturities almost every moiith during the rest of the year. Maturities on the chart C total $50.2 bihion, of which $21.3 bilhon is held by Federal Reserve Banks and Government investment accounts. I should also like to point out that the figures on this chart do not include $3 billion of tax-anticipation bills which we expect to pay off in March, nor do they include $22 bilhon of regular 90-day Treasury bills which we normaUy turn over 4 times a year. On chart D there is iUustrated the total volume of Treasury financing that has taken place in recent years, which again excludes the $22 billion of regular Treasury bills that we roll over quarterly. The total, for example, in 19^7 was $65 bihion, of which we were able to extend $8.8 mihion beyond 1 year in 1- to 5-year notes, and $1.3 bilhon in 12- and 17-year bonds. Some part of this short-term indebtedness is coming due each month, so that at all times the Treasury is faced with substantial refunding problems. An objective of sound fiscal policy is to extend the maturity of new issues whenever opportunities are available, so as to avoid concentrating too large a portion of the public debt in the area of short maturities. In recent years, due to market conditions or the restrictions of the debt limit, opportunities to accomphsh this objective have not been very frequent. We should be able to take advantage of opportunities in the period ahead of us. Under the present debt limit, we would not be able to take f uU advantage of such 248 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY CHART C MARKETABLE MATURITIES IN 1958. Excluding Regular and Tax Anticipation Bills 11.5' $Bil. 10.9 9.8 , ^ Federal Reserve Banks'" . . A i i Other \ ^ Investors 4.4 4.2 Callable 24 5 ] 3.9: 42 14 El 46 22 19 m. Z \ % 2'/27o I t o C.I. Bd. E.Nt Feb. 14 Mar. 15 Apr.l Sp. 3'/2% Bill C.I. ^Apr.15-' 2V/o 2^/8% 2%% Nt. Bd. Bd. ' June 15 ' 4% CI. Aug.l l'/2% E Nt. Oct.l 3%% 2'/2% C.I. Bd. Dec.I Dec. 15 > Including Government investment accomatsi CHART D . VOLUME OF TREASURY MARKET FINANCING (Excluding Weekly Roll-Over of B i l l s ) $Bii. 1.3 60 5'10 Year Bonds ^OtherNotes Long-Term Bonds^ 40 h ^ Certs andShort Notes^ 20 ^Seasonal '51 '53 - Calendar Years — 1 Notes originally 20 months or less to maturityi 249 EXHIBITS opportunities. During the past several months, we have been able to issue only relatively smah amounts of longer maturities on two occasions. Those are the 12- and 17-year bonds referred to.. The practice of the Government going frequently to the market disturbs not only the market for Government securities but also the market for corporate, State, and municipal securities, and for businesses of all kinds. We should be able to conduct our operations on a scale commensurate with our needs and in accordance with the conditions which prevail. We should as far as possible leave the markets freer to absorb new financing by State and local governments and private businesses. The circumstances which I have outlined, in our judgment, require a prompt temporary increase in the present statutory debt limitation. We will still experience in fiscal year 1959,a continuation of seasonal peaks in the collection of corpoi-ate income taxes. These collections of corporate taxes are gradually being leveled off, but there are stih large seasonal fluctuations. Under these circumstances, it is^necessary for the Treasury to borrow large sums in the JulyDecember period to meet expenditures, and to pay off such borrowings in the January-June period, even in years when we have balanced budgets. CHART E .BUDGET SURPLUS OR DEFICIT-SEMIANNUAL. Fiscal Years 1955 - ' 5 9 $Bii. Budget Surplus •5 r \ JulyDec. JulyDec. JulyDec. Jan.June JulyDec. Jan.June Jan.June •5.7 Jan.June Jan.June [-6.1 -6.8 -7.9] -5 JulyDec. -9.3 Budget Deficit -10 1955 '56 '57 '58 '59 Here I should like to direct your attention to charts E, F, and G. Chart E I think shows quite vividly the seasonal peaks and vaheys of the Federal budget which indicates the extent of which heavy Treasury borrowing is required during each July through December period in anticipation of a budget surplus in the following spring. Chart F is illustrative of the fact that there is no marked seasonal movement in budget expenditures, but if you look at chart G in relationship to chart F you see the big seasonal swing in the Government's deficit or surplus position. It grows out of the way^in which taxes flow into the Treasury. As I have said, some of this unevenness is being ironed out slowly as a result of the corporate tax cohection change under the Revenue Code of 1954, but still it has a way to go. ^ It is difficult to make precise month-to-month forecasts which reflect all operations of the Government, including collection of a great many types of revenues, 250 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY CHART F BUDGET EXPENDITURES-SEMIANNUAI Fiscal Years 1955-'59 JulyDec. Jan.June 1955- JulyDec. Jan.June -1956- JulyDec. Jan.June -1957- JulyDec. Jan.June -1958- CHART G BUDGET RECEIPTS-SEMIANNUAL Fiscol Yeors l955-'59 JulyDec. Jan.June -1959- EXHIBITS 251 the rates of expenditures under the programs of each agency, the issue, and retirement of our public-debt obligations, and all of the multitude of operations reflected in the total inflow and outflow of the Treasury. We have, however, made estimates of the public debt and cash balances which are based upon our best judgment as of the moment, and I am submitting for your information these figures in the attached table III. These figures assume maintaining midmonth and end-of-month cash balances of $3.5 bihion and for an allowance of $3 billion for flexibility in financing and for contingencies. ^ TABLE I.—Debt limitation under Sec. 21 of the Second Liberty Bond Act, as ainended—history of legislation Act ofSept. 24, 1917: Sec. 1 (40 Stat. 288), authorized bonds in the amount of i $7,538,945,400 Sec. 5 (40 Stat. 290), authorized certificates of indebtedness outstanding (revolving authority) ----.. -... 2 4,000,000,000 . Apr. 4,1918: Amending sec. 1 (40 Stat. 502), increased bond authority t o . . . ^ 112,000,000,000 . . Amending sec.. 5 (40 Stat. 504), increased authority for certificates outstanding to.. 2 3, ooo, 000,000 July 9, 1918: Amending sec. 1 (40 Stat. 844), increased bond authonty t o . . . 1 20,000 OOOOOO" Mar. 3, 1919: ' ' . Amending sec. 5 (40 Stat. 1311), increased authority for certificates outstanding to.. 210,000,000,000 New sec. 18 added (40 Stat. 1309), authorized notes in the araount of 17,000,000,000 Nov. 23,1921: Amending sec. 18 (42 Stat. 321), increased note authority to outstanding (establishing revolving authority) . 2 7^ 500,000,000 June 17,1929: Amending sec. 5 (46 Stat. 19), authorized Treasury bills in lieu of certificates of indebtedness, no change in limitation for the outstanding 2 IQ QOO, 000,000 Mar. 3, 1931: Amending sec. 1 (46 Stat. 1506), increased bond authority to '28.000,000,000 Jan. 30,1934: Amending sec. 18 (48 Stat. 343), increased authority for notes outstanding '•• to 2 10,000,000,000 Feb, 4, 1935: Amending sec. 1 (49 Stat. 20), limited bonds outstanding (establishing revolving authority) t o . . . ...J . 2 25,000,000,000 New sec. 21 added (49 Stat. 21) consolidated authority for certificates and bills (sec. 5) and authority for notes (sec. 18). Same aggregate amount outstanding • 2 20,000,000,000 (New sec. 22 added (49 Stat. 21) authorized United States savings bonds within authority of sec. 1.) " . May 26,1938: Amending sees. 1 and 21 (52 Stat. 447), consolidated in sec. 21, authority for bonds, certificates of indebtedness, Treasm-y bills and notes (outstanding bonds limited to $30,000,000,000). Same aggregate total outstanding 2 45,000,000,000 July 20, 1939 (53 Stat. 1071): Amending sec. 21, removed limitation on bonds without change total authorized outstanding of bonds, certificates of indebtedness, Treasury bills and notes . 2 45^ 000,000,00() June 25, 1940 (54 Stat. 526): Sec. 302, sec. 21 of the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended, is hereby further amended by inserting "(a)'' after "21." and by adding .. at the end of such section a new paragraph as follows: ^ "(b) In addition to tbe amount authorized by the preceding paragraph of this section, any-obligations authorized by sections 5 and 18 of this Act, as.amended, not to .exceed in the aggregate $4,000,000,000 outstanding at any one time, less any retirements made from the special fund made available under section 301 of the Revenue Act of 1940, may be issued under said sections to provide the Treasury with funds to meet any expenditures made, after June 30,1940, for the national defense, or to reimburse the general fund of the Treasury therefor, any such obligations so issued shall be designated 'National Defense Series'." 3 4,000,000,000 Feb. 19,1941 (55 Stat. 7): Amendmg sec. 21, to read "Provided, That the face amount of obligations issued under the authority of this Act shall not exceed in the aggregate $65,000,000,000 outstanding at any one time." Eliminates separate authority for $4,000,000,000 of national defense series obligations 2 55^ 000,000,000 Mar. 28,1942 (56 Stat. 189): Amending sec. 21, increasing limitation to $125,000,000,000. 2125,000,000,000 Apr. 10, 1943 (57 Stat. 63): Amendmg sec. 21, increasing limitation to $210,000,000,000.2 210,000,000,000 June 9, 1944 (58 Stat. 272): Amendmg sec. 21, increasing limitation to $260,000,000,000.2 260,000,000,000 Apr. 3, 1945 (59 Stat. 47): Amendmg sec. 21 to read: "The face amount of obligations issued under authority of this Act, and the face amount of obligations guaranteed as . to principal and interest by the United States (except such guaranteed obligations as may be held by the Secretary of the Treasury), shall not exceed in the aggregate $300,000,000,000 outstanding at any one time." 2 300,000,000,000 June 26, 1946 (60 Stat. 316): Amending sec. 21, decreasmg limitation to $275,000,000,000 and adding, "the current redemption value of any obligation issued on a discount basis which is redeemable prior to maturity at the option of the holder thereof shall be considered, for the pm-poses of this section to be the face amount of such obligation." 2 275,000,000,000 Aug. 28, 1954 (68 Stat. 895): Amendmg sec. 21, effective August 28, 1954, and ending June 30, 1955, temporarily increasing limitation by $6,000,000,000 2 281,000,000,000 June 30, 1955 (69 Stat. 241): Amendmg Aug. 28, 1954 act, by extending until June 30, 1956, increase in limitation to -..: 2 281,000,000,000 July 9,1956 (70 Stat. 519): Amending act of Aug. 28,1954, temporarily increasing limitation by $3,000,000,000 for period beginning on July 1,1956, and endhig on Jane 30, 1957, to --: 2 278,000,000,000 1957: Effective July 1, 1957, temporary increase terminates and limitation reverts, under actof June 26, 1946, to 2 275,000,000,000 1 Limitation on issue. 2 Limitatiori on outstanding. 8 Limitation on issues less retirements. 252 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY We want to reemphasize that we are now at the period of the year when the Treasury finds itself in a most difficult position and at a time when we are facing major financing operations. We respectfully urge, therefore, that the Congress give prompt consideration to this matter. I would like most strongly to say that we of the Treasury assure the members of this comrnittee and the Congress that we will exert all of our abilities to achieve the utmost economy in governmental operations and to manage the public debt as best we can in the national interest. TABLE II.—Marketable maturities, January 1958 through December 1958' [In millions of dollars] Maturity date, 1968 Feb. Mar. Apr. June Aug. Oct. Dec. Total amount outstanding, Dec. 31,1957 Security (Issue date) 35'6-percent certificate (Feb. 15,1957) 2}^-percent bond (June 2, 1941)... Ij^-percent exchange note (Apr. 1,1953).. Special bill (Aug. 21, 1957) 3|^-percent certiiBcate (May 1,1957)...._. 2^^-percent note (Dec. 1,1955).. 2H-percent bond (July 1, 1952) 2?4-percent bond of 1958-63 (June 15,1938) 4-percent certificate (Aug. 1,1957) iV^-percent exchange note (Oct. 1,1953).— 3^i-percent certificate (Dec. 1,1957) ._ 2^^-percent bond (Feb. 15,1953) 10,851 1,449 383 1,751 2,351 4,392 4,245 919 11,519 121 9,830 2,368 Total 50,179 1 Excludes $22,100,000,000 of regular weekly Treasury bills and $3,000,000,000 tax-anticipation bills due Mar. 24,1958. 2 Partially tax exempt; callable June 15,1958. TABLE III.^—For costing of cash balance and debt, fiscal year 1959, based on constan* operating cash balance of $3,500,000,000 (excluding free gold) [In billion dollars] Operating balance, Federal. Reserve Public debt subject to banks and limitation depositaries (excludmg free gold) 1958_Julyl5 _ July 31 Aug. 15Aug.31 Sept. 15 . Sept.30 Oct. 15 . -. Oct. 31 Nov. 15 -. Nov. 30 Dec. 15 Dec. 31 _ 1959—Jan. 15.. Jan. 31 Feb. 15 Feb. 28 Mar. 15. Mar.31... Apr. 15 - Apr.30 May 15 MaySl June 15-- June 30 - 1.. - - -. : 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 271.6 272.6 273.5 273.6 275.2 271.3 273.4 274.7 275.3 275.0 277.1 275.3 276.9 276.1 27,6.8 275.4 276. 6 271.3 272.8 273.1 273.4 273.1 274.9 269.3 Allowance to provide flexibility hi Total publicfinancing debt limitation required and for contingencies 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 .3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 274.6 275.6 276.5 276.6 278.2 274.3 276.4 277.7 278.3 278.0 280.1 278.3 279.9 279.1 279.8 278.4 279.6 274.3 275.8 276.1 276.4 276.1 277.9 272.3 NOTE.—When the 15th of a month falls on Saturdav or S'^Tiday, the figures relate to the following business day. EXHIBITS 253 |]XHIBIT 16.—Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, August 15, 1958, before the Senate Finance Committee in support of H. R. 13580, a bill to amend the statutory debt limitation. The President requested on July 28, in letters addressed to the Speaker of the House and the President of the Senate, that the Congress increase the regular statutory debt limit to $285 billion and provide an additional temporary increase of $3 billion to expire June 30, 1960. H. R. 13580 was passed by the House on August 6 to carry out the President's request. I am appearing this morning to urge your favorable consideration of this bill. I appeared before this committee last January to urge enactment of a bill to provide a temporary increase of $5 billion in the statutory limit on the public debt. The bill was enacted and a,pproved on February 26, 1958, and provides a temporary increase from $275 billion to $280 billion until June 30, 1959, in the limit on the public debt. When I appeared in January, the need for a debt-limit increase was predicated on the following factors: (1) The fact that cash balances should be maintained at a more adequate and prudent level: (2) There was need for more flexibility to allow efficient and economical management of the debt. (3) Even with a balanced budget there would stfll be large seasonal fluctuations in receipts which would make operations under the $275 billion limit most difficult. The budget estimates on which we made our recommendation anticipated a deficit for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1958, of $388 million, and a surplus for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1959, of about $466 million. At that time, it was particularly difficult to estimate the extent of the change in economic conditions. The impact of the recession on corporate profits, which are such an important source of revenue, and the extent of the duration of the interruption in the growth of personal income were hard to foresee for a period extending 1:8 months into the future. Instead of a budget deficit of $388 million for the year ended June 30, we incurred a deficit of $2.8 billion. This deficit was brought about because our net revenues amounted to $69.1 billion, against the January estimates of $72.4 billion. Instead of entering the current fiscal year ending June. 30, 1959, with an anticipated budget surplus of $466 million, we are now faced with an estimated budget deficit of about $12 billion. This amount is based on estimates of $79 billion for expenditures and $67 billion for receipts. In giving these estimates we recognize the difficulty of making predictions this far ahead. They are our best estimates, and as such, provide a reasonable approach to consideration of the debt limit. This substantial change in the outlook of our fiscal situation for the current year makes it imperative that we again review the statutory debt limit. We can no longer operate with a $5 billion temporary extension of the $275 billion limit because we cannot look forward to a debt of $275 billion or less on June 30, 1959. The estimated deficit will result in the public debt outstanding, on June. 30, 1959, of nearly $285 billion. It is estimated that our cash working balance will amount to between $4 to $5 billion on that date. An increase in the debt limit is needed even though the general fund balance in the Treasury on June 30, 1958, amounted to about $9,750,000,000, as compared to $5,590,000,000 on June 30, 1957. On June 30, 1958, the gross amount of public debt and guaranteed obligations subject to the debt limit was $276,013,000,000 as compared to the debt subject to limit on June 30, 1957, of $270,188,000,000. ^ The general fund balance on June 30, 1958, amounted to about $9,750,000,000, but the cash working balance (funds available to meet the day-to-day expenditures representing balances in Federal Reserve Banks in available funds and in Treasury tax and loan accounts) amounted to $8,628,000,000, or about $4 billion higher than on June 30, 1957. The lower balance a year ago was due to the fact that a large part of the tax collections in that month was used to retire public debt obligations. These reductions (of tax anticipation issues) amounted to $4,650,000,000 in June 1957, whfle in June 1958 there were no maturing tax anticipation issues, and outstanding marketable public debt obligations increased about $650,000,000. However, the lower 1957 balance made it necessary for the Treasury to borrow $3 bfllion on July 3, 1957, to cover the heavy outlays during 254 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY July last year. With the higher balances on June 30, 1958, the Treasury did not have to do any cash financing this July, even though expenditures are expected to exceed receipts by $4.7 bihion during the month. We are borrowing $3.5 billion in early August for cash requirements of the next couple of months. The statutory debt limit should be amended to give recognition to the current outlook for the year. During the period since 1954, while the Treasury has been operating under temporary increases in the public debt limit, and public debt obligations were issued in excess of the permanent debt limit, it could be reasonably estimated that the excess could be repaid from tax collections prior to the expiration of the temporary increases in the debt hmit, and in fact they were. In the situation we now face, that is not the case. At this point I would like to direct your attention to the attached chart which graphically illustrates this situation.. CHART H PUBLIC DEBT SUBJECT TO LIMIT 288\ ^Bil. . 285. Proposal ^ .278 280V^ 1957 1958 / < ^ » 283.3 280 270 260h 250 • Fiscal Years — It would appear that the only sound course at the present time is to permanently increase the statutory limit to $285 billion. In addition, a further temporary increase of $3 billion will afford us a margin to take care of contingencies. Furthermore, a regular limit of $285 biUion. may present problems to the Treasury before the end of the fiscal year because there are still substantial seasonal fluctuations in the collection of revenues. We will have to look at the situation again before the end of the fiscal year to determine our course of action beyond that date in the light of developments. When budget surpluses are • again in prospect, the matter of the permanent limit can be reviewed. The figures we are using today do not include any changes in estimated expenditures which could eventuate due to recent developments in the international situation. These developments do, however, point up the need for being in a position to take care of contingencies. I am appending tables setting forth our forecast of cash balances and outstanding pubhc debt for the period ending June 30, 1959, including actual figures for the period from January to June 1958. 255 EXHIBITS T A B L E I V . — A c t u a l cash balances a n d debt J a n u a r y - J u n e 1958, a n d forecast J u l y 1 9 5 8 - J u n e 1959, based on a constant operating cash balance of $3.5 billion (excluding free gold) [In billions of dollars. Based on t e n t a t i v e estimates subject to revision] Operating balance of Federal Reserve B a n k s a n d depositaries (excluding free gold) Fiscal year 1959 Public debt subject t o limitation Allowance to provide flexibility in flnancing a n d for contingencies Total public d e b t limitation required Actual J a n . 15, 1958 Jan.31 F e b . 15 F e b . 28 1 M a r . 15 Mar.31 A p r . 15 A p r . 30 M a y 15 M a y 31 J u n e 15 J u n e 30 -._ -_-- , - . 1.7 2.2 1.7 3.4 2.8 . 5.1 5.0 5.2 4.6 5.1 3.3 8.6 274.1 274. 2 274. 0 274.3 275. 3 272.3 274.9 274. 7 274. 6 275. 3 274.9 276.0 5.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 -3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 275. 2 275.2 276.5 276.8 277. 6 275.6 278. 6 279.7 280. 5 • 280. 8 283.0 281.9 283.3 283.3 284.2 283.4 . 284.8 281. 5 283.4 284.5 284. 9 285. 2 287.2 283.0 ' --- Estimated J u l y 15 (actual) J u l y 31 A u g . 15 A u g . 31 Sept. 15 Sept. 30 Oct. 15-Oct. 31 N o v . 15 N o v . 30 Dec. 15 Dec. 31 J a n . 15, 1959 J a n . 31 F e b . 15 F e b . 28 M a r , 15 . M a r . 31 A p r . 15 A p r . 30 M a y 15 May31 J u n e 15 --J u n e 30 _ . ... - - - : 1- - 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 . 3?0 278 2 279.6 279.8 280 6 288.6 281.6 282.7 283.5 283.8 286.0 284.9 286.3 286.3 287.2 286.4 287.8 284. 5 286.4 287.5 287.9 288.2 290.2 286.0 NOTE.—When the 15th of a month falls on Saturday or Sunday, the flgures relate to the following business day. 1 Statutory debt limitation of $275 billion was temporarily increased on Feb. 26,1958, to $280 billion until June 30,1959. 479641—59- -Ifi bo Ol CO Ox 00 TABLE V.—Forecast of cash position and debt, fiscal year 1959 (In billions of dollars. Based on tentative estimates subject to revislonl td 1959 1958 July August September October June Total +.2 3.5 +1.4 3.7 -.2 5.1 —4.8 9.7 4.7 4.5 4.5 6.2 5.2 3.5 3.7 5.1 4.9 4.9 4.0 4.1 2.8 3.9 3.9 5.5 4.6 2.9 3.0 4.5 4.2 4.2 275.9 -1-2.9 278.8 -2.4 276.4 -f-3. 8 280.2 -.2 280.0 +2.2 276.3 +5.9 282.2 +3.0 285.2 -.8 284.4 -3.6 280.8 +3.1 283.9 +2.2 286.1 -2.6 276.3 +7.3 275.9 278.8 276.4 280.2 280.0 282.2 282.2 285.2. 284.4 280.8 283.9 286.1 283.6 283.6 275.6 278.5 276.1 279.9 279.7 281.9 281.9 284.9 284.1 280.5 283.6 285.8 283.3 283.3 6.0 275.7 5.2 277.8 2.2 276.3 5.5 280.2 3.0 279.6 2.9 282.0 5.7 285.1 3.4 283.7 2.8 283.7 4.2 283.7 3.8 284.8 2.2 285.5 4.6 4.3 5.6 276.3 -.4 End_. Debt subject" to limit 4.6 W O . - 1 This balance differs from the general fund balance as it includes only Treasury accounts in Federal Reserve Banks (collected), Treasury tax and loan accounts, and gold in general fun (3. o >^. -1.7 6.2 6.2 Midmonth figures: Operating cash balance (including gold) ' Debt subject to limit May -1.0 6.2 5.0 Public debt outstanding: Beginning Change _ . _ April +1.7 4.5 +.1 - March -5.2 9.7 -1.6 6.2 General fund balance at end February +1.1 3.4 +1.2 5.0 Operating cash balance at end (including gold) 1- January -1.3 4.7 3.4 -4.7 9.7 Change in general fund balance General fund balance at beginning Novem- Decem- Subtotal July-Deber ber cember O > o td > ZP d EXHIBITS 257 EXHIBIT 17.—Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, January 11, 1958, at the Budget Press Conference, Treasury Department , The President's budget recognizes the character of our time by emphasizing the things we must do to remain strong-for the; saj^e of peace in the world. It also recognizes .our. continued determination to ad=here'to the principles of fiscal soundness which contribute so much to the health of our economy on which our adequate security is based. Our efforts to keep militarily strong are underscored by the increases in defense spending for the most modern forms of weapons, and decreased defense spending for military items of declining importance. Our adherence to fiscal eoundness is underscored by the fact that in fiscal 1959 we will endeavor to pay as we go for our necessary expenditures; that we propose to postpone, and in other cases reduce or eliminate, certain nondefense programs; and that we ask that present tax rates be continued to contribute to paying as we go to the maximum possible extent. I believe that this budget represents proper and practical recognition of our military need in the light of changed conditions, while recognizing theneed to keep our economy strong and growing so as to provide not only for the individual wellbeing of our people but the basic-source of:our military strength! ;;- , We are currently estimating budget receipts ^for fiscal 1959 at $74.'4 billion, an increase of $2 bihion over our current estimates for fiscal 1958. These estimates are based upon certain assumptions which we must make in the budget process. In making the revenue estimates for the fiscal years 1958 and 1959 the following income assumptions for calendar years 1957 and 1958 were used. Calendar year Income and profits 1957 1958 In billions of dollars •• Personal incomerCorporate profits -. _- - _ 343 42 352 42 • The current readjustments in the economy with which we are all familiar are in part the consequences of a period of rapid expansion during the past several years. These readjustments, however, require us to scale down our earlier estimates of receipts in the present fiscal year. On the other hand, I believe very confidently in the continued growth of this Nation once the present period of adjustment is completed. We have the ingredients for a healthy economy and for one that will expand to meet our needs. It would be a mistake, I feel, for anyone to sell our dynamic economy short for any protracted period. We have a current annual gross national product of inore than; $430 billion. We have a growing population. We are constantly improving our standard of living. We have, in addition, a sensitive willingness in our people and our Government to use the mechanisms at our command so as to employ our economic strength in a way which will assure a reasonable rate of sustainable growth. ' I think, also, that we must remember that the power of economic decision in this country rests with millions of free people. With this freedom goes responsibility. These responsibilities rest upon the Government, upon businessmen, workers, farmers, investors, and every citizen who participates in our way of life. - This very freedom imposes self-discipline and I think we will rise to meet whatever disciplines are required of us; and in the long run we will avoid transient considerations and follow a course of action that will provide necessary security and a better lot for the people. History records that in a number of countries where the failure to observe sound fiscal and monetary policies inflicted hardships and suffering on the people, the citizens did not have the basic understanding and the self-discipline to which I refer. During the coming year our large gross national product will include, in addition to. the private expenditures the substantial Government expenditures represented in this budget. I believe that we will all be prudent and that we will all be confident in the use of these great resources to our best advantage both as individuals and as a Nation. 258 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Realizing the enormous size of our task, we here in the Treasury want to meet our responsibility in financing the obligations of the Government in a reasonable, flexible, and sensible manner.. First of all, we are going to pay for security for our countrj^, as such security is judged by the people in the best position to know. We are going to regard our position of strength as a long-time.requirement and think in terms of maintaining our security over an unknowable period: of time. We are going to try tO: assure the kind of economic strength and development that is indispensable to our military security. We will neglect neither, and the world should know it! Whatever choices are required, we will make them. Whatever discipline is called for, we will exercise it as a free people should. This budget has had long and arduous consideration by the people responsible for our military security and for our other essential programs. We believe it is a practical and prudent budget that will add significantly to our military strength while recognizing the fundamental importance of a healthy growing economy not only to support that security, but provide better living for our people. EXHIBIT 18.—Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, February 7, 1958, before the Joint Economic Committee on the January 1958 Economic Report of the President • I am glad to have this opportunity to appear before the Joint Economic Committee. The Economic Report of the President and the deliberations and reports of this committee and its subcommittees, together with the work of the Council of Economic. Advisers, are.of great value in developing.and maintaining coordinated economic policies which will facilitate, to the greatest extent possible, strong and balanced economic growth in our dynamic economy. Perhaps the one characteristic of our American economy which has persisted since the beginning of our history has been growth by means of constant change. Fluctuations and- dislocations are typical of a dynamic, competitive system in which the energies of free individuals have full scope. We must expect that the momentum of our economy, will not be the same in all sectors of activity at the same time. Throughout our economic history there has been constant evolution of both our needs and wants and our means of satisfying them. We have firm grounds for our belief that our Nation possesses the basic ingredients of an economic system which will insure a sound maintainable rate of economic growth. At present we are passing through a period which is presenting certain difficulties and problems. This requires our continued and careful evaluation. But we must recognize that the need for appraisal, for considered judgment and action, is one of the responsibilities of membership in a free society. One of our great strengths is the dedication of our Government and our people to the task of maintaining the basic health of our econom3^ Neither infiation nor deflation will be allowed to run a ruinous course. Our judgments last December in arriving at our estimated budgetary receipts for the period. 18.months in advance were admittedly difficult. They took into consideration both the current problems of our economy and a confidence in the strength of the underlying forces of our system contributing to growth. A further consideration was the fact that each of our governmental departments and our monetary agencies would continue to conduct their operations so as to contribute renewed vitality to our economy. Some of the specific factors contributing to our judgments will be discussed later on. We have not endeavored to judge the movements of our economic system with exact nicety nor to estimate shifts in the economy at precise moments. Rather, our judgments s^e predicated upon the belief that the restrictive phases of economic fluctuations would not continue for a protracted period. It seems most important to us that our economic outlook in terms of future growth should be evaluated from the standpoint of long-range factors as well as those of a shorter term. Let us first review some of the forces underlying our belief in long-term progress. We have a growing, vigorous population. We have a highly competitive, productive economy. Rapid technological advances have created new products and processes. Long-range and careful planning is becoming more predominant. All of these forces are generating new demands and new needs. In order to EXHIBITS 259 satisfy these and like requirements, we must look to our natural resources, our expanded industrial capacity, our growing skills, our managerial capacity, and other like contributors to our productive machinery. When we view our long-term situation in perspective, therefore, it is clear that we have on the one side the expanding needs and wants of our growing population and on the other side the capacity and skill for meeting these wants and needs with an expanding volume of output. Moreover, we have the two further essentials of continued high level activity in a free enterprise economy—a relatively stable currency and an efficient financial system. Our financial system is demonstrating ari ability to provide shOrt-term and long-term financing necessary for increasing activity and growth. We must continue to exert every effort to achieve stability in the purchasing power of our dollar. In order to see just where we stand, it is worthwhile examining the elements of our current strength a little more closely. First of all, what are the expanding needs of the American economy? To answer that question, we have only to look around us. Our population is growing at the rate of approximately three million a year—the equivalent of adding a state the size of Kentucky to our consumer population every 12 months. We have constantly increasing demands for new products and materials from American business, as the result of scientific and technological advances taking place in almost every area of activity throughout the economy. We have a constant desire on the part of all of our people to improve their standards of living and to expand the opportunities available to their children. Turning now to our capacity for meetirig these needs—^America has demonstrated that we h^ve in this country an industrial mechanism' capable of meeting any reasonable demands that may be made .upon it, both .military and civilian. The urgencies of.,World War II unlocked many riew productive powers in the American industrial machine. Nevertheless, in the period sirice the end of World War II, American industry has made ari unprecedented investment in plant and equipment. From 1946 through 1957 such investment totaled over $300 billion— a total outlay equal to United States military expenditures during World War II, 1941-45. And this investment is continuing. Business plans for fixed investriient in the calendar year 1958 exceed actual spending in any previous year except 1956 and 1957. Along with our expand.ing plant and equipment, our labor force is growing by three-quarters of a million workers a year'^a part of our growth in population. Yet we are constantly making more efficient use of the contribution of American workers to output. Output per man hour in the private nonfarm sector of the economy has been increasing at an average rate of more than 3 percent a year for the postwar period, reflecting again the tremendous expansion of plant and equipment and improved techniques and working conditions. Moreover, agricultural productivity has been increasing even more rapidly than that of industry. A further—and very important—factor in the long-term situation is the willingness of our people and our Government tb use the mechanisms at our command so as to employ our economic strength in a way which will help assure sustainable growth. In the short-term area, a number of favorable factors can be discerned. First, of all, part of the readjustment has occurred. Reduction of inventory in some lines and certain adjustments in output and prices have already taken place. Possibly in reflection of this fact, both sensitive industrial material pricies and the prices reflected in the all-commodity index of the Bureau of Labor Statistics have recently showed considerable stability. The level of personal income has held up well. There has been prompt and responsive readjustment in certain stock and bond yield and interest rate relationships, and the stock market has shown some elements of strength during the past month. Residential housing construction has turned upward slightly, and mortgage money is becoming more readily available. A sustaining influence can be expected from the stepped-up pace of certain Federal programs such as highway building, and from a number of State and local projects having to do with community facflities. Increased defense spending and.contract placement will also have a stimulating effect on the economy. Perhaps one of the most important considerations, however, either long-term or short-term, is the fact that the confidence of the American people in the basic 260 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY strength of our economy has remained strong. There is evidence that this confidence is increasing. The American people are recognizing that the period of adjustment we are now going through is in part the consequence of our rapid ex;pansion during the past several years. Our power for growth remains unimpaired, and justifies a belief that we have the elements needed for a continuing healthy economy, capable of expanding and adapting itself to any new demands which it may be called upon to fulfill. You are familiar with the contents of the budget message and its recommenda-. tions for a continuation of existing tax rates on corporation income and excises on liquor, tobacco, and automobiles for another year. The economic assumptions underlying our revenue estimates in the 1959 budget, which you requested in your letter of January 20th, are as follows: Personal income was assumed to be $343.billion in the calendar year 1957 and $352 billion in the calendar year 1958. • Gorporaterprofitswere-assumedtb be $42 bfllion iri each of the two years. We do not assume smy change in prices from the present. I should now like to discuss for.a moment some of the problems involved in making the basic assumptions which we must make in estimating the Government's income from taxes. The problem of projecting our revenue receipts, which is a part of the budgetary process, is always difficult. In the months of November and December it becomes necessary, as a part of this operation,, to arrive at certain determinations with reference to income tax receipts for a period 18 months in advance. This task would be much simpler if we could be content with a range of estimates. However, the budget-making process does not permit such a procedure. We are required to use a degree of preciseness which involves a number of specific judgments made with the help of the best evidence and the best experts available. The difficulties inherent in makirig precise determiriations of future tax income are clearly evident in the historical records. These show that various relationships between tax receipts and major ecoriomic indicators which might be expected to be fairly constant over the years do not in fact remain constant. They change considerably from one year to the next; The individual income tax and the corporate tax provide the bulk of our reveniLies; and personal income and corporate profits are the two most importantvbases for estimating receipts from these two tax sources. Corporate profits, however, are not uniformly related to any single indicator or combination of economic indicators. There is even a lack of corrcT spondence as to the direction of change between corpprate profits and the gross national product. In 1952, for example,, there was a large decrease in corporate profits in spite of a substantial increase iri the gross riational product. I might add in passing that the best current data on corporate profits are themselves estimates which are subject to substantial revision, after taxes arq collected and tax returns tabulated in Statistics of Income. Agaiu referring to 1952, estimated corporate profits were reported at the end of the year as $40.$ billion. This figure was finally revised to $35.9 billion, long after the end of the year. Our estimate of $42 billion for corporate profits in both 1957 and 1958 is based on our own best appraisal and on advice which we have sought from staff experts in the Department of Commerce, the Council of Economic Advisers, and the ^Federar Reserve Board. The estimate is^ of course, subject to the same hazards as have been manifest in the past but it represents our best judgment. With respect to the individual-income tax, we have estimated increases in receipts from this source, although these expected increases are substantially less than those which occurred in recent years. Our estimate took into accouut current economic conditions, as well as pur judgment that growth would be resumed during the year 1958 and continued on into 1959. Specifically, the increase estimated for the individual income tax estimated for fiscal 1958 over fiscal 1957 is $1.6 bihion; and the increase for 1959 over 1958 is $1.3 billion. Individual income tax receipts increased $3.4 billion in each of the fiscal years 1956 and 1957. Thus the total increase for the two years 1958 and 1959 of $2.9 bihion in individual income taxes is substantially less than the increase in this category which took place in either one of the years 1956 and 1957. The personal income level for the calendar year 1958 underlying the budget estimate assumes a rise of $9 bfllion over the personal income of the preceding calendar year. This is about one-half of the annual rate of increase of preceding years. EXHIBITS 261 As in the case of corporate tax estimates and the economic indicators on which they are based, the historical record shows that there have been substantial variations in the relationship between individual income tax receipts and their major determinant, personal income. These variations reflect changes in the distribution of persorial income at different income levels, including varying proportions in the taxable and nontaxable categories, and in the realization of capital gains'which affect tax receiptsbut are not included in the statistical concept of personal income. They indicatethe difficulty of attempting to project tax receipts with complete accuracy, even if the underlying figure for personal income could be estimatedaccurately.. In the committee's invitation to appear before you, you asked that I give attention to four questions. With your permission, I should like to address myself to three of them and ask Under Secretary Baird to address himself to thefinal question on our outlook for debt management for the coming year. With reference to your question as to the proper division of labor.between tax policy ahd monetary policy ds instruments of economic stabilization during thecurrent year, I should like to suggest the following: The power of taxation should always first be critically examined as an instrument to provide revenue for the Government upon the most equitable basispossible. Tax changes should be utflized for purposes of economic stimulation only when economic conditions are sufficiently adverse to warrant it. I have heretofore stated that I can conceive of situations where tax reductions might appropriately be brought into play in order to help the resumption of economic growth. It is our judgment that the present condition of the economy does not warrant such action now. We continue to believe that growth in our economic system will reassert itself. We continue to be concerned that we should avoid if possible adding to our already burdensome debt during periods of high production. However, we must continue to examine developments as they progress from month to month with a willingness to use-this or other methods of stimulation if conditions should require them. Monetary and credit policy can be used more appropriately during periods of economic change such as we are now experiencing. The recent sharp reduction in interest rates, plus an increase in availability of credit, provides easier financing of business and loQal government capital projects and projects in other areas of growth, such as residential housing. With reference to your second question concerning recommendations for general or structural revisions in tax policy at this- time, I should like to advise that we are following closely the material which is being developed in the hearingsof the House Committee on Ways and Means and our staff is currently reviewing, the hearings with the staffs of the House and joint committees. These coopera-. tive efforts will continue. We have recently reaffirmed the recommendation of the budget message for a. continuation of the existing corporation income tax rates and the excises on liquor, tobacco, and automobiles for another year. There is about $3 billion in revenue involved. We have also recommended that H. R. 8381 to make certain technical revisions and eliminate some unintended benefits and hardships be enacted with some modifications. This bill has now passed the House and isbefore the Senate Finance Committee. We have also suggested to the House Committee on Ways and Means that the question of tax simplification is in our judgment exceedingly important. I have asked the staffs of the Treasury and the Internal Revenue Service to work closely with the staffs of the Joint Committee on Internal-Revenue Taxation and'the Committee on Ways and Means to determine the most effective way of dealing with this problem. It seems to me to go to the very heart of our voluntary tax system. I hope that we will be able to develop a mechanism for giving effective consideration to this important matter in the near future. On the third question as to the relative importance of encouragement of investment and encouragement of consumption, let me be frank to say that Our system of competitive eriterprise should be such as to encourage increased investment and to provide the generation through savings of adequate capital to finance both replacement and expansion. At the same time, the utilization of the products of our enterprise is dependent upon effective demand which, of course, is the basis for consumption. It would seem, therefore, that any consideration of tax policy should give weight to both the development of effective capital and the stimulation of effective demand. Here again, in order to maintain our voluntary tax system we must be concerned not only with the objectives of eco- 262 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY nomic stimulation, but at the same time so act as to insure fairness to all taxpayers and the development of a system of tax forms and calculations which can be fully understood and prepared without undue complications. EXHIBIT 19.—Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, April 7, 1958, at the opening of the *'Share in America'' savings bonds campaign, New York City, N. Y. I am happy to be here with you today at this kick-off luncheon for the "Share in America" savings bonds campaign in the New York metropolitan area. The savings bonds program is an activity of top importance not only to sound Government financing and a healthy debt structure, but also to the health of our free economy. Moreover, it is a program of direct meaning and purpose to every individual American in helping him to systematically save out of current income and build financial reserves for the important goals in his personal life. As you are aware, we are conducting campaigns this spring in 233 large cities and metropolitan areas throughout the country to enlarge payroll participation and bring new savers into the savings bonds program. New Y'ork being our largest area, much of our success will depend upon the vigor and enthusiasm which you people here today wifl be putting into your persorial campaign to sign up new payroll savers in your businesses and industries. I understand that there are over 3 ^ mfllion persons employed by companies represented in this room. Virtually all have the payroh savings plan in effect. About 30 percent of the employees are now on paj^roll savings, leaving a potential of over 2V2 million employees who can start their savings bond program during New York's "Share-in-America" campaign. By way of dollars and cents, this is what it would mean to the Treasury to obtain these 2}^ million new savers—over $625 million a year in savings bond sales, for the average month's savings now set aside by payroll savers is $20.00. I have no doubt that you will produce telling results. Nevertheless, in my time here today, I want to take up with all of you, as I have with the chairmen of these campaigns throughout the country who met earlier with me in Washington, the reasons why we believe that savings bonds purchases are particularly important at this moment in world affairs to the financial and economic strength of America. The first thing to be recognized in evaluating our financial strength and responsibility is, of course, the immensely increased threat to our security resulting from the Soviet scientific advances. Our Government must now maintain defense programs of a magnitude unprecedented in our peacetime history. We must keep in the lead of scientific progress. We must devise and have in readiness the most modern instruments of warfare and defense against any possible aggression. These programs are costly. They will remain costly for a long time to come. Every American knows that the necessary funds will be provided. But it is equally important to make sure that our financing operations contribute in the highest degree possible to maintaining the strength and stability of the economy. Our enemies would like nothing better than to see us adopt hastily conceived measures which would eventually weaken our productive power. This is where savings bonds enter the picture. The Treasury is pushing sales as vigorously as possible at the present time because of the major contribution which the savings bonds program makes to the financial health^ of the economy. The first way in which this comes about is through the leadership of the savings bonds, program in encouraging thrift in all forms—a goal which has been stressed by the Treasury ever since the inception of the program. Savings bonds have never been promoted at the expense of other types of savings. On the contrary, the prograni has served a unique purpose in encouraging people to save in many different ways. We have no way of estimating how much the savings bonds program has contributed to the total of well over $300 billion, which individuals have saved in this country during the past two decades. But we do know that the contribution has been tremendous, and we are extremely proud of the part which the payroll savings plan in particular has played in helping millions of American families to establish regular habits of thrift. . Now, it may be asked how saving part of one's income helps the country as well as the individual saver. But a moment's reflection will make the point clear. EXHIBITS 263 The surest way to maintain our Nation's strength in these critical times is to provide our economy with the necessary capital to explore new areas of science, to buy. the plant and equipment needed for efficient use of our working force, and to maintain sufficient flexibility to move quickly in response to changing conditions. Our high-speed American economy requires tremendous amounts of capital to keep going—and to keep up-to-date. But real capital must be saved. It cannot be created by any form of monetary magic. Thus, when individual citizens save part of their incomes they are helping the economy grow by providing needed capital. Their regular purchase of savings bonds through the payroll savings plan helps to do this. The money coming into the Treasury from savings bonds sales means that the Government will need to borrow just that much less from financial institutions, such as banks and insurance compariies. Thus, more of the funds of these institutions are made available for private financing uses—a function never more important than now. Another way that the purchaser of savings bonds contributes to the financial soundness of the country is through assisting the Treasury in its task of sound debt management. Our Government debt is large, amounting to about $275 billion at the present time. While this is a heavy burden, good debt management can keep our debt inheritance from hampering sound economic growth. Good debt management,^ however, depends on selling as many Government securities as possible to people who are buying bonds out of their earnings. When the Treasury sells securities to these people, it is able to avoid too much reliance on the commercial banking, system as a source of funds. This reduces the long-term danger of inflation and helps safeguard the value of the dollar. We are striving in our debt management activities in the Treasury to work toward a better structure of the public debt. Our present debt is too short. We have more than $75 billion of marketable securities which fall due during the calendar year 1958. Some part of this debt is coming due each month so that at all times the Treasury is faced with substantial refunding problems. A sound objective of fiscal policy is to extend the maturity of new issues whenever opportunities are available. To the extent that we are able to reduce the times the Treasury has to borrow money each year, we will be contributing to a smoother flow of corporate and municipal financing in the capital markets. We will also be contributing to the amount of free time which the Federal Reserve has to take effective monetary action without always having to be concerned with a new Treasury financing which is coming up, or an issue of new securities which is still in the process of being lodged with the eventual holders of the securities. This means taking advantage of opportunities whenever they present themselves to sell Treasury bonds—^which mature in 5 years or more—rather than Treasury short-term bills, certificates, and notes. We have had such opportunities in the last six months when the Treasury sold more than $8 billion of bonds running 5 years or more to maturity. In addition, since last summer, we have sold more than $9 billion (including our new $3>^ billion issue which we announced last Wednesday) of Treasury notes in the 4- to 5-year area. We feel that this has helped us materially in getting a better balance in our debt structure. But better balance in debt structure is not just confined to marketable debt. Over $100 billion of our debt is not marketable—savings bonds, special issues to trust funds, etc. These issues to the trust funds, like social security, veterans' life insurance, etc., are firmly placed in that they represent the long-term savings of individuals being held in trust by the Government. The nonmarketable debt also includes United States savings bonds. They also represent long-term savings. Individuals hold on to their E bonds something like 7 years on the average. So, for many reasons, savings bonds purchases represent a good deal more than a wise choice of a personal investment. In buying bonds our people are also contributing to the sound conduct of the Government's finances and to the financial strength of the Nation. Some people may ask you, however, as they have asked me—"Why is the Government promoting savings bonds sales at this particular time? In view of the current business decline, wouldn't it perhaps be better to encourage our people to go out and buy things rather than adding to their financial reserves?" The question is not a new one. I understand that during every business decline in the postwar period similar questions have been put to the Treasury. 264 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY In any concentration on current business indexes and trends, it is often easy, of course, to temporarily lose sight of the long-term sustaining forces that have made our country great. Ranking very high among these forces is the habit of thrift, which is fundamentally responsible for the sound financing of our Nation's industrial might as well as a backlog of savings for miUions of our people. The habit of thrift is not something to be encouraged at one time and discouraged at another. It is much too basic. As a matter of fact, the present economic downturn is the aftermath of an inflationary boom which would have been much milder had Americans saved more than they did during recent years. The Government, as you know, has already taken a number of significant •steps in the fiscal and monetary areas which are having important and helpful •economic effects across the Nation. It is important that consumption by individuals be maintained at a high rate. Yet it is equally important that we continue to build regular savings programs which mean so much to our future strength and prosperity. In a sense this is the sort of period when the value of regular savings in building adequate financial reserves is brought home to the average worker more than at any other time. Neither individuals nor businesses can operate soundly without reserves; and these reserves can be built only through the regular setting aside of a portion of income. It is a patient, gradual process—a habit that must be built over a period of time. The current "Share in America" savings bonds campaign is an essential part •of a long-term program of encouraging more Americans to. save for specific purposes, and to save regularly, even if it is only a few dollars a week. There are hundreds of thousands of new workers each year in this country. There are millions of others who would like to save but "just never get around to it." It is these groups we are particularly interested in adding to the rolls of payroll savers. In an econom}^ such as ours where consumers spend between $20 and $25 billion per month, a national savings bonds sales goal averaging less than $^ billion per month is obviously a modest one. Moreover, it must be remembered that the money that goes into savings does not disappear forever from the spending stream. In fact, regular saving over the years produces big spending—for downpayments on new homes, for college educations for our chfldren, for supple.mentary income in retirement j^ars. Yesterday's savings are being spent for today's needs and luxuries; today's savings will be stimiflating tomorrow's economy through helping to keep business throughout the Nation at a reasonably high and stable level despite temporary fluctuations in our free enterprise economy. Also, in this connection it should be kept in mind that when people buy bonds they are simply temporarily transferring their purchasing power to the Government. In the meantime, however, they are keeping the earning power—interest which will later add to the amount of purchasing power that comes back to them when their bonds mature or are cashed. Whfle I have talked with you primarily today about savings bonds and debt management, all of us have an awareness of the constant attention that is being given to our whole economic posture. Whfle there is not time to go into detail on our current economic problems, it is most important that we keep our thinking in due perspective. We are dealing with a complex and varied mechanism that is generating about 430 billions of dollars of gross national product per year. We are generating in the neighborhood of $340 billion per year in personal income. . What is the source of this activity? What makes the wheels turn in this tremendous outpouring of goods and services every 12 months? While the answer can be simply stated, its significance for our present situation is often overlooked. In our free enterprise system, the source of our economic power lies in the freedom of both producers and consumers to make their owu decisions—decisions on markets, decisions on new products, decisions on purchases, decisions on spending versus saving, decisions on what the course of the economy may be in the future. It is these decisions—the millions of them which are made every day—which determine whether the wheels of our economy will turn at a faster or slower rate. While we constantly work to achieve a maximum of productive employment, we must be mindful of the fact that in a competitive economy we can never guar.antee the absence of fluctuations. The whole march of technological advance, the shifts in strategy and the defense needs of our country, the movements of industry, and countless other factors will alwaj^s result in change and will require EXHIBITS 265 us to make economic adjustments. While government action can be helpful in providing an economic climate in which competitive enterprise can flourish, we must nonetheless recognize that government plays a secondary role in our kind of an economic system. In our free enterprise economy, constantly responsive to the decisions of milhons of people in every walk of life, there is seldom an occasion when we can cut through the solution of an economic problem with one short-sharp stroke. Finding the right answers depends on a long and painful process of studying the data, comparing judgments, and arriving finally at the best of a number of possible solutions. What is required of all of us is that we bririg our clearest thoughts to bear on the issues at hand, and that we do our utmost to undertake and support whatever actions seem to be in the best interest of the whole United States now and over the long run. Whatever additional actions on the part of the Government which may be judged as helpful in assisting an early resumption of sustainable growth in the economy will be taken. But any action which we take must be gauged in the light not only of where we are today and of the possible effects of any of our activities in the future. We must try to do those things which reasonable and prudent government would do and which would result in confiderice. We must try to avoid those things which reasonable and prudent government would not do and which would create doubts. Above all else, we must assure that the best and most competerit thought is brought to bear ou these problems. It is this kind of a philosophy which lies at the root of the understanding which has been established that decisions as to what may or may riot be done in the field of taxation will be taken only after bipartisan consultation with congressional leaders. Such a course should reasonably avoid competitive or hasty proposals and should bring to bear on this important problem the most competent judgment, and prudent thought—in the best interests of all of the American people. All of us in and out of Government'must make our separate coritributions to the continuity of confidence in those basic furidamentals and forces which have brought us to high levels of production and which can assure a sustainable rate of gi'owth in the years ahead. We have a growing, vigorous population. We have a highly coriipetitive, productive economy. Rapid technological advances have created new products and processes. Long-range and careful plannirig is becoming more predominant. All of these forces are generating new demands arid new needs. In order to satisfy these and like requirements, we must look to our natural resources, our expanded industrial capacity, our gi'owing skills, Our riianagerial capacity, and other like contributors to our productive machinery. When we view our long-term situation in perspective, therefore, it is clear that we have on the one side the expanding needs and wants of our growing population arid on the other side the capacity and skill for meeting these wants .and needs with an expanding volume of output. Moreover, we have the two further esseritials of contiriued high level activity in a free enterprise economy—a relatively stable currency and ari efficierit financial system. What then should be our attitude? I believe that it should be an attitude of steady-as-we-go, with a tough-niinded confidence in the future. The job that lies ahead for us in strengthening the sinews Of our Nation to meet whatever challenges the future may bring is a job for all America—-business, labor. Govei:nment, and individuals ahke. As a part of that job, every American who buys a savings bond, or who puts time and effort into selling savirigs bonds to others, can truly say: "I am helping to provide for my own future. I am adding to the strength of my country, both military and economic. I am putting real meaning into the slogan, 'Share in America'." ^ EXHIBIT 20.—Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, April 18, 1958, before the American Society of Newspaper Editors, Washington, D. C. There are some postulates which I hold are basic to thinking about economic affairs in this great country of ours. : • (1) There is every reason to believe in the economic future of the United States. 266 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY (2) A dynamic economy should encourage competition but should seek to minimize fluctuations and dislocations. (3) During periods of adjustment, such as the present one, we should remember that no one has all the blame but no one is blameless. (4) The continued operation of a free society presupposes a growing sense of responsibility on the part of all who participate commensurate with.the growing complexity in our economic system. (5) The employment act is a challenge and demand for our best effort, but cannot be regarded as a Government guarantee of no fluctuations or of no unemployment in the absence of rigid controls. (6) Equally as important as jobs is the continuity of the job and the dollars earned in terms of real goods. (7) There is no single doctrine or economic theory that is the sine qua non of growth and development in this country. (8) Every effort to control the process of sustainable growth by a formula or a set of rules ignores the constant chainge that is a part of our development and minimizes judgment. (9) So long as we are free to make our own decisions the most important single factor in our economic system is the continuity of confidence. (10) My faith is strong—I have confidence in the determination of our people to work and plan and accomplish.. We are not headed for a depression, but for new horizons of progress. A number of elements in the cm-rent economic situation are causing concern. Human problenis are involved; waste of our resources is involved. This loss of productive ability must not continue for a protracted length of time. But at the same time we must avoid taking improvident steps which might undermine our future gi'owth and prosperity potentials. In a democracy, decisions of national consequence stem from the people. To do the right things as a Nation, and avoid doing the wrong things, our citizens must understand the problems involved as well as the practical means for solving them. In this, you as editors have a great responsibility. No economic period has ever been so •fully reported, analyzed, and interpreted by the media of this country as the present one. The distribution of this reporting to the American people has been speeded up immeasurably by the technological changes in the newspaper and broadcasting fields. This intensive coverage of our economy is right and proper and as it should be. The American people must be honestly and completely informed about everything that is going on which affects them. With this in mind, I am sure we all recognize the importance of continuing to keep the presentation of happenings in our economy in perspective. Enlightened citizens, objectively informed, can be depended Ori to exercise souud judgment. Keeping our citizens so informed is a great responsibility. ;'.We have in our country an economic system that gives the widest possible play to creative genius and technology. These forces bring about constant change and growth in our society. From the earliest days of our history, Americans have eagerly grasped the opportunities presented them for managing their own affairs. Individual responsibility, facing problems and getting things done, has kept Americans working, striving, and above all improving and adding to the store of ideas and accomplishments. These personal drives are present, as strong as ever. Keeping pace with them are the incalculable new opportunities for creative ingenuity which are.being opened up constantly by modern science. Under these eonditions, it would be shortsighted indeed to sell our American economy short for any protracted period. We have what we need to keep our productive engine operating at a high level—the manpower, the skills, the managerial ability, the inventive genius. We are a people with a strong belief in the future. We have a willingness on the part of our people and their Government to use such mechanisms as are at our command in a way which will help assure a reasonable rate of sustainable growth in our economy. Each time that we examine a proposal, however, let us ask ourselves: Will a specific proposal increase business incentives? Will it add significantly to purchasing power? Will it foster the.sort of confidence that encourages private expenditures? Will it do these things without seriously weakening the fiscal EXHIBITS 267 position of the Government? Is it the sort of activity a prudent government would engage in? These are questions of the greatest national significance. We must take a hard look at the particular kind of economic mechanism we have built in this country. It is an economy that last year turned out more than $430 billion of gross national product. This accomplishment results primarily from the freedom of both producers and consumers to make their own decisions—decisions on markets, decisions on new products, decisions on purchases, decisions on spending versus saving, decisions on what the course of the economy may be in the future. It is these decisions, the millions of them which'are made every day, which determine whether the wheels of our economy will turn at a faster or slower rate. While the Government can be helpful in providing an economic climate encouraging to competitive enterprise, we must nevertheless recognize that Government .action necessarily plays a secondary role in our kind of economic system. We must understand that there necessarily will be some fluctuations in economic .-activity from time to time. Despite heavy Government spending, the Federal Government only accounts for one-eighth of the total spending for goods and services in the country; the rest is determined by private enterprise and decision. Limitations on the power of the Government to stimulate action are well illustrated in the credit field. The Goverh.ni:eh-t'and the Federal Reserve can make credit more readily available—and they have done so. But overall measures to relax credit cannot change the fact that the initial decision to ask for a loan— to make use of available credit—is a personal or individual business matter. It depends on the judgment of the borrower with respect to a number of factors in his own situation and in the economic outlook. Only then does the lender come into the picture. This shows how the psychological element plays such .an important role in our individualistic, private, enterprise system. As justification for confidence, let's look at some of the growth factors that shape our economic-future. . Our population has doubled in 50 years. It is expanding at a rate of 3 million persons per year. The number of American workers is increasing at a rate of nearly 1 milhon per year. Family income after taxes was at an alltime high in 1957 and continues high. With our ^ production more than doubling every 20 years, milhons of new workers wiir be needed to make, sell, and distribute our goods. There is around S300 billion of savings held by individuals alone. The billions of dollars being spent annually for research in industry will mean more products, more jobs, and better living. During the last 12 years we have spent S300 billion for new business plant and equipment needs, a figure which may •easily be dwarfed by our expansion over the next 12 years. Looking at even broader figures, it took the world something like 5,000 years of recorded history to have the first billion people alive on this earth at one time. This occurred in 1830.. It took us only a little over 100 years to have the second billion people alive at one time on this globe. By 1970 the world will have three billion inhabitants—and those three billion are the people whose wants .and demands will make the economy of our country and the economy of the world. We must concern ourselves not only with needs and demands at home, but needs arid demands of the peoples of-the^ree world. America has long passed the age of isolation. In any examination of our productive capacity we must take into account the requirements of all who belong to the future. What we should actually fear is standing still. But we in the United States will need all -the skilled manpower, all the modernized capacity, and all the manageriaL talents we can muster for the expanding volunie of goods and services which will surely be demanded by this growing population—not in 1970, but in the very near future. , Now is the time when Americans should be striving to improve efficiency, to achieve more production per dollar of cost, to avoid inflation of cost and thus of prices. In the final analysis real prosperity can come only from the production of goods and services at prices people are willing and able to pay. All elements of our economic life must come to this realization. Your own role as editors in observing and analyzing these developments is a crucial one—and never more vital than now. • Continual growth in the demand for the products of. American industry is inevitable, as inevitable as the march of time. Our'realists are the ories who recognize this truth. Let us look at the role of Government in our economy by examining three areas •of governmental policy—monetary, spending, and revenue. 268 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY The aim of monetary policy is to foster balanced and orderly economic growth by discouraging the excessive use of credit during boom times and encouraging its use for productive purposes during recessionary periods such as the present. Antiinflationary policies and antideflationary policies are inseparably linked. Most importantly the Federal Reserve System has demonstrated a flexible willingness to utilize its powers and since October 1957 through yesterday has taken a number of steps which have, resulted in substantially increasing the volume of money and credit. The changes in the interest rate structure which have occurred during the past 6 months have been the most dramatic in the history of this country. The price of the cre'dit was among the last to go up and the quickest to come down. As for spending, the Government, out of our Treasury, now spends $1,500,000,000 from Monday morning through Friday night each week. (In addition $1,600,000,000 a month is being paid out for social benefits of various kinds by States, by municipalities, and by the Federal Government.) When one looks at these rates of expenditure within the context of a $400 billion plus economy, who is wise enough to predict with accuracy how much the ecoriomy would be stimulated if the Federal Goverumerit should spend another $20 mfllion a week? And yet the cost to the Government of $20 milliori a week is $1 billion a year. Federal spending is now higher than a year ago and it is rising steadily. Recent actions will accelerate expenditures in Federal programs such as highway,, water resources, and military construction. The Department of Defense in the first six months of 1958 will place contracts with private industry totaling $5H billion more than were placed in the last six months of 1957. Whatever the cost we will defend this country. The cost wfll likely be more rather than less. This is not a short-run effort.. It will go on until the tensions end, until the Russian rulers seek real peace and not a propaganda advantage. When one adds direct military cost, mutual security, the atomic energy cost related to preparedness, the cost of debt that largely results from war, the cost of hospitalization, retirement, and benefits to those who have and continue to deferid us, we are takirig about 83 ceuts out of each dollar collected in Federal revenue. This emphasizes the necessity to do all we can to assure economical operations in all areas for by any standard our course is a costly one. Yet all this means there will be increased spending from the. Federal,Treasury. It also means we have some choices to make. .,,. \ The expenditures for the current fiscal year 1958 indicate, by June 30, a level well over $73-billion. • While revenue receipts are difficult to forecast because of the irregular pattern in payments, they will likely be, for 1958, in the order of magnitude of $70 billion. The sum of all programs now in being for all purposes will probably result in a rate of Federal spending for the fiscal year 1959 in the order of magnitude of.$78 billion, as the Director of the Budget has said. On the revenue side for fiscal 1959 it is even more difficult to estimate for more than a year in,advance. But while we do expect early resumption of economic growth, we must be aware of the likelihood that we will fall short of our January estimate. These figures as to deficits give us concern. They underline the fact that the Federal Government's overall fiscal situation is something that all of us must keep in mind as we consider changes in either the spending or revenue programs of the Federal Government. They do not warrant pessimism. We confidently believe that our present recession will not be of long duration and that sustainable growth in our economy will soon be realized. We believe that the American people want national decisions to be made in the light of careful thought with the best objective judgments as to the long-run interest of the Nation. Already our public debt amounts to a third of all our public and private debt combined. It is equal to $1,600 for each man, woman, and child in this country. We must ask ourselves how much more spending we want to concentrate in the hands of Government—and how much more our Federal debt can be increased without long-term adverse effects on the economic health of the Nation. And now, let us turn for a moment to the other side of the fiscal picture—the situation with respect to possible changes in our tax laws which are being suggested at the present time. EXHIBITS 269 This problem deserves the considered judgment and thinking of us all. It is not something to be done competitively. We must weigh the advantage and the consequences. In some respects ^we are dealing in imponderables. We will be trying to assess not orily the results of taking less money in taxes, but the attitudes of people. What will they do with the money? I am sure many people are thinking that during the years of high economic activity and high employment, in the absence of substantial surpluses, tax reductions are regarded as inflationary. When receipts are down from slackening economic activity and expenditures remain high, tax reductions are regarded as too costly. So the taxpayer asks when can the burden be lessened? We all look forward to some relief from the present high burden of taxation. Whatever action should be judged as proper in this field will continue to receive our daily consideration. Modification of taxes in an economy as complex as ours, however, must be based on a very careful review of what in fact can be accomplished—and not on the theory that a single dramatic action will automatically be all that is required to assure business recovery. The very fact that the present downturn in business developed at a time when personal income was at the highest level in history would seem to indicate many other considerations are involved. We must, I believe, take into our account in making any decision in this area: (1) Our present and our future fiscal position, for not only does debt, but the very management of it, weigh heavily in our economy; (2) We must see ahead sufficiently clearly to have a reasoned plan and judgment as to how we pay for what we spend. The Government is the biggest single buyer of goods and services in this country. Despite any fluctuations which have occurred, one of the reasons for increasing cost is that the things we buy are costing more. In judging our ability to pay for what we buy this fact must always be weighed in the balance. (3) We must reasonably identify the results of our efforts in terms of the resumption of a sustained and a sustairiable growth in terms of equitable distribution, in terms of what creates and maintains new job opportunities, new (expansion, new incentives, real and justified continuation of confidence. These considerations do not always coincide with the most popular. They nave, however, motivated the understanding that any action in this field would L ^ preceded by bipartisan consultation with the leaders in Congress. The w uifare of the people and not any party must first be served. This country is indebted to the leaders on both sides of the aisle for an attitude of statesmanship. Most of us, I think, have faith in our country's future. We believe tomorrow will be all right, but how about today? Above all else we must apply reasoned judgment. We are not seeking a stimulant that brings quick change and a new crisis, but a firm posture of plans, attitudes, and actions that underlie a soundly enduring prosperity with lasting jobs and lasting growth. If this is our faith, let us take stock of the good and the bad, but act as Americans responding to a chaflenge and an opportunity. Businessmen should realize that while this may well be the most competitive year since the end of World War II, there is a lot of business for those who go out for it. Spendable funds are high; personal income in America from the last report was only 1.7 percent lower than the alltime peak. Savings are high. Credit is available. The American people are alert to new and better ways of meeting their wants. They are ready to welcome the almost-forgotten satisfactions of dealing in a buyers' market. A wefl-stocked household can "afford to wait"—but it can also be sold. New technological developments are making yesterday's products obsolete at the same time that they are creating new products, new services, and new employnaent opportunities. Our present situation calls for courage and foresight, for a considered evaluation of all practical measures for encouraging renewed growth. At the same time it calls for understanding and the cooperative efforts of business, labor, government and individuals alike, to assure sound growth and to resist expedients which could set in motion a new round of such inflationary pressures as to leave in its wake even greater problems in the months and years ahead. I have every confidence that the American people will be wise enough and perceptive enough to support the right kind of actions for promoting growth in our competitive economy. We have overcome challenges in the past; we are equal to the present chaflenge. 270 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY EXHIBIT 21.~Statement by Under Secretary ofthe Treasury Baird, February 7, 1958, before the Joint Economic Committee on debt management problems I am glad to have the opportunity to discuss with you today what we in the Treasury consider to be our most important debt management problems - during Ic/Oo. Debt management, of course, does not take place in a vacuum. If it is to make its maximum contributiori to sound financial management it must work effectively with the budget and tax pohcies of the Government and the monetary policies of an mdependent Federal Reserve System. Even though the Treasury's debt operations run weh over $100 bflhon a year in terms of overafl issuances or retirements, good debt management rarely makes headlines. The Treasury is making every effort to handle this very technical and complicated phase of fiscal policy in a way that wfll contribute to sound and sustainable economic growth and stabflity. The environment in which debt management operates consists of many factors, the first of which is the budget outlook. If other conditions are favorable, the debt tends to be more easfly managed at times when the Government is taking in more than it IS spending. As a result of the budget surpluses during the past two years, the pubhc debt has been reduced from $281 bilhon in December 1955, to $275 bfllion in December 1957. As you know, however, the present budget outlook does not aflow for further debt reduction in the year ahead, other than the usual seasonal downswing under the impact of heavy tax collections this spring, which wifl be foflowed by a seasonal increase in the debt again next fafl. Even with a balanced budget, the Treasury has substantial amounts of cash financing to do during the July-Deceiriber period each year in anticipation of heavy tax payments in the January-June period. The seasonal swings in Treasury receipts are being moderated somewhat from year to year as a result of corporations paying their taxes more currently as provided for m the Revenue Code of 1954, but substantial seasonal movements stifl occur. CHART I .THE PUBLIC DEBT. As chart I indicates, there have been only two periods since the end of World War II in which sizable debt reduction out of budget surplus has been realized— a reduction of $8 bfllion in 1947, 1948, and early 1949; and a reduction of $6 bilhon during the last two years. We fufly expect, of course, that further debt 271 EXHIBITS reduction will be possible as we move beyond the period of time, covered by the; present budget, always keeping in mind that important as it is, the goal of*^debt reduction should not interfere with whatever steps are necessary to:: assure the security of our country. . : .. . ; •. ':•.„• One of the Treasury's major responsibilities in'the field of debt irianagemerit is to work toward a better structure of the debt within the overall total' whenever conditions permit. Chart J shows the structure of the debt as of December 31, 1957. .. •_ • . : . • : . • - • :. ;•; ., ' ;-: .• / • CHART J STRUCTURE OF THE PUBLIC DEBT DEC. 311957 Total ^ Nonmarketable Marketable $Bil. Time to Maturity!' Savings Bonds^^Z ($i64>/2Biiiion) 200 .46. ^\^/nye$fmenf Bonds, etc. ^'Spec/of Issues fo Trust Funds 2755 IOO I Partially tax-exempt bonds to earliest call date. Most of the Treasury's effect on the structure of the public debt is achieved through its financing decisions affecting the marketable debt, which, on December 31, 1957, accounted for $164^^ billion of the total $275 billion debt. These marketable issues consist of 91-day bills, 1-year certificates of indebtedness, 1- to 5-year notes, and longer-term bonds—issues which are freely traded in the Government securities market every day. It would be better to have less of the public debt coming due each year. If the $75^^ billion of under one-year debt, which is shown as the bottom bar on chart J, can be cut down, there will be a reduction in both the frequency and volume of Treasury financing. To the extent that progress is made toward this objective, . the Treasury will be contributing to a smoother flow of corporate and municipal financing to the capital markets. It also will add to the free time which the Federal Reserve will have to take effective monetary steps without always having to be concerned with a new Treasury financing which is coming up or financing which is still in the process of being lodged with the eventual holders of the securities. The Treasury would prefer to go to the market less frequently than it had to in 1957. Last year there were financing operations, other than the regular rollover of Treasury bills, in every month except April, a frequency which reflected in large part the pressure of an increasingly restrictive debt limit. The remaining $110J^ bflhon of the public debt is not marketable. As shown on the right side of chart J, this part of the debt includes securities issued to the social security and other Government trust funds. It also includes our savings 479641—59- -19 272 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY bpnds-^which are at the heart of our efforts to achieve a broader distribution of the public debt. • ; . ' A t ' t h e present time, approximately 40 million Americans own $41}^ bfllion of E and H savings bonds. We estimate that something like eight milhon people, are buying savings bonds regularly throiigh payroU savings plans where they work or through the thousands of firiancial institutions around the country that sell these bonds for us as a public service. . . As you know, the rates of interest on Series E and H savings bonds were raised last winter from 3 percent to 3^/i percent, along with a substantial improvement in earlier yields in case a bondholder redeems his security before it is due. This added attractiveness of E- and H bonds, together with their proven appeal of convenience, safety, indestructibility, and a guaranteed interest rate over a period, of years, is already showing up in improved sales. Our sales in January 195&^ were $510 million, up 10 percent over Jariuary a year ago. , We are riow coriductiug a number of intensive campaigns in leading, cities across the Nation to encourage further sales of savings bonds. We are reminding; Americans again that they are adding not only to their own financial well-being, but also to that of their Nation, when they buy savings bonds. Even though E and H bonds may be redeemed on short notice by the holder, they in fact remain outstanding about seven years on the average. As a result, they help to achieve a broader distribution of the debt beyond the short-term area. The only way, of course, in which the Treasury can reduce the amount of marketable debt coming due within one year—short of overall debt retirement—is by replacing some of the maturing short-term debt with new issues that will come due over a longer period of time. That is what we mean by extendirig the .debt,: and we try to do that whenever conditions are favorable. The simple passage of time brings more and more of the debt into the one-year area so that a substantial amount of debt extension is required even if we are to prevent the under one-year debt from growing. As has been so often said, we operate in something like Alice's Wonderland, and have to run fast in order to stay in the same place—and even faster if we want to get some place. Chart K shows what has been done during the last 11 years not only in terms of CHART K VOLUME OF TREASURY MARKET FINANCING (Excluding Weekly Roll-Over of Bills) $Bil. 60 5'10 Year Bonds y -^OtherNotes Long-Term Bonds^ 40 ' ^ Certs andShort Notes'" 11 ^ X ^ Seasonal '51 '53 — Calendar Years — * Notes originally 20 months or less to maturity* 273 EXHIBITS the total amount of Treasury financing that has been required, other than the rollover of Treasury bills, but also the amount of debt extension which has been accomplished. " There was some debt extension back in 1949 and 1950, which helped reduce the size of the financing job in 1951 and 1952. There was further debt extension in 1952 and even more in 1953, but the most substantial debt lengthening that has taken place since the war occurred in the calendar year 1954. During a year when the Treasury had a $62 bihion financing job to do, $31 bilhon—half of the total—was extended into securities running more than one year to maturity^ with alriiost $22 bihion of the extension in 5- to 10-year bonds. This in turn helped to reduce the volume of market financing in 1955 and 1956, but the relatively small aniount of debt extension which the Treasury was able to accomplish under the conditions which existed in 1955 and 1956 meant that again in 1957 our problem was more difficult. The $65}^ bihion figure shown on this chart for 1957 Treasury financing is inflated by the fact that $10 bilhon of the August maturities (mostly held by Federal Reserve Banks) were rolled over into a December maturity and were, therefore, counted twice during the year. The fact remains, however, that even if this doubling-up were excluded, the 1957 job was among the largest in history. Our financing job in 1958, including our current financing, is expected to be somewhat smaller than in 1957. Chart L indicates the marketable maturities, issue by issue, which are facing us during this calendar year. The subscription books on the Treasury refinancing this year have just closed and we hope to be able to announce shortly the results on our offering of a 1-year certificate, a 6-year bond, and a 32-year bond, which was made to the holders of the five issues maturing from February 14 through April 15, as shown on this chart. , Although the Treasury decision to include a large block of maturities in the current financing helps to take some of the burden off of our debt manageriient activities in the spring, we still face a heavy schedule. Total maturities of Treasury certificates, notes, and bonds this year amount to $50 billion, of which $29 billion is held by the public. In addition to this $50 billion, the Treasury has an issue of $3 billion of tax anticipation bills coming due in March (to be paid CHART L MARKETABLE MATURITIES IN 1958. Excluding Regular and Tax Anticipation Bills 11.5 $Bil. Held by: 10.9 Public $28.8 Bil. Federol Reserve! 21.4 TotaL_ $50.2 Bil. , ^ 9.8 Federal Reserve Banks M_ 42 1 Puhlic 24 5.1 3.9 4.6 42 2.2 .1 3%% 2'/2% l'/2% Sp. 3'/2% C.I. Bd. E.Nt. Bill Feb. 14 Mar. 15 Apr! C.I ^ A p r 15-^ 2V/o 2%% 23/4% 4% l'/2% Nt. Bd. Bd. CI ENt. Aug.! Oct.l ' 1 Including'Government investment accounts. June 15 ' 1.9 3 % % 2'/2% C.I Bd. Dec. I Dec. 15 274 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY off in cash), and $22>^ bilhon of regular 91-day Treasury bills which wiU be rolled over four times during the course of the year. This total of $75>^ bilhon outlines the basic dimensions of our job in 1958. Chart M spells out our problem of the passage of time adding to the short-term debt over the next few years, on the basis of the total amount of marketable debt as it now stands. If we add up all of the debt that will come into the under oneyear category in 1958, 1959, 1960, and 1961, we would find that the amount of under one-year debt four years from now, instead of being $751^ biUion, would be $123H billion, if all refinancing in those years was in the one-year area. That would mean about 75 percent of the entire marketable debt would be due within one year in 1961, as compared with 45 percent at the present time. CHART M POTENTIAL GROWTH OF SHORT-TERM DEBT^ DEC. 1957-61 _ ( A s s u m i n g No Debt E x t e n s i o n ) Outstanding Dec.31,1957 Potential Growth during Each Calendar Year Potential Dec.3U96l $Bil. 120 Debt extension needed to keep under i-year debt ot present level 80 Notes and ' Bonds 40 Ci:s and' Bills ;:75!/^i I Marketable maturities within one year (partially tax-exempt bonds to earliest call date). To put it another way, we need a net amount of $48 billion of debt extension in the next four years in order to keep even—and more than that if we are to make any progress in cutting down the size of our short-term debt. We continue to believe that it is in the long-range best interest of this country to offer intermediate- and long-term securities over the next few years whenever conditions are favorable. Cur recent refunding operation was based on this principle. It is obvious, however, that a great deal more remains to be done. In conclusion, I can assure you that the Treasury will continue to discharge its responsibflities of debt management with broad national interest as the first consideration. EXHIBIT 22.—Remarks by Under Secretary of the Treasury Baird, May 9, 1958, at the 38th Annual Conference of the National Association of Mutual Savings Banks, Boston, Mass. Financing your Federal Government As one of the newer members of the Treasury team, I am indeed happy to have this opportunity to discuss with this group of leaders in your industry some of the problems that we currently face in financing your Government. EXHIBITS 275 At present many areas of the economy are experiencing a downturn. But the factors making for a long-term growth trend in the economy are as strong as ever. There is every reason to believe in the economic future of the United States, provided, of course, that we handle our fiscal and monetary affairs wisely. Meanwhile, we are naturally concerned about that downturn. It represents a waste of resources, both human and material. It means disappointment and misery for many of our fellow Americans. The Government is not standing idly by. It has undertaken a positive program for encouraging employment and renewed expansion throughout American industry, keeping in mind short-term needs as well as long-term goals. I should like to summarize the broad features of that program in just a moment. However, we must never lose sight of the fact that the improvement in our present business conditions and the provision of jobs over the long run in a free country are primarily the responsibility of American business, of employers and employees, working together, with confidence, to produce the goods and sell the products which the American people and the people in the rest of the world want and at a price .they can and will pay. Washington can help do this job, but it cannot do the job by itself. The task will only be completed when all Americans, taking a calm reading of the economic signs, move forward with confidence and strength to the new economic achievements which all of us have reason to expect in the months and years ahead. While the major decisions leading to renewed growth rest with individuals and groups in our type of economic system, the Government, as you know, has been entrusted with important responsibilities for assisting in the maintenance of employment activity at high levels. The Employment Act of 1946 reinforces these responsibilities. Let me summarize for you some of the significant steps which the Federal Government has already taken during the present recession to help get the economy back on an upgrade. Residential construction, as you know, is now being stimulated by new regulations liberalizing downpayments and other features of FHA and VA loans. This should begin to show up in increased new housing starts later on this spring. In addition, more funds have been released for military housing and other building under federally sponsored programs, and FN MA purchase authority on low cost homes has been significantly enlarged. A further encouraging factor affecting not only private construction but also the tremendous volume of sorely needed State and local building projects—• schools, highways, hospitals, public buildings, utility services, etc.—has been the dramatic increase in the availability of credit accompanied by an unprecedented drop in interest rates, particularly on market securities. Federal Reserve monetary action during this last 6 months has been very effective in adding to the supply of available credit. These are developments with which I know you are thoroughly familiar. The Government has stepped up greatly the rate of defense contract placements, with $5}i billion more contracts to be let in January-June 1958 than in July-December 1957. Of course, there is a lag between contract letting and budget spending, but the stimulus to the contractors is already being felt. In addition, the military is doing everything possible to see that more procurement is placed through small business and through firms in areas where there is an adequate supply of available labor. Civil works projects are being accelerated and many programs in the January budget, such as urban renewal projects and highway programs, are now expanding significantly. A total of about $2}^ billion more is to be spent on highways in 1958 and 1959 under present plans than would have been spent at the 1957 rate. All of these programs are active Federal programs right now. Furthermore, the administration has put forward other proposals to help counter recessionary tendencies. These include extended unemployment benefit payments—but only on a sound basis. There are also other needed programs being urged which will, as a secondary result, help stimulate activity. They include such things as additional expenditures on water resources projects, post offices, new programs to aid small business and to help meet the financial problems of the railroads. The administration is placing emphasis on desirable expenditures that can be made over the short range and the acceleration of existing programs and not on the type of public works that will take many months or years to get under way and will only get into high gear at a time when they wifl compete with the needs of the private economy. Throughout the present recessionary period there has beeii strong pressure on 276 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY the administration and on the Congress, as you know, for providing further stimulus to our economy through tax reduction. This is a proposal which must have the considered judgment and thinking of all of us. It is not something which should be done hastily or with any other motives than the national interest. We must weigh the advantages and the consequences—and there are many imponderables. Tax reduction looks to some people like a simple dramatic action which can immediately put us back on the road to expansion. Frequently, those who urge it pay little attention to the fact that a major change in tax rates, affecting every sector of the economy and the fiscal position of the Government for years to come, must be arrived at only after the most careful examination of all the factors involved. Tax revision can take many forms and can have many different effects. It must be considered in the context of the measures which have already been adopted or are in the process of being adopted to cushion the current decline and to promote well-justified public confidence. It must be examined in terms of the fiscal position of the Government, and in terms of the attitudes of people. We deal with a world where psychology plays a part as well as statistical quantities. We must ask what would people do with the funds released if there were a cut in taxes? To answer this question, we need to take a fairly close look at the specific characteristics of consumer incomes and consumer spending during recent months. When we do this, the first fact which stands out is that aggregate spendable funds in the hands of consumers have remained high; personal income in the United States, according to the last report, was only 1.7 percent lower than the alltime peak. Next, we find that consumer expenditures for services were at a record high during the first quarter of this year, and expenditures for nondurable goods were almost as well maintained—^less than 1 percent below the record level of the third quarter of 1957. First quarter expenditures for durable goods, on the other hand, were 12 percent below their peak of a j^ear ago. Clearly, the durable goods area of the economy has been the hardest hit. Looked at realistically would the tax proposals most commonly suggested have a stimulating effect where such an effect is most needed—in the durable goods area? The very fact that the present downturn in business developed at a time when personal income was at the highest level in history would seem to indicate that many considerations other than the volume of spendable funds are involved. In one sense, our dilemma grows out of our high standard of living. Our people are so far above a subsistence level that a substantial proportion of their expenditures are postponable. The public has a way of shifting its demands for various types of goods and services. In our free societj^, it is difficult to predict whether, by changing tax policy, we can measurably rechannel the buying demands of the public. The question of a tax cut, you may be assured, is under continuous study by the administration. The administration has stated, however, that it will recommend action only when it has become clearly evident what decision is in the best interests of the Nation, and only after prior consultation with the leaders of both parties in Congress. One of the things that we are trying to do with respect to both revenues and expenditures is to keep our programs in perspective—to try to look at budget policy in terms of its objectives through good and bad times alike. Budget policy is made in the present, but it must, of necessity, look far ahead—months and even years ahead. In our swiftly moving economy, it is unlikely that even the best predictions will coincide precisely with events as they unfold. The very success of the Eisenhower Administration in cutting Government expenditures, for example, has led most people to forget that the budget as the present adminisr tration found it—the planned program for the fiscal year 1954—contemplated expenditures of $78 billion. The present administration succeeded in cutting expenditures back below $65 billion, thus permitting a tax reduction amounting to a $7}^ bfllion cut in 1954 and working toward a budget balance which was achieved in both the fiscal years 1956 and 1957. ...But at about the time that budget balance occurred, both expenditures and revenues began to rise again. It was an uneasy balance. It was apparent, while we were still in a boom situation, that if any leveling of business occurred, the anticipated budget surplus would not be large enough to cushion the probable decline in revenues. Under these .circumstances, we would be back in a deficit situation similar to the one which had been corrected earlier. EXHIBITS 277 The leveling in business has occurred. And it has been accompanied by a new development, the increased threat to our security raised by Soviet scientific advances—with their new military potentials. These new factors in the international situation, plus the speedup of needed domestic programs, are expected to carry Federal Government expenditures back to at least $78 billion in the next fiscal year, with a substantially larger deficit than the prospective $3 billion deficit for fiscal 1958. Our setting in the management of the public debt, therefore, is changing abruptly. Budget surpluses made it possible to reduce the debt from $281 billion in December 1955 to $275 billion at the present time. The debt will now begin to increase again as our budget deficits mount in the months ahead. This will require a new review of debt limit requirements before the adjournment of Congress. The debt limit at the present time stands at $280 billion, but even that will go back to $275 billion on June 30, 1959, according to the present law. When the Secretary asked the Congress for an increase in the debt limit last winter he did so on the basis of the need for more adequate cash balances to cover Treasury operations, more flexibility in handling debt management, and an allowance for contingencies which might arise. Any new review must incorporate the same considerations as well as the prospect of increased deficits. We will continue our efforts in the Treasury to improve the structure of the public debt. It is an important goal and we believe that it is an essential adjunct to monetary policy as well as being sound fiscal policy in itself. Good debt management must contribute to the financial soundness of the economy, and 'this means that it must endeavor to correlate with monetary policy to the greatest extent practicable, rather than setting up cross currents which would run contrary to appropriate actions in that field. Debt management can serve this purpose best in two ways—first, by reducing the volume of refunding operations, and, second, by reducing the number of times which the Treasury must go to the market. Treasury financing operations, as you know, not only compete for funds with corporate and municipal financing, but they reduce the period of time during which the Federal Reserve has relative freedom to operate. When a single borrower accounts for one-third of the entire debt of the country—as the Federal Government does today—it is an obvious fact that such a borrower must compete if he is to meet his borrowing requirements. The Treasury competes when money is tight. It competes when money is easy. The question isn't whether we compete or not; it is, rather, .what form our competing takes. With respect to the number of times the Treasury must enter the market during a given period, the Federal Reserve and the Treasury both recognize that a major Treasury offering is an important event in the financial world; the market must prepare for it ahead of time, and it must have a sufficient period afterwards for thorough absorption of the new issue. This necessarily limits' the period during which the Federal Reserve can use monetary policy with greatest effectiveness. It is our aim to work toward cutting the number of trips to the market. We believe the best months for our future maturities, except for seasonal borrowing^ are probably Februar}^, May, August, and November. Whatever our intentions, it will be many j'-ears before the Treasury can hope to attain these goals. While assistance to monetary policy is a major responsibility of debt management, lengthening the debt is also an important long-run policy goal from the standpoint of the Treasury alone. First of all, it is necessary to work continually at lengthening the debt in order to keep the, total from shortening as a result of the mere passage of time. In the last five years, the Treasury has managed to keep the length of the marketable debt at about five years' average duration. This has taken unremitting effort. We have issued $6 billion of 20year and over bonds and $33 billion of 5- to 20-year bonds to do this. Difficult as it niay be at times to pursue our goal of debt-lengthening, we can never lose sight of our objective. In addition to all the other considerations of monetarypolicy and prudent management of the public's funds, we must leave sufficient leeway in the short-term area at all times so that a sizable volume of short-term loans could, be successfully placed should special circumstances require it. It would be unwise in the extreme to fully employ this source of funds under less urgent conditions. . For. all ofthese reasons,, therefore, improvement-in the debt structure through lengthening debt maturities when possible is an important goal of Treasury debt management. But when are such actions possible and desirable? This is the nub of the question. 278 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Now, according to classical theory, the Treasury should' go at the'problem by selling long-term securities when monetary policy is restrictive, thereby helping to withdraw funds from the private capital markets when demands for such funds are considered excessive. Likewise, the theory holds that the Treasury should concentrate on selling short-term securities when the monetary policy is one of ease, thus strengthening the factors in the economy making for greater liquidity and readier availability and use of credit. But in actual fact, there are serious difficulties in the way of putting these fine principles into effect. I am sure that your own investment experience will confirm the fact that debt management is one of the many areas where classical economic theory can be a somewhat unreliable guide to real life as we find it. We must sell our securities to specific buyers in a real market, not in a hypothetical market which is perfectly fluid and perfectly responsive to desirable changes in. policy. If the Treasury tries to force long-term securities on investors during a period when interest rates are high and funds are being eagerly sought for private purposes, the resulting market disorder might actually interfere with the effectiveness of Federal Reserve policy rather than contribute to it. If the market threatened to become so disorderly that the Federal Reserve had to step in to any significant extent, this might require the Federal Reserve to back up temporarily on policies which were deemed essential to the good health of the economy at that time. Furthermore, it would not be in the Treasury's, and hence the taxpayer's, interest to put out an inordinate amount of long-term debt at the relatively high interest rates that prevail in a period of firm credit restraint. Considerations of this sort would seem to indicate that—contrary to classical theory—the Treasury should not rule out consideration of the sale of long-term securities when monetary policy is one of credit ease. Yet we must not be unmindful of what that course involves. During periods when the Federal Reserve is easing credit to stimulate business activity, the Treasury must weigh its debt management objectives in the light of both the short- and long-run welfare of the economy and the desirability of being of assistance by not absorbing funds which might better serve the economy if used for private purposes. Having the dual responsibility of bearing in mind the goal of a better maturity distribution of the debt and equally considering the welfare of the economy, we in Treasury doubt the wisdom of strict adherence to precise formulas to guide our actions. We wish debt management were that simple. It seems to us that, in each instance, we must try to weigh all the factors, such as the technical position of the market, the availability of credit to the corporate, municipal, and mortgage markets, the impending corporate and municipal calendar, and the special needs of various types of investors, and then make the difficult decision as to what course of action we judge will make the greatest contribution to the public interest—not only in the weeks immediately ahead but over the longer range. Some debt extension can, of course, be accomplished entirely outside the area of competition for new funds by making it attractive for investors such as mutual savings banks, insurance companies, pension funds, etc., to lengthen their own portfolios by replacing some of their short- and intermediate-terms with longerterms. The short- or intermediate-term securities which these savings type of institutions sell would, for the most part, be acquired by the commercial banks. The average term to maturity of Government securities held by mutual savings banks, for example, is about 8 years to first cafl date, as against almost 14 years in 1946. There may be some merit in encouraging debt lengthening within portfolios even at times when the net amount of new money available for investment in Federal securities is small, without running the risk of competing unnecessarily for funds needed to support renewed expansion. It should also be remembered, of course, that, quite apart from the sale of long-term bonds, the Treasury can achieve considerable success in debt lengthening by selling intermediate-term securities to commercial banks in a period such as this. For example, the Treasury made more progress in debt lengthening during 1954 than in any other calendar year since World War II, yet no issues running more than 10 years to maturity were put out during that year. By far the most important part of Treasury new money borrowing during a recessionary period is properly done through the commercial banks, and we have no reason to believe that our experience in this recession wifl be any different. EXHIBITS ' . 279 As I have suggested, however, in the ..process of concentrating on bank borrowing, we should not immediately assume that it will all be short-term borrowing or that consideration of nonbank sources of funds should be neglected entirely. These are some of the thoughts which I want to leave with you in the hope they will stimulate you in giving us the benefit of your own thinking on these important matters. The Treasury, as you are well aware, does not work in an ivOry tower. It is our job to painstakingly find out what the market wants and attempt to tailor issues to meet that demand insofar as that can be done consistent with the other objectives which we -have to keep in mind. To aid us in this, we listen intently to suggestions and ideas from groups such as yours. We hope that many of you—individuahy, as well as through your Committee on Government Securities and the Public Debt—will come in and talk, over with us any thoughts you may have which might help us to do our job better. And finally I would like to say a word about United States savings bonds. In our judgment, the savings bond program has been of inestimable help not only to the Government and the 40 million people who hold the bonds but also to the whole thrift and savings industry. To some of you the savings bond program may appear to be only another form of competition and, perhaps, unwarranted competition. In my judgment—and I have been a banker all my business life— this has always seemed to me a shortsighted point of view. I am not so naive as to believe that, if someone walks into one.of your institutions to make a deposit, 3^ou are going to suggest that the person buy a savings bond instead. On the other hand, I don't think it's good public relations to do the reverse. : The savings bond program could not have achieved its great success without the support of the vast majority of the banking institutions of this country. The payroll savings plan, which is the mainstay of the savings bond program as it exists today, does a job that the savings institutions cannot do as effectively. Very few employers want to put on an active sales campaign in their respective organizations to sell savings accounts for any single private institution. They can do so in good conscience with United States savings bonds. Literally millions of Americans have accumulated their first savings through payroll deductions, and having once acquired the habit of thrift, they become the customers of other types of savings institutions who offer a more varied service. These savers accumulate nest eggs that have permitted downpayments on countless homes which you have financed and on all sorts of durable goods which could not otherwise have been acquired. '. Now some people may ask you, as they have asked me "Why is the Government promoting savings bond sales at this particular time? In view of the current business decline, wouldn't it perhaps be better to encourage our citizens to buy things rather than adding to their financial reserves?" • The question is hot a new one. I understand that, during every business decline in the postwar period, similar questions have been put to the Treasury. • If one concentrates on current business indexes and trends, it is often easy, of course, to temporarily lose sight of the long-term sustaining forces that have made our country great. Ranking very high among these forces is the habit of thrift, upon which depends the sound financing of our Nation's industrial might as well as providing a backlog of savings for millions of our people. The habit of thrift is not something to be encouraged at one time and discouraged at another. It is much too basic. As a matter of fact, the present economic downturn is the aftermath of an inflationary boom which would have been much milder had Americans saved more than they did during recent years. When we encourage the habit of thrift, we are strengthening the foundations of private enterprise and industry which have made our economy the most productive in the world. I am sure you will continue to give your support to the Government's program of sharing in America through the purchase of United States savings bonds. If I have accomplished nothing else today, I hope I have conveyed the idea that the problems we face are not easy of solution. I can promise you that the administration will continue to face up to them in the long-range best interests of the people of America. 280 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY ' ' Taxatioii Developments , EXHIBIT 23.—-Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Andersdri, January 16, 1958, before the House Ways and Means Committee on general revenue 'matters' ' • ''^ '•' '• •/•,.. ' ,;..", ' I am glad to have this opportunity to meet for the first time with this dis-tinguished committee. The distinctive position of the House Comrnittee onWays and Means is known to all students of our governmental processes. My predecessor has told me of his very pleasant relations with you and of your assistance to him in discharging his responsibilities in the TreasurJ^ I look forward' to continued • close collaboration with you in developing such tax and otherlegislation as becomes appropriate within your jurisdiction. You have already received the President's Budget Message. The increased risquireinents for expenditures for security, even after the strictest reviews of expenditures in all other programs, bring total estimated spending to a level such that it is necessary to recommend a continuation of the corporation income tax and the excise tax rates, which, in the absence of legislation, would be reduced^ on July 1. A reduction in the normal corporation' income tax rate from 30' percent to 25 percent, which would also have the effect of reducing the rate on income above $25,000 from 52 percent to 47 percent, would involve a revenue loss of about $2 billion a year. A reduction in the excise tax rates on liquor, cigarettes, and automobiles would involve an additional revenue. loss of over $900 million. I regret that a continuation of existing rates has to be my first recommendation to you oh tax matters, because I am anxious for tax reductions of various sorts,' as I know you are, and as the people of the country are. But under the condi-. tions as they are foreseen at present, such tax reductions do not seem prudent..' If present rates are continued, and if business activity resumes its upward growth during the year, as I believe it will, we estimate a. small surplus for the fiscal year 1959. . I am glad to say that we have been able to provide in the budget. i0r.-.the. tax; relief measures for small business which the President recommended in his letter, to the chairman bf this committee last July 15. There was not, of course, time to give full consideration to these proposals in the last session of the Congress, but we do recommend that they receive attention in the present session. Specifically those recommendations were: (1) That businesses be given the right to utilize, for purchases of used property not exceeding $50,000 in any one year, the formulas of accelerated.depreciation?" that were made available to purchasers of new property by the Internal Revenue Code of 1954. (2) That corporations with, say, ten or fewer stockholders be given the option of being taxed as if they were partnerships. - (3) That the taxpayer be giyen the option of paying the estate tax over a period of up to ten years in cases where the estate consists largely of investrnents?' ill closely held business concerns. (4) That original investors in small business be given the right to deduct from their incomes, up to some specified maximum, a loss, if any, realized on a stock investment in such business. At the present time the deduction of such lossesfrom income is subject to the general limitation on net capital losses of $1,000. I am especially glad to recommend this tax relief for small business becauseof the great importance of new and small companies in the American economy.Our country has grown strong in competition and in the introduction of new products and techniques. We must have as many independent business concerns as possible because each company is a separate center of initiative as well as a source of livelihood for its employees and owners. Small businesses are a real and important part of our American way of life. We believe that the foregoing, recommendations for tax changes will give important relief for the revenue loss involved. ' Loopholes or unintended benefits are always a matter of concern. They are-: particularly serious when tax rates have to be maintained at high levels.. It isparticularly important that we maintain respect for our voluntary tax system, which should continue to be a source of national pride. This gives added emphasisto the necessity of maintaining fairness and equality in the application of our . EXHIBITS 281- country's tax burden. H. R. 8381, on which this committee worked so long in the last session, and which is now before the House of Representatives, is important legislation to close tax loopholes and make technical changes which was^developed in consultation and cooperation with our staffs. We will always have our tax laws and regulations under close, continuous observation and will call to your attention any inequities that we observe. Last October, the Supreme Court denied a petition for certiorari in a series of cases dealing with the so-called cutoff point for percentage depletion in the" manufacture of bricks and cement. The net result of the cases is to apply the percentage depletion allowance to the price of finished manufactured products, bricks and cement, rather than to the value of the clay and the cement rock before it is manufactured. In both cases, the effect of the decision is to increase the depletion deductions several-fold over the amounts previously allowed under Treasury regulations. While we support the principle of depletion for these materials, we do not believe that depletion on this scale is reasonable or was intended. The problem appears to arise from the application of the phrase "the commercially marketable mineral product or products" in the statute. I recomniend the law be revised to prevent these excessive depletion deductions. The revenue loss in the two industries directly covered by the cases is about $50 million a year. The proper taxation of cooperatives continues to be a troublesome problem." We have already called to your attention the fact that a series of court decisions have made largely ineffective the 1951 legislation which was intended to assure that all cooperative income would be taxed either to the cooperative or to its members as it was earned. The Treasury rulings under which all patronage refunds in the form of certificates were held to be taxable at their face value, which were assumed to be valid at the time of the 1951 legislation, have been held, invalid where the certificates do not have a determinable market value. Thus, it is possible for the cooperative to receive a deduction in computing its taxableincome, while its members are not taxable on the certificate they receive. While we are fully aware of the important place which cooperatives occupy in the life of our agricultural and farming communities, we believe that some single tax liability should be assumed by all who participate in the business activities of the country, as was contemplated in the 1951 legislation, and that legislation which is fair and reasonable, both from the standpoint of the availability of retained earnings for expansion and tax benefits to cooperative members, should be developed. During the course of the deliberations of this committee, the staff of the Treasury will be available to work cooperatively with the staffs of your committee in developing such legislation. We have already advised the committee that the Treasury is agreeable to the. application of the stopgap legislation concerning taxes to be applied against the income of life insurance companies for the calendar year 1957. We are giving a great deal of thought to the development of a fair and equitable system of taxation that can be permanently applied, and will be working cooperatively with yoiir staff in the development of concrete proposals which we hope to submit to you in, the near future. • Simplification in the tax law and in tax computations are important objectives. Our staffs are studying with great interest the reports of the advisory groups "to your subcommittee on income taxation on technical aspects of the law concerning corporate reorganization, partnerships, and the income of estates and trusts. The 1954 Code made important changes in all of these fields. Experience since its enactment may well have shown opportunities for still further improvements to increase the fairness and simplify the application of the laws in these difficult areas. Testimony which you receive in your hearings will be of help to us, as it will doubtless be to you, in appraising the current proposals for change. While I have no additional recommendations at this time for major tax legislation, we shall continue to appraise situations as they develop and shall make, such recommendations as become appropriate. We in the Treasury are, of course, following with great interest the material, presented in these hearings. I am sure these data will be of help to us in developing recommendations to you. In the meantime, my associates in the Treasury and I will be ready and anxious to be of such assistance as we can in working with you and your staffs. 282 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY EXHIBIT 24.—Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, February 18, 1958, before the Subcommittee on Intergovernmental Relations of the House Governinent Operations Committee On behalf of Governor Dwinell and myself may I first express our great appreciation for the courtesy you have extended us as Cochairmen of the Joint Federal-State Action Committee in arranging for our initial presentation of this program to the Congress before your subcommittee. For many reasons, we think it particularly appropriate that our joint committee's action recommendations should first be reviewed and discussed with the House Intergovernmental Relations Subcommittee. One of the most important of these is that you are currently engaged in nationwide hearings gathering information from people representing all levels of government as well as private organizations of citizens which will give you a special understanding of the feasibility and desirability of our proposals. When the specific legislation to carry out these recommended actions reaches the Congress, we anticipate that your evaluations and judgments will be a major factor in determining the fate of this first effort by the executive branches at the Federal and State levels. The purpose of this effort is to strengthen our Federal system by channeling increased authority and responsibility to the State governments instead of centralizing power in the Nation's capital. It is therefore a privilege.for us to present to you at this time Progress Report No. 1 of the Joint Federal-State Action Committee. One of the characteristics of this report that I feel will most favorably impress each of you without regard tb your personal reaction to its content is the fact that it's only 14 pages in length. The conciseness of the report is a striking indication of the spirit of action with which the joint committee approached its assignment. I, for one, believe that the dedication of the members of our task force stems from a recognition of the validity of the President's repeated conviction that "unless we preserve the traditional power and responsibilities of State government, with revenues necessary to exercise that power and discharge those responsibilities, then we will not preserve the kind of America we have knowri; eventually, we will have, instead, another form of government and therefore, quite another kind of America." It was in the spirit of this conviction that on June 24, 1957, the President suggested that the national Governors' Conference join with the executive branch of the Federal Government in creating a task force for action which would be charged with three specific responsibilities. In his words, these were: "(1) To designate functions which the States are ready and wifling to assume and finance that are now performed or financed wholly or in part by the Federal Government. "(2) To recommend the Federal and State revenue adjustments required to enable the States to assume such functions; and "(3) To identify functions and responsibilities likely to require State or Federal attention in the future and to recommend the level of State effort, or Federal effort, or both, that will be needed to assure effective action." At the opening session of our first meeting I made an observation which seems to reflect the constructive attitude of the entire committee. "The most important thing, it seems to me, that we can hope to accomplish by our initial effort is an actual agreement embodying certain specific functions and sources of revenue which can be returned to the States. This will be the surest evidence of our intention to be objective and of our determination to achieve accomplishment. When these pegs of progress have been set, we can move from the area of accomplishment into the more difficult and complex areas of things we mutually agree ought to be done and to be worthy of our continued efforts." Within this general framework, the committee began the job of preparing action recommendations that, in turn, the President and the forty-eight governorsmight recommend to their legislative bodies. It was set up and has operated—not as a study group—but as an action committee. I have been deeply impressed by and want to pay public tribute to the dedicated sense of cooperation which the member governors have shown during our several meetings. The discussions and decisions reaffirm to me that there is widespread basic understanding of the proper relationships between the State and Federal governments. In working to better that relationship the governors with whom we have worked have demonstrated beyond all question their patriotic desire to do EXHIBITS 283 what is best not for the short-term result but for the long-range benefit and welfare for the greatest number of our people. I am confident that as an action committee in this field we will enjoy the continued fine cooperation we have had in the past. We anticipate that additional agreements will be reached which will further clarify and strengthen the relationships between the States and Federal Government. Many of us share President Eisenhower's concern over the trend of our intergovernmental relationships as he summarized it last June . . . "So, slowly at first,, but in recent times more and more rapidly, the pendulum of power has swung; from our States toward the central Government. There are rriany factors behind this shift in governmental power: The economic problems of the 1930's; the emergency of war; the view of some that almost smy problem common to localities is to some extent a national problem and therefore subject to Federal "responsibility"; the reluctance in many cases of State governments to work out solutions to local problems; and on occasion the readiness of the Federal Government to relieve local interests of local responsibilities. All these help to account for the growing centralization of governmental power so evident in recent decades. With this growth of Federal power the position of the States has been weakened. The steps taken by the President and the Conference of Governors, and the recommendations of their Joint Committee, are designed to strengthen State governments. The States can properly assume a larger share in the work of government. By the same token many present Federal activities can and should be relinquished to the States—and without impairment of programs. In our work as a committee we have examined a number of programs receiving partial Federal financial support and subject to Federal controls which could more advantageously be handled entirely by States and localities. In such cases, we believe Federal intervention is unnecessary. In our first report two of these programs are proposed for transfer out of Washington to the States—vocational education and waste treatment plant construction. In making this recommendation the committee seeks only to transfer authority and financial responsibflity—not to curtail or abolish programs. I stress this point because there are some who seem to think we would adversely influence these worthwhile activities. Our report to the President and to the Conference of Governors makes it clear that this is not our purpose at all. The committee, of course, has a broader interest than just recommending the shift of certain ° programs to full State responsibility. For example, it defines and clarifies a responsibility that may continue to be shared. This we did in our natural disaster relief recommendation. Furthermore, we recommended to the States the assumption of certairi responsibilities that they have not generally undertaken to date. This is the poirit of our urban renewal proposal. Additionally, we agreed that the States should be encouraged to exercise their proper powers in a new field. This is the substance of our suggestion for Federal and State legislation that woiild permit the States to establish and enforce health and safety standards in the atomic energy field. On the revenue side, we proposed that a part of the Federal tax on local telephone service be relinquished by the Federal Government. This could be used.by the States where desired. . . . ' All these proposals point in one direction: to increased State/authority arid responsibility. • The committee also proposed criteria for future stimulative grants.' This could be called a preventive approach. Special situations often seem to call forth new Federal programs, which sometimes involve grants to stimulate State action. We know that Federal programs, once started, develop a certain stubborn capacity to survive. Many times continued Federal support does no more than supplant local initiative and responsibility. With this in mind, the committee urged caution in the use of the grant-in-aid technique. Stimulative grants should be made selectively and only where a clear-cut national interest exists. Legislation authorizing Federal grants to States should include a closeout provision to prevent Federal usurpation of State responsibility. We urged the utmost flexibility and Control for the States in the administration of such programs. Again, the point of view is clear and consistent. If we must establish newgrant programs, let them be: (1) Limited to national need; (2) limited in duration; and (3) limited to the stimulation of State action. 284 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Recommendations Committee recommendations are set forth in Progress Report No. 1. Vocational education.—^The committee considered to be unnecessary the continued Federal financial support of vocational education. This program began in 1917. Since then all States have established such programs, with State and local funds now comprising over 80 percent of the annual cost. The administration of this work is almost entirely in State-local hands. The President endorsed the committee proposal by recommending to the Congress in his budget message that grants for vocational education be continued through fiscal year 1959. This will give the States time to take the necessary steps to handle this added financial responsibility. Waste treatrrient construction grants.—These grants were first provided by Congress in fiscal year 1957. They are intended to encourage accelerated con'struction of municipal waste treatment plants. The committee felt that municipal sewage treatment problems are essentially the responsibility of the municipalities themselves. Beyond this, the States should help the municipal governnlents if help is needed. Here, too, in endorsing the committee's recommendaition, the President has proposed continuation of Federal grants through fiscal 1959 to •allow time for orderly readjustment. ' Natural disaster relief .—The immediate problerii was to clarify responsibility. In the past, neither the Federal Civil Defense Administration nor the States knew at what point the States should be eligible for Federal aid to restore damaged public facflities. The committee agreed dn a schedule of minimum amounts based on fiscal capacity that must be spent or committed during a year from State sources before the governors were eligible to apply for Federal aid; This recommendation of the committee does not entail legislation. An Executive order has already been issued by the President which will make it possible tb impleihent this recommendation after time has been allowed for preparations by the States. , ' Atomic energy.—Problems raised by the nonmilitary uses of atomic energy pose difficulties for the States and for the Atomic Energy Commission. The •Atomic Energy Act gives the Federal Government a monopoly in this field. 'Yet the States have a traditional and inherent right to regulate activities affecting the health and safety of their citizens. Accordingly, the committee recommended amending the act to permit the States to adopt standards governing the use of nuclear materials, to inspect facilities, and to enforce legislation for the protection ° of public health and safety, not in conflict with Federal law. To handle this work effectively requires the training of State employees. This we proposed, with the States paying the salaries and expenses of their people during the training to be provided by the appropriate Federal agencies. The Budget document for fiscal 1959 reflects the steps being initiated in this direction by the Atomic Energy Commission. We also proposed certain organizational and administrative actions for the States to take to ready themselves for the tasks ahead. Urban renewal.—The action recommended by the committee on urban renewal is a first step towards increasing State responsibility for urban problems in the future. It is proposed that the otates set up planning agencies to give consideration to problems in urban development, housing, and metropolitan planning. The President's strong support of this proposal is coritairied in his budget message. Once established, these agencies will be in a position to assume enlarged responsibility in these areas. Taxes The President asked the. committee to consider the tax adjustments that might be made to enable the States to carry the added costs of functions shifted to them from the Federal Government. A variety of taxes were examined by the committee. At this point in its work, the committee recommended and the President endorsed a partial relinquishment of the Federal tax on local telephone service as a practicable source of State revenue. We also are studying the Federal estate and cigarette taxes to see if the States should share to a larger extent in these tax sources. Any tax proposals along these lines will be con•tingent on the States taking over other existing Federal functions. '•:•••:••••::;•:•.' :,:::•.- -. ) •;•• .EXHIBITS.;.}: :• .0 ..}]:j ]•.:•-•:. ••:•-,: ^ .285 jLegisIative recoihmendations ...As indicated,, the work of the committee has receiyed'wholehea,rted support from the. President. This is particularly emphasized by that, part qf his budget /messagein which he s a i d : • , ." .",. . "Cooperation of this nature is a. highly desirable and, in my judgment, k long overdue experiment in public administration and finance. The success of. the venture depends upon further cooperation among the executive branch, the .Congress, the governors, the legislative bodies.of .the States, and the local goV.ernments involved. As for this administration, I. can say that the executive branch is eager, as., well as willing, to. do its part to insure that sucdess." [As indicated, specific legislation will be submitted, in the near future which wifl allow adequate time for the States to make necessary adjustments in fiscal and ,administrative policies. The administra.tion attaches great iinportarice to these .first steps outlined by the committee. The President and the Conference of .Governors expect the comihi-ttee to., continue its work and to develop further •proposals for the strengthening of State goyernments. In its work the cominittee is moving toward the very important objective of decentralizing governmental .authority, .and responsibility". . I am sure we all agree that every effort should •be made to assure proper balarice in our Federal system. We will continue to examine both programs in being and those that are proposed, with the objective of prdviding proper distribution of responsibilities among .the Federal Government, the States, the municipalities, and other political subdivisions—this to insure that the functions of government are properly and .'more effectively performed within our traditional and constitutional structure. EXHIBIT 25.—Statement by Secretary ofthe Treasury Anderson, March 12, 1958, concerning the economic situation The economic situation in all its aspects is under constant study and review. .The President's discussion, with us this morning was a continuation of this kind of analysis. . Of course, this analysis includes tax studies and estiinates of revenue losses and the benefits which might result frdm various approaches to this problem. We must carefully weigh both the current implications and the lorig-term effects ..'tvhich niight result. This is a part of the continuing normal function of the TreasuryDepartment. The President has already taken a number of executive actions and has made . a number of recommendations to the Congress, designed within the framework of .'the proper functions of the Government, to assist in a resumption of sustainable growth in the economy. A number of the suggestions and actions proposed and taken will help promote a higher level of private economic activity and employment. Some will result in accelerated expenditures in a number of existing Federal programs without involving us in huge, slow-acting public works programs of dubious value. However, we will continue to examine all the facts and data as they become avaiilabie ^aiid if, upon the basis of further developments in the economy it appears that other actions are necessary and desirable, they will be taken. No decision regarding taxes has been ndade. Whatever decision regarding taxes .is taken will be reached only when the impact of current developments on the .future course of the economy has. been clarified and after consultation with congressional leaders. EXHIBIT 26.—Letter of Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, April 10, 1958, to the Chairmen of the Senate Finance and House Ways and Means Committees concerning permanent legislation for taxation of life insurance companies M Y DEAR MR. CHAIRMAN: In our letter to you of January 10 concerning tempo• rary legislation for the taxation of life insurance companies, the Treasury indicated that it would propose a method for more permanent legislation in this field. In accordance with this :and .subsequent statements made in the public hearings of -the House' Ways and Means Coniiiiittee on various tax legislative- matters, January 16, and before the Seriate Finance Committee on the "stopgap" extension legislation, March '5, there are submitted for your consideration suggested approaches to the taxation of life insurance companies. 286 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY In developing these recommendations for a more permanent basisrof. taxation, we have approached the task with full recognition of the difficulties in this complicated area, which stem in part from the complex nature of the life insurance business as conducted on the level premium basis. We are also aware of the fact that we are dealing with institutions which are the custodians of the life insurance protection and savings of millions of American families. The problem of developing a satisfactory long-range basis of taxation for the life insurance industry is not a new one. The problem has resisted solution since 1947 when the then applicable formula, adopted in 1942, resulted in no tax whatsoever on the life insurance business, and was replaced by a series of stopgap formulas. You are familiar with the resulting extensive legislative history in this area and the long study which has been given to the question by your committee and the Congi-ess over these years. . A Subcommittee of the Ways and Means Committee on the Taxation of Life Insurance Companies was established in 1949 which conducted studies and recommended stopgap legislation, deferring a permanent solution of the problem to a later date. The temporary legislation subsequently adopted, termed the 1950 formula, was applied only to 1949 and 1950 income. In 1951 further stopgap legislation was enacted, converting the reserve and other policy liability deduction under the 1950 formula into a reduced rate of tax on net investment income without deduction for required interest. The 1951 method was extended from year to year through 1954. Late in 1954 extensive studies and hearings were conducted by a subcommittee of the Ways and Means Committee, leading to the adoption of the present law. This provided, a reserve and other policy liability deduction of 87^^ percent on the first $1 million of net investment income and 85 percent on net investment income in excess of $1 million. The 1955 law also provided certain structural improvements, including a broadening of the net investment income base, the correction of certain abuses, and a more adequate treatment of the health and accident business of life insurance companies. The 1955 formula was originally made applicable to 1955 income only, subject to the provision that the 1942 formula would reapply automatically in any year if there were not an extension. The 1955 formula was subsequently extended to 1956 and more recently to 1957 income. The Treasury has reviewed carefully the facts, issues, and alternative approaches developed in the course of these past deliberations. You are cognizant of the staff work which the Department has conducted cooperatively with the congressional tax- staffs, and for a considerable period in 1955 and 1956 in consultation with a group of distinguished actuaries whose services were made available by the life insurance industry to the Treasury. While the technical assistance of these actuaries has been invaluable to our work, they do not, of course, have any responsibility for the policy suggestions which have been developed from it. On the basis of our review and study, it seems evident that there are certain inadequacies in the present method of taxing life insurance companies. The present method does not recognize sources of net income other than investment income.. Furthermore, it utilizes an averaging system, whereby the net taxable iriCome pf a life insurance company is measured by reference to. an arbitrary or industry-wide standard of interest deductions, not by the actual experience and requirements of the individual company. Two possible solutions are presented herewith. The method of taxation to which it is suggested the committee give first consideration would proyide a longrarige basis of taxation for life insurance companies bringing their taxable iricome concept into closer conformity with ^.that of other corporate business. Such a concept should be designed to reflect, to the fullest extent practicable, the full net earnings of life insurance companies. It.should at the same time provide comprehensive deductions for all expenses, interest, and reserve requirements, and all amounts paid or made available to policyholders. . . We suggest that the starting point for measuring the net earnings should be the figure for "Net Gain From Operations After Dividends to Policyholders" which appears in each; company's annual statement to the State insurance, departments and'which summarizes the operating results for the year. . This figure is based on carefully developed life insurance accounting practices which have general acceptance in the iridustry. Adjustments, such as those for tax-exei?Qpt interest. Federal income taxes paid, and depreciation on the insurance business property account, would conform it with general rules for computing taxable EXHIBITS 287 The resulting tax base would include the margin of investment income above amounts needed on policy reserves, gain from better than assumed mortality experience, and profit arising from the difference between the expense "loading" portion of premiums and actual expenses. Deductions would be allowed for all dividends paid to policyholders and amounts added to policy reserves. Under this suggested method, life insurance companies would be entitled to net operating loss carryovers. To assure the best possible long-range measurement of hfe insurance company earnings and to preclude taxing annual amounts which are not true net earnings because of uneven experience, a longer loss carryback provision should be provided for life insurance companies than for other corporations, ranging up to 10 or 20 years. Consideration may also need to be given to some kind of special allowance or relief feature for small and new companies. Such a provision might be designed to recognize the special problems of the growing company. For example, a deduction might be allowed of 50 percent, or some other fraction, of amounts up to some specified amount retained by a company as contingency reserves for the protection of policyholders. Provision should be made for a gradual transition to the new method over a three- to five-year period. During this transition, the tax would be computed as a weighted average of the tax under the new method and the tax under the present stopgap method, with gradually increasing weight to the new method. The taxation of life insurance companies inevitably raises the question of its possible impact on policyholder savings, benefits, and insurance costs. The tax base discussed above would exclude all amounts paid to, or set aside irrevocably for the benefit of any policyholder or group of policyholders. It would exempt additions to policy reserves including interest thereon; all cash insurance benefits made available to policyholders or their beneficiaries; and all policy dividends or similar rebates paid or refunded to policyholders. In our studies and discussions with the consultants made available by the life insurance industry, we have given attention to possible adjustments in policy reserves and related items for tax purposes. The objective of such adjustments would be to take account of, or in some cases to neutralize, the effect of different methods of reserve valuation, varying reserve interest assumptions, past and future reserve strengthening operations, and certain other factors. We believe that there is substantial merit in an adjustment for companies with reserves based on a preliminary term method of valuation. Such an adjustment would compensate for the fact that in the case of a company using a preliminary term method the addition to reserves on new business in the first .policy year is substantially smaller than for a company which uses the net level premium valuation method. Another adjustment which appears to deserve favorable consideration is one which would take account of deficiency reserves in existence on the effective date of the suggested plan. These particular reserves may be considered equivalent to an allocation of previously accumulated surplus, and in this light their recovery back into surplus would not constitute current earnings which should be subject to tax. At this time we have no recommendations for or against other specific reserve adjustments. We recognize, however, that other possible refinements and modifications, including contingency reserves, adjustments for reserve strengthening, and special allowances for some segment of surplus, merit further review in the light of the expert views and comments of members of the life insurance industry which will be made available in the course of your future deliberations. However, every departure from the allowance for policy reserves used in determining the net gain from operations reported in the annual statement to the State insurance departments would represent a complication which could be justified only by persuasive equity and technical considerations. The Treasury is fully aware that problems exist with respect to the plan just discussed. It wifl, of course, increase the tax paid by some companies, just as it will relieve others, resulting in shifts in burden as compared with the present stopgap method. This is inevitable in a change from a tax based on an industry-wide formula to a tax based on the income pf individual companies. Another problem is that the suggested method may result in a changed approach to policy reserves : in order to reduce or eliminate tax. We do not minimize the difficulties which your committee may encounter in its evaluation of the plan. . Accordingly, you may wish to consider an alternative 479641—59^ 20 288 1 9 5 8 REPORT OF THE-SECRETARY OF T H E TREASURY m o r e i n line, with t h e p r e s e n t m e t h o d of taxation: of life insurance cornpanies which will nevertheless m a k e tangible improvements; ;.. • \ • ... ;. UJ.. .. . i ' I n this event,-; we suggest"that you consider modification,of t h e present law which will increase t h e portion of investment income subject t o t a x to accord m o r e closely with t h e prevailing; margin of i n v e s t m e n t income a b o v e r e q u i r e d interest for policyrholders, which margin is now about 30 percent for t h e industry as a whole. Such a revised formula should n o t only bring t h e deduction for interest needs into closer line with the.current situation, .but should also ;be responsive t o future chianges in i n d u s t r y conditions from year t o year. . Consideration should be given t o a further refinement bf t h e present t y p e of special interest deduction for companies with substantially less t h a n t h e average margin of investment income. ' A second modification of t h e present forniula which t h e committee might con.sider is one-which would assure a more reasonable t a x on those, companies with relatively small a m o u n t s of investment income a n d substantial earnings from insurance or underwiiting sources, now entirely exempt from taxation. I t is suggested t h a t this might be m a d e effective by means of a m i n i m u m t a x provision, which would require t h a t t h e t a x should not be less t h a n t h e liability computed a t regular corporate t a x rates on a specified.proportion of t h e net gain from operations after policy dividends. . Whatever t a x formula is applied to t h e ordinary iricome of life insurance com>pariies, their capital gains a n d losses should no longer be disregarded for t a x purposes.. '. >.. .... • A'fair a n d more lasting m e t h o d of taxing life irisurance companies t o replace t h e series of t e m p o r a r y formulas will .fulfill a long-standing need in our t a x structure. Sincerely yours, . • ' R O B E R T B . ANDERSON,: .. Secretary of the Treasury, JEXHIBIT 27.—Letter of t h e President, M a y 26, 1958, to the Vice P r e s i d e n t and .: the Speaker of the H o u s e recommending continuation of corporation and excise •;••• tax .rates ....•,., D E A R MTR., V I C E P R E S I D E N T ; DEAR M R . SPEAKER: ' , • ' . , • , . . T h e budget message i n J a n u a r y recommended.a continuation, without change, of t h e corporation income t a x a n d excise tax- fates which in t h e absence of legislation would be reduced on J u l y 1. This recommendation is now renewed. This renewed recommendation is m a d e after consiiltation b y t h e Secretary of .the Treasury with leaders of-both political, parties iii t h e Congress. ',Consideration of fiscal measures will 'continue t o be m a d e in t h e light of t h e developing economic situation and with full regard t o b o t h t h e short and long-range effects of any proposal. . •'• • : .V - . . . , T h e a,dminist'ra;tion deeply appreciates t h e thoughtful and full cooperation with which t h e leadersliip of b o t h parties in the" Congress has'worked with u s in these .matters. ' . • • .- • ^' . W i t h kind regard, . , , , Sincerely, , -" DwiGHT D . EISENHOWER. E X H I B I T 2 8 . ^ - S t a t e m e n t by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, M a y 28, 1958, before the H o u s e Ways and M e a n s Committee concerning extension of corporation and excise tax r a t e s As you know, t h e President last M o n d a y renewed t h e recommendations m a d e i n t h e budget message in J a n u a r y asking for t h e continuation of existing t a x rates on corporation income and certain excise taxes otherwise scheduled for reduction -July 1. I n J a n u a r y it was. estimated t h a t such reductions would cause a revenue loss of $2.9 billion. Because of changes in t h e economy we now estimate t h e loss Jat somewhat less or in t h e neighborhood of $2.6 billion in revenue. '- W h e n t h e President's budget message for 1959 was sent t o Congress in J a n u ary , J t was t h e n estimated t h a t t h e budget fpr 1959 would be in balance with a v e r y small surplus. ' - . '• .'u.:;:'. Since J a n u a r y additional appropriations for defense and for measures designed t o help facilitate t h e resumption of growth make it evident; t h a t expenditures for " ' V EXHIBITS • - . ^ 239 •fiscal year 1959 -wiir rise to an'order of magnitude of 78 to 80 billions of dollarsj This is an increase'bf from-4 to 6 billion dollars above the January estimate. On t h e receipts side, economic coriditions are such that in revised • estimates our budget receipts for the fiscal year 1959 will be in an order of magnitude of 70 billion dollars. Thus, we are cbnfrorited in fiscal 1959 with a probable budget deficit ranging from 8 to 10 billions of dollars. The budgetary situation for the year,ending June 30, 1958, now indicates a deficit of the order of 3 billions Of dollars against the estimate last January of $400 million. Substantially all of this increased deficit will result from a dechne in reyeriues. During the past several months, many proposals have been put forth suggesting that certain selected tax reductions would encourage an early resumption of economic growth. All of theni have had oiir most careful and serious consideration. . We do not believe that at this time to propose a, general reduction in individual income taxes is in the Nation's best interests. Such reductions would widen the gap bet-ween revenues and expenditures and thereby substantially increase the deficits. Nor can the serious disadvafttages of so increasing the deficit be offset by" a reasonable certainty that any particular individual income tax adjustment •would predictably assure resumption of growth eithef in specific areas of the economy Or the economy as a whole. From both the long-term and short-term point of view, our competitive, private-enterprise economy is putting on an impressive performance of resistance to further dechne without so-called "massive" intervention by the Goyernment. The Treasury is of the opinion that a reduction of corporate rates is not justified at a time when the reduction in the rate ori iridividuals cannot properly be made. We also do not believe" that it is appropriate or logical to select certain excise tax rates for reduction and declirie to make reductions in. others. • Should any excise taxes be recomriiended for i'eduction, contentions would undoubtedly be made that others were entitled to like treatment. We believe that in fairness and in.the best interest of the country, the excise rates that currently exist should be extended without change for another year. " ' .;: We recognize that the burdens 'of taxation and the burdens of debt are exceedingly heavy at all levels of governmerit/ We must continue to be concerned with restraints which weigh on our ecoriomic growth and our system of incentives. The very fact that taxes are high emphasizes the requirement that we utilize bur' best efforts to achieve economical operations at all levels of our Government ahd to work diligently to make the tax system as fair and as simple as possible with minimum repressive effects on individual and business activities. > We air look forward to a period when the Government can again operate -with a reasonable balance between its expenditures < and its revenues. We must be equally careful not to widen unduly, the gaip between revenue and expenditures. To. do so would add to the burden Of an already heavy debt which encumbers our "economy not only by the cost of interest but by substantial interference in the financial markets where private business. States, municipalities, and other political subdivisions compete for our national savirigs. Increases in the debt also make it m;ore difficult for the Federal Reserve System to discharge its monetary and credit responsibilities. I think we must bear in mind that.^we.are.looking forward not to a peak of expenditures which we now see sure ways of reducing in subsequent years but rather to a level of expenditures which in the absence of changing conditions offer little prospect of declining. Even with a resumption of a rate of sustainable growth and the consequent recovery of tax receipts which would result therefrom, the deficits will run into the recovery peridd, • ' ~ \ . Mr. Chairman, we of the Treasury are grateful for the thoughtful and cooperative consideration which has been giveri b y t h e leadership of bothparties to this difficult problem. EXHIBIT 29.—Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, June 12, 1958, before the Senate Finance Committee ini executive session oh continuation of corporation and excise tax rates . ^ As yo'u know, the President on May 26 renewed the recommeridation contained in the January budget message, which asked for a continuation of existing corpdfiatiori' income and certain excise tax rates which otherwise would be reduced on July 1 of this year. The House last week voted such continuatiori in H. R. 12695:. 290 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY In January, when the President asked for the continuation of these rates, it was estimated that such reduction, if allowed to take place, would cause a revenue loss of $2.9 billion. This figure, because of present conditions, we now estimate t o be about $2.6 bilhon. The legislation now before the committee should be considered in the light of the present Ibudgetary situation. For the fiscal year ending June 30, 1958, we now face a deficit in the magnitude of $3 billion due in the main to a decline in revenues. For fiscal 1959 we now expect expenditures in an order of magnitude of $78 to $80 billion. This increases t h ^ earlier January estimate by $4 to $6 bihion. Receipts during that same year are expected to be in the general range of those for 1958. Thus we face in fiscal 1959 a budget deficit .probably ranging from $8 to $10 billion. Many proposals in recent months have been put forward suggesting certain tax reductions as a means of encouraging prompt resumption of economic improvement. We in the Treasury, as well as you, have given them most careful consideration and analysis. In the best interests of the Nation we cannot at this time propose any general reduction in individual income taxes. To do so would, further widen the gap between revenues and expenditures. Nor can the serious disadvantages of so increasing the deficits be offset by a reasonable certainty that any particular individual income tax adjustment would predictably assure resumption of growth either in specific areas of the economy or the economy as a whole. Holding the conviction as we do that there is lack of justification for reducing the rate of individual income taxes at this time, it follows that to reduce corporate rates now is not justified. The suggestion has been made by some that, it ihight be appropriate to select certain excise tax rates for reduction without similar reduction in others. Should any excise taxes be recommended for reduction, contentions would undoubtedly be made that others were entitled to like treatment. We believe that in fairness and in the best interest of the country, current excise rates should be extended without change for another year. This committee, I know, has as its continuing interest the assurance that we are utilizing .our best efforts at all levels of Government to operate efficiently and economically. The burdens of taxation and debt are heavy. We must continue to be concerned with these restraints which weigh on our system of incentives in our competitive economy. It follows then that we must continue to work ' diligently toward a tax system as ifair and as simple as possible which will have the least repressive effects on business activities and individual initiative. Increases in the public debt would add to the already heavy burden of interest on an already heavy debt and also further interfere with the normal flow of new security offerings in the financial market by private businesses. States, municipalities, and other political subdivisions. In the absence of basic world changes we face a level of Federal expenditures which offers little prospect of decreasing in the near future. Even with a resump^ tion of a rate of sustainable growth and the consequent recovery of tax receipts which would result therefrom, the deficits wfll run into the recovery period. Mr. Chairman, we in the Treasury appreciate sincerely the thoughtful and cooperative consideration which has been given by the leadership of both parties to this difficult problem. EXHIBIT 30.—Miscellaneous revenue legislation enacted by the Eighty-fifth Congress, Second Session Public,Law 85-318, February 11, 1958, adds a new. provision to Section 812 (e) (1) (D) of the 1939 Code to make the marital deduction available in the case of terminable interests passing to a surviving spouse where the event which could terminate the interest becomes impossible of occurrence within 6 months: of the death of certain decedents adjudged incompetent before April 2, 1948. The provision is effective with respect to decedents dying after April 2, 1948. No interest will be allowed on overpayments resulting from this amendment. Public Law 85-319, February 11, 1958, amends Section 223 of the Revenue Act of 1950 to extend its provisions, which exempt certain rents from the provisions of Section 502 (f) ofthe 1939 Code pertaining to the use of corporation property by shareholders in the case of personalholding companies, to years ending in 1954 to which the 1939 Code is applicable. No interest will be allowed on overpayments resulting from this amendment. . EXHIBITS 291 Pubhc Law 85-320, February 11, 1958, adds a new subparagraph (C) to Section 421 (d) (6) of the 1954 Code and repeals subsection (d) of Section 1014 so that, where an option is held by an employee at the time of his death,^ it receives a new basis reflecting the appreciation in value of the stock in respect of which the option was granted, between the time of the granting of the option and the date of death (or optional valuation date), subject to certain specified adjustments. The amendments are effective with respect to taxable years ending after December 31, 1956, but only in the case of employees dying after that date. Pubhc Law 85-321, February 11, 1958, adds a new Section 7512 to the 1954 Code which provides that where an employer is required to collect and pay over income or employment taxes withheld from an employee or excise taxes on facilities and services, and fails to do so, he can by notice be instructed to collect the taxes in the future and deposit them in a special trust account. Persons who fail to comply are, except in certain cases, guilty of a misdemeanor under new Section 7215 and upon conviction will be fined or imprisoned or both. Public Law 85-323, February 11, 1958. adds a new Section 6423 to the 1954 Code which denies, except in the case of drawbacks and certain withdrawals, returns, or losses, a credit or refund of alcohol or tobacco tax unless the claimant establishes that he either bore the ultimate burden of the amount claimed or has unconditionally repaid the amount claimed; and unless the claimant, except in the •case of certain suits, files a claim after April 30, 1958, and within the time prescribed by law. The amendment does not apply to any credit or refund allowed or made before May 1, 1958. Pubhc Law 85-345, March 17, 1958, extends the 1955 formula for taxing the income of life insurance companies to taxable years beginning before January 1, 1958. Pubhc Law 85-367, April 7, 1958, adds a new paragraph 13 to Section 512 (b) of the 1954 Code which provides that where a limited partnership interest is held by a charitable trust which meets all of the four conditions enumerated therein, there shall be excluded from the definition of unrelated business taxable income the trust's share of gross income and deductions, to the extent such income is distributed. The amendment applies to taxable vears of trusts beginning after December 31, 1955. Pubhc Law 85-380, Aprfl 16, 1958, (1) substitutes the words "certain musical or dramatic performances" for the word "concerts" in Section 4233 (a) (3) of the 1954 Code, thereby extending to musical comedies and reviews the exemption from the admissions tax for performances conducted by nonprofit civic or community membership associations; (2) amends Section 4233 (a) (1) (C) to exempt from tax admissions to athletic games played between college teams where the proceeds are divided between hospitals for crippled children and the educational institutions involved; and (3) adds a new paragraph 11 to Section 4233 (a) to exempt from tax admissions to all-star athletic games played between teams composed of students from various schools or colleges where the proceeds from the game are turned over to tax-exempt educational, charitable, or religious organizations operated exclusively for the purpose of aiding retarded children. Public Law 85-441, June 4, 1958, provides, under Section 104 that the total credits allowed under Section 3302: (c) of the'1954 Code to taxpayers with respect to wages attributable to a State for taxable years beginning on and after January 1, 1963, are to be reduced in the same manner as that provided by Section 3302 •(c) (2) for the repayment of advances made under Title XII of the Social Security Act, unless or until it is found that by December 1 of the taxable year certain amounts paid and certain costs incurred have been restored to the Treasury. Pubhc Law 85-517, July 11, 1958, extends for two years (untfl July 11, 1960) the authority of the Secretary of the Treasury to permit emergency transfers of distilled spirits for national defense purposes. Public Law 85-785, August 27, 1958, provides social security coverage for certain employees of tax-exempt organizations which did not have in effect, during the entire period in which the individuals were employed, the required waiver certificate and which paid the FICA taxes without knowledge that a waiver certificate was necessary or on the assumption that such a certificate had been filed. Pubhc Law 85-881, September 2, 1958, repeals certain obsolete provisions relating to adulterated butter and filled cheese. Public Law 85-920, September 2, 1958, provides that a corporation suing for refund can bring the suit in the judicial district in which is located its principal place of business or its principal office or agency. If neither of these is located iri any judicial district, the suit may be brought in the judicial district in which is 292 195 8 REPORT OF THE.SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY located the office to which the corporation made its return. If no return was filed, the suit may be brought in the District of Columbia. Pubhc Law 85-921, September 2, 1958, permits the printing, pubhshing, or importation of black and white illustrations of postage and revenue stamps, and, within certain size limitations, of other obligations and securities of the United States and of a foreign government, bank, or corporation for philatelic, numismatic, educational, historical, or newsworthy purposes in articles, books, journals, newspapers, or albums (but not for advertising purposes other than certain illustrations); and permits the making or importation, except for advertising purposes, of motion picture films, microfilms, and slides of postage and revenue stamps and other obligations and securities of the United States and of a foreign government, bank, or corporation. No reproductions may be made from such films or slides without the permission of the Secretary of the Treasury. Public Law 85-930, September 6, 1958, extends the Renegotiation Act of 1951 from its present expiration date of December 31, 1958, to June 3, 1959. International Financial and Monetary Developments EXHIBIT 31.—Remarks by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, January 28, 1958, before the Mississippi Valley World Trade Conference, New Orleans, La. In the framework of history, America has always been a Nation dedicated to friendship with others—in actions as well as words. From the time of the.first ships that sailed from the harbor of New Orleans with.the products of the Mississippi Valley, American traders have opened the way for friendly exchanges with other nations, exchanges of ideas as well as goods and services. Today, as the President, recently pointed..out, we are.the world's greatest trading nation, with worldtrade, providing employmentfor four ^and a ihalf ^million American workers. Yet our most valuable export, and the one most prized by others, is still, as it was in 1776, the concept of freedom and humanity for which our Nation stands. . ,; • In recent years, as the threat of communist, enslavement has grown, -we have extended a helping hand to others on a scale never before known in the world's history. We have not just talked freedom; we haye entered into arrangements for mutual security. And the free world has attained a strength which only an alliance of independent and self-respecting peoples can achieve. No free nation is cowering in fear of America, and no free nation ever will! There are certain profound convictions with which I approach all our iriternational relations. They are convictions which I have held throughout a lifetime. The first conviction, is this: No difference exists between free nations as to the objectives we seek. They are objectives that can be defined only in terms of freedom, human well-being, and progress. We all agree that man does not exist to enhance the importance • and power of the state. The state should- respect man in his dignity as a child of God, to preserve his rights as an individual, and provide opportunities which will release the full creativeness of every human being. This is the end we seek when we speak of promoting commerce, industry, agriculture, and development of all of our resources. We promote them because they make for the better employment of our citizens, better homes for our families,better education for our children, greater satisfaction of our aspirations; in short, a better world for all of us. . A second conviction which I hold strongly is that there is no question incapable of resolution if reasonable men of good will bring to bear on it their best- and united efforts. This is one of the strengths of our democratic system. . . My third great conviction is that the progress and welfare of every free nation is closely related to the progress and welfare of each. We carinot afford to be indifferent to the problems and the suffering of others. Freedom is indivisible. Our best interests clearly lie in pursuing, a policy of cooperation.. A basic aspect of this pohcy of cooperation is a firm determination on the pait of our own country to preserve a climate that will lead to the maintenance of dynamic growth. A fixed point in our national policy is the avoidance of any. returri to the. depressed conditioris of an earlier decade. Such avoidance insists on growing markets, and demands, here and abroad. ^ :nr,-.\- :; 'mv \:^ V-EXHIBITS- :• 'r.-:: •• : i ; 2 9 3 .. Let us look for a moment at the importance of world trade to the Mississippi •Valley. • . In 1956, which is the latest full year for which, we have the figures, nearly $2 billioh^of world coinmerce moved through the New Orleans district, and almost two-thirds'of this amount was in exports. • ; On a national basis, excluding our military aid-to foreign co.untries, ouf merr chandise exports in that year represented over 4 percent of our Nation's output. Measured in terms of movable goods—that is to say,:excluding seryices, constructiori, and retail distribution values, which are not exportable—you will find that our exports were around 9 percent of our national production. ;. *Td give you some indication of the importance of these export figures, they were as large as our total consumer purchases of automobiles; they equaled dur entire output of crude and prepared minerals; they were as large as the incomes of farmers from their crops or livestock. Perhaps we can best understand the importance of world trade by reviewing our national experience in retrospect. . In the.brief years:between the Continental Congress and the Constitutional Convention-each individual State retained the power to control its trade, not only with other countries, but with other States as well. That previous experience made it abundantly'clear that our survival and prosperity of the Nation required broader opportunities, t o develop our resources and wider markets to employ therh most effectively. Our Constitution recognized this requirement by virtually eliminating the barriers to trade among the States. There is a storybook flavor to.the success we have attained in enriching our material well-being through the opportunities for trade which were created and sustained in the union of our States. The common interest, and. common destiny which these opportunities offered welded a strong nation politically and economically. •;. • . The lesson of our experience has not been lost on the other countries of the free world. In their search for protective strength and growth in material advantages for their people, they seek to match our'achievements. We can assist them in pursuing this course, and at the same time gain real benefits for ourselves. We have already pointed out the iriiportance of world trade in general terms,, but let us look for a moment at some specific examples, of our own self-interest. About 40 percent of the track-laying tractors we produce, 26.percent of construction and mining equipment,:.19 percent of the trucks, 14 percisnt of the coal, and between 25 and 40 percent of the cotton, wheat, rice, fats and oils, and tobaccowe produce are sold abroad. Perhaps equally important in the long term to our continuing prosperity and the further:improvement of our standard of living is-our growing .dependence upon other countries for vital materials and supplies. Our imports may look small in comparison with our total national production—they are only about 3 percent of the totalj' or. a little over 6 percent-of the movable goods we produce. But for many commodities we are much more dependent upon imported supplies. For example, we now obtain from foreign-: sources almost one-fourth of our iron ore, one-third.of our copper and rubber, over half of our raw wool, the great bulk of our supplies of tin, nickel, aluminum, and newsprint, and most of our supplies of ferro alloying ores and metals which are essential to the manufacture of modern equipment from machine tools to jet.aircraft. Looking ahead to the future, we may be certain that as our population grows,, and our production expands, and as we dip further into our own heritage of resources, we will have "to turn more and more to foreign sources to maintain the efficiency of our production and our standard of living. To pay for these imports,, we shall have to find expanding markets for our own exports. A prudent regard for our own future needs would, alone, favor continued effort to seek reductions in trade barriers which bar our exports—a policy which we have been following through t h e authority granted under the various trade agreement acts which,have been in effect without interruption since 1934 under both major political parties.. .' In recent years, the Sino-Soviet Bloc has added a new weapon in its conflict with the free world. Beginning in about 1953 the Bloc launched a series of economic programs designed to gain greater influence in the less developed countries of the free world, particularly in the vast areas of Asia and Africa. In these regions new nations are struggling for economic improvement, and the Bloc is. offering increased trade in. an effort to promote its own political objectives. During the period from 1954 to. 1956 the trade of.the Bloc with t h e less developed coun- 294 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY tries rose about 70 percent. In 1956, trade with the Bloc constituted more than 20 percent of the total foreign trade of Afghanistan, Iceland, Egypt, Yugoslavia, and Burma; about 17 percent of Turkey's foreign trade; and 12 percent of Iran's. The Bloc is able to carry out an economic offensive of this sort effectively because it conducts its foreign trade as a state monopoly, and so can mix its politics with its business. Expanded capital goods production in the Bloc, and its demands for food and raw materials, provide an economic basis fof the expansion of trade with the less developed countries of the free world. Offers of the Bloc tb increase trade have met a favorable response in many of the less developed countries which are in search of markets for their own products. These moves to link the economies—and hence the political destinies—of the less developed countries to the Sino-Soviet Bloc present both a threat and a challenge to the free world. These countries are increasingly aware that trade tied to political motivations rather than commercial considerations is likely to be unstable and is not promising in the long term. Some of them also question the capacity of the Bloc to deliver the types and qualities of goods they require. But the problem they face is one of alternatives. If the nations of the free world which are most advanced industrially recede from sound trade policies, the less developed countries may move into closer relations with the Bloc. Our choice is particularly fateful at this time because the less developed countries of the free world may stand at the threshold of marked change. As these countries are moving to expand their economic development, the shape of the future is being molded. If their growth takes place in economic isolation, they will fail to achieve their highest destiny. The free world will be fragmented politically and its economies divided. Should the less developed countries turn to the Sino-Soviet Bloc tp provide markets and supplies for their growing industries, we would lose vital sources of raw materials and potential markets as well as political allies. We must all have regard for the maintenance of our national strength—mflitary and economic. We must cooperate to exchange not only skills and-resources but goods and mutual confidence as well. Only if we affirm now a solid and enduring foundation for the .growth of trade among the nations of the free world can we hope to link our strength with theirs and join with them in new achievements of material and spiritual well-being. In the period since the end of the second World War, there has been a great resurgence of American private investment in foreign countries. This flow of private capital has brought with it the managerial skills and technical excellence which have been the foundation of our own economic growth and which is playing a vital role in the development of industry and trade throughout the world. If American investors and businessmen are to continue the expansion of their activities abroad, they will require assurance that the profits they earn may eventually be remitted in dollars, and the capital shifted if other ventures are considered more desirable. The -transfer of values from one country to another must in the last- analysis be made in the form of goods and services. It will be clear, then, that the movement of goods across international boundaries on a mutually beneficial.basis is crucial if we are to encourage ^private enterprise and private capital to do their part most effectively in developing the industries of the free world, and so diminish reliance on governments to do the job. In all these efforts we must take action to assure that the President is amply authorized to safeguard the markets of American industry and agriculture in the very important area of the world which has made common market arrangements and is contemplating the extension of those arrangements through a proposed free trade area. We in this country can never permit ourselves to forget that the responsibility for the ultimate success of this and all national policies lies with the people, with each of us individually. Leadership can show the way. But as our history has proved many times, very little can be accomplished in the long run unless the people themselves understand and support the policies as necessary and right. In our generation, we are entering a new age, an age in which the physical distances separating countries and continents have almost lost their meaning. Four centuries ago the knowledge that mankind lived on a ball whirling in space was gradually permeating the countries of Western Europe, and this knowledge underlaid the discovery of the New World. Today, the vastness of outer space has become the New World. Each nation's concept of its position in relation to others has taken on a wholly new meaning. Time is running out for any country that would choose to "go it alone." EXHIBITS 295 We know that the space age—whatever else it may bring—has created and will continue to create many new and difficult problems in the field of international relations. You who have daily contact with the practical problems of world trade have a serious responsibility in the broader area of national policy. The Nation deserves not only your understanding, but your enlightened help in making the relationship between freedom and trade fully appreciated and understood here and abroad. You could make no greater contribution to peace and freedom. You could have no greater opportunity to justify the blessings of peace and material prosperity. EXHIBIT 32.—Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, March 18, 1958, before the Subcommittee on International Finance of the Senate Banking and Currency Committee on the proposed establishment of an International Development Association It is a pleasure to appear before your subcommittee with respect to Senate Resolution 264, which your distinguished chairman h^s introduced. The resolution proposes that consideration be given to the establishment of an International Development A.ssociation in cooperation with the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development. It is contemplated that such an agency would provide long-term dollar and hard currency loans at a low rate of interest and repayable in local currencies to supplement World Bank loans, and would also use foreign currencies resulting from the sale of United States agricultural surpluses and other programs in its lending activities. This proposal relates to questions of real importance to both this country and the less-developed countries of the free world. We must recognize that the desires of the less-developed countries for economic development financing frequently exceed their capacity to service loans from the Export-Import Bank and the International Bank. Since the International Bank is financed largely by borrowing in the American market, its loans must be repayable for the most part in dollars. Many of the less-developed countries have a limited capacity to service dollar loans. Loans payable in the currencies of the borrowing country are very much easier to service than loans payable in dollars. This, of course, is one of the reasons why our own Development Loan Fund is making loans on these flexible terms. Senator Monroney's proposal represents a valuable additional suggestion as to how to deal with this problem. It has been suggested by the chairman that the International Development Association be set up with an original capital of $1 billion, in dollars or other hard currency. Of this amount, the United States would probably put up 30 percent, or $300 million. The Association would also have the use of local cur-^ rencies, including a large portion of those which the United States has accumulated from its large-scale disposal of agricultural surpluses. The chairman also suggests that the loans of the International Development Association should be subordinated to the loans of the International Bank, and that it might extend its own loans for 40 years at low interest rates, with payments of interest and principal being made in the currency of the borrowing country. The resolution and the suggestions that have been made in implementing its objectives are being given and should be given most careful and thorough examination. It appears that in any undertaking of a multilateral program of loans repayable in local currency, the best way to do so would be through the use of an affiliate of the International Bank which could draw upon the experience and personnel of that organization. However, the implications of the proposal are farreaching, and we shall need to devote much time and effort to give it the thorough consideration which it warrants. We must explore various economic, financial, and legal questions. The creation of an international institution involving large sums of money is a major effort of international financial negotiation, and we would need to be sure of our grounds before undertaking such an important endeavor. In this light we may wish to suggest for your consideration some modifications in the wording of the proposed resolution. For example, in order to be slightly more specific as to the relationship of the proposed International Development Association to the Bank, we would offer the suggestion that the last clause of the opening paragraph of the resolution read "as an affiliate of the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development." One of the advantages sought by the resolution is that countries other than the United States would provide additional financing of economic development .296 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY which they m a y not be likely to furnish in t h e absence of such an institution. As outlined in t h e proposal, such additional financing is anticipated from subscriptions of $700 million in hard or usable currencies from foreign countries. While it would be very helpful if capital for development abroad could be made available on a larger scale from some of the other countries, it is not now known whether foreign countries would be filling to subscribe substantial amounts of 'Convertible currencies to such an institution. Many of t h e 65 member countries of t h e International Bank regard themselves as less-developed areas and might w a n t to consider whether they should provide capital from their limited reserves of convertible currencies to finance development in other areas. The industrialized countries of Europe, Canada, Japan, and a few other areas provide t h e best '•possibilities for seeking subscriptions in hard currencies. To some exterit they are now exporting capital through public loans and credits, through direct private investments, and other forms of foreign investment. Foreign central banks and international investors have also purchased substantial amounts of dollar obligations of the International Bank. The experience of the International Bank is illuminating, and suggests b o t h t h e possibilities and m a n y of t h e practical problems encountered in multilateral financing. The Articles of Agreement of the International Bank provide t h a t each member shall contribute, in addition to two percent in gold or dollars, 18 percent of its capital subscription in its own currency. T h e Bank has had available for lending out of its two percent capital, $63.5 million from the United States and about $120 million from other countries. The 18 percent contributions are n o t automatically convertible since they may be used only with the permission of t h e subscribing go.vernment. Countries have been urged to make funds available for the Bank's lending operations from the 18 percent capital. The total subscriptions forming this portion of the capital amount to t h e .equivalent of $1,680 million. A little more t h a n half of this has been loaned, amounting to about $890 million. T h e United States subscription amounted to $571.5 million. The balance of t h e a m o u n t loaned consists of t h e Canadian subscription and p a r t of the capital subscriptions of Germany, Italy, the United Kingdom, Belgium, France, the Netherlands, Sweden, and small amounts from other countries. Besides the $319.5 million obtained from these countries, the Bank has obtained releases under which i t expects to be able to use about $250 million in t h e near future. M a n y of t h e countries have from time to time imposed special conditions upon the use of funds' released by t h e m . While the experience of the International Bank is valuable in judging the prospects for obtaining capital subscriptions from other countries in convertible or usable currencies, there is one i m p o r t a n t difference between the Bank and the proposed International Development Association. The International Bank makes bankable loans, most of which are repayable in dollars, and the. rest are to be serviced in major trading currencies. The International Development Association would be making loans most of which would be repayable in the curfeney of t h e borrowing country. J u s t how this difference in t h e hardness of the assets held by t h e two institutions would affect the a t t i t u d e of foreign countries- toward capital subscriptions to t h e new institution is not entirely clear, and would have to be determined by cons.ultation. T h e second way in which it is proposed t h a t t h e International Development Association augment the resources available for economic development is through t h e use of local curfeney which has accrued from various United States programs.I t is suggested t h a t currencies accumulated by t h e United States could be used for economic development programs through the proposed institution. I would like to examine this aspect of the proposal in a little more detail. Broadly speaking, the degree of success which might result from the proposal would involve, among other things, t h e answers to these questions: (1) Is local currency available in countries t h a t might have capital goods available for export to other areas? (2) If there are such holdings, would t h e countries permit their use for financing exports? (3) Would they be willing to have the.currencies turned over to an international agency for this purpose? (4) Would financing through this agency within the country be favored by countries now receiving . loans repayable in local currency from United States programs? While t h e whole subject of local currency accumulations is extremely complex, it should be clearly understood t h a t t h e United States does not have unilateral; power of decision in these questions. Although the* United States holds title to large sums in local currencies, t h e s e have been acquired only under specific agreements with foreign countries t h a t their use would be limited in various specific EXHIBITS 297 •waj^s, and generally these limitations do not permit their use for financing exports. The reason is clear. Most of these currencies were acquired from the sale of surplus agricultural commodities of which the United States wished to dispose. In order to avoid a drain on their, foreign exchange resources, foreign countries are willing to buy our agricultural surpluses only if strict limitations are placed upon the use of the currencies which are paid into our accounts. We would have to determine the extent to which these countries would consent to diverting any •substantial portion of these currencies from the financing of development in their own countr}^ to financing exports to other areas. In addition to this broad general limitation, we do not in fact hold very large amounts of local currency in industrial countries which are in a position to export the goods needed by the less-developed areas. A large part of the European currency is being used for United States governmental expenditures, and loan programs have been agreed for most of the remainder. By far the predominant part of the local currencies held are the currencies of less-developed countries themselves. These currencies could be utilized within the country for loans, and transferred to an international agency, if the countries agreed to do so. However, funds spent within their own borders will not at once add to the country's real resources, as do imports of capital and other goods from abroad. Even in less-developed areas, a large or preponderant part of the financing of •economic development over a period of time has been and wfll be provided from internal savings within the country. And over time, these savings, effectively invested, will add to the productive effort of the country. But they do not have the immediate effect of imports, and frequently advanced capital equipment can be procured only in a more industrialized country. The mobilization of large amounts of local currency under the Public Law 480 program does provide a fund of currenC5^ usable within the country which the foreign government might not otherwise easily obtain. Effectively used, and with due regard to the inflationary •consequences of too large an outlay in addition to the already existing level of public expenditure and private investment, this mobilized fund of currency can be a useful adjunct to internal development programs. But the immediate increase in real resources which comes from the Public Law 480 program is the dehvery in the country of the agricultural commodities themselves, which add to the food and raw material resources of the recipient country. The present program of the United States contemplates the use.of most of these currencies for economic development within the country which originally acquired our agricultural surpluses. Loans are being made through United States agencies that are repayable in local currency on very favorable terms. For example, the loans to the Brazflian Economic Development Bank for the financing of economic development in that country amount to about $150 million, and are repayable in Brazflian currency over 40 years. Frequently these loans, which are both made and repayable in local currency, can be used to facilitate the operations of the Export Import Bank and the International Bank by providing for local currency expenditures which are related to the projects being financed b}^ these institutions. Broadly speaking, the foreigri currency holdings derived from the sale of agricultural surplus commodities under Public Law 480 may be used for: (1) Country uses—where the currency is granted or loaned back to the coun-try from which it was originahy received. (2) United States uses—which includes meeting the general expenditures of our foreign missions and personnel and special programs such as educational and informational activities and the development of new agricultural markets. About 70 percent of the present holdings derived from Public Law 480 are destined for country use and the remaining 30 percent for United States use. Under the Cooley Amendment there will in the future be increasing amounts for private American investment which will reduce the percentages available for the other uses. ' Let us consider first those currencies which are to be loaned or granted to the country from which they are received. These uses are specified in the agreements which generated the currency and the foreign countries involved have in effect already secured our agreement'that they willnot be used for expenditures which do not have the specific approval of the foreign government. We would be required by consultation to ascertain whether they would approve expenditures which would represent a claim on their resources for the benefit of another country. • In fact, one of the specific uses provided for in Public Law 480 is the financing of goods purchased in one country for the use of another country. Only very 298 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY small amounts of currencies generated under the program have to date been agreed upon for this purpose. In the case of the currencies which are, by agreement, for United States use, the situation may be somewhat different. Where the currencies are available for use to meet the general obligations of the United States in its operations, the foreign exchange which these countries would otherwise earn is reduced, since we save dollar expenditures by using these currencies. In this case the foreign countries might more readily agree to the transfer of currencies to an international body since they already expect to lose dollars through thetr use. In this situation, however, assuming the United States had ready use for the currencies, they represent an asset as valuable to the United States as are dollars. Consequently, transferring such usable currencies to the international body would cost us dollars, but would not necessarily give the international organization a convertible asset. There are in a few countries currencies for United States use which are in excess of our immediate requirements and will require many years to use. These countries might agree to use of the currencies by an international institution but the usefulness of these currencies is limited because they are for the most part the currencies of less-developed areas. A relatively new type of use is for loans through the Export-Import Bank to private American business to encourage investment abroad. This program was recently enacted by the Congress in the Cooley Amendment. If these funds should be provided to the International Development Association, such funds could not be used to carry out this congressional intent, and ways would have to be examined to meet this objective. For the future one of the principal sources of foreign currencies will be the repayments on loans made from currencies received under Public Law 480 and the mutual security program. These will reach considerable magnitude during the middle and later 1960's and continue over the next 40 years. The loan agreements with the countries permit the repayments to be used for any expenditures or payments by the United States in the debtor country. Transfers into other currencies or areas are, however, subject to mutual agreement from time to time and we have agreed that whatever use the United States makes of the currency we will take into consideration the economic position of the country concerned. Since these repayments are spread over many years in the future it is impossible to predict what the economic position,of the countries will be at the time of repayment or what other uses for the currencies the United States may find. The creation of any new institution will not by itself produce any new resources of capital for the less-developed areas of the free world. Making resources available means that the production of some nation must be tapped to provide real goods, for the use of another nation. On the other hand, we must remember that mechanisms for the best utilization of capital resources approach being as important as the capital itself. As we explore what might be accomplished under the proposed International Development Association, we know from our earlier conversations that the chairman would want us to face afl of the problems realistically and to develop our thinking in terms of the important objectives. At the same time, I think that we all agree that our national interest requires the capacity for bilateral financing. The Congress has expressed its faith in bilateral loans payable in dollars through the Export-Import Bank. We must, in our judgment, continue to implement the Development Loan Fund as a part of our national policy. And for this we need the appropriations which have been included in the President's budget. Meanwhile, we shall be exploring and developing the contributions that can be made through the proposed International Development Association. This should proceed with all reasonable diligence. To make progress in the underdeveloped countries of the free world is going to require the best resources that can effectively be brought to bear from the United States and from other countries—and through the best utihzation of our bankable resources, as well as the use of resources in other ways. In this statement I have listed many points for further consideration. I have done so because these points seem to involve questions that will require a good deal of study. There are a number of other areas suggested by the resolution which deserve exploration. We shall proceed with our further consideration of the proposal with diligence. EXHIBITS 299 EXHIBIT 33.—Letter from Secretary of the Treasury Anderson, August 18, 1958, to the President on the adequacy of the resources of the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development DEAR MR. PRESIDENT: We have frequently discussed together the importance of a sound and sustainable growth in the economy of the free world to both the foreign and domestic policy objectives of the United States. Over the longer term, I believe that the well-being of the friendly nations depends not only on the economic and financial health of the industrialized nations of Europe, North America, and elsewhere, but also upon the economic growth and progress of nations in the lessdeveloped areas of the free world. Through a number of measures the United States has been pursuing these objectives, and this year we have taken major steps forward in our own programs. It would seem highly desirable that the nations of the free world as a whole should move forward cooperatively to deal more effectively with the problem. One of the best ways of achieving such cooperation would be by strengthening the financial institutions already established; . In the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development and the International Monetary Fund we have seasoned international instruments now engaged in this work. Both of these organizations have staffs of internationally recruited experts who, with over a decade of experience behind them, have demonstrated their ability to act effectively and impartially. Both have established operating standards and policies which command the respect of their member governments, The Fund has provided short-term financial assistance to 35 member countries, aggregating the equivalent of over $3 billion. Through such assistance and the influence it has been able to bring to bear for the adoption of sound currency and exchange policies, the Fund has contributed substantially towards monetary stability and a freer flow of international trade and payments. The Bank has invested some $3.8 billiori in productive development projects in 47 different countries and territories, most of them underdeveloped. Loans bj^ the Bank are running at the rate of about $750 million a year. The Bank's financing and technical assistance activities have served to accelerate the pace of economic growth all over the free world; and it has carried on these activities on a basis that has earned for the Bank the confidence of all major private capital markets. The establishment of the International Finance Corporation, which supplies capital to encourage the growth of productive private enterprise, has recently increased the scope and flexibility of the Bank's field of operation. The International Monetary Fund utilizes for its operations gold and member country currencies which have been provided to it by the member countries through their subscriptions to its capital.' Advances, by the Fund in the past two years have amounted to approximately $1.8 billion and nearly $900 million additional are in effect earmarked against standby commitments which the Fund has undertaken. Under the charter of the International Bank, a small part of its authorized capital is available for loans, but the Bank must depend primarily on borrowings in the financial markets of the world. The major part of the authorized capital in effect constitutes a guarantee for these borrowings. The Bank has raised the equivalent of more than $2 billion through issuing its bonds denominated in six different Currencies. At present the equivalent of about $1.7 billion is outstanding in such bonds. The Bank's bonds are recognized throughout the world as securities of the highest quality and, as a result, the Bank has been able to borrow large sums of money at frequent intervals at rates of interest comparable to those of highly regarded government securities. This in turn has enabled the Bank to fix interest rates on its own loans at levels not imposing undue burdens on the borrowing countries concerned. While the Bank stfll has unused borrowing capacity, its volume of lending has expanded greatly and, if it is to continue to be able to meet legitimate loan requests likely to be submitted to it during the years ahead, it must go to the market for larger amounts of money than ever before. This would require a broadening of the market for the Bank's bonds and the tapping of sources of capital not yet reached. During the annual meetings of the Bank and Fund at New Delhi early in October, we should give consideration to ways and means of increasing the effectiveness of these two institutions. As United States Governor of the Bank and Fund, I would welcome your guidance with respect to these vital problems of policy. If you believe that certain avenues of action should be explored preparatory to the New Delhi meeting, I would ask the National Advisory 300 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Council to proceed promptly with detailed study and arrangements. We would,, of course, wish to consult with members of the Congress who are- particularly concerned with this subject. . . A related matter has recently been under consideration by the Senate, which has adopted a resolution calling upon the National Advisory Council to undertake a study of the feasibility of an International Development Association as an affiliate of the International Bank. The resources of such an organization wouldbe subscribed by the members of the Bank. The Association would finance development projects on the basis of long term loans at reasonably low interest rates repayable in whole or in part in local currencies. In the course of its study, the Council will also explore the possibility that such an affiliate of the Bank might prove to be a means, supplemental to our own national programs, for assuring productive investment of some part of the various local currencies becoming available to the United States through the sale of agricultural surpluses or other programs. It is intended to undertake informal discussions with other members of the Bank with a view to ascertaining their attitude toward an expansion of the Bank's activities along these lines. ' I request your guidance as to whether, if the study indicates that the proposal is promising, you would wish to have the subject pursued formally with the governments of the other member countries of the International Bank. Faithfully yours, ROBERT B . ANDERSON, Secretary of the Treasury. EXHIBIT 34.—Letter from the President, August 26, 1958, to Secretary of the Treasury Anderson outlining a three-point program for consideration at the annual meetings in New Delhi of the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development DEAR M R . SECRETARY: I have read with great interest your letter concerning the adequacy of the present resources of the International Monetary Fund and the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development. I thoroughly agree with you that the well-being of the free world is vitally affected by the progress of the nations in the less-developed areas as well as the economic situation in the more industrialized countries. A sound and sustainable rate of economic growth in the free world is a central objective of our policy. It is universally true, in my opinion, that governmental strength and social stabflity call for an economic environment which is both dynamic and financiallysound. Among the principal elements in maintaining such an economic basis for" the free world are: (1) a continuing growth in productive investment, interriational as well as domestic; (2) financiarpolicies that wfll command the confidence of the public, and assure the strength of currencies; and (3) mutually beneficial international trade and a constant effort to avoid hampering restrictions on the freedom of exchange transactions. , During the past year, as you know, major advances have been made in our own programs for dealing with" these problems. These include an increase in the lending'authority of the Export-Import Bank; establishment of the Development Loan Fund on a firrrier basis through incorporation and enlargement of its resources; extension and broadening of the Reciprocal Trade' Agreements Act; and continuation of the programs carried forward under the Agricultural Trade Development and Assistance Act. Our own programs, however, can do only a part of the job. Accordingly, as we carry them forward, we should also seek a major expansion in the international programs designed to promote economic growth with the indispensable aid of strong and healthy currencies. i^'#^!# As you have pointed out, the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development and the International Monetary Fund are international instruments of proved effectiveness already engaged in this work. While both institutions still have uncommitted resources, I am convinced that the time has now come for us to consider, together with the other members of these two agencies, how we can better equip them for the tasks of the decade ahead. Accordingly, I request, assuming concurrence by the interested members of the Congress with whom you will consult, that you take the necessary steps in conjunction with the National Advisory Council on International [Monetary and Financial Problems, to support a course of actiori along the following lines: EXHIBITS 301 ' First.—In your capacity as United States Governor of the International Monetary Fund, I should like to have you propose, at the annual meeting of the Fund at New Delhi in October, that prompt consideration be given to the advisability of a general increase in the quotas assigned to the member governments. The past ten years testify to the important role played by the Internationale Monetary Fund in assisting countries which, from time to time, have encountered temporary difficulties in their balance of payments; We are riow entering a period when the implementation of effective and sound ecoriomic policies may be increasingly dependent, in many couritries upon the facilities and technical advicewhich the Fund can make available, as they meet temporary external financial difficulties. • This is particularly true of the less developed countries with the great variability in foreign exchange receipts to which they are subject from time totime. It also applies to industrialized countries which are dependent on foreigntrade. Through its growing experience and increasingly close relations with its members, the Fund can also help see to it that countries are encouraged to pursuepolicies that create stable financial and monetary conditions while contributing to expanding world trade and income. The International Monetary Fund is uniquely qualified to harmonize these objectives but its present resources do not appear adequate to the task. Second.—In your capacity as United States Governor of the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, I should like to have you propose, at theannual meeting of the Bank, that prompt consideration be given to the'advisability of an increase in the authorized capital of the Bank and to the offering of such additional capital for subscription by the Bank's member governments.. Such additional capital subscriptions, if authorized, would not necessarily require additional payments to be made to the Bank; they would, however, ensure the adequacy of the Bank's lending resources for an extended period by strengthening the guarantees which stand behind the Bank's obligations. The demands upori the Bank for development loans have been increasing rapidly,, and it is in a position to make a growing contribution to the econorriic progress of the free world in the period which lies ahead. Moreover, it can do this by channeling the savings of private investors throughout the world into sound loans, repayable in dollars or other major currencies. But to meet the rising need for such sound development loans, it must be able to raise the funds in the capital markets of the free world. An increase in the Bank's subscribed capital, by increasing theextent of the responsibility of member governments for assuring that the -Bank will always be in a position to meet its obligations, would enable the Bank-to place a.larger volume of its securities in a broader market, while stfll maintaining the prime quality of its securities and hence the favorable terms on which it can borrow and relend funds. Third.—With respect to the proposal for an International Development Association, I believe that such an affiliate of the International Bank, if adequately supported by a number of countries able to contribute, could provide a usefuB supplement to the existing lending activities of the Bank and thereby acceleratethe pace of economic development in the less developed member countries of the Bank. In connection with the study of this matter that you are undertaking in the National Advisory "Council pursuant to the Senate Resolution, I note that you' contemplate informal discussions with other member governments of the Bank with a view to ascertaining their attitude toward an expansion of the Bank's responsibilities along these lines. .If the results indicate that the creation of theInternational Development Association would be feasible, I request that, as a third step, you initiate promptly negotiations looking toward the establishment of such an affiliate of the Bank. The three-point program I have suggested for consideration would require intensified international cooperation directed to a broad attack upon some of themajor economic problems of our time. A concerted and successful international effort along these lines wouldj I feel certain, create a great new source of hope for all those who share our coriviction that with material betterment and free institutions flourishing side by side we can look forward with confidence to a peaceful world. Sincerely, DwiGHT D . EISENHOWER. 302 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY EXHIBIT 35.—Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson as Governor for the United States, October 6, 1958, at the opening joint session of the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development and the International Monetary Fund, New Delhi, India On behalf of the United States delegation, I should like first to thank the Prime Minister of India for the warm welcome which he has extended to the Boards of Governors. We have come to this meeting with a keen awareness of the profoundly important role which the Asian members of these two institutions are playing and will continue to play in the free world. In a vivid sense their needs and their aspirations epitomize the task of the Bank and the Fund. It is the concern of all the governments represented in this room to find ways of contributing more effectively to the well-being of all peoples. As members of these institutions we have expressed our conviction that free countries gain much by friendly and effective association in a common attack on the financial and economic problems which confront them. We are pleased to have the Governors for Malaya, Tunisia, Morocco, Spain, and Libya join with us here today, in our consideration of these vital questions. We also wish to express our appreciation of the able address by the Chairman of the Boards of Governors, who has focused our attention on some of the basic problems confronting our countries as they seek to develop their" economies and expand their trade. We agree with him that sound internal finance is an essential condition to sound international economic policy. We should like to emphasize that economic development can and should go forward with noninflationary monetary policies so that the greatest benefits can be realized. We in the United States Government find great encouragement in the increasingly effective way in which the Fund and the Bank have been performing their tasks. By improving the capacity of both institutions to operate throughout the free world, the member countries can greatly intensify their efforts to deal with the problems of economic development and financial and economic stability. It was to this end that the President of the United States and I recently exchanged letters in August expressing the results of our thinking about international action which might fruitfully be taken. Pursuant to instructions which President Eisenhower gave to me, I have introduced resolutions at the Procedures Committee calling for a study of an increase in the resources of the Bank and the Fund. President Eisenhower has also asked me to read to you the following message: "One of the great opportunities which free nations have to be .of service to one another—and to the larger cause of freedom itself—is that of fostering economic growth and well-being. A key element certainly is the timely provision of needed capital resources. "It is universally true, in my opinion, that governmental strength and social stability call for an economic environment which is both dynamic and-financially sound. Among the principal elements in maintaining such an economic basis for the free world are: (1) A continuing growth in productive investment, international as well as domestic; (2) financial policies that will command the confidence of the public, and assure the strength of currencies; and (3) mutually beneficial international trade and a constant effort to avoid hampering restrictions ori the freedom of exchange transactions. "During the period of their operations the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development and the International Monetary Fund have performed an indispensable function in providing both short- and long-term financial assistance to various nations in need of it. There is widespread agreement as to the effectiveness of these two great institutions. A constructive increase in their resources would greatly enhance their usefulness to the free world community. "These facts have prompted me to ask that consideration be given to certain measures designed to increase the capacity of both the Bank and the Fund so that they may better serve the rising needs of our free world economy. It is my conviction that through these institutions we can give real encouragement and hope to all our member countries in the decade ahead. A progressively broadening attack upon some of the paramount economic problems of our time can be made possible by this program. I am confident that it can provide a new source of bright hope for the peoples of our world." I should also like to say something about the International Development Association to which President Eisenhower referred in his August letter. We are now studying this proposal in my own Government. I have no blueprint EXHIBITS 303 to offer at this time for such an association. Essentially, however, it would be an affiliate of the International Bank which would make long-term loans for economic development repayable in whole or in part in the currency of the borrowing country. As I have said, the United States Government is making its own studies of the feasibility and desirability of establishing an IDA. We hope that other countries will at the same time be giving thought to the matter, and we shall look forward to having informal discussions with you. If these informal studiesr and discussions lead to encouraging conclusions, it would be appropriate to undertake more formal study and negotiation, looking to the establishment of such an association. • We are meeting at a time in which the economic development of the free world is both encouraging and challenging. We must expect of our free economies that they will be at the same time dynamic and strongly resistant to both inflation and recession. We must expect also that they will provide an environment which invites and encourages investment and that they will generate the savings which make investment possible. To my mind, a most satisfying aspect of the experience of our countries, taken as a whole, in the years since the war has been the upward trend of world savings, production, and world trade. The -Bank and the Fund have again demonstrated, in the past year of their operations, that they are well designed to contribute both to growth and to economic and financial stability. The Fund has completed two years of operation on a very large scale indeed. The International Bank has also been going through the most intense period of activity in its history, and in the fiscal year made a larger volume of loan commitments than in any" preceding year. As indicated in the President's letter to me on August 22, it is our earnest hope that the executive boards of the Fund and Bank will consider promptly the question of the most practical means of increasing the quotas of the Fund and the capital of the Bank. Various aspects will, of course, have to be dealt with in these studies, including the amount of the increases, the manner in which subscriptions and quota increases would be subscribed or paid, the extent of participation by the members as a whole, and many others. No doubt some weeks would be needed for the executive boards to complete the studies.. However, I hope that the importance of the matter will be so evident as to create a sense of urgency, and that by the end of December the boards of governors may expect to receive the reports from the two executive boards. EXHIBIT 36.—Statement by Secretary of the Treasury Anderson as Governor for the United States, October 7, 1958, at the discussion of the Annual Report of the International Monetary Fund, New Delhi, India Our distinguished managing director has read a thoughtful statement of the problems of the Fund in its relation to the economies of its members. His great experience and gift for expression have enabled him to draw our attention vividly and with clear economic insight to the central questions to which we should all give our very best efforts. . The Annual Report of the Fund, which we are considering today, is worthy of its predecessors, in its comprehensive and balanced analysis of changes in the world economy. Each year these reports have added to our understanding of the financial relations and the trade and payments problems of the members of the free world. The Report records the work which the Fund has done in advising its members on exchange policies and related monetary issues, and describes progress toward the agreed objective of freer trade and payments arrangements under conditions of exchange stability. We of the United States delegation are exceedingly glad to have, as members of our delegation, two distinguished United States Senators, Senator J. W. Fulbright and Senator A. Willis Robertson, who have the major-responsibility for legislation in international financial matters.. Prior to our last annual meeting there was a feeling of uncertainty about the course of foreign exchange rates. New and large balance of payments problems had emerged in several countries. Effective use of the Fund's resources by the members during this period gave the world reassurance that there were means of assisting member countries in temporary balance of payments difficulties even when their deficits had become rather large. There had also been a disturbing amount of speculation in currencies and a shifting of international balances. Vigorous statements of the last annual meeting by the Governors for the United. 479641—59 21 > 304 195 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY Kingdom a n d t h e Federal Republic of Germany, and by t h e managing director, against t h e background of earlier governmental action, set a t rest much of t h e speculation in t h e exchange markets. We meet here a t New Delhi in a different atmosphere from t h e one which dominated our preceding meeting. T h e F u n d report has called a t t e n t i o n to t h e generally strong international financial position of t h e industrial members of our two institutions. At t h e same time it recognizes t h a t t h e year 1957-58 has brought with it a number of problems for m a n y of t h e countries t h a t depend' upon t h e production of food and raw materials for their international earnings. This is of course related to three major factors, first, t h e overall trend of world trade, second, t h e r a t e of expansion in production of particular commodities,, a n d finally, t h e pressure of demand for.imports in t h e less developed countries. insofar as developments in the United States affect the level of world trade, t h e p r e s e n t ' o u t l o o k appears to us to be encouraging. In fact, during the p a s t year our imports continued a t a high level and our exports fell off quite decidedly. T h u s , in fact, during this period t h e United States absorbed some of the impact of the leveling off in world trade in its own export accounts, and acted as a sustaining factor on world trade as a whole through the maintenance of a high level of imports. T h e encouraging factors in our domestic economic situation, and t h e growing competition of other countries in world markets, lead us to anticipate a strengthening of t h e world trade and p a y m e n t s situation. I t may be noted t h a t in recent years, the upward trend of increased official holdings of gold and dollar balances has continued. I n addition, there were sizable private balances which are used in t h e settlement of international accounts. I n the p a s t two years we have had temporary balance of p a y m e n t s difficulties, in the industrial countries, and more recently similar problems among the lessindustrialized nations. I t is in the light of these problems t h a t certain suggestions have been p u t before this body by my Government. I refer to t h e proposal which we have made, t h a t the executive directors of the F u n d p r o m p t l y consider the question of enlarging its resources through an increase in quotas. In t h e last two fiscal years, drawings on the F u n d have amounted to $1.8 billicn, and in addition a t the end of this period there were outstanding standby commitments of $884 million. As we look ahead to the next decade, t h e resources available to t h e Fimd to help countries to meet temporary swings in their balances of p a y m e n t s m a y well be inadequate. I n the light of our experience in recent years, we feel t h a t practical means to provide an additional cushion of this character deserve the most p r o m p t attention. This would affbrdan additional measure of confidence and t h u s help sustain world production and' t r a d e . A strengthened Monetary F u n d would also give encouragement to the efforts which member countries are making to maintain or achieve convertibflity. If t h e governors find themselves receptive to t h e suggestion t h a t we have made, the executive board would, of course, consider a number of points. I n addition to the more obvious questions, such as t h e a m o u n t of t h e increase in the quotas and the form of p a y m e n t , it would be well for the board to consider ways in which, more effective utilization can be made of t h e currencies of industrialized countries other t h a n the United States. We have been h a p p y to note t h a t drawings have recently been made in some currencies other t h a n United States dollars. To t h e extent t h a t the F u n d makes effective use of other currencies, its ability to play its sustaining role in world t r a d e should be enhanced. We h a v e reason to be proud of t h e work of t h e Fund, especially during the last two years. I n addition to its financial assistance, t h e F u n d has courageously and devotedly undertaken to help its members deal with t h e difficult financial problems of internal inflation and exchange management. We look forward to a continuation of its p a t i e n t and reliable guidance in this extremely i m p o r t a n t and rewarding field. Exhibit 37.— S t a t e m e n t by Assistant Secretary of the Treasury Coughran as Temporary Alternate Governor of the International Finance Corporation, October 8, 1958, N e w Delhi, India. The President of the Corporation in his address has drawn attention to a year of further experience in the specialized activities with which the Corporation deals. We have listened with riiuch interest to his remarks today, and we appreciate his leadership of the Corporation throughout t h e year. EXHIBITS 305 The I F C gives further emphasis to a concept which has been a guiding one in the development of industrialized countries of the free world. I t is the idea", t h a t productive private enterprise, under the stimulus of the economic incentives of a free economic system, can play a role of p a r a m o u n t importance in achieving' a quickened tempo of economic development. The Corporation is designed as a catalyst in this process. We have all underwritten its objectives with our capital subscriptions. We have t h u s expressed agreement t h a t I F C offers an advantageous means of assisting soundly conceived private projects. With modest contributions acting as a lever, a potentially larger fund of private capital, should be directed into rewarding uses. T h e s t a r t has been made ably, and, it is. to be hoped, with prospects of increasing activity. An examination of t h e investments of t h e Corporation to date shows evidence t h a t t h e intended catalytic action by the Corporation is in fact beginriing to^ t a k e place. The capital investments so far maide have been accompanied b y ' private investment, either in the form of loans dr equity capital,',which is triple, t h a t of the Corporation's. The Corporation has t h u s elicited flows^of additional' capital funds from within the country in which the proj ect-is located and from sources in the more industrialized centers o f t h e world. I am happy to say t h a t foi ward-looking private enterprise in my own country has participated to a substantial extent in t h e additional private investment associated with t h e Corporation's investments. Indeed, the overall record of American enterprise in providing needed resources abroad is a highly favorable one. Recently available figures show t h a t United States private long-term investments in foreign countries in the last full calendar year alone increased by about $3.5 billion, t h u s raising the total of such investm e n t s by more t h a n 10 percent. The growth of the organization during the year, both in membership and in operating experience, is an encouraging sign. I t now numbers 57 countries, and I wish on behalf of the United States to welcome the Governors for Ghana, Malaya, Ireland, and Libya. M y Government is also pleased to note t h a t the increase in the. Corporation's commitments has been accompanied by a wider geographic distribution of its investment activities. T h e Corporation's relatively brief existence enables us to avoid dwelling on history; our concentration is on the years ahead. We look forward to another year of increasing activity and usefulness on t h e p a r t of the Corporation. E X H I B I T 38.—Joint a n n o u n c e m e n t by the Treasury Department, the D e p a r t m e n t of State, and the Export-Import Bank, January 30, 1958, relating to financial discussions between the United States and France Financial discussions between the United States and France Discussions on t h e French financial situation h a v e been held in Washington during t h e past 2 weeks between officials and agencies of t h e Government of t h e United States and a French financial mission headed by M. Jean Monnet. T h e United States has been represented in these talks by t h e Secretary of t h e Treasury, Mr. Robert B. Anderson; t h e D e p u t y Under Secretary of State for Economic Affairs, Mr. C. Douglas Dillon; and t h e president of t h e E x p o r t - I m p o r t Bank, Mr. Samuel C. Waugh. T h e representatives of t h e French Government have simultaneously conducted similar discussions with t h e International M o n e t a r y F u n d , in Washington, a n d t h e European P a y m e n t s Union, in Paris. All of these discussions were completed today. During t h e discussions t h e French representatives have described t h e financial program which has been adopted by t h e French Government a n d Parliament for t h e purpose of eliminating inflation, achieving equilibrium in t h e French balance-of-payments, and restoring financial stability. This program is described in t h e s t a t e m e n t which has been issued t o d a y by t h e French Government. I n view of t h e financial program adopted by France, t h e European P a y m e n t s Union will extend t o France credits equivalent to $250 million; t h e I n t e r n a t i o n a l Monetary F u n d has agreed to m a k e available to France t h e equivalent of $131,250,000; a n d t h e United States has agreed t o extend t o France certain financial facilities a m o u n t i n g t o $274 million. T h e a m o u n t s to be provided by these three sources total $655,250,000, which 306 1958 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF THE TREASURY will assist the French Government in carrying through the financial program it has adopted. The financial facilities being extended to France by the Government of the United States consist of the following arrangements: Agreement relating to the refunding, at maturity date, of of the next 4 semiannual installments of principal on prior ExportImport Bank loans , $96, 000, 000 Agreement relating to the postponement of 3 annual installments, as to principal and interest, on prior lend-lease and surplus property credits 90, 000, 000 Agreements for the shipment to France of cotton under Pubhc Law 480 and Section 402 of the Mutual Security Act (to be completed) 43,000,000 Agreement for the sale, for francs, of United States military supplies and equipment for French NATO forces in Europe, up t o . - 45, 000, 000 Total 274, 000, 000 The details of the arrangements provided through the European Payments Union and the International Monetary Fund are being announced by the two international institutions. EXHIBIT 39.—Statement by Under Secretary ofthe Treasury Baird, February 18, 1958, before the House Ways and Means Committee in support of the trade agreements program I am very pleased to appear before this committee today in support of H. R. 10368 and H. R. 10369, which would amend and extend present trade agreements legislation. We in the Treasury are especiahy concerned with the trade agreements program's importance to the maintenance of a healthy and expanding domestic economy. We have, of course, a special interest in our domestic economy for the very practical reason that this is the source of the tax revenues with which the Treasury pays the Government's bills. Our foreign trade is an essential source of our economic strength. It has contributed significantly to production and employment in many of our industries. . It has frequently exerted a stabilizing effect on domestic production and employment when demands at home have been declining. We are one of the world's great trading nations. Twenty years ago, when the trade agreements program was getting under way, our exports comprised about 14 percent of the world's total. Today, our exports have grown to more than 20 percent of the world total. In 1957 our exports amounted to about $19H bilhon, which is an increase of almost 60 percent in value and is about half again as large in physical volume, as compared with the corresponding figures for 1953. The sustaining role of our foreign trade in the growth of our domestic economy is revealed in the way it has matched the spectacular growth J n our domestic production and employment. There have been notable achievements in the growth of our gross national product over the past decade, and our foreign trade has consistently expanded at a comparable rate. Approximately 3 million of our workers are now employed, directly or indirectly, in producing goods for export and transporting them to foreign markets. More than 9 percent of the movable goods we produced in 1956 was sold abroad. For agriculture, our foreign sales represented in the fiscal year 1957 between 12 and 13 percent of our total agricultural output. For many of our industries, foreign trade is even more important in our own self-interest than the foregoing broad percentage relationships indicate. To cite a few examples: The proportion of our total production which was exported in 1956 ran about 40 percent for copper sulphate, certain insecticides, tracklaying tractors, and ammonium sulphate; over 30 percent for certain types of construction and mining equipment, complete. civilian aircraft, molybdenum ores and concentrates, and resin; over 20 percent for sulphur and penicillin, carbon black, lubricating oil, petroleum coke, and phosphate rock; 19 percent for motor trucks and coaches; 18 percent for anthracite coal; 16 percent for diesel engines for certain types of tractors and for turpentine; 14 percent for agricultural combines, synthetic rubber and bituminous coal; and 11 percent for EXHIBITS - - 307 machine tools. As any businessman can testify, the course of demand in so sizable a proportion of his market as these percentages represent is likely to have a very important influence on his profits and.on the level of employment he is able to maintain. As the pace of expansion in domestic demand eased off during the past year, the export sales of some commodities continued at a high level. For instance, higher exports of machine tools and metal-working machinery provided a major support to production during the first half of 1957 as shipments to domestic customers declined sharply; during the first 9 months of 1957, cotton, cattle hides, bituminous and anthracite coal, and iron and steel scrap were exported in larger quantities than during a comparable period in the previous year, while domestic demands were declining. It is plain, therefore, that foreign trade is exerting an important sustaining and stabihzing effect on production and employment in this country. Should the markets for our exports decline, this shrinkage would be felt not only by those primarily involved but also by secondary industries, retail trade and service activities in the community. As taxpayers, our citizens have another interest in our foreign trade. The growth and expansion of a mutually beneficial foreign trade has not only permitted our exports to expand but has also enabled many of our free world pa^rtners to build up their economies without dependence upon continuing economic assistance from this country. The last war brought in its wak